
Class. 
Book. 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 



COLLEGIATE COURSE 



IN THE 



FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



BY 

JEAN GUSTAVE K E E T E L, S , 

PBOFESSOB OP FRENCH AND GERMAN IN THE BROOKLYN 
POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE. 




NEW YOEK: 
SHELDON, BLAKEMAIsT, AKD COMPAFT, 

No. 115 NASSAU-STKEET. 

1857. 






TO* 



5 



.*?;* 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1856, by 

SHELDON, BLAKEMAN, AND COMPANY, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
District of New York. 



I: Valkntink, Stereotype* 



JOHN H. RAYMOND, LL.D., 

PRESIDENT OP THE 

BROOKLYN COLLEGIATE AND POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE, 

IN WHOM ABE FOUND UNITED 

THE NOBLEST QUALITIES OF THE HEART, 

WITH A EEFINED TASTE 

AND EAEE LITEEAEY ATTAINMENTS, 

STJfs Volume 

IS OOEDIALLY DEDICATED 

AS A TEIBUTE OF EESPEOT AND BEATITUDE, 

BY 

ITS AUTHOR. 



PREFACE. 



Sevekal years ago, I undertook the task of composing 
a course of lessons in the French language. In the 
present volume, I offer the result of my labor to the 
public. My object has been to prepare a book that 
should teach the living language, and, at the same time, 
the principles which govern its construction. I have 
endeavored to be as practical as is consistent with my 
design, that students should, while acquiring the lan- 
guage, also study its grammar. Words and sentences 
may be learned by heart, without the aid of grammar ; 
but he certainly would labor under great disadvantage, 
who should endeavor to learn a foreign tongue, and re- 
main ignorant of its principles, and the technical terms 
by which grammar designates and explains them: he 
would lose the benefit of a systematic and philosophical 
arrangement, digested and prepared for the purpose. 
But were it otherwise, a course which excludes a sys- 
tematic training in the principles of an art it professes 
to teach, must fail in the important result, which is the 



VI PREFACE. 



aim alike of all branches of education, the disciplining 
of the mind, the developing of its inherent powers. 

The problem, then, which the art of teaching a lan- 
guage proposes is, to combine the theoretical and prac- 
tical, in such a manner, that principle and practice, 
harmoniously and skilfully interwoven, may prompt each 
other, and develop the language gradually before the 
mind of the scholar. In my attempt to solve this pro- 
blem, I have been careful to subordinate the theoretical 
to the practical, so that no fact is set forth, involving a 
principle which has not first been fully explained; and, 
on the other hand, no principle is introduced with which 
the scholar may not at once become practically conversant. 
For this purpose, each lesson is composed of four parts : 
First, the Subject, introducing the principles, with the 
facts which illustrate them; Second, a Vocabulary of 
words, selected so as to suit the subject of the lesson and 
the progress of the scholar, and arranged in such a man- 
ner, that the difficulty of the genders may be overcome 
with comparatively little labor ; Third, a French Exer- 
cise, often assuming the form of a conversation, in which 
the subject-matter of the lesson is rehearsed in various 
ways ; Fourth, an English Exercise, to be translated into 
French. (See Suggestions, p. xi.) 

I state with confidence, that this Course presents a 
more extensive view of the French language thpn anv 



PREFACE. vil 

other published in this country. The grammar part will 
be found more complete than it usually is, in works of 
this kind ; many subjects, otherwise dry and intricate, 
have been treated in a manner which will render them, 
it is believed, both intelligible and interesting to the 
student. The Examples ancl^ Exercises have all been 
framed with a view to practical usefulness: conversa- 
tional language and dialogues are introduced as early as 
the progress of the scholar admits. The distribution of 
the several theoretical parts, and the order in which they 
are arranged and treated, are the result of much study : 
more than six years ago, I began to investigate the road 
which I was to follow ; I have sounded my path step by 
step ; and from the first, I have not ceased reflecting on 
my plan, maturing and reducing it to the form best 
adapted to its purpose. 

I have not wholly relied on my own judgment and 
experience, but have frequently availed myself of the 
opinions of judicious friends ; I would acknowledge, in 
particular, the important service rendered me by Mr. 
Eobert E. Eaymond, Professor of the English Language 
and Literature in the Brooklyn Polytechnic Institute, in 
revising the English portion of the work. 

The present is called "A Collegiate Course in the 
French Language," because designed more particular- 
'y for scholars who are sufficiently advanced in their 



Vlll PREFACE. 



English studies, to understand the technical language 
which an explanation of the principles of grammar re- 
quires ; but it may be used to advantage by all classes 
of students. It is my intention, if the present volume 
meets with approbation, to prepare a shorter work for 
juvenile pupils. 

Teachers and scholars, who intend to use this book, 
are recommended to read the Suggestions which follow. 
They are made after mature reflection ; and the course 
they indicate, will, I am confident, insure the success 
which I wish to all who earnestly seek a knowledge of 
the courteous tongue of France, the foremost exponent 
of modern civilization. 

Jean Gustave Keetels. 

Brooklyn, Oct. 30th, 1856. 



CONTENTS. 



I. — Preface v 

II. — Suggestions to Teachers and Pupils xi 

HI. — Introduction xiii 

(Treating of the Letters, Accents, &c.) 

IV. — Lessons — 1 to 18 1 

V. — Supplement 325 

VI.— Index 360 

(In which all the English words, contained in the Les- 
sons, are arranged in alphabetical order, each with 
a reference to the Lesson in which it first appears.) 



■7 



SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS AND PUPILS. 



The teacher, in giving out the lesson, should read the French, 
and the- pupil should pronounce it after him. When the lesson 
is to be recited, the teacher should ask the English, and the pu- 
pil give the French. When the example illustrates a principle 
or rule, the pupil should refer to the rule, and explain how it is 
applied in the example. 

The words in the Vocabularies should be asked horizontally 
through, and two in succession, of the same pupil, as they are 
placed opposite one another. After the teacher has given the 
English of the first word, the pupil should be required to give 
the French, and also the English and French of the next, so as 
to associate two words in his mind together. For instance: 
Teacher — The brother. Pupil — Le frere ; the sister, la soeur. 
This will not only enable him to remember the words more 
easily, but as the nouns are always placed — masculine on the 
left, and feminine on the right — it will greatly help him in re- 
taining their genders. 

The French Exercises are in the form of conversations, gen- 
erally questions and answers. The teacher should pronounce 
the question, and the pupil, with the book shut, should imme- 
diately repeat and translate it into English. The teacher should 
then give the English of the answer, which the pupil should im- 
mediately translate into French. When the pupil is not suf- 
ficiently prepared to turn the English into French, the teacher 
may give the answer in the same manner as the question. In 
this case, the French Exercise should be recited again at the next 
session, and should be repeated until the pupil is able to turn 
readily the French into English, and the English into French. 
In no case should a new lesson be given out, until the pupils are 
perfectly able to go through with the French Exercise, in the 
manner prescribed. 



Xll SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

The English Exercise is to be translated into French, orally. 
It will be better not to attempt this, during the same session, 
and in connection with the French Exercise; but to leave it 
for the session succeeding the one in which the French Exercise 
has been successfully recited. The pupils may, if the teacher so 
directs (and this is the better plan), translate the English Exer- 
cise into French, in writing. They should, however, not omit to 
recite it orally, and without the help of their written version. 

At each session, a portion of the time should be devoted to re- 
viewing. The necessity of repeating former lessons cannot be 
too much insisted upon. He who wishes to acquire a foreign 
tongue, and learn to speak it, should not rest satisfied with a 
knowledge of the ground he has been over, but should thoroughly 
possess himself of it, and acquire a perfect readiness of utterance, 
which can only be secured by frequent repetitions. After the 
regular lesson has been recited, the Vocabularies of the preceding 
two lessons should always be reviewed, and a few new sentences 
construed by the pupils, at the suggestion of the teacher, in 
which the words of these Vocabularies are incorporated. 

Many abortive attempts are made to learn a foreign language, 
and, in very many cases, the want of success is attributable to the 
injudicious course of hurrying on, with but an imperfect know- 
ledge of what precedes. This, in the end, creates confusion and 
dislike ; and, finally, the pursuit is given up in despair, and is 
hardly ever resumed with the same spirit and confidence with 
which it was at first undertaken. Let it be remembered that 
the knowledge we seek, is not to be found merely at the end of 
the book ; it lies in our path — we must gather it as we go along. 
Let the pupil proceed in his course, steadily and perseveringly — 
go through with it thoroughly, and this method will teach him 
to read, write, and speak the French language. 



INTRODUCTION. 



§ I. — Letters, — Accents, &c. 

(a.) The French Alphabet has twenty-five letters. 

Six are vowels : a, e, », o, u, y. 

Nineteen, consonants : b, c, d, f, g, h, j, Jc, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, 2, 
#, x, z. 

(b.) There are three accents : the aaefe ( ' ), the grave ( N ), the 
circumflex ( A ). 

(c.) The acute accent is placed over e (e). Thus accented, it 
has the sound of the English a ; as de, the. 

Kem. 1. — An initial e, forming a syllable by itself, has always 
the acute accent ;* as, ecu, Sieve, epee ; but not when it is pro- 
nounced with the following consonant ; as, ennemi, exemple. 

Eem. 2. — E, preceding ge, has the acute accent ; as, cortege, 
protege. 

(d.) The grave accent is used : 

1st. To distinguish from one another certain words spelled 
alike ; as, a, to, at, from a, has ; la, there, from la, the, her ; 
otr, where, from ou, or ; des, as soon, from des, of the. 

2d. Over e, preceding any consonant (except g, see Eem. 2), 
followed by e unaccented; as, eleve, premiere ; also before two 
consonants, when both belong to the unaccented syllable ; as, 
regie, espiegle. 

3d. Over the e of the termination es, when the s is an essen- 
tial part of the word ; as, apres, excds, to distinguish it from the 
accidental termination es ; as, les livres, tu chantes. 

(e.) The circumflex accent indicates the suppression of a letter, 
generally s ; as, patre, etre* tete, paitre, or e ; as, eperdument. 

* Etke is an exception to (a), Rem. 1. 



XIV INTRODUCTION. 

(/.) The cedilla ( s ) is put under c (c) before a, o, u, to indi- 
cate that it has the sound of s ; as, facade, macon, recu. 

(g.) The diceresis or trema ( • • ) is placed over a vowel which 
begins a new syllable after another vowel ; as, naif, Mo'ise. 

(h.) The apostrophe ( ' ) indicates the suppression of a vowel 
before another vowel or silent h ; as, Vami, for le ami ; Vhomme, 
for le homme. 

(i.) The hyphen ( - ) is used to connect the different parts of a 
compound word ; as, arc-en-ciel. 

§ II. — Vowels, — Pure or Simple Sounds, — Nasal Sounds. 

(a.) The vowel sounds are pure or nasal : pure, when the 
vowel has its proper sound, as when it is pronounced by itself; 
nasal, when it is pronounced in conjunction with m or n. 

(b.) A pure vowel sound is called a simple sound, which is 
long, when, in pronouncing it, the voice dwells on it, and short, 
when it is passed over rapidly. 

a is long in dme, and short in ami. 

e is long in des, t&te, and short in de. 

i is long in epitre, and short in petite. 

o is long in motion, and short in mode. 

u is long in flute, and short in culbute. 

(c.) There are three kinds of e's : 

1st. The acute ; as in verite, donner, donnez. 

2d. The grave, or long ; as in module, meme. 

3d. The unaccented ; as in je, le, me, livre, homme. This last 
is also called mute, or silent e. 

(d.) Y, after a consonant, is found only in words derived from 
the Greek, and has the sound of i ; as, physique, style ; after a 
vowel, it is equivalent to double i ; as, moyen, pays, pronounced 
moi-ien, pai-is. 

(e.) Simple sounds are also produced by the combination of 
two or more letters. Some combinations have the sound of a 
simple vowel, others represent sounds different from the simple 
vowels. The following are the various simple sounds and their 
representatives : 



INTRODUCTION. XV 

A, as — cdmarade, ami, patte — pate, patre, las, tds. 

e, ai, er, ez — verite, gai, donnerai, donner, donnez. 

e, e, es, ai, ais, ei, et — des, fete, meSy aimer, mais, Seine, 

secret. 
e — -je, te, me, demande, paiement, livre. 
eu, eu — -feu,jeu,jeune (young), jeune (fast). 
I, y — midi, gite, sy metric - 

o, au, eau — dot, mode — dos, mot, chaud, tableau. 
u, eu — bu, tu, vu, eu, feus, eurent. 
ou — mou, cou, couteau. 

§ III. — Nasal Sounds. 

(a.) There are four nasal sounds : an, in, on, un. 

Their representatives are : 

am, an, ean, em, en — vampire, dans, Jean, empereur, enfant. 

aim, ain, ein, im, in— f aim, pain, sein, impie, vin. 

om, on — ombre, onde. 

um, un — parfum, aucun. 

(b.) These combinations are nasal only, when they are final 
or followed by any consonant but m or n. "When they are fol- 
lowed by a vowel, the m or n is carried to the next syllable, and 
the preceding vowel has its proper sound ; as, inhumanite, 
inutile, unique, pronounced i-nhu-ma-nite, i-nutile, u-nique. 

(c.) In words having m or n doubled, the first m or n is silent ; 
commode, suffisamment, femme, paysanne, are pronounced co- 
mode, suffisa-ment, fa-me, paysa-ne. 

(d.) In words having mm, preceded by i, the two m's are 
sounded ; as, immanquable, immense, immoler, &c. ; also in 
Ammon, Emmanuel, ammoniac, commotion, commuer, and de- 
rivatives. 

(e.) Emmener, emmaillotter, are pronounced en-mener, en~ 
maillotter. 

(/.) Envirer, enorgueillir, ennui, and derivatives, are pro- 
nounced an-nivrer, an-norguillir, an-nui. 

(g.) Solennel, hennir, indemniser, and derivatives, are pro- 
nounced sola-nel, ha-nir, inda-niser. 



XVI INTRODUCTION. 

(A.) In annales, annexes, inne, innover, the two n's are 
sounded. 

(i.) In some words, derived from foreign languages, em and 
en are pronounced erne, £ne ; as, Jerusalem, hymen, amen, 
Eden, &c. 

§ IV. — Diphthongs. 

(a.) A diphthong is a syllable composed of two simple vowel 
sounds, which are both sounded. 

(b.) The accented e and a vowel sound do not constitute a 
diphthong, but form two syllables ; as, fie-au, obe-ir : see also § I., 
on the use of the diwresis. 

(c.) The vowel sounds, i, o, ou, u, followed by other vowel 
sounds, form diphthongs ; as, with 

i — di-amant, bi-ais, mi-en, piti-e, bi-ire, fi-ole, reli-ure, li-eu, 
li-on, chi-ourme, 

o — mo-elle, fo-i, so-in. 

ou — ou-est, fou-et, lou-ai, ou-i, Rou-en, ou-ate. 

u — equ-ateur, ecu-elle, lu~i,ju-in, 

§ V. — Remarks on the Vowels. 

A is silent in aout, aoriste, Sadne, taon. 

Ai has the sound of mute e mfaisant, and of a in douairidre. 

Ais has the sound of e in je sais, tu sais, il sait (I know, &c). 

The mute e in monosyllables is sounded ; at the end of poly- 
syllables and after a vowel, it is silent; as in lame, paiemenL 
Between two consonants, it serves to form the syllable ; as, de- 
mander, samedi, pronounced d'mander, sam'di. 

I is silent in oignon, moignon, poignard, poignee. 

is silent in faon, Laon, paon. 

Oi is pronounced like £ in roide. 

U, followed by a vowel, is generally silent after g and q ; as, 
prodigue, guide, qui, que, quand ; but 'it is sounded in the com- 
pounda of aigu ; as, aigue, aiguille, aiguiser, and in arguer, 
cigue, sanguinaire ; also in the Latin words equestre, equitation, 
liquifier, &C. 

TJ is sounded like ou in aquatiquc, equuleur, quadrature, &c. 



INTRODUCTION. XV11 

§ VI. — Consonants at the Beginning- and in the Middle 
of a Word. 

Most consonants, when they begin a syllable, are sounded as 
in English. 

Exceptions. 

(a.) C and g before e, i, y, have the hissing sound, the former 
of c in citron, the latter of s in pleasure ; as, celeste, citron, 
cygne — general, gilet, gymnase. 

(b.) C and g before a, o, u, have the palatal sound of Tc, and 
of g in gate ; as, canal, colon, curieux — galant, gobelet, gutteral. 

Rem. 1. — When c and g are to retain then soft sounds before 
a, o, u, the c takes the cedilla, and between g and a, o, u, a mute 
e is inserted ; as, facade, macon, recu — manger, George, gageure. 

Rem. 2. — and g before u, followed by e or i, are slightly 
liquid ; as, ecneil, cuiller — gue, Guillaume. 

Rem. 3. — C has the sound of g in second, secretaire, and de- 
rivatives, sounded segond, &c. 

Ch is pronounced as sh in most French words ; as, charme, 
chose, &c. ; it is pronounced as k in some Greek and Hebrew 
words ; as, Christ, Archange, chaos, anachronisme, chorus, echo, 
orchestre, Cham, Antiochus, archontes, eucharistie, chrysalide, 
chr^tien, Chaldee, Michel-Ange, Chalcedoine, scholie, Cherso- 
nise, &c. 

Gn has a liquid sound, as in the word mignonette ; as, agneau, 
besogiie, montagne, incognito, &c. ; exceptions are : stagnant, 
regnicole, agnat, magnat, diagnostic, inexpugnable, ignicoU, agnus, 
enigme, &c, which are pronounced stag-nant, &c. 

H is mute or aspirate. It is aspirated in the following words 
and their derivatives : 

Hableur, hache, hagard, haie, haillons, haine, hair, haire, holer, 
halle, hallebarde, halte, hamac, hanche, hanneton, hanter, harangue, 
haras, harasser, harceler, hardes, hardi, hareng, hargneux, haricot, 
haridelle, harnais, harpe, harpie, harpon, hasard, hater, hausser, 
haut, hautbois, havre-sac, hennir, heraut, herisser, hHre, heurter, 
hibou, hideux, hierarchie, homard, honte, horde, hotte, houblon, 



XVI11 INTRODUCTION. 

houille, houlette, houppe, houppelande, huppe, hure, hurler, 
hussar d. 

L, preceded by i (il), not initial, is liquid, like ill in brilliant ; 
as, ceil, peril, soleil, bataille, paille, fille, &c. Exceptions : fil, 
mil, mille, ville, pupille, codicile, &c. 

Q is always followed by u ; qu is sounded like Jc ; as, quality 
For exceptions, see § V., letter u. 

B. The two r's are sounded in erreur, horreur, terreur, &c, 
and in the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir, courir, 
mourir ; as, facquerrai, je courrai, je mourrai, &c. 

S has two sounds. Its proper sound is the hissing sound of s 
in serf; its accidental sound, that of z, as 5 in muse. 

S, between two vowels, has the sound of z ; as, rose, maison, 
voisin. 

/S, beginning a word, always retains its proper sound, though 
in compounds, a word ending with a vowel may be prefixed to 
it ; as in vraisemblahle (yrai-semblable). 

Ss, between two vowels, has always the hissing sound of s ; 
as, poisson, croissant. 

Sch is sounded like sh ; as, schisme. 

T is sounded like c, in the combinations tial, tiel, tion, final or 
in the middle of a word; as, partial, essentiel, nation; except 
when it is preceded by s or x ; as in question, mixtion. 

T has always the sound of c in words ending, in English, in 
cy ; as, aristocratie, diplomatie ; in names of countries ; as, Dal- 
matie, Egyptien, and in some other words in which it has also 
the soft sound in English ; as, patient, initier, &c. 

Th is sounded like t ; as, the, theologie, lithographie. 

X initial is sounded like gz ; as, Xavier, Xenophon ; also in 
ex initial, when followed by a vowel ; as, examen, exemple. 

X is sounded like Jcs, in Alexandre, maxime, Aix-la-chapelle. 

X is sounded like double s, in soixante, six, dix, Bruxelles, 
Auxonne, Aix-en- Provence. 

X is sounded like z, in deuxieme, sixieme, dixieme, dix-huit, &c. 



INTRODUCTION. XIX 

§ VII. — Final Consonants. 
A final consonant is generally silent. 

Exceptions. 

Final b is sounded in radoub, rhomb. 

Final c is sounded, except in cotignac, estomac, lacs, broc, eric, 
marc, pore, tabac, and after the nasal sounds, as blanc, banc, 
franc, <fec. 

Final / is sounded ; as, ceuf, boeuf, chef, nef &c. ; except in 
cerf, cerf volant, clef, oeuffrais, ceuf dur, boeuf gr as, nerfde boeuf, 
chef-d'oeuvre, and in the plural words, ceufs, boeufs, nerfs. 

Final I is sounded, except in baril, chenil, coutil, fusil, gril, 
nombril, outil, persil, soul, sourcil, and in gentil not followed by 
a vowel or silent h ; also in fils (son) and pouls (pulse). 

M is silent in damner, condamner, automne. 

P is silent in compter, dompter, exempt, prompt, sept, septieme, 
bapteme, and derivatives, except in baptismal. 

Final q is sounded, as cinq. 

Final r, preceded by e, is silent, except in fer, cher, amer, bel- 
veder, cancer, cuiller, ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 

Final s is sounded in some words ; as in aloes, as, atlas, cens, 
cholera-morbus, chorus, dervis,fils (son), foetus, gratis, iris,jadis, 
laps, ma'is, mars, ours, prospectus, rebus, Bheims, Rubens, sinus, 
en sus, vasistas ; it is also sounded in moeurs, manners, vis, screw, 
os, bone, to distinguish them from meurs, die, vis, saw, and eau, 
water. S is sounded in sens, but not in sens commun ; in J6sus, 
but not in Jesus- Christ ; in lis, but not in fleur de lis ; in plus 
que and plusqueparfait, but otherwise it is silent in plus. 

Final t is sounded in deficit, granit, gratuit, subit, transit, ze- 
nith, net, tacet, toast, sept, huit, vingt ; and in dot, dowry, brut, 
rough, fat, fop, rapt, rape, to distinguish them from dos, back, 
bru, mother-in-law, fa (in music), rat, rat. 

Final ct are both sounded in correct, tact, abject, exact, direct, 
infect, strict ; but c alone is sounded in respect, aspect, circon- 
spect, suspect. 

T is sounded in Christ, but is silent in Jesus- Christ. 

Final x is sounded like double s ; as, six, dix, &c, 



XX INTRODUCTION. 

§ VIII. — Peculiarities of Utterance. — Final Consonants 
before Vowels. 

There is no stress or accent by which one syllable, in pro- 
nouncing, is distinguished from another ; hence there is no sink- 
ing of the voice, which sustains itself to the end of the word or 
sentence, when, emitting at once the whole unspent volume of 
breath, the last syllable, if masculine,* and the penult, if the last 
is feminine,* is uttered more strongly than any preceding. The 
want of energy, resulting from the absence of stress, is compen- 
sated by greater smoothness ; for the voice is thereby enabled to 
glide without effort from one word to another ; and when the 
connection between the words is immediate, the organs of speech 
begin to articulate the new word from the position in which the 
last uttered sound left them. Two peculiarities result from this 
mode of uttering. The first is, that a final consonant is often si- 
lent before another consonant, as its pronunciation would, by the 
contraction of the organs, impede the voice in the process of ar- 
ticulating the next consonant. Thus, cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, 
dix, when followed by a consonant, are pronounced : cin, si, se, 
hui, neu, di. The second is, that a final consonant, when it pre- 
cedes a word beginning with a vowel or silent h, is generally 
carried to the next syllable, and pronounced with it ; as, Vous 
allez apprendre une nouvelle agrgable, is pronounced : Vou-zalU- 
zapren-drhme nouvel-Vagr gable. 

In public speaking and reading, this connection between a 
final consonant and the following vowel always takes place, ex- 
cept, however, in a few cases when it would produce a discordant 
sound. 

In conversation, and in ordinary reading, the final consonant 
is sounded with the next vowel only when the connection be- 
tween the words is immediate, as between the article, adjective 
and noun, the pronoun and verb, &c. In other cases, when a 
pause of the voice would be allowed between the words, the 

* A syllable, in French, is masculine when it is pronounced, and feminine when it is 
silent. Feminine syllables end in «, es, ent. This last ending is feminine only in the 
third person plural of verbs. 



INTRODUCTION. XXI 

connection does not take place. Vous aimez a lire, is pro- 
nounced : Vou-zaime a lire. 

A harsh or unpleasant sound is always to be avoided ; thus, 
avant hier is pronounced avan-ier, rather than avan-tier. Mais 
Us ont, — me il-zon ; though we pronounce mais il a, — me-zi-la. 

The final n of the nasal sounds, is sounded with the next vowel 
only, when the words are closely connected ; as, mon^ami, cer- 
tain^auteur, on^ignore. But we say, without connection, mon 
cousin est venu ; du vin ton a boire. 

Final t, preceded by another consonant, is not often carried to 
the next vowel : un effort etonnant, is pronounced u-efor eton* 
nant. The t of the conjunction et, is never pronounced. 

It is further to be observed that, 
Final c, before a vowel, is sounded like h ; as, du blanc au noir> 

" d, " " t ; as, quand il. 

" /, " " v ; as, neuf heures. 

" g, u " k ; as, rang eleve. 

u 8 or s, " " z ; as, Us ont deux enfants* 



FRENCH COURSE. 



1. PREMIERE LEgOK 

1 , The French language has only two genders : the mascu- 
line, for the names of males, and the feminine, for the names 
of females. 

Words, having no relation to one sex or the other, have the 
masculine or feminine gender assigned them by custom. Thus, 
livre, book, and fruit, fruit, are masculine ; and lecon, lesson, and 
pom?ne, apple, feminine. 



2. The article and adjective agree in gender and number with 
the noun. 

The article the is le for the masculine, and la for the fem- 
inine ; as, 

Masculine. Feminine. 

The book Le livre. The lesson. La lecon. 

The fruit Le fruit. The apple. La pomme. 

The glass. Le verre. The cup. La tasse. 



3* Adjectives, not ending in e mute (Introd. § 2, c), add e for 

the feminine ; as, 

Smally little. Petit 

The small glass. he petit verre. 

The small cup. La petite tasse. 

First. Premier. 

The first book. Le premier livre. 

The first lesson, ha, premiere lecon (Intr., § 1, d), 



2 PREMIERE LE£0N. 

4« I. Have (1st pers. sing.). Je. Ai. 

Eemark 1. — Monosyllables ending in e mute, drop this vowel 
before another vowel or silent h (Intr., § VI. h), and take an 
apostrophe in its place : as, 

I have. J'ai. 



You. Have (2d pers.). 
You have. 



Vous. Avez. 
Vous avez. 



Rem. 2. — When the pronoun subject stands after the verb, it 
is joined to it by a hyphen ; as, 



Have I ? 

Have you? 

Have you the glass ? 

Yes, sir. No, sir. 

Yes, sir ; I have the glass. 

No, sir ; I have the cup. 



Ai-je? 

Avez- vous ? 

Avez-vous le verre ? 

Oui, monsieur. Non f monsieur, 

Oui, monsieur; j'ai le verre. 

Non, monsieur ; j'ai la tasse. 



VOCABULAIRE 1. 

(The left-hand side in the Vocabularies is reserved for masculine, and the right for 
feminine nouns. See Suggestions, p. xi.) 



The book. 






Le livre. 


The lesson. 


La lecon. 


The bread ; 


the loaf. 


Le pain. 


The meat. 


La viande. 


The fruit. 






Le fruit. 


The apple. 


La pomme. 


The glass. 






Le verre. 


The cup. 


La tasse. 


Small, little. 


Petit. 


Large, tall, great. 


Grand. 


First, 






Premier. 


Last. 


Dernier. 


I. 






Je. 


You. 


Vous. 


Have (1st pers. 


sing.). 


Ai. 


Have (2d pers. plur.). 


Avez. 


Yes. 






Oui. 


No. 


Non. 


Sir. 






Monsieur. 


Madam, Mrs. 


Madame. 



EXERCICE 1. 

1. Avez-vous le pain ? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai le pain. 3. Avez- 
vous la viande ? 4. J'ai la viande. 5. Avez-vous le livre ? 6. J'ai 
le livre. 7. Avez-vous le premier livre ? 8. J'ai le premier livre. 



SEC0NDE LE^OK. 3 

9. Avez-vous la premiere lecon? 10. J'ai la premiere lecon. 
11. Avez-vous le dernier fruit? 12. J'ai le dernier fruit. 13. 
Avez-vous la derniere pomme? 14. J'ai la derniere pomme. 
15. Avez-vous le verre? 16. J'ai le verre. 17. Avez-vous la 
tasse? 18. J'ailatasse. 19. Avez-vous le petit verre ? 20. J'ai 
le petit verre. 21. Avez-vous la petite tasse? 22. J'ai la petite 
tasse. 23. Avez-vous le grand verre ? 24. J'ai le grand verre. 
25. Avez-vous la grande tasse ? 26. ISTon, madame ; j'ai la petite 
tasse. 27. Ai-je la premiere lecon? 28. Oui, monsieur; vous 
avez la premiere lecon. 



Theme 1. 

1. I have the glass. 2. Have you the cup? 3. Yes, sir; I 
have the cup. 4. Have you the meat? 5. No, sir; I have the 
bread. 6. Have you the lesson? 7. I have the first lesson. 
8. Have you the last fruit ? 9. I have the last apple. 10. Have 
I the small glass? 11. No, sir; you have the large glass. 12. 
Have you the small cup ? 13. No, madam ; I have the large cup. 



2, DEUXIEME LEQON. 

5 o The determinative adjectives, possessive, demonstrative, 
indefinite and numeral, agree, in gender and number, with the 
noun which they precede. 

My (possessive adjective). Mon, fern. ma. 

My book. My lesson. Mon livre. Ma lecon. 

Your (possessive adj.). Yotre (for both genders). 

Your book. Your lesson. Votre livre. Votre lecon. 

"What, which (indefinite adj.). Quel, fern, quelle. 

What or which glass ? Which cup ? Quel verre ? Quelle tasse ? 



My money. Mon argent (masc). 

Your coat. Yotre habit (masc). 

Which plate ? Quelle assiette ? (fern.). 



4 DEUXIEME LEgON. 

6, (a.) The article, in the singular, drops the vowel (a 01 e) 
before another vowel or silent h ; as, 

The money. L'argent. 

The coat. L'habit. 

The plate. L'assiette. 

(b.) Instead of ma, mon is used before a vowel or silent h ; as, 

My plate. Mon assiette. 



7» Not Ne. . . .pas. 

Rem. — In a negative sentence, the particle ne always precedes 
the verb, and pas, or some other negative word, is placed after 
the verb. 



I have not. 
You have not. 
Have I not ? 
Have you not ? 
Have you not my 


pretty plate ? 


Je n'ai pas. (See 4, Rem. 1.) 

Yous n'avez pas. 

N'ai-je pas? 

N'avez- vous pas ? 

N'avez-vous pas ma jolie assiette ? 


VOCABULAIRE 2. 

The lead-pencil. Le crayon. The pen ; the feather. La plume. 
The paper. Le papier. The letter. La lettre. 
The coat. L'habit. The dress ; the gown. La robe. 
The money; the silver. L'argent. The coin; the change. La monnaie 
The dish. Le plat. The plate. L'assiette. 


My. 

What, which. 

Pretty. 


Mon, ma. 
Quel, quelle. 
Joli. 


Your. Votre. 
Not. Nc.pas. 
Ugly. Vilain. 




EXERCICE 2. 



1. Avez-vous votre crayon? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai mon cra- 
yon. 3. Avez-vous votre plume ? 4. J'ai ma plume. 5. Quel 
livre avez-vous ? 6. J'ai votre livre. 7. Quel papier avez-vous ? 
8. J'ai mon vilain papier. 9. Quelle lettre ai-je? 10. Vous 
avez ma lettre. 11. Avez-vous l'argent? 12. J'ai l'argent. 



TROISIEME LECON. 5 

13. Ai-je ma monnaie? 14. Vous avez votre monnaie. 15. 
Avez-vous l'habit ? 16. Je n'ai pas l'habit. — 17. Quel habit ai- 
je? 18. Yous avez lejoli habit. 19. Avez-vous 1' a ssiette? 20. 
Je n'ai pas l'assiette. 21. Ai-je niou assiette? 22. Yous n'avez 
pas votre assiette. 23. Quelle assiette ai-je? 24. Yous avez 
rna jolie assiette. 25. Quelle robe ai-je? 26. Yous avez ma 
vilaine robe. 27. Avez-vous mon joli plat? 28. Non, madame ; 
je n'ai pas votre joli plat. 



Theme 2. 

1. I have your lead-pencil. 2. Have you my pen ? 3. I have 
not your pen. 4. Which paper have you ? 5.1 have my pretty 
paper. 6. Have I my letter? 7. You have not your letter, 
8. Have I the money? 9. You have the money. 10. Have I 
the coat? 11. You have the ugly coat. 12. What dress have 
you? 13. I have the pretty dress. 14. Have you not your 
change? 15. Yes, sir; I have my change. 16. Have you not 
my plate ? 17. No, madam ; I have my pretty dish. 



3. TROISIEME LEgOK 



8. 



What? (pronoun). 


Que? 




"What have you? 


Qu'avez-vous ? (4, Kem. 1. 


What have I? 


Qu'ai-je? 




What have I not? 


Que n'ai-j 


e pas? 


Who ? Whom ? 


Qui? 




Has. 


A. 




Who has my pen? 


Qui a ma 


plume ? 


The man has your pen. 


L'homme 


a votre plume. 


He. She. 


II. 


Elle. 


He has. She has. 


Ha. 


Elle a. 


He has not. She has not. 


H n'a pas. 


Elle n'a pas. 



TROISIEME LEgON. 



Eem. — In interrogative sentences, the letter t, between two 
hyphens (-£-), is inserted, for euphony, between the verb and the 
pronoun of the third person singular, in those tenses in which the 
third person ends with a vowel. 

Has he ? Has she ? A-t-il ? A-t-elle ? 

Has he not ? Has she not ? ]^'a-t-il pas ? K'a-t-elle pas ? 

What has he ? What has she ? Qu'a-t-il ? Qu'a-t-elle ? 



10i His, her (possessive adj.). 
His brother, her brother. 
His sister, her sister. 
And. Also, too. 
He has his knife and his fork. 
Has he also his plate ? 



Son, fern. sa. (5.) 

Son frere. 

Sa soeur. 

Et. Aussi. 

II a son couteau et sa fourchette. 

A-t-il aussi son assiette. (6, b.) 



11* This, that (demons, adj.). Ce, cet, fern, cette. (5.) 

Ce is used before a masculine noun beginning with a conso- 
nant ; cet, before a masculine noun beginning with a vowel or 
silent h. 



This gentleman, that gentleman. 
This man, that man. 
This lady, that lady. 
What has that man ? . 



Ce monsieur. 
Cet homme. 
Cette dame. 
Qu'a cet homme ? 



12. The article and determinative adjectives must be repeated 
before each noun, and also before each adjective with which a 
noun is understood ; as, 

Le couteau et la fourchette. 
Quel couteau et quelle fourchette? 
Ce couteau et cette fourchette. 
Son chapeau et sa cravate. 



The knife and fork. 
Which knife and fork? 
This knife and fork. 
His hat and cravat. 

The first and second lessons. 



j La premiere et la seconde lecon. 
(La premiere lecon et la seconde. 



Hem. — The adjective is frequently used without the noun, to 
avoid repetition. The word one, following the adjective, is not 
expressed. 



TROISIEME LEgON. 



Which knife? 
Which fork? 



The small one. 
The large one. 



Quel couteau ? 
Quelle fourchette ? 



Le petit. 
La grande. 



VOCABULAIRE 3. 



That gentleman. Ce monsieur. 
That man. Cet homme. 

His (her ;) brother. Son frere. 
My hat, my bonnet. Mon chapeau. 
Your knife. Yotre couteau. 



That lady. Cette dame. 

That woman or wife. Cette femme. 
His (her) sister. Sa soeur. 

My cravat. Ma cravate. 

Your fork. Votre fourchette. 



Who? whom? 


Qui? 


What? 


Que? 


He, she. 


11, elle. 


Has. 


A. 


This, that. 


Ce, cet> cette. 


His, her. 


Son, sa. 


And. 


Et. 


Also, too. 


AussL 



EXERCICE 3. 

1. Qu'avez-vous ? 2. J'ai mon chapeau. 3. Qu'ai-je? 4. 
Vous avez votre couteau. 5. Que n'ai-je pas? 6. Vous n'avez 
pas votre fourchette. 7. Qui a mon chapeau ? 8. L'homme a 
votre chapeau. 9. A-t-il le couteau? 10. H a le couteau et le 
chapeau. 11. A-t-il aussi la cravate? 12. Non, M.; il n'a pas 
la cravate. 13. Qui a la cravate? 14. La femme a la cravate. 
15. A-t-elle ma fourchette? 16. Elle a votre fourchette et 
votre cravate aussi. 17. Qu'a-t-il? 18. II a son chapeau. 19. 
Qu' a-t-elle? 20. Elle a son couteau et sa fourchette. 21. Qu'a 
ce monsieur? 22. II a sa monnaie. 23. Qu'a cette dame? 
24. Elle a sa robe. 25. Qu'a votre frere ? 26. H a son livre et 
son crayon. 27. Qu'a votre soeur? 28. Elle a son verre. 29. 
A-t-elle son assiette ? 30. Elle a son assiette et sa fourchette 
aussi. 31. Quel plat avez-vous ? 32. J'ai le grand. 33. Quia 
le petit? 34. Ma soeur a le petit. 35. A-t-elle la petite tasse? 
36. Oui, madame ; elle a la petite et la grande aussi. 



Theme 3. 

1. What knife have you? 2. I have my pretty knife. 3. 
What have you? 4. I have my hat and cravat. 5. WTiat 



8 QUATRIEME LECON. 

have I ? 6. You have your knife and fork, 7. What have I 
not ? 8. You have not your pen and paper. 9. Who has my 
hat? 10. That gentleman has your hat. 11. Who has your 
cravat? 12. That lady has my cravat. 13. What has that 
man? 14. He has his knife and fork. 15. What knife and 
fork has he? 16. He has the small knife and (the small)* fork. 
17. Who has the letter? 18. His brother has the letter and 
the money also. 19. What has that woman ? 20. She has her 
bonnet. 21. Has she also the fruit? 22. No, sir; her sister 
has the fruit. 23. Have you the large cup ? 24. Yes, madam ; 
I have the large and the small one also. 



4. QUATEIEME LE£OK 

13. In an interrogative sentence, the noun subject is placed 
before the verb, and a personal pronoun, agreeing with the sub- 
ject in gender and number, after it ; as, 

Has the man? (The man has he?) IShomme a-t-il? 

Has the boy his fork ? Le gargon a-t-il sa fourchette ? 

Has the girl her bonnet ? La fille a-t-elle son chapeau ? 

Rem. — When the sentence begins with an interrogative pro- 
noun or adverb, the noun subject may either precede or follow 
the verb. 

What has the boy? Wa le gargon? or 

J (he gargon qu a-t-il ? 



14 • Mine, my own (poss. pron.). Le mien, fern, la mienne. 

Yours, your own (poss. pro?i.). Le v6tre, fern, la y6tre. 

His, hers (poss. pron.). Le sien, fern, la sienne. 

Which one (absolute pronoun). Lequel, fern, laquelle. 

* Words in parentheses, not printed in italics, must be expressed in French, though 
they may be omitted in English. 

Words in parentheses, printed in italics, are not to be expressed in French, but may 
be used in English. 



QUATRIEME LEgON. 



Rem. — Pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun 
which they represent. 



"Which knife has the servant ? 
"Which one has he ? 
He has mine, yours, his (hers). 
"Which fork has he ? 
"Which (which one) has he ? 
Mine, yours, his (hers). 
Or. Neither > nor. 
Yours or mine. 
Neither yours nor mine. 
He has neither yours nor mine. 



Quel couteau le domestique a-t-il ? 

Lequel a-t-il? 

II a le mien, le v6tre, le sien. 

Quelle fourchette a-t-il? 

Laquelle a-t-il? 

La mienne, la votre, la sienne. 

Ou. Ni. .(w)* (See % Rem.) 

La y6tre ou la mienne. 

NI* la votre ni la mienne. 

II n'a ni la votre ni la mienne. 



15, Adjectives ending in e mute are the same for both gen- 
ders; as, 



The young man. 
The young girL 
The honest boy. 
The honest girl. 



he jeune homme. 
La jeune fille. 
Uhonnete garcon. 
Uhonnete fille. 



VOCABULAIRE 4. 



The father. 

The son. 

The nephew. 

The boy ; the waiter, 

The servant. 

The horse. 



Le pere. 
Le fils. 
Le neveu. 
Le garcon. 
Le domestique. 
Le cheval. 



The mother. 
The daughter ; 
The niece. 



the girl. 



La mere, 
La fille. 
La niece. 



m , ., , f La servante. 

The maid-servant. \ T , 

( La domestique. 

The saddle. La selle. 



Young. 
"Which one. 
Mine. 
Or. 



Jeune. 

Lequel, laquelle. 

Le mien, la mienne. 

Ou. 



Honest. 
Yours. 
His, hers. 
Neither, .nor. 



HonnSte. 
Le votre, la votre. 
Le sien, la sienne. 
Ke. .ni. .ni. 



EXERCICE 4. 

1. L'homme a-t-il votre cheval ? 2. Non, M. ; il a le votre. 
3. Quel cheval son fils a-t-il? 4. II a le sien. 5. Lequel 

* When the verb is not expressed, ne is not used. (7, Rem.) 
1* 



10 QUATRIEME LE£ON. 

avez-vous ? 6. J'ai le mien. 7. Qui a votre selle, le pere ou le 
fils? 8. Le pere a la rnienne. 9. Quelle selle le fils a-t-il? 
10. II a la sienne. 11. Laquelle avez-vous ? 12. J'ai la votre. 
13. La fille a-t-elle votre robe? 14. Non, madame; elle a la 
sienne. 15. Qui a la votre? 16. Ma mere a la mienne. 17. 
Quel chapeau ce jeune homme a-t-il? 18. II a le sien. 19. 
Qu'a votre neveu? 20. II a sa plume. 21. Yotre niece qu'a- 
t-elle ? 22. Elle a son crayon. 23. Ce garcon a-t-il votre cou- 
teau ou le mien ? 24. II n'a ni le votre ni le mien ; il a le sien. 
25. Cette jeune fille a-t-elle votre tasse ou la mienne? 26. 
Elle n'a ni la votre ni la mienne ; elle a la sienne. 27. Qu'a cet 
honnete garcon? 28. II a sa pomme. 29. Qui a la lettre? 
30. Le domestique a la lettre. 31. La servante qu'a-t-elle? 
32. Elle a le pain. 33. A-t-elle aussi la viande? 34. Elle a la 
viande aussi. 35. A-t-elle le plat ou le verre? 36. Elle n'a ni 
le plat ni le verre. 



Theme 4. 

1. Has your father your horse? 2. He has not mine, he has 
his own. 3. Which horse has your brother ? 4. He has yours. 
5. Which one has your servant? 6. He has mine. 7. Has 
your nephew my saddle ? 8. He has not yours, he has his own. 
9. Which one have you? 10. I have mine. 11. What has 
that honest man ? 12. He has his money. 13. What has his 
son ? 14. His son has his book. 15. Has your niece the letter ? 
16. No, sir; her mother has the letter. 17. Who has the 
fruit? 18. This young girl has the fruit. 19. Has the maid- 
servant the dish or the cup ? 20. She has neither the dish nor 
the cup. 21. Has the boy your coat or mine? 22. He has 
neither yours nor mine. 23. Which one has he ? 24. He has 
his own. 25. Has your brother my cravat or yours? 26. He 
has neither yours nor mine. 27. Which one has he? 28. He 
has his own. 



CINQUIEME LEgON. 



11 



5. CINQUIEME LEQON. 
Plural of Nouns, Adjectives, etc. 

16. The plural of nouns, adjectives, and most pronouns, 
formed by adding s to the singular ; as, verre, plural verves. 



is 



The 



(plural). (2.) Les (for both genders). 



My 


tt 


(5.) 


Mrs 


Your 


it 


(5.) 


Vos 


His, her 


tt 


(10.) 


Ses 


These, those 


it 


(10.) 


Ces 


What, which 


11 


(5.) 


Quels, fern, quelles. 


"Which, which ones 


tt 


(14.) 


Lesquels, fern, lesquelles. 


Mine 


tt 


(14.) 


Les miens, fern, les miennes. 


Yours 


tt 


(14.) 


Les .votkes (for both genders). 


His, hers 


it 


(14.) 


Les siens, fern, les siennes. 



The glasses. The cups. 
My small glasses. 
Your large cups. 
His pencils and pens. 
These (those) pencils and pens. 
Which pencils ? Which ? 
Mine. Yours. His, hers. 
Which pens ? Which ones ? 
Mine. Yours. 
His, hers. 



Les verres. Les tasses. 

Mes petits verres. 

Yos grandes tasses. 

Ses crayons et ses plumes. 

Ces crayons et ces plumes. 

Quels crayons ? Lesquels? 

Les miens. Les v6tres. Les siens. 

Quelles plumes ? Lesquelles ? 

Les miennes. Les v6tres. 

Les siennes. 



17. (a.) Nouns ending in the singular in s, #, or 0, remain 
unchanged in the plural ; as, 



The son, the sons. 
The nut, the nuts. 
The nose, the noses. 
The bad pencil. 
The bad pencils. 
The bad nuts. 



Le jils, les fils. 
La noix, les noix. 
Le nezy les nez. 
Le mauvais crayon. 
Les mauvais crayons. 
Les mauvaises noix. 



(b.) Nouns in au and eu add x in the plural ; as, 

The knife, the knives. Le couteau, les couteaux. 

The nephew, the nephews. Le neveu, les neveux. 



12 



CINQUIEME le^ox, 



(c.) Nouns in at change al into aux in the plural ; as, 

The horse, the horses. Le ckeval, les chevaux. 

The general, the generals. Le general, les generaux. 

(d.) "Words of more than one syllable ending in nt, may either 
retain or drop the t in the plural ; as, 

The child, the children. JJenfant f les en/ants, or enfans. 





VoCABULAIKE 5. 




The wood, the forest. 


Le bois. 


The nut. 


La noix. 


The nail. 


Le clou. 


The pin. 


L'epingle. 


The thread. 


Lefil. 


The needle. 


L'aiguille. 


The salt. 


Le sel. 


The salt-cellar. 


La saliere. 


The pepper. 


Le poivre. 


The mustard. 


La moutarde. 


The child. 


L'enfant. 


The nursery-maid. 


La bonne. 



Bad. 



Mauvais. Wicked, bad, worthless. Mechant. 



EXERCICE 5. 

1. Avez-vous les tasses? 2. Non, M.; j'ai les verres. 3. 
Avez-vous mes verres? 4. Je n'ai pas vos verres. 5. Quels 
verres avez-vous ? 6. J'ai les petits verres. 7. Qui a les grands ? 
8. Ma niece a les grands. 9. Lesquels a-t-elle? 10. Elle a 
les siens. 11. Avez-vous les votres ou les miens? 12. J'ai les 
miens. 13. Quelles tasses avez-vous ? 14. J'ai les petites. 15. 
Qui a les grandes? 16. Mon neveu a les grandes. 17. Les- 
quelles a-t-il les votres ou les miennes? 18. II n'a ni les votres 
ni les miennes, il a les siennes. 19. Qu'a l'enfant? 20. II a le 
bois et la noix. 21. Qui a les petits clous et les petites epingles ? 
22. Le domestique a les clous, et la bonne a les epingles. 23. 
La fille a-t-elle Paiguille ? 24. Elle a Faiguille, et elle a le fil 
aussi. 25. Qu'a la servante? 26. Elle a la jolie saliere. 27. 
N'a-t-elle pas aussi le sel? 28. Elle a le sel aussi. 29. Qui a 
le poivre? 30. Le domestique a le poivre, et il a la moutarde 
aussi. 31. Qu'a ce mechant garcon? 32. II a les mauvaises 
noix. 33. Qu'a cette mechante servante? 34. Elle a ses mau- 



SIXIEME LECON. 13 

vais couteaux. 35. Qui a les chevaux ? 36. Le domestique a les 
chevaux. 37. A-t-il les chapeaux ? 38. II n'a pas les chapeaux ? 



Theme 5. 

1. What has the servant? 2. He has the wood and the nail, 
3. Has your sister the thread? 4. She has the thread, and 
she has the needle also. 5. Y\Tiat has the waiter? 6. He has 
the pepper, and he has also the mustard. 7. "Who has the salt- 
cellar ? 8. The girl has the salt-cellar, and she has the salt also. 
9. Has the child the pin? 10. Xo, sir; he has the nails. 11. 
Who has the children? 12. The nursery-maid has the chil- 
dren. 13. Has the servant the plates ? 14. Xo, sir ; he has the 
dishes ? 15. Has he my dishes ? 16. He has not yours, he has 
mine. 17. Which dishes has he? 18. He has the small ones. 
19. Which ones have you? 20. I have the large ones. 21. 
Has the girl my plates or yours? 22. She has neither yours 
nor mine. 23. WTrich ones has she? 24. She has her own. 
25. What has that wicked boy? 26. He has his bad knives 
and his bad nuts. — 27. His father has the horses of (de) those 
generals. 



6. SIXIEME LEfOX. 

18, Thou. Thou hast. Hast thou? Tu. Tu as. As-tu? 
Thy (possessive adj.). Ton, ta, tes. 

Thtxe ( possessive pron.). Le tiex, les tiexs, fern, la tiexxe ; 

LES TIEXXES. 

Thou hast thy book, thy pen, thy Tu as ton liyre, ta plume, tes cray- 

pencils. ons. 

Thou hast thine. Tu as le tien, la tienne, les tiens. 

Rem. — The second person singular is much used between pa- 
rents and children, and among intimate friends, 



14 



SIXIEME LE£ON. 



19. We. We have. Have we? Nous. Nous avons. Avons-nous? 

Our (possessive adj.). Notre, nos. 

Ours (possessive pron.). Le n6tre, la n6tre; plur. for both, 

les notres. 

We have our carriage, our horses. Nous avons notre voiture, nos che- 

vaux. 

Have we not ours ? N'avons-nous pas la ndtre ? les no- 

tres ? 



20. They. 
They have. 

Their (possessive adj.). 
Theirs (possessive pron.). 

Have those men their money? 

Have those women theirs ? 

Have your nephews their books or 

ours ? 
They have theirs. 



Ils, fern, elles. 

lis ont. Elles ont. 

Leur, leurs. 

Le leur, la leur ; plur. for both, 

LES LEURS. 

Ces hommes ont-ils leur argent ? 
Ces femmes ont-elles le leur ? 
Vos neveux ont-ils leurs livres ou 

les n6tres? 
Ils ont les leurs. 



21. 



Present Tense of Avoir, to have. 



I have, thou hast, he has. 
We have, you have, they have. 



J'ai, tu as, il a. 

Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. 



22. Good. 
The good thread. The good needle. 
The good nails. The good pins. 

Big, coarse, large. 
The coarse thread. 
The coarse needle. 
The big stick. The big canes. 
The large egg. The large oxen. 
The large paper. Th e coarse paper. 



Bon, fern, bonne. 

Le bon fil. La bonne aiguille. 

Les bons clous. Les bonnes epingles. 

Gros, fern, grosse. 

Le gros fil. 

La grosse aiguilles. 

Le gros baton. Les grosses Cannes. 

Le gros oeuf. Les gros boeufs. 

Le grand papier. Le gros papier. 



VOCABULAIRE 6. 



My uncle. 
My cousin. 
The coachman. 



Mon oncle. 
Mon cousin. 
Le cocher. 



My aunt. 

My cousin (fern). 

The carriage, vehicle. 



Ma tante. 
Ma cousine 
La voiture. 



SIXIEME LEgON. 15 

The whip. Le fouet. The bridle. La bride. 

The stick. Le baton. The cane. La canne. 

The countryman. Le paysan. The countrywoman. La paysanne. 

The vegetable. Le legume. The potato. La pomme de terre. 

The egg. L'ceuf. The salad. La salade. 

The ox, the beef. Le bceuf. The cow. La vache. 



Good. 


Bon, bonne. 


Big, coarse, large. Gros, grosse. 


Thou. 


Tu. 


Hast. As. 


Thy. 


Ton, ta, tes. 


T , . ( Le tien, les tiens. 

( La tienne, les tiennes. 






We. 


Nous. 


Have (1st pers. pi.). Avons. 


Our. 


Notre, nos. 


Ours. Le n6tre, la n6tre, les n6tres. 


They. 


Us, elles. 


Have (3c? pers. pi). Ont. 


Their. 


Leur, leurs. 


Theirs. Le leur, la leur, les leurs. 



ExERCICE 6. 

1. Avons-nous notre argent? 2. Nous avons notre argent et 
nos lettres. 3. Quel fouet avons-nous ? 4. Nous avons le' notre. 
5. Avons-nous notre bon fouet? 6. Nous avons notre bon 
fouet et notre bonne bride. 7. Le cocher a-t-il nos chevaux? 
8. II a les notres. 9. Vos neveux ont-iis leur voiture ou la vo= 
tre? 10. Hs ont la leur. 11. Qu'a votre garcon ? 12. H a son 
gros baton. 13. Yotre tante qu'a-t-elle? 14. Elle a le gros fil. 
15. Vos cousins qu'ont-ils? 16. lis ont leurs grosses Cannes. 
17. Qu'ont nos cousines? 18. Elles ont leurs crayons et leur 
papier. 19. Qu'a ce paysan? 20. II a son bceuf. 21. Qu'a 
cette paysanne? 22. Elle a sa vache. 23. Qui a l'ceuf et la sa- 
lade? 24. Votre cousin a l'ceuf, et votre cousine a la salade. 
25. Qu' avons-nous ? 26. Nous avons notre bon bceuf et nos 
bonnes pommes de terre. 27. Ces paysans qu'ont-ils ? 28. lis 
ont leur voiture et leurs bceufs. 29. Qu'ont ces jeunes paysan- 
nes? 30. Elles ont leurs ceufs et leurs legumes. — 31. Mon cou- 
sin, as-tu ta canne? 32. J'ai la tienne. 33. Quels livres as-tu? 
34. J'ai tes livres. 35. Qui a les tiens? 36. Mes soeurs ont 
les miens. 



16 SEPTIEME LEgON. 

Theme 6. 

1. Have we our carriage ? 2. We have ours. 3. What has 
our coachman? 4. He has his good whip. 5. Has he our 
horses ? 6. He has ours. 7. Which bridle has our uncle ? 8. 
He has his good bridle and his big stick. 9. Have my nephews 
our good pencils? 10. No, sir; they have their pencils and pa- 
per. 11. Who has our canes? 12. Your cousins have yours. 
13. Which canes have we? 14. We have their big canes. 
15. What has your aunt? 16. She has the coarse thread and 
needles. 17. Have our cousins (fiem.) their carriage or ours? 
18. They have theirs. 19. Has the countryman his ox? 20. 
He has his ox and his cow. 21. What have we? 22. We 
have our good beef. 23. Who has the egg and the salad ? 24. 
Your cousin has the egg, and I have the salad. 25. What has 
that countrywoman? 26. She has her eggs and vegetables. 
27. Have those countrymen their oxen? 28. Their sons have 
their oxen. 29. We have their good potatoes, and they have 
our good money. 



7. SEPTIEME LECON. 

23. There are four classes or conjugations of verbs, distin- 
guished by their infinitive-endings. 

The verbs of the first conjugation end in er ; as, 

To ask or ask for, to inquire for. Demander, (root demand, ending er.) 

To wish for, to desire. Desirer, ( " desir, " er.) 

To look for, to seek. Chercher, ( " cherch, " er.) 

To find. Trouver, ( " trouv, " er.) 



24. The terminations for the indicative present, are : e, es, e, 
onSj ez, ent. 

To form the present tense, add these terminations to the root 
of the verl >- 



SEPTIEME LEC.ON. 

Indicative Present of Demander, 



17 



Sing, je demande, I ask or ask for, 
tu demandes, thou askest, 
il demande, he asks. 



Pltir. nous demandons, we ask, 
vous demandez, you ask, 
Us demandenty they ask. 



25. Demander, desirer, chercher, trouver, are transitive verbs. 
Transitive verbs require no preposition before trie noun which is 
the direct object of their action. 



I ask for the bread. 
He wishes for the fruit. 
She is looking for the book. 



Je demande le pain. 
II desire le fruit. 
Elle cherche le livre. 



26. In French, the present tense has only one form. The 
English compound forms, I am asking, I do ask, are expressed 
simply hjje demande. 

We are looking for our books. Nous cherchons nos livres. 

We do not find our pens. Nous ne trouyons pas nos plumes. 

This gentleman is inquiring for the Ce monsieur demande le domesti- 
servant. que. 



27. Indicative Present of Demander — Interrogative Form. 



Sing, demande-je ? do I ask ? 

demande s-tu ? dost thou ask ? 
demande-t-il $ does he ask? 



Plxjr. demandons-nous ? do we ask ? 
demandez-vous ? do you ask ? 
demandent-ils ? do they ask ? 



28 • Something, any thing. 
Nothing ', not any thing. 
Does your sister ask for any thing ? 

She does not (ask for any thing). 

Do you find any thing ? 

No, nothing. 

What are you looking for ? 

Whom do you seek ? 

For whom do you inquire ? 

What does that lady wish for ? 



Quelque chose, (masc. noun.) 

JVe. . . .rien, " " 

Votre soeur demande-t-elle quelque 

chose ? 
Elle ne demande rien. 
Trouvez-vons quelque chose ? 
Non, rien. (See note, p. 9.) 
Que cherchez-vous ? 
Qui cherchez-vous? 
Qui demandez- yous ? 
Que desire cette dame? 



18 



The butter. 
The milk. 
The vinegar. 
The coffee. 
The tea. 
My friend. 



SEPTIEME LE£ON. 
VOCABULAIRE 7. 



Le beurre. 
Le lait. 
Le vinaigre. 
Le cafe. 
Le the. 
Mon ami. 



The oil. 
The cream. 
The cruet. 
The coffee-pot. 
The teapot. 



L'huile. 
La creme. 
La burette. 
La cafetiere. 
La theiere. 



My friend, (fern.) Mon amie. 



• Demander. 



To ask, to ask for. 

To inquire for. 

To look for, to seek. Chercher. 



Something. ) 
Any thing. ) 



Quelque chose. 



To wish for, to desire. Desirer. 
To find. Trouver. 

Nothing, not any thing. Rien (ne). 



ExERClCE 7. 



1. Deinandez-vous quelque chose ? 2. Je demande la burette. 
3. Que desirez-vous ? 4. Je desire le vinaigre et Thuile. 5. 
Cherchez-vous le sel ? 6. Je cherche le sel, le poivre et la mou- 
tarde. 7. Que trouvez-vous ? 8. Je ne trouve rien. 9. Qui 
demande le beurre ? 10. Ce monsieur demande le beurre et le 
lait. 11. Qui desire les legumes? 12. Mon ami desire les le- 
gumes et le boeuf. 13. La fille ne trouve-t-elle pas la cafetiere ? 

14. Elle ne cherche pas la cafetiere, elle cherche la theiere. 

15. Qui demande le domestique? 16. Mon pere demande le 
domestique. 17. Que demande cette dame ? 18. Elle demande 
le cafe et la creme. 19. Que desire votre ami? 20. II desire 
les ceufs. 21. Votre soeur cherche-t-elle son amie? 22. Non, 
M. ; elle cherche ma mere. 23. Votre cousin demande-t-il le 
the? 24. II demande le the et le lait. 25. Que demandons- 
nous? 26. Nous ne demandons rien. 27. Desirez-vous quelque 
chose? 28. Nous desirons le fruit. 29. Cherchons-nous nos 
crayons? 30. Nous cherchons les notres, et ils cherchent les 
leurs. 31. Que demandent ces hommes? 32. Ils demandent 
leur argent. 33. Qui ces messieurs demandent-ils ? 34. Ils de- 
mandent le cocher. 



HTTITI&ME LEgON. 19 

Theme 7. 

1. What do you ask for? 2. I ask for the butter. 3. Do 
you wish for any thing ? 4. I do not wish for any thing. 5. 
My friend wishes for the vinegar and the oil. 6. Are you look- 
ing for your hat ? 7.1 am looking for my hat and cane. 8. 
Do you not find your cane ? 9.1 find neither my cane nor my 
hat. 10. Does that lady ask for the milk? 11. She asks for 
the milk and the tea. 12. Who wishes for the coffee ? 13. My 
friend wishes for the coffee and the cream. 14. Does your mo- 
ther ask for any thing ? 15. She asks for the teapot, and the 
girl is looking for the coffee-pot. 16. For whom do you inquire ? 
17. We inquire for our friends. 18. Does your cousin find 
the pens? 19. He finds his, we find ours, and they find theirs. 
20. Are you looking for something? 21. We are not looking- 
for any thing. 22. What do those children wish for ? 23. They 
wish for that fruit. 24. Whom are those gentlemen (messieurs) 
seeking ? 25. They are seeking their friends. 



8. HUITIEME LEgOK 

29. Ci or la is affixed, with a hyphen, to the noun following 
ce, cet, cette, ces, in order to express relation of place, as this and 
that do in English. Ci points out the nearer, and la the more 
distant object; as, 

This fruit. That fruit. Ce fruit-a. Ce fruit-Jo. 

This carriage. That carriage. Cette voiture-a. Cette voiture-Za. 

These gloves. Those gloves. Ces gants-d. Ces gants-£«. 



30. This one, this, (de?n. pron.) Celui-ci, fern, celle-ct. 

These, (demonstrative pron.) Ceux-ci, fern, celles-ct. 

That one, that, " Celui-la, fern, celle-la. 

Those, Ceux-la, fern, celles-la, 



20 



HUITIEME LE£ON. 



31 • To buy. 
Do you buy this or that vest ? 
I buy this one. 
Does your brother buy this or that 

watch ? 
He buys that one. 
Do your sisters buy these or those 

gloves ? 
They buy neither these nor those. 

To love) to like; to be fond of. 
We love our friends ; do you love 
yours ? 



Acheter. (70, a.) 

Achetez-vous ce gilet-ci ou celui-ld ? 

Machete celui-ci. (Intr. § I, d.) 

Votre frere achete-t-il cette mon- 
tre-ci ou celle-la ? 

II achete celle-la. 

Vos soeurs achetent-elles ces gants- 
ci ou ceux-la ? 

Elles n'achetent ni ceux-ci ni ceux- 
la. 

Aimer. 

Nous aimons nos amis ; aimez-vous 
les v6tres % 



32 • But (conjunction). 
I have the thread, but not the J'ai le fil, mais je n'ai pas l'aiguille. 

needle. 
I buy the cloth, but not the silk. 
But, only, nothing but (adverb). 
Do you buy nothing but the cloth \ 
I buy nothing but the cloth ? 
Have you but that cane ? 
I have only this one. 



J'achete le drap, mais pas la soie. 
Ne. . . .que. 

N'achetez-vous que le drap ? 
Je n'achete que le drap. 
N'avez-vous que cette canne-la ? 
Je n'ai que celle-ci. 



VOCABULAIRE 8. 



The vest. 


Le gilet. 


The glove. 


Le gant. 


The cloth. 


Le drap. 


The satin. 


Le satin. 


The shoe. 


Le Soulier. 


The wine. 


Le via 



The frock-coat. 
The watch. 
The stuff. 
The silk. 
The boot. 
The beer. 



La redingote. 
La montre. 
L'etoffe. 
La soie. 
La botte. 
La biere. 



Best. 

This one. 

These. 

To buy. 

But, (conjunc.) 



Meilleur. 
Celui-ci, celle-ci. 
Ceux-ci, celles-ci. 
Acheter. 
Mais. 



Excellent. 



Excellent. 



That one. Celui-la, celle-la. 

Those. Ceux-la, celles-la. 

To love, to like. Aimer. 
But, only, nothing ) „ 
but, (adverb.) ) 



.que. 



HUITIEME LEC/ON. 21 

EXERCICE 8. 

1. Qu'achetez-vous ? 2. J'achete ce gilet. 3. Achetez-vous 
ce gilet-ci ou celui-la? 4. J'achete celui-la. 5. Yotre frero 
achete-t-il cette redingote-ci ou celle-la ? 6. H n'achete ni celle- 
ci ni celle-la. 7. Qu'achete-t-il? 8. II achete le gros drap. 
9. Yotre soeur achete-t-elle le satin et la soie? 10. Elle achete 
la soie, mais pas le satin. 11. Votre cousin qu'achete-t-il? 12. 
II achete ces gants. 13. Lesquels desire-t-il, ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? 
14. II desire ceux-la. 15. Yos neveux achetent-ils les bottes 
ou les souliers? 16. lis achetent les bottes. 17. Lesquelles 
achetent-ils, celles-ci ou celles-la? 18. Us n'achetent ni celles-ci 
ni celles-la. 19. Qu' achete votre cousine? (13, Eem.) 20. Elle 
achete cette grosse etoffe. 21. Achetons-nous lemeilleur satin? 
22. ISTous achetons le meilleur. 23. Ces messieurs ont-ils les 
meilleurs gants ? 24. Us ont les meilleurs. 25. Qui a la meil- 
leur e montre ? 26. Mon oncle a la meilleure. 27. Achete-t-il 
quelque chose? 28. II achete cet excellent vin. 29. Achete- 
t-il aussi l'excellente biere ? 30. II achete le vin, mais pas la 
biere. 31. N'achete-t-il que le vin ? 32. II n'achete que le vin. 
33. Aimez-vous votre oncle? 34. J'aime mon oncle et ma 
tante. 35. Qui aimez-vous ? 36. Nous aimons nos amis. 37. 
Cherchez-vous votre canne ou la mienne? 38. Je cherche la 
votre et la mienne, mais je ne trouve que la mienne. 39. ISPavez- 
vous que cette canne-la ? 40. Je n'ai que celle-ci. 



Theme 8. 

1. What do you buy? 2. I buy thisyest and that frock-coat. 
3. Does your brother buy this or that cloth ? 4. He buys the 
best cloth. 5. Does your sister buy this or that silk ? 6. She 
buys this. 7. Does she also buy the satin ? 8. She buys the silk, 
but not the satin. 9. Does she not buy this good stuff? 10. 
~No, sir; she buys nothing but the silk. 11. Do you buy these 
or those gloves? 12. We buy neither these nor those. 13. Do 
you buy those coarse shoes? 14. We do not buy the shoes, we 
buy the coarse boots. 15. Do your cousins buy the wine? 16. 
They buy the fruit, but not the wine. 17. Do they not buy 



22 NEUVIEME LEgON. 

that excellent wine? 18. No, sir; they buy nothing but the 
fruit. 19. Do you buy any thing? 20. I buy nothing, but my 
friend buys that watch. 21. Whom do you love? 22. I love 
my friends; do you not love yours? 23. We k>ve ours, and 
they love theirs. 24. Do you like that beer? 25. I neither 
like the beer nor the wine. 26. Have you your best gloves? 
27. I have only these. 



9. NEUVIEME LEQON. 

Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects — 3d Pers. 

33 • The personal pronouns of the third person, when they 
are the direct objects of the verb, are : 

Him, it. Le ){le and la elide the vowel before 

Her, it. La ) another vowel or silent h.) 

Them. Les, (for both genders.) 

These pronouns are placed before the verb ; as, 

Are you looking for your brother ? Cherchez-vous votre frere ? 

I am* (looking for him). Je le cherche. 

Do you not find the spoon ? Ne trouvez-vous pas la cuiller ? 

I do not. * Je ne la trouve pas. 

Have you it ? Have you it not ? L'avez-vous. Ne l'avez-vous pas. 

I have it. I have it not. Je l'ai. Je ne l'ai-je pas. 

Have I it ? Have I it not ? L'ai-je ? Ne l'ai-je pas ? 

Who has it ? Qui Fa ? 

That man has it. Cet homme Pa, 

Has he it ? Has he it not ? L'a-t-il ? Ne l'a-t-il pas ? 

He has it. He has it not. II l'a. II ne l'a pas. 

Have we it ? L'avons-nous ? 

Have these children it ? Ces enfants l'ont-ils ? 

He is looking for his gloves ; have II cherche ses gants ; les avez-vous ? 

you them ? 

I have them not. Je ne les ai pas. 

We have them not. Nous ne les avons pas. 

Those men have them. Ces hommes les ont. 

* In French, it is necessary to complete the sentence. 



NEUVIEME LEgON. 



23 



34 1 The article is used before nouns taken in a general sense ; 



as, 



Do you like fruit $ 

Are you fond of fruit ? 

Much, very much. 

I like it much. 

I am very fond of it. 

How. 



1 Aimez-vous le fruit ? 

Beaucoup* 
(. Je l'aime beaucoup. 



Comment 



Eem. — Instead of saying " how do you like .... F 9 the French 
say " how do you find .... P 



How do you like the coffee ? 

I like it very well. 

How do like you those preserves ? 

I like them very much. 

To cut, to cut off. 

To cut up, to carve. 

I cut the bread and the meat. 

"Who cuts up the chicken ? 

My brother does. 



Comment trouvez-vous le cafe ? 
Je le trouve bon. 

Comment trouvez-vous ces confi- 
tures ? 
Je les trouve excellentes. 
Couper. 
Decouper. 

Je coupe le pain et la viande. 
Qui decoupe le poulet ? 
Mon frere le decoupe. 



VOCABULAIRE 9. 



My neighbor. Mon voisin. 

The goblet, the mug. Le gobelet. 
The sugar. Le sucre. 



The chicken. 
The cake. 

To cut, to cut off. 
Him, it ; her, it. 
Much, very much. 



Le poulet. 
Le gateau. 

Couper. 
Le; la. 
Beaucoup. 



My neighbor, {fern.) Ma voisine. 
The spoon. La cuiller. 

The preserve or } La confiture or 
preserves. ) les confitures. 

The poultry, fowl. La volaille. 
The flour, the meal. La farine. 



To cut up, to carve. 

Them. 

How. 



Decouper. 
Les. 

Comment. 



Exercice 9. 

1. Qui demande le domestique? 2. Mon pere le demande. 
3. Qui cherche le voisin? 4. Mon ami le cherche. 5. Que 



* Beaucoup is never strengthened by another adverb. 



24 NEUVIEME LEgON. 

cherchez-vous ? 6. Je eherche nia canne. 7. La trouvez-vous ? 
8. Je ne la trouve pas. 9. Qui nos voisins cherchent-ils ? 
10. lis cherchent leurs fils. 11. Les trouvent-ils ? 12. lis ne 
les trouvent pas. 13. Cherchez-vous votre gobelet? 14. Je le 
cherche. 15. L'avez-vous? 16. Je Fai. 17. Avez-vous ma 
cuiller? 18. Je ne l'ai pas. 19. Votre voisine Pa-t-elle ? 20. 
Elle ne l'a pas. 21. Quil'a? 22. Mon voisin l'a. 23. Qu'ai- 
je? 24. Vous avez sa cuiller. 25. L'ai-je? 26. Yous l'avez. 
27. Avons-nous nos gobelets? 28. Nous ne les avons pas. 
29. Qui les a? 30. Ces homines les ont. 31. Aimez-vous le 
sucre ? 32. Je ne l'aime pas beaucoup. 33. Votre soeur aime- 
t-elle les confitures ? 34. Elle les aime beaucoup. 35. Aimez- 
vous la volaille ? 36. Nous Faimons beaucoup. 37. Comment 
trouvez-vous ce poulet? 38. Je le trouve bon. 39. Comment 
votre voisine trouve-t-elle ces confitures? 40. Elle les trouve 
excellentes. 41. Comment trouvez-vous la farine? 42. Je la 
trouve bonne. 43. Coupez-vous le gateau? 44. Je coupe le 
gateau, et mon frere decoupe le poulet. 



Theme 9. 



1. Do you look for your neighbor? 2. I do (look for him). 
3. Do you find him ? 4. I do not. 5. Who is inquiring for my 
sister ? 6. My neighbor (fern.) is inquiring for her. 7. Do you 
find your goblet? 8. I do not. 9. Have you it? 10. I have 
it not. 11. Have you your spoon? 12. I have it. 13. Has 
your sister your watch ? 14. She has it not. 15. Who has it? 
16. My cousin has it. 17. Have we the preserves? 18. We 
have them not. 19. Who has them? 20. Our neighbors have 
them, and they have the sugar also. 21. Do you buy the flour ? 
22. I do not ; I buy the cake. 23. Are you fond of cake ? 24. 
Yes, I am. 25. Do you cut it? 26. Yes, I do. 27. How do 
you like that cake? 28. I like it very well. 29. Do you cut 
up the fowl? 30. My uncle does. 31. Do you like poultry? 
32. I am very fond of it. 33. How do you like that chicken? 
34. I like it very much. 35. I like these preserves very much. 
(Place the adverb immediately after the verb.) 



DIXIEME LEpON, 



25 



35. 

I am, thou art, he is. 

We are, you are, they are. 



10. DIXIEME LEgOK 

Present Tense of the verb Etre, to be. 



Je suis, tu e$, il est. 

Nous sommes, vous etes, ih sont. 



36. Where. Here. There. 
Where are you \ 
I am here. 

Where is your brother ? 
He is there. 

On, upon. Under. In. 
Where is your pen ? 
It lies (is) on the table. 
Where are your books f 
They are under the sofa. 
Where are you ? 
We are in the yard. 



Ou. IcL La. 

Ou etes-vous ? 

Je suis ici. 

Ou est votre frere % 

II est la. 

Sur. Sous. Dans. 

Ou est votre plume ? 

Elle est sur la table. 

Ou sont vos livres ? 

lis sont sous le canape. 

Ou etes-vous ? 

Nous sommes dans la cour. 



37« Handsome, beautiful, fine. 

New. 
Old. 



Beau, bel, fern, belle. 
Nouveau, nouvel, fern, nouvelle 
Vieux, vieil, fern, vieille. 



Beau, nouveau, vieux, are used before masculine nouns begin- 
ning with a consonant ; bel, nouvel, and either vieux or vieil, be- 
fore masculine nouns beginning with a vowel or silent b. 



The beautiful horse, 

The beautiful horses. 

The handsome man. 

The handsome men. 

The handsome woman. 

The handsome women. 

The new horse. The new friend. 

The old coat. 

The new servant. 

The old servant. 



Le beau cheval. 

Les beaux chevaux. 

Le bet homme. 

Les beaux hommes. 

La belle femme. 

Les belles femmes. 

Le nouveau cheval. Le nouvel ami 

Le vieux or vieil habit. 

La nouvelle servante. 

La vieille servante. 



Very. 

That young lady is very amiable. 

Fruit is very scarce. 

Flour is very dear. 



Tres. 

Cette demoiselle est tres-aimable. 

Le fruit est tres-rare. 

La farine est tr&a-chere. 



26 


dixieme LE90X. 






VOCABULAIRE 10. 




The garden. 


Le jar din. 


The yard. 


La coor. 


The bookseller. 


Le libraire. 


The young lady. 


La demoiselle, 


The general. 


Le general. 


The war. 


La guerre. 


The broth. 


Le bouillon. 


The soup. 


La soupe. 


The chocolate. 


Le chocolat. 


The water. 


L'eau. 


The sofa. 


( Le canape^ or 
\ le sofa. 


The table. 


La table. 


Where. 


Ou. 


In. 


Dans. 


Here. 


Ici. 


There. 


La. 


On, upon. 


Sur. 


Under. 


Sous. 


Handsome, fine. 


Beau y bel, belle. 


Amiable. 


Aimable. 




j Nouveau, nou- 
( vel, nouvelle. 


Old. 


j Vieux, vieily 
\ vieille. 


r^lew. 


Rare, scarce. 


Rare. 


Dear. 


Cher. 


Very. 


Tres. 


Very much. 


Beaucoup. 




Exercice 10. 





1. Ou etes-vous? 2. Je snis ici. 3. Ou est votre soeur? 4. 
Elle est la. 5. Ou est votre frere % 6. II est dans le jardin. 7. 
Ou sommes-nous ? 8. Nous sommes dans la com*. 9. Mes en- 
fants, ou etes-vous ? 10. Nous sommes ici, sur le canape. 11. 
Ou sont mes gants? 12. Vos gants sont la, sous le sofa. 13. 
Comment trouvez-vous ce bouillon? 14. Je le trouve excellent. 
15. Comment votre tante trouve-t-elle notre soupe ? 16. Elle la 
trouve tres-bonne. 17. Aimez-vous le chocolat? 18. Je ne 
l'aime pas beaucoup. 19. Aimez-vous cette petite demoiselle? 
20. Nous Paimons beaucoup, elle est tres-aimable. 21. Le vieux 
general aime-t-il la guerre? 22. II aime beaucoup la guerre. 
23. Votre nouveau cheval est-il beau? 24. II est jeune et beau. 
25. Votre nouvel ami est-il ici? 26. Non, M. ; il n'est pas ici. 
27. Achetez-vous ce beau gilet? 28. J'achete le beau gilet, le 
bel habit et la belle redingote. 29. Ou sont vos vieux habits? 
30. Les domestiques les ont. 31. Comment trouvez-vous nos 
nouveaux chevaux ? 32. Je les trouve beaux. 33. Ces vieUles 
dames achetent-elles quel que chose? 34. Elles achetent ces 
belles robes. 35. Ou est l'eau ? 36. L'eau est sur la table. ?". 



ONZIEME LECON. 

Le libraire est-il ici ? 38. Non, M. ; il n'est pas ici. 
est-il clier ? 40. II est tres-rare et tres-cher. 



21 
39. Le fruit 



Theme 10. 

1. Are you in the garden? 2. No, I am in the yard. 3. 
Where is the bookseller ? 4. He is there. 5. Are you not our 
friends? 6. We are your friends, but we are not theirs. 7. 
Where are your -papers ? 8. They are on the sofa, under rny 
hat. 9. How do you like your broth ? 10. I like it very well. 
11. Are you fond of soup ? 12. I am very fond of it. 13. How 
does this young lady like the chocolate ? 14. She likes it very 
much. 15. Our new horse is young and beautiful. 16. The old 
general is very fond of war. 17. His new horses are neither very 
large [grand) nor very young, but they are beautiful. 18. My 
new friend has a handsome coat. 19. My old clothes lie (are) 
on the sofa. 20. My new neighbor (fern.) is very pretty and very 
amiable. 21. The old lady buys that handsome coffee-pot, 22. 
Where is the tea? 23. It* is in the teapot. 24. Where is the 
water? 25. It* stands (is) on the table. 26. Oranges (orange, 
fern.) are very dear. 27. They are very scarce at present (a 
present). 



38. 



11. ONZIEME LEgOK 

Numeral AnjECTivES.f 



One, also a or an. 


Un, fern. une. 


First, 


Premier. 


Two. 


Deux. 


Second. 


Second or Deuxieme. 


Three. 


Trois. 


Third. 


Troisieme. 


Four. 


Quatre. 


Fourth. 


Quatrieme. 


Five. 


Cinq. 


Fifth. 


Cinquieme. 


Six. 


Six. 


Sixth. 


Sixieme. 


Seven. 


Sept. 


Seventh. 


Septierne. 


Eight. 


Huit. 


Eighth. 


Huitienie. 


Nine. 


Neuf. 


Ninth. 


Neuvieme. 


Ten. 


Dix. 


Tenth. 


Dixieme. 


Eleven. 


Onze. 


Eleventh. 


Onzieme. 


Twelve. 


Douze. 


Twelfth. 


Douzieme. 



* It is masculine or feminine, according to the gender of the noun which it rep- 
resents. (14, Rem.) t For Lists of numeral adjectives, see p. 331. 



28 



ONZIEME LECON. 



39 • Of, fkom. 
A glass of water. 
A cup of coffee. 
A piece of bread. 

A piece of ten cents, a ten-cent piece. 
Have you the eighth lesson ? 
No, sir ; we have the eleventh. 
Same. Other. 
Has your sister the same lesson. 
She has not the same. 
The book is in the other room. 



De. 

Un verre d'eau. 

Une tasse de cafe. 

Un morceau de pain. 

Une piece de dix sous. 

Avez-vous la* huitieme lecon ? 

Non, M. ; nous avons la* onzieme. 

Meme. Autre. 

Votre sceur a-t-elle la meme lecon? 

Elle n'a pas la meme. 

Le livre est dans l'autre chambre. 



Ni Vun ni Vautre, &c. 



C Hun et V autre, fern. Vune et V autre. 
40 • The one and the other, both. < Les uns et les autres, fern, les unes 

( et les autres. 
Neither the one nor the other. 
Neither. 
Have you the first or the second Avez-vous le premier ou le second 

book ? livre ? 

I have both. J'ai l'un et l'autre. 

I have neither. Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. 

Rem. — Instead of saying " the first two" the French say " the 
two first" <fcc. 



We have the first two books. 



Nous avons les deux premiers livres. 



Will you have f Do you wish for? 
Will you have a glass of water ? 
Yes, sir, if you please. 
Do you wish for a cup of coffee ? 
No, sir, / thank you. 



Voulez-vous ? (Desirez-vous ?) 
Voulez-vous un verre d'eau ? 
Oui, M., s'il vous plait. 
Desirez-vous une tasse de cafe? 
Non, M., je vous remercie. 



II. Sir, Mr. 

Gentlemen, Messrs. 

Mrs., Madam. 

Miss. 

Ladies. Youug ladies. 



Monsieur, abbrev. M. 

Messieurs, " MM. 

Madame, " Mme. 

Mademoiselle, " Mile. 

Mesdames. Mesdemoiselles. 



* Before huit, huitUme, onze, onzieme, no elision takes place. 



0NZIEME LECOST. 



29 



Rem. — In addressing a person, it is respectful to prefix mon- 
sieur, madame, mademoiselle, to the names of his or her kindred ; 
as, monsieur voire pere, madame voire mere, mademoiselle voire 
soeur. 



The apartment. 
The floor. 
The bench. 
The handkerchief. 
The ham. 
The morsel, bit, ) 
piece. ) 

The cent. 

"Will you have ? 
To thank. 
A or an. 
Same. 

The one and the ) 
other. ) 



VOCABULAIRE 11. 



L'appartement. 
Le plancher. 
Le banc. 
Le mouchoir. 
Le jambon. 

Le morceau. 

Le sou. 



Youlez-vous ? 
Remercier. 
Un, une. 
Meme. 

L'un et l'autre. 



The room 
The chimney. 
The chair. 
The pocket. 
The slice. 
The piece. 

The dollar. 



La chambre. 

La cheminee, 

La chaise. 

La poche. 

La tranche. 

La piece, 
j La gourde. 
( La piastre. 

S'il vous plait. 
Je vous remercie. 
De. 

Autre. 



If you please. 

I thank you. 

Of, from. 

Other. 

Neither the one ) AT . ,, . ,, . 
4-v, 4.1. r & 1 1 «n m 1 autre, 
nor the other. J 



EXERCICE 11. 

1. Que demandez-vous ? 2. Je demande un verre. 3. You- 
lez-vous un verre d'eau ? 4. Oui, M., s'il vous plait. 5. Mile, 
votre soeur desire-t-elle une tasse de cafe \ 6. Elle desire une 
tasse de chocolat. 7. Que desire cette demoiselle ? 8. Elle de- 
mande un morceau de poulet. 9. Voulez-vous une tranche de 
jambon? 10. Oui, M. ; une petite tranche, s'il vous plait. 11. 
Voulez-vous une autre tasse de the? 12. Non, M., je vous re- 
mercie. 13. Ou est monsieur votre pere? 14. II est dans son 
appartement. 15. Ou est mon mouchoir? 16. II est sur le 
plancher, sous votre chaise. 17. Ou sont vos gants? 18. lis 
sont dans l'autre chambre, sur la cheminee {mantel-piece). 19. 
Ou est la lettre? 20. Je l'ai dans ma poche. 21. Quelle lecon 
avez-vous? 22. Nous avons la onzieme lecon. 23. Vos cou- 
sines ont-elles la meme lecon ? 24. Non, M. ; elles ont la hui- 



30 ONZIEME LE9ON. 

tieme. 25. Votre frere cherche-t-il le premier ou le second livre? 
26. II cherche l'un et l'autre. 27. Achete-t-il ce gilet-ci ou ce- 
lui-la. 28. II n'achete ni Tun ni l'autre. 29. Achetez-vous ces 
mouchoirs-ci ou ceux-la? 30. J'achete les uns et les autres. 

31. Monsieur votre oncle achete-t-il ces cravates-ci ou celles-la? 

32. II achete les unes et les autres. 33. Avez-vous les deux 
premiers ou les deux derniers volumes ? 34. Nous n'avons ni les 
uns ni les autres. 35. Ou est notre banc? 36. II est dans ma 
chambre. 37. Avez-vous deux pieces dedixsous? 38. Je n'ai 
qu'une piece de dix sous, mais j'ai quatre pieces de cinq sous. 
39. Avez-vous une gourde ? 40. J'ai deux gourdes, trois gour- 
des, quatre gourdes, &c. 



Theme 11. 

1. Have you a knife? 2. I have a knife and fork. 3. Will 
you have a cup of tea? 4. Yes, sir, if you please. 5. Is your 
sister fond of chocolate ? 6. She is very fond of it. 7. Miss, 
will you have another cup of chocolate ? 8. No, sir, I thank 
you. 9. Does your mother wish for a piece of fowl? 10. Yes, 
sir; a small piece, if you please. 11. Do you like ham? 12. I 
do. 13. Will you have a slice of ham? 14. No, sir, I thank 
you. 15. Have you the eighth lesson ? 16. No, sir; we have 
the eleventh. 17. Have these young ladies (ces demoiselles) the 
same? 18. No, sir; they have the first two. 19. Where is 
your handkerchief ? 20. I have it in my pocket. 21. Where 
are my gloves? 22. They lie (are) on the floor, under your 
chair. 23. Where is your mother? 24. She is in her apart- 
ment. 25. Is your father here ? 26. He is in the other room. 
27. Where is your goblet? 28. It stands (is) on the mantel- 
piece (cheminee). 29. Have you your book or mine ? 30. I 
have both. 31. Have we the ninth or the tenth lesson? 32. 
We have both. 33. Does your sister buy these or those benches ? 
34. She buys neither. 35. Have you three ten-cent pieces? 
36. I have but one piece of ten cents, but I have one, two, &c, 
dollars. 



DOUZIEME LECON. 31 

12. DOUZIEME LEgOK 

42. A noun in a sentence is either the subject of a verb or the 
direct object of a transitive verb ; or it is governed by a preposi- 
tion, and is then called an indirect object. 

The prepositions most frequently used, are de, of ox from, and 
A, to, at, or in. 

(a.) The English possessive case is expressed by the preposi- 
tion de, the object possessed preceding the preposition ; as, 

My brother's book (the book of my Le livre de mon frere. 

brother). 

His father's horse. Le cheval de son pere. 

My sisters' friends. Les amies de mes sceur& 

(b.) The names of materials are not used as adjectives. In- 
stead of saying, a silver dish, the French say, a dish of silver. 

A silver dish. Un plat d'argent. 

A cloth coat Un habit de drap. 

A cloth shoe. Un Soulier Setoff e. 

A leather shoe. Un Soulier de cuir. 

A leather glove. Un gant de peau. 



43. The preposition a precedes the remote object of the verb, 
the person to on for whom any thing is done ; as, 

I give the book to your brother. Je donne le livre a votre frere. 

A noun or pronoun so governed, is called the indirect object of 
the verb. 



44. De and the article le are contracted into du, and de and 
the article les mto des ; as, 

The boy's brother. Le frere du garcon, 

The children's clothes. Les habits des enfants. 

A and the article le are contracted into au, and a and the ar- 
ticle les into aux ; as, 

To the son. To the children. Au fils. Aux enfants. 



32 DOUZIEME LECW. 

De and l\ de and la, a and l\ and a and la are not contract 



Of the child. Of the girl. De l'enfant. 

To the child. To the girl. A l'enfant. 



De la fille. 
A la fille. 



45. 

noun ; 



The prepositions de and a are repeated before each 
as, 



Of (to) Charles and Henry. 
Of (to) both. 



To speak. To give. 

I speak to the tailors son. 

I give the fruit to the neighbors' 
children. 

He speaks to my neighbor's bro- 
ther's child 

A pair of woollen stockings. 

My brother's silver drinking-cup is 
in my mother's- room. 



De (a) Charles et de (a) Henri. 
De (d) Tun et de (d) 1' autre. 



Parler. Donner. 

Je parle au fils du tailleur. 

Je donne le fruit anx enfants des 

voisins. 
II parle a l'enfant du frere de mon 

voisin. 
Une paire de bas de laine. 
Le gobelet d'argent de mon frere 

est dans la chambre de ma mere, 



VOCABULAIRE 12. 



The marble. 


Le marbre. 


The stone. 


La pierre. 


The crystal. 


Le crista! 


The bottle. 


La bouteille. 


The flagon. 


Le flacon. 


The decanter. 


La carafe. 


The leather. 


Le cuir. 


The skin. 


La peau. 


The cotton. 


Le coton. 


The wool. 


La laine. 


A stocking. 


Un bas. 


A pair. 


Une paire. 


The tailor. 


Le tailleur. 


The seamstress. 


La couturiere. 


A thimble, 


TJnde. 
Parler. 


A key. 


Une clef. 


To speak. 


To give. 


Donner. 


Poor. 


Pauvre. 


Dear. 


Cher, fem. chere-> 


To, at 


L 


At present. 


A present. 




EXERCICE 12. 





1. Ou est le de d'argent de votre sceur? 2. II est dans la 
cbambre de ma mere. 3. Avez-vc-us le cbeval du voisin I 4, 



D0UZIEME LEgONa 33 

J'ai le cheval du general. 5. Quelle selle avez-vous ? 6. J'ai la 
selle du fils de votre voisin. 7. Ou sont les bas des enfants ? 8. 
lis sont sur ce banc de pierre. 9. Parlez-vous de la couturiere ? 
10. Je parle de la fille du tailleur. 11. Qui parle de la voisine ? 
12. Nous parlons de l'amie de la voisine. 13. Ces messieurs 
parlent-ils de la menie demoiselle ? 14. lis parlent d'une autre. 
15. Votre tante achete-t-elle une paire de souliers de cuir? 16. 
Elle achete une paire de souliers d'etoffe et deux paires de bas 
de laine. 17. Achetez-vous ces gants de fil ou ces gants de co- 
ton ? 18. Je n'achete ni les uns ni les autres ; j'achete une paire 
de gants de peau. 19. Qui achete l'habit de drap du tailleur? 
20. Mon ami l'achete. 21. La couturiere coupe-t-elle votre robe 
de satin? 22. Elle la coupe a present. 23. Ou sont nos belles 
carafes de cristal? 24. Elles sont sur cette table de marbre. 25. 
Donnez-vous ce beau flacon a votre cousine ? 26. Je le donne a 
ma chere petite niece. 27. Votre pere que donne-t-il a ce pau- 
vre garcon ? 28. II donne une piece de monnaie au pauvre gar- 
con. 29. Votre soeur donne-t-elle sa vieille robe a la servante ? 
30. Elle la donne a la soeur du pauvre garcon. 31. Donnez-vous 
vos vieux habits aux pauvres? 32. Nous les donnons aux pau- 
vres. 33. Vos amis donnent-ils beaucoup aux pauvres ? 34. lis 
donnent beaucoup aux pauvres. 35. Ou est la clef de votre 
montre? 36. Je l'ai dans ma poche. 37. Que demande ce 
monsieur? 38. II demande une bouteille de vin. 39. Parlez- 
vous de Charles ou de son frere ? 40. Je parle de Fun et de 
1' autre. 41. Parlez-vous a Charles ou a Henri? 42. Je ne 
parle ni a Tun ni a 1 'autre, je parle a mon cher petit cousin. 



Theme 12. 

1. Have } t ou your brother's key ? 2. I have it not, it is in 
the other room on the mantel-piece. 3. Who has the booksell- 
er's letter ? 4. I have it in my pocket. 5. Where are the chil- 
dren's stockings ? 6. They are on that wooden bench. 7. Have 
you the seamstress's thimble ? 8. I have my sister's silver thim- 
ble. 9. Do you speak of the tailor? 10. I speak of the book- 
seller. 11. The general's son speaks of your brother's friend. 

2* 



34 



TREIZrEME LE£ON. 



12. We speak of the neighbor's daughters. 13. They do not 
speak of the same ladies. 14. Where is your silver knife? 15. 
It is on that stone bench. 16. Do you buy a pair of woollen 
stockings? 17. I buy two pairs of woollen stockings and one 
pair of leather gloves. 18. Does your sister buy a pair of leather 
shoes? 19. She buys a pair of cloth shoes. 20. I buy a cloth 
coat and a cotton vest. 21. My dear friend, do you give that 
pretty flagon to that boy ? 22. I give it to my neighbor's dear 
little daughter. 23. Does your father give anything to the poor 
boy? 24. He gives a piece of money to the poor boy's mother. 
25. Do you give much to the poor? 26. We do. 27. Do you 
speak to Mary (Marie) or to her sister ? 28. I speak to both. 
29. Do you ask for a bottle of wine? 30. I ask for a glass of 
water. 31. The water is in that crystal decanter. 32. Flour 
and meat are very dear [fern, pi.) at present. 



46. 



13. TREIZIEME LEgOK 



That, the one (of\ {demons, pron.) 
Those, the ones (of), " " 
My hat and my brother's, (and thai 

of my brother.) 
Our carriage and the general's. 
Your stockings and the children's. 



Celxji, fern, celle (de). 
Ceux, fern, celles (de). 
Mon chape au et celui de monfrere. 

Notre voiture et celle du general, 
Vos bas et ceux des enfants. 



The silver pencil-case. 

The gold one. 

The gold spoon. The pewter one. 

The copper nails. The iron ones. 

The gold pens. The steel ones. 



47« Of which one. 
Of which ones. 

Of mine. 

Of yours. 



Le porte-crayon d'argent. 
Celui d'or. 

La cuiller d'or. Celle oVetain. 

Les clous de cuivre. Ceux defer. 
Les plumes d'or. Celles d'acier. 



Duquel, fern, de laquelle. 

Desquels, fern, desquelles. 
( Du mieo, fern, de la mienne. 
{ Des miens, fern, des miennes. 

Du v6tre, de la v6tre, des ydtree. 



TREIZIEME LEC0N, 



35 



To which one. 
To which ones. 

To mine. 

To yours. 



Auquel, fern, a laquelle. 

Auxquels, fem. auxquelles. 
j An mien, fern, a la mienne. 
( Aux miens, fern, aux miennes. 

Au votre, a la vdtre, aux votres. 



48 . Of whom ? To whom ? 
Of whom do you speak ? 
To whom do you speak ? 

What ? preceded by a preposition, is expressed by quoi. 

Of what do you speak ? De quoi parlez-vous ? 



De qui ? A qui ? 
De qui parlez-vous ? 
A qui parlez-vous ? 



Of which horse do you speak ? 

Of which one do you speak ? 

I speak of my neighbor's. 

I speak of yours, of his. 

Of which carriage does he speak ? 

He speaks of the general's. 

Of which one does he speak ? 

He speaks of yours, of his. 

To which young man do you give 

that book? 
To which one do you give it ? 
Do you give it to my cousin or to 

yours ? 
To which lady do you speak ? 
To which one do you speak ? 
Do you speak to his sister or to 

mine? 



De quel cheval parlez-vous ? 

Duquel parlez-vous ? 

Je parle de celui de mon voisin. 

Je parle du votre, du sien. 

De quelle voiture parle-t-il ? 

II parle de celle du general. 

De laquelle parle-t-il? 

H parle de la votre, de la sienne. 

A. quel jeune homme donnez-vous 

ce livre ? 
Auquel le donnez-vous ? 
Le donnez-vous a mon cousin ou au 

votre ? 
A quelle demoiselle parlez-vous ? 
A laquelle parlez-vous? 
Parlez-vous a sa sceur ou a la 

mienne ? 



VoCABULAIRE 13. 



The names of metals, and of most trees and woods, are of the 
masculine gender ; as, 



The beautiful gold. 
The good steel. 
That copper. 
That mahogany. 



Le bel or. The beautiful silver. Le bel argent* 

Le bon acier. The iron. Le fer. 

Ce cuivre. That pewter. Get etain. 

Cet acajou. The oak. Le chene. 



To break. 



Casser. 



To pick up. 



Ramasser. 



36 TREIZIEME LE£03T. 

EXERCICE 13. 

1. Ayez-vous votre porte-crayon d'argent? 2. J'ai celui de 
mon ami. 3. Quelle canne avez-vous ? 4. J'ai celle du voisin. 
5. Quels gants ramassez-vous ? 6. Je ramasse ceux de ma soeur. 
7. Avez-vous mes clefs ? 8. J'ai celles de mon frere. 9. Cher- 
chez-vous le de de cuivre? 10. Je cherche celui d'argent. 11. 
Cassez-vous ma plume d'or? 12. Je casse celle d'acier. 13. 
Achetez-vous les clous de cuivre? 14. J'achete ceux de fer. 
15. Les domestiques cassent-ils les plats d'etain ? 16. Us cassent 
ceux de verre. 17. Quelles cuillers votre tante achete-t-elle ? 
18. Elle achete celles d'argent. 19. Achete-t-elle la table d'aca- 
jou ou celle de marbre? 20. Elle achete celle d'acajou. 21. 
Avez-vous une table d'acajou dans votre chambre ? 22. J'ai une 
table de bois de chene dans ma chambre. 23. Achetez-vous les 
bas de fil ou ceux de laine ? 24. Nous achetons ceux de laine. 
25. Parlez-vous de votre voisin ou du mien? 26. Je parle du 
votre. 27. Duquel parlez-vous, du petit ou du gros? 28. Je 
parle du gros. 29. De qui parle-t-il? 30. II parle de la voisine. 
31. Parle-t-il de la sienne ou de la mienne? 32. II parle de la 
sienne. 33. Ce monsieur que remasse-t-il du plancher ? 34. II 
ramasse une piece de dix sous. 35. A qui la donne-t-il ? 36. 
II la donne au garcoii. 37. Auquel la donne-t-il? 38. II la 
donne a celui-la. 39. De quoi parlez-vous? 40. Je parle du 
cheval du voisin. 41. Duquel votre frere parle-t-il? 42. II 
parle de celui du general. 43. Parlez-vous du meme cheval? 
44. ISTon, M. ; nous paiions du n6tre. 45. Duquel parlent-ils ? 
46. lis parlent du leur. 47. De quelle voiture parlent-ils ? 48. 
lis parlent de la leur. 



Theme 13. 

1. Have you my pencil-case? 2. I have Henry's. 3. Has 
your cousin your key ? 4. He has his sister's. 5. What sticks 
do you cut ? 6. I cut my brother's. 7. Has the seamstress your 
cravats or your father's ? 8. She has my father's. 9. Do you 
break my gold pen? 10. I break the steel one. 11. Does the 
tailor's wife buy the silver dish ? 12. She buys the pewter one. 



QUATORZIEME LEgO^. 37 

13. Do you buy the iron nails? 14. We buy the copper ones. 
15. Does she buy the mahogany table? 16. She buys the oak 
one. 17. Do you speak of your nephew or of mine? 18. I 
speak of yours. 19. Of which one do you speak? 20. I speak 
of (du) little Henry. 21. Of whom does your sister speak? 22. 
She speaks of the seamstress. 23. Of which one does she speak ? 
24. She speaks of ours. 25. Do you speak of your friends or of 
his? 26. I speak of mine and of his also. 27. Does that man 
pick up your gloves ? 28. He picks up that lady's. 29. What 
do you pick up? 30. I pick up a piece of money. 31. To 
whom do you give it? 32. I give it to a poor boy. 33. To 
which one do you give it? 34. I give it to that one. 35. To 
which one of your nieces do you give that fine apple? 36. I 
give it to (a la) little Mary {Marie). 37. Of what do you speak ? 
38. I speak of the general's horses. 39. Of which ones do you 
speak ? 40. I speak of the old general's. 



14. QUATORZIEME LEgON. 

49. When two nouns, without a conjunction between them, 
follow a verb, one is an indirect object ; as, / lend your brother a 
book, which is : 

I lend a book to your brother. Je prete un livre & votre frere. 

Some French verbs differ in their government from the corre- 
sponding English verbs. The words 

Somebody. Quelqu'un, abb. qqn. 

Something. Quelque chose, " qq. ch. 

placed after the verb, as, 

To lend somebody something. Preter quelque chose a quelqu!un. 

will indicate, which is the direct, and which the indirect object, 
and the preposition by means of which the latter is governed. 

To ask somebody for something. Demander quelque chose d quelqu'un. 

To think of somebody, of something. Penser a quelqiCun, a quelque chose. 



38 QUATORZIEME LE£ON. 

Rem. — As a general rule, the noun which is the direct object 
stands before the noun which is the indirect object ; as, 

I give the servant something. Je donne quelque chose au domes- 

tique. 



5©# Nobody, no one. Personne, with ne before the verb. 

Are you looking for anybody ? Cherchez-vous quelqu'un ? 

I am not. Je ne eherche personne. 

Do you speak of any one ? Parlez-vous de quelqu'un ? 

I speak of no one. Je ne parle de personne. 

Do you speak to any one ? Parlez-vous a quelqu'un ? 

I do not. Je ne parle a personne. 

Does any one speak of this man ? Quelqu'un parle-t-il de cet homme ? 

Nobody speaks of this man. Personne ne parle de cet homme. 

Rem. 1. — Quelqu'un and quelque chose are not used in a neg- 
ative sense. 

I do not ask any one for it. Je ne le demande a personne. 

I do not wish for any thing. Je ne desire rien. 

Rem. 2. — They may be used with ne and pas in an interroga- 
tive sentence ; as, 

Is he not speaking to somebody ? Ne parle-t-il pas a quelqu'un ? 

Are you not looking for something ? Ne cherchez-vous pas quelque chose ? 

Rem. 3. — Que, quelque chose and rien require de before the 
adjective; as, 

"What have you beautiful ? Qu'avez-vous de beau ? 

Something pretty. Quelque chose de joli. 

Nothing new. Rien de nouveau. 



51 # Adverbs, generally, are placed after the verb which they 
modify; as, 

The general often speaks to my bro- Le general parle souvent a mon 

ther. frere. 

I always give something to the ser- Je donne toujour s quelque chose au 

vant. domestique. 

He seldom thinks of his friends. II pense rarement a ses amis. 



QUATORZIEME LEgON. 



52 • Whose ? when it means to whom belongs, is expressed by 
a qui ; as, 



Whose book is that ? 
It is my brother's. 
Whose horses are those ? 
Of what are you thinking ? 



A qui est ce livrei 

II est a r mo7i fr ere. 

A qui sont ces chevaux ? 

A quoi pensez-vous ? (48.) 



VOCABULAIRE 14.- 


— Masculine Nouns. 


The minister. 


Le ministre. 


The doctor. 


Le docteur. 


The physician. 


Le medecin. 


The apothecary. 


L'apothicaire. 


The baker. 


Le boulanger. 


The miller. 


Le meunier. 


The carpenter. 


Le charpentier. 


The joiner. 


Le menuisier. 


The hatter. 


Le chapelier. 


The shoemaker. 


Le cordonnier. 


The blacksmith. 


Le forgeron. 


The mason. 


Le macon. 


Somebody. 


Quelqu'un. 


Nobody. 


Personne (ne). 


To lend. 


Preter. 


To think. 


Penser. 


Sometimes. 


Quelquefois. 


Seldom. 


Rarement. 


Often. 


Sou vent. 


Always. 


Toujours. 


Whose ? (to whom 
belo7igs.) 


[ A qui. 


To-day. 


Aujourd'hui. 



EXERCICE 14. 

1. Cherchez-vous quelqu'un? 2. Je cherche quelqu'un. 3. 
Qui cherchez-vous ? 4. Je cherche le medecin. 5. Ce mechant 
homme aime-t-il quelqu'un? 6. II n'airue personne. 7. Quel- 
qu'un l'aime-t-il ? 8. Personne ne l'aime, 9. Parlez-Yous de 
quelqu'un? 10. Je parle du docteur. 11. De qui votre frere 
parle-t-il? 12. II parle du vieux ministre. 13. Qui parle de 
l'apothicaire? 14. Personne ne parle de l'apothicaire. 15. Le 
boulanger qu'achete-t-il ? 16. II achete la farine du meunier. 
17. Qui achete le bois et le fer du charpentier? 18. Le menui- 
sier achete le bois, et le forgeron achete le fer. 19. Qu'achete 
le cordonnier ? 20. II achete ces morceaux d'etofFe du tailleur. 
21. Le chapelier n'achete-t-il pas quelque chose? 22. II achete 
une piece de soie. 23. Parlez-Yous quelquefois a mon Yoisin? 
24. Je parle sou vent a votre voisin. 25. Demandez-vous quel- 
que chose au boulanger ? 26. Je ne demande rien au boulan- 



40 quatorzieme LEgoisr. 

ger. 27. Pr6tez-vous vos livres a quelqu'un? 28. Je les pr£te 
quelquefois a mes amis. 29. A qui pre tons-nous notre argent? 
30. Nous ne le pretons a personne. 31. Le menuisier prete-t-il 
son chevai au ministre? 32. II le prete au medecin. 33. Pen- 
sez-vous a quelqu'un? 34. Je pense toujours a quelqu'un. 35. 
A qui pensez-vous toujours? 36. Je pense toujours a ma mere. 
37. A quoi ce jeune homme pense-t-il? 38. II ne pense a rien. 
39. Ces vilains hommes pensent-ils souvent aux pauvres? 40. 
lis pensent rarement aux pauvres. 41. Avez-vous quelque chose 
de nouveau aujourd'hui ? 42. Je n'ai rien de nouveau. 43. 
Qu'achetez-vous de joli? 44. Je n'achete rien de joli. 45. A 
qui est ce rnouchoir ? 46. II est a ma soeur. 47. A qui sont 
ces vieux gants ? 48. lis sont a ma tante. 



Theme 14. 



1. Do you love anybody? 2. I love somebody. 3. Does 
anybody love the wicked? (les mechants.) 4. Nobody loves 
them, and they love nobody. 5. Do you speak of somebody ? 
6. I speak of the minister's son. 7. Who speaks of the physi- 
cian? 8. Nobody speaks of the physician, but we speak of the 
apothecary. 9. Do you lend your money to the doctor? 10. I 
do not lend it to any one. 11. Does the miller lend his horse 
to the baker? 12. He lends it to the carpenter. 13. Does the 
joiner lend the blacksmith a table? 14. He lends the mason a 
bench. 15. Do the hatters lend their hats to the shoemakers? 
16. They lend them to nobody. 17. Do you sometimes think 
of your mother? 18. I always think of my father and mother. 
19. Of whom does this boy think? 20. He thinks of nobody. 
21. Of what does this young lady think ? 22. She thinks of her 
lessons. 23. Does that ugly man often think of his poor neigh- 
bors? 24. He seldom thinks of the poor. 25. Of what does 
he think? 26. He thinks of his money. 27. Any thing new. 
to-day? 28. No, nothing. 29. What have you new? 30. I 
have nothing new. 31. My brother has something pretty. 32. 
Whose pencil-cases (porte-crayons) are those? 33. The gold 
one is my cousin's, and the silver one is my sister's. 



QUIXZIEME LECON. 



41 



15. QUESTZIEME LEgON. 
Personal Pronouns as Indirect Objects — 3d Pers. 

53. The pronouns of the third person, representing the indi- 
rect object of the verb (43), are : 



TO HTM, TO HER. 
To THEM. 

Do yon speak to him ? to her ? 
I do not. 

"What do you give to my aunt ? 
I give her this nosegay. 
"What do you ask my uncle for ? 
I ask him for the papers. 
Do you lend any thing to my cous- 
ins? 
I lend them this book. 



f {before the verb.) 



Lui, 

Leur, 

Lui parlez-vous ? 

Je ne lui parle pas. 

Que donnez-vous a ma tante? 

Je lui donne ce bouquet. 

Que demandez-vous a mon oncle ? 

Je lui demande les papiers. 

Pretez-vous quelque chose a mes 

cousines ? 
Je leur prete ce livre. 



54 • Him or it to him, to them. 
Her or it to him, to them. 
Them to him, to them. 
Do you give it to her ? 
I do not. 

Do you not ask him for them ? 
I do. 

Do you not lend it to them ? 
I do not. 



Le lui. Le leur. 

La lui. La leur. 

Les lui. Les leur, 

Le lui donnez-vous. 

Je ne le lui donne pas. 

!N"e les lui demandez-vous pas? 

Je les lui demande. 

]STe le leur pretez-vous pas ? 

Je ne le leur prete pas. 



55 • There, to it, at it, in it, here. Y, {before the verb.) 

Y refers to a place which has been previously mentioned. 



Is your brother in his room ? 
He is there. He is not. 
To send. 

Whom do you send to market i 
I send the servant (there). 
Do you send* him there now ? 



Votre frere est-il dans sa chambre ? 

II y est. II n'y eet pas. 

Envoy er. (70, e.) 

Qui envoy ez-vous an marche ? 

J'y envoie le domestique. 

L'y envoy ez-vous a present? 



* In English, it would be more correct to use the future tense in this and similar 
sentences; as, will you send, &c. ; in French, either the future or the present is equal- 
ly correct 



42 



QUINZIEME LEgON. 



I send him there forthwith. 
Do you send that letter to the mer- 
chant ? 
We do. 

To carry \ to take; to wear. 
Where do you carry that box ? 
I carry it to the garret. 
Do you take the barrel there? 
He wears a cloth coat. 



Je l'y envoie tout de suite. 
Envoy ez-vous cette lettre au mar- 
ch and? 
Nous la lui envoyons. 
Porter. 

Oil portez-vous cette caisse? 
Je la porte au grenier. 
Y portez-vous le baril ? 
II porte un habit de drap. 



56. All y every j whole. 
Does he carry all the wine to the 

cellar? 
Does he send all the merchandise 

to the store ? 
He does. 

All men, every man. 
All women, every woman. 
A whole piece of cloth. 
Half. 

Demi, when it precedes the noun, remains invariable ; after 
the noun, it agrees with it in gender only. 

Half a piece. Une demi-piece. 

Two pieces and a half. Deux pieces et demie. 



Tout, fern, toute, plur. tous, toutes. 
Porte-t-il tout le vin a la cave ? 

Envoie-t-il toute la marchandise au 

magasin ? 
II l'y envoie toute. 
Tous les hommes. 
Toutes les femmes. 
Toute une piece de drap. 
Demi. 





VOCABULAIRE 15. 




The market. 


Le marche. 


The street. 


La rue. 


The merchant. 


Le marchand. 


The merchandise. 


La marchandise. 


The store. 


Le magasin. 


The house. 


La maison. 


The garret. 


!• Le grenier. 


The cellar. 


La cave. 


The granary. 






The garden. 


Le jar din. 


The kitchen. 


La cuisine. 


The barrel. 


Le baril. 


The case, the box. 


La caisse. 


The nosegay. 


Le bouquet. 


The flower. 


La fleur. 



To carry, to take. 
To wear. 
To him, to her. 
To them. 



• Porter. 

Lui. 
Leur. 



To send. 



There, 
To 



Envoyer. 

;re - . . . It. 

it, at it, in it. ) 



QUINZIEME LEC/ON. 4*3 

All, every, whole. j JJj£ ^^ Half. Demi. 

Forthwith ) Tout de snite< Instantl I l'instant 

Immediately. ) J 



ExERCICE 15. 



1. De quoi parlez-vous au charpentier? 2. Je lui parle de la 
maison de mon oncle. 3. Dans quelle rue est cette maison ? 4. 
Elle est dans cette rue-ci. 5. Qui parle a votre frere? 6. Son 
medecin lui parle. 7. Parlez-vous quelquefois a vos voisins ? 8. 
Nous leur parlons sou vent. 9. Que donnez-vous a ma tante ? 
10. Je lui donne ce beau bouquet. 11. Donnez-vous ces belles 
fleurs a vos cousines? 12. Je leur donne ces fleurs et tout ce 
fruit. 13. Que demandez-vous a mon frere? 14. Je lui de- 
mande mes gants. 15. Donnez-vous votre montre a votre cou- 
sin? 16. Je ne la lui donne pas; je la lui prSte. 17. Pretez- 
vous vos livres a vos amis? 18. Je les leur prete quelquefois. 
19. Ou sont tous nos amis? 20. lis sont tons dans le jardin. 
21. Toutes les demoiselles y sont elles ? 22. Elles y sont toutes. 
23. Madame votre mere y est-elle aussi ? 24. Elle n'y est pas. 
25. Ou envoyez-vous le domestique? 26. Je l'envoie au maga- 
sin. 27. Envoyez-vous quelqu'un aumarche? 28. J'y envoie 
la servante. 29. L'y envoyez-vous tout de suite? 30. Je l'y 
envoie a l'instant. 31. Envoyons-nous la lettre au marchand? 
32. JSous la lui envoyons aujourd'hui. 33. Ou envoient-ils leurs 
marcliandises ? 34. lis les envoient toutes au magasin. 35. 
Portent-ils ce baril au grenier ? 36. Us l'y portent. 37. Ypor- 
tent-ils toutes ces caisses? 38. lis ne les y portent pas; ils les 
portent toutes a la cave. 39. Ou le boulanger porte-t-il son 
pain? 40. II le porte a la cuisine. 41. Qui est dans la cui- 
sine? 42. La iille y est, je pense. 43. Achetez-vous toute une 
piece de drap ? 44. J'achete une derni-^iece de drap et deux 
pieces et demie de cette etoffe. 45. Portez-vous l'habit de votre 
frere ? 46. Non, monsieur ; je porte le mien. 



44 seizieme le£0n. 

Theme 15. 

1. What do you give to your cousin? 2. I give her this 
nosegay. 3. Of what do you speak to the mason ? 4. I speak 
to him about (de) our old house. 5. Does your uncle lend his 
carriage to his neighbors ? 6. He does sometimes. 7. Do they 
ask him for it ? 8. They do very often. 9. Does your sister 
give all that fruit to your little niece? 10. She does not. 11. 
Do you give all those flowers to your cousins? 12. I do (give 
them all to them). 13. Is your sister in the garden? 14. She 
is. 15. Are all our friends there? 16. They are. 1*7. Where 
do you send the servant? 18. I send him to the garret. 19. 
Will you send (do you send) the girl to market forthwith ? 20. 
I (shall) send her there instantly. 21. Where does the mer- 
chant send his merchandise ? 22. He sends it to the store. 
23. In which street is his store ? 24. It is in this street. 
25. Do you send all that money to the tailor? 26. We do. 
27. Are you taking the letter to the minister? 28. I am. 
29. Are you taking the boxes to the cellar? 30. We are. 31* 
Is he carrying the whole barrel of flour to the kitchen ? 32. 
He is. 33. Do you wear that old hat? 34. I wear it some- 
times. 35. We have half a piece of satin, and two pieces and .. 
half of silk. 



16. SEIZIEME LEgON. 



Personal Pronouns — 1st and 2d Persons — Direct and 
Indirect Objects. 

57i For the first and second persons, there is but one form of 
personal pronouns to represent the direct and indirect objects of 
the verb. 

Me, to me. Us, to us. Me. Nous. 

Thee, to thee. You, to you. Te. Vous. 



SEIZIEME LE^ON. 



45 



To take, to lead. 

Where dost thou take me ? 

I take thee to the store. 

Do you take me there ? 

We do. 

Who is asking for me ? 

Do you ask me for any thing ? 

I ask you for the book. 

What do you give us ? 



Mener. (10, b.) 

Ou me menes-tu? 

Je te mene au magasin. 

M'y menez-vous? 

Nous vous y menons. 

Qui me demande ? 

Me demandez-vous quelque chose ? 

Je vous demande le livre. 

Que nous donnez-vous ? 



58. 



to us, " to us, 
to thee, " to thee, 
to you, " to you, 



Does he give you the book ? 

He lends it to me ; he does not give 

it to me. 
Does he not lend it to us ? 
Dost thou give me thy pen ? 
I lend it to thee ; I do not give it 

to thee. 



em to me. 


Me le, 


me la, 


me les. 


" to us. 


Nous le, 


nous la, 


nous les. 


" to thee. 


Tele, 


te la, 


te les. 


" to you. 


Vous le, 


vous la, 


vous les. 



59 • To look at somebody. 
Do you look at anybody ? 
I do not. 

Who looks at me ? 
Nobody does. 
To listen to somebody. 
Do you listen to that man ? 
I do, when he speaks to me. 
To call. 

Do you call me ? 
I do not. 
Those men call us. 



Vous donne-t-il le livre ? 

II me le prete ; il ne me le donne 

pas. 
Ne nous le prete-t-il pas ? 
Me donnes-tu ta plume ? 
Je te la prete; je ne te la donne 

pas. 



Regarder qqn. 
Regardez-vous quelqu'un ? 
Je ne regarde personne. 
Qui me regarde ? 
Personne ne vous regarde. 
Ecouter qqn. 

Ecoutez-vous cet homme ? 
Je l'ecoute quand il me parle 
Appeler. (70, a.) 
M'appelez-vous ? 
Je ne vous appelle pas. 
Ces hommes nous appellent 



bOt The day. Every day. 
The morning, in the morning. 
TJie evening, in the evening. 



Le jour. Tous les jours. 
Le matin. 
Le soir. 



46 



SEIZIEME LEgON. 



I take (carry) the bridle*to the stable 
and (lead) the horse to the brook. 

He takes his sheep- to the stable in 
the evening. 

Do you like mutton ? 

A veal cutlet. 

A mutton chop. 

To buy something from somebody. 

Do you buy the cheese from her ? 



Je porte la bride a l'ecurie et je 
mene le cheval au ruisseau. 

II mene ses moutons a l'etable 1« 
soir. 

Aimez-vous le mouton ? 

Une cotelette de veau. 

Une cotelette de mouton. 

Acheter quel que chose A or de qqn. 

Lui achetez-vous le fromage ? 



VOCABULAIRE 16. 



The brook. 

The cook. 

The shepherd. 

The sheep ; mutton. 

The calf; veal. 

The cheese. 



Le ruisseau. 
Le cuisinier. 
Le berger. 
Le mouton. 
Le veau. 
Le fromage. 

The office; the bureau. Le bureau. 



The flock. 



Le troupeau. 



The river. 

The cook, (fern.) 

The shepherdess. 

The sheep ; the ewe. 

The cutlet ; the chop. 

The omelet. 

The stable, (for > 

horses.) ) 

The stable, (for ) 

cattle) ) 



La riviere. 
La cuisiniere. 
La bergere. 
La brebis. 
La c6telette. 
L'omelette. 

L'ecurie. 
L'etable. 



To take, to lead, ) , , #f __ 7 x 

to drive. '[Mener. (*<>,&.) 



To call. 
When. 
Me, to me. 
Thee, to thee. 



Appeler. (70, a.) 

Quand. 

Me. 

Te. 



To look at. 

To listen to. 
In the morning. 
Us, to us. 
You, to you. 



Regarder. 

Ecouter. 
Le matin. 
Nous. 
Vous. 



EXERCICE 16. 



1. Ou me menez-vous ? 2. Je vous rnene au bureau de mon 
oncle. 3. Y portez-vous cet argent? 4. Je Ty porte. 5. Que 
me demandez-vous \ 6. Je vous demande mon chapeau. 7. Ou 
le marchand vous mene-t-il? 8. II me mene au marche. 9. 
Vous y mene-t-il souvent? 10. II m'y mene tous les jours. 11. 
Que vous donne-t-il ? 12. II me donne quelque chose de bon. 
13. Ou le berger mene-t-il son troupeau de moutons? 14. II le 
mene a. la riviere. 15. Quand la bergere mene-t-elle ses brebis 
au ruisseau? 16. Elle les y mene le matin et le soir. 17. 



SEIZIEME LEgOtf. 41 

Quand ces paysans menent-ils leurs veaux al'etable? 18. lis 
les y menent le soir. 19. Menez-vous les chevaux a l'ecurie? 
20. Nous les y menons. 21. Airuez-vous le veau ? 22. J'aime 
le veau, mais je n'airne pas le mouton. 23. Le cuisinier vous 
donne-t-il cette cotelette de veau? 24. H me la donne. 25. La 
cuisiniere nous donne-t-elle cette omelette ? 26. Elle nous la 
donne. 27. La bergere vous donne-t-elle son fromage? 28. 
Elle ne me le donne pas, je le lui achete. 29. Me donnez-vous 
ces ceufs? 30. Nous vous les donnons. 31. Kegardez-vous cette 
dame? 32. Je ne la regarde pas. 33. Nous regarde-t-elle ? 
34. Elle ne nous regarde pas. 35. Ecoutez-vous ce monsieur? 
36. Je l'ecoute. 37. M' ecoutez-vous ? 38. Nous vous ecoutons. 
39. Qui appelez-vous ? 40. J'appelle le menuisier. 41. Qui 
m'appelle? 42. Ces bergers vous appellent. 43. Ces enfants 
nous ecoutent-ils quand nous les appelons? 44. Us ne nous 
ecoutent pas toujours. 



Theme 16. 

1. When does he take you to the office? 2. He takes me 
there in the morning. 3. What does he ask you for ? 4. He 
does not ask me for any thing. 5. Do you take us to the store ? 
6. We do. 7. They take the horses to the stable and (carry) 
the barrels to the garret. 8. When does the shepherd drive his 
flock to the river ? 9. He drives it there in the evening. 10. 
Does the shepherdess take her sheep to the brook? 11. She 
takes them there every day. 12. Where does he take the calf? 
13. He takes it to the stable. 14. What does the cook give 
you? 15. He gives me a veal cutlet. 16. Will you have a 
mutton chop? 17. No, I thank you ; I do not like mutton. 18. 
Do you give me that omelet? 19. I do. 20. Does the coun- 
trywoman give you those eggs? 21. She does not give them to 
us; we buy them from her. 22. Who gives you that large 
piece of cheese? 23. The cook (fern.) does. 24. Do you look 
at those ladies? 25. I do not. 26. Do they look at us? 27. 
They do not. 28. To whom do you listen ? 29. I listen to that 
gentleman. 30. Do you listen to me ? 31. We listen to you 



48 DIX-SEPTIEME LECW. 

when you speak to us. 32. Do you call anybody? 33. I call 
the cook. 34. Does anybody call me ? 35. Nobody calls you. 
36. The masons call us ; we do not call them. 37. He wears 
his best coat every day. 



17. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

61* (a.) Adjectives ending in x, change x into se for the fem- 
inine; as, 

A happy man Un homme heureux* 

A happy woman. Une femme heureuse.* 

(p.) Those ending in/, change /into ve ; as, 

An attentive boy. Un garcon attentif. 

An attentive girl. Une fille attentive. 

(c.) Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on and et, with a few 
others, double the final consonant before the e mute of the femi- 
nine; as, 

An Italian air. Un air italien. 

Italian music. La musique italienne. 

A dumb man. Un homme muet. 

A dumb woman. Une femme muette. 

(d.) An adjective or pronoun which refers to nouns of differ- 
ent genders, must be in the plural masculine ; as, 

The man and woman are active. L'homme et la femme sont actifs. 
Both are industrious. L'un et V autre sont industrieux. 



62. So, referring to a preceding adjective or sentence, is ex- 
pressed by le, which is invariable. So is often understood in 
English, but in French, its equivalent le must be expressed. 

Are you contented, my daughter ? Etes-vous contente, ma fille ? 
I am (so). She is not. Je le suis. Elle ne /'est pas. 

* For the place of the adjective, see 65. 



DIX-SEPTIEME LECt)N. 



49 



Why. Because. Pourquoi. Parte que. 

Why is she not contented ? Pourquoi n'est-elle pas contente ? 

Because she is sick. Parce qu'elle est malade. 

Madam, are you sick I Madame, etes-vous malade ? 

I am. Je le suis. 

When the reference is to a noun, the pronoun agrees with it ; as, 

Are you the sick person ? Etes-vous la malade I 

I am {the person), Je la suis. 



63. A noun used adjectively,* is not preceded by any deter- 
minative word ; as, 

Are you a Frenchman \ Etes-vous francais ? 

What is that man? Qu'est cet horn me 8 

He is a physician. II est medecin. 



64 • The sick person. 
The blind man. 

The rich man. The poor man. 
The Frenchman. 
The French language. 
Do you speak French ? 

That Frenchman speaks Italian well. 
That Frenchwoman sings badly. 



Le malade, la malade. 

L'aveugle. 

Le riche. Le pauvre, 

Le Francais. 

Le francais. 

Parlez-vous francais ? (or) le /ran* 

gais ?\ 
Ce Francais parle bien l'italien, 
Cette Frangaise chante mal 



VOCABULAIRE 17. 



The Frenchman. 
The Italian. 
The musician. 
The air. 
Pleasure. 

Labor, 



Le Fran gais. 
L'ltalien. 
Le musicien. 
L'air. 
Le plaisir. 
Le travail, pi, 
Iestravaux4 



The Frenchwoman. La Francaise. 
The Italian woman. L'ltalienne. 
The musician, (fern.) Lamusicienne. 
The music. La musique. 

Dancing. La danse. 

Stud}\ L'etude. 



* A noun is used adjectively when it serves to qualify or explain a preceding noun, 
as in the examples. But a noun in the predicate is not used adjectively, when it is 
itself qualified by an adjective; as, H est tin avocat celebre, he is a celebrated lawyer. 

t With the verb parler, the article may be omitted before the Dames of languages. 
Parler frangais or le francais, to speak French, to know French ; parler frangais or 
<en frangais, to speak in the French tongue. 

% A few nouns in aU, change ail into aux for the plural. They are, tail, lease ; (Jfl- 

3 



50 



DIX-SEPTlilME LEgosr. 



To sing. 


Chanter. 


To dance. 


Danser. 


Why. 


Pourquoi. 


Because. 


Parce que. 


Well. 


Bien. 


Badly, bad, (adv.) 


Mai. 


Virtuous. 


Yertueux. 


Industrious. 


Industrieux, 


Happy; lucky. 


Heureux. 


Unhappy; unlucky. 


Malheureux. 


Contented, pleased. 


Content. 


Discontented, 


Mecontent. 


Active. 


Actif. 


Skilful. 


Habile. 


Rich. 


Riche. 


Sick. 


Malade. 


Blind. 


Aveugle. 


Dumb, mute. 


Muet. 


French. 


Franc,ais. 


Italian. 


Italien. 



Place of the Adjective. 

65 • The adjective is generally placed after the noun. 

(a.) The following adjectives are placed before the noun, when 
they are used singly and in their literal sense, but when followed 
by a complement, modified by an adverb, or connected with other 
adjectives, they follow the noun : 

Ancien, beau, bon, brave, cher, digne, divers, doux, faux, grand, 
gros, jeune, joli, long, mauvais, mechant, meilleur, moindre, nou- 
veau, petit, vieux, vrai. 

(b.) After the noun are always placed : Adjectives derived 
from proper names, and those which can be used as substantives ; 
adjectives expressing color, form, or shape ; those relating to 
taste ; also those denoting the defects of the body or mind, and 
all participles used as adjectives. 

(c.) Many adjectives precede or follow the noun, as harmony 
and taste may direct. There is however this difference, that the 
adjective, when placed before the noun, expresses the quality 
emphatically : when placed after the noun, it implies comparison, 
which it does not when it precedes it. In the elevated style, 
adjectives often precede the noun, which in ordinary language 
follow it. 

(d.) Some adjectives have one meaning when they precede, 
and another when they follow the noun. To this class belong 
the following : 



rail, coral ; email, enamel ; soupirail, air-hole ; travail, labor ; vantail, the leaf of a 
folding-door ; plural : baux, coraux, &c. 



DIX-SEPTIEME LE£0N. 51 

Brave, before a military name, means brave, before a civil 
name, it means worthy ; as, un brave capitaine, a brave captain ; 
ce brave homme, that worthy man; un homme brave, a brave 
man. 

Mon cher ami, my dear friend. Une robe chere, a dear dress. 

Un grand homme, a great man. Un homme grand, a tall 
man. 

Un honnete homme, an honest man. Un homme honnete, a 
polite man. 

Un pauvre musicien, a wretched musician. Un mnsicien pau- 
vre, a poor musician. 



Exercice 17. 



1. Charles, ou est-tu? 2. Je suis ici dans le jardin. 3. Es-tu 
content ? 4. Je ne suis ni content ni heureux. 5. Cette demoi- 
selle est-elle contente ? 6. Elle n'est ni contente ni heureuse. 
7* Pourquoi est-elle mecontente et malheureuse ? 8. Parce 
qu'elle est malade. 9. Mademoiselle, etes-vous malade ? 10. Je 
le suis. 11. Etes-vous l'amie de ma niece? 12. Je la suis. 13. 
Qu'est cet homme? 14. II est musicien. 15. Est-il habile? 
16. II est tres-habile. 17. Cette musicienne est-elle habile? 
18. lis sont Tun et l'autre tres-habiles. 19. Ces musiciens sont- 
ils it-aliens? 20. lis sont francais. 21. Ce Francais parle-t-il 
italien? 22. II le parle bien. 23. Cet It alien parle-t-il bien le 
francais? 24. H le parle mal. 25. Cette Francaise est-elle mu- 
sicienne ? 26. Elle Test. 27. Cette Italienne est-elle muette? 

28. ISTon, M. ; mais elle a un frere muet, et son pere est aveugle. 

29. Cet aveugle aime-t-il la musique ? 30. II aime beaucoup la 
musique. 31. Sommes-nous riches ? 32. Nous ne le sommes 
pas. 33. Comment trouvez-vous cet air italien \ 34. Je le 
trouve tres-joli. 35. Votre cousine le chante-t-elle ? 36. Elle 
le chante tres-bien. 37. Aimez-vous la musique italienne? 38. 
Je Taime beaucoup. 39. Ce jeune homme actif aime-t-il le tra- 
vail ? 40. II aime le travail et la danse. 41. Cette demoiselle 
active aime-t-elle l'etude ? 42. Nou, M. ; elle est tres-vive (live- 
ly) ; elle aime le plaisir, la danse et la musique, mais pas l'etude. 



52 dix-huitieme lecon. 

43. Danse-t-elle bien? 44. Elle danse tres-bien. 45. Votre 
voisin, le forgeron, chante-t-il souvent ? 46. II chante le matin 
et le soir. 



Theme 17. 

1. Where are you? 2. I am here. 3. Are you contented? 
4. I am. 5. Who is happy ? 6. The virtuous man is happy. 
7. Is your cousin Mary contented ? 8. She is neither contented 
nor happy. 9. Why is she unhappy and discontented? 10. 
Because she is sick. 11. Is this active young man industrious ? 
12. He is ; he loves labor and pleasure. 13. Is this active young- 
lady fond of dancing? 14. She is fond of dancing and music. 
15. Is she industrious? 16. She and her brother are both very 
industrious. 17. Are you an Italian ? 18. lam a Frenchman. 
19. Is this musician (fem.) an Italian? 20. She is French. 21. 
Madam, are you contented? 22. I am not. 23. Wiry are you 
not contented ? 24. Because I am poor. 25. Are you the wife 
of this skilful musician ? 26. I am. 27. Is the rich man always 
contented? 28. He is often discontented and unhappy. 29. 
Are we rich? 30. We are not 31. What is this man? 32. 
He is a musician ? 33. Is he blind ? 34. He is, and this dumb 
girl leads him from street to street (de rue en rue). 35. This 
blind man is fond of music, and this dumb boy is fond of study. 
36. Those Italians speak French well, but those Frenchmen 
speak Italian badly. 37. This Frenchwoman sings that Italian 
air badly. 38. Those Italian women dance and sing well. 



18. DIX-HUITIEME LEgON. 
65. The personal pronouns, 

MOI, TOI, LUI, ELLE, NOUS, VOUS, EUX, ELLES, 

I, me, thou, thee, he, him, she, her, we, us, you, they, them, 

are used, with reference to persons or to things personified, 
when the verb is not expressed and after prepositions ; as, 



DIX-HUITTEME LECON. 



53 



"Who calls me ? L 

Whom does he call ? Me. 

I speak of him. I think of her. 



66. Of it, of them. 
to it, to them. 
Do you speak of my garden ? 
Do you speak of my flowers? 
I speak of it, of them. We do. 
Do you think of your country ? 
I do. 



67 • At home. 
Is your father at home ? 
To, in, at the house of. 
He is not, he is at my uncle's. 
At my house, at your house. 
At his house, at her house. 
At our house, at their house. 



Qui m'appelle ? 
Qui appelle-t-il ? 
Je parle de lui. 



Moi. 



Je pense a elle. 



Ex, ) (used with reference to things, 
Y, ) and placed before the verb.) 
Parlez-vous de mon jardin? 
Parlez-vous de mes fleurs ? 
J'en parle. Nous en parlons. 
Pensez-vous a votre pays? 
J'y pense. 



A la maison, 

M. votre pere est-il a la maison? 

Chez. 

II n'y est pas, il est chez mon oncle. 

Chez moi, chez vous. 

Chez lui, chez elle. 

Chez nous; chez eux, chez elles. 



68. Togo. 
I go, thou goest, he goes. 
We go, you go, they go. 
Where are you going ? 
I am going home. 

Where is your brother going ? 

He is going to our neighbors'. 
To dwell, to live, to reside. 
Where do you live ? 
I live in Henry-street, Wo. 3. 

At whose house does your cousin 

live? 
He lives at our house. 



Allee, {irregular verb.) 

Je vais, tu vas, il va. 

Nous allons, vous allez, Us vont. 

Ou allez-vous? 

Je vais chez moi. 
S Ou va votre frere ? or, 
\ Ou votre frere va-t-il ? 

II va chez nos voisins. 

Demeurer. 

Ou demeurez-vous ? 

Je demeure (dans la) rue Henri, 
No. 3, (au numero trois.) 

Chez qui votre cousin demeure-t-il ? 

II demeure chez nous. 



69. The article is generally used before the names of coun- 
tries ; as, 

France is a beautiful country. La France est un beau pays. 



54 



DIX-HUITIEME LEC0N. 



In or to, before the name of a country, is generally expressed 

by en. 

He is in France. He goes to France. II est en France. H va en France. 

In, at, or to, before the names of cities and places, is expressed 
by A. 

In, at, to Paris. In, at, to London. A Paris. A Londres. 

In, at, to church. At, to the concert. A Veglise. Au concert. 

In the country, to the country. A la campagne. 

In town, to town. A la mile. 

In town. En mile. 





VOCABULAIRE 18. 




My country. 


Mon pays. 


France. 


La France. 


The field. 


Le champ. 


The country. 


La campagne. 


The village. 


Le village. 


The town, the city 


. La ville. 


The inn. 


L'h6tel. 


The exchange. 


La bourse. 


The concert. 


Le concert. 


The church. 


L'eglise. 


The theatre. 


Le theatre. 
Aller. 


The bank. 


La banque. 


Togo. 


To dwell, to live. 
To reside. 


f Demeurer. 


Of it, of them. 


En. 


To it, to them. 


Y. 


In. 


En. 


To, at, or in the 
house of. 


\ Chez. 



Verbs of the First Conjugation, [Irregularities) 

70a The verbs of the first conjugation are all regular, with the 
exception of aller (75) and envoyer, and their compounds. 

There are, however, in this conjugation, classes of verbs, which 
though regularly varied, undergo slight changes, in certain per- 
sons and tenses, in order to conform to the general rules of French 
orthography. They are here given for reference. 

(a.) Verbs in eler, double the I, those in eter, the t, before e 
mute; as, appeler, (to call,) fappelle, tu appelles, il appellc, Us 
appellent ; but, nous appelons, &c. ; jeter, (to throw,) je jette, tu 



DIX-HUITIEME LEC/0N. 55 

jettes, il jette, Us jettent ; but^ nous jetons, &c. Exceptions are, 
acheter, (to buy,) fachete, &c, and some others. 

(b.) Verbs having e (acute) or e mute, before the consonant 
that precedes the ending er, change the e or e into e (grave) 
when followed by a rnnte syllable ; as, ceder, (to yield,) je cede, 
<fec. ; reveler, (to reveal,) je revele, <fce. ; mener, (to lead,) je mene, 
&c. ; achever, (to achieve,) j'acheve, &c 

(c.) Verbs in cer, as menace?*, (to threaten,) add a cedilla to the 
e (c), when it is followed by a or o ; as, nous menacons, (we 
threaten,) <fcc. 

(cZ.) Verbs in #er, retain the e of the termination before a or 
o; as,juge?; (to judge,) nous jug eons, (we judge?) 

(e.) And finally, those ending in yei\ change y into i before e 
mute ; as, envoyer, (to send,) fenvoie, tu envoies, &c. ; but, nous 
envoyons, &c. 



ExERCICE 18. 



1. Parlez-vous du medecin francais? 2. Je ne parle pas de 
lui. 3. Qui parle de ces musiciens ? 4. Personne ne parle d'eux* 
5. Parlez-vous de votre jardin ? 6. Nous en parlous. 7. Pen- 
sez-vous quelquefois a moi ? 8. Je pense souvent a vous. 9. 
Pensez-vous a votre pays? 10. J'y pense souvent. 11. En par- 
lez-vous quelquefois? 12. J 'en parle et j'y pense souvent. 13 a 
Ou allez-vous? 14. Je vais a la maison. 15. Ou votre frere 
va-t-il? 16. II va chez mon oncle. 17. Votre oncle est-il chez 
lui? 18. II n'y est pas, il est a la bourse. 19. Ne va-t-il pas a 
la banque? 20. II va de la bourse a la banque. 21. Ou va 
votre sceur? 22. Elle va a l'eglise. 23. Y allons-nous ? 24. 
Nous n'y allons pas ; nous allons chez nous. 25. Ou vont ces 
messieurs? 26. lis vont chez eux. 27. Vos cousines sont-elles 
chez vous? 28. Elles sont chez elles. 29. Ces paysans vont-ils 
au village ? 30. lis vont au champ. 31. Allez-vous au concert? 
32. Je n'y vais pas; nous allons tous au theatre. 33. Ou de- 
meurez-vous a present? 34. Je demeure rue Henri, numero dix. 
35. Chez qui demeurez-vous ? 36. Je demeure chez M. Louis. 
37. Votre oncle demeure-t-il a la ville? 38. Xon, M. ; il de- 



56 DIX-HTJITIEME LEgOST* 

meure toujours a la campagne. 39. Est-il en ville aujeurdlruif 
40. Oui, M. ; il est a l'hotel Saint George. 41. Votre frere est- 
il a Londres ? 42. Non, M. ; il est en France ? 43. Allez-vous 
en France? 44. Nous y allons. 45. Aimez-vous la France I 
46. Nous Faimons. 



Theme 18* 

I. Do you speak of me or of Mm? 2. I speak of tnern. 3» 
Who speaks of the war ? 4. The general speaks of it. 5. Do 
you think of my cousin ? 6. I often think of her. 7. Does the 
Italian think of his country ? 8. He always thinks of it, and he 
often speaks of it. 9. Where are you going? 10. I am going 
to the concert. 11* Where is your brother going? 12. He is 
going home. 13. Is the merchant going to the exchange? 14. 
He is going to the bank. 15. Are we going to the theatre? 
16. We are going to the inn. 17. Are your sisters going to. 
church? 18. They are not; they are going to our neighbor's «. 
19. Where does the servant take your shoes? 20. He takes 
them to the shoemaker's. 21. Where does your friend take us? 
22. He takes us to his house. 23. Is your father at home? 
24. He is not ; he is in the country. 25. Do you send the ser- 
vant to the village? 26. I send him to the field. 27. Is your 
aunt at home? 28. No, sir; she is at our house. 29. Where 
do you live? 30. I live in this street, number three. 31. Do 
your cousins reside in the country I 32» No, sir ; they live in 
town at present. 33. At whose house do they live ? 34. They 
live at our house. 35. Is your uncle in this country? 36. He 
is in Paris. 37. Are his daughters in France? 38. They are 
here; I am going to their house at present. 39. My brother is 
going to France. 40. France is a beautiful country. 



dix-neuviexie lecon. 



57 



19. DIX-XEUVIEME LEgON. 



71. The day. 

The morning. 
The evening. 



Le jour, lajournee. 
Le matin, la matinee. 
Le soil', la soiree. 



Jour, matin , soir, express divisions of time in a numerical 
sense. They are used with numerals and in adverbial expres- 
sions; as, 

Three days. On the third day. Trois jours. Le troisieme jour. 

Every morning, Every evening. Tous les matins. Tous les soirs, 
This evening, to-night. This night. Ce soir. Cette nuit. 

Joumee, matinee, soiree, express duration of time ; as ? 

All the day. By the day. Toute lajournee. A lajournee. 

All the morning-. All the evening. Toute la matinee. Toute la soiree, 



72. 

It is, {speaking of the weather.) 

How is the weather this morning ? 

It is fine weather. 

It is bad weather. 

It rains. To rain. 

Still. fib longer, no more. 

Does it still rain ? 

It does not rain any more. 



II fait, (imp., infin. faire, to make.) 
Quel temps fait-il ce matin \ 
H fait beau temps. 
H fait mauvais temps. 
II pleut. Pleuvoir. 
Encore, fie . . . .plus. 
Pleut-il encore ? 
II ne pleut plus. 



73 • What time is it ? 

What o'clock is it ? \ 

It is one o'clock, two o'clock, &c. 
It is twelve o'clock (noon), midnight. 
Half-past one. Half-past twelve. 
A quarter after two. 
Ten minutes after two. 
A quarter to three. 
Already. Not yet. 
Is it already three o'clock ? 
It is not yet three o'clock. 
At what time do you dine ? 
We dine at five o'clock. 



Quelle heure est-il $ 

II est une heure, deux heures, <fcc, 

II est midi, minuit, 

Une heure et demie. Midi et demi. 

Deux heures et (un) quart. 

Deux heures et dix minutes. 

Trois heures rooms un quart. 

Dejd. Pas encore. 

Est-il deja trois heures ? 

II n'est pas encore trois heures. 

A quelle heure dinez-vous ? 

Nous dinons a cinq heures. 



S3 



DIX-NEUVIEME LEgOK, 



Ever. Never. 

Do you ever study all tlie night ? 

I never study in the night. 

I remain at home in the evening. 

I work every evening. 

I work all the evening. 

With. For, {prep.) 

Do you dine with your uncle ? 

I dine with him to-day. 

Have you any thing for me ? 



Jamais. Ne, , . .jamais. 

£tudiez-vous jamais toute la nuit! 

Je n'etudie jamais la nuit. 

Je reste a la maison le soir. 

Je travaille tous les soirs. 

Je travaille toute la soiree. 

Avec. Pour. 

Dinez-vous avec votre oncle ? 

Je dine avec lui aujourd'hui. 

Avez-vous quelque chose pour moi? 



74. 

/. , [to me. . .to you, . .to him. M'en. Vous en. Lui en. 
Of them ) * ' 

Does he speak to you of his country ? 

He speaks of it to me, . .to us. 

He speaks of it to him, . . to them. 

Does he not speak of it to thee ? 



Vous parle-t-il de son pays ? 
II m'en parle. II nous en parle. 
II lui en parle. II leur en parle. 
Ne t'en parle-t-il pas ? 





VOCABULAIRE 19. 




The day. 


Le jour. 


The day. 


La journSe. 


The morning. 


Le matin. 


The morning. 


La matinee. 


The evening. 


Le soir. 


The evening. 


La soiree. 


The noontide. 


Le midi. 


The afternoon. 


L'apres-midi. 


The bed. 


Le lit. 


The night. 


La nuit. 


The time ; the weather. Le temps. 


The hour. 


L'heure. 


The quarter. 


Le quart. 


The minute. 


La minute. 


To dine. 


Diner. 


To remain, to stay. 


Rester. 


To work, to labor. 


Travailler. 


To study. 


Etudier. 


It is, (speaking of the 
weather.) 


1 11 fait. 


It rains. 


11 pleut. 


Still, yet, more. 


Encore. 


No more, no longer. 


Ne. . . .plus.* 


Already. 


Deja. 


Not yet. 


Pas encore. 


Ever. 


Jamais. 


Never. 


Ne. .jamais.* 


With. 


Avec. 


For, (prep.) 


Pour. 


Less. 


Moins. 


Not. 


Point. 



* See note, page 9. Point is a stronger negative than pas: il n'etudie pas, he is not 
studying ; il n'Hwdie point, he does not study at all 



DIX-XEUVIEME LEC/0N. 59 

ExERCICE 19. 

1. Travaillez-vous beaucoup ? 2. Je travaille tous les jours et 
toute la journee. 3. Ces homines travaillent-ils a la journee? 
4. lis travaillent a la journee. 5. Etudiez-vous le matin ? 6. 
J'etudie tous les matins et quelquefois toute la matinee. 7. Yo 
tre frere etudie-t-il le soir ? 8. II etudie tous les soirs et souvent 
toute la soiree. 9. Travaillez-vous jamais toute la nuit? 10. 
!N"on, jamais ; la nuit nous sommes au (in) lit. 11. Eestez-vous 
a la maison Papres-midi? 12. Nous y restons ; nous etudions 
toute Papres-midi. 13. Yos amis restent-ils ici ce soir? 14. 
Xon, M. ; iis vont au concert. 15. Y allez-vous avec eux? 16. 
Je n'y vais pas ; je reste ici. 17. Quel temps fait-il ce soir ? 18. 
II fait mauvais temps, il pleut. 19. Pleut-il encore? 20. ISTon, 
M. ; il ne pleut plus ; il fait beau a present. 21. Quelle heure 
est-il ? 22. II est dix heures moins un quart. 23. Est-il deja 
dix lieures moins un quart? 24. Xon, M., pas encore; il n'est 
que neuf lieures et demie a (by) ma montre. 25. Quelle heure 
est-il a la votre ? 26. A la mienne, il est dix heures moins vingt 
minutes. 27. A quelle heure allez-vous chez votre oncle ? 28. 
J'y vais a midi et demi. 29. Dlnez-vous avec lui aujourd'hui? 
30. Je dine toujours avec lui quand je suis en ville. 31. De- 
meurez-vous encore a la campagne? 32. Nous y demeurons 
toujours. 33. A quelle heure votre oncle dine-t-il ? 34. II dine 
tous les jours a une heure. 35. Avez-vous quel que chose pour 
monami? 36. J'ai une lettre pour lui. 37. Pense-t-il toujours 
a son pays ? 38. II y pense toujours. 39. Yous en parle-t-il ? 
40. II m'en parle souvent. 41. En parle-t-il a. votre sceur? 42. 
II lui en parle aussi. 43. Wen parle-t-il pas a vos voisins ? 44. 
II ne leur en parle jamais. 45. Travaille-t-il ? 46. II ne tra- 
vaille point. 



Theme 19. 

1. Do you ever work ? 2. I work every day. 3. My brother 
works all the day. 4. Do you study in the morning? 5. I 
study sometimes all the morning. 6. Do you stay at home ev- 
ery evening! 7. We remain at home all the evening. 8. 



60 VINGTIEME LECON. 

We study our lessons in the afternoon. 9. Does your cousin go 
to the concert to-night? 10. No, sir; he remains here, and I 
stay with him. 11. Does he ever study in the morning? 12. 
No, never ; he studies in the night, and remains in (au) bed all 
the morning. 13. Is it still raining ? 14. It does not rain any 
more; it is fine weather this morning. 15. What time is it? 
16. It is half-past twelve. 17. Is it already half-past twelve? 
18. It is not yet twelve o'clock by (a) this watch. 19. That 
watch is not right (ne va pas bien) ; by my watch it is twenty 
minutes after twelve. 20. And by mine, it is already twenty 
minutes to one. 21. Does your uncle still live in the country? 
22. He still lives there, but he is in town to-day. 23. When 
he is in town he dines with us. 24. We dine at half-past four. 
25. Where is your sister ? I have a letter for her. 26. Do your 
neighbor's cows go into (dans) your field? 27. They do very 
often. 28. Do you speak to him about it ? 29. I speak to him 
about it, and he speaks to me about it. 30. Our neighbors 
speak to us about it, but we never speak to them about it. 31. 
Is your cousin studying ? 32. He is not. 33. He does not study. 



20. VINGTIEME LEgON. 

75 • The manner in which the sense of a noun is applied, is 
either 

Definite ; as, le livre, mon livre, ce livre ; 

General ; as, faime les livres ; la farine est chere ; 

Indefinite, when the noun is preceded by a numeral adjec- 
tive ; as, un livre ; or 

Partitive, when the noun is, or may be, preceded, in English, 
by some or any. 

Hence we say : the definite, general, indefinite, or partitive* 
sense of a noun. 

* In French grammars, the definite and the general sense are called, sens determine 
(determinate sense) ; and the indefinite and the partitive, sens indetermine (indeter- 
minate sense). 



VINGTIEME LEgON. 61 

A noun used in the partitive sense is preceded by the prepo- 
sition de and the article, that is, du, de la, de V, or des (44) ; as, 

"We have bread, meat. Eous avons du pain, de la viande. 

You have money, friends. Vous avez de l'argent, des amis. 



76. Exceptions. — The article is omitted, that is, de alone is 
used, before a partitive noun : 

1st. When the noun is preceded by an adjective; as, 

I have good paper, good pens. J'ai de bon papier, de bonnes plumes. 

2d. When the noun is used in a negative sense ; as, 

I have no paper, no pens. Je n'ai pas de papier, pas de plumes. 

3d. When it is governed by means of the preposition de, as the 
necessary complement of a preceding noun, verb, or adverb ; as, 

A glass of wine. Un verre de vin. 

He speaks of money. II parle d'argent. 



77. Words expressing parts or quantity, take de before the 
noun. 

How much, how many. Combien. 

Much, many, a great deal. Beaucoup. 

How much money ? Combien d'argent ? 

How many books ? Combien de livres ? 

Much money. Beaucoup d'argent. 

Many books. Beaucoup de livres. 



78. Some or any {of it ox of them). En,* (personal pronoun.) 

En serves to represent, in the sentence, nouns taken in the 
partitive or indefinite sense, as le, la, les serve to represent nouns 
taken in the general or definite sense ; as, 

Have you any sugar? Avez-vous du sucre ? 

I have. I have not. J'en ai. Je n'en ai pas. 

* The personal pronoun en is used with reference to persons and things ; the relative 
pronoun en, (66) almost exclusively with reference to things. The latter may represent 
a noun in either sense, and often relates to a preceding sentence. 



62 



YXNG-TIEME LEgON. 



Have you a watch ? 

I have one. I have not. 

How many brothers have you ? 

How many have you? 

I have one, two, &c. 

I have but one. 

Do you buy much wood this year ? 

I buy a great deal every year. 

Have you good stockings ? 

We have. 

White. 

White stockings. 

White muslin. 

To eat 

We never eat fish. 

We have some excellent vegetable 

soup ; will you have some ? 
I have some already. 



Avez-vous une montre f 

J'en ai une. Je n'en ai pas. 

Combien de freres avez-vous? 

Combien en avez-vous? 

J'en ai un, deux, &c. 

Je n'en ai qu'un. 

Achetez-vous beaucoup de bois cette 

annee $ 
J'en achete beaucoup tous les arts. 
Avez-vous de bons bas ? 
Nous en avons de bons. 
Blanc, fern, blanche. 
Des bas blancs. 
De la mousseline blanche. 
Manger. (70, d.) 

Nous ne mangeons jamais de poisson. 
Nous avons un excellent potage a 

la julienne; en voulez-vous? 
J'en ai deja. 





VoCABULAIRE 20. 




A workman. 


Un ouvrier. 


A workwoman 


. Une ouvriere. 


The work. 


L'ouvrage. 


The thing. 


La chose. 


Velvet. 


Du* velours. 


Muslin. 


De la* mousseline. 


A cloak. 


Un manteau. 


Lining. 


De la doublure. 


Soup, porridge. 


Du potage. 


Sauce. 


De la sauce. 


Fish. 


Du poisson. 


Codfish. 


De la morue. 


Ham. 


Du jambon. 


The oyster. 


L'huitre. 


Lead. 


Du plomb. 


China. 


De la porcelaine. 


An inkstand. 


Un encrier. 


Ink. 


De l'encre. 


A year. 


Un an. 


A year. 


Une annee. 


To eat. 


Manger. (70, d) 


To travel. 


Voyager. (70, d.) 


White. 


Blanc, blanche. 


Black. 


Noir. 


How much. 
How many. 


f- Combien. 


Much, many. 
A great deal. 


f Beaucoup. 


Some, any, (before ^ Du, de la, de 1', 


Some, any. 


\ En,. 


a noun.) 


) des. 


Of it, of them. 



* Nouns, in the vocabularies, preceded by du, de la, de l\ des, are supposed to bp 
taken in the partitive sense ; those preceded by le t la, les, in the general sense 



VINGTIEME LEQON. 63 

Exercice 20. 

1. Qu'avez-vous aujourd'hui ? 2. Nous avons du poisson, de 
la viande et des legumes. 3. Avez-vous du veau? 4. Nous 
n'avons pas de veau, mais nous avons de bon boeuf et de bon 
janibon. 5. Avez-vous des buitres ? 6. Nous n'avons pas d'hui- 
tres, mais nous avons un excellent potage. 7. Mangez-vous de 
la morue? 8. Pen mange quelquefois. 9. Voulez-vous de la 
sauce? 10. Je vous remercie ; j'en ai deja. 11. Avez-vous de 
Feau? 12. J'en ai, mais je n'ai pas de verre. 13. Le marchand 
a-t-il de F argent. 14. II n'a pas d'argent, mais il a du velours 
et de la mousseline. 15. Avez-vous de bons ouvriers? 16. Nous 
en avons de bons. 17. Pourquoi cette ouvriere ne travaille-t-elle 
pas? 18. Parce qu'elle n'a pas d'ouvrage. 19. Votre frere 
a-t-il de Fencre ? 20. II a de Fencre et des plumes, mais il n'a 
pas de papier. 21. Avez-vous un encrier deplomb? 22. J'en 
ai un de porcelaine. 23. Achetez-vous de la doublure pour votre 
manteau? 24. Je n'en achete pas; j'en ai deja. 25. Avez- 
vous beaucoup de confitures ? 26. Nous en avons beaucoup. 
27. Mangez-vous beaucoup de viande ? 28. Nous n'en mangeons 
pas beaucoup. 29. Combien de bois acbetez-vous cette annee ? 
30. Nous en acnetons beaucoup tous les ans. 31. Voyagez-vous 
beaucoup? 32. Nous ne voyageons pas beaucoup, mais mon 
oncle voyage toute Fannee. 33. Votre oncle porte-t-il un cha- 
peau blanc ? 34. II porte un chapeau noir et une cravate blan- 
cbe. 35. Combien d'enfants a-t-il? 36. II en a trois. 37. 
Combien de freres avez-vous? 38. Je n'en ai qu'un. 39. Qu'a- 
vez-vous dans ce tiroir ? 40. J'y ai beaucoup de cboses : des 
plumes, des crayons, du papier, &c. 



Theme 20. 

1. Have you any fish ? 2. We have codfisli and oysters. 3. 
Have you water? 4. I have. 5. Will you have some sauce? 
6. I have some already. 7. We have some excellent vegetable 
soup ; will you have some ? 8. Have you any ham ? 9. We 
have no ham, but we have good veal and excellent mutton. 10. 
Have you good workmen ? 11. We have. 12. We have skilful 



64 



VINGT ET UNIEME LE<?0N. 



and industrious workmen. 13. Has this workwoman any work ? 
14. She has no work at present. 15. Have you ink? 16. I 
have some, but I have no pen. 17. Have you an inkstand ? 18. 
I have one. 19. Have you a leaden one? 20. I have a china 
one. 21. Do you buy white muslin? 22. I do not buy any; I 
buy black velvet for a cloak, and white satin for lining. 23. 
Have you much sugar? 24. We have a great deal of it. 25. 
How much coffee have you? 26. We have not much. 27. Do 
you eat much fish? 28. We never eat fish. 29. Do you travel 
much? 30. We do not. 31. My uncle travels all the year for 
his pleasure. 32. How many cousins have you? 33. I have 
but one. 34. How many sisters have you? 35. I have two. 
36. Do you go to the country this year? 37. We go there 
every year. 



21. VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON. 



T9« To have need of. 

To be in want of, to want. 
"What is he in want of? 
He is in want of money. 
We want some also. 
Have you still need of my book ? 

I do not want it any more. 

Do you want that workman any 

longer ? 
I do not. 

To be pleased with. 
Are you pleased with his work ? 
I am. 

To thank a person for something. 
Do you thank your aunt for her 

kindness ? 
I do, with all my heart. 



■ Avoir besoin de. 

De quoi a-t-il besoin ? 

II a besoin d'argent. 

Nous en avons besoin aussl 

Avez-vous encore besoin de moil 

livre ? 
Je n'en ai plus besoin. 
Avez-vous encore besoin de cet on- 

vrier ? 
Je n'ai plus besoin de lui. 
Etre content de. 

Etes-vous content de son travail ? 
J'en suis content. 
Remercier qqn. de qq. ch. 
Kemerciez-vous votre tante de sa 

bonte ? 
Je Ten remercie de tout mon cceur. 



VINGT ET UNIEME LE§OX. 



65 



80 • More, still. No more. 

Have you any more paper ? 

Have you no more paper ? 

I have some more. I have no more. 

Little, few. A little. 

Enough. Too, too much, too many. 

But little, but few. 

But little ox few more or left. 

I have few friends and little pleas- 
ure. 

Mother asks for a little water. 

Have you coffee enough? 

I have too much coffee. 

I have too much. 

I have only a little coffee. 

I have but little. 

Have you still enough ? 

I have not much left. 

Is that hat too large for you? 

It is too small for me. 



Encore. Ne. . . .plus* 
Avez-vous encore du papier? 
]ST'avez-vous plus de papier ? 
J'en ai encore. Je n'en ai plus, 
Pen. (11.) Unpen. 
Assez. Trop. 

Ne guere. 

Ne. . . .plus guere. 

J'ai peu d'amis et peu de plaisir. 

Ma mere demande un peu d'eau. 

Avez-vous assez de cafe? 

J'ai trop de cafe. 

J'en ai trop. 

Je n'ai guere de cafe. 

Je n'en ai guere. 

En avez-vous encore assez ? 

Je n'en ai plus guere. 

Ce chapeau est-il trop grand pour 

vous? 
II est trop petit pour moi. 



81 • Somewhere, anywhere. 
Nowhere, not anywhere. 
Are you going anywhere. 
I am not (going anywhere). 
To go hunting, . .fishing. 
To associate with somebody. 
To frequent a place. 
"With whom do you associate ? 
We frequent good company. 



Quelque part. 
Ne. . . .nulle part. 
Allez-vous quelque part? 
Je ne vais nulle part. 
Aller a la chasse, . .a la peche. 
Frequenter qqn. 
Frequenter un lieu. 
Qui frequentez-vous ? 
Nous frequentons la bonne compa- 
gnie. 



82. 



will 



I have fine flowers ; 
you have some? 
I give you some. 
I give her some too. 
Do you send some to your sister in 

the city ? 
I do. 



J'ai de belles fleurs; en voulez 

vous? 
Je vous en donne. 
Je lui en donne aussi. 
En envoyez-vous a votre soeur a la 

ville? 
Je lui y en envoie. 



* Encore and ne plus are adverbs of time (72) ; the former is affirmative, the lat- 
ter negative (76, Exe. 2). Plus or le plus (85) is an adverb of quantity (77). 



The place. 
The hunter. 
The fisherman. 
The dog. 
The heart. 



To be in want of. 
To want. 
To associate with. 
To frequent. 
More, still. 
Little, few. 

Enough. 

But little. 
Only a little. 
Somewhere. 
Anywhere. 

New. 



VINGT ET UNIEME LE£ON. 

VOCABULAIRE 21. 

Le lieu. The company. La compagnie. 

Le chasseur. The chase, hunting. La chasse. 

Le pecheur. Fishing. La peche. 

Le chien. The goat. La chevre. 

Le cceur. Kindness, goodness. La bonte. 



J- Avoir besoin de. 
{■ Frequenter. 



To be pleased with. Etre content de. 



Encore. 
Peu. 



Assez. 

f-Ne. . . .guere. 

[■ Quelque part. 
Neuf.* (61,6.) 



To thank {for). 

No more. 
A little. 
Too, too much. 
Too many. 

But little more. 

Nowhere. 
Not anywhere. 
Worn, old. 



Remercier (de). 

Ne. . . .plus. 
Un peu. 

j- Trop. 
Ne. .plus guere. 

f- Ne . . nulle part. 

Use. 



EXERCICE 21. 



1. Avez-vous besoin de quelque chose? 2. J'ai besoin d'un 
gilet neuf. 3. Ce gilet est-il assez grand pour vous ? 4. II est 
trop petit pour moi. 5. Yotre frere a-t-il besoin d'une redingote 
neuve ? 6. II en a besoin d'une. 7. De quoi avez-vous besoin ? 
8. J'ai besoin d'une paire de bottes ; celles-ci sont usees. 9. 
Etes-vous contents de nos bottes, messieurs ? 10. Nous en som- 
mes contents. 11. Madame, etes-vous contente de vos neveux? 
12. Je suis contente d'eux. 13. Avez-vous encore du papier? 
14. J'en ai encore un peu. 15. Votre frere en a-t-il encore? 
16. II n'en a plus. 17. Le cuisinier a-t-il encore de la salade et 
des pommes de terre? 18. II n'a plus de salade, mais il a en- 
core des pommes de terre. 19. A-t-il assez de sel et de poivre? 

* JVeuf nouveau. Neuf is said of things newly made, in opposition to worn ; nou- 
veau, of things new to us, and also of things of new growth. In the latter sense, nou- 
veau follows the noun. Un habit neuf, a new coat, (that has not been worn.) Le 
nouveau vin, the new wine, {the wine we have lately received.) JDu vin nouveau f 
new wine, (of new growth.) 



VINGT ET UNIEME LEC0N. 67 

20. II a trop de sel, mais il n'a guere de poivre. 21. A-t-il du 
vinaigre ? 22. H n'en a guere. 23. N 'a-t-il plus d'huile ? 24. 
H n'en a plus guere. 25. Avez-vous des amis? 26. J'ai peu 
d'amis et peu de plaisir. 27. Allez-vous quelque part le soir? 
28. Je ne vais nulle part le soir; je reste a la maison. 29. 
N'allez-vous jamais au theatre? 30. Jamais; je ne frequente 
point ces lieux. 31. Frequentez-vous ces messieurs? 32. Oui, 
M. ; ils sont de mon pays. 33. Qui frequentent-ils ? 34. lis 
frequentent la bonne compagnie. 35. De quoi ce chasseur vous 
parle-t-il? 36. II me parle de son chien de chasse. 37. La 
bergere mene-t-elle ses chevres quelque part? 38. Elle les mene 
aux champs. 39. Allez-vous a la chasse ce matin ? 40. JSTon, 
M. ; je vais a la peche avec le pecheur de mon oncle. 41. Votre 
tante a de belles fleurs ; vous en donne-t-elle quelquefois ? 42. 
Elle m'en donne souvent. 43. En envoie-t-elle a vos soeurs a la 
ville ? 44. Elle leur y en envoie quelquefois. 45. La remerciez- 
vous de sa bonte ? 46. Je l'en remercie de tout mon coeur. 



Theme 21, 



1. What are you in want of ? 2. I am in want of new gloves ; 
these are worn out. 3. Are those gloves large enough for you? 
4. They are too large. 5. My brother wants a pair of new boots. 
6. Have you still need of my inkstand? 7. I do not want it 
any more. 8. Does your father still want the workman? 9. 
He does not. 10. Is he pleased with him? 11. He is pleased 
with him and his work. 12. Have you any more ink? 13. I 
have still some, but I have no more paper. 14. Have we any 
more flour? 15. We have no more, but the merchant has some 
more. 16. We have few friends, but we have enough. 17. 
Have you any more cream? 18. I have a little more. 19. 
Have you fish enough? 20. We have too much. 21. Have 
we any more butter and cheese ? 22. We have butter enough, 
but we have but little cheese. 23. Has the cook any more tea. 
24. She has only a little left, but enough for to-day. 25. Are 
you going anywhere ? 26.1 am not, but my brother goes hunt- 
ing. 27. This hunter lends him his hound. 28. Those fisher- 



68 VINGT-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 

men go fishing when it is fine weather. 29. I neither like hunt- 
ing nor fishing. 30. We never go to the theatre; we do not 
frequent those places. 31. I associate with those gentlemen; 
they come (sont) from my country. 32. They keep good com- 
pany. 33. You have some very fine fruit; do you give some 
to your nephews ? 34. I give them some, and I give you some 
too, sir. 35. You have too much kindness, madam ; I thank 
you with all my heart. 



22. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON. 

83. The verbs of the second conjugation (23) end in ir; as, 

To finish. Finir ; root, fin, ending, ir. 

I finish, thou finishest, he finishes. Je finis, tu finis, ilfinit. 
We finish, you finish, they finish. Nous finissons, vous finissez, Us fi- 

nissent. 

The verbs of the third conjugation end in oir ; as, 

To receive. Recevoir ; root, rec, ending, evoir. 

I receive, thou recei vest, he receives. Je regois,* tu regois, il regoit. 

We receive, you receive, they re- Nous recevons, vous recevez, Us re- 
ceive, goivent. 

The verbs of the fourth conjugation end in re; as, 

To render, to return, to give back. Rendre ; root, rend, ending, re. 
I render, thou renderest, he renders. Je rends, tu rends, il rend. 
We render, you render, they render. Nous rendons, vous rendez, Us ren- 

dent. 



84 • This, (this thing.) Cect. 

That, (that thing.) Cela. 

To choose, to select. Choi sir, (chois-ir, like finir.) 

1 choose this ; what do you choose ? Je choisis ceci ; que choisissez-vous \ 

* The c, in the verbs ending in cevoir, takes the cedilla before o and n. 



VINGT-DEtTXIEME LE^ON. 



69 



We choose that. 

To owe. 

Do you owe money to that man ? 

I do. 

The world. Everybody. 

He owes everybody. 

To sell. 

Do you sell goods to my uncle ? 

We do sometimes. 



Nous choisissons cela. 
Devoir, (d-evoir, like recevoir.) 
Devez-vous de l'argent a cet hom- 

me? 
Je lui en dois. 

Le monde. Tout le monde. 
II doit a tout le monde. 
Vendre, (vend-re, like rendre.) 
Yendez-vous des marchandises a 

mon oncle ? 
Nous lui en vendons quelquefois. 



85 • Than, That, {conjunction.) 
Better, the best, (adverb.) 
More, the most. 
Less, the least. 
You speak better than I. 
He speaks better than any of us. 
Do you receive more money than I ? 

Do you sell more coffee than tea ? 

I sell less of the latter than of the 
former. 



Que* * 

Mieux, le mieux. 

Phis, le plus. 

Moins, le moins. 

Yous parlez mieux que moi. 

II parle le mieux de nous tous. 

Recevez-vous plus d'argent que 

moi? 
Yendez-vous plus de cafe que de\ 

the? 
Je vends moins de celui-ci que def 

celui-ld. 



Rem. — More than, less than, before a numeral, are expressed 
by plus de, moins de. 

More than one. Less than twenty. Plus d'un. Moins de vingt. 



86 • To like better. To prefer. 
I like this better than that. 
This is my choice ; what is yours ? 

I prefer this to that. 

As for me, I have no preference. 

I give the preference to that. 

That is not to my taste. 

Those large patterns are fashionable. 



Aimer mieux. Preferer. 
J'aime mieux ceci que cela. 
Ceci est mon choix ; quel est le 

v6tre ? 
Je prefere ceci a cela. 
Moi, je n'ai pas de preference. 
Je donne la preference a cela. 
Cela n'est pas de mon gout. 
Ces grands dessins sont a la mode. 



* The conjunction que is often understood in English, but never in French: I think 
(that) it rains, je crois quHlpleut. t See 111, Rem. 



10 



VOCABULAIRE 22. 



A stranger. 
A foreigner. 
The choice. 
The taste. 

The pattern. 

A ribbon. 
The umbrella. 
The world. 
rr la.Q people. 

To finish. 
To receive. 
To return. 
To give back. 
To like better. 
To leave, to let. 
This, (this thing.) 
That, than, (conj.) 
More, most. 
A small matter. 



j" Un etranger. 

Le choix. 
Le gout. 

Le dessin. 

Un ruban. 
Le parapluie. 

- Le monde. 



A stranger. 
A foreigner. 
The preference. 
The fashion. 
The novelty. 
The new article. 
Lace. 
The rain. 

A part. 



- Une etrangere. 

La preference. 
La mode. 

• La nouveaute. 

De la dentelle. 
La pluie. 

Une partie. 



Finir. 
Recevoir. 

• Rendre. 

Aimer mieux. 

Laisser. 

Ceci. 

Que. 

Plus, le plus. 

Peu de chose. 



To choose, to select. Choisir. 
To owe. Devoir. 



To sell. 



Vendre. 



To prefer. Preferer. 

To show. Montrer. 

That, (that thing.) Cela. 

Better, best, (adv.) Mieux, le mieux. 

Less, least. Moins, le moins. 

Not much. Pas grand' chose. 



Exercice 22. 



1. Choisissez-vous ceci ou cela? 2. Je laisse le choix a. ces 
dames. # 3. Mesdames, que choisissez-vous ? 4. Nous choisissons 
ceci, et maman choisit cela. 5. Que nioutrez-vous a ces etran- 
geres ? 6. Je leur montre nos dernieres nouveautes. 7. Choi- 
sisseut-elles les grands dessins a la mode ? 8. Non, M. ; elles 
aiment mieux les petits dessins que les grands. 9. Et vous, ai- 
mez-vous mieux ceci que cela? 10. Moi, je prefere cela. 11. 
Kecevez-vous beaucoup d'argent? 12. Je n'en recois guere. 
13. Votre frere en recoit-il plus quevous? 14. II n'en recoit 
pas plus que moi. 15. Recevons-nous plus d'or que d'argent? 
16. Nous recevons plus de celui-ci que de celui-la. 17. Laissez- 
vous vos parapluies ici? 18. Nous ne les laissons pas ici. 19. 
Aimez-vous mieux la pluie que le beau temps? 20. J'aime 
mieux le beau temps que la pluie. 21. Devez-vous de l'argent a 



VINGT-DEUXIEME LE£0tf. 71 

votre tailleur? 22. Je kri en dois, mais peu de chose; pas plus 
de vingt dollars. 23. Combien vous dois-je ? 24. Yous ne me 
devez pas grand' chose ; rnoins de cent (one hundred) piastres, je 
pense. 25. Ces hornmes doivent-ils beaucoup ? 26. Us doivent 
a tout le monde, et tout le monde en parle. 27. Vendez-vous 
de la dentelle a ma cousine ? 28. Je lui en vends quelquefois. 
29. Yendons-nous moins de ruban que de dentelle? 30. Nous 
vendons plus de ruban que de dentelle. 31. Ces etrangers ven- 
dent-ils plus que vous? 32. lis vendent le plus de tous les mar- 
chands de la ville. 33. Cette etrangere vous rend-elle vos 
rubans ? 34. Elle nous en rend une partie, et nous lui rendons 
une partie de son argent. 35. Votre soeur aime-t-elle mieux la 
ville que la campagne. 36. Non, M. ; elle prefere la campagne 
a la ville. 37. Etes-vous de son gout ? 38. Oui, M. ; moi aussi, 
je donne la preference a la campagne. 39. Votre cousin a-t-il 
du gout pour 1' etude ? 40. H a plus de gout pour la musique 
que pour l'etude. 41. Finissez-vous votre lecon a present? 42. 
Oui, ML ; nous flnissons toujours a cette heure-ci. 



Theme 22. 

1. What do you choose, this or that? 2. This is my choice ; 
what is yours ? 3.1 have no preference, I leave the choice to 
those ladies. 4. We choose that. 5. That is not to my taste. 
6. Do you like this better than that ? 7. I do not like those 
large patterns. 8. Large patterns are fashionable. 9. Do you 
receive more money than I? 10. I receive but little. 11. My 
brother receives more gold than silver. 12. We receive more 
of the latter than of the former. 13. Those carpenters finish 
our house to-day, and receive their money to-night. 14. I sell 
more velvet than the Englishman, but he sells more ribbon than 
I. 15. Do you sell less ribbon than lace? 16. We sell more 
ribbon than lace. 17. Those Frenchmen sell the most of all the 
merchants in (de) the city. 18. They always have the latest new 
goods (dernieres nouveautes). 19. Do you owe the shoemaker 
more than fifteen dollars? 20. I owe him less than ten. 21. 
We do not owe much. 22. Those foreigners owe everybody. 



?2 VINGT-TROISIEME LE£ON. 

23. Do they return you your merchandise ? 24. They only re- 
turn us a part of it. 25. We leave our umbrellas here; it does 
not rain any more. 26. We like this weather better than rain. 
27. What do you show her ? 28. I show her nfy new dress. 
29. I prefer the city to the country ; is that also your taste (etes- 
vous du meme gotit) % 30. We like the country better than the 
city. 31. Who has the most books, you, he, or I? 32. My 
cousin has the most, and I have the least. 33. He speaks 
French better than any of us. 34. My brother has taste for 
music, but he has none for study. 



23. VINGT-TROISIEME LEfOK 

Relative Pronouns. 

87. The relative pronouns are : 

"Who, which, that, (subject.) Qui. 

Whom, which, that, (object) Que. 

"Whose, of whom, of which. Dont. 

From whom. To whom. De qui or dont. A qui. 

TO WHICH, AT WHICH, TO WHOM. AuQUEL, A LAQUELLE. 



The man who speaks. L'homme qui parle. 

The one whom I admire. Celui que j 'admire. 

The woman whose child is sick. La femme dont l'enfant est malade. 

The one of whom you speak. Celle dont vous parlez. 

The things which we want. Lea choses dont nous avons besoin. 

The merchant from whom I receive Le marchand de qui je recois le 

the wood. bois. 

The one to whom I owe money. Celui a qui je dois de l'argent 

The work at which I am working. L'ouvrage auquel je travaille. 



Remarks on the Relative Pronouns. 

88. Rem. 1. — The relative pronouns cannot be understood in 
French, as they often are in English. 
The books you look for are on the Les livres que vous cherchez sont 

table. sur la table. 



VINGT-TROISIEME LEgON. 73 

Eem. 2. — They are seldom separated from their antecedents. 
He is happy who is contented. Celui qui est content est heureux. 

Rem. 3. — He, him, she, her, limited by a relative clause, must 
be translated by celui, celle. 

We admire her whom we love. Nous admirons oelle que nous ai- 

mons. 
I go to the house of him of whom Je vais chez celui dont vous parlez. 
you speak. 

Rem. 4. — The relative dont must be closely followed by the 
subject of the next verb. 

We do not always love those whose Nous n'aimons pas toujours ceux 
accomplishments we admire. dont nous admirons les talents. 



89 • That, it. It is. hit? 
It is I. It is he. It is she. 
It is we that are your friends. 
Are we not ? (Is it not so ?) 
That is right, that is well. 
Is that all I It is enough. 

What, that which, (rel. pron.) 

That of which. 
I ask for what is mine. 
I give you what I have, 
I give you all I have. 
Have you what you want ? 
I have all I want. 



Ce, (demonstr. pron.) O 'est Est-cei 

C'est moi. C'est lui. C'est elle. 

C'est nous qui sommes vos amis. 

N'est-ce pas? 

C'est bien. 

Est-ce tout? C'est assez. 
[ Ce qui, (rel. pron. as subject.) 
\ Ce que, (rel. pron. as object.) 

Ce dont. 

Je demande ce qui est a moL 

Je vous donne ce que j'ai. 

Je vous donne tout ce que j'ai. 

Avez-vous ce dont vous avez besoin I 

J'ai tout ce dont j'ai besoin. 



90. To furnish. To fill (with). 
He furnishes us bread with which 

we are very well pleased. 
With what does he fill the barrel ? 
He fills it with red wine. 
Do you fill the bottles with it ? 
The plums with which they fill 

their baskets are not ripe. 

4 



Fournir. RempUr (de). 

II nous four nit du pain dont nous 

sommes tres-contents. 
De quoi remplit-il le baril ? 
II le remplrt de vin rouge. 
En remplissez-vous les bouteilles ? 
Les prunes dont elles remplissent 

leurs paniers ne sent pas mures. 



74 



YIKGrT-TROISIEME LE$02F* 



YOCABULAIRE 23. 



The gardener. 
The tree. 
The pear-tree. 
The peach-tree. 
The plum-tree. 
The cherry-tree. 
The pineapple. 
The basket. 



Le jardinier, 
L'arbre. 
Le poirier. 
Le pecher. 
Le prunier. 
Le cerisier. 
L'ananas. 
Le panrer. 



The plant, 
The leaf. 
The pear. 
The peach. 
The plum. 
The cherry. 
The strawberry. 



La plaster. 

La feuille. 
La poire. 
La peche. 
La prune. 
La cerise. 
La fraise. 



The basket (a flat b.) La corbeille* 



' I Qui, 



To furnish. 
To count. 
To begin. 
Who, which, that 

(relat pron.) 
Of whom, whose, 

of which, (rel. 

pronoun.} 
That, it, (dem. pr.) Ce. 
Red. Rouge. 

Blue. Bleu. 

Ripe. Mux. 



Fournir. 
Compter. 
Commencer (10,c.) 



To fill. 
To admire. 
To bear. 

Whom, which, that j 
(relat pron.) | 



Remplir. 
Admirer. 
Porter. 

Que. 



- Dont, 



To whom, (rel. pr.) A qui. 

What, (rel. pron.) Ce qui, ce que. 

Yellow. Jaune. 

Green. Vert. 

Unripe. Lnmur, vert 



Exercice 23. 



1. Parlez-vous a la femme qui ramasse les feuilles? 2. Je 
parle a celle qui vend les ananas. 3. Comptez-vous les arbres 
qui sont dans le jardin ? 4. Je compte les peches qui sont sur 
ce pecher. 5. Quel est le prunier qui porte le plus de prunes ? 
6. C'est ce prunier-ci qui en porte le plus. 7. Quel est le poi- 
rier qui porte ces poires-ci ? 8. C'est ce poirier-la qui porte les 
poires que vous mangez. 9. Fournissez-vous des plantes a mon 
oncle ? 10. Nous lui en fournissons ; celles que nous comptons 
sont pour lui. 11. Etes-vous contents des plantes que le jardi- 
nier vous fournit? 12. Nous sornmes tres-contents de tout ce 
qu'il nous fournit. 13. Admirez-vous la dame dont nous par- 
Ions ? 14. Je n'admire point celle dont vous parlez. 15. Nous 
avons toutes les choses dont nous avons besoin ; n'est-ce pas ? 
16. Oui, M. ; vous avez tout ce dont vous avez besoin. 17. En- 



VINGT-TROISIEME LE£0N. 75 

voyez-vous cette lettre au marchand de qui (or dont) vous recevez 
votrebois? 18. Je l'envoie a celui a qui je dois de Pargent. 
19. Vendez-vous la maison dans laquelle vous demeurez? 20. 
Nous vendons celle dans laquelle notre oncle demeure. 21. Est- 
ce vous qui demandez un parapluie ? 22. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est 
ma soeur qui en demande un. 23. A qui est le parapluie bleu 
que vous avez ? 24. Ce parapluie bleu que j'ai ici, est a mon 
frere. 25. Que me donnez-vous? 26. Je vous donne ce qui est 
dans cette corbeille. 27. Est-ce la* tout ce que vous me don- 
nez? 28. C'est tout; n'est-ce pas assez? 29. Nous finissons 
ce que nous commencons; n'est-ce pas? 30. Nous ne finissons 
pas toujours ce que nous commencons. 31. Remplit-il de vin 
rouge le baril qui est dans la cave? 32. II ne Pen remplit pas. 

33. De quoi remplissez-vous les petits paniers que vous avez la ?* 

34. Nous les remplissons de fraises. 35. Avez-vous beaucoup 
de cerises cette annee ? 36. Nous n'en avons guere ; nos ceri- 
siers sont encore trop jeunes. 37. Ces poires sont-elles mures ? 
38. Non, M. ; elles sont encore vertes ; quand elles sont mures 
elles sont jaunes. 



Theme 23. 

1. Do you call the man who is on the cherry-tree ? 2. No, 
sir ; the one I call is under the plum-tree. 3. For whom are the 
plants which the gardener is counting ? 4. Those which he is 
counting are for your uncle. 5. My uncle is well pleased with 
every thing (tout ce que) you furnish him. 6. The pears (88, 
Rem. 1) on that pear-tree are yellow when they are ripe. 7. 
Where is the pineapple of which you are speaking? 8. It is in 
the basket that the girl is taking to the kitchen. 9. The lady 
whose child is sick is asking for the physician. 10. He is not 
happy who is sick. 11. The one of whom you speak, is the 
same lady whose goodness of heart we admire. (88, Rem. 4.) 
12. Is it you who are asking forme? 13. It is X. 14. What 
are you showing him? 15. I am showing him what is in that 

* Ld is often used as an expletive in such sentences as these. 



16 VINGT-QUATRIEME LECW. 

basket; that is right, is it not? 16. I give you what you ask 
for. 17. Is that all? 18. It is all I have; is it not enough? 
19. You have what you want, have you not? 20. We have 
not all we want; we have no strawberries, and but few plums. 
21. With what do you fill those bottles? 22. I fill this one 
with blue ink, and that one with red ink. 23. The cherries 
with which those girls fill their baskets are not ripe. 24. Those 
peach-trees bear good peaches. 25. Why do you fill your bas- 
kets with the green leaves of that tree ? 26. Mother wants them 
for our little dog, that is sick. 27. We finish to-day the work 
at which we are working. 28. We finish what we begin, do we 
not?' 



24. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. 

91 • One verb governs another in the infinitive. Some verbs 
govern the infinitive directly, others by means of the preposition 
a, and others again, by means of the preposition de. 

The following are a few of the verbs that govern the infinitive 
directly : 

Aller, to go. 
I am going to study my lesson. Je vais etudier ma lecon. 

Aimer mieux, to like better. 
I like better to stay here. J'aime mieux rester icl 

Compter, to intend, to expect. 

I intend to go to France this year. Je compte aller en France cette an- 

nee. 
I expect to have money to-morrow. Je compte avoir de l'argent demain. 

Devoir, to be obliged, must ; also, to be, before the infinitive. 

I am obliged to go there. ) 

I must go there. \ Je dois ? aller - 

I am to be there at noon. Je dois y etre a midi. 



VIXGT-QUATRIEME LECON. 



11 



92t To go to a person. 

To go for. 

To send for. 
I am going to my lawyer. 
I am going to him. 
Are you going for money ? 
I am. 
I am going to send for some. 



Alter tr ouver qqn. 

Aller chercher. 

Envoy er chercher. 

Je vais trouver mon avoeat. 

Je vais le trouver. 

Allez-vous chercher de l'argent? 

Je vais en chercher. 

Je vais en envoyer chercher. 



93* To BE WILLING. 

I am willing, thou art willing, he is 

willing. 
"We are willing, you are willing, 

they are willing. 
"Will you stay here ? 
I am not willing to stay here alone. 
He wishes to go to the concert. 
We will go there together. 
What do those men want ? 
They want (will have, wish for) their 

money. 



Vouloir, (irr. verb.) 
Je veux, tu veux, il veut. 

Nous voulons, vous voulez, Us veth 

lent. 
Voulez- vous rester ici ? 
Je ne veux pas rester ici seuL 
II veut aller au concert ? 
Rous voulons y aller ensemble. 
Que veulent ce3 hommes ? 
ILs veulent leur argent. 



94. All prepositions, except en (in), govern the verb in the 
infinitive ; and generally, the English present participle, when it 
is not used in connection with the auxiliary to be, is rendered by 
the infinitive. 

(a.) The infinitive, limiting the meaning of an abstract noun, 
is preceded by the preposition de ; as, 



I want to speak to him. 
I have no time to go to his house. 
To intend. 

To have a mind, a wish, a desire. 
Does he intend to go to her ? 
He has a wish to speak to her, but 
he has not the courage to do it. 



J'ai besoin de lui parler. 
Je n'ai pas le temps d' aller chez lui. 
Avoir Vintention. 
Avoir envie. 

A-t-il l'intention d'aller la trouver ? 
II a envie de lui parler, mais il n'en 
a pas le courage. 



(b.) To, in order to, before the infinitive, is expressed by pour; as, 

I call you to show you this. Je vous appelle pour vous montrer 

ceci. 
I go to him to speak to him about it. Je vais le trouver pour lui en parler. 



IS 



VINGT-QUATRlfcME LE£ON. 



YOCABULAIRE 24. 



The clerk. 


Le commis. 


The custom-house. La douane. 


A drawer. 


Un'tiroir. 


A cupboard. 


Une armoire. 


A cask. 


Un tonneau. 


A measure. 


Une mesure. 


A bushel. 


Un boisseau. 


A pound. 


Une livre. 


A number. 


Un nombre. 


A quantity. 


Une quantite. 


A month. 


Un mois. 


A week. 


Une semaine. 


To be willing. 
To wish. 


[• Vouloir. 


To intend. 
To expect. 


> Compter. 


To have a wish, ; 


>• Avoir envie. 


To intend. 


Avoir l'intention. 


mind, a desire. 






To be obliged, must. Devoir. 


To go to. 


Aller trouver. 


To go for. 


Aller chercher. 


To send for. 


Envoy er chercher. 


Alone. 


Seul. 


Together. 


Ensemble. 


Next. 


Prochain. 


Last. 


Pass6, dernier. 


Now. 


Maintenant. 


Forthwith. 
Immediately. 


>• Sur le champ. 


Presently. 


Tout-a-Pheure. 


By and by. 


Tant6t. 


Soon, very soon. 


Bient6t. 


To-morrow. 


Demain. 




Exercice 24. 





1. Allez-vous travailler? 2. Je vais etudier ma lecon. 3. 
Ne voulez-vous pas aller an marche ? 4. J'aime mieux rester 
ici. 5. Quand comptez-vous aller a, Boston ? 6. Je compte y 
aller la semaine prochaine. '7. Comptez-vous avoir de l'argent 
bientot? 8. Je compte en avoir demain. 9. Avez-vons envie 
d' aller au bureau avec moi? 10. Je n'ai pas le temps; je dois 
aller trouver ma sceur; elle a besoin de me parler. 11. Qu' allez- 
vous chercher ? 12. Je vais chercher la lettre pour vous la mon- 
trer. 13. Le commis doit-il aller a la douane ce matin ? 14. 
II doit y aller tantot. 15. Quand va-t-il chercher de l'argent? 
16. II va en chercher tout-a-1'heure. 17. Votre pere est-il deja 
au bureau? 18. II doit y 6tre maintenant. 19. Qu'envoyez- 
vous chercher? 20. Nous envoyons chercher un boisseau de 
pommes de terre, une demi-mesure de peches et deux livres et 
demie de sucre. 21. Voulez-vous rester ici? 22. Je n'ai pas 
envie de rester ici seul. 23. Voulons-nous aller ensemble au 



VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQX)N, *79 

<ooncertf 24. Je veux bien. 25. Que veulent ees hommes? 
26. lis desirent vous parler. 27. Votre frere ne veut-il pas vous 
montrer ce qui est dans son tiroir ? 28. II ne veut pas me mon- 
trer ce qu'il a dans son armoire. 29. Votre cousin a-t-il l'inten- 
tion de parler a cette dame ? 30. II a envie de lui parler, mais 
il n'en a pas le courage. 31. Quand avez-vous l'intention d'en- 
voyer chercher votre petit chien? 32. J'ai l'intention de l'en- 
voyer chercher le mois prochain. 33. Pourquoi m'appelez-vous I 
34. Je vous appelle pour vous montrer la quantite de fruit que 
nous avons cette annee. 35. Avez-vous encore du vin de Tan- 
nee passee? 36. jSTous en avons encore un tonneau plein. 37. 
Avez-vous envie d'aller au jardin avec moi ? 38. Je n'ai pas le 
temps d'aller au jardin; je dois aller au grenier pour chercher 
des paniers vides, que nous allons remplir de poires. 39. Avez- 
vous beaucoup de paniers vides ? 40. Nous en avons un grand 
ziombre. 



Theme 24. 

1. Have you a mind to work in the garden? 2. I have not 
(je n'en ai pas envie) ; I like better to study my lesson. 3. 
Where is the man who wants to sell you his horse ? 4. I am 
going to show you the horse which we have a mind to buy. 5. 
I intend to go to Boston next week ; will you go with me ? 6. 
I have no time to go there. 7. Do you expect to have your new 
carriage soon ? 8. I expect to have it to-morrow. 9. Do you 
intend to go to your sister by and by? 10. I must go to her 
immediately; she wants to speak to me. 11. Will you go to 
the custom-house? 12. I am not willing to go there alone. 
13. Shall we go there together? 14. Do your sisters wish to go 
to market? 15. They have no time to go there; they are to go 
somewhere this morning with my mother. 16. Where is the 
letter which I am to show to my uncle? 17. The letter you 
speak of is in the drawer of the bureau ; but I have no time now 
to go for it. 18. I am to go presently to the carpenter; father 
wants to speak to him. 19. Do you send for any thing? 20. 
I send for half a pound of tea, a small measure of pears and a 



80 



VINGT-CINQUIEME LE^ON, 



bushel of apples. 21. Have you any preserves left of last year f 
22. We have a quantity. 23. Where is the bottle which I am 
to fill with red ink ? 24. We have a great number of empty 
bottles ; we have a cast full of them. 25. I have a mind to 
choose one of these cravats ; which one pleases you (yous plait) 
the most? 26. I like this blue cravat pretty well (assez bieri)^ 
27. Is your cousin going for that lady ? 28. He has a desire to 
go for her, but he has not the courage to do it. 29. My father 
intends to send for her next month. 30. I am going to market 
to buy some strawberries. 31. My umbrella is in the cupboard ; 
will you have the kindness to go for it. 32. Have you money 
enough to buy what we want I 



25. VINGT-CHSTQUIEME LE^ON. 

Irregular Verbs. — Indicative Present. 



95 • (a.) To open. Ouvkir. irr. 

I open. We open. J'ouvre. 

(&.) T© GO OUT. SORTIR. %TT. 

I go out. "We go out. Je sots. 

(c.) To come. Venir. irr» 

I come. We come. Je viens. 

They come. lis viennent. 



Nous ouvrons* 
Nous sorton$» 
Nous venons. 



96i Hereafter^ the first person singular and plural, only, of the 
indicative present of irregular verbs, will be given. From this t 
the remaining persons are regularly obtained, by changing the 
person-endings in the following manner : 

Singular. — When the first person ends in e r add s for the 
second ; the third person is like the first ; as, 
I open, thou openest, he opens. J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre. 

When the first person ends in s or x, the second is like the 
first, and in the third person the s or x is changed into t ; as, 



VINGT-CIXQUdlirE LEgON. 



81 



I come, thou comest, he comes. Je viens, tu viens, il vient. 

I am willing, thou art willing, he Je veux, tu veux, il veut. 
is willing. 

Kem. — Verbs ending in ds or ts in the first person, drop the s 
in the third ; as, je vends, il vend ; je mets (I put), il met. 

Plural. — The termination oris of the first person, is changed 
into ez for the second, and into ent for the third ; as, 

We open, you open, they open. Nous ouvrons, vous ouvrez, Us ou- 

vrent. 
We go out, you go out, they go out. Nous sortons, vous sortez, Us sortent. 

Kem. — In some verbs, the root is different in the singular from 
what it is in the plural. In such case, the third person plural, 
generally, has the root of the singular ; as, 

We come, you come, they come. Nous venons, vous venez, Us viennent. 

We are willing, you are willing, Nous voulons, vous voulez, Us veulent. 
they are willing. 

When this irregularity occurs, the third person plural will be 
given. 



97* Where do you come from ? 
I come from home. 
Do you come from the market ? 
We do. 

To hold; to keep. 
Who is holding your horse ? 
They keep a dry -goods store. 

If; whether. 

If he wishes. If she is willing. 

Do you keep the door open ? 

Yes, for it is warm here. 

Why do you not leave the window 

shut? 
I open it to air the room. 

We breakfast early. 
We go out at seven o'clock in the 
morning. 



D'ou venez- vous ? 

Je viens de chez moi. 

Yenez-vous du marche ? 

Nous en venons. 

Tenir. irr. (95, c.)* 

Qui tient votre cheval ? 

lis tiennent un magasin de nou- 
veautes. 

Si (elides the i before il, Us). 

S'il veut. Si elle veut. 

Tenez-vous la porte ouverte ? 

Oui, car il fait chaud ici. 

Pourquoi ne laissez-vous pas la fe- 
netre fermee ? 

Je l'ouvre pour donner de Vair a la 
chambre. 

Nous dejeunons de bonne heure. 

Nous sortons a sept heures du ma- 
tin. 



* The reference indicates the model verb, after which this one is conjugated, 

4* 



82 vingt-cinqttiEme LEgON. 

VOCABULAIRE 25. 

The door-keeper. ) Le t ier. The door# 

The porter.* ) 



i port 
The shutter. 

A 



Le volet. 



The window. 



dry-goods ( Un magasin de gi]k ^ 

store. ( nouveautes. 



La porte. 

j La fenetre, or 
( La croisee. 
( La soierie, or 
( Les soieries. 



To come. 


Venir. 


To hold ; to keep. 


Tenir. 


To go out. 


1 Sortir. 


To enter, to go in. 


1 Entrer. 


To come out. 


To come in. 


To open. 


Ouvrir. 


To shut. 


Fermer. 


To breakfast. 


Dejeuner. 


To eat or take supper. Souper 


To bring, (to carry 


'.) Apporter. 


To bring back. 


Rapporter. 


To bring, (to lead.) Amener. 


To lead or drive back. Ramener. 


From where. 


D'ou. 


From there. 


En, de la. 


First. 


(• D'abord. 


Then, afterwards. 


Ensuite. 


In the first place. 






Early. 


De bonne heure. 


Late. 


Tard. 


Open. 


Ouvert. 


Shut. 


Ferme. 


Warm. 


Chaud. 


Cold. 


Froid. 


If, whether. 


Si. 


For, (conj.) 


Car. 


I am willing. 


Je veux bien. 


Willingly. 


Volontiers. 



Exercice 25. 

1. D'ou venez-vous ? 2. Je viens du village. 3. Qui tient 
votre cheval? 4. Le domestique le tient. 5. Ne voulez-vous 
pas entrer ? 6'. Je n'ai pas le temps d' entrer. 7. D'ou viennent 
ces marchands ? 8. lis viennent de la ville. 9. Que tiennent- 
ils? 10. lis tiennent un magasin de nouveautes. 11. Quels 
articles tenez-vous? 12. Nous tenons les soieries. 13. Sortez- 
vous le soir? 14. Je sors tous les soirs. 15. Soupez-vous de 
bonne heure? 16. Nous soupons a huit heures, et ensuite 
nous sortons. 17. Votre soeur sort-elle le matin de bonne 
heure? 18. Ma mere et ma soeur dejeunent a sept heures, et 

* The door-keeper (the person that attends to the door), le portier ; the porter (one 
that carries messages), le commissionnaire ; the porter (in an hotel or public edifice, 
the janitor), le concierge. 



VTNGT-CINQUIEME LE£GN. 83 

ensuite elles sortent ensemble pour aller au marche. 19. Ou- 
vrez-vous la fenetre ? 20. J'ouvre la fenetre pour fermer le volet. 
21. uvrez- vous votre magasin de bonne heure ? 22. Nous l'ou- 
vrons de bonne heure et nous le fermons tard. 23. Voulez-vous 
me tenir compagnie ce matin ? 24. Je veux bien, si mon pere 
n'a pas besoin de moi. 25. Voulons-nous demander a votre 
frere, s'il veut dejeuner avec nous? 26. Jevais le lui demander. 
27. Laissez-vous la porte ouverte? 28. Oui; pour donner de 
Fair a la chambre, ear il fait chaud ici. 29. Tenez-vous la croi- 
see de votre chambre ouverte la nuit? 30. Non; je la tiens 
fermee a present, ear il fait deja froid la nuit. 31. Que nous 
apportez-vous pour notre dejeuner? 32. Je vous apporte des 
cotelettes de veau, une omelette, du cafe, du pain et du beurre. 
33. Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de fermer la porte ? 34. Je la 
laisse ouverte pour laisser entrer vos neveux, qui viennent. 35. 
Bonjour, mes amis, d'ou venez-vous? 36. Nous venons de chez 
nous. 37. Notre tante vient-elle du marche ? 38. Elleenvient, 
et vous en rapporte un panier plein de fruit. 39. Pourquoi ne 
nous amenez-vous pas votre petite sceur ? 40. Je vais vous IV 
mener demain, si elle veut venir. 41. Ou le portier doit-il aller? 
42. H doit aller d'abord a la banque, et ensuite a la douane. 



Theme 25. 

1. "Where does the porter come from ? 2. He comes from 
the custom-house. 3. Those foreigners come from France (de 
France). 4. They bring silk goods from there. 5. They are 
going to open a dry-goods store in this city. 6. What are you 
holding ? 7. I am holding my umbrella. 8. Are you going 
out? 9. I am going out with my brother. 10. We breakfast 
early, and then we go out together. 11. Are your sisters going 
out with you? 12. They have no desire to go out at present; 
they intend to go out in the afternoon, if it is not cold. 13. Do 
you eat supper early? 14. JSTo, sir; we take a late supper. 15. 
Why do you open the window ? 16. I open it to air the room, 
for it is close (etouffant) in this room. 17. We open our store 
early in the morning (le matin de bonne heure), and we shut it 



84 YINGT-SIXlllME LECON. 

late at night. 18. Our neighbors open their shutters very early 
(de grand matin). 19. I often think that they keep them open 
all the night, for I seldom see (vols) them shut. 20. Do you 
leave the door of your room open? 21. / loch the door (je 
ferme la porte a clef), but I leave the window open. 22. Good 

morning (Bonjour) Mr. B ; will you walk in? 23. I thank 

you ; I have no time to go in \ I bring you a letter from your 
uncle. 24. "Will you open the street door (la porte de la rue) to 
let the children come in ? 25. Where do you come from ? 26. 
We come from our aunt's, and we bring back from there these 
pretty baskets of flowers. 27. Are you going to give some to 
your sister ? 28. We are first going to show them to mother 
(a notre mere), and then we are going to give some to Mary 
(Marie). 29. I am willing to lend you my knife, if you will 
bring it back to me immediately (tout de suite) ; for I want it to 
cut the leaves of this book. 30. Charles, do you bring us your 
brother? 31. I do not bring him to-day r but i" will (je vais) 
bring him to you to-morrow ? if he will come with me. 32. The 
coachman takes the horses to the river, and from there* (de la) 
(he takes them)f back to the stable. 33. Will you have the 
kindness to hold this umbrella for a moment (un instant) ? 34, 
Yery willingly. 



26. VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON. 

98. To see. Voir. irr. 

I see. We see. Je vols. Nous voyons. 

They see. Us voient. 

To know, to know how. Savoir. irr. 

I know. We know. Je sais. Nous savons. 

TO BE ABLE, CAN. PoUVOIR. irr. 

I can, thou canst, he can. Je puis or peux, tu peux, il peut. 

We can, you can, they can. Nous pouvons, vous pouvez, Us peu- 

vent. 

* From there is expressed by de Id when it precedes the subject 
t See note, page 8. 



VINGT-SIXIEME LE§ON. 



85 



TO DO, TO MAKE. FAIRE. ITT, 

I do or make. We do or make. Jefais. Nous faisons, 

You do or make. They do or make. Vousfaites. lis font. 

To SAY, TO TELL. DlRE. ITf. 

I say or tell. "We say or telL Je dis. Nous disons. 

You say or tell. They say or tell. Vous dites. lis disent. 



(Do you know 

(Do you know 

(Are you able ?) 
I do that? 



99« The fountain is in the mid- 
dle of the square. 
I see it in the looking-glass. 
"We see the physician coming. 
We see him coming ; he comes to 

see us. 
Can you dance? 

how?) 
Can you do that? 

how?) 
Can you do that ? 
Can I do that ? 
You may do it, if you like. 
Will you do me a kindness, a favor ? 
Willingly, if I can. 
I cannot. 

Rem. — Pas may be omitted 
cesser (to cease), oser (to dare). 

Do you know whether your brother 

is at home ? 
I do not know whether he is or not. 
Do you tell what you do ? 
Do you tell him that ? J 

Do you tell him of it ? j 

I do. 



La fontaine est au milieu de la 

place. 
Je la vois dans le miroir. 
Nous voyons venir le medecin. 
Nous le voyons venir ; il vient nous 

voir. 
Savez-vous danser ? 

Savez-vous faire cela ? 

Pouvez-vous faire cela ? 

Puis-je faire cela ? (not peux-je.) 

Vous pouvez le faire, si vous voulez, 

Voulez-vous me faire un plaisir ? 

Volontiers, si je puis. 

Je ne puis, or je ne peux pas. 

with the verbs pouvoir, savoir, 



Savez-vous si votre frere est a la 

maison ? 
Je ne sais s'il y est ou non. 
Dites-vous ce que vous faites ? 

Lui dites-vous cela ? 

Je le lui dis. 



100 • To pass. 
To pass through the town. 
Which way (where) are they to pass. 
They must pass this way, that way. 
I look out of the window to see 

them pass. 
They walk slowly. 



Passer. 

Passer par la ville. 

Par ou doivent-ils passer ? 

lis doivent passer par ici, par Id. 

Je regarde par la fenetre pour lea 

voir passer. 
Us marchent lentement. 



86 



VINGT-SIXIEME LEgON. 



Have you a good seat ? Avez-vous une bonne place ? 

Yes ; and we have room for you, if Oui ; et nous avons de la place pour 
you wish to come this way. vous, si vous voulez venir par ici. 



VOCABULAIRE 26. 



The corner. 

The middle. 
The looking-glass, 
The duty; the 
task (exercise), 



;} 



Le coin. 

Le milieu. 
Le miroir. 

Le devoir. 



Place ; the seat. 
Koom; the square. 
The fountain. 
The pier-table. 

The task. 



(•La place. 

La fontaine. 
La console. 

La tache. 



To see. 


Voir. 


To know. 


Savoir. 


To be able, can. 


Pouvoir. 


To do, to make. 


Faire. 


To say, to tell. 


Dire. 


To pass. 


Passer. 


To place. 


Placer. (70,0.) 


To march, to walk. 


Marcher. 


Fast. 


Vite. 


Slowly. 


Lentement. 


By, through. 


Par. 


"Which way. 


Par ou. 


This way. 


Par ici. 


That way. 


Par la. 


Everywhere. 


Partout. 


Elsewhere. 
Somewhere else. 


>• Ailleurs. 
c Du tout. 


Everywhere else. 


Partout ailleurs. 


At all, not at all. 


•J Pas du tout. 
( Point du tout. 



Exercice 26. 

1. Voyez-vous mon frere quelque part? 2. Je le vois au coin 
de la rue. 3. Vient-il par ici ? 4. Non, M. ; il entre dans la 

rne 5. Yoyez-vons venir le medecin ? 6. Nous le voyons 

venir. 7. Vient-il voir quelqu'un ici ? 8. II vient voir ma mere, 
qui est malade. 9. Savez-vous ou est ma sceur ; je la cherche 
partout? 10. Je ne sais pas ou elle est. 11. Sait-elle que nous 
allonsaubal? 12. Ellelesait; elle y va aussi. 13. Savez-vous 
vos lecons par cceur? 14. Nous les savons par cceur. 15. 
Voulez-vous me faire un plaisir ? 16. Volontiers, si je puis. 17. 
Voulez-vous rester avec moi ce matin? 18. Je ne puis, je dois 
aller chez mon oncle. 19. Puis-je y aller avec vous ? 20. Vous 
pouvez y aller avec moi, si vous voulez. 21. Voulons-nous y ai- 



VINGT-SIXIEME LE£ON. 87 

ler a present? 22. Nous ne pouvons pas, car je dois d'abord 
faire mon devoir. 23. Faites-vous ce que vous voulez? 24. Je 
ne fais pas ce que je veux. 25. Qui peut faire ce qu'il veut dans 
ce pays-ci ? 26. Personne ne peut faire ce qu'il veut, ni ici ni 
ailleurs. 27. Savez-vous ce que fait votre frere?* 28. Je ne 
sais pas ce qu'il fait. 29. Ces hommes savent-ils ce qu'ils font? 
30. lis ne savent pas ce qu'ils font. 31. Que dites-vous? 32. 
Je dis qu'il fait mauvais temps. 33. Que dit ce monsieur ? 34. 
II dit qu'il n'a pas d'argent ici, mais qu'il en a ailleurs. 35. Fai- 
tes-vous ce que vous dites ? 36. Nous faisons ce que nous disons. 
37. Ces messieurs disent-ils ce qu'ils font? 38. Us ne disent pas 
ce qu'ils font. 39. Pourquoi regardez-vous par la fen&tre ? 40. 
Je regarde pour voir passer le monde qui sort de l'eglise. 41. 
Marchez-vous lentement quand il fait froid ? 42. Nous marchons 
vite quand il fait froid. 43. D'ou apportez-vous cette eau? 44. 
Je l'apporte de la fontaine, qui est au milieu de la place. 45. 
Laissez-vous cette console au milieu de la chambre ? 46. Non, 
M. ; nous la placons sous ce miroir. 47. Pouvez-vous placer ces 
caisses dans votre magasin ? 48. Nous ne pouvons pas ; nous 
n'y avons plus de place du tout. 



Theme 26. 

1. Do you see the fountain which is in the middle of the 
square ? 2. We see it in the looking-glass. 3. I see our cousins 
at the corner of the street, but I do not know whether they see 
me or not. 4. Henry sees me ; he is coming this way. 5. Does 
your father know that I am here ? 6. He knows it ; he ivill be 
here in an instant (il va venir a V instant). 7. Can your cousins 
(fern.) dance ? 8. They can dance and sing ; but why do you 
wish to know that ? 9. I wish to ask them if they will dance 
with me. 10. Do you go out this afternoon? 11. I am going 
to see a friend of mine (un de mes amis). 12. Can I go with 
you? 13. You may go with me, if you like. 14. "Which way 
are we to go? 15. Can we pass through Henry-street? 16. 

* In a relative sentence, the pronoun que being the only object of the verb, the noun 
subject is more elegantly placed after the verb than before it. 



88 



VINGT-SEPTIIIME LE£0N. 



We can pass that way. 17. You walk very slowly. 18. My 
dear friend, it is too warm to walk fast. 19. Will you do me a 
favor? 20. Willingly, if I can. 21. Will you go to the bank 
for me? 22. I will (Je mux bien). 23. Can they not give me 
the money to-day ? 24. It is too late ; but if you want money, 
I can lend you some. 25. What are you doing ? 26. I am 
doing my task. 27. What are your neighbors doing ? 28. 
They are making music. 29. What do you say ? 30. I do not 
say any thing at all. 31. We do what we say; do you tell all 
you do? 32. Nobody tells all he does. 33. Where can I find 
your uncle ; I am looking for him everywhere ? 34. He will be 
(il va venir) here presently ; he must be here precisely at three 
o'clock (a t?'ois heures precises). 35. Can you not place this pier- 
table somewhere else ? 36. No, sir ; everywhere else it is in our 
way (elle nous gene). 37. Who tells you so (cela)1 38. 7" 
((Test moi qui) say* so. 39. And I (Et moi je) tell you that I 
will not have it here ; you may place it anywhere else (partout 
ailleurs), but not here. 



27. VINGT-SEPTlfiME LEgON. 
101. 

(a.) To BE ACQUAINTED WITH. ) ~ 

x J m \ Connaitre. %rr. 

TO KNOW. J 

I know. We know. Je connais. Nous connaissons, 

(b.) TO CONDUCT. CONDUIRE. irr. 

I conduct. We conduct. Je conduis. Nous conduisons. 

(c.) To extinguish. £teindre. irr. 

I extinguish. We extinguish. J'eteins. Nous eteignons. 

(d.) To put, to put on. Mettre. irr. 

I put. We put. Je mets. Nous mettons. 

(e.) To take. Prendre, irr. 

I take. We take. Je prends. Nous prenons. 

They take. Us prennent. 

* The verb agrees, in number and person, with the antecedent of the relatiye pro- 
noun. 



VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON. 



89 



102« Do you know that French- Connaissez-vous ce Francais ? 



man? 
Do you know French ? 
He takes his mother to church. 
He takes the horse to the stable. 
To take off, to take away. 
Do you take off your gloves ? 
ISo, I put them on. 
Do you put those papers on the 

table ? 
I am going to take them away. 
I am going to take them to the 

other room. 
"Wiry do you not take your own 

book? 
Do you take music lessons ? 
To learn. 
"We learn the ancient and modern 

languages. 
They learn their lessons by heart. 



Savez-vous le francais ? 

II conduit sa mere a l'eglise. 

II niene le cheval a Tecurie. 

Oter. 

Otez-vous vos gants ? 

Is on, je les mets. 

Mettez-vous ces papiers sur la ta- 
ble? 

Je vais les en oter. 

Je yais les porter dans l'autre 
chambre. 

Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas votre 
liyre? 

Prenez-vous des lecons de musique f 

Apprendre. irr. (101, e.) 

ftbus apprenons les langues ancien- 
nes et les modernes. (12.) 

lis apprennent leurs legons par 
cceur. 



103« Before, {priority.) 
Before, [position.) 
Before noon. Before evening. 
I will put your cloak before the fire. 

Before, {followed by a verb.) 

Do you extinguish the candle be- 
fore you light the gas ? 

I light the gas before I extinguish 
the candle. 

After. Behind. 

After rain comes sunshine. 

I put your umbrella behind the 
door. 



Avant. 

Devant. 

Avant midi. Avant le soir. 

Je vais mettre votre manteau de- 
vant le feu. 

Avant de, {with the verb in the in- 
finitive.)* 

Eteignez-vous la chandelle avant 
d'allumer le gaz ? 

J'allume le gaz avant d'eteindre la 
chandelle. 

Apres. D err iere. 

Apres la pluie vient le beau temps, 

Je mets votre parapluie derriere la 
porte. 



* It is to be observed that the verb that precedes and the one that follows oefore, 
must both have the same subject, as in the examples that follow. "When each verb has 
a different subject, the construction here indicated cannot be followed, See (254). 



90 



VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON. 



104# The article is used before the epithets and titles com- 
monly applied to proper names ; as, 



Captain George. 

Doctor Francis. 

Where are you taking little John ? 



Le capitaine George. 
Le docteur Francois. 
Ou conduisez-vous le petit Jean ? 



We say : prendre du cafe, du the ; and prendre le cafe, le 
the ; the former, to distinguish one beverage from another ; the 
latter, when we mention it as an habitual or daily thing ; as, 

Do you take coffee or tea ? Prenez-vous du cafe ou du the ? 

We take coffee after dinner. Nous prenons le cafe apres diner. 



VOCABULAIRE 27. 



The fire, a fire. 
A candlestick. 
The gas. 
The burner. 



Le feu, du feu. A light. 

Un chandelier. A candle. 

Le gaz. A lamp. 

Le bee. A match. 



A button ; a knob. Un bouton. 

To be acquainted ) ConnaUre 

with, to know. ) 
To extinguish. £teindre. 

To put, to put on. Mettre. 

To take. Prendre. 

Before, {priority) Avant, avant de. 
After. Apres. 

Ancient. Ancien. 

Brown. Brun. 

One-eyed. Borgne.* 



A buckle. 



To conduct. 



De la lumiere. 
Une chandelle. 
Une lampe. 
Une allumette. 
Une boucle. 



Conduire. 



To light, to kindle. Allumer. 
j-Oter. 



To take away. 

To learn. 

Before, {position.) 

Behind. 

Modern. 

Gray. 

Lame. 



Apprendre. 

Devant. 

Derriere. 

Moderne. 

Gris. 

Boiteux* 



Exercice 27. 

1. Connaissez-vous le docteur Francois ? 2. Je leconnais/or£ 
(very) bien, il est de nos amis. 3. Sait-il la langue de ce pays-ci ? 
4. Oui, M. ; il sait l'anglais. 5. Votre sceur connait-elle la dame 
dont nous parlons ? 6. Je ne sais pas si elle la connait, mais mes 



* Borgne and ooltewx are also used as substantives : le borgne, the one-eyed man. 



VINGT-SEPTIEME LE£0N. 91 

cousines la connaissent. 7. Ou conduisez-vous le petit Jean? 
8. Je le conduis chez lui. 9. Qui conduit l'aveugle ? 10. Les 
borgnes conduisent les aveugles. 11. Conduisons-nous ce boi- 
teux chez lui? 12. Nous l'y conduisons. 13. A quelle heure 
eteignez-vous le gaz dans votre chambre? 14. Je l'eteins 
toujours avant minuit. 15. Qui eteint les feux chez vous? 16. 
Les domestiques les eteignent. 17. Eteignons-nous la lampe 
avant d'allurner le gaz? 18. Nous allumons le gaz avant d'e- 
teindre la lampe. 19. Le domestique va-t-il faire du feu? 20. 
II va nous apporter de la lumiere avant de faire du feu. 21. Ou 
mettez-vous vos chandelles ? 22. Je les mets dans l'armoire, et 
les allumettes sont dans le tiroir. 23. Ou met-il le chandelier? 
24. H le met toujours devant la porte. 25. Ou les enfants met- 
tent-ils leurs parapluies ? 26. lis les mettent derriere la porte, 
dans le coin. 27. Quels habits mettez-vous aujourd'hui? 28. 
Nous mettons nos habits bruns et nos gilets gris. 29. Pourquoi 
otez-vous votre chapeau ? 30. Je Tote pour y mettre ce ruban 
vert avec cette boucle d' argent. 31. Le tailleur va-t-il oter ces 
boutons d'acier de votre habit bleu ? 32. II va les en oter, et y 
mettre des boutons de soie. 33. Prenez-vous du cafe le matin ? 
34. Je prends du cafe le matin et du the le soir. 35. Prenez- 
vous le cafe apres diner? 36. Nous prenons toujours le cafe 
apres diner. 37. Ces enfants prennent-ils Fair assez souvent? 
38. lis prennent Pair tous les matins et tous les soirs. 39. Qu'ap- 
prenez-vous ? 40. J'apprends les langues anciennes et les mo- 
derues. 41. Apprenez-vous vos lecons par coeur? 42. Nous 
les apprenons par coeur. 43. Qu'allez-vous faire a present? 
44. Je vais prendre votre redingote grise, la mettre devant le 
feu, ensuite eteindre ce bee de gaz, fermer la porte a clef, et con- 
duire ces enfants chez eux. 



Theme 27. 

1. Do you know that lame man ? 2. I know him; he is a 
Frenchman? 3. Does he know English ? 4. I do not know. 
5. Are you acquainted with Captain Leblanc ? 6. We are not 
well acquainted with him (beaucoup), but my uncle knows him 



92 



VINGT-HUITIEME LE^ON. 



very well. 1. Where are you taking little Henry? 8. I am 
taking him home. 9. We conduct our friends everywhere. 10. 
The one-eyed man conducts the lame man, and the lame conduct 
the blind. 11. Do you extinguish the gas before midnight? 12. 
We always extinguish it before midnight. 13. If I want a light 
after midnight, I light a candle or a lamp. 14. Before I extin- 
guish the gas, I always put a candle and matches on the table 
before my bed. 15. Why does he extinguish that burner? 16. 
He is going to light this one. 17. Is he going to make a fire in 
this room? 18. He must go for wood before he can make a 
fire. 19. Where do you put your umbrellas? 20. We put 
them behind the door. 21. My mother puts on her gray cloak, 
and my sisters put on their brown silk dresses. 22. They extin- 
guish the light before they go out. 23. They put the candle- 
stick behind the door. 24. The servant takes off his coat before 
he makes the fire. 25. Why do you take the buckle from your 
hat? 26. I take it off to put a new ribbon on it. 27. The tai- 
lor is going to take those silk buttons from my green coat, to put 
silver buttons on it. 28. Why do you put those papers on the 
table ? 29. I am going to take them away immediately. 30. 
Will you take this book to the other room ? 31. Why do you 
not take your own book; it lies before you on the table. 32. I 
take coffee in the morning. 33. We take tea at six o'clock. 
34. This youth (jeune homme) learns his lessons by heart. 35. 
These youths (Jeunes gens) learn the ancient and modern lan- 
guages (12). 



28. VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON. 



105. To 


READ. 


Lire. irr. 




I read. 


We read. 


Je lis. 


Nous lisons. 


To WRITE. 




Ecrire. irr. 




I write. 


We write. 


J'ecris. 


Nous ecrivons. 


To DRINK. 




Boire. irr. 




I drink. 


We drink. 


Je bois. 


Nous buvons. 


They drink. 




lis boivent. 





I 



VINGT-HUITIEME LE£ON. 



93 



To BELIEVE. 

I believe. 
They believe. 



"We believe. 



Cboiee. irr. 
Je crois. 
lis croient. 



Nous croyons. 



106# Do you read the paper 

before you go out ? 
Do children write before they read ? 

What do you drink at dinner ? 

Do you believe that man ? 

Do you think that you can do that ? 

I believe I can do it. 

I believe I can. I believe not. 



Lisez-vous la feuille avant de sor- 

tir. 
Les enfants ecrivent-ils avant de 

lire? 
Que buvez-vous a diner ? 
Croyez-vous cet homme ? 
Croy ez-vous pouvoir /aire cela ? 
Je crois pouvoir le faire. 
Je crois que oui. Je crois que non. 



107 1 One, they, people, we. On, (indef, pron., Bdpers. sing.) 

It is said. It is believed. On dit. On croit. 

What is the news ? (What do they Que dit-on de nouveau ? 

say new?) 

Do people believe that? Croit-on cela? 

Rem. 1. — After et, si, ou, id, qui, que, V is generally used be- 
fore on, for euphony ; as, 
It is said and believed. On dit et Ton croit. 

Rem. 2. — On is repeated before each verb that refers to the 

same subject ; as, 

People do not do what they like. On ne fait pas ce que Ton veut. 



108 • To answer a person, a note. 
Do you answer him who speaks to 

you? 
I do. 
Do you answer the physician*s note ? 

I do. 

To wait for, to expect. 

Are they waiting for you at home ? 

We expect company to night. 

To hear ; to understand. 

I hear a noise. 



Repondre a qqn., a un billet 
Repondez-vous a celui qui vous 

parle ? 
Je lui reponds. 
Eepondez-vous au billet du m6de- 

cin? 
J'y reponds. 
Attendre. 

Vous attend-on chez vous ? 
Nous attendons du monde ce soir. 
Entendre. 
J'entends du bruit, 



94 



vingt-huitiIjme LEgoiv T . 



Do you not hear that somebody is 

calling you ? • 
To comprehend, to understand. 
Do you understand all you read ? 



N'entendez-vous pas qu'on vous 

appelle ? 
Comprendre. irr. (101, e.) 
Comprenez-vous tout ce que vous 

lisez ? 



109» To hear news. 

To hear a thing. 

To hear of. 

To hear from. 
Will you try (taste) that syrup ? 
How does that syrup taste ? 
It tastes good. It tastes bitter. 



Apprendre des nouvelles. 

Entendre dire une chose. 

Entendre parler de. 

Recevoir des nouvelles de. 

Voulez-vous gouter ce sirop ? 

Quel gout ce sirop a-t-il ? 

II a bon gout* II a un gotit amer.* 





VOCABULAIRE 28. 




The journal 
The note. 
The ticket. 


Le journal. 
X Le billet. 


The newspaper. 
The intelligence. 
The news. 


La feuille. 
>• La nouvelle. 


The noise. 
The rumor. 


y Le bruit. 


The news. 


Les nouvelles. 


The lemon. 
Cider. 


Le citron. 
Du cidre. 


The orange. 
Lemonade. 


L'orange. 

De la limonade. 


Syrup. 
Biscuit. 


Du sirop. 
Le biscuit. 


Liquor. 
Cinnamon. 


De la liqueur. 
La cannelle. 


To read. 


Lire. 


To write. 


Ecrire. 


To drink. 


Boire. 


To believe. 


Croire. 


To answer. 

To hear. 

To understand. 


Kepondre. 
>■ Entendre. 


To wait ; to expect. Attendre. 
To comprehend. ) p , 
To understand. ) 


To taste, to try. 
Sweet. 


Gouter. 
Doux,/<?m. douce. 


To try ; to try on 
Sour. 


. Essayer. 
Aigre. 


Hard. 


Dur. 


Bitter. 


Amer. 


Fine. 


Fin. 


Common, coarse. 


Commun. 


One, people, they. On. 
Rather, (W^-)^ 
ing an adj. or ad.) ) 


Very ; much, many. Bien. j- 
Pretty, {modifying ) Aggez> 
an adj. or adv.) ) 



* See note, page 102. 

t Bien, as an adverb of quantity, is the only one that does not require the suppression 
of the article before a partitive noun. (76, Exo. 8d.) Bien des choses, or leaucoup de 
chose&, many things. 



VlKGT-HUIT'lflME LE£OK. 

Exercice 28. 

1. Quel journal lisez-vous? 2. Je lis la feuille d'aujourd'hui, 
3. Qu'ecrivez-vous ? 4. J'ecris un billet a ma tante. 5. Votre 
tante vous ecrit-elle sou vent ? 6. Ma tante et ma cousine nous 
ecrivent tres-souvent. 7. Lisez-vous les journaux avant d'ecrire 
vos billets ? 8. Non, M. ; nous ecrivons nos billets avant de lire 
les journaux. 9. Quelle est cette liqueur que vous buvez? 10, 
Je bois du cidre doux. 11. Votre frere boit-il du vin ? 12. Non, 
M. ; nous ne buvons jamais de vin, ni lui ni moi. 13. Les en- 
fants boivent-ils de la limonade? 14. lis boivent de l'eau avec 
du sirop ; nous n'avons pas de citron pour faire de la limonade. 
15. Voulez-vous des oranges aigres ou des oranges douces? 16, 
J'aime bien mieux les oranges douces. 17. Mettez-vous votre 
chapeau pour sortir? 18. Oui, M. ; je vais au marche pour ap- 
prendre les nouvelles. 19. Que dit-on au marche? 20. On y 
dit bien des choses. 21. Croyez-vous tout ce que vous entendez 
dire au marche? 22. Je ne crois pas tout ce qu'on y dit. 23. 
Ces demoiselles croient-elles savoir cela mieux que nous ? 24. 
Non, M. ; nous ne croyons pas cela. 25. Repondez-vous a celui 
qui vous parle ? 26. Je lui reponds, mais il ne m'entend pas. 
27. N'entendez-vous pas ce qu'on vous dit? 28. Je l'entends 
tres-bien, mais je n'ai pas le temps d'y repondre. 29. Recevez- 
vous sou vent des nouvelles de votre frere ? 30. Nous recevons 
souvent de ses nouvelles ; nous attendons des nouvelles de lui 
par le steamer. 31. Entend-on encore parler de cette musicien- 
ne ? 32. On n'entend plus parler d'elle. 33. Savez-vous qu'on 
vous attend chez vous? 34. Je sais qu'on m'y attend. 35. En- 
tendez-vous le bruit qu'on fait dans la rue ? 36. J'entends qu'on 
y fait du bruit. 37. Comprenez-vous ce que vous lisez? 38. 
Nous ne comprenons pas tout ce que nous lisons. 39. Voulez- 
vous gouter ce biscuit ? 40. Je veux bien le gouter ; il a bon 
gout, mais je le trouve bien dur. 41. Comment trouvez-vous 
cette cannelle ? 42. Je trouve qu'elle a un gout un peu amer. 
43. Allez-vous essayer votre habit neuf ? 44. Je n'ai pas le temps 
de l'essayer a present. 45. Que dites-vous du drap ; il est beau 
et fin ; n'est-ce pas ? 46. Pas trop ; je le trouve assez commun. 



v6 vingt-huitieme le90n, 

Theme 28. 

1. I read the paper before I breakfast. 2. My father reads 
the journals after supper (apres souper). 3. You read too fast ; 
I cannot understand you. 4. Do we not read slowly enough ? 
5. What are you writing ? 6. I am writing a note to my uncle. 
7. He writes to us, and we write to him, very often. 8. Can 
those children read and write ? 9. They read and write every 
day. 10. What are you drinking? 11. I am drinking sour ci- 
der, and he drinks lemonade. 12. We like sweet liquor better 
than sour, but we drink what we have. 13. The children drink 
water with syrup. 14. We cannot make lemonade, for we have 
no lemons ; but we have some sweet oranges, which are very 
good; will you taste some? 15. This orange tastes bitter; I 
do not like it. 16. We go every day to the exchange to hear 
the news. 17. Do you believe what they say there ? 18. I be- 
lieve only a part of it ; one hears many things which he cannot 
believe. 19. Why do you not answer this man? 20. I cannot 
answer him, for he does not understand French, and I do not know 
English. 21. Will you hand (passer) me the doctor's note; I 
will (vais) answer it before I go out. 22. I have no time to 
wait for you ; they are waiting for me at home. 23. I hear a 
noise in the street ; do you hear it ? 24. OA, yes ( Certainement) ; 
one always hears noise in this street. 25. We expect news from 
home by the steamer. 26. We hear from home very often. 
27. Where is Mr. B. . . . now ? 28. I do not know ; one does 
not hear of him now (ne. . . .plus). 29. I do not comprehend 
how they make this ; do you know it ? 30. One sees and hears 
many things in this world which one does not comprehend. 
31. Will you taste these biscuits? 32. They are rather hard, 
but they taste good ; they taste of cinnamon. 33. Will you try 
on this frock-coat ? 34. I do not want to try it on ; I do not 
like that cloth, it is too common ; I prefer fine cloth. 



V 






VINGT-NEUVI&ME LE$ON. 



9? 



29. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON, 

Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs, 

llOt Adjectives and adverbs are compared by means of ad- 
verbs; as, 



Tall, taller, the tallest. 

Slowly, more slowly, the most slow- 
ly. 

Studious, less studious, the hast stu- 
dious. 

You are taller than I. 

He is taller than any of us. 

The richest man in the city. 



Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. 
Lentement, plus lentement } le plus 

lentement. 
Studieux, moins studieux, le moins 

studieux. 
Vous etes plus grand que moL 
II est le plus grand de nous tous. 
L'homme le plus riche de la ville. 



111. As, so AS. 

The one is as skilful as the other. 
Charles is not so studious as his 

brother. 
He writes as well a3 his brother. 
Quite as welL 

As MUCH, SO MUCH OT MANY. . . .AS. 

"We have as many vessels as the 

English. 
We have not so many as they. 

We have just as many. 



Aussi QUE. 

L'un est aussi habile que l'autre. 
Charles n'est pas aussi (or pas «i)* 

studieux que son frere. 
H ecrit aussi bien que son frere. 
Tout aussi bien. 

AUTANT QUE. 

Nous avons autant de vaisseaux 
que les Anglais. 

Nous n'en avons pas autant (or pas 
tant)* qu'eux. 

Nous en avons tout autant. 

Rem. — The preposition de, which precedes the noun after au- 
tant, plus, moins, must be repeated before the noun that follows 
que, when it is the object of the comparison; as, 

Autant de sucre que de cafe. 
Plus de l'un que de l'autre. 
Moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 



As much sugar as coffee. 

More of the one than of the other. 

Less of the latter than of the former. 



112. The following adjectives and adverbs are irregularly 
compared : 



* In a negative sentence, si may be used for aussi ,* and tant t for autant. 
6 



98 



VINGT-NEUVIEME LE£OK. 



Good, better, the best. 
Little, less, the least. 
Small, smaller, the smallest. 
Bad, worse, the worst. 
Well y better, the best. 
Much, more, the most. 
Badly, worse, the worst. 
Little, less, the least. 



Bon, meilleur, le meilleuf. 
Petit, moindre, le moindre. 

Mauvais, pire, le pire. 
Bien, mieux, le mieux. 
Beaucoup, plus, le plus. 
Mai, pis, le pis. 
Peu, moins, le moins. 



Rem, — Petit, small, applied to size; mauvais, bad, speaking 
of the quality of a thing ; and mal, badly, when it means the 
manner how, are regularly compared _; plus petit 7 plus mauvais f 
plus mal, &c. 



113* To return, to come back. 
To return, to go back. 
I go to town by water and return 

by the railroad. 
I come by water and return by the 

railroad. 
To doubt To think, {to judge.) 
Do you doubt that ? 
I do not. 

What do you think of that business ? 
I do not know what I am to think 

of it. 

He does not think of that. 



Mevenir. (96, e.) 

Retourner. 

Je vais a la ville par eau, et j'eo 

reviens par le chemin de fer. 
Je viens par eau et je retourne par 

le chemin de fer. 
Douter (de). Penser, (trans.) 
Doutez-vous de cela ? 
Je n'en doute pas. 
Que pensez-vous de cette affaire % 
Je ne sais ee que je dois en penser. 

\ II ne pense pas a cela. 
\ H n'y pense pas. 



1 1 4 • An affair, matter, business. 



How does that matter stand ? 
We do business with your uncle. 

How is business ? 

Trade is dull. 

He sells for cash, on credit. 

He sells cheap, dear. 

To run into debt. To give credit. 



Tine affaire. 

Pes affaires. 

Comment va cette affaire ? 

Nous faisons des affaires avec votre 

oncle. 
Comment vont les affaires ? 
Le commerce va mal 
II vend comptant, a credit. 
II vend a bon niarche, cher. 
Faire des dettes. Faire credit 



VINGT-NEUYlllME LEC0X, 



99 



Heaven. 

The sky. 
The shore. 
The border. 

A ship. 
A vessel. 

A string. 
The wind. 
The way, road. 
The return. 
The bargain. 
Commerce. 
The credit. 
The Englishman, 



- Le ciel. 



■ Le bord. 

Un vaisseau * 
Un navire. 
, Un batiment. 
Un cordon. 
Le vent. 
Le chemin. 
Le retour. 
Le marche. 
Le commerce. 
Le credit. 
L'Anglais. 



VOCABULAIRE 29. 

The earth. 
Land, ground. 

The sea. 



To return. 
To come back 
To doubt. 



As, so. 

As. 

For cash. 

Cheap. 
On land. 
Long. 



y Revenir. 
Douter (de). 
Aussi, (adv.) 

Que, (conj.) 
( Comptant, or 
\ Argent comptant. 

A bon marche. 

A terre. 

Long, fern, longue. 



The navy. 
A sail. 

A rope. 
The steam. 
The road. 
The arrival. 
An affair. 
Business. 
The debt, 
England. 



- La terre. 

La mer. 

La marine, f 
Une voile. 

Une corde. 
La vapeur. 
La route. 
L'arrivee. 
Une affaire. 
Les affaires. 
La dette. 
L'Angleterre. 



To return. 

To go back. 

To think, (to judge.) Penser, (trans.) 

As much or many 

So much or many. 

Quite, just. Tout. 

On credit. A credit. 



[• Retourner. 



• Autant. 



Narrow; tight, fitroit. 



Dear, (adv.) 
On board. 
Short. 
Wide, broad. 



Cher. 
A bord. 
Court. 
Large. 



Exercice 29. 

1. Le cordon que vous avez, est-il plus long que celui-ci? 2. 
Non, M. ; il est plus court que celui-la. 3. Laquelle de ces deux 
cordes est la plus lougue ? 4. La plus grosse est la plus longue. 
5. Votre chambre est-elle aussi large que celle-ci ? 6. Elle est 
tout aussi large, mais moins longue que celle-ci. 7. Parlez-vous 

* Un xaisseau de guerre, a man of war ; un b&timent marchand, a merchantman ; 
un xaisseau or b&timent a vapeur, a steamer; un b&timent d voiles, a sailing vessel. 
t Un qfficier de la marine, a naval officer. 



100 VINGT-NEUVIEME LE£ON. 

anglais aussi souvent que francais? 8. Je parle anglais plus 
sou vent que francais. 9. Yotre commis sait-il l'anglais aussi 
bien que le francais ? 10. II le sait tout aussi bien. 11. Les 
Anglais ont-ils autant de vaisseaux que nous? 12. Es n'en ont 
pas autant que nous. 13. Avons-nous autant de batiments a 
vapeur qu'eux ? 14. Nous en avons tout autant. 15. Cet An- 
glais vend-il autant de ruban que de velours ? 16. II vend moins 
de celui-ci que de celui-la. 17. Eetournez-vous chez vous par 
ce chemin etroit? 18. Oui, M.; il est moins large et moins 
bon, mais plus court que l'autre, qui passe par le village. 19. 
Eevenez-vous de la campagne par eau ? 20. Nous en revenons 
toujours par le chemin de fer. 21. Ces marcbands retournent- 
ils dans leur pays par terre? 22. Non, M. ; ils y retournent par 
mer. 23. Comment va 1' affaire dont il parle ? 24. Je crois que 
cette affaire va mal. 25. Comment vont les affaires? 26. Les 
affaires vont assez bien. 27. Achete-t-on a bon march e quand 
on achete comptant ? 28. Oui, M. ; et Ton achete cber quand on 
achete a credit. 29. Votre frere va-t-il bientot revenir d'Angle- 
terre ? 30. Nous attendons son retour par le premier steamer. 
31. Connaissez-vous cet ofBcier de la marine? 32. Je le con- 
nais fort bien {very well) ; il nous apporte la nouvelle de l'arrivee 
d'un vaisseau de guerre. 33. Que pense monsieur votre pere 
des nouvelles que nous apprenons ? 34. II pense que ces nou- 
velles ne sont pas favorables au commerce. 35. Doutez-vous de 
cela? 36. Je n'en doute pas. 37. Le capitaine du navire est-il 
a bord? 38. Non, M. ; il est a terre. 39. Ou ce batiment a 
voiles va-t-il ? 40. II va en Angleterre ; il a le vent favorable. 



Theme 29. 

1. Who is richer than our neighbor? 2. No one, I think; 
for they say that he is (c?est) the richest man in the city. 3. 
These roads lead both (tous les deux) to the village where we 
live ; the narrower is the shorter, but the broader is the better of 
the two. 4. That steamship is longer and broader than the sail- 
ing vessels which we see here. 5. Have you a rope as long as 
this string? 6. I have one just as long. 7. Do you know that 



VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. 101 

sea-captain (capitaine de navire) ? 8. We know him very well ; 
we do business with him ; he is a Frenchman. 9. Does he un- 
derstand English? 10. He speaks English as well as you or 
(as) I. 11. Have we as many vessels as the English? 12. We 
have quite as many, but we have not so many men of war as 
they (have). 13. Do we sell as much cotton as wool? 14. We 
sell less of the latter than of the former. 15. Does your brother 
return from the country by the steamboat (bateau a vapeur). 16. 
He and my father always return together by the railroad. 17. 
Are you going to answer this note? 18. I am to wait for the 
return of my father, before I can answer it. 19. When will 
(allez) you return to the country ? 20. I intend to return on (a) 
the arrival of the vessel which we are expecting. 21. My bro- 
ther returns to New Orleans (a la Nouvelle Orleans) by land ; 
he never travels by sea.* 22. How is business ? 23. Not very 
good ; the late news (les dernier es nouvelles) is not favorable to 
(au) commerce. 24. Do you give credit to that naval officer ? 
25. No, sir ; we are not willing to sell to him on credit ; for he 
runs into debt everywhere. 26. People sell cheap when they 
sell for cash, and they sell dear if they sell on credit. 27. Is the 
captain of the vessel on land? 28. No, sir; he is on board with 
all his people (son monde) ; the wind is favorable ; he is going 
to sail (mettre a la voile) this morning for England (69). 29. 
Do you doubt it? 30. We do not doubt it. 31. What do you 
think of this world? 32. I think that this world is not large 
enough for the wicked. 33. Does not heaven restore (rendre) 
to us all that we give to the poor ? 34. Heaven restores to man, 
all that man gives to the earth. 35. I need not try those boots ; 
they are too tight for me ; they are smaller than the others. 36. 
The captain says that these biscuits are worse and harder than 
those he has on board. 

* Voyager tur mer. 



102 TRENTIEME LE£ON. 



30. TRENTIEME LEgON. 

115# The following are idioms, in which to be is rendered by 
avoir, and the English adjective expressed by a noun, before 
which the article is omitted.'* 

To be warm, cold, hungry, thirsty, Avoir chaud, froid, faim, soif, som- 

slecpy, afraid, ashamed, right, meil, peur, honte, raison, tort. 

wrong. 

What is the matter with you ? ) ^ , 9 

. 7 ^ > Quavez-vous? 

What ails you ? J 

Nothing is the matter with me. Je n'ai rien. 

Are you cold ? I am warm. Avez-vous froid ? J'ai chaud. 

He is neither hungry nor thirsty. II n'a ni faim ni soif. 

I am very sleepy. J'ai bienj- sommeil. 

The children are afraid of the dog. Les enfants ont peur du chien. 

He is ashamed of his poverty. II a honte de sa pauvrete. 

Is he not wrong to be ashamed of it ? N'a-t-il pas tort d'en avoir honte ? 

Am I not right in saying that? N'ai-je pas raison de dire cela? 



116. In speaking of the parts of the body, the verb avoir is 
used, with the person as its subject, and with the part mentioned, 
preceded by the article, as its object ; the adjective is placed af- 
ter the noun ; as, 

His hair is black. II a les cheveux noirs. 

Her eyes are blue and her mouth Elle a les yeux bleus et la bouche 

is small. petite. 

She has beautiful blue eyes. Elle a de beaux yeux bleus. 

(a.) In speaking of a part of the body with reference to several 
persons, the noun expressing the part is in the singular, if the 
part is singular in the individual ; as, 
Those children's faces are long. Ces enfants ont la figure longue. 

* In some phrases, principally with the verbs avoir and faire, the verb and the 
noun are closely joined together, expressing but one idea, equivalent to a verb ; as, 
avoir envie ; avoir oesoin ; faire credit, &c. It is the 6ame when an adjective pre- 
cedes the noun ; as, ilfait beau temps ; le gdteau a bon gout. But when the noun is 
followed by an adjective, the emphasis is on the noun, which must then be preceded by 
the numeral un ; as, il fait un temps superbe ; il a une faim devorante, he has a 
ravenous appetite. 

t Before a noun, Men is used, and not tres. 



TRENTIEME LE£0N. 



103 



117* With the expression avoir mal, to have a pain or a sore, 
the preposition a is used before the part affected ; as 

My right eye is sore. j 

I have a pain in my right eye. j 

What is the matter with jour right 

hand? 
It is sore. 



Tai mal a Tceil droit. 
Qu'avez-vous a la main droite ? 



He has a headache, the headache. 
She has the toothache. 
I have a sore throat. 
His left arm is sore. 
My hands are cold. 



J'y ai mal. 

II a mal a la tete, or le mal de tete. 

Elle a mal aux dents, le mal de dents. 

J'ai mal a la gorge, le mal de gorge. 

II a mal an bras gauche. 

Pai froid aux mains. 



118i To hurt, to pain somebody. 
You touch my arm ; you hurt me. 

His left hand pains him. 

To do good to somebody. 

To hurt, to harm somebody. 

To injure somebody. 

Do you do good to those that hurt 

you? 
I return good for evil. 
This news injures trade. 



Faire mal a qqn. 

Yous me touchcz au bras ; vous me 

faites mal. 
La main gauche lui fait mal 
Faire du bien a qqn. 
Faire du mal a qqn. 
Faire du tort a qqn. 
Faites- yous du bien a ceux qui vous 

font du mal ? 
Jo rends le bien pour le maL 
Ces nouvelles font du tort au com- 





YOCABULAIRE 30. 




Cold. 


Le froid. 


Hunger. 


La faim. 


Heat. 


Le chaud. 


Thirst. 


La soif. 


Sleep. 


Le sommeil. 


Fear. 


La peur. 


Wrong. 


Le tort. 


Shame. 


La honte. 


Good 


Le bien. 


Reason ; right. 


La raison. 


Evil. 


Le mal. 


Poverty. , 


La pauvrete". 


The face. 


Le visage. 


The face ; the shape. 


La figure. 


A hair. 
The hair. 


Un cheveu. 
Les cheveux. 


The head. 


La tete. 


The eye, the eyes. 


L'ceil, les yeux. 


The tooth. 


La dent. 


The forehead. 


Le front. 


The mouth. 


La bouche. 


The arm. 


Le bras. 


The throat. 


La gorge. 


The finger. 


Le doigt 


The hand. 


La main. 



204 treisttiEme LEgom 

To tura Tourner. To touch. Tbueber. 

Rigbt. Droit. Left. Gauche, 

Square. Carre. Round. Rond. 

So much, (fl> mch ) Tant> g {{n ^ m & } gi 

an extent.) y 

Certainly. Certainement. On the contrary. Au contraire, 



Exercice 80. 



I. Qu r avez-vous ? 2. J'ai bien froid. & Votre frere qu'a-t-il ? 
4. H a ehaud. 5. Ces enfants ont-ils faim ©u soif ? 6. lis n'ont 
m faim ni soif, mais ils out bien soxnmeil ? 7. Qui a peur de 
mon cbien I 8. Le petit Henri en a peur. 9. Cet bornme a-t-il 
honte de sa pauvrete ? 10. Je crois qu'il en a honte. 11. N*a- 
t-il pas tort d'en avoir bonte? 12. Oui, M. ; il a tort. 13> 
N'ai-je pas raison de dire cela? 14. Certainement, vous avez 
raison de le dire. 15. Votre frere a-t-il les cheveux noirs? 16. 
Non, M. ; il a les cheveux bruns et les yeux bleus. 17. Cet 
enfant n'a-t-il pas la tete carree? 18. II a la tete carree et le 
front large. 19. C'ette petite fille n'a-t-elle pas la peau blan- 
che ? 20. Elle a la peau blanche, la figure ronde et la bouche 
petite. 21. Pourquoi tournez-vous la tete? 22. Je tourne 
la tete pour voir qui est derriere moi. 23. Me touch ez-vous 
au bras? 24. Je ne vous touche pas. 25. Avez-vous mal au 
bras droit? 26. J'y ai mal. 27. Fermez-vous Foeil gauche 
parce que vous y avez mal? 28. Je n'ai pas mal a l'oeil gauche, 
j'ai mal a l'oeil droit. 29. Yotre sceur a-t-elle mal aux dents 2 
30. Non, M. ; elle a mal a la tete. 31. Qui a le mal de gorge 
ehez vous ? 32. Personne n'a le mal de gorge chez nous. 33. 
Qu'avez-vous a la main droite ? 34. J'y ai mal. 35. Si je vous 
y touche, cela vous fait-il? 36. Oui, cela me fait mal. 37. Les 
doigts vous font-ils mal? 38. Ils me font tant mal que je ne 
peux pas tenir la plume. 39. Faites-vous du mal a ceux qui 
vous font du bien ? 40. Au contraire, je fais du bien a ceux qui 
me font du mal ; je rends toujours le bien pour le maL 41. Le 
mauvais temps fait-il du tort au commerce ? 42. Oui, M. ; il y 
fait du tort. 43. Pourquoi ecrivez-vous si mal ? 44. J'ecris si 
mal parce que j'ai froid aux mains. 45, Que buvez-vous quand 



TRENTIEME LEC/ON. 105 

vous avez soif? 46. Quand j'ai soif, je bois de 1'eau; et quand 
j'ai bien faim, je mange ce que j'ai. 



Theme 30. 

1. Are you cold ? 2. I am not cold, I am hungry and thirsty, 
3. Is your brother sleepy ? 4. He is not sleepy, but be is very 
warm. 5. What is the matter with little Henry? 6. He is 
afraid of your dog. 7. You are wrong to be afraid of the dog ; 
he does not hurt anybody. 8. Are those men ashamed of their 
poverty ? 9. They are not (ashamed of it) ; and they are right. 

10. Am I not right in saying that your uncle's hair is black? 

11. You are wrong in saying that, for his hair is gray. 12. Those 
children's heads are large and square. 13. My nephew has a 
round face and a narrow forehead. 14. That young lady has 
beautiful blue eyes and fine teeth. 15. Her mouth is small and 
her hands are very white. 16. "What is the matter with your left 
eye ? 17. I have a pain in it. 18. My right hand is sore also. 
19. I cannot put on my gloves, my fingers pain me so much. 20. 
Those men ton their heads to see who is making so much noise 
behind them. 21. "Why does your brother write so badly? 22. 
His hands are very cold. 23. Does anybody touch my arm? 
24. I touch your arm; does that hurt you? 25. Yes, sir; I 
have a sore arm. 26. Do you hurt anybody? 27. I hurt no- 
body ; on the contrary, I do good to those that hurt me ; am I 
not right? 28. Certainly; the good man (Vhomme de bien) al- 
ways returns good for evil. 29. What is the matter with you? 
30. I have a headache. 31. Has your sister the toothache? 32. 
No, sir; she has a sore throat. 33. Does not this rain injure 
trade? 34. Certainly. 35. Are you sleepy? 36. I am very- 
sleepy, but it is already late. 37. Good evening {Bon soir). 38. 

Good night {Bonne nuit). 

50 



106 



TRENTE ET UNI&ME LE£ON e 



31. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgOK 



1 1 9 • TO TAKE PLACE. 



Avoir lieu. 



When is the concert to take place ? Quand le concert doit-il avoir lieu ? 



Does it take place to-day. 

It takes place this afternoon ? 

Instead of. 

Do you play instead of studying ? 

I study instead of playing. 



A-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ? 
II a lieu cette apres-midi. 
Au lieu de. 

Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier ? 
J'etudie au lieu de jouer. 



120. To BE THERE. 

There is, there are. 

Is there ? are there ? 

Is there anybody in the parlor ? 

There is nobody. 

Are there any more pencils in that 

drawer ? 
There are only a few left. 
What is the matter yonder ? 
What is in that barrel ? 
I do not know what is in it ? 



Y AVOIR. 

H y a. 
Y a-t-il f 

Y a-t-il quelqu'un dans le salon ? 
II n'y a personne. 

Y a-t-il encore des crayons dans ce 
tiroir ? 

II n'y en a plus guere. 

Qu'y a-t-il la-bas? 

Qu'y a-t-il dans ce baril ? 

Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans. 



121 1 Several. 

My sister has several fans. 
She has several. 

Borne, a few. 

Are there a few pencils in that 

drawer ? 
There are. 
Are there a few ripe pears in your 

garden ? 
There are. 
Will you have a few of these pears ? 



Plusieurs, (an invariable indefinite 
adjective and pronoun.) 

Ma sceur a plusieurs eventails. 

Elle en a plusieurs. 
fQuELQUE, quelques, (indef adj.) 
? Quelques-uns, fern, quelques-unes, 
[ (indefinite pronoun.) 

Y a-t-il quelques crayons dans ce 
tiroir ? 

II y en a quelques-uns. 

Y a-t-il quelques poires mures dans 
votre jar din ? 

II y en a quelques-unes. 
Voulez-vous quelques-unes de ces 
poires? 



TRENTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 



101 



122* Like, as. 
Have you a ring like this one ? 

I have one similar to that one. 
I have one just like it. 
You come late, as usual. 

You arrive later than usual. 



Comme. 

Avez-vous une bague comme celle- 

ci? 
J'en ai une pareille a celle-la. 
J'en ai une toute* pareille. 
Vous arrivez tard, comme a Pordi- 

naire. 
Vous arrivez plus tard qu'a l'ordi- 

naire. 

Rem. — Comme is not used after a comparative adverb. 

His hair is gray like mine. H a les cheveux gris comme moi 

His hair is as gray as mine. H a les cheveux aussi gris que moi. 

As early. D' aussi bonne heure. 

Earlier. De meilleure heure. 

Cheaper. A meilleur marche. 



123 • Neither article nor preposition is used with n% en and 
sans (without), before a noun taken in the partitive or indefinite 
sense ; as, 



He has neither money nor friends. 

Our coffee is in store. 

There is coffee in the store. 

Do you go out without an umbrella ? 



Without speaking. 
Without saying any thing. 
To speak loud. 
To speak low, in a low voice. 



II n'a ni argent ni amis. 
Notre cafe est en magasin. 
II y a du cafe dans le magasin. 
Sortez vous sans parapluie \ 



Sans parler. 

Sans rien dire. 

Parler haut, a haute voix. 

Parler bas, a voix basse. 



The parlor. 

The arm-chair. 

The auction. 

A picture, a painting. 

A parasol. 



VOCABULAIRE 31. 

Le salon. 



Le fauteuil. 

L'encan. 
Un tableau. 
Un parasol. 



The dining-room. Lasalleamanger. 
} La commode. 



drawers. 
The sale. 
A print. 
A ringer-ring. 



La vente. 
Une estampe. 
Une bague. 



* The adverb tout, before an adjective that qualifies a feminine noun, agrees with it 
in gender and number, but only when the adjective begins with a consonant 



108 



TRENTE ET UNIEME LECWe 



A fan. Un eventail. An opera-glass. Une lorgnette 

The complexion. Le teint. The voice. La voix. 

The nose. Le nez. The lip. La levre. 



To take place. 


Avoir lieu. 


To be there, 


Y avoir. 


To arrive. 


Arriver. 


To play. 


Jouer. 


Several. 


Plusieurs. 


Some. 


C Quelque, (adj.) 

\ Quelques-uns, (pro.) 






A few. 


Similar, like. 


Pareil,lle. (61, e.) 


Rosy. 


Vermeil, lie. (61, c.) 


High; loud. 


Haut. 


Low. 


Bas, sse. (61, c.) 


Usual. 


Ordinaire. 


Usually. 


Ordinairement. 


Entirely. 


y Tout-a-fait. 


Like, as. 


Comme. 


Quite, just. 






Instead of. 


Au lieu de. 


Without. 


Sans, (prep.) 


In it, within, (adv.) Dedans. 


There below 
Yonder. 


' j-La-bas. 



EXERCICE 31. 

1. Quand la vente doit-elle avoir lieu? 2. Elle doit avoir 
lieu aujourd'hui. 3. Le concert doit-il avoir lieu cette apres- 
midi? 4. II a lieu ce matin. 5. Allez-vous au concert? 6, 
Je vais a la vente de tableaux au lieu dialler au concert. 1. 
Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de rnonde au concert ? 8. II doit y en 
avoir beaucoup. 9. Y a-t-il du monde dans le salon? 10. II y 
a plusieurs dames et plusieurs de vos amis. 11. Y a-t-il plus 
d'un fauteuil dans la salle a manger? 12. II y en a plusieurs. 
13. Yos soeurs choisissent-elles quelques eventails? 14. Elles 
en choisissent quelques-uns. 15. Prenez-vous quelques-unes de 
cesestampes? 16. Nous en prenons quelques-unes. 1*7. Qu'y 
a-t-il dans cette commode ? 1 8. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a de- 
dans. 19. Votre soeur a-t-elle un parasol comme celui-ci? 20. 
Elle en a un tout pareil a celui-la. 21. A-t-elle une bague pa- 
reille a celle-ci ? 22. Elle en a une toute pareille. 23. Votre 
lorgnette est-elle comme celle-ci ? 24. Elle est tout-a-fait comme 
celle-la. 25. Revenez-vous du bureau d'aussi bonne heure que 
moi? 26. Pen reviens ordinairement de meilleure heure que 
vous. 21. N'arrivez-vous pas plus tard qu'a Fordinaire? 28. Je 
vous demande pardon ; nous arrivons a Pheure ordinaire. 29. 



TRENTE ET UNIEME LEC0N. 109 

Prenez-vous le cafe apres diner, comme a l'ordinaire ? 30. Oui, 
toujours, comme a l'ordinaire. 31. Ces Anglais vendent-ils a 
meilleur marche que nos amis? 32. lis vendent, an contraire, 
pins cher. 33. Avez-vons dn vin en baril? 34. Nous n'en 
avons plus, ni en baril ni en bouteilles. 35. Y a-t-il du feu et de 
la lumiere dans la chambre de votre frere ? 36. II n'y a ni feu 
ni lumiere dans sa chambre. 37. Sort-il sans parapluie? 38. 
H sort sans parapluie et sans manteau. 39. Les enfants de la 
campagne n'ont-ils pas les levres vermeilles? 40. Oui, M. ; 
generalement.* 41. Votre cousin a-t-il le front bas? 42. Non, 
M. ; il a le front haut, le nez long et le teint vermeil. 43. Ne 
pouvez-vous pas etudier votre lecon sans parler si haut ? 44. 
Je ne l'apprends pas aussi vite quand je l'etudie a voix basse. 



Theme 31. 

1. There is an auction sale (a Vencan) in this street; have you 
a mind to go to it ? 2. When is it to take place ? 3. It is to take 
place this morning ; they are going to begin forthwith. 4. There 
are several prints which I have a wish to buy. 5. The concert 
takes place this morning, but I go to the sale of pictures instead of 
going to the concert. 6. Is there any one in the dining-room ? 
*J. There is no one in the dining-room, but there are several la- 
dies in the parlor. 8. Do your sisters take a few of these fans ? 
9. No, sir; they have several already. 10. Have you a few 
more parasols like this one? 11. We have a few more of them. 
12. What is in that chest of drawers? 13. There is nothing m 
it. 14. Have you more than one arm-chair like this one? 15. 
We have several just like it. 16. My sister's opera-glass is just 
like that one. 17. Has she a ring like this one? 18. She has 
one similar to it. 19. Does your brother return from the office 
as early as you? 20. He usually returns earlier than I. 21. 
We arrive in good time, as usual. 22. We come at the usual 
hour. 23. There are not so many people here as usual. (122, 
Rem.) 24. Do you come without a cloak and without an um- 

* Generalement and ordinairement must not be used the one for the other ; the 
latter means most frequently, the former, extensively, in general. 



110 TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgOST. 

brella? 25. I bring neither cloak nor umbrella. 26. Are you 
not cold? 27. I am neither cold nor warm, but I am hungry 
and thirsty. 28. Have you any cider in barrels? 29. We have 
some in bottles. 30. What is the matter with your brother? 
31. He is very sleepy. 32. Is he not ashamed? 33. Are you 
not wrong to play instead of studying ? 34. Am I not right to 
buy of (chez) those merchants ? they sell cheaper than others (les 
autres). 35. Do you always speak loud when you study your 
lessons ? 36. I usually read in a low voice, but sometimes I read 
loud without thinking of it. 37. What is the matter yonder? 
38. Nothing at all ; a little boy who is afraid of a dog. 39. My 
uncle has a rosy complexion, a high forehead and a long nose. 
40. Those little girls have fresh complexions {le teint frais) and 
rosy lips. 



32. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 

124 • The demonstrative pronoun ce is used as the subject of 
the verb etre : 

1st. In questions and answers, when it signifies that person or 
that thing ; as, 

Is that your brother ? It is he. Est-ce votre frere ? C'est lui. 

Are those your parents ? They are. Sont-ce vos parents ? Ce sont eux. 

Who is that ? Qui est-ce ? 

She is a relation of mine. C'est une de mes parentes. 

Is that your book ? It is. Est-ce la votre livre ? Ce Test. 

2d. With reference to an antecedent noun, when Hre is fol- 
lowed by a substantive, or word preceded by the article or a de- 
terminative adjective ; as, 

I admire your aunt, she is a very J'admire votre tante, c'est une fem- 

amiable lady. me bien aimable. 

Take this book, it is the best. Prenez ce livre, c'est le meilleur. 

That is not your book, it is mine. Ce n'est pas votre livre, c'est le 

mien. 



TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEC0N. Ill 

3d. With reference to a preceding sentence ; as, 

Is it true ? It is. Est-ce vrai ? C'est vrai. 

That is it, is it not so ? C'est cela, n'est-ce pas? 

Is not that beautiful ? N'est-ce pas que c'est beau ? 



125# Est-ce que, placed before the subject of the verb, forms 
an interrogative sentence ; as, Est-ce que je dis cela ? Do I say 
that? 

This interrogative form is generally used when the verb is in 
the indicative present. 

Do I speak well ? Est-ce que je parle bien ? (parle-je 

bien ?) 
Do I not see that ? Est-ce que je ne vois pas cela ? 

What do I see ? Qu'est-ce que je vois ? 

"Whom do I see ? Qui est-ce que je vois ? 

The first person of the indicative present, when it is a mono- 
syllable or ends in ge, admits of no other interrogative form than 
the above, with est-ce que. 

Do I sell too dear ? Est-ce que je vends trop cher ? 

Do I hurt you ? Est-ce que je vous fais mal. 

What do I eat J Qu'est-ce que je mange. 

The verbs alter, avoir, devoir, dire, etre, pouvoir, savoir, voir, 
may be construed either way : est-ce que je dois, or dois-je? 



Imperative — Second Person. 

126. (a.) In the second person plural of the imperative, the 
form of the verb is the same as in the second person plural of 
the indicative present. The subject is omitted ; and the objective 
pronouns, when the sentence is affirmative, are placed, with a 
hyphen, after the verb, in the same order as in English. Moi 
and toi are used instead of me and te. 

Come here. Go there. Venez ici. Allez-y. 

Hand me the bread. Passez-moi le pain. 

Hand it to me. Give it to him. Passez-le-moi. Donnez-le-lui. 

Give him some. Donnez-lui-en. 



I 



112 TRENTE-DEUXIEME LE^ON. 

Rem. — Moi and toi elide the vowels oi before en. 



Give me some. 



Donnez m'en. 



(p.) When the sentence is negative, the pronouns stand before 
the verb, as in the indicative. 

Do not tell me of it. Ne me le dites pas. 

Do not speak of it to me. Ne m'en parlez pas. 



127« Here is. There is. 
Here is your cane. Here it is. 
There is some money. 
There is some. 



Voici.* Voila.* 

Voici votre canne. La voici 

Voila de l'argent. 

En voila. 



VOCABULAIRE 32. 



The husband. ■] 

The relative. 
The parents. 
The grandfather. 
The father-in-law. 
The brother-in-law. 

The son-in-law. \ 

The grandson. 
Wit ; the mind. 



Le mari. 
L'epoux. 
Le parent. 
Les parents. 
Le grand-pere. 
Le beau-pere. 
Le beau-frere. 
Le gendre. 
Le beau-fils. 
Le petit-fils. 
L'esprit. 



The wife. 



The relative. 
The family. 
The grandmother. 
The mother-in-law. 
The sister-in-law. 
The daughter-in- 
law. 
The grand-daughter. 
Modesty. 



La femme. 
L'epouse. 
La parente ; 
La famille. 
La grand'mere. 
La belle-mere. 
La belle-soeiar. 

La belle-fille. 

La petite-fille. 
La modestie. 



To feel ; to smelL Sentir, irr. (95,6.) To perceive. 



To hand. 
Witty. 
False. 

Counterfeit. 
To the right. 
On the right. 
Straight. 
Straight on. 



{ 



Passer. 

Spirituel. 

Faux. 



Fausse, {fern) 
[• A droite. 

I Tout droit. 



To dare. 
Modest. 

True. 

To the left. 

Here is. 
There is. 



Apercevoir. 

Oser. 

Modeste. 

Vrai. 



A gauche. 

Voici. 
Voila. 



* Voici and voild are used to point out objects that are in sight; literally: see here 
see there. 



TRESTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 113 

Exercice 32. 

1. Quiest-ce? 2. C'est le beau-frere de mon cousin. 3. Est-ce 
le frere de son epouse? 4. Kon, M. ; c'est le mari'de sa belle- 
sceur. 5. Qui est la dame a laquelle il donne lebras? 6. C'est 
sa belle-mere. 7. Est-ee la son beau-pere qui leur parte ? 8. 
C'est lui. 9. Qui est cette dame si modeste et si jolie ? 10. 
C'est une de nos parentes. 11. Est-elle aussi spirituelle qu'elle 
est jolie? 12. C'est une femme tres-spirituelle et tres-aimable. 
13. N'aimez-vous pas les femmes qui ont de I'esprit? 14. J'aime 
encore mieux celles qui ont de la bonte et de la modestie. 15, 
Apercevez-vous quelque part les petits-fils du ministre? 16. Je 
les apercois a droite de la fontaine ; les voila qui parlent au gen- 
dre du medecin. 17. Est-ce la mon manteau que vous avez? 
18. Xon, M. ; c'est le mien ; voila le votre sur le sofa. 19. Sen- 
tez-vous le vent qui vient par cette croisee ? 20. Je ne sens pas 
de vent. 21. Est-ce que j'ose vous demander ce que vous faites 
la ? 22. Oui, M. ; venez voir ce que je fais. 23. Est-ce que je 
crois tout ce qu'on me dit? 24. J'ose dire que non. 25. Qu'est- 
ce que je sens ? 26. Vous sentez les fleurs qui sont sur la che- 
minee. 27. Qui est-ce que j'apercois venir au coin de la place? 

28. Vous apercevez venir mon grand-pere et ma grand'mere. 

29. Qui est-ce que j'entends cbanter? 30. Vous entendez chan- 
ter la petite-fille du general. 31. Passez-moi cet eventail, s'il 
vous plait. 32. Oui, M. ; avec plaisir ; le voici. 33. Montrez- 
moi la bague que vous avez. 34. Volontiers ; la voila ; mais ne 
la cassez pas. 35. Voulez-vous porter cette lorgnette a ma 
soeur? 36. Donnez-la-moi ; je vais la lui porter. 37. Quelles 
belles fleurs ! donnez-m'en quelques-unes. 38. Les voila ; prenez- 
les toutes; je yous les donne. 39. Ne me donnez pas de fausse 
monnaie. 40. Ce billet n'est pas faux ; tenez* prenez-le ; je sais 
qu'il est bon. 41. Est-ce vrai? 42. C'est vrai, sans badiner 
{without joking). 43. Allez-vous a droite ou a gauche a pre- 
sent ? 44. Je vais tout droit chez moi. 

* Tenez, the imperative of tenir, is used to attract attention, here^ see here, 



114 trente-deuxieme le£0n. 

Theme 32. 

1. Who is that gentleman to the right of your mother-in-law ? 
2. He is my brother-in-law. 3. He is the husband of my wife's 
sister. 4. Who is the lady who is dancing with the general's 
son-in-law ? 5. She is a relation of mine. 6. She is a hand- 
some woman ; is she as witty as she is pretty f 7. She is more 
modest than witty. 8. Goodness of (du) heart and modesty are 
far (bien) more estimable than wit; are they not? 9. That is 
very true. 10. Are those the general's grand-daughters? 11. 
They are ; his daughter-in-law is in Paris with her parents. 12. 
Do those children feel the cold as much as we (do) ? 13. I dare 
say (that) they feel it less than we. 14. Do I read too fast? 
15. Do I write as well as you? 16. What do I smell? 17. 
Whom do I see ? 18. Do I know those ladies ? 19. You know 
some of them. 20. Is that you, my cousin? 21. It is I, who 
come to ask you if you will go to the concert with us ? 22. How 
can I go with you ? 23. Must I not stay at home ? 24. Whom 
do I hear ? 25. It is my grandfather ! and you too, my grand- 
mother! 26. It is a fine day that brings us so many good 
friends! 27. Who is he? 28. He is a Frenchman who gives 
lessons (des lecons) in our family. 29. Light the gas, and ex- 
tinguish that lamp. 30. Hand me the newspaper, if you please. 
31. Here it is.- 32. Walk this way (Passez par ici). 33. Walk 
in to the left. 34. This bill is a counterfeit, I believe. 35. Do 
not take it, if you think so ; here is another. 36. Is there any 
more cream? 37. Give me a little of it. 38. That is enough, 
I thank you. 39. May (dare) I ask you where Doctor B. . . . 
lives ? 40. He lives at the corner of the square ; go straight on ; 
it is the last house in (de) the street, on the right. 41. There is 
the doctor coming ( Voila le docteur qui vient). 



trente-troisi£me LEQON. 115 



33. TRENTE-TROISIEME LEQOK 

128. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly (91), may 
be arranged in four classes ; as, 

(a.) Verbs expressing motion from one place to another ; as, 
alter, venir, &c. 

(b.) The verbs aimer mieux, compter, croire, desire?*, devoir, oser, 
pouvoir, preferer, savoir, vouloir, and a few others. 

(c.) Verbs expressing perceptions by the senses ; as, voir, aper- 
cevoir, regarder, entendre, ecouter, sentir. 

(d.) Verbs expressing our agency in the performance of the 
action expressed by the second verb ; as, envoyer, /aire, laisser, 
mener. 

Rem. 1.- — With regard to the verbs of the first two classes (a 
and b), the objective pronouns are placed between them and the 
following infinitive ;* as, 
I come to tell you. I dare do it. Je viens vous dire. J'ose le faire. 

Rem. 2. — With regard to the verbs of the last two classes (c 
and d), the object, if a noun, is placed after the second verb, and 
if a pronoun, before the first ; as, 

I see your sister coming. Je vois venir voire soeur. 

I see her coming. Je la vois venir. 



129« To wish to say, to mean. Vouloir dire. 

What does that mean? ( Que vent dire oda I 

( Qu est-ce que ceJa veut dire ? 

To have made. To have mended. Faire faire. Faire raccom?noder. 

To have washed. To have dried. Faire laver. Faire sicker. 

Are you having a coat made ? Faites-vous faire un habit ? 

I am. J'en fais faire un. 

Are you having your linen mend- Faites-vous raccommoder votre lin- 
ed? ge? 

I will have it washed before I have Je le fais laver avant de le faire 
it mended, (see Rote, p, 41.) raccommoder. . 

* We may say : Je le vats chercher, orje vais le chercher ; the latter construction 
Is in accordance with the above rule, and is preferable, 



116 



TRENTE-TROISltlME LE£ON. 



Dry my cloak. 

Make the children come in. 

Do not let them go out. 



Faites secher mon manteau. 
Faites entrer les enfants. 
"Ne les laissez pas sortir. 



130i Verbs that require a before the infinitive, express ten- 
dency to, continued or progressive action. The following are some 
of them : aimer, apprendre, avoir, chercher, commencer, donner, 
montrer, mettre, penser, rester, &c. 



I like to work. 

He learns to read and write. 

We have much to do. 

We seek to know the truth. 

We begin to understand you. 

What do you give us to drink ? 
He shows (teaches) me how to do it. 
I put your cloak to dry. 
He thinks of going to France. 
Stay and take dinner with us. 



J'aime a travailler. 
H apprend a lire et a Scrire. 
Nous avons beaucoup a faire. 
Nous cherchons a savoir la verite*. 
ISTous commencons a vous compren- 

dre.* 
Que nous donnez-vous a boire? 
H me montre a le faire. 
Je mets votre manteau a secher. 
II pense a aller en France. 
Restez a diner avec nous. 



131 Verbs that require de before the infinitive, express result, 
consequence, a turning away from, or cessation of action; as, ces- 
ser, choisir, dire, essay er, flnir, &c* 



It stops raining. 
Tell him to come. 
Try to do that. 

To have just. 

I have just seen him. 

He has just passed. 

We have just been told so. 



H cesse de pleuvoir. 
Dites-lui de venir. 
Essay ez de faire cela. 



Venir de. 

Je viens de le voir. 

II vient de passer. 

On vient de nous le dire. 



* Some verbs require sometimes d, and sometimes de, according to the sense in 
which they are used. Commencer k parler, to begin to speak, to learn it ; commencer 
de parler, to begin speaking. Essay er takes « when it expresses repeated and pro- 
gressive efforts; as, 11 essaie k executer ce morceau sur le piano. Demander takes 
de when it is accompanied by an indirect object, and d when it is not; as, Je vous de- 
mande de le faire ; je demande k vous parler. 

t See also, p. 353. 



TRENTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 



117 



The sense. 
The word. 

The master. 
The scholar. 



VOCABULAIRE 33. 
Le sens. The truth. 

Le mot. 



Le maitre. 
L'ecolier. 



The linen, (wear- ) Lelin 
ing apparel.) ) 

y Le coffre. 



ing apparel.) 
The chest. 
The trunk. 



La verite. 
The phrase. ) -r ^rase 
The sentence. J 
The school. L'ecole. 

The scholar,(/em.) L'ecoliere. 

The linen, (cloth.) La toile. 



The trunk. 



La malle. 



To mean. 
To wash. 

To dry. 

To cease. 
To leave off. 
To forget. 

To advise. 



Youloir dire. To have made. Faire faire. 

Laver. To mend. Raccommoder. 

m ° . ^ ., . ., t Faire secher. 

lo have dried. ) 

To avoid. Uviter, (A, ISO.) 

To shun. ) 

Oublier, (de, 130.) To neglect. Negliger, (de, 130.) 

( Conseiller,* (de, Tq haye .^ Venir ^ 
( loO.) 



Secher, (18, b.) 
I Cesser, (de, 130.) 



Exercice 33. 



1. Faites-vous faire une malle comme eelle-ci? 2. J'en fais 
faire une pareille a celle-la. 3. Votre frere fait-il faire un man- 
teau de toile jaune? 4. II a en vie d'en faire faire un de toile 
grise, pour la route. 5. Faites-vous raccommoder votre linge ? 
6. Je le fais laver avant de le faire raccommoder. 7. Ne faites- 
vous pas secher ce coffre avant de le remplir ? 8. Je vais le 
mettre a l'air pour le faire secher avant d'y mettre le linge. 9. 
Savez-vous ce que le maitre veut dire? 10. Je ne sais pas ce 
qu'il veut dire. 11. Savez-vous ce qu'il vient de dire? 12. II 
vient de dire qu'il ne peut pas laisser sortir les ecoliers a tous 
moments. 13. Aimez-vous a voir tout le monde heureux? 14. 
Oui; j'aime a voir tout le monde heureux. 15. Cet ecolier n'a- 
t-il rien a faire ? 16. II a beaucoup a faire, mais il n'aime pas a. 
travailler. 17. Cette ecoliere a-t-elle quelque chose a dire ? 18. 



* Conseiller d qqn. de faire vm.e chose. 



118 TRENTE-TROISIEME LECOT. 

Elle n'a rien a dire. 19. Apprenez-vous a chanter? 20. Nous 
apprenons a danser et a chanter. 21. Qui vous montre a dan- 
ger? 22. Un maitre franc ais me montre a danser. 23. Votre 
maitre de francais vous donne-t-il beaucoup a faire ? 24. II nous 
donne plus de trente (thirty) mots a apprendre par cceur tous les 
jours. 25. Commencez-vous a parler francais? 26. Je com- 
mence a le comprendre. 27. Que cherchez-vous a savoir? 28. 
Je cherche a savoir le sens de cette phrase. 29. Que veut dire 
cette phrase ? 30. Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle veut dire. 31. Pen- 
sez-vous a aller a la campagne ? 32. Je pense a y aller bientot. 
33. Voulez-vous dire au domestique d'apporter du bois ? 34. II 
vient d'en apporter. 35. Allez-vous essay er de faire le feu? 36. 
Je n'ai pas envie de le faire. 37. A quelle heure ces ouvriers 
cessent-ils de travailler ? 38. lis cessent de travailler a six heures 
du soir. 39. Que me conseillez-vous de faire? 40. Je vous 
conseille de dire la verite. 41. Evitez-vous de parler a cet hom- 
me ? 42. J'evite de lui parler, parce que je ne l'aime pas. 43. 
Oubliez-vous quelquefois d'etudier vos lecons? 44. Nous ne 
l'oublions jamais, mais nous negligeons quelquefois de les etudier 
quand nous avons beaucoup a faire. 



Theme 33. 



1. Is your brother having a leather trunk made? 2. He is 
having one made like mine. 3. Will you have that linen coat 
washed ? 4. I intend to have it mended before I have it washed. 
5. Dry my linen before the fire, and put that chest to dry in the 
air. 6. I do not know which chest you mean ; there are two. 
7. I mean the one you have just brought. 8. There it is ; open 
it, and see what is in it. 9. Have these scholars nothing to do ? 
10. They have a great deal to do. 11. They play instead of 
studying ; what does that mean ? 12. They do not like to study. 
13. Their French teacher (maitre de francais) gives them a 
great many words to learn by heart every day. 14. A French 
master (maitre francais) teaches (montrer) them to write. 15. 
Do you know the sense of this sentence? 16. I do not know 
what that sentence means. 17. Does your father think of send- 



TRENTE-QUATRIEME LECOJS T . 119 

ing you to school in France? 18. He wants to send me to 
Paris to learn to speak French, but I do not like to go there. 
19. Tell your brother to come. 20. I have just told him, 
21. Do not try to put out the fire. 22. Let it be as it is 
(comme cela) ; I will (Je vais) tell the servant to put it out. 
23. Do you never cease working? 24. I have much to do ? 
and I like to work. 25. What do you advise my brother-in- 
law to do? 26. I advise him to speak the truth, and that is 
what I advise everybody to do. 27. We avoid going there, be- 
cause we do not like the company that frequent that place. 28. 
Do you forget to answer that note ? 29. I have just answered it. 

30. We never neglect to do our duties, but we sometimes forget. 

31. Your father-in-law has just arrived from Paris. 32. We 
have just seen him pass. 33. I have just heard your sister-in- 
law sing ; she is in the parlor. 34. Your father-in-law is there 
too ; I have just heard him speak. 



34. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. 

Reflective Verbs. 

132. Reflective verbs are always attended by an objective 
pronoun (called the reflective pronoun) of the same person and 
number as the subject ; as, 

I wash myself. We wash ourselves. Je me lave. Nous nous lavons. 

Do you wash yourself? Vbus lavez-vous ? 

One's self, himself, herself, itself, Se. 

themselves. 

To warm one's self. Se chauffer. 

To burn one's self. Se bruler. 

Will you not warm yourself ? Ne voulez-vous pas vous chauffer ? 

I have no time to warm myself. Je n'ai pas le temps de me chauffer. 

She has no time to warm herself. Elle n'a pas le temps de se chauffer. 

One has not always time to warm On n'a pas toujours le temps de se 

himself. chauffer. 

In the imperative mood, the reflective pronoun is retained ; as 7 
Warm yourself. Chauffez-vous. 

Do not burn yourself. Ne vous brulez pas. (126, a & 6.) 



120 TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. 

133t When an operation is performed upon a person, the part 
affected by the action of the verb is the direct, and the person, 
the indirect object ; as, 

She washes the child's hands. Elle lave les mains a, l'enfant 

She washes them, Elle les lui lave. 

(a.) When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself 
the part acted upon is the direct, and the reflective pronoun the 
indirect object ; as, 

I wash my hands. Je me lave les mains. 

He burns his fingers. H se brule les doigts. 



Formation of the Past Participle. 

134. The past participle of regular verbs is formed from the 
infinitive, as follows : 

In the 1st conj. change er into e ; as, aimer, p. p. aime. 
" 2d " ir " i; " finir, " fmL 

" 3d " evoir " u; " recevoir, " recu. 

" 4th " re " u; " vendre, " vendu. 



135. Past participles, when used as adjectives, are subject to 
the same rules of agreement ; as, 

To tear. A torn coat. DecJiirer. Un habit dechirL 

To spoil. A spoiled dress. Gater. Une robe gdtee. 

To arrange. To derange. Arranger. Deranger. 

Those things are not well arranged. Ces choses-la ne sont pas bien ar- 
ranges. 

My watch is out of order ; the glass Ma montre est derangee ; le verre en 

is broken. est casse. 

The work is done ; the bottles are L'ouvrage est fini ; les bouteilles 

filled. sont remplies. 



136. Pronouns, used as subjects or objects, are generally re- 
peated with each verb ; as, 

I love and esteem them. Je les aime et je les estime. 

He goes and comes. II va et il vient, or il va et vient. 



TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE£GN. 



121 



(a.) The adjective which precedes the noun, when qualifying 
two or more nouns connected by a conjunction, must be repeated 
before each of them ; the adjective which follows the noun, is 
only used once, and pkced after the last noun. 

Good bread and butter. De ben pam et de bon beurre. 

Fresh bread and butter. Du pain et du beurre frais.* 



137* Adverbs of manner ^re generally formed from adjectives, 
by the addition of the syllable menL When the adjective ends 
with a vowel, merit is added to the masculine, when it ends with 
a consonant, to the feminine, termination of the adjective ; as, 

True — truly. Vrai — vr&iment 

Sincere — sincerely. Sincere — sincerement. 

Frank— fr<mkly. Franc, fern. fr&Rche—franchement* 





VOCABTJLAIRE 34, 




The character. 
The disposition. 


> Le caraetere. 


The character. 
The reputation. 


> La reputation. 


The nail, (fingei 
nail.) 


" 1 L'ongle. 


The ear. 


L'oreille. 


The foot 


Le pied 


The shoulder. 


L'epauk. 


To warm. 


Chauffer. 


To b*arn. 


Bruler. 


To tear. 


Dechirer. 


To spoil. 


Gater. 


To soil. 


Salir. 


To hate. 


Hair.f 


To arrange. 
To set in order. 


> Arranger. 


To derange. 
To disturb. 


> D6 ranger. 


Frank. 


j Franc. 

\ Franche, (fem.) 


Sincere. 


Sincere. 


Fresh, cocL 


j Frais. 

< Fraiche, (fem.) 


Dry. 


5 Sec. 

t Seche, (fem.) 


Wet. 


Mouille. 


Damp. 


Humide. 


Clean. 


Propre. 


Dirty. 


Sale. 


Truly. 


Vraiment 


Indeed. 


En verite. 


Frankly. 


Franchement. 


Sincerely. 


Sincerement. 



* When the adjective is thus placed after two nouns of different genders, the mascu- 
line noun should be named last, so that a masculine adjective may not be closely fol- 
lowing a feminine noun ; as, wne cravate et un ohapeau Uancs; not, un <JiapeaM<& 
une cravate blancs. 

t Hair is slightly irregular, see p. -352, 



122 TREXTE-QUATRIEME LEC0K* 

Exeucice 34. 

1. Ne venez-vons pas vous chauffer? 2. Je vais d'abord me 
Iaver. 3. Yous lavez-vous a l'eau froide ? 4. Je me lave tou- 
jours a l'eau froide. 5. Yotre frere va-t-il se laver ? 6. II veut 
se chauffer avaut de se laver. 7. Yous chauffez-vous sou vent ? 
8. Nous nous chauffons quand nous avons froid. 9. Qui est-ce 
qui se brule? 10. Personne ici ne se brule. 11. La bonne 
lave-t-elle la figure aux enfants? 12. Elle la leur lave tous les 
matins. 13. Ne faites-vous pas couper les oreilles a votre petit 
chien? 14. Je ne veux pas les lui faire couper. 15. Yous cou- 
pez-vous les ongles? 16. Je me les coupe avant de me laver les 
mains. 17. Ces enfants se chauffent-ils les pieds? 18. lis se 
les chauffent avant d'aller a l'ecole. 19. Cet ecolier dechire-t-il 
ses livres? 20. II dechire ses livres, et il se salit les doigts 
quand il ecrit. 21. Les enfants gates sont-ils aimes ? 22. Us 
sont plus souvent hai's qu'aimes. 23. L' affaire est-elle arrangee? 
24. Elle ne l'est pas encore. 25. Est-ce que je vous derange ? 
26. Du tout, vous ne me derangez pas. 27. Yotre ouvrage est- 
il fini? 28. II est fini ; les malles sont remplies. 29. Ces mar- 
chandises sont-elles bien choisies? 30. Elles sont tres-bien choi- 
sies. 31. Sommes-nous apercus ? 32. Nous sommes apereus et 
entendus. 33. La maison est-elle vendue ? 34. Elle ne l'est pas 
encore. 35. Mon linge propre est-il raccommode ? 36. Yotre 
linge propre est raccommode, mais vos cravates sales sont dechi- 
rees. 37. Prenez mon chapeau, qui est mouille, et mettez-le a 
secher. 38. Yotre chapeau n'est plus mouille, il est tout sec. 
39. Ma redingote est-elle seche aussi? 40. Non, M. ; elle est 
encore un peu humide. 41. Avez-vous de bon pain et de bon 
beurre? 42. Oui, M. ; voici du pain et du beurre nais. 43. 
Cette eau est-elle fraiche 2 44. On vient de I'apporter de la fon- 
tiane. 45. N'aimez-vous pas les caracteres francs et sinceres? 
46. Oui, M. ; les personnes* franclies et sinceres sont generale- 
ment aimees. 

* Personne, a person, is ©f the feminine gender. 



trente-quatrieme lecon. 123 

Theme 34. 

1. Are you warming yourself? 2. I am warming myself, for 
my hands are cold. 3. Is your brother washing himself? 4. 
He is going to wash himself. 5. We always wash in (a ?) cold 
water. 6. Do those children wash themselves ? 1. They warm 
themselves before they wash themselves. 8. Warm yourselves, 
but do not burn yourselves. 9. This child's hands are dirty ; is 
the maid going to wash them? 10. She is going to wash his 
hands and face. 11. He does not keep himself (se tenir) clean. 
12. Do you cut your nails? 13. I cut my nails and warm my 
feet. 14. Cannot this scholar write without soiling his hands? 
15. He is a spoiled child; he tears his book instead of studying 
his lesson, and soils his hands when he writes. 16. Spoiled 
children are not liked, but they are, on the contrary, often hated. 
17. Give my torn coat to be mended (a raccommoder), and put 
my wet coat to dry. 18. Give me a pair of dry stockings ; these 
are damp. 19. Are my boots dry? 20. JSTo, sir; they are wet. 
21. Here is good bread and cheese, and there is fivsh butter and 
eggs. 22. Is there any fresh water? 23. I am goinr* to send 
for some immediately. 24. Are you arranging your bo^ks and 
papers? 25. / am (Oui, M.)) I like to see things well ar- 
ranged. 26. Do we disturb you ? 27. You do not disturb me 
at all. 28. Do you like the disposition of my cousin ? 29. I 
do ; she is frank and sincere. 30. Frank and sincere characters 
are liked by (de) everybody. 31. They are well recei/ed every- 
where. 32. Those who have the reputation of men of wit, do 
not always speak (dire) frankly and sincerely what they think. 



124 TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEQ^ON. 

35. TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. 

Perfect or Past Indefinite Tense. 

188. Tenses are simple or compound: simple, when they are 
expressed in one word ; compound, when they require the assist- 
ance of an auxiliary, (avoir or etre.) 

Each simple tense has its compound tense, which is formed of 
the simple tense of the auxiliary and the past participle of the 
verb to be conjugated. 

The compound tense corresponding with the present, is the 
perfect, or past indefinite. 

The perfect represents the action as completed, either now or 
long ago ; as, 

I have found, or I found. J'ai trouve. 

The compound tenses of all transitive and most intransitive 
verbs, are formed with the auxiliary avoir. 

I have studied my lesson. J'ai etudie ma lecon. 

We dined early. Nous avons dine de bonne heure. 

He Las finished his task. II a fini sa tache. 

Did you receive my letter ? Avez-vous regu ma lettre ? 

They sold their house. lis ont vendu leur maison. 



139. («.) The particle ne, and the pronouns which stand, in 
simple tenses, between the subject and the verb, stand, in com- 
pound tenses, between the subject and the auxiliary. The nega- 
tives pas, point, rien, &c, and short adverbs generally, stand 
between the auxiliary and the past participle. 

I did not dance. Je n'ai pas danse. 

She sang very well. Elle a tres-bien. chante. 

Have you already sent that note Avez-vous deja envoye* ce billet a 

to your sister ? votre sceur ? 

I have not. Je ne le lui ai pas encore envoye. 

(6.) Adverbs of more than two syllables, stand after the parti- 
ciple ; as, 

He spoke tctfme sincerely. II m'a parle sincerement. 



TRENTE-CINQUIEME LE£0N. 



125 



(c.) Adverbs of time relative, stand after the participle ; as, 
We worked late. Nous avons travaille tard. 

(d.) Adverbs of time absolute, may stand after the participle, 
or before the subject; as, 

I spoke to him about it yesterday. Je lui en ai parle* hier. 
Yesterday, I spoke to him about it. Hier, je lui en ai parle. 



140. The past participle of a transitive verb agrees, in gender 
and number, with its direct object, when the direct object pre- 
cedes the past participle. 



Have you found your pen ? 

I have. 

Have they filled the bottles? 

They have not yet. 

Where is the letter which you have 
received? 

How many letters have you re- 
ceived ? 

I have received three. 



Avez-vous trouve votre plume ? 

Je Z'ai trouvee. 

A-t-on rempli les bouteilles ? 

On ne les a pas encore remplies. 

Ou est la lettre que vous avez re- 

que? 
Combien de lettres avez-vous re- 

gues ? 
J'en ai recu trois. 



The past participle does not agree with en, because en is an 
indirect object 



141 • To have. p. p. had. 
Have you had any thing ? 
I have had nothing. 
Who has had the scissors ? 
The children have had them. 
To be. p. p. been. 
Where were you last night? 
I was at the play. 
Have you ever been at the French 

play? 
We have been there several times. 
Once, twice, three times a year. 



Avoir, p. p. eu. 

Avez-vous eu quelque chose? 

Je n'ai rien eu. 

Qui a eu les ciseaux ? 

Les enfants les ont eus. 

Etre. p. p. ete. 

Ou avez-vous ete hier au soir ? 

J'ai ete au spectacle. 

Avez-vous jamais ete a la come"die 

frangaise? 
Kous y avons ete plusieurs fois. 
Unefois, deux fois, trois fois par an, 



126 



TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEC0N. 



VOCABULAIRE 35. 



The play. 

The scissors. 
The tobacco. 
The snuff 
A clap, a blow. 
A knock. 
The carpet. 



Le spectacle. 
Les ciseaux. 
!• Le tabac. 

>• Un coup.* 
Le tapis. 



' The comedy. 
The play. 
The spectacles. 

The snuff-box. 



>• La coraedie. 
Les lunettes. 
La tabatiere. 

Once, twice, &e. Wf. M t s > deux 
( fois, &c. 



The oil-cloth. 



La toile ciree. 



To strike, to knock. Frapper.f 
During, for. Pendant. 

Yesterday. Hier. 

Yesterday morn- ( Hier matin, or 
ing. / Hier au matin. 



To ring, to strike. Sonner.J 
Long, a long time. Longtemps. 
Day before yes- ) Avant . hier _ 
terday. ) 

( Hier soir, or 

(Hie 



terday. 
Last night. 



Hier au soir. 



Exercice 35. 



1. Avez-vous apporte votre livre ? 2. Je l'ai apporte. 3. Vo- 
ire soeur a-t-elle dechire sa robe ? 4. Elle ne Fa pas dechiree ; 
elle l'a brulee. 5. A-t-on lave la toile ciree ? 6. On Fa lavee 
bier. 7. Avez-vous dejeune tard ce matin ? 8. Ce matin, nous 
avons dejeune de bonne beure. 9. Avez-vous trouve votre ta- 
batiere? 10. Je l'ai trouvee dans la poche de mon habit brun. 
11. L' avez-vous remplie de tabac frais? 12. Je Ten ai remplie. 
13. Avez-vous fini d'ecrire? 14. Je n'ai pas encore fini. 15. 
Qu'avez-vous choisi ? 16. J'ai choisi les beaux tapis que je vous 
ai montres. 17. Quand avez-vous recu la lettre de votre oncle? 
18. Je l'ai recue hier matin. 19. Y avez-vous deja repondu? 
20. J'y ai repondu tout de suite. 21. Avez-vous deja. envoye 
les rubans a votre soeur? 22. Je ne les lui ai pas encore envoy es. 
23. Avez-vous jamais vendu du cafe a ces etrangers? 24. Nous 
leur en avons vendu plusieurs fois. 25. Avez-vous etudie long- 

* Coup is used in a great many phrases : Coup d'etat, a stroke of policy ; Coup 
de vent, a gust of wind; Coup de soleil, a stroke of the sun; Coup de main, de pied % 
de couteau, <fcc. 

t Entendre frapper d la porte, to hear a knock at the door. 

X Entendre sonner, to hear the bell ring. On a Sonne, the bell has rung. 



TRENTE-CDvQUIEME LE£ON. 12 Y 

temps ? 26. Nous avons etudie pendant deux heures. 27. Nous 
avez-vous attendus longtemps? 28. Nous vous avons attendus 
pendant une demi-heure. 29. Avez-vous entendu sonner? 30* 
J'ai entendu sonner deux ou trois fois. 31. Combien de coups 
avez-vous entendu frapper a la porte pendant la nuit? 32. J'ai 
entendu frapper deux ou trois coups a la porte au milieu de la 
nuit. 33. M'avez-vous rendu les livres que je vous ai pretes? 
34. Je vous les ai rendus avant-hier. 35. N'ai-je pas eu raison 
d'aller a la comedie franchise ? 36. Non, M. ; vous avez en tort 
d 1 y aller. 37. Qui a eu les ciseaux? 3-8. Les enfants les ont 
eus; les voila sur le plan cher. 39. Avez-vous eu mes lunettes? 
40. Je les ai eues, mais je vous les ai rendues ; les voila sur la 
table. 41. Ou avez-vous ete hier au soir? 42. Hier au soir, 
j'ai ete au spectacle. 43. Votre soeur y a-t-elle jamais ete? 
44. Elle y a ete avant-hier pour la premiere fois. 45. Y allez- 
vous souvent? 46. Nous v allons trois ou quatre fois par an. 



Theme 35. 

1. Hare you taken my coat to the tailor's? 2. Have you 
taken the horse to the stable ? 3. Who has taken the papers 
from the table ? 4. Why have you taken off your cloak ? 5. 
Have they brought the carriage? 6. There it is, before the 
door ; but they have not brought the carpet which you bought 
yesterday. T. Have you taken (pris) your coffee ? 8. I have 
not yet tasted it ; the waiter has forgotten to bring me sugar. 
9. Who has broken my pretty cup? 10. The girl broke it 
yesterday morning. 11. Have you worn your new coat? 12. 
I have not yet worn it. 13. Where is the oil-cloth which 
my sister has chosen ? 14. They have not yet sent it. 15. Has 
my brother returned to you your snuff-box? 16. He has re- 
turned it to me, filled with fresh snuff. 17. Have they rung the 
bell ? 18. They have rung it twice. 19. Did you hear a knock 
at the door during the night? 20. I heard three knocks at 
the door in the middle of the night. 21. When did you answer 
the letter which you received of your relative ? 22. I answered 
it yesterday morning. 23. Did you finish your business last 



228 



TRENTE-SIXIEME LE£t)F. 



night? 24. We worked late and finished it entirely. 25. Have 
you tried on your new boots ? 26. I have not yet ; I have not 
had time. 21. Indeed; what have y€>u had to do? 28. My 
brother-in-law was here, and I wa& obliged* to go out with him, 
29. Have you had the scissors? 30. I have not; there they 
are, on the table. 31. Who has had my spectacles? 32. The 
children have had them. 3&. When did the concert take- 
place ? 34. It took place the day before yesterday. 36. Were 
you there S 36. I was there with my sister ; Miss L . . . . sang 
very well indeed. 37. There were a great many people. 38. 
Was your sister ever at the play ? 3$. She wa& at the French 
play last week, for the first time. 40. We go three or four 
times a year to the play. 



m. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgOK 
Past Participles m Irregular Verbs. 



142, To hold, 


p. p. held. 


Tenir, 


p. p. tenu, 


To feel ; to smelly 


felt, smelted, 


Sentir, 


senti. 


To open, 


opened. 


Ouvrir,, 


omerL 


To do ; to make r 


done, made. 


Faire, 


fait. 


To say ; to tell, 


said, told. 


Dire, 


dit. 


To write. 


written. 


Ecrire-, 


ecrit. 


To conduct,. 


conducted. 


Conduire y 


sonduiL 


To extinguish, 


extinguished 


Eteindre,, 


eteint. 


To put, 


put. 


Mettre, 


mis* 


To take, 


taken. 


Prendre, 


pris. 


To rain, 


rained. 


Pleuvoir, 


flu. 


To be aMev 


been able. 


Pouvoir, 


fU. 


To know, 


known. 


Savoir, 


su. 


To see, 


seen. 


Yoir r 


0W. 


To be willing, 


been willing. 


Youloir, 


voulw. 


To know, 


. I known. 
with, ) 


Connaitre> 


eonnu. 


To- be acquainted 






To read, 


read. 


lire. 


lu. 


To drink, 


drank. 


Boire, 


bu. 


To believe, 


believed. 


Croire, 


eru. 



* Dm, the past participle of devoir t has the circumflex acceM over the u f hut d'm^ 

the feminise, has not 



TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON, 



120 



143# Who told you that? 
My brother told me of it. 
Did you tell it to your father ? 
I did not tell him of it. 
Where did you put my slate ? 
On it, upon it. Under it. 

Did you put it under the bench or 

upon it? 
I put it under it. 
Where did you take that napkin 

from ? 
I took it out of your room. 
Did it rain much last night ? 



Qui vous a dit cela ? 

Mon frere me Va dit. 

L'ayez-vous dit a votre pere ? 

Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 

Ou avez-vous mis mon ardoise ? 

Dessus, (adv.) Dessous, (adv.) 

L'avez-vous raise sous le banc ou 

dessus ? 
Je l'ai mise dessous. 
Ou avez-vous pris cette serviette ? 

Je l'ai prise dans votre chambre. 
A-t-il plu beaucoup la nuit passee ? 



144 9 To do with, (to dispose of.) 

What have you done with my pen- 
knife? 

I have returned it to you. 

What have you done with that 
apron ? 

I have wiped the slate with it. 

Clean that slate. 

Did you wet the sponge ? 

Have you had the floor swept ? 

Has the furniture been dusted ? 

Have they been able to take that 
ink-spot out of the carpet ? 

They could not take it out. 

Wipe that child's hands. 

Wipe your hands with this napkin. 

One cannot go out without getting 
one's feet wet. 



Faire de. 

Qu'avez-vous fait de mon canif ? 

Je vous l'ai rendu. 
Qu'avez-vous fait avec ce tablier ? 

J'ai essuye l'ardoise avec. 

Nettoyez cette ardoise. 

Avez-vous mouille 1'eponge? 

Avez-vous fait balayer le plancher ? 

A-t-on ote la poussiere des meubles ? 

A-t-on pu oter cette tache d'encre 
du tapis ? 

On n'a pas pu l'en oter. 

Essuyez les mains a cet enfant. 

Essuyez-vous les mains a cette ser- 
viette. 

On ne peut sortir sans se mouiller 
les pieds. 



VOCABULAIRE 36. 



The speech. 
The discourse. 
A copy-book. 
A penknife. 
An apron. 
A towel. 



- Le discours, 

Un cahier. 
Un canif. 
Un tablier. 
TJn essuie-mains. 
6* 



The word. 

Speech. 

A composition. 

A slate. 

A sponge. 

A napkin. 



!• La parole. 



Une composition, 
Une ardoise. 
Une eponge. 
Une serviette, 



130 



TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 



Apieceoffurniture.IJn meuble. A spot. line tache. 

Furniture. Des nieubles. Snuffers. Des niouchettes. 

The broom. Le balaie. The dust. La poussiere. 



To sweep. 


Balayer. (70, e) 


To clean. 


Nettoyer, (70, e.) 


To wet 


Mouiller. 


To wipe. 
To wipe off. 


I Essuyer. (TO, e.) 


To get wet. 


Se mouiller. 


To wipe (one's 
self). 


1 S'essuyer. 


To dispose of. 


Faire de. 


To dust. 


Oter la poussiere. 


On it, upon it 


Dessus, (adv.) 


Under it. 


Dessous, (adv.) 



Exercice 36. 

1. Qui a ouvert la porte ? 2. La fille l'a ouverte. 3. M'avez- 
vous dit que ce ruousieur n'a pas tenu sa parole ? 4. Je vous ai 
dit cela, et c'est vrai. 5. Qui l'a dit a votre beau-frere ? 6. Je 
ne sais pas qui le lui a dit. 7. Vous l'a-t-il dit ? 8. II ue me 
l'a pas dit; je l'ai su avaut lui. 9. Avez-vous ecrit votre compo- 
sition francaise? 10. Je l'ai ecrite ce matin. 11. Ou avez-vous 
conduit ces dames? 12. Je les ai conduites chez elles. 13. 
Avez-vous eteint la chandelle ? 14. Je l'ai eteinte avant de sor- 
tir. 15. Avez-vous mis les mouchettes sur la table ou dessous ? 
16. Je les ai mises dessus. 17. Avez-vous mis mon ardoise sous 
le banc ou dessus? 18. Je l'ai mise dessous, et j'ai mis votre 
cahier dessus. 19. Ou avez-vous pris cette eponge? 20. Je l'ai 
prise dans votre chambre. 21. L' avez-vous mouillee ? 22. Je 
l'ai mouillee pour nettoyer 1' ardoise. 23. Qu'avez-vous fait de 
mon canif ? 24. Je ne sais pas ce que j'en ai fais. 25. Quand 
avez-vous vu votre belle-soeur? 26. Je l'ai vue ce matin. 27. 
Pourquoi ne l'avez-vous pas amenee ? 28. Elle n'a pas voulu 
venir. 29. Avez-vous connu celui qui a tenu ce magasin? 30. 
Je ne l'ai pas connu. 31. Avez-vous lu ces discours? 32. Je 
les ai lus. 33. Votre grand-pere a-t-il cru ces nouvelles? 34. 
Tl ne les a pas crues. 35. Avez-vous appris votre lecon ? 36. 
Je ne l'ai pas apprise, parce que je ne l'ai pas comprise. 37. 
Avez-vous fait balayer votre chambre ? 38. On la balaie tous les 
jours. 39. A-t-on ote la poussiere des meubles? 40. On va le 



TRENTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 131 

faire tout-a-Pheure. 41. A-t-on pu oter la taclie d'encre du ta- 
pis ? 42. On n'a pas pu Ten oter. 43. Qu'a-t-on fait du balai? 
44. On l'a mis a sa place. 45. A-t-on apporte un essuie-naains 
propre ? 46. llya des essuie-mains dans cette arnioire. 47. 
Donnez-in'en un pour rn'essuyer les mains. 48. Essuyez-vous 
les mains a cette serviette ; la voici. 49. A-t-il piu beaucoup 
pendant la nuit? 50. II a plu toute la nuit; on ne peut aller 
dans les rues sans se mouiller les pieds. 



Theme 36. 

1. Why have they opened the window ? 2. They have 
opened it because they are going to clean the room. 3. They 
sweep the floor before they dust the furniture. 4. Why did 
your friend not keep his word ? 5. He has not been able to 
keep it. 6. Who told you that \ 1. He did. 8. Did you tell 
your father of it? 9. *I did not; he knew it before I did. 10. 
Have you done your task (devoir) ? 11. I have written my com- 
position, but I have not learned my lesson ; I could not under- 
stand it. 12. What have you done with the lamp? 13. I ex- 
tinguished it, and put it on the mantel-piece. 14. Did you put 
my copy-book under the table ? 15. I did not put it under it; 
I put it upon it. 16. Where did you take that slate from ? 17. 
I took it out of my sister's room. 18. Did you wet the sponge ? 
19. I wet it, and washed the slate with it (avec). 20. I wiped 
it with this dirty apron. 21. My sister wanted to remove {oter) 
the spots from this piece of furniture, but she could not do it. 
22. When did you see your grandmother? 23. I saw her not 
long ago (il rfy a pas longtemps) ; I conducted her to my uncle's. 
24. Have you known Mr. S...., who is now in Paris? 25. 
Have you read Mr. Webster's speeches? 26. I have read them, 
but I wish to read them once more (une seconde fois). 27. Did 
your father hear the news? 28. He heard it, but he did not 
believe it. 29. Did you drink all the lemonade ? 30. We drank 
only a part of it. 31. Have you had your room swept ? 32. 
The girl has taken the broom to do it. 33. Take a towel, and 
wipe that child's hands. 34. Wipe your hands with this napkin. 



132 TRENTE-SEPTI^ME LECON. 

35. What have you done with my penknife ? 36. Here it is, 
37. It rained much during the night, but the wind has already 
dried up the streets. 38. Have you had the snuffers cleaned? 
39. I have had my linen washed and mended. 



37. TEENTE-SEPTlfiME LEgOKT. 

145. The compound tenses of the intransitive verbs alter, ar- 
river, entrer, rentrer, r ester, retourner, venir, revenir, sortir, partir 
(to start), tomber (to fall), and of a few others, are formed with 
the auxiliary fore. 

(a.) The past participle, construed with Ure, agrees, in gender 
and number, with the subject ; as, 

I have gone, or I went. Je suis alle, fem. allee. 

He has arrived She has entered. II est arrive. Elle est entree. 
"We remained. Nous sommes restes, fem. restees. 

You eame. Vous etes venu, venus ; venue, ve- 

nues. 
They have gone out They started. lis sont sortis. Elles sont parties. 



146» (a.) Sortir and some other verbs are sometimes construed 
with etre, and sometimes with avoir. With etre, to express state 
or situation ; with avoir, to express action ; as, 

I went out this morning. J'ai sorti* ce matin. 

My sister-in-law has gone out. Ma belle-sceur est sortie. 

They have passed ; they passed by Elles sont passees ; elles ont pass6 

here. par ici. 

(6.) Instead of the past indefinite of aller, the past indefinite 
of etre is used, when the past tense of to go has the meaning of 
have been ; as, 

I went to the theatre last night. J'ai 6te au theatre hier au soir. 
We went to Boston last week. Nous avons 6te a Boston la semaine 

passee. 

* The auxiliary avoir is always used in the past tense of sortir when it means to 
have been out. 



TRENTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 



133 



147. The compound tenses of all reflective verbs are formed 
with etre. 

(a.) The past participle of reflective verbs agrees, like the past 
participle of transitive verbs, with the direct object, when pre- 
ceded by it ; as, 

I burned myself. Je me suis brule, fem. brulee. 

She washed herself Elle s'est lavee. 

She washed her hands. Elle s'est lave les mains. 

She washed and wiped them. Elle se les est lavees et essuyees. 

In the above examples, the past participles and their direct 
objects are in italics. 



148. (a.) How long. 
How long did he live there ? 
He lived there about two years. 

(b.) How long. 
7lll f until ; as far as. 
How long did you remain there ? 
We staid there till Monday. 

(c.) Until what time ? 
Till eleven o'clock. 

(d.) How far. 
As far as his house. 
As far as the end of the road. 
As far as France. 



Combien de temps. 

Combien de temps a-t-il demeure la? 

II y a demeure environ deux ans. 

Jusqu'a quand. 

Jusque. 

Jusqu'a quand etes-vous restes la ? 

Nous y sommes restes jusqu'a lundL 

JusqxCd quelle heure? 

Jusqu'a onze heures. 



cou. 

Jusque chez lui. 
Jusqu'au bout du chemin. 
Jusqu'en France. 



149. The names of the days of the week are of the masculine 
gender. They are : 



Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednes- 
day, Thursday, Friday, Saturday. 
On Tuesday. Tuesdays. 
Every Tuesday. 



Dimanche, lundi, mardi, mercredi, 

jeudi, vendredi, saraedi. 
Mardi. Le mardi. 
Tous les mardis. 



He leaves on Thursday for Europe. II part jeudi pour l'Europe. 



An American. 
A European. 



Un Am^ricain. 
Un Europeen. 



VOCABULAIRE 37. 

America. 
Europe. 



L'Amerique, 
L'Europe. 



134 



TRENTE-SEPTlfiME LE^ON. 



A German. Un Allemand. 

The end, (the ex- ) T , , 
tr erne point.) ) 

To recognize. •] 
To pity. J 

To undertake. •] 

To leave. ( 

To set out. ( 

To beg, to praj. 
To leave, to quit, ) 
(trans.) ) 

About. 
Till, until; as far as. 

How long. (147, b.) 



Germany. L'Allemagne. 

The end,(^<? con- ) T fi 
elusion.) ) 



Reconnaitre, irr. 

(101, a.) 
Plain dre, irr. 

(101, e.) 
Entre prendre 

(de), irr. (I0l,e.) 
Partir,* irr. (95, 

b.) 

Prier (de). 
Quitter.* 

Environ. 
Jusque. 

Jusqu'a quand. 



To translate. 
To promise. 
To offer. 

To accompany. 

To accept. 
To re-enter. 
To come in. 
Almost, nearly. 
How far. 
How long. (147, 
a.) 



j Traduire, irr. 
( (101, b.) 
j Promettre (de), 
I irr. (101, d.) 
j Offrir (de), irr. 
\ (95, a.) 

Accompagner. 

Accepter. 

(• Rentrer. 

Presque. 

Jusqu'ou. 
^ Combien de 
J temps. 



EXERCICE 37. 



1. Ou etes-vous alle ce matin quand vous m'avez quitte au 
bureau? 2. Je suis alle de la a la banque. 3. Yotre niece est- 
elle sortie ? 4. Oui, M. ; elle est allee a l'eglise. 5. Quand etes- 
vous arrives ? 6. Nous sommes arrives lundi. 7. Qui est venu 
avec vous ? 8. Mes sceurs sont venues avec moi. 9. Jusqu'a 
quelle heure etes-vous restes au spectacle hier au soir? 10. Nous 
y sommes restes jusqu'a la fin de la piece. 11. A quelle lieure 
etes-vous rentres? 12. Nous sommes rentres a minuit. 13. 
Avez-vous sorti ce matin? 14. Je n'ai pas sorti. 15. Vous 
etes-vous bien chauffee, mademoiselle? 16. Je me suis chauffee 
assez longtemps. 17. Votre sceur s'est-elle mouille les pieds ? 
18. Elle se les est mouilles. 19. Vous etes-vous essuye les 
mains a cette serviette ? 20. Nous nous les y sommes essuyees. 



* Partir, quitter, laisser, to leave. Partir is intransitive, and means to depart. 
Quitter and laisser are transitive verbs; the former means to quit, to part with, the 
latter, to leave behind; as, fai quitte mon fils au coin de la rue, I left my son (I 
parted with him) at the corner of the street; fai laisse mon fils d la maison, I left my 
Bon at home (I did not bring him with me). 



TBENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 135 

21. Vos amis sont-ils deja partis pour 1'Alleniagne ? 22. lis 
sont partis mercredi, sur le Neptune. 23. Ponrquoi ces Alle- 
mands sont-ils verms en Ainerique ? 24. lis y sont venus pour 
faire le commerce. 25. Pourquoi ces Americains sont-ils alles 
en Europe? 26. lis y sont alles pour leurs affaires. 27. Corn- 
Ken de temps avez-vous demeure a Paris? 28. Nous y avons 
demeure environ deux ans. 29. Jusqu'a quand etes-vous reste 
a la campagne ? 30. J'y suis reste jusqu'a mardi. 31. Jusqu'ou 
avez-vous conduit vos amis? 32. Je les ai conduits jusqu'au 
bout du chemin. 33. Ne les avez-vous pas conduits jusque chez 
eux ? 34. Non, M. ; je les ai quittes au bout du chemin. 35. 
Quand votre parent part-il pour Boston? 36. II va partir ven- 
dredi ou samedi. 37. JSTe vous a-t-il pas prie de l'accompagner? 
38. II m'en a prie, mais je ne peux pas le faire ; je n'en ai pas le 
temps. 39. Cet liomme accepte-t-il ce que vous lui offrez? 40. 
II a accepte ce que je lui ai offert. 41. Avez-vous reconnu la 
dame qui vient de passer? 42. Je ne l'ai pas reconnue. 43. 
Entreprenez-vous de traduire ce livre en allemand ? 44. Je l'ai 
entrepris et je l'ai deja presque traduit. 45. Me promettez-vous 
de venir me voir ce soir? 46. Je ne vous le promets pas, car 
j'ai beaucoup a faire. 47. Plaignez-vous celui qui ne plaint 
personne ? 48. Je le plains, et j'ai toujour s plaint ceux qui ne 
-plaignent point les autres. 



Theme 37. 

1. My brother has gone to the office. 2. The children have 
gone to see their grandfather. 3. My sister has entered (dans) 
the garden. 4. We went to the theatre last night. 5. From 
there we went* to my mother-in-law's. 6. How late (148, c) 
did you remain there ? 7. AVe remained there till eleven o'clock. 
8. AVe came in a little before midnight. 9. My aunt arrived on 
Saturday, but my cousins did not come with her. 10. Did you 
go to church on Sunday I 11. We go to church on Sundays, and 
to the dancing -sd tool (Tccole de dansc) on Mondays and Thursdays. 

* In this sentence, went has not the sense of have been. (146, 1.) 



136 TRENTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 

12. My brother and sister have gone out, but I have not been 
out this morning. 13. Have you hurt yourself (se /aire mal) % 
14. I have burned myself. 15. My sister has cut herself. 16. 
The children washed their hands, and wiped them with that 
napkin. 17. My uncle returned home on Tuesday. 18. He 
begged my father to accompany him, but father cannot leave his 
(les) business at present (en ce moment). 19. He went, however, with 
him (cependant il Va accompagne) as far as the village. 20. They 
started early in the morning, and father returned at ten o'clock 
in the evening. 21. How long did your uncle live in that house ? 
22. He lived there about two years. 23. How long did your 
brother-in-law remain in the country ? 24. He remained there 
till Wednesday. 25. How far did you accompany him? 26.1 
parted with him at the end of the road. 27. When did he leave 
for Europe? 28. He left here (d'ici) on Friday. 29. Those 
Germans came to America to see the country. 30. They return 
again to Germany ; they set out to-morrow. 31. Accept what I 
offer you ; pray, do (je vous en prie). 32. Those ladies, who have 
just passed, did not recognize us. 33. I promise to give you 
something, if you do what you have promised me to do. 34. 
We pity the wicked ; we have always pitied them, for they are 
to be pitied (a plaindre). 35. We undertook, six months ago (il 
y a six mois), to translate this book from German into English. 
36. We have nearly translated it. 37. We are almost at the end. 



38. TRENTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 

150 • It is, used in connection with how long or since, is ren- 
dered by il y a. After il y a, since, followed by a verb, is ex- 
pressed by que ; as, 

How long is it since he started ? Combien de temps y a-t-il qu'il est 

parti ? 

Ago is rendered by il y a, placed before the period of time ; 
as, 



TRENTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 



137 



He started two hours ago. II est parti il y a deux heures. 

Is it long since you received that Y a-t-il longtemps que vous avez 

letter ? recu cette lettre ? 

I received it six months ago. 11 y a six mois que je l'ai recue. 

Rem. — When il y a (or depuis, 150) refers to the beginning 
of a state or action which is still continuing, the verb expressing 
this state or action is put in the present ; as, 

How long have you been learning Combien de temps (or combien) y a- 

French ? t-il que vous apprenez le francais ? 

I have been learning it these six II y a six mois que je Vapprends* 
months. 

Have you been long in this coun- Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes 

try ? dans ce pays ? 

I have been here two years. II y a deux ans queje suis ici. 



151* Since. 

How long. 

How long has he been here ? 

Since yesterday. These three days. 

This great while. 

Not long since, lately. 

How long have you known that ? 

Only since this morning. 

Since. 

Since you left. 



Depths, (prep, and adv.) 

Depuis quand. 

Depuis quand est-il ici ? 

Depuis hier. Depuis trois jours. 

Depuis longtemps. 

Depuis peu. 

Depuis quand savez-vous cela ? 

Seulement depuis ce matin. 

Depuis que, (conj.) 

Depuis que vous etes parti. 



Rem. — After depuis que and il y a, ne is used before the verb 
in the perfect, when we speak with reference to the interval of 
time between an event or action and the present. In this case, 
the negative might be used in English, without altering the 
sense ; as, 



Since I saw you it has rained fre- 
quently. 
It is long since I heard from him. 



Depuis que je ne vous ai vu il a plu 

souvent. 
II y a longtemps que je n'ai eu de 

ses Jiouvelles. 



152* To bun. To have run. Courik. irr. Avoir couru. 

I run. We run. Je cours. Nous courons. 

To sleep. To have slept. Dormir. irr. Avoir dormi. 

I sleep. We sleep. Je dors. Nous dormons, 



138 



TRENTE-HUITIEME LECON. 



To serve. To have served. 

I serve. We serve. 

To be in one's service. 

To do or render one service. 

To be under obligation to one. 

To fulfil one's obligations. 

To make a person a present of a 

thing. 
This is the cane which he made me 

a present of. 



Servir. irr. Avoir servi. 

Je sers. Nous servons. 

Etre au service de qqn. 

Rendre service a qqn. 

Avoir des obligations a qqn. 

Remplir ses obligations. 

Faire present (or cadeau) de qq. ch. 
a qqn. 

Yoici la canne dont il m'a fait ca- 
deau. 



153. 

The names of the four seasons of 
the year are of the masculine 
gender, viz. : 



Spring. 
Autumn. 
In spring. 
In summer. 
In autumn. 



Summer. 

Winter. 

In the spring. 

In the summer. 

In winter. 



Les noms des quatre saisons de 
l'annee sont du genre masculin, 
s avoir : 

Le printemps. L'ete. 

L'automne. L'hiver. 

Au printemps. Dans le printemps. 

En ete. Dans l'ete. 

En automne. En hiver. 



VoCABULAIRE 38. 



The beginning. Le commencement. 
The departure. Le depart. 
The service. Le service. 
The present. | Le cadeau. 



Christmas. 



! Le present. 
NoeL 



The season. 
The absence. 
The obligation. 
The offer. 
The promise. 
The holiday. 
The feast. 



i 



La saisoa 

L'absence. 

L'obligation. 

L'offre. 

La promesse. 

La fete. 



New-year's day. Le jour de Fan. New-year's gift. L'etrenne. 



To run. Courir. irr. 

To serve. Servir. irr. 

^ . [• Rencontrer. 

lo meet with. ) 

To take away. Emmener. 

Tired. Fatigue (de). 

Polite. Poli. 



Only. 



Seulement.* 



To sleep. 
To rely upon. 

To salute. 

To take away. 
Obliged 
Obliging. 
Infinitely. 
Very much. 



Dormir. irr. 
Compter sur. 

Saluer. 

Emporter. 
Oblige (de). 
Obligeant. 

[■ Infiniment. 



* Only, separated from the verb, is always expressed by settlement, 



TRENTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 139 

Ago. (150.) II y a. Since. \ ^^(prep.&adv.) 

° v ' J ( Depuis que, (conj.) 

As soon as. Aussitot que. Lately. i -^ • * \ 

u J ( Dermerement. 



Exercice 38. 



1. Combien d^ temps y a-t-il que vous avez quitte Paris ? 2. 
II y a environ clix ans. 3. Y a-t-il longtemps que votre frere est 
arrive? 4. II n'y a pas plus d'une heure. 5. Combien de 
temps y a-t-il que vous demeurez ici ? 6. II y a deja trois ans 
que nous demeurons ici. 7. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous atten- 
dez le docteur? 8. Nous l'attendons depuis midi. 9. Depuis 
quand est-il enville? 10. Seulement depuis bier. 11. Avez- 
vous rencontre M. Denis quelque part? 12. Je l'ai rencontre 
sur la place, il n'y a pas longtemps. 13. Ou avez-vous ete de- 
puis que je ne vous ai vu? 14. Depuis que nous ne nous som- 
mes vus j'ai'ete en Europe. 15. Avez-vous entendu parler de 
M. S. . . . depuis peu? 16. II y a deja longtemps que je n'ai 
entendu parler de lui. 17. Avez-vous recu des nouvelles de votre 
frere dernierement ? 18. JSTous n'avons pas eu de ses nouvelles 
depuis son depart. 19. Qui est-ce que vous saluez? 20. Je 
salue les dames qui viennent de passer. 21. Ou courez-vous si 
vite ? 22. Je cours pour voir arriver le steamer. 23. Ne dort- 
on pas bien quand on a couru toute la joumee ? 24. Je ne sais 
pas trop ; moi je ne dors pas bien quand je suis tres-fatigue. 25. 
Ces enfants dorment-ils deja? 26. lis dorment aussitot qu'ils 
sont au lit ; le soir ils sont toujours fatigues de courir. 27. Yous 
sert-on bien dans ce magasin? 28. On nous y a toujours bien 
servis; les commis sont polis et tres-obligeants. 29. Depuis 
quand ce jeune homrne est-il a votre service ? 30. Seulement 
depuis le commencement de l'automne. 31. Quand comptez- 
vous aller voir vos amis? 32. Je compte aller les voir au priu- 
temps. 33. Youlez-vous m'emmener avec vous ? 34. Yous sa- 
vez que je vous l'ai promis. 35. Puis-je compter sur votre pro- 
messe? 36. Certainement vous pouvez y compter. 37. Accep- 
tez-vous TorTre que je vous ai faite ? 38. Je vous suis infiniment 
oblige, mais je ne puis Faccepter. 39. Avez-vous des obligations 



140 TRENTE-HUITIEME LE^ON. 

au capitaine Duroc ? 40. Oui, M. ; il nous a rendu de grands 
services. 41. Ou sont les estampes dont votre oncle vous a fait 
cadeau ? 42. Mon frere les a einportees pour les montrer a ma 
belle-sceur. 43. N'est-ce pas que je recois plus de presents en 
hiver qu'en ete ? 44. Certainement ; l'hiver est la saison des 
fetes ; c'est en hiver que viennent Noel et le jour de Tan avec ses 
etrennes, rnais seulement pour les bons sujets. 



Theme 38. 

1. How long is it since you arrived in this country ? 2. "We 
arrived here ten years ago. 3. Is it long since your sisters start- 
ed ? 4. They started not more than an hour ago. 5. How long 
have you had that picture ? 6. I have had it about a fortnight 
(quinze jours). 7. How long have these scholars been studying 
German ? 8. They have studied it six months. 9. Have you 
been here long ? 10. I have been here since two o'clock. 11. 
I have been here these two hours. 12. Have you heard from 
home since you started ? 13. I have had two letters from home 
since my departure. 14. It is long since I have heard of Mr. 
B....; have you seen him lately? 15. I met him not long 
since ; he has been from home (absent) for some time. 16. Have 
you been sick since I saw you? 17. I have been very sick du- 
ring your absence. 18. "Why do you run ? 19. I do not run; 
I have run all the morning ; I am tired of running. 20. Do you 
sleep well in spring ? 21.1 always sleep as soon as I am in 
bed. 22. I feel very sleepy (fai bien envie de dormir), for I did 
not sleep well last night. 23. People sleep better in winter than 
in summer. 24. How long has this young man been in your 
service ? 25. Only since autumn ; he serves us at table ; he is 
very intelligent and very attentive. 26. Dinner is served (on a 
servi le diner) ; stay and dine with us. (130.) 27. I am very 
much obliged to you, but I have promised to dine with Doctor 
L. . . . to-clay. 28. I am under obligation to the doctor ; he has 
done me service. 29. He is a man on ivhose promises (sur les 
promesses duquel) one can rely. 30. Our friends are polite and 
obliging ; we are under many (de grandes) obligations to them, 



TRENTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 



141 



for they have served us well. 31. My uncle is going to spend 
[passer) the Christmas holidays at Boston. 32. He offered to 
take (emmener) me with him, but I could not accept his offer. 
33. I must be here on New-year's day to receive my New-year's 
presents. 34. Where is the handsome whip which your uncle 
made you a present of? 35. You mean the one he brought me 
from Paris 1 My brother-in-law took it away the other day, and 
he has not yet brought it back. 



39. TRENTE-NEUVIEME LEgOK 

154. The impersonal verb il y a is used with reference to dis- 
tance ; as, 

How far is it from Paris to Rome ? Quelle distance y a-t-il de Paris a 

Rome? 

How many miles is it from here to Combien de milles y a-t-il d'ici a 

Boston ? Boston ? 

How far is it to that village ? Combien y a-t-il d'ici a ce village ? 

Is it far from here to your house ? Y a-t-il loin d'ici chez vous ? 

It is a hundred paces to the end of II y a cent pas d'ici au bout du che- 

the road. min. 



155 1 Near; nearly, (before a 
number.) 
Near me. Near my house. 

Near here. Near the church. 

Nearly a hundred. Nearly noon. 
Near, close to or by. 
He lives close to the church. 
The river passes by the city. 
He is nowhere happy but near her. 

I TO, BY THE SIDE OF. 

By my side. By her side. 

I passed by your side. 

Next to my house. 

Next door. 

On this side. On that side. 



Pees de, (proximity of place and 

time.) 
Pres de moi. Pres de chez moi. 

Pres d'ici. Pres de l'eglise. 

Pres de cent. Pies de midi. 

Aupres de, (proximity of place.) 
II demeure aupres de l'eglise. 
La riviere passe aupres de la ville. 
II n'est heureux qu'aupres d'elle. 
A cote DE. 

A c6te de moi. A c6te d'elle. 
J'ai passe a c6te de vous. 
A c6te de chez moi. 
La porte a c6te\ 
De ce cote-ci. De ce cote-ld. 



142 



TREXTE-XEUVIEME LEC0X*. 



He passed on the other side of the II a passe de l'autre cote de la rue. 

street. 
Which way did he go ? De quel c6te est-il alle ? 

He went towards the river. II est alle du cote de la riviere. 



156 « To 'pay for a thing. Payer qq. ch. 

How much did you pay for these Combien avez-vous paye ces ta- 

pictures ? bleaux ? 

I paid a hundred dollars for them. Je les ai payes cent dollars. 

Eem. 1. — "We say : payer qq. ch. a qqn., to pay somebody for 
something ; and payer qqn., to pay somebody ; the person being 
the direct object of the verb payer, when the thing paid for is 
not expressed ; as, 



I pay the baker. 

I pay the baker for the bread. 

Did you pay the shoemaker for the 

shoes ? 
I did. 



Je paie le boulanger. 

Je paie le pain au boulanger. 

Avez-vous paye les souliers au cor- 

donnier ? 
Je les lui ai payes. 



Eem. 2. — For or at, used before the price of a thing, with the 
verbs to buy and sell, is generally not expressed in French, and 
a or an, limiting the unit of weight or measure, by which any 
thing is bought or sold, is rendered by the article ; as, 

I bought that flour at six dollars a J'ai achete cette farine (a) six dol- 

barrel. lars le baril. 

We sold that linen at a dollar a Nous avons vendu cette toile (a) 

yard. une piastre la verge. 



157» To go ooi a journey. 
On foot. On horseback. 

In a carriage. 

To -walk a step. To take steps. 
To walk or travel a mile, a league. 



Faire un voyage. 

A pied. A cheval. 

En voiture. 

Faire un pas. Faire des demarches, 

Faire un mille, une lieue. 



Hem. — The prepositions en and dans are used with reference to 
time ; en precedes a period of time ; dans, the epoch ; as, 

He travelled ten miles in an hour. II a fait dix milles en une heure. 
I start in a fortnight. Je pars dans quinze jours. 



TRENTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 



143 



VOCABULAIRE 39. 



An engraver. 


Un graveur. 


An engraving. 


Une gravure. 


A traveller. 


Un voyageur. 


A stage-coach. 


Une diligence* 


The journey. 


Le voyage. 


The distance. 


La distance. 


A mile. 


Un mille. 


A league. 


Une lieue. 


A step, a pace. 


Un pas. 


The gait ; the step. 


La demarche. 


A cold. 


Un rhume.* 


The cough. 


La toux. 


The side. 


Le cote. 


The chest, the breast. La poitrine. 


The brain. 


Le cerveau. 


The brains. 


La cervelle.f 


To pay. 


Payer. (70, e.) 


To cough. 


Tousser. 


Is ear ; nearly. 


Pres de. 


Near, close to or by. Aupres de. 


Next to. 

By the side of. 


[• A c6te de. 


Scarcely.:): 


A peine. 


Far. 


Loin. 


Afar, at a distance. 


De loin. 


Twenty. 


Vingt.§ 


One hundred. 


Cent.§ 




Exercice 39. 





1. Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a Douvres? 2. II y a 
huit lieues. 3. Combien de milles y a-t-il de New York a Bos- 
ton? 4. II y a environ deux cents milles. 5. Combien y a-t-il 
d'ici a la riviere? 6. II y a pres de deux milles d'ici la. 7. Y 
a-t-il loin d'ici chez vous ? 8. II n'y a pas loin ; il y a a peine 
un quart de mille. 9. Demeurez-vous pres d'ici? 10. Je de- 
meure pres de la place. 11. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous y de- 
meurez? 12. II y a pres de deux ans que j'y demeure. 13. 
Avez-vous passe devant notre magasin quand vous etes venu? 
14. Non, M. ; j'ai passe aupres du theatre? 15. Avez-vous vu 
le medecin ce matin? 16. Je viens de passer a cote de lui, 
tout pres d'ici. 17. De quel c6te de la rue etes-vous venu? 



* A cold on the lungs, un rhume de poitrine. A cold in the head, un rhume de 
cerveau. 

+ CerveUe is used only in a few expressions ; as, bruler la cervelle a qqn. ; se bruler 
la cervelle, to blow out one's brains. 

X Scarcely, in a negative sentence, is expressed by presque ; as, I scarcely owe any 
thing, je ne dois presque Hen ; I scarcely ever see him, .70 ne le vois presque jamais. 

% Vingt and cent, when multiplied, and not immediately followed by another num- 
ber, take the plural ending; as, quatre-vingts piastres; trois cents milles. But: 
quatre-vingt trois piastres; trois cent vingt milles, without the s. 



144 trente-neuvieme le^on. 

18. Je suis venu de ce cote-ci de la rue. 19. De quel cote est-il 
alle ? 20. II est alle de ce cote-la. 21. Mes soeurs sont-elles 
passes? 22. Oui, M. ; elles out passe de 1' autre cote de la rue. 
23. Combien avez-vous paye ces gravures? 24. Je les ai payees 
cinq dollars la piece. 25. Avez-vous paye le boucher ? 26. Je 
Fai paye ce matin. 27. Lui avez-vous paye la viande de la se- 
maine passee ? 28. Je la lui ai payee. 29. Avez-vous paye les 
souliers au cordonnier ? 30. Je ne les lui ai pas encore payes. 
31. Vous a-t-on tout paye ? 32. Oui, M. ; on ne me doit presque 
plus rien. 33. Avez-vous fait un voyage Fete passe ? 34. J'ai 
fait un voyage a pied. 35. Combien de milles avez-vous faits a 
pied? 36. J'ai fait plus de quatre-vingts milles en huit jours. 
37. Combien de milles avez-vous faits a cheval ce matin? 38. 
J'ai fait dix-huit milles en deux heures de temps. 39. Ces voy- 
ageurs sont-ils venus en diligence ? 40. lis sont venus a cheval. 
41. Quand voulez-vous partir? 42. J'ai Fintention de partir 
dans quinze jours. 43. Y a-t-il longtemps que vous avez cette 
toux ? 44. II y a deja longtemps que je Fai. 45. Avez-vous un 
rhume de cerveau? 46. J'ai un rhume de poitrine et mal au 
cote. 47. Toussez-vous beaucoup? 48. Je ne peux pas faire 
dix pas sans tousser. 



Theme 39. 

1. How far is it from N. Y. to P.? 2. How many miles is it 
from here to the village ? 3. It is nearly five miles. 4. Is it 
two hundred paces from here to the corner of the square ? 5. 
It is scarcely one hundred and eighty paces from here to there. 
6. Does your cousin live far from here? 7. No, sir; he lives 
near our house ; it is not more than a quarter of a mile from 
here to his house. 8. Do you know the man who is comiuof 
near the fountain ? 9. I know him at a distance by (d) his gs' : 
it is the engraver, who lives close to the church. 10. Does Doc- 
tor B live here ? 11. No, sir ; he lives next door. 12. Did 

you pass by the Exchange ? 13. Yes ; and I passed by your side 
and you did not see me. 14. Your sisters have passed; they 
passed by our side. 15. Did they pass on this side of the street? 



QUARANTINE LECON. 145 

16. They passed on trie other side of the street. 17. Which 
way did they go? 18. They went towards the market. 19, 
They went as far as the other side of the square. 20. How 
much did your father pay for these engravings.? 21. He paid 
twenty dollars apiece for them. 22. How much did you pay for 
this wine ? 23. I bought it at four dollars a basket, and I sell it 
at fifty cents a bottle. 24. Have you paid the tailor? 25. I 
paid him this morning. 26. Did jou pay him for my clothes? 
27. I did. 28. I was paid yesterday, and I paid nearly all my 
debts this morning. 29. I scarcely owe any thing. 30. And 
now I am going on a journey; I start in two hours; farewell, 
my friends (adieu, mes amis). 31. Axe you going on horse- 
back? 32. No, I go on foot; I like to walk; I walk six' miles 
every day. 33. My father came (arriver) in a carriage last 
night ; he travelled eighty-three miles in ten hours, 34. What 
is the matter with you? 35. I have a cold on my lungs. 36. 
My brother has a cold in his head, and a pain in his side. 37. 
Did not that traveller, who came in the stage-coach, cough 
much? 38. Indeed, he did not stop coughing; I believe he is 
-consumptive (poitrinaire). 39. Have they taken our horses away $ 

40. Yes ; and I believe they have taken away my trunk, too, 

41. "What does that mean? 42. We are going to change 
coaches (Nous allons change de voiture). 43. Gentlemen, all 
ready (Voyageurs, en route). 44. Now we are off (Nous voila 
ixtrtis). 45. Good by (Au revoir). 46. A pleasant journey 
(Bon voyage). 



40, QUARANTIEME LE£ON. 



158. To 


BE 


BORN. 


Xaitre. irr. 




To have been born. 




Eire n'e. 




I am born. 






We are born. 


Je nais. 


Nous naissons. 


To DIE. 






To have died. 


Mourir. irr. 


JEtre mort. 


I die. 






We die. 


Je meurs. 


Nous mourons. 


They die. 








lis meurerti. 





146 



QUARANTINE LE£ON. 



To LIVE. 
I live. 

To FOLLOW. 

I follow. 



To have lived. 
We live. 
To have followed. 
We follow. 



VlVRE. 

Je vis. 

SUIVRE. 

Je.suis. 



Avoir vecm, 
Nous vivons. 
Avoir suivL 
Nous suivons. 



159« Where were you horn t 

I was born in France. 

My children were born in this coun- 
try. 

How old is that child i 

He is ten years. 

How old is your eldest daughter? 

She is not quite twelve. 

Are you older than your brother ? 

Few men die of old age. 

She died in the beginning of winter. 

I live by my labor, and live content- 
edly. ^ 
The Indians live on horse-flesh. 

We dined on roast beef. 



Ou etes-vous ne f* 

Je suis ne en France. 

Mes enfants sont nes dans ce pays-ci 

Quel dge eet enfant a-t-il ? 

II a dix ans. 

Quel age a votre fille ainee ? 

Elle n T a pas tout-a-fait douze ans. 

Etes-vous plus age que votre frere ? 

Peu d'hommes meurent de vieillesse, 

Elle est morte au commencement 
de l'hiver. 

Je vis de mon travail et je vis con- 
tent. 

Les Indiens vivent de chair de che- 
val. 

Nous avons dine de bceuf r6ti. 



1 60 1 Wherewith to Iwe. 

He has not wherewith to live. 

Is it good living in France ? 

Is the living good in France 2 

It is good living there. 

It is dear living in London. 

It is good travelling, good w alking. 

Do you earn much money ? 

How much do you spend a month ? 

To get one's livelihood by. 

By what does that man get his liv- 
ing? 

He gets his living by working. 



De quoi vivre. 

II n r a pas de quoi vivre. 

Fait-il bon vivre en France ? 

II y fait bon vivre. 

II fait cher vivre a Londres. 

II fait bon voyager, bon marcher, 

Gagnez-vous beaucoup d'argent ? 

Combien depensez-vous par mois ? 

Gagner sa vie a. 

A quoi eet homme gagne-t-il sa 

vie ? 
II £2ragne sa vie a travailler. 



* When the person spoken of is dead, the auxiliary is put in the imperfect tense ; as, 
Mon grand-pere est mort T il etait n& d Strasbourg. 



QUARANTINE LECON. 



147 



161 • Do you like roast beef Aimez-vous le bceuf roti bien cuit ? 
well done? 

Je l'aime mieux pen cuit. 
Youlez-vous du gras ou du maigre ? 
Donnez-moi un peu de Tun et de 

l'autre. 
Les oies grasses sont bonnes a, man- 
ger. 
L'oiseau est mort dans sa cage. 
Les oiseaux font leurs nids dans le 
printemps. 

Animals are poor when winter is Les animaux sont maigres au sortir 
over. de l'hiver. 



I like it better underdone (rare)* 
Do you wish for fat or lean ? 
Give me a little of both. 

Fat geese are good eating. 

The bird is dead in his cage. 
Birds build their nests in spring. 





Vocabu: 


LAIRE 40. 




A youth. 


Un adolescent. 


Youth. 


La jeunesse. 


An old man. 


Un vieillard. 


Old age. 


La vieillesse. 


The age. 


L'age. 


Life. 


La vie. 


The animal. 


L'animal. 


The flesh. 


La chair. 


A bird. 


Un oiseau. 


A goose. 


Une oie. 


The nest. 


Le nid. 


The cage. 


La cage. 


An Indian. 


Un Indien. 


An Indian woman. 


Une Indienne. 


To be born. 


Naitre. irr. 


To die. 


Mourir. irr. 


To live. 


Vivre. irr. 


To follow. 


Suivre. irr. 


To gain ; to earn. 


Gagner fa). 


To spend (money). 


Depenser (a). 


Old, aged. 


Age. 


Elder, eldest. 


Aine. 


Dead. 


Mort. 


Living, alive. 


Vivant. 


Lean. 


Maigre. 


Fat. 


Gras, sse. (61.) 


Raw. 


Cru. 


Cooked. 


Cuit, 


Roasted. 


Rati 


Salted. 


Sale. 


Nearly, about. 


A peu pres. 


Closely. 


De pres. 


Especially. 
Above all 


y Surtout. 


Easily. 


Facilement. 



Exercice 40. 

1. Ou ce vieillard est-il* ne? 2. II est ne en France. 3. Y 
a-t-il longtemps qu'il est dans ce pays-ci ? 4. II est verm ici chiiS 
sa jeunesse. 5. Ses enfants sont-ils nes ici? 6. Oui, M. ; ils 
sont nes dans cette ville-ci. 7. Quel age a cet adolescent ? 8. 



148 QUARANTIEME LE^ON. 

II n'a pas tout-a-fait seize ans. 9. Quel age a Paine de vos en- 
fants? 10. II a environ dix ans. 11. Etes-vous plus age que 
votre cousin? 12. Nous sommes a peu pres dumeme age. 13. 
De quoi votre grand-pere est-il mort? 14. II est mort de vieil- 
lesse. 15. Les Indiens vivent-ils de chair de cheval? 16. Oui, 
M. ; ils en vivent et la mangent crue. 17. Ne plaignez-vous pas 
l'animal de l'lndien ? 18. Je plains l'lndien et son animal. 19. 
Les animaux sont-ils gras a present? 20. Les animaux sont 
maigres au sortir de l'hiver. 21. Votre oiseau est-il mort ou vi- 
vant ? 22. II est vivant ; mais il est dans son nid, vous ne le 
voyez pas. 23. Avez-vous bien dine aujourd'hui? 24. J'ai tres- 
bien dine d'une oie rotie ; les oies sont grasses et bonnes a pre- 
sent. 25. Dejeunez- vous jamais de poisson sale? 26. Non, M. ; 
je n'aime pas les choses salees, surtout a dejeuner. 27. Com- 
ment trouvez-vous ce boeuf roti ? 28. Je le trouve un peu trop 
cuit ; je l'aime mieux peu cuit. 29. Avez-vous du gras ? 30. 
Pen ai ; mais donnez-moi un petit morceau de rnaigre, s'il vous 
plait. 31. Suivez-vous la mode? 32. ISTon, M. ; je suis trop 
vieux pour la suivre ; je laisse cela a. la jeunesse. 33. Y a-t-il 
longtemps que votre voisin est mort? 34. II y a deux mois, et 
sa femme l'a suivi de pres ; elle est morte la semaine passee. 
35. Fait-il cher vivre en Allemagne? 36. Non, M. ; il y fait 
bon vivre et pas cher. 37. Fait-il bon voyager dans ce pays-ci? 
38. II y fait bon voyager en automne. 39. Depensez-vous ce 
que vous gagnez? 40. Non, M. ; je ne depense pas tout ce que 
je gagne. 41. Combien avez-vous depense le mois passe? 42. 
J'ai depense cent dollars, et j'en ai gagne deux cents. 43. Cette 
Indienne a-t-elle de quoi vivre ? 44. Elle n'a pas de quoi vivre. 
45. A quoi gagne-t-elle sa vie ? 46. Elle gagne sa vie a faire 
des cages. 



Theme 40. 

1. Where were you born? 2. I was born in France. 3. How 
old is that youth ? 4. He is not quite fifteen years. 5. He was 
born in this country ; that old gentleman (yieillard) is his father, 
and there is his mother. 6. His parents were born in England. 



QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 149 

V. My cousin Mary is older than Charles ; she is the eldest of 
the family. 8. Charles is scarcely eleven. 9. My eldest sister 
and your aunt are about (of) the same age. 10. He who dies 
in his youth has only known (n'a connu que) the golden age of 
life. 11. Many birds and other animals die of hunger and cold 
in winter. 12. My grandmother died at the age of a hundred 
years; she died of old age. 13. How do you live in this coun- 
try ? 14. We live pretty well here, especially when we make 
(c/agner) much money. 15. He who lives by his labor, lives con- 
tentedly. 16. How do those Indians live ? 17. They live poorly 
{mat) ; they live on the raw flesh of the animals which they take 
in (a) the chase. 18. Is it good living here? 19. Yes, sir; it 
is dearer living here than in France, but people earn also more 
money here. 20. How much do you spend a month? 21. We 
spend what we make. 22. Last winter, my cousin earned two 
hundred dollars a month ; but he spent, this summer, in travelling, 
all he made last winter by working. 23. Has that Indian where- 
with to live ? 24. He has not ; he gets his living by selling fish. 
25. Will you have a piece of this roasted goose ? 26. I p>*efer 
(J'ai?ne mieux) a slice of roast beef. 27. Do you like it well 
done or rare ? 28. I like it better rare. 29. Will you have fat 
or lean? 30. Give me a little of both, if you please. 31. We 
have breakfasted on salt fish ; I have been thirsty all the morn- 
ing. 32. Why does that Indian woman follow us with her 
cages? 33. She wishes to sell us a bird. 34. Is that bird alive 
or dead? 35. Follow me to the hotel; I wish to buy a nest of 
little birds, to make a present of to my cousin ; it is her birth- 
day to-day [c'est aujourdliui sa fete). 



41. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE^ON. 

162» Many verbs are reflective in French, which are not so in 
English. In English, there are often two verbs to express the 
same idea ; the one expressing it transitively, and the other in- 



150 



QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE^OST. 



transitively. The latter is generally rendered, in French, by the 
reflective form of the transitive verb ; as, 

Coucker, (trans, and intrans.) 



To lay ; also, to lie, to sleep. 

To lie down, to go to bed. 

To raise, to lift up. 

To rise. 

To deceive, to cheat. 

To be 7nistaken. 

I slept in the next room. 

Did you go to bed early ? 

"We rose at sunrise. 

The sun rises, sets. 

He has deceived me. 

I am mistaken, I am wrong. 

He has made a mistake. 

I have taken the wrong road. 



Se coucher, aller se coucher. 

Lever. 

/Se lever. 

Tromper. 

Se tromper. 

J'ai couche dans la chambre a c6te. 

Yous etes vous couche de bonne 

heure ? 
JSTous nous sommes leves au lever 

du soleil. 
Le soleil se leve, se couche. 
II m'a trompe. 
Je me trompe. 
II s'est trompe. 
Je me suis trompe de chemin. 



163# A transitive verb, used intransitively, with an inanimate 
object for its subject, is rendered by the reflective form of the 
transitive verb ; as, 

Glass breaks easily. Le verre se casse facilement. 

That door does not open. Cette porte ne louvre pas. 

So are passive verbs, when they are used in a manner analo- 
gous to the preceding ; as, 

La farine se vend six dollars le baril. 

Ce tableau se voit de loin, 
j Comment cela s'est-il fait ? 
\ Comment a-t-on fait cela ? 

Cela s'est fait ainsi, comme cela. 



Flour is sold at six dollars a barrel, 
That picture is seen at a distance. 

How was that done ? 



That was done thus, like that. 
In what manner. 
In this manner. 

There is no means of doing it other- 
wise. 
Finally, peace has been made. 



De quelle maniere. 

De cette maniere. 

II n'y a pas moyen de le faire au- 

trement. 
Enfin, la paix s'est faite, or est faite. 



164* A few verbs are idiomatically reflective ; as, 
To do, to be. Se porter. 



How do you do ? 



Comment vous portez-vous? 



QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 



151 



I am well; and how are you ? 
Is all your family in good health * 

How are they all at home ? 

Everybody is well. 

Do you enjoy good health! 



Je me porte bien ; et vous-meme ? 
Toute votre famille se porte-t-elle 

bien? 
Comment se porte-t-on chez vous I 
Tout le monde se porte bien. 
Jouissez-vous d'une bonne sante ? 



165t Each, every, 
Each one, every one. 
Each maa Each woman. 
Every time I go there. 
Every one is liable to be mistaken. 
Each one of these ladies is hand- 
some. 
What ? (subject of a verb.) 
What astonishes you ? 
What is that? 



Chaque, (adj.) 

Chacun, (pron.) 

Chaque homme. Chaque femme. 

Chaque fois que fj vais. 

Chacun est sujet a se tromper. 

Chacune de ces dames est belle. 

Qu'est-ce qui? 

Qu'est-ce qui vous etonne ? 

QiCest-ce que Jest? 



VOCABULAIRE 41. 



The sun. 
The treasure. 
The body. 
The advantage. 
Happiness. 
Misfortune. 
The means. 
The expedient. 



Le soleiL 
Le tresor. 
Le corps. 
L'avantage. 
Le bonheur. 
Le malheur. 

(■ Le moyen. 



The mooiL La lune. 

Health. La sante. 

The soul ; the mind. L'ame. 



Peace. 
The law. 
Misery. 
The manner. 
The way. 



La paix. 
La loi. 
La misere. 

- La maniere. 



To lie, to sleep. ) 

To raise, to lift up. Lever. 

To deceive, to cheat. Tromper. 

To enjoy. Jouir (de). 

To astonish. Etonner. 

To cause. Causer. 

Finally, at last. Enfin. 

Like that ; so so. Comrae cela. 

Different. Different. 

Subject to, liable to. Sujet, tte a. 

Each, every. Chaque. 



• Se eoucher. 



To lie down. 

To go to bed. 

To rise. Se lever. 

To be mistaken. Se tromper. 

' >- (of health.) Se porter. 

To be astonished. S'etonner (de). 

To cause, ) t , *., , « «. 
Tom a ke,r ( * e/ ^ m/)ralre - 

Thus, so. Ainsi. 

However. Pourtant. 

Otherwise. Autrement 

Ready. Pret (a). 

Each one, every one. Chacun. 



152 QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEgOlST, 



ExERCICE 41. 



1. Dans quelle chambre avez-vous couche? 2. J'ai couche- 
dans la chambre a cote de la votre. 3". A quelle heure vous 
etes-vous couche 2 4. Je rne suis couche a dix heures. 5. Vos 
amis se sont-ils couches apres vous ? 6. lis sont alies se coucher 
au coucher du soleil. 7. Yous levez-vous de bonne heure ? 8, 
Je me leve ordinairement au lever du soleil. 9. A quelle heure 
le soleil se leve-t-il a present? 10. II se leve a six heures. 11, 
Vous a-t-on jamais trompe ? 12. On m'a trompe il n'y a pas 
longtemps, dans ce magasin-la. 13. !Ne vous trcmpez-vous pas 
de maison? 14. Je ne me trompe pas de maison; j'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 15. Ne se trompe-t-on pas souvent dans ce mon- 
de-ci? 16. Tres-souvent ; chacun est sujet a. se tromper. 17. 
Ce fromage se coupe-t-il facilement ? 1 8. II ne se coupe pas fa- 
cilement; il est bien dur. 19. De quelle maniere cela se fait-il? 
20. Cela se fait de cette maniere-ci. 21. Montrez-moi comment 
cela s'est fait. 22. Yoici comment cela s'est fait. 23. Cela 
s'est-il fait comme cela ? 24. C'est ainsi que cela s'est fait. 25, 
JSPy a-t-il pas moyen de le faire autrement \ 26. II n'y a pas 
moyen de le faire autrement. 27. Comment se porte-t-on chez 
vous? 28. Tout le monde se porte bien ; je vous remercie. 29. 
Jouissez-vous d'une bonne sante ? 30. Qui, M. ; ma sante est 
bonne. 31.. Comment se porte M. votre beau-pere? 32. II se 
porte comme cela ; il ne jouit pas d'une bonne sante. 33. Quels 
sont les deux plus grands tresors sur la terre ? 34. O'est la sante 
du corps et la paix de l'ame. 35. N'est-ce pas un bonheur (que) 
de vivre en paix avec tout le monde? 36. C'est un grand bon- 
heur de vivre en paix et sous de bonnes lois. 37. Chaque hom- 
me jouit-il de ces avantages? 38. Non ? M. ; ce sont des avan- 
tages dont peu d'hommes jouissent. 39. Chacun ne vit-il pas a 
sa maniere ? 40. Oui, M. ; sans cesser pourtant d'etre sujet aux 
lois. 41. N'est-ce pas que ces dames sont toutes belles ? 42, 
Oui, M. ; mais chacune d'elles est belle d'une maniere differente* 
43. Votre sceur ainee est-elle sujette au mal de dents ? 44. Non ? 
M. ; c'est ma soeur Marie qui y est sujette. 45. Etes-vous enfin 
pret a sortir? 46. Je le suis, mais ma soeur n'est pas encoro 



QUARAXTE ET UNIEME LECON. 153 

prete a venir. 47. Qu'est-ce qui vous fait regarder de ce cote- 
la ? 48. Je rn'etonne de voir autant de monde dans cette rue-ci. 
49. Qu'est-ce qui vous etonne en cela ? 50. C'est qu'il y a or- 
dinairement fort peu de monde ici. 51. Qu'est-ce qui a cause 
les malheurs de ces pays ? 52. C'est la guerre qui a cause toute 
cette misere. 



Theme 41. 

1. Where did you sleep last night? 2. I slept in the next 
room, but I did not sleep well. 3. I went to bed at sunset (au 
coucher du soleil) ; and when I go to bed too early, I cannot 
sleep. 4. Go to bed, if you are sleepy. 5. Did you rise early 
this morning ? 6. We rose before sunrise. 7. The sun rises at 
five, at present, and sets at seven. 8. Last night, the moon rose 
at eight o'clock. 9. Rise, it is late. 10. You wish to deceive 
me; the sun has not yet risen. 11. You are mistaken; the sun 
is up long since; look through the window. 12. What causes 
you to say so ? it is the moon. 13. The clerk has made a mis- 
take ; he has put in the bill (le memoire) an article that I have 
not had. 14. Last night, I mistook the house ; I rung at the next 
door (a cbte). 15. Do not open that window; it does not shut 
easily. 16. Ripe fruit soon spoils (vite), 17. How is this city 
called in French? 18. How is this word written? 19. How is 
that done? 20. It is done in this manner. 21. In what man- 
ner have you done that ? 22. This is the way (in which) I did 
it. 23. Is that the way (comme cela) (that) you did it? 24. It 
is thus I did it, and there is no means of doing it otherwise. 25. 
How have you been since I saw you? (151, Rem.) 26. I have 
enjoyed good health. 27. How is your uncle ? 28. He is not 
well ; he does not enjoy good health in summer. 29. Health of 
body and peace of mind are the two greatest treasures on earth. 

30. Those are advantages which (dont) every man does not enjoy. 

31. Every time I go to see your friend, he inquires after you (il 
me demande de vos nouvelles). 32. Every one lives in (a) his 
own way, but we must all be subject to the same laws ; otherwise 

(sans cela) there is neither peace nor happiness in this world. 

7* 



154 



quarante-deuxi^me LEgON. 



83. All these ladies are beautiful, but each one of them is so 
(62) in a different manner. 34. Is your sister ready to come ? 
35. Is she subject to toothache? 36. "What astonishes you? 
37. I am astonished to see so much misery. 38. What causes 
those misfortunes? 39. The war has caused them, but finally 
peace has been made. 40. The advantages of peace are already 
felt (sefont deja sentir) throughout (dans tout) the country. 



42. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE£OK 

Future Tense. 

166a The future tense of all French verbs ends in rai, ras, ra % 
ronSj reZj ront. 



Avoir, irr. 

J'aurai, 
Tu auras, 
II aura, 
Nous aurons, 
Vbus aurez, 
lis auront, 



Etre. irr. 

Je serai, 
Tu seras, 
11 sera, 
Nous serons, 
Yous serez, 
Us seront, 



Aller. irr. 

J'irai, £ 

Tu iras, » 

II ira, <£ 

Nous irons, ~° 

Vous irez, % 
lis iront, 



Envoyer. irr. 

J'enverrai, 
Tu enverras, 
R enverra, 
Nous enverrons, 
Vous enverrez, 
Us enverront, 



$ 



167 * The future of all regular, and most irregular, verbs, is 
formed by adding the person-endings ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont, to the 
infinitive. In the third conjugation, the final syllable voir is 
contracted into vr. In the fourth, the final e is dropped. 

To speak. I shall or will speak. Parler. Je parlerai, tu parleras. 

To finish. I shall or will finish. Finir. Jefinirai, tu flniras. 

To receive, I shall or will receive. Recevoir. Je recevrai, tu recevras. 

To sell. I shall or will sell, <fcc. Vendre. Je vendrai, tu vendras, &c. 

Rem. — In the first conjugation, the e preceding the ending rai y 
is silent. Hence, 

To call. I shall or will call. Appeler. (10, a.) J'appellerai, <fec. 

To throw. I shall or will throw. Jeter. (70, a.) Jejetterai, &c. 

To lead. I shall or will lead. Mener. (10, b.) Je menerai, &c. 

To clean. I shall or will clean, <fcc Nettoyer. (10, e) Je nettoierai, && 



QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE£0N. 



155 



168. The compound future [future perfect or anterior) is 
formed of the simple future of the auxiliary and the past parti- 
ciple of the verb ; as, 



I shall have spoken. 
You will have done, finished. 
We shall have started. 
They will have gone to bed. 



J'aurai parle. 
Yous aurez finu 
Nous serons partis. 
Us se seront couches. 



169. The future tenses are used after quand, aussitot que, d£$ 
que (as soon as), comme, &c, when the verb expresses a future 
act or event ; as, 

I will give it to you when I have it Je vous le donnerai quand je Vaurai. 

I will send it to you when I have Je vous Penverrai quand je Vaurai 

received it. regu. 

I will go as soon as he is back. J'irai aussitot qu'il sera de retour. 

We shall go to see him as soon as Nous irons le voir des qu'il sera ar- 

he has arrived. rive. 

We shall start when we have Nous partirons quand nous nous 

warmed ourselves. serons chauffes. 

Kem. 1. — After si, if the verb should be in the present, though 
the leading verb is in the future ; as, 

I will go, if you will go with me. J'irai, si vous voulez venir avec moi. 

Kem. 2. — After si, whether, the future may be used ; as, 

I do not know whether I shall be Je ne sais pas si je serai de retour 
back to-night. ce soir. 

Rem. 3. — The adverb y is omitted before the future of aller ; as, 

I shall not go (there). Je n'irai pas (la). 



To take care of. Avoir soin de. 

Will you take good care of our Aurez-vous bien soin de nos che- 



horses ? 
I will, you may rely upon it. 

To call on. 

Will you call on the jeweller ? 

I will, when I go to market. 



vaux? 
J'en aurai bien soin, vous pouvez y 

compter. 
Passer chez. 

Passerez-vous chez le bijoutier? 
J'y passerai quand j'irai au marches 



156 QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 

Vooabulaire 42. — Ire Par tie. 

The care. Le soin. The attention. L'attention. 

The tin. Le ferblanc. The pane of glass. La vitre. 

A square: a pane. Un carreau. mi 8 . ' v Les vitres* 

The windows. ) 

The jewel. •! e ^.? u * Jewelry. La bijouterie. 

The carriage. Le carrosse. The coach-house. La remise. 

An ambassador. Un ambassadeur. An ambassadress. Une ambassadrice* 



To take care. Avoir soin. To pay attention. Faire attention. 

To call on. Passer chez. Back. De retour. 



Vocabulaire 42. — 2de Partie. 

(a.) The names of artisans or tradesmen, formed from the 
names of the objects of their art or trade, end in ier or er ; as, 

Jeweller. Bijoutier, (le bijou.) 

Bootmaker. Bottier, (la botte.) 

Coachmaker. Carrossier, (le carrosse.) 

Tinman, Ferblantier, (le ferblanc.) 

Saddler. Sellier, (la selle.) 

Glazier. Vitrier, (la vitre.) 

If there is a feminine to the names in er, it ends in ire ; as, 
berger, berg ere ; jardinier, jardiniere. 

(6.) Names derived from verbs, end in eur ; as, 

Brewer, (to brew.) Brasseur, (brasser.) 

Engraver, (to engrave.) Graveur, (graver.) 

The feminine of these, if they have one, ends in euse ; as, dan- 
seur, danseuse. 

(c.) Nouns in eur, derived from the Latin (having or in Eng- 
lish), terminate, in the feminine, in ice ; as, ambassadeur, ambas- 
sadrice. 

* Nettoyer lea vitres, to clean the windows ; casser les nitres, to break the windows. 

+ Seven nouns in ou take x in the plural: bijou, jewel; caillou, pebble; clwu, cab- 
bage; genou, knee; hibou, owl; joujou, plaything; pou, louse. Other nouns in ou 
follow the general rule. 



QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE£05T. 157 

(d.) Certain nouns of the masculine gender are applied to 
both sexes ; as, 

A painter. Un peintre. A philosopher. Un philosophe. 

A poet, poetess. Un poete. An author, authoress. Un auteur. 



Exercice 42. 



1. Aurez-vous votre selle aujourd'hui ? 2. Je l'aurai ; le sellier 
me l'enverra cette apres-midi. 3. Aurons-nous besoin de nos 
manteaux? 4. Nous n'en aurons pas besoin. 5. Avez-vous bien 
soin de votre sante ? 6. Pen ai bien soin. 7. Qui aura soin de 
nos chevaux? 8. Les domestiques en auront soin. 9. Serez- 
vous chez vous ce soir? 10. J'y serai a neuf heures. 11. Ou 
votre frere sera-t-il demain au soir ? 12. II sera bien loin d'ici. 
13. Irez-vous chez le carossier? 14. Je n'irai pas; il enverra la 
voiture des qu'elle sera prete. 15. Quand irons-nous chez l'am- 
bassadeur? 16. Nous irons quand l'ambassadrice sera de retour 
de la campagne. 17. Enverrez-vous quelqu'un chez levitrier; 
le froid entre par ces vitres cassees? 18. J'y enverrai le domes- 
tique ce matin. 19. Le ferblantier m'enverra-t-il un carreau de 
ferblanc ? 20. Je crois qu'il a oublie de vous l'envoyer ; j'y pas- 
serai ce matin quand j'irai au marche. 21. Vous n'oublierez 
pas de passer chez le brasseur? 22. J'y penserai. 23. Les bi- 
joutiers m'enverront-ils mes bijoux avant ce soir ? 24. lis vous 
les enverront aussitot qu'ils les auront finis. 25. Paierez-vous le 
graveur quand il apportera son ouvrage? 26. Je le paierai 
quand je recevrai mon argent. 27. Quand le peintre finira-t-il 
son tableau? 28. H le finira quand il se portera bien. 29. Ce 
philosophe me repondra-t-il si je lui ecris? 30. Je crois qu'il 
vous repondra aussitot qu'il aura recu votre lettre. 31. Quand 
nous amenerez-vous madame votre epouse ? 32. Je vous l'ame- 
nerai dimanche, s'il fait beau temps. 33. Emm enerez- vous votre 
fils avec vous quand vous partirez ? 34. Je ne l'emmenerai pas ; 
je le laisserai ici jusqu'au printemps. 35. N'emporterez-vous pas 
vos li.vres? 36. Si fait (Oh, yes), je les emporterai. 37. Nous 
appellera-t-on quand le diner sera pret? 38. On nous appellera 
quand le diner sera servi. 39. Serons-nous obliges d'attendre 



158 QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. 

1'arrivee de votre frere ? 40. Nous ne 1'attendrons pas ; il nous 
suivra. 41. Sortirez-vous quand vous vous serez chaufTe? 42. 
Je me coucherai aussitot que je me serai chauffe, car je suis fa- 
tigue de marcher. 43. Ces poetes seront-ils jamais riches ? 44. 
Je ne sais pas s'ils le serout jamais ; mais les poetes et les auteurs 
le sont rarement. 45. Faites-vous attention a ce que je vous 
dis ? 46. Certainement j'y fais attention. 



Theme 42. 

1. When shall you have your carriage ? 2. I shall have it to- 
day ; the coachmaker will bring it this afternoon. 3. He will 
take away the old vehicle that stands (is) in the coach-house ; I 
sold it to him. 4. Will you not take away your cloaks? 5. 
We will leave them here until we return (a notre retour), if you 
will take care of them. 6. I will take good care of them ; you 
may rely upon it. 7. When will you be back ? 8. We shall be 
back by dusk (sur le bruize). 9. When will you go to the am- 
bassador's? 10. I shall go there to-morrow, and my cousins 
will go with me. 11. Shall we call on the saddler when we go 
to market? 12. We shall send the servant there, for we shall 
have no time to pass that way. 13. Will the jeweller send the 
jewels to the ambassadress ? 14. He will, as soon as they are 
finished. 15. Will your cousins send us a glazier? I do not 
like to see those broken panes. 16. They will, if they think of 
it. 17. You will not forget to call on the brewer this morning? 
18. I shall go there, and I shall call on the tinman, and (I shall) 
tell him to send you the square of tin you sent for [que vous 
avez fait demander). 19. What shall I say to the engraver? 
20. You will tell him that we shall pay him as soon as we re- 
ceive our money. 21. Will fruit sell well this year? 22. It 
will sell very well; for there will not be much of it. 23. Leave 
those dry leaves on the table ; the girl will take them away when 
she cleans the room. 24. I shall throw them into the fire. 25. 
Will you call me when you go out ? 26.1 shall call you when 
I am ready. 27. Those painters will not live long, if they do 
not take good care of their health. 28. That philosopher will 



QUARAXTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 



159 



wnte a book ; but who will read it ! 29. Will you take a cup 
oJ coffee ? 30. I shall drink a glass of water when I am thirsty, 
S\. I shall return the book to you as soon as I have read it. 
32. I shall go out as soon as my brother has started. 33. I do 
mt know whether he will be back to-night. 34. We shall go 
t* bed as soon as we have warmed ourselves. 35. Pay attention 
tc your lessons, pray, do ; you will never learn any thing, if you 
will not pay attention. 



43. QUAEANTE-TROISIEME LE^ON. 



170. The following, besides the four verbs 
ceding lesson, with a few others, are irregular 



(166) of the pre- 
in the future. 



lb run. 

T) die. 

lb come. 

lb be able. 

lo know. 

To see. 

To be willing. 



I shall or will run. 

I shall or will die. 

I shall or will come. 

I shall or will be able. 

I shall or will know. 

I shall or will see. 

I shall or will be willing. 



lb make or do. I shall or will do, 



Courir. 


Je courrai, <fcc. 


Mourir. 


Je mourrai, &o. 


Venir. 


Je viendrai, &c, 


Pouvoir. 


Je pourrai, <fcc= 


Savoir. 


Je saurai, &e. 


Yoir. 


Je verrai, &c. 


Youloir. 


Je voudrai, <fec, 


Faire, 


Jeferai, <fec. 



"Sou will do as you like, 
I shall do what I can. 
Ee may say what he likes. 
I -hall see him when he comes. 
I shall know it when you come 
back. 



Yous ferez comme vous voudrez, 

Je ferai ce que je pourrai. 

II dira ce qu'il voudra. 

Je le verrai quand il viendra. 

Je le saurai quand vous reviendrez. 



171 • What day of the month is j Quel jour du mois avons-nous? 
it? \ Quel jour du mois est-ce ? 

Rem. 1. — The cardinal numbers are used for the days of the 
month, except for the first. 

It is the first, Nous avons, or C'est, le premier. 

It is the second, third, cfec. Nous avons le deux, le trois, <fec 

It is the eleventh, C'est le onze. 



160 



QUARANTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 



Rem. 2. — Mille, a thousand, is written mil, in the ordinary 
computation of years. 

One thousand eight hundred and Mil huit cent soixante. 

sixty. 
New York, the 20th of July, 18—. New York, le 20 juillet, 18— 

Rem. 3. — On, before days and dates, is not expressed. 

I shall come back on the 10th of Je reviendrai le 10 octobre. 

October. 

January, February, March, April, Janvier, fevrier, mars, avril, ma, 

May, June, July, August, Sep- juin, juillet, aout, septembre, o> 

tember, October, November, De- tobre, novembre, decembre. 

cember. 



172. 

To dress. To dress one's self. 

To undress. To undress one's self. 
Who dresses those children ? 
I shall not dress before five o'clock. 

Your sisters have dressed already. 

Then I shall go and dress also. 

Go then immediately, you will keep 

them waiting. 
To keep a person waiting. 
To please one. 
I go there to please my sisters. 

To continue ; to proceed. 

I shall remain here as long as the 

cold continues. 
Proceed, pray. 
To last, to wear. 
That cloth will wear well. 



Habiller. S'habiller. 

Deshabiller. Se deshabiller. 
Qui habille ces enfants? 
Je ne m'habillerai pas avant cin^ 

heures. 
Vos sceurs se sont deja habillees. 
Alors j'irai m'habiller aussi. 
Allez done tout de suite, vous let 

ferez attendre. 
Faire attendre qqn. 
Faire plaisir a qqn. 
J'y vais pour faire plaisir a mea 

sceurs. 
Continuer. 
Je resterai ici tant que le 

continuera. 
Continuez, je vous en prie. 
Durer. 
Ce drap durera longtemps. 



froid 



An empire. 
The emperor. 
A republican. 
A kingdom. 
The king. 



VOCABULAIRE 43. 
Russia. 



Un empire. 
L'empereur. 
Un republicain, 
Un royaume. 
Le roi. 



The empress. 
A republic. 
Prussia. 
The queen. 



La Russie. 
L'imperatrice. 
Une republique. 
La Prusse. 
La reine. 



QUARANTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 



162 



The power. 
The people. 
The soldier. 



To dress. 

To continue. 
To proceed. 

To oppress. 

To please. 

Russian. 

Then, {at that time^ 

in that case.) 
Well! 
That is to say. 



Le pouvoir. 
Le peuple. 
Le soldat. 



The will. 
The nation. 
The army. 



j Habiller. 
( S'habiller. 

>• Continuer. 

Opprimer. 

Faire plaisir. 
Russe. 

y Alors. 

Eh bien ! 
C'est-a-dire. 



To undress. 



La volonte. 
La nation. 
L'armee. 

Deshabiller. 
Se deshabiller. 



To last ; to wear. Durer. 



To suffer. 
To endure. 
To lose. 
Prussian. 

Then, {conj.) 

Well and good. 
As long as. 



) Souffrir (de). irr. 
) (95, a.) 

Perdre. 

Prussien, nne. 

Done. 

A la bonne heum 
Tant que. 



Exercice 43. 



1. Viendrez-vous me voir ce soir? 2. Je ne pourrai; nous 
aurons du monde. 3. Quand reviendrez-vous ici ? 4. Je revien- 
drai le dix juillet. 5. Quand saurez-vous si votre frere viendra? 
6. Je le saurai quand je recevrai sa lettre. 7. Et s'il ne vient 
pas, que ferez-vous alors ? 8. Alors j'irai le voir le premier juin. 
9. Quel jour du mois est-ce aujourd'hui ? 10. C'est aujourd'hui 
le vingt-cinq mai. 11. Vous irez done le voir la semaine pro- 
chaine? 12. C'est-a-dire, s'il ne vient pas. 13. Quand verrai-je 
votre cousine ? 14. Vous la verrez quand vous viendrez chez 
nous. 15. Je ne sais si je viendrai demain ou non. 16. Enfin, 
vous ferez comme vous voudrez. 17. Que ferez-vous si vous 
perdez votre argent? 18. Eh bien! je ferai ce que je pourrai. 
19. Les rois feront-ils du bien aux republicains ? 20. lis leur 
feront du mal, s'ils en ont le pouvoir. 21. Jusqu'a quand les 
empereurs et les rois continueront-ils d'opprimer les peuples ? 22. 
Us continueront tant que les peuples souffriront d'etre opprimes. 
23. Ces royaumes dureront-ils toujours? 24. lis ne dureront 
pas toujours; ils seront un jour convertis {converted) en republic 
ques. 25. La republique de mil huit cent quarante-huit n'a= 
t-elle pas cesse le deux decembre mil huit cent cinquante-deux ? 



162 QUARANTE-TROISIEME LECON. 

26. Elle a cesse alors pour faire place a l'empire. 27. Les reines 
et les hnperatrices ne souffrent-elles pas comme le commun du 
peuple ? 28. Elles souffrent comme nous, et comme nous elles 
mourront quand leur temps sera venu. 29. Les Eusses sont-ils 
bons soldats ? 30. lis sont bons soldats, vifs et braves, mais tres- 
paresseux (lazy). 31. Le roi de Prusse a-t-il une grande armee? 
32. L'armee prussienne est tres-considerable, mais les Prussiens 
ne servent pas volontiers. 33. Avez-vous perdu quelque chose? 
34. JNon, M. ; je n'ai rien perdu. 35. Allez-vous vous habiller 
a present? 36. Je vais ni'habiller pour aller au concert. 37. 
Yous aimez a aller aux bals et aux concerts ; n'est-ce pas ? 38. 
Pas trop ; j'y vais pour faire plaisir a mes soeurs. 39. Allez 
done vite vous habiller ; vous ferez attendre vos soeurs. 40. Je 
ne les ferai pas attendre longtemps ; je m'habillerai bien vite. 



Theme 43. 

1. Will you run, if it rains? 2. I shall not, for the rain will 
not continue long. 3. "Will your brother come soon ? 4. He 
will come as soon as he can. 5. Will you know to-morrow, 
whether he will come this week ? 6. I shall know it when I 
hear from him. 7. What will you do, if he does not write to 
you? 8. Then I shall go to town on the first of March. 9. 
What day of the month is it to-day ? 10. It is, to-day, the twen- 
ty-sixth of February. 11. Will your cousin go with you ? 12. 
He may (come with me), if he chooses (si cela lui fait plaisir). 
13. You may do as you like, but I shall not leave as long as this 
cold continues. 14. We shall see how the weather will be, next 
week. 15. Will you not lose your umbrella ? 16. I will take 
good care not (de ne pas) to lose it; I have lost several. 17. 
What shall we do, if our trunks are lost? 18. Well, I do not 
know what we shall do then. 19. Those shoes have been very 
good ; I wore them (Us w)ont dure) six months. 20. That coat 
will not last long, if you wear (mettre or porter) it every day. 
21. When will you begin to dress ? 22. I shall dress as soon as 
I have warmed myself. 23. Will you please your sisters, if you 
keep them waiting ? 24. I shall not keep them waiting long, 



QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 163 

for I shall soon have dressed. 25. Those children will undress 
as soon as they have eaten their supper. 26. Will that old 
Mng continue to oppress his people as long as he lives? 27. 
He will, as long as he has the power to do so (en). 28. The 
var between (entre) Russia, on the one side (dfun cote), and France 
aid England, on the other, lasted for two years ; and how much 
lave not those nations suffered during that time! 29. How 
bng, nations of the earth, will you be subject to the will of a 
ring or queen ! 30. Kings and emperors will die, and kingdoms 
and empires will not last forever (toujours). 31. The king of 
Prussia has a large army, and the Prussians are good soldiers ; 
that is to say, in (en) times of peace. 32. There are, in our re- 
jublic, Russians, Prussians, Germans, Italians, French, English, 
6c. ; they are all republicans, and live together under the same 
laws. 



44. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LEgOK 

173« To be necessary ; must. Falloir, (an irr. imp. v.) ip.ip.faUu. 

H is necessary. It was necessary. Ilfaut. II afallu. 

I; will be necessary. II faudra. 

Vhat must one do to be respected ? Que faut-il faire pour 6 tre respecte ? 

Rem. — The subject of the verb must, becomes the indirect ob- 
ject of the verb falloir. 

Vhat must I do ? Que me faut-il faire ? 

Vhere must lie go ? Ou lui faut-il aller ? 

Ye were obliged to wait. II nous a fallu attendre. 

Tuey will have to study more. II leur faudra etudier davantage. 

Vhat do you want? Que vous faut-il? 

I must have money. II me faut de l'argent. 

l\hat does your brother want ? Que faut-il a votre frere ? 



174 • To be worth, been worth. Valoir. p. p. valu. 
I im worth. We are worth. Je vaux. Nous valons. 

I shall be worth. Je vaudrai. 



164 



QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. 



How much is that worth ? 

That is not worth much. 

How much are those pictures 
worth ? 

That house may be worth about 
twenty thousand francs. 

That man is worth a hundred thou- 
sand dollars. 

To be better. 

His brother is not better than he. 

It is better. 

It will be better to stay here than 
to go out. 



Combien cela vaut il ? 

Cela ne vaut pas grand'chose. 

Combien valent ces tableaux ? 

Cette maison peut valoir une vinj- 

taine de mille francs. * 
Cet homme est riche de cent mile 



Valoir mieux. 

Son frere ne vaut pas mieux que lu. 
II vaut mieux. (imp.) 
II vaudra mieux rester ici que ce 
sortir. 



Rem. — Than, before the infinitive, is expressed by que de. 

I like better to go out than to stay J'aime mieux sortir que de resttr 

here. ici. 

To be worth while to. Valoir la peine de. 

Is it worth while to send to market Vaut-il la peine d'envoyer au ma*- 

for that ? che pour cela ? 

It is not worth while. Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. 



175. To behave. 
To conduct one's self. 
Those children behaved well. 
He does not conduct himself well. 
To flatter one's self. To deserve. 
He flatters himself that he is loved. 
He is flattered, but he is not loved. 
He deserves to be punished by the 
master. 



Se comporter. 

Se conduire. 

Ces enfants se sont bien comportts. 

II ne se conduit pas comme il faut. 

Se fatter (de). Meriter (de). 

II se flatte d'etre aime. 

On le flatte, mais on ne Vaime pas.\ 

II merite d'etre puni par le maitre. 



Rem. — By, before the agent of a passive verb, is rendered ly 
de, when the verb expresses an affection of the heart or soul ; as, 



If you conduct yourselves well, you 
will be loved and respected by 
everybody. 



Si vous vous comportez bien, vois 
serez aimes et respect&s de toit 
le monde. 



* The termination aine, added to a cardinal number, dix, douze, vingt, t rente, &c, 
forms a collective noun {feminine gender) of about as many units. 

t The passive voice of the verb is much less used in French than in English. The 
genius of the French language generally prefers the reflective form of the verb, or ihd 
active voice with the pronoun on for subject. 



QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. 
VOCABULAIRE 44. 



The price. 

Merit. 
Respect. 
Contempt. 
The good-for-noth- 
ing fellow. 



Le prix. 

Le merite. 
Le respect. 
Le mepris. 

!• Le vaurien. 



The pain. 
The trouble. 
Esteem. 
Conduct 
Ignorance. 

Idleness. 



165 



-La peine. 

L'estime. 
La conduite. 
L'ignorance. 

L'oisivete. 



To be necessary. 


Falloir. 


To be worth. 


Valoir. 


To behave. 


Se comporter. 


To conduct one's 


self. Se conduire. 


To deserve. 


Merit er. 


To respect. 


Respecter. 


To flatter. 


Flatter. 


To despise. 


Mepriser. 


To reward. 


Recompenses 


To punish. 


Punir. 


Properly. 


Comme il faut. 


More. 


Davantage.* 


Still, quiet. 


Tranquille. 


Diligent. 


Diligent. 


Idle. 


Oisif. 


Lazy. 


Paresseux.f 


Proud. 


Fier. 


Ignorant. 


Ignorant.f 


Impolite. 


Impoli. 


Disobliging. 


Desobligeant. 


Exactly. 


Au juste. 


At most. 


{ Auplus. 

I Tout au plus. 



Exercice 44. 

1. Que faut-il dire au domestique ? 2. II faut lui dire de venir 
ici. 3. Lui faut-il aller quelque part? 4. II lui faut aller cher- 
cher de l'eau. 5. Que vous a-t-il fallu faire pour apprendre l'an- 
glais? 6. II m'a fallu travailler beaucoup. 7. Que faudra-t-il 
dire a ces hommes, s'ils vienueut ? 8. II faudra leur dire de re- 
venir demain. 9. Cornbien d' argent faut-il a votre frere ? 10. 
II ne lui faut qu'un dollar. 1 1 . Ne lui faut-il pas davantage ? 
12. Non, M. ; c'est tout ce qu'il lui faut. 13. Que vous faut-il ? 
14. II me faut des bas. 15. Quel est le prix de ces bas-ci? 16. 
Ceux-la valent six schellings la paire. IV. Cornbien cette mon- 
tre peut-elle valoir? 18. Je ne puis vous le dire au juste; une 
trentaine de dollars, tout au plus. 19. Comment ce jeune hom- 

* Davantage cannot precede a depending noun or word, but is preferable to plus at 
the end of a sentence. 
t Le paresseitx^ the idler ; IHgnorant, the ignorant person. 



166 QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LECON. 

me se conduit-il ? 20. II ne se conduit pas toujours comme il 
faut. 21. Son frere vaut-il mieux que lui? 22. L'un ne vaut 
guere mieux que 1' autre. 23. Yaudra-t-il mieux sortir que de 
rester ici? 24. II vaudra mieux rester ici que de sortir. 25. 
Cela vaut-il la peine d'en parler? 26. Cela n'en vaut pas la 
peine. 27. Vaudra-t-il la peine d'envoyer au marche pour une 
livre de beurre ? 28. II ne vaudra pas la peine d'y envoy er pour 
si peu de chose. 29. Que faut-il faire pour etre respecte et ai- 
me ? 30. Pour etr,e respecte, il faut bien se conduire ; et pour 
etre aime, il faut 6tre poli et obligeant. 31. Le paresseux me- 
rite-t-il d'etre recompense ? 32. II merite, au contraire, d'etre 
puni. 33. Qui a ete recompense par le maitre ? 34. Ceux qui 
se sont bien comport es et qui ont bien su leurs lecons. 35. Qui 
sera respecte et aime de tout le monde? 36. Ceux qui se con- 
duiront bien. 37. Ce monsieur se flatte-t-il d'avoir des amis? 
38. Oui, M. ; mais il se trompe : on le flatte, mais on ne l'aime 
pas; au contraire, on le meprise. 39. Pourquoi est-il meprise? 
40. Parce qu'il est ignorant, fier, impoli et desobligeant : le res- 
pect est du au merite, et le mepris a l'ignorance. 41. Qu'est-ce 
qui nous gagne l'estime des gens de bien [good people) ? 42. Une 
bonne conduite et de belles manieres. 



Theme 44. 

1. Is it necessary to tell the servant to go to market? 2. He 
must go there ; we want vegetables and eggs. 3. What must I 
do ? 4. You must stay still, and pay attention to what I tell 
you. 5. Were you obliged to wait? 6. I was obliged to wait 
a long time. 7. Will it be necessary to pay that man when he 
has done ? 8. You must ask him first what he wants for his 
trouble. 9. Do you want gloves? 10. I want some, and I want 
also a handkerchief. 11. Has your brother what he wants ? 12. 
He has all he wants. 13. Is this fan worth five dollars? 14. 
It is worth more. 15. It is worth two dollars, at most. 16. 
What is the price of these gloves ? 17. They are worth a dollar 
a pair. 18. How much may that house be worth? 19. I can- 
not tell you exactly ; about twenty thousand dollars. 20. The 



QTJARANTE-CINQUIEME LEC/0N. 167 

gentleman who has just bought it, is worth a hundred thousand 
dollars. 21. Is this boy better than his brother? 22. The one 
is no better than the other. 23. They are good-for-nothing fel- 
lows, who like to be idle better than to work. 24. Will it be 
better to go to market than to stay at home ? 25. It will be 
better to remain here, for it is not worth while to go to market 
when one does not wish to buy any thing. 26. Is it worth 
while to speak about that to your father? 27. ISTo, sir ; it is not 
worth while. 28. What must one do to gain the esteem of hon- 
est people (des gens de Men) ? 29. One must behave properly, 
for a good conduct and pleasing manners (de belles manieres) 
easily gain for us the esteem and respect of well-bred people (des 
gens comme il faui). 30. Shun idleness ; the idler is despised 
by everybody. 31. Those that behave well, and study their les- 
sons properly, will be rewarded by the master. 32. Those that 
neglect their duties, deserve to be punished. 33. Conduct your- 
selves well, and avoid those that flatter you, for people (on) usual- 
ly flatter those whom they wish to lose. 34. He who flatters 
himself that he has friends, is often mistaken. 35. Ignorant men 
are often proud, impolite and disobliging; but men of (d'un) 
true merit are seldom so. 



45. QUAEANTE-CINQUIEME LEgOK 

17o« To walk, to take a walk. Se promener. 

To take a ride. Se promener a cheval. 

To take an airing in a carriage. Se promener en voiture. 

Do you often take a walk ? Vous promenez-vous souvent ? 

I take a ride every morning. Je me promene a cheval tous les 

matins. 

My sister has taken an airing. Ma sceur s'est promenee en voiture. 

To amuse one's self, to enjoy one's self. S'amuscr (a). 

Do you enjoy yourselves? Yous amusez-vous? 

Every one amuses himself as well Chacun s'amnse de son mieux. 
as he can. 

We enjoyed ourselves in the coun- Nous nous sommes amuses a la cam- 
try, pagne. 



168 



^UARANTE-CINQUIEME LE£ON. 



To want amusement. 

To be weary (mentally). 

My brother does not enjoy himself 

here. 
I find no amusement anywhere. 
We were tired of being in the 

country. 



(. Sennuyer. 
Mon frere s'ennuie ici. 



Je m'ennuie partout. 
Nous nous sommes ennuyes a la 
campagne. 



177» To spend one's time in. 

How do you spend your time ? 
In the evening I pass the time in 
playing on the flute. 

Eem. — Jouer takes de before 
fore the names of games. 
To play the violin, upon the violin. 
To play at cards. 

To play the piano, upon the piano. 
To play on the harp, on the guitar. 
What instrument do you play ? 



j Passer le temps a. 
\ S'amuser a. 

A quoi passez-vous le temps ? 

Le soir, je m'amuse a jouer de la 
flute. 

a musical instrument, and^ a be- 



Jouer du violon. 

Jouer aux cartes. 

Jouer du piano, toucher le piano. 

Pincer la harpe, la guitare. 

De quel instrument jouez-vous? 



178. To take a turn. 

To take a turn in the garden. 

To ask a question. 

I shall ask you questions. 

Each one will answer them in his 

turn. 
You will answer when it comes to 

your turn. 



( Faire un tour. 

(Faire un tour de promenade. 

Faire un tour de jar din. 

Faire une question. 

Je vous ferai des questions. 

Chacun y repondra a son tour. 

Vous repondrez quand votre tour 
viendra. 



179# To keep a thing secret. 

You will do well to keep that se- 
cret. 

You had better. 

Instead of keeping that flute, you 
had better sell it. 

Bather. Sooner. 

Rather than sell it, I will break it. 

Do that, as soon as you can. 



Garder le secret d'une chose. 

Vous ferez bien d'en garder le se- 
cret. 

Vous ferez bien, vous ferez mieux. 

Au lieu de garder cette flute, vous 
ferez mieux de la vendre. 

Plutot. Plus tot. 

Plutdt que de la vendre, je la cas- 
serai. 

Faites cela, le plus t6t que vous 
pourrez. 



'•^UARANTE-CINQUlJlME LEpON, 


16' 


VoCARtlOJrRE 45, 




The turn. Le tour. 


The walk. 


La promenad< 


The secret. Le secret. 


The question. 


La question. 


The violin. Le violon. 


The bass-viol. 


La basse. 


The piano. Le piano. 


The harp. 


La harpe. 


The instrument. L'instrument, 


The flute. 


La flute. 


The play.; theg&rae. Le jeu. 


The £ard, 


La carde. 


To walk. Se promeuer. 


To spend (the trme^ 


. Passer. 


To amuse. Amuser. 


To weary. 


Ennuyer. 


To enjoy one's sel£ S 5 amuser. 


To want amusement. S'ennuyer. 


-To play. Joaer. 


To touch ; to play. 


Toucher. 


To pinch ; to play. Pincer. 


To keep. 


harder. 


Rather. Flutot 


Sooner. 


Plus tot 


In the best way I t> q ^„ • '_ 
J > De son mienz, 
one Can. $ 


Admirably, 


A ravir. 


Exercice 45. 





1. Vous promenez-vous souvent? 2. Je me promene tous les 
jours. 3. Vous 6ies-vous promene ce matin t 4. Je me suis 
promene a cheval. 5. Vous promenerez-vous a cheval demain 
matin? 6. J'irai me promener aussitot que je me serai leve. 7. 
Voulez-vous faire un tour de jardin a present ? 8. Je vous re- 
mercie; je suis encore fatigue de la promenade de ee matin. 9, 
Ou est votre ami! 10. II est alle faire un tour de promenade* 
11. Vous amusez-vous a la campagne ? 12. Nous nous y aniu- 
sons tres-bien. 13. Vous etes-vous amuses a la foire (fair) ? 14. 
Nous nous y sommes ennuyes, 15. Votre cousin s'est-il ennuye 
au concert? 16. II s'y est ennuye ; il s'ennuie partout. 17. A 
quoi passez-vous le temps ? 18. Le matin, nous allons nous pro- 
mener a cheval ; et l'apres-midi, nous passons le temps a lire. 
19. A quoi vous amusez-vous le soir? 20. Le soir, nous nous 
amusons a faire de la musique. 21. De quel instrument jouez- 
vous ? 22. Je joue du. violon, «t mon frere joue de la basse. 23, 
Jouez-vous quelquefois aux cartes ? 24. Nous n'aimons pas le 
jeu de cartes. 25. Votre cousine touche-t-elle le piano? 26. 
Elle touche le piano, et pince la harpe a ravir. 27. Get enfanfc 

8 



1*70 QUARANTE-CINQUlfrME LECJOSr, 

vous ennuie-t-il par ses questions? 28. Au contraire, il nous 
amuse. 29. Repondez-vous aux questions que le maitre vous 
fait? 30. Nous y repondons, chacun a. son tour. 31. Repon- 
drez-vous aux questions que je vous ferai? 32. J y y repondrai 
quand mon tour viendra. 33. Garderez-vous le secret de ce que 
je vous dirai ? 34. Pen garderai le secret, je vous le promets. 
35. £Te ferons-nous pas bien de garder le secret de ce que nous 
avons appris? 36. Je crois que nou&ferons bien d 7 en garder le 
secret. 37. Au lieu de garder ce chien de chasse, ne ferez-vous 
pas mieux de le vendre? 38, Plutdt que de le vendre, je le 
donnerai a mon cousin. 39. Ferai-je mieux de garder cet habit 
que de le rendre au tailleur ? 40. Au lieu de le garder, je vous? 
conseille de le lui rendre le plus tot que vous pourrez. 



Theme 45. 

I. Do you take a walk in the morning? 2. I take a turn in 
the garden every morning before breakfast. 3* My sister takes 
an airing every day, and I usually accompany her on horseback. 
4. Shall we take a turn now ? 5. I took a walk this morning. 
6. We shall take a ride to-morrow morning, if you like. 7. Do 
you enjoy yourself in the country ? 8. I enjoy myself very well 
here. 9. When I want amusement, I play on the flute, or I go 
walking on the banks (les lords) of the river. 10. My cousin is 
tired of being here; he wants to go back to town. 11. Did the 
ladies enjoy themselves at the fair (foire) ? 12. They were tired 
of being there. 13. How do you spend your time? 14. We 
spend the morning in running in the woods. 15. In the even- 
ing, we pass the time in making music ; my brother plays on the 
violin, and I play on the base-viol. 1ft. How do your sisters 
spend their time? 17. They pass the time in reading and play- 
ing on the piano. 18. Does your niece play on any (quelque) 
musical instrument (de musique)% 19. She plays on the harp, 
and sings admirably. 20. Do you like to play cards? 21. No r 
sir ; I do not like card-playing (lejeu de cartes). 22. If that child 
wearies you by his questions, you had better not answer him. 
23. He asks me questions that amuse me. 24. I am going to 



QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 



171 



ask you questions ; you will answer them, each one in his turn. 
25. When it comes to my turn, I shall answer them as well as I 
can. 26. I will tell you something, if you promise me to keep 
it secret. 21. I promise to keep secret any thing you may tell 
me, you may rely upon it. 28. I will die rather than to tell 
another's secrets (dhcn autre). 29. Had I not better give back 
this instrument than to keep it ? 30. Certainly : do so, the 
sooner the better (que vous pourrez). 



46. QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 



180» To SIT DOWN. 

I sit down. We sit dowa 
Where did you sit down ? 
My sister sat down upon the sofa. 
I shall sit down by her side. 

Pray, be seated. 

To sit, to be sitting. 

My mother sits by the window. 

To GO AWAY. 

I go away. We go away. 
Did you go away ? 
I went away. 
We went away. 
I shall go away. 



S'asseoir. irr. p. p. assis. 

Je m'assieds. Nous nous asseyons. 

Ou vous etes-vous assis ? 

Ma soeur s'est assise sur le sofa. 

Je rrfassierai a cote d'elle. 
f Asseyez-vous, je vous en prie. 
< Donnez-vous la peine de vous as- 
( seoir. 

Etre assis. 

Ma mere est assise a la fenetre. 

S'en aller. 

Je m'en vais. Nous nous en allons. 

Vous en etes-vous alle? 

Je m'en suis alle. 

Nous nous en sommes alles. 

Je m'en irai. 



181. 

To go up, to ascend, to climb. 
We go or come down. 
He went up stairs. 
He came down stairs. 



Monter. 

Descendre. 

II a monte" l'escalier. 

II a descendu l'escalier. 



Rem. — When the verbs monter and descendre are used intrans- 
itively, they take sometimes the auxiliary etre y and sometimes 
the auxiliary avoir. (146.) 



112 



QUARANTE-SIXIEME LECON. 



He has gone up to his room. 

She has come down. 

He ascended during three hours. 

To ride, or to get on horseback. 

To ride. 

I ride on horseback every day. 

I ride to the village on horseback. 

To get into the carriage. 

To alight from a carriage. 

To dismount. 

To go or to come up the river. 



II est monte a sa chambre. 

Elle est descendue. 

II a monte pendant trois heures. 

Monter a cheval. 

Aller a cheval. 

Je monte a cheval tous les jours. 

Je vais au village a cheval. 

Monter en voiture. 

Descendre de voiture. 

Descendre de cheval. 

Remonter la riviere. 



182. To make haste. 
Make haste to finish your work. 
Will he never make haste ? 
To hurry ; to urge. 
To hurry, to hasten. 
To be in a hurry. 
They hurry him to start. 
He is not in a hurry to pay. 
I am in a hurry to get home. 
Hasten to follow me. 
He is wrong not to hurry. 



Be depecher (de). 

Depechez-vous de finir votre travail. 

Ne se depechera-t-il jamais? 

Presser (de). 

Se presser (de). Se hdter (de). 

Etre press e. 

On le presse de partir. 

II ne se presse pas de payer. 

Je suis presse d'arriver chez moi. 

Hatez-vous de me suivre. 

II a tort de ne pas se presser.* 



Rem. — After apres, the English present or compound partici- 
ple must be rendered by the past tense of the infinitive ; as, 

He burned the letter after reading II a brule la lettre apres Favoir 

it. lue. 

After warming himself, he went Apres s'etre chauffe, il sen est 

away. alle. 



VOCABULAIRE 46. 



The top. Le haut. The mountain. 

The lower part, the foot. Le bas. The hill. 

The bottom. Le fond. The valley. 

The turf. Le gazon. The grass. 

The well. Le puits. The spring. 

The stairs. L'escalier. The cottage. 

The seat. Le siege. The shade. 



La montagne. 
La colline. 
La vallee. 
L'herbe. 
La source. 
La chaumiere. 
L'ombre. 



* "When the verb is in the infinitive, pae or jm in t i.s boiler placed before than after it. 



QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 1*73 

To sit down. S'asseoir. To go away. S'en aller. 

To be sitting. Etre assis. To be in a hurry. Etre presse. 

To hurry; to urge. Presser (de). To hurry. Se presser (de). 

To make haste. Se depecher (de). To hasten. Se hater (de). 

To mount. l Monter . To go down. ) Descendre . 

To climb. ) To come down. ) 

To go or come ) Remonter . To refuse. I Refuser (de). 

up again. ) To decline. ) 

Up stairs, above. En haut. Down stairs, below. En bas. 



Exercice 46. 



1. Prenez un siege et asseyez-vous pres du feu. 2. Merci; je 
n'ai pas froid; je m'assierai ici. 3. Ou cet enfant s'assied-il? 
4. II s'assied a cote de sa mere. 5. Vous &tes-vous assis sur 
l'herbe ? 6. Nous nous sommes assis sur le gazon. 7. Ou nous 
assierons-nous? 8. Nous nous assierons ici a l'ombre. 9. Ou 
votre sceur est-elle assise ? 10. Ma mere et ma sceur sont assises 
devant la porte de la chaumiere. 11. JSTe voulez-vous pas vous 
asseoir? 12. Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir; je dois m'en 
aller. 13. Vous en allez-vous deja? 14. Je m'en vais; je suis 
presse d'arriver chez moi. 15. Votre frere s'en va-t-il aussi? 
16. Nous nous en allons ensemble. 17. Votre voisin s'en est-il 
deja alle ? 18. Mon voisin et ma voisine s'en sont alles ; tout le 
monde s'en va. 19. Alors je m'en irai aussi. 20. Nous nous 
en irons ensemble. 21. Aimez-vous a monter a cheval? 22. 
Oui, M. ; je monte a cheval tous les jours. 23. De quel cote 
allez-vous vous promener ? 24. Je me promene souvent dans le 
fond de cette vallee, et je monte et descends ces collines. 25. 
Avez-vous jamais monte cette montagne? 26. Je l'ai montee 
l'autre jour jusqu'au haut. 27. Votre sceur est-elle montee a sa 
chambre? 28. Elle a monte l'escalier, il n'y a pas dix minutes. 
29. Votre mere est-elle encore en haut ? 30. Elle est descendue; 
je crois qu'elle est en bas dans la cuisine. 31. Le macon est-il 
descendu dans le puits? 32. II est deja remonte. 33. Pour- 
quoi etes-vous descendu de cheval ? 34. Je suis descendu pour 
boire ; il y a une belle source ici au bas de la montagne. 35. 
Depechez-vous de remonter, je vous en prie. 36. Je me dep6- 



174 QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE£0N. 

cherai; mais continuez votre chemin, je vous suivrai. 37. Votre 
cousin a-t-il refuse de vous rendre ce service? 38. II n'a pas re- 
fuse, mais il ne se presse pas de le faire. 39. N'ai-je pas eu rai- 
son de ne pas compter sur lui ? 40. Vous avez eu raison, et j'ai 
eu tort de ne pas vous croire. 41. Qu'avez-vous fait de la lettre 
apres l'avoir lue ? 42. Apres l'avoir lue, j'y ai repondu, et en- 
suite je l'ai brulee. 43. Qu' a-t-il fait apres s'etre habille ? 44. 
II est venu se chauffer ; et apres s'etre chaufTe, il est sorti. 



Theme 46. 

1. "Where do you sit down? 2. I sit down on the turf in (a) 
the shade of these trees. 3. Sit down on the grass beside me. 

4. We have no time to sit down ; we are in a hurry to get home. 

5. Give a seat to (that) gentleman. 6. Pray, be seated. 7. 
Where has your sister sat down ? 8. She has sat down by (a) 
the door of the cottage. 9. WTiy do you rise? 10. I rise be- 
cause I wish to go away. 11. Do you go away already? 12. 
I go away because I do not enjoy myself here. 13. If you go 
away, I shall go away with you. 14. Have the ladies gone 
away? 15. No, sir; they are sitting behind the cottage. 16. 
Our cottage stands at the foot of the mountain. 17. When we 
are sitting before our door, we hear the murmur (le bruit) of a 
spring of pure water (pure), that comes out of the rocks (des ro- 
chers). 18. Do you often ride on horseback ? 19. Yes; almost 
every day. I usually ride (se promener) as far as yonder hills 
(que vous voyez la-bas), and (I) return through the bottom of the 
vale. 20. Where are the men that came down the river this 
morning? 21. They are on the top of the mountain. 22. Has 
the mason gone down into the well? 23. He has come up 
again. 24. Has your sister come down stairs? 25. She has 
gone up to her room to dress. 26. Pray, tell her to make haste. 
27. Is your mother down stairs? 28. No, sir; she is up stairs. 
29. Will your brother make haste to finish his work? 30. He 
is wrong not to hurry; he will keep us waiting. 31. If you 
hurry him, he will refuse to go with us. 32. You are wrong 
not to come with us. 33. I will follow you. 34. Hasten then 



QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LEQW. 175 

to follow us. 35. We are ready to start; will you get into the 
carriage? 36. Why do you dismount? 37. I have forgotten 
something. 38. The ladies will alight at the corner of the square. 

39. After having finished his work, he went to dress himself. 

40. After dressing, he sat down by the (au coin du) fire and fell 
asleep (et s'est endormi). 



47. QUABANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

183t Verbs expressing the state of the weather or atmosphere, 
are impersonal ; as, 



To snow. 


It snows. 


Neiger, 


11 neige. 


TohaiL 


It hails. 


Greler. 


11 grele. 


To freeze. 


It freezes. 


Geler. 


11 gele. 


To thaw. 


It thaws. 


Degeler. 


11 degele. 


To thunder. 


It thunders. 


Tonner. 


11 tonne. 



Eem. — All verbs that are essentially impersonal, take the aux- 
iliary avoir in the compound tenses ; as, 

It has snowed, hailed, <fcc. II a neige, grele. (fee. 



184. Faire, as an impersonal verb, is also used to express the 
state of the weather or atmosphere ; as, 

It rains, snows. II fait de la pluie, de la neige. 

It hails. II fait de la grele. 

It lightens. II fait des eclairs. 

It thunders. II fait du tonnerre. 

It is stormy, windy. II fait de l'orage, du vent 

It is clear, dark. II fait clair, obscur. 

It is day. H fait jour. 

It is night. II fait nuit. 

The sun shines. II fait du soleil. 

It is foggy. II fait du brouillard. 

It is muddy, dusty. II fait de la boue, de la poussiere. 

It m pleasant. II fait bon. II fait agreable. 



176 



QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LECO^ 



It is cloudy,, overcast. 

It is moonlight. 

It rains very hardi 

"Wliat a shower ! What a storm I 



185i To shine. 
The sun shines for everybody. 
To fall To have fallen. 
The lightning has struck a house. 

To let fall, to drop. 

Have you dropped any thing ! 

To appear. 

The moon has appeared. 

To cover. 

The streets are covered with ice. 

It is slippery. 



II fait un temps couTerfc*. 

II fait clair de lune.. 

11 pleut a verse: 

Quelle ondeel Quel oragex 



Luire* (defestwe.) p. p. lui. 
Le soleil luit pou? tout le monde^ 
Tomber. Mre iombk. 
La foudue est tombee sur une ma> 

son. 
Laisser tombed. 
Avez-vous laisse tomber quelque 

chose £ 
ParaUre, {l&l, a.) p. p. parui 
La lune a pam. 

Oouvrir, ($5, a.) p.p. convert. 
Les rues sont eouvertes de glace^ 
II fait glissant. 



186. The past participle of impersonal verbs is invariable.. 

The rain which has fallen. Lea pluies qu'il y a eu... 

So is tbe past participle of th@ verb fawe, when it precedes 
the infinitive. 

The shoes which I have had made. 
To hurt one's self. 
They hurt themselves* 



Les souliers que y&ifait faire. 

$e faire mat. 

Us se sont fait raaL 





VOCABULAIRE 47. 




The cloud. 


Le nuage,- 


The shower. 


i L'ondee~ 
\ L'averse. 


The storm. 


L'orage., 




The thunder. 


Le tonnerre; 






The lightning. 


l ISMair. 


The thunderbolt. 


£ La foudres. 


The flash. 


The lightning. 


The clap of thun- 
der. 


} Lecoupdeton- 
) nerre. 


The haiL 


La grele-. 


The fog. 


Le brouillard. 


The mud. 


La boue. 


The sleigh. 


Le traineauf 


The snow. 


La neige; 



* Luire i's conjugated like conduire, except the past participle. 

t Aller en Zraineau r se promener en tratneau T to go sleigh-ddim*,. 



QCARA^^E-SEPTI£lIE LEfOS. 



17? 



To snow. Neiger. 

To freeze. Geler. 

To thunder. Tonner. 

To roar; to scold. Gronder. 

To appear. Paraitre. 

To falL Tomber. 

Clear, light. Clair. 

Cloudy, overcast. Couvert, 

Very hard, (of rain.) A verse. 

Agreeable, pleasant Agreable. 



To hail. 

To thaw. 

To lightea 

To shine. 

To cover. 

To let fall, to drop. 

Dark. 

Slippery. 

Hard ; very much. 

Disagreeable. ) 

Unpleasant. ) 



Greler. 

Degeler. 

Faire des eclairs. 

Luire. 

Couvrir. 

Laisser tomber. 

Obscur. 

Glissant. 

Fort, 

Desagreable, 



Exercice 47. 



1. Neige-t-il ce matin ? 2. Non, M. ; il grele. 3. A-t-il gele 
la nuit passee ? 4. II a gele pendant la nuit, mais il degele a 
present. 5. Est-ce un conp de tonnerre que j'entends ? 6. Oui, 
M. ; le tonnerre gronde et il pleut a verse. 7. A-t-il plu ici hier ? 
8. Hier, il a fait beau temps ici. 9. Fait-il deja jour? 10. Le 
jour commence a. paraitre. 11. Fait-il du brouillard ce matin? 
12. Non, M. : il fait clair, il a gele. 13. Fait-il du soleil ? 14. 
E ne fait pas de soleil; le temps est couvert. 15. Quel temps 
a-t-il fait pendant la nuit? 16. II a fait de Forage; et quel 
orage! 17. A-t-il fait des eclairs? 18, II a fait des eclairs et 
du tonnerre toute la nuit, 19. Fait-il du vent? 20. II fait 
grand vent ce matin. 21. Fait-il de la poussiere? 22. H ne 
fait pas de poussiere; il fait de la boue. 23. Fera-t-il clair de 
lune ce soir ? 24. II fera clair de lune ; la lune se levera a huit 
heures. 25. Est-ce que la lune a deja para 2 26. Oui, M.; mais 
elle est derriere un nuage a present. 27. Xe fait-il pas obscur ? 
28. II fait obscur a present, mais il fera clair quand la lune pa- 
raitra. 29. Ne fait-il pas agreable ici au clair de la lune ? 30. 
II fait trop frais {too chilly) ; je vais rentier. 31. Est-il tonibe 
de la neige la nuit passee \ 32. II a neige et gele; il fait un 
temps tres-desagreable ce matin. 33. Fait-il bon marcher? 34. 
II fait glissant; les rues sont couvertes de glace. 35. Etes-vous 
tombe? 36. Je suis tonibe au coin de la rue. 37. Vous etes- 
vous fait mal? 38. Je me suis fait mal au bras, mais ce n'est 
pas grand'chose. 39. N'ainiez-vous pas a voir les rues couvertes 

8* 



178 QUARANTE-SEPTllJME LEgON. 

de neige ? 40. Oui, M. ; nous irons nous promener en tralneau. 
41. Ne faudra-t-il pas faire couvrir nos plantes ? 42. Nous les 
avons deja fait couvrir. 43. Avez-vous laisse toruber quelque 
chose. 44. J'ai laisse tomber mon gant. 45. Votre cousin est- 
il tombe ? 46. II est tombe sur la glace, mais il ne s'est pas fait 
mal. 



Theme 47. 



1. Does it freeze ? 2. It froze this morning, but I believe it 
thaws now. 3. Does the sun shine? 4. The sun does not 
shine. 5. Is it foggy ? 6. It is not foggy, it is cloudy. 7. Is it 
windy ? 8. It is very [grand) windy and very (beaucoup) dusty. 
9. Did it snow last night? 10. It hailed and snowed all night, 
and it snows yet. 11. Is it bad walking? 12. It is very bad 
walking; the side-walks (les trottoirs) are covered with snow. 
13. I like to see the snow, for I like sleigh-riding (aller en trai- 
neau), especially in the evening, when the moon shines. 14. 
We shall take a drive (se promener en traineau) to-night, when 
the moon has risen. 15. We must make haste to finish our 
business before evening. 16. Have you been out this morning? 
It is very slippery; I fell at the corner of the street. 17. Did 
you hurt yourself? 18. I did not hurt myself, but I lost my 
penknife ; I dropped it, and (I) could not find (retrouver) it in 
the snow. 19. Did you hear that clap of thunder? 20. It 
lightens at every instant ; the thunder does not cease roaring, 
and it rains very hard. 21. What a shower ! what a storm ! 
22/ Did it lighten during the night? 23. It did (Oui, M)\ 
the thunder roared all night ; the storm ceased when daylight 
began to appear. 24. It is said that the lightning has struck a 
house. 25. Where is the moon? 26. It is behind a cloud ; it 
will appear presently. 27. What a beautiful moonlight ! 28. 
Is it not pleasant here in the light of the moon? 29. Yes, but 
it is rather chilly in (a) the air ; I am going into the house. 30. 
Have you had your plants covered? 31. We have none that 
(en) are worth the trouble. 32. What is the matter with those 
children ? 33. They fell on the ice, but they did not hurt them- 



QTJARANTE-HUITIEME LE£0Sr. 



179 



selves. 34. Is it good travelling now? 35. No, sir; it is mud- 
dy everywhere ; the rain (pi.) we have had lately, has spoiled 
the roads. 



48. QUARANTJ^HUITTEME LEgON. 



187» To happen. 

A great misfortune has happened. 

What has happened to y our friend ? 

He has met with a great misfor- 
tune. 

It happened at the depot of the 
railroad. 

To suit. 

Does that cloth suit you ? 

Those gloves did not suit my sister. 

Does it suit you to do that! 
It does not suit me. 



Arriver, 

IL est arrive un grand malheur. 

Qu'est-il arrive a votre ami ? 

II lui est arrive un grand malheur. 

Cela est arrive au depot du chemin 

de fer. 
Oonvenir. 

Ce drap vous convient-il ? 
Ces gants n'ont pas convenu a ma 

soeur. 
Vous convient-il de faire cela? 
Cela ne me convient pas. 

Rem. — It is expressed by cela, when it refers to a preceding 
sentence, and by il, when it has no antecedent ; the verb being 
then used impersonally. 

To become. Seoir. {irr. defective verb.) 

That becomes you wonderfully Cela vous sied a merveille. 

well. 

Light colors do not become my sis- Les couleurs claires ne sieent pas a. 

ter. ma soeur. 

It does not become you to do that. II ne vous sied pas de faire cela. 



188» To jit, to sit well. 
That coat fits you. 
How does that hat fit my brother ? 

It fits him very well. 
Those boots do not fit me. 
To squeeze ; to press. 
To be too tight ; to hurt. 
They pinch my feet. 



Alter bien. 

Cet habit vous va bien. 

Comment ce chapeau va-t-il a mon 

frere? 
II lui va tres-bien. 
Ces bottes ne me vont pas biea 
Serrer. 
Gener. 
Elles me serrent les pieds. 



180 



QUARANTE-HUITlfMB LEgOX 



This coat hurts me tinder the arm. 
I see what is the matter with it. 
To fail ; to miss; to he wanting. 
Bo not fail to come, 
I shall not fail. 
I missed the train; 



Cet habit me gene sons le hnss* 

Je vois ce qui y manque. 

Manquer (de). 

Ne manquez pas de venir, 

Je n'y manqiserai pas. 

J'ai manque le convoi. 



189. 

To PLEASEr To have pleased. 

I please* We please. 

Are you pleased with this book 1 

I am much pleased with it. 

It does not please me to see him 

here. 
You are pleased to say so. (Yon 

joke.) 
What is your pleasure? 
What do you say ? 
Do as you please. 
To delight in } to he pleased, to like. 
How are you pleased here ? 
I am very well pleased here. 
My sister does not like to be here, 



Plaire a gqn. irr. Avoir plu. 

Je plais. Nous plaisons* 

Ce livre vous plait-iL 

II me plait beaueoup. 

II ne me plait pas de le voir ieL 

Cela vous plait a dire. 

Que vous plait-il ? 
Plait-ill 

Faites comme il vous plairav 

Be plaire (a). 

Comment vous plaisez-vous ici 

Je m'y plais beaucoup. 

Ma soeur ne se plait pas ick 





YOCAMJLAIRE 48". 




The climate. 


Le clsmat. 


The color. 


La couleuT; 


The charm. 
The attraction. 


i Le charme. 


The beauty. 


La beaute. 


The perfume. 
The fragrance. 


y Le parfum. 


The odor, the smell. 


L'odeur. 


The singing. 


Le chant. 


Nature. 


La nature. 


The partner. 


L'associe\ 


Society. 


La societe. 


The hair-dresser. 


Le coiffeur. 

« 


The head-dress. 


La coiffure. 



To happen. 

To become. 

To press, to squeeze. 

To hurt. 

To please. 

Wonderfully well. 



Arriver. 

Seoir. 

Serrer. 

Gener. 

Plaire. 

A merveille. 



To suit ; to become. Convenir. 



Dark, deep, (of colors.) Fonce. 



To fit. 

To fail ; to miss. 

To be pleased. 

Charming. 

Light. 



Aller bien. 

Manquer (de). 

Se plaire. 

Charmant. 

Clair. 



QtTARANTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 181 



Exekcice 48. 



1. Est-il arrive quelque chose a votre ami? 2. H lid est ar- 
rive un malheur. 3. Que lui est-il arrive ? 4. II est tombe de 
cheval, et s'est casse le bras. 5. Quand cela est-il arrive ? 6. 
Cela est arrive ce matin. 7. Ce cheval convient-il a votre asso- 
cie ? 8. II ne lui convient pas ; il est trop jeune. 9. Ces rubans 
ont-ils couvenu a vos sceurs? 10. Non, M. ; ils ne leur ont pas 
convenu; cette couleur ne leur plait pas. 11. Leur conviendra- 
t-il d'attendre quelques jours ; nous en aurons d'autres dans le 
courant (in the course) de la semaine? 12. Cela ne leur con- 
viendra pas; il leur en faut aujourd r hui. 13. Cette coiffure 
convient-elle a ma tante? 14. Cela lui sied a merveille ; c'est 
charmant. 15. Ces couleurs foncees me conviennent-elles? 16. 
Les couleurs foncees ne vous sieent guere. 17. Avez-vous es- 
say e votre gilet ? 18. Je l'ai essaye ; il me va bien. 19. Inha- 
bit va-t-il bien a votre frere ? 20. II vous le dira ; le voici. 21. 
Votre habit vous va-t-il bien, monsieur ? 22. Pas tout-a-fait ; il 
me gene un peu sous le bras. 23. Tenez, il me serre trop ici; 
le voyez-vous? 24. Je vois bien ce qui y manque. 25. Je ne 
sais pas trop si je le garderai ou non. 26. Comme il vous plaira; 
s'il ne vous convient pas, je vous en ferai un autre. 27. Com- 
ment votre coiffure vous plait-elle, madame? 28. Elle me plait 
assez bien. 29. Le coiffeur est-il parti ? 30. H vient de s'en 
aller. 31. Sied-il a votre frere de s'amuser avec des riens, au lieu 
de faire son ouvrage? 32. En verite, cela ne lui sied guere. 
33. Plaira-t-il a votre pere de le voir s'amuser comme cela? 34. 
Cela ne lui plaira guere. 35. Vous plaisez-vous dans ce pays-ci? 
36. Je m'y plais assez bien. -37. Le climat vous convient-il? 
38. II ne me convient pas beaucoup. 39. Aimez-vous le parfum 
de ces fleurs ? 40. Oui, M. ; c'est une odeur qui me plait beau- 
coup. 41. Comment vous plaisez-vous a la campagnc ? 42. Je 
m'y plais beaucoup; la campagne a toujours eu des charmes 
pour moi ; j'admire les beautes de la nature. 43. Avez-vous ici 
tout ce qu'il vous faut ? 44. Oui, M. ; il ne nous manque rien 
ici que la societe de nos amis. 



182 QTTARANTE-HUITIEME LEgON". 

Theme 48. 

1. "What has happened to you? 2. Nothing has happened to 
me. 3. Has anything happened to your friend? 4. He has 
met with a great misfortune. 5. Where did it happen ? 6. It 
happened at the depot of the railroad. 7. Does this coat suit 
you? 8. It does not. 9. Does that color not please you? 10. 
The color pleases me well enough, but the coat does not fit me. 
11. Does it hurt you ? 12. It does not hurt me ; it is too wide. 
13. Will it suit you to wait a few days, and we will make you 
one that will fit you well. 14. It will not suit me ; I want a 
coat before evening. 15. Did those shoes suit your brother? 
16. They do not fit him; they pinch his feet. 17. Look how 
the hair-dresser has arranged my hair ; does it become me ? 18. 
It becomes you wonderfully well ; that style (cette coiffure) pleases 
me very much ; it is truly charming. 19. How do you like this 
ribbon ? 20. That color is too dark ; dark colors do not become 
you. 21. Does your coat fit you? 22. It pinches me under 
the arm. 23. I see what is the matter with it. 24. Does it 
please your father to see you idle ? 25. It does not please him ; 
he always says : " It does not [point) become a young man to 
trifle away his time''' (perdre son temps a des bagatelles). 26. 
Does your sister like the climate of this country? 27. Yes, sir; 
she is very much pleased here. 28. How do you like to be in 
the country? 29. I like very much to be here. 30. What 
pleases you so much here? 31. There are a thousand things 
here that please me : the beauty of this valley, the fragrance of 
the flowers, the singing of the birds, the society of my neighbors, 
in fine (enfin), the pleasures of a quiet life in the midst of the 
charms of nature. 32. You are not going to leave? 33. Yes, 
sir ; if I do not leave now, I shall miss the four o'clock train (le 
convoi de quatre heures). 



QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LECOT. 183 



49. QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LEQON. 

190. (a.) The preposition de precedes the infinitive, after ad- 
jectives expressive of our feelings, and generally, after those that 
are followed in English by of from, or with ; as, 

I am glad to hear it. Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre. 

I am sorry to hear it. Je suis fache de l'apprendre. 

I am sorry for it. J'en suis fache. 

I am sure of finding him. Je suis sur de le trouver. 

(6.) Many adjectives when construed with Hre, take de before 
the infinitive when etre is used as an impersonal, and a when it 
is used as a personal, verb ; as, 

It is difficult to please everybody. II est difficile de contenter tout le 

monde. 
That gentleman is hard to please. Ce monsieur est difficile a contenter. 

(c.) The preposition d precedes the infinitive, used in a passive 
sense ; as, 

It is a thing to be desired. C'est une chose a desirer. 

House for sale, to let. Maison a vendre, a louer. 



191 • To be sorry for, or angry Mr e fache de qq. ch. 
about something. 

To be angry with somebody. Etre fache contre qqn. 

What are you vexed about ? De quoi etes-vous fache ? 

I am vexed that I did not go there. Je suis fache de n'avoir pas 6t6 la. 

Are you angry with me ? Etes-vous fache contre moi ? 

To make angry. To get angry. Fdcher. Sefacher (de). 

To offend. To take offence at. Offenser. S'offenser (de). 

Do not get angry. Ne vous fachez pas. 

I did not mean to offend you. Je n'ai pas voulu vous offenser. 

He took offence at that. II s'est offense de cela. 



192» To change. Changer. 

The weather is going to change. Le temps va changer. 

To change ; to exchange for. Changer pour ou contre. 

Change this bill for gold. Changez ce billet pour de Tor. 



184 



quarante-neuvieme LEgou. 



Will you exchange your horse for Voulez-vous changer votre cheval 
mine. contre le mien. 

To change, (to leave one thing for Changer de. 
another.) 

To change one's coat, one's linen." Changer d'habit, de linge. 

To change houses. Changer de maison. 

To change or alter one's mind. Changer d'avis. 



193« To shave. 


Raser. Se raser. 


To get shaved. 


Sefaire raser. 


To have one's hair cut. 


Se faire couper les cheveux. 


Have you had your hair cut ? 


Vous etes-vous fait couper les che- 




veux? 


I have. 


Je me les suis fait couper. 


He lives out of town. 


H demeure hors de la ville. 


It is pleasant out of doors. 


11 fait bon dehors. 


He arrived towards evening. 


11 est arrive vers le soir. 


He behaved well towards me. 


11 s'est bien comporte envers moi. 


He stays here against his will. 


' 11 reste ici contre son gre. 


The moon turns round the earth. 


La lune tourne autour de la terre. 


VOCABULAIRE 49. 


The opinion. > Uavis 
The advice. ) 


The opinion. L'opinion. 


The grocer. L'epicier. 


The shop. La boutique. 


The barber. Le barbier. 


The beard. La barbe. 



To satisfy* 
To please. 
To make angry. 
To offend. 
To change. 
To shave. 
Difficult. 
Sorry. 
Vexed; angry. 

Out of. 



y Contenter. 

Facher. 

Offenser. 

Changer. 

Raser. 

Difficile. 

Fache (de). 

Fache (contre). 

Hors de. 



To take recreation. Se recreer. 



Towards, (physi- > y 

cally.) \ VerS ' 

Against. Contre. 

To my (his) liking. A mon (son) gre\ 



To get angry. 
To take offence. 
To let ; to rent. 
To get shaved. 
Necessary. 

Glad, very glad. ] 

Without. ) 

Out of doors. ) 

Towards, (moral- ) 

ly.) J 

Round, around. 
Against my liking. 



Se facher (de). 

S'offenser (de). 

Louer. 

Se raser. 

Necessaire. 

Aise, bien aise. 

Charme. 

Dehors, (adv.) 



Envers. 

Autour de. 
Contre mon gre. 



quarante-neuvieme le£0n. 185 

Exercice 49. 

1. N'est-il pas difficile de contenter tout le monde? 2. C'est 
une chose tres-difficile a faire. 3. N'est-il pas neeessaire de se 
recreer aussi bien que de travailler ? 4. L'un et Pautre sont ne- 
cessaires a la saute. 5. Y a-t-il des chainbres a louer ici ? 6. 
Xon, M. ; elles sout toutes louees. 7. Etes-vous fache d'appren- 
dre cela? 8. J'en suis bien fache. 9. Etes-vous bieu aise de 
voir vos amis? 10. Je suis bieu aise de les voir. 11. Votre 
soeur sera-t-elle couteute d'appreudre que votre cousine va venir ? 
12. Elle sera charrnee de Papprendre. 13. Ce monsieur est-il 
fache contre vous ? 14. S'il est fache contre moi^ je n ? en sais 
pas la raison. 15. Je crois qu'il s'est fache de ce que vous avez 
dit? 16. Je ue l'ai pas dit dans Pintention de Poffenser. 17, 
Cette dame s'est-elle offensee de cela? 18. H parait qu'elle s'^en 
est offensee. 19. N'etes-vous pas fache de Pavoir offensee? 20. 
J'en suis tres-fache. 21. Avez-vous ete dehors ce matin ? 22. 
J'ai ete chez Pepicier pour faire changer mon billet. 23. Que 
pensez-vous du temps? 24. Le temps va changer; le vent a 
tourne vers le nord. 25. Votre associe a-t-il change de maison? 
26. II en a change ; il demeure a present hors de la ville. 27. 
Voulez-vous changer votre tableau contre mes gravures? 28. 
jSTon, M. ; j'aime mieux garder mon tableau. 29. Alors vous 
avez change d'avis, car vous in'avez offert de le faire hier? 30. 
Oui, j'ai change d'avis. 31. Voulez-vous changer de place avec 
moi? 32. Je veux bien, si cela vous fait plaisir. 33. Que pen- 
sez-vous de la conduite de ce jeune homme? 34. J*ai bonne 
opinion de lui; il se comporte bien en vers tout le monde. 35. 
Vous etes-vous rase ? 36. Je vais me raser tout-a-Pheure. 37. 
Ch anger ez-vous de gilet avant de sortir? 38. J'en changerai 
quand je me serai rase. 39. Ou vous etes-vous fait raser ? 40. 
Je me suis fait raser a la boutique du barbier. 41. Le barbier 
vous a-t-il rase a votre gre ? 42. Non, M. ; il m'a laisse plus de 
barbe d'un cote que de Pautre. 43. En combien de jours la lune 
tourne- t-elle autour de la terre ? 44. Vous me faites la une ques- 
tion a laquelle il n'est pas difficile de repondre ; mais comme la lune 
est couchee, et que j'ai bien envie de dormir, j'irai me coucher aussi, 



186 QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 



Theme 49. 



1. I am very glad to see you. 2. I am sorry to hear that 
you are going to leave. 3. It is truly impossible to satisfy every- 
body. 4. My aunt is very hard to please. 5. She gets angry 
at a trifle (d'un rien). 6. She appears not to understand that 
it is necessary to take recreation as well as to work. 7. Is that 
gentleman angry with you? 8. I believe he took offence at 
what I said. 9. I am sorry to have offended him. 10. He is 
a worthy man, who is very polite' towards everybody. 11. He 
appears to be easily offended (de peu de chose). 12. Is there a 
house to let in this street? 13. There are two for sale, but 
there is none to let. 14. What are you vexed about? 15. I 
am angry with my tailor, because he did not bring me my coat. 
16. How is the weather out of doors? 17. It is unpleasant, 
but the wind has turned towards the north (le nord) ; I believe 
the weather is going to change. 18. I am glad of it. 19. Has 
the grocer changed the bill? 20. Yes, sir; and here is the 
change. 21. Will you exchange your saddle for mine? 22. No, 
sir ; mine is better than yours. 23. That is your opinion. 24. 
And yours, too, since (puisque) you wish (en) to exchange with 
me. 25. Are you going to move (change houses) on the first 
of May ? 26. Yes, we have taken (louer) sl house out of town ? 
27. You have lived here a long time. 28. Yes; my mother 
likes to be in this house ; it is against her will that we leave it. 
29. Is Mr. B.... going to change stores with you? 30. No, 
sir; he has changed his mind. 31. Are you going to change 
boots? 32. Yes; but I am going to shave first. 33. Have you 
been at the barber's shop ? 34. I have had my hair cut. 35. 
Did he cut it to your liking? 36. He cut it too short (court, 
adv.) 



CINQUANTIEME LE£ON. 



187 



50. CINQUAISTTIEME LEQON. 



194* To become. 
To have become. 

What has become of that man ? 
I do not know what has become of 

him. 
What will become of yon ? 
What has become of those children ? 
To turn, to become. ) 

To happen, to take place. ) 

The eldest has turned lawyer. 
To succeed, to attain; to reach. 
Do you succeed in learning French ? 

I shall, by dint of studying. 

I have succeeded in it. 

Your letter reached me the day 

before I got back. 
To succeed. To have succeeded. 
Do you succeed in doing that? 
That did not succeed with him. 
The undertaking failed for want of 

money. 



Devenir. 

Etre devenu. 

Qu'est devemi cet homme? 

Je ne sais pas ce qu'il est devenu. 

Que deviendrez-vous ? 

Que sont devenus ces enfants ? 

Se /aire. 

L'aine s'est fait avocat. 
Parvenir a. Eire parvenu. 
Parvenez-vous a apprendre le fran- 

cais? 
J'y parviendrai a force d'etudier. 
J'y suis parvenu. 
Votre lettre m'est parvenue la 

veille de mon retour. 
Reussir (a). Avoir reussi. 
Reussissez-vous a faire cela? 
Cela ne lui a pas reussi. 
L'entreprise a manque faute d'ar- 

gent. 



19«J* To agree. To have agreed. 
Do you agree to that ? 
I do. 

What have you agreed upon ? 
We have agreed about the price. 
To agree, to adjust a difference. 
To come to an agreement. 
Have you agreed with Mr. L ? 

We cannot come to an agreement. 

To consent. To have consented. 
Does he consent to do thai ? 
He consented to it cheerfully. 



Convenir (de). Etre convenu. 

Convenez-vous de cela? 

J'en conviens. 

De quoi etes-vous convenus ? 

Nous sommes convenus du prix. 

S'accorder. 

Tomber d* accord. 

Vous 6tes-vous accorde avec M. 

L....? 
Nous ne pouvons pas tomber d'ac- 

cord. 
Consentir (a). Avoir consenti. 
Consent-il a faire cela ? 
H y a consenti de bon cceur. 



188 



CINQUANTIEME LE£ON. 



196i To undo. 
Undo this knot. 
This knot comes loose. 
To get rid of; to part with. 
To get rid of. 
Have you got rid of your damaged 

goods ? 
He does not intend to part with his 

horse. 
Can you not get rid of that man ? 

In spite of 

The marriage will take place in 

spite of him. 
From what is said. 
As it appears. 
The day before I started. 
The day after I arrived. 
What is your name ? 



Defaire. 

Defaites ce noeud. 

Ce noeud se defait. 

Se defaire (de). 

Se debarrasser (de). 

Vous etes-vous defait de vos mar- 
chandises avariees ? 

II n'a pas l'intention de se defaire 
de son cheval. 

Ne pouvez-vous pas vous debarras- 
ser de cet homme ? 

Malgre. 

Le mariage se fera Emigre" lui. 

A ce qu'on dit. 

A ce qui par ait. 

La veille de mon depart. 

Le lendemain de mon arrived. 

Comment vous appelez-vous? 



The name. 

The project. 
The marriage. 

The knot. 



VOCABULAIRE 50. 



Le nom. 

Le projet. 
Le mariage. 

Le noeud. 



The next day. Le lendemain. 



i 



La renommee. 



The fame. 

The name. 

The undertaking. L'entreprise. 

The widow. La veuve. 

The girdle. 

The belt. 



(• La ceinture. 

The day before. ) LaveiUe 
The eve. ) 



To become. Devenir. 

To succeed. 
To reach. 
To agree. 

To agree, to adjust ) s>accorder _ 
a diiierence. ) 

To undo. 



To turn. "\ 

To become. 
To happen. 
To take place. J 

[ Parvenir (a). To succeed. 

Convenir (de). To consent. 

To come to an i 
agreement. 

Defaire. To part with ' ' 

To get rid of. ! 



Se faire. 

Reussir (a). 
Consentir (a, de). 
Tomber d'aceord 

Se defaire. 



CINQUANTIISME LEgON. 



189 



To get rid of. 

Useful. 
Damaged. 
Cheerfully. 
By dint of. 



Se debarrasser. 

Utile. 

Avarie. 

De bon coeur. 

A force de. 



To hope. 
Useless. 
Married. 
In spite of. 
For want of. 



Esperer.* 
Inutile. 
Marie. 
Malgre. 
Faute de. 



Exercice 50. 



1. Qu'est devenu votre ami, le peintre? 2. Je ne sais pas ce 
qu'il est devenu. 3. Que deviendra ce jeune homme s'il n'etu- 
die pas? 4. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il deviendra. 5. Que sont 
devenus les fils de votre voisin ? 6. L'aine s'est fait avocat, et 
l'autre etudie la medecine. 7. Parviendrons-nous jamais a sa- 
voir le latin? 8. Vous y parviendrez a force d'etudier. 9. 
Etes-vous parvenu a vous defaire de vos marchandises avariees ? 
10. J'y suis parvenu. 11. Quand ma lettre vous est-elle par- 
venue ? 12. Elle m'est parvenue la veille de mon depart. 13. 
Quand votre associe est-il parti? 14. II est parti le lendemain 
de mon arrivee. 15. L'entreprise a-t-elle reussi? 16. Elle a 
manque faute d'argent. 17. Ce projet reussira-t-il a votre frere ? 
18. II faut l'esperer. 19. Convenez-vous de ce que je vous ai 
dit? 20. Oui, M. ; j'en conviens. 21. Etes-vous convenus du 
prix ? 22. Nous en sommes convenus. 23. Vous etes-vous ac- 
corde avec votre cousin ? 24. Je me suis accorde avec lui. 25. 
Consent-il a faire ce que vous m'avez dit? 26. II y consent de 
bon coeur. 27. La belle veuve consent-elle a changer de nom? 
28. Elle a consenti a devenir Madame B . . . . 29. Le pere 
a-t-il consenti aumariage? 30. II n'y consentira jamais, a ce 
qu'on dit. 31. Le mariage se fera-t-il? 32. II se fera malgre 
lui, a ce qui parait. 33. Pouvez-vous defaire ce nceud ? 34. Je 
ne sais pas, ce noeud ne se defait pas facilement. 35. Avez-vous 
l'intention de vous defaire de vos chevaux? 36. Je m'en suis 
deja defait. 37. Votre cousine ne peut-elle pas se debarasser de 

* The verbs esperer \ promettre and compter, carry with them an idea of futurity ; 
they should, therefore, not be followed by a verb in a present or past tense. I hope you 
are well, must not be translated by, fespere que vous vous portez Men. "We may say: 
J'aime a croire, je me plais d croire, or je me Jlatte que vous vous portez Men^ 
meaning : / like to think that, &c. It is also correct to say : Vous vous portez oien^ 
j espere. In which case a verb is understood after j'espere; as, j'espere Vappmedre. 



190 CINQUANTIEME LECW. 

ce monsieur? 38. Elle se debarrassera bientot de lui. 39. Est- 
il marie? 40. ISTon, M. ; il est encore gar qon. 41. Est-il inutile, 
de savoir danser ? 42. Au contraire, c'est une chose tres-utile & 
savoir. 43. N'est-ce pas un grand avantage de jouir d'une 
bonne reputation? 44. Certainement ; Bonne renommee vaut 
mieux que ceinture doree* (A good name is better than wealth). 



Theme 50. 

1. What has become of our friend, the jeweller? 2. He 
started for Europe the day before you arrived. 3. What will 
become of you, if you do not change your conduct ? 4. What 
has become of your nephews ? 5. The eldest has turned sol- 
dier, and the two others are at school. 6. Do you succeed in 
loosing that knot ? 7. I believe I shall, by dint of patience. 8. 
It is very difficult to undo. 9. Did you succeed in getting rid 
of your old carriage ? 10. I did; I sold it to my neighbor. 11. 
I sent you a letter the day after you started ; did it reach you ? 
12. It reached me the day before I returned. 13. Did your 
friend succeed in his enterprise? 14. No, sir; all his projects 
have failed for want of money. 15. Will that undertaking suc- 
ceed with your brother? 16. I hope so. 17. What have you 
agreed upon? 18. We have agreed to wait. 19. Have you 
agreed about the price? 20. We have. 21. Has your uncle 
agreed with Mr. B. . . . ? 22. They have come to an agreement. 
23. Mr. B. . . . consents to take the store at the price agreed 
upon (convenu). 24. Has your cousin consented to accompany 

you ? 25. He has, cheerfully. 26. Will Mr. S consent to 

the marriage of his son ? 27. It appears not (que non). 28. 
He will never consent to it, from what I hear. 29. The mar- 
riage will take place in spite of him. 30. Marriages that are 
made against the will of the parents, are seldom happy. 31. 
Does your father-in-law intend to part with his carriage? 32. 
He spoke about it, but he will not do it, for my mother-in-law 
will not consent to it. 33. Can you not get rid of that man ? 

* Bore, gilt. 



CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LEC^ON. 191 

34. I do not wish to offend him ; he will soon go away. 35. I 
have got rid of my damaged sugar, and I am glad of it. 36. Is 
your aunt married? Si. She is a widow. 38. Is it useless to 
study Latin? 39. On the contrary, it is very useful, but it is a 
difficult language to learn. 40. "What is your friend's name 2 
41. His name is James (Jacques). 



51. CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. 

Imperfect Tense. — Indicative. 

197 • The imperfect is formed by changing ons, of the first 
person plural of the indicative present, into ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, 
aient. Thus : 

Allons. Finissons. ,h Recevons. h-i Vendons. 

^ ^ i— * 

J'allais, m Jefinissais, g Je recevais, g Je vendais, ^ 

Tu allais, $ Tufinissais, g> Tu recevais, g Tu vendais^ S 

11 allait, (n llfnissait, s; 11 recevait, ® Ilvendait, © 

Nous allions, §• Nous fnissions, g* Nous recevions, §■ iVbws vendions, & 

Vous alliez, ^ Vous fnissiez, ^ Fbws receviez, ^ Vous vendiez, ~ q 

lis allaient, §T lis faiissaient, p 7<?s recevaient, p lis vendaient, fT 



I had, thou hadst, <fcc, J'avais, tu avais, <fcc. 

I was travelling. Je voyageais. (^70, d.) 

I was placing. Je plagais. (70, c.) 

We were studying. Nous etudiions. 

You forgot. Vous oubliiez. 

The only exception is the imperfect of the verb etre, which is : 

I was, thou wast, he was. J'etais, tu etais, il etait. 

"We were, &c. Nous etions, &c. 



198. The imperfect tense is to the past time referred to, what 
the present tense is to the present time : it represents the state 
or action as existing or going on, at the time spoken of. It is 
used : 

1st. As a simultaneous past, when it corresponds with was 
and the present participle in English ; as, 



192 



CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LEpON. 



J'ecrivais pendant que vous lisiez. 



J'ecrivais quand vous etes entre. 
J'allais ecrire. 

D'ou veniez-vous quand je vous ai 
vuf 



I was writing while you were read- 
ing. 

I was writing when you came in. 

I was going to write. 

Where did you come from, when I 
saw you? 

2d. To express customary or repeated action, when it corre- 
sponds with used or did use, and the infinitive, in English ; as, 

I used to ride on horseback every Je montais a cheval tous les jours. 

day. 
Did you use to read much ? Lisiez-vous beaucoup autrefois ? 

3d. To describe what was, or existed, in past time ; as, 

Son pere etait negotiant, 
lis etaient riches autrefois. 
Cette maison-ci leur appartenait 
Cette ville n'existait pas alors. 
Votre malle pesait quatre-vingts 

livres. 
La piece mesurait trente aunes. 



His father was a merchant. 
They were formerly rich. 
This house belonged to them. 
That city did not exist then. 
Your trunk weighed eighty pounds. 



The piece measured thirty elis. 
The boxes contained fifty pieces 

each. 
They were occupied in measuring 

them. 



Les caisses contenaient einquante 

pieces chacune. 
lis etaient occupes a les mesurer. 





VOCABULAIRE 51. 




The merchant. 


Le negotiant. 


The competition. 


La concurrence. 


The weight. 


Le poids. 


The cart. 
The cart-load. 


y La charrette. 


The burden. 


Le fardeau. 


The load. 


La charge. 


The bag. 


Le sac. 


The ell. 


L'aune. 


The meter. 


Le metre. 


The yard. 


La verge. 


The hay. 


Le foin. 


The oats. 


L'avoine. 


To belong. 


Appartenir. 


To contain. 


Contenir. 


To measure. 


Mesurer. 


To weigh. 


Peser. 


To impose. 


Imposer (a). 


To be occupied in 


. Etre occupe a. 


Light, easy. 


Leger. 


Heavy. 


Pesant, lourd. 


When. 


Lorsque.* 


While. 


Pendant que. 


Since, (conj.) 


Puisque. 


Formerly. 


Autrefois. 



* Lorsque is not used interrogatively. 



CIBPQUANTE ST UNIEME LE$ON. 193 

ExERCXCE 51, 

1. Aviez-vous le livre lorsque je le cherchais ? 2. Je l'avais, 
mais je ne savais pas que vous le cherchiez. 3. Ces hommes 
avaient-ils ee qu'il leur fallait ! 4. lis avaient tout ce qu'il leur 
fallait. 5. N'aviez-vQos pas froid pendant que vous attendiez ? 
6. STon, M. ; il faisait froid, mais nous avions nos manteaux. 7. 
Quelle heure etait-il quand vous etes rentre? 8, II etait dix 
heures et demie, 9, Ou etait votre frere? 10. II etait deja au. 
lit. 11. D'ou veniez-vous? 12. Je venais du spectacle. 13. 
Que faisait votre frere lorsque vous etiez dans sa charnbre ? 14. 
II etait occupe a se raser, 15. N'allait-il pas ecrire? 16. II 
disait qu'il devait ecrire, mais qu'il n'avait pas de papier. 17, 
Votre cousin etait-il au bureau 2 18. Oui, M. ; il etait occupe a 
compter de 1'argent. 19. Ne voulait-il pas venir avec vous? 
20. II disait qu'il etait oblige d'y rester. 21. A quoi passiez- 
vous le temps lorsque vous etiez a la campagne ? 22, Nous al- 
lions a la chasse ou a la peche, quand il faisait be.au temps ; et 
nous etudiions, quand il faisait mauvais. 23. Qu'etait le pere 
d' Andre autrefois ? 24. II etait negociant. 25, Y avait-il alors 
une grande concurrence 2 26. La concurrence n'etait pas aussi 
grande alors qu'elle Test a present. 27. Demeurait-il ou il de- 
meure a present ? 28. Non, M. ; cette partie de la ville n'exis- 
tait pas alors. 29. Combien ce sac d^avoine pesait-il? 30. II 
pesait trente kilogrammes.* 31. Tous ces sacs etaient-ils du 
meme poids % 32. Non, M. ; il y en ava.it qui pesaient davan- 
tage et d'autres qui pesaient moins. 53. Combien mesurait 
cette piece de soie? 34. Elle mesurait trente metres. 35. 
Que contenaient les caisses que vous pesiez ce matin? 36. Elles 
contenaient du the. 37. De combien est la charge d'un de ces 
portefaix [porter) ? 38. La charge ordinaire d'un portefaix est 
de cent kilogrammes, mais ils portent des fardeaux beaucoup 
plus pesants. 39. Valait-il la peine d'acheter du foin, puisque 
vous voulez vous defaire de votre cheval ? 40. II en valait la 
peine, puisque nous n'en avions plus. 41. Combien l'avez-vous 

* 50 kilogrammes are 210 pounds. 
9 



194 CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LECON. 

paye ? 42. Je l'ai paye dix dollars la charrette. 43. A qui ap* 
partenait autrefois la maison dans laquelle vous demeurez ? 44. 
Elle appartenait a raon oncle, et elle lui appartient encore. 45. 
N'est-ce pas une charge bien lourde que nous avons : une famille 
de six enfants ? 46. Aimez la charge que Dieu vous impose, et 
elle sera legere. 



Theme 51. 

1. Was it late when you came in last night ? 2. It was not 
later than usual. 3. Where did you come from ? 4. We came 
from the concert. 5. Was there any one in the parlor? 6. 
There were several persons (personnes) : mother wa& sitting by 
the fire, and my sisters were occupied in reading. 7. Was your 
brother writing when you were in his room ? 8. He was dress- 
ing ; he said (that) he was going to write. 9. Did you study 
while you were in the country? 10. We did not study much. 
11. How did you spend your time? 12. We went walking in 
the morning, and in the afternoon we used to read. 13. When 
we went to school, we used to rise early, and study our lessons 
before we breakfasted. 14. The upper part (haute) of the city 
did not exist at that time (a cette epoque). 15. We used to live 
down (dans le has de la) town, in a house that belonged to Mr. 
Andre. 16. He was a merchant, and did a large business (de 
grandes affaires). 17. Competition, at that time, was not what 
it is now, and merchants made a great deal of money. 18. 
Were the clerks busy when you were in the store? 19. They 
were very busy ; I was obliged to wait. 20. Some (Les uns) 
were weighing bags, and others (les autres) were measuring 
pieces of cloth. 21. What was in the bags? 22. They con- 
tained oats. 23. What was the weight of a bag of oats ? 24. 
They weighed about forty kilogrammes each. 25. The pieces 
of cloth measured about thirty yards each. 26. How much hay 
do you want? 27. We want two cart-loads. 28. What (De 
combien) is the ordinary load of a porter (portefaix) ? 29. I can- 
not tell you exactly ; they carry very heavy burdens. 30. He 
who loves the load that Heaven imposes on him, finds it light 



CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LE£OX. 



195 



31. Since it is so, we shall carry our burden with a (d'un) light 
step. 



52. CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LEQON. 



199. 

To ACQUIRE. 

I acquire. 
They acquire. 
I shall acquire 

To GATHER. 

I gather. 

I shall gather. 

To BEAT. 

I beat. 

To LAUGH. 

I laugh. 



To have acquired. 
"We acquire. 



To have gathered. 
We gather. 

To have beaten. 
We beat. 
To have laughed. 
We laugh. 



Acquerer, irr. 
J'acquiers. 
lis acquierent. 
J'acquerrai. 
Cueilltr, irr. 
Je cueille. 
Je cueillerai. 
Battre, irr. 
Je bats. 
Rire, irr. 
Je ris. 



Avoir acquis. 
Nous acqu irons. 



Avoir cueilli. 
Nous cueillons. 

Avoir battu. 
Nous battons. 
Avoir ri. 
Nous rions. 



200. To fight. 
They were fighting. 
To laugh at. 
Do you laugh at that ? 
If you laugh at me, I shall laugh at 
you. 

To shop; to purchase. 

I want to purchase a few small ar- 
ticles. 
I have purchased a hair-brush. 

To do one's best, all one can. 
I will do all I can to succeed in 
that matter. 



Se battre. 

Us se battaient. 

Rire de. 

Riez-vous de cela ? 

Si vous riez de moi, je rirai de vous. 

j Faire des emplettes. 
\ Faire emplette de. 
J'ai besoin de faire quelques petites 

emplettes. 
J'ai fait emplette d'une brosse pour 

les cheveux. 
Faire son possible, tout son possible. 
Je ferai tout mon possible pour re- 
ussir dans cette affaire. 



Rem. — To make, before an adjective, must be translated by 

rendre. 



Misfortune makes us wise. 

He has made himself necessary in 

that business. 
That is the reason why I say that. 



Le malheur nous rend sages. 

II s'est rendu necessaire dans cette 

affaire. 
Voild pourquoi je dis cela. 



196 



CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 



201 • («.) In comparisons of inequality, formed by plus, moins, 
meilleur, mieux, autre, autrement, ne is required before the verb 
that follows que ; only, however, when the preceding verb is used 
affirmatively ; as, 

He has more money than he will II a plus d'argent qu'il ?i'en depen- 

spend. sera. 

He is less wise than he appears. II est moins sage qu'il ne le paralt. 

She is quite different from what she Elle est tout autre qu'elle n'etait. 

used to be. 

He speaks differently from what he II parle autrement qu'il ne pense. 

thinks. 

There was more wood than was II y avait plus de bois qu'il n'en 

necessary. fallait. 

(b.) JVi, before a verb in a finite mood, must be accompanied 
by ne ; as, 
He neither laughs nor weeps. II ne pleure ni ne rit. 

(c.) Ne pas, ne rien, &c, are generally placed together before 
the verb, when it is in the infinitive ; as, 
He is very wrong not to do it. II a tort de ne pas le faire. 



VOCABULAIRE 52. 



Wealth. 
Property. 

Progress. 

Talent. 

A bargain. 
The article. 
The wash-stand. 
The soap. 
The comb. 



( Le bien. 
( Les biens. 
j Le progres. 
( Les progres. 

Le talent. 

Un marche. 
L'article. 
Le lavabo. 
Le savon. 
Le peigne. 



To acquire 

To beat. 
To laugh. 
To bark. 
To improve. 



Eiches. ( 

Wealth. / 

Knowledge. •] 

Science. ) 

Learning. ) 

The purchase. 
The toilet. 
The wash-basin. 
The brush. 
The shell, scale. 



La richesse. 
Les richesses. 
La connaissance. 
Les connaissances. 

La scienee. 

L'emplette. 
La toilette. 
La cuvette. 
La brosse. 
L'ecaille. 



Acquerir, irr. 

Battre, irr. 
Eire (de), irr. 
Aboyer. 
Faire des progres. 



To gather. 
To pluck. 
To fight. 
To weep. 
To bite. 
To purchase. 



>• Cueillir, irr. 



Se battre. 

Pleurer. 

Mordre. 

Faire des emplettes» 



CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LEfON. 19? 

To do one's best, i Faire tout son ^^ Oo0ter 

( possible. 

Possible. Possible. Impossible. Impossible. 

Wise. Sage. Learned. Savant. 



Exercice 52. 

1. Est-il possible de faire des progres dans les sciences sans 
etudier ? 2. II est impossible de faire des progres sans se don- 
ner de la peine. 3. Que deviendrez-vous si vous n'acquerez 
point les connaissances necessaires pour gagner votre vie ? 4. 
Je ferai tout mon possible pour les acquerir. 5. La science s'ac- 
quiert-elle sans travailler ? 6. La science ne s'acquiert qu'a force 
de travail. 7. Les talents ne valent-ils pas mieux que les ri- 
chesses ? 8. Oui, M. ; les talents valent bien mieux que les ri- 
chesses, 9. Les biens de cette vie valent-ils la peine et les soucis 
(cares) qu'ils nous coutent? 10. lis ne les valent point, puis 
qu'ils ne nous rendent pas meilleurs. 11. La richesse nous rend- 
elle heureux? 12. Elle ne nous rend ni heureux ni sages. 13. 
Pourquoi cueillez-vous ces fleurs? 14. Je les cueille pour en 
faire des bouquets. 15. N'en avez-vous pas cueilli assez ? 16. 
J'en cueillerai encore quelques-unes. IV. Pourquoi battez-vous 
votre chien? 18. Je le bats parce qu'il aboyait. 19. Mord-il? 
20. Non, M. ; chien qui aboie ne rnord pas. 21. N'a-t-il pas 
mordu ce petit qui pleure ? 22. II a aboye apres lui, mais il ne 
l'a pas mordu. 23. Qu'y avait-il la-bas? 24. II y avait des 
garcons qui se battaient. 25. Biez-vous de cela? 26. Je n'en 
ris pas. 27. De quoi riiez-vous? 28. Nous riions du raarche 
que je viens de faire. 29. Avez-vous fait des emplettes ? 30. 
J'ai fait emplette de quelques articles de toilette. 31. Montrez- 
moi les articles que vous venez d'acheter. 32. Les voici : un 
lavabo d'acajou, une cuvette de porcelaine, un peigne d'ecaille et 
une brosse pour les cheveux. 33. Combien tout cela vous coute- 
t-il ? 34. Cela me coute vingt dollars, argent comptant; pas 
davantage. 35. Avec de l'argent comptant on achete a bon 
marche. 36. Voila pourquoi je n'achete jamais a credit. 37. 
Avez-vous beaucoup de savon? 38. J'en ai plus qu'il ne m'en 



198 CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LE^ON. 

faut. 39. Fait-il aussi froid aujourd'hui qu'il a fait hier? 40. 
II fait moins froid aujourd'hui qu'il n'a fait hier. 41. Ce mon- 
sieur-la est-il aussi savant qu'il le parait ? 42. II est plus savant 
qu'il ne le parait. 43. Ce jeune homme ne lit-il, ni n'ecrit-il ? 
44. II ne lit, ni n'ecrit, ni n'etudie ; il est la a ne rien faire. 



Theme 52. 

1. It is possible to acquire wealth without much trouble (sans 
se donner beaucoup de peine), 2. But it is impossible to make 
much (grands) progress in the sciences, and to become learned, 
without much labor (sans travailler beaucoup). 3. Many men 
spend their lives (116, a) in acquiring wealth, and die without 
having enjoyed it. 4. The wealth (Les biens) those men have 
acquired, will not make them happy, because they do not possess 
(have) the knowledge (pi.) necessary to make life useful and 
agreeable. 5. I will do my best to succeed in my studies, and 
to become (pour me rendre) useful in the world. 6. What were 
you doing when I called you ? 7. I was gathering flowers. 8. 
Here are the flowers I have gathered. 9. We shall ga'ther flow- 
ers together, when we have finished our task. 10. Why were 
those children weeping? 11. They were afraid of the dog; he 
was barking. 12. Does he bite? 13. He never bit anybody; 
he only barks. 14. I have beaten him, and I shall beat him 
again (encore), if he does not stop doing it. 15. What were you 
laughing at? 16. We were laughing at what your brother was 
telling us. 17. We have laughed at it, and you will laugh at it 
too. 18. He has purchased several things this morning. 19. 
What has he purchased ? 20. A toilet-table, two brushes, a tor- 
toise-shell comb, and several other articles. 21. What do those 
things cost him ? 22. The whole (Le tout) together costs him only 
twenty-five dollars. 23. That is not much for so many articles, 
but it is still too dear, when one does not want them. 24. That 
is the reason why I say (that) one is wrong to buy a thing which 
one does not need. 25. I wish to wash my hands ; have you 
any soap? 26. There is some on the wash-stand, beside the 
wash-basin. 27. Do you spend more money than you earn? 



CINQUANTE-TROISIEME LEgON* 



199 



28, I spend less money than I earn. 29. My friend, the painter, 
has more talent than people think. 30. He is not less wise than 
he appears. 31. You speak differently now from what you did 
when you came here. 32. America is quite different now from 
what it was twenty-five years ago. 33. Does your brother laugh 
or weep ? 34. He neither laughs nor weeps ; he is doing noth- 
ing at all. 35. Is he right to do nothing? 36. He is wrong, 
and you are wrong too in not studying your lesson. 



53. CINQUANTE-TROISIEME LEQOK 

Pluperfect Tense. 

202# The pluperfect is the compound tense that corresponds 
with the imperfect ; as, 

I had spoken, (fee. 
I had come, (fee. 
I had dressed, (fee. 
I had just dined. ■ 
I had just done. 

I thought you had started. 



J'avais parle, <fec. 
J'etais venu, (fee. 
Je m'etais habille, (fee. 
Je venais de diner. 
J'en venais. 



( Je croyais que vous etiez parti 
(Je 



i vous croyais parte. 



203* To fall asleep. 
To wake. 
To awake. 

If I fall asleep, wake me up. 
I rise as soon as I awake. 
To apply one's self. 
He applies himself with zeal to 

study. 
To apply to. 

I apply to you, in order to know. 
To expect. 

I did not expect that. 
To happen, to take place, to occur. 
To inform ; to instruct. 



S'endormir. 

Eveiller. 

S'eveiller. 

Si je m'endors, eveillez-moi. 

Je me leve aussitot que je m'eveille. 

S'appliquer (a). 

II s 1 applique avec zele a l'etude. 

S'adresser (a). 

Je m'adresse a vous pour savoir. 

S'attendre (d). 

Je ne m'attendais pas a cela. 

Se passer. 

Jnstruire. 



200 



CINQUANTE-TROISIEME LE£OKV 



Inform me ©f what is going on. 
To improve erne's mind. 
Those that like to improve their 
minds, are never idle. 



Instruisez-moi de ce qui se passes 
S'instruire. 

Ceux qui aiment a slnstruire, n^ 
sont jamais oisifsi 



204 • JNo, NO ONE. 
Ho flowery path leads t& glory. 

Kb one of us has succeeded in it. 
!No man is happy, nothing can make 

him so. 
~JXo one is pleased with his fortune. 
Such, \ (before a noun.) ^ 

( (before an adjective.) 
Such a man. Such a woman, 
Such a charming lady. 
Others. ' 

To live at the expense of others* 
People, folks. Young people. 

Rem. — The adjectives that 
those that follow it, masculine. 

Old people are distrustful. 



\ ]STul ? nulls, (ne.) w 
Aucun chemin de fleurs ne conduit 

a la gloire-. 
Aucun de nous n*y a reussi. 
Nul komme n'est heureux, nulle 

ehose ne pent le rendre tel. 
Kul n'eat content de sa fortune; 
Tel^, telle. 
Sl 

Un tel homme. Une telle femm& 
Une femme si charmante. 
Autkui, (generally preeed. by aprep.^ 
Yivre aux depens d'autrui. 
Gens. Les jeunes gens. 

precede gens must be feminine,, 
Les yieilles gens s@nt smp^onneuot. 



VOCABULAIKE 53. 



The secretary. 
The fate ; the lot. 
People, folks. 
The counsel. 
The advice. 
The zeal. 
The income; 
The expense. 



Le secretaire.. 
Le sort. 
Les gens. 

£ Le eosseiL 

Le zele; 
Le reveiMi. 
Le depens."* 



The embassy. 
Fortune. 
A person. 

The answer. 

T3ae ardor. 
The loss. 
The expense.. 



To fall asleep. Sfendormir. To happen.. 

To wake. j&veiller. To awake. 

To apply one ? s self S'appliquer (a). To apply to. 



L'ambassade*. 
La fortune. 
Une personne. 

La reponse. 

L'ardeur. 
La perte. 
La depense. 

Se passer. 
S^eveiller. 
S'adresser (a } 



* Nul is a stronger negative than aucun, and may be used in an absolute manner, 
t Used only in the expressions,, aux depens de ; d vos depens, &c 



CmQUANTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 201 

To expect. S'attendre (a). To be satisfied. Se contenter (de), 

To instruct. ) T , . To improve one's ) ,. , • 

m . . [ Instruire. . -^ > S instruire. 

lo miorm. ) mind. > 

To name ; to appoint. Konimer. To be appointed. Etre nomme. 

No, no one. Aucun. ISTo, no one. Eul, nulle. 

Such. Tel, telle; si. Others. Autrui. 

Perfect. Parfait. Perfectly. Parfaitement. 

Directly. Directement. Absolutely, Absolument. 



Exercice 53. 



1. Aviez-vous ecrit a M. B. . . ., quand je vous ai envoy e* ce 
billet? 2. Oui, M. ; et je venais de recevoir sa reponse quand 
votre billet m'est parvenu. 3. Le medecin avait-il dine quand 
vous y etes alle ? 4. II en venait. 5. Etiez-vous sorti quand le 
commis est venu ? 6. J'etais alle chez mon voisin. *7. Je le 
croyais parti pour Boston ; n'y est-il pas alle ? 8. II n'etait pas 
parti alors, mais il devait partir dans le courant de la journee. 
9. Vous etiez-vous endormi quand je suis entre? 10. Oui, M. ; 
je m'etais assis au coin du feu, et je m'etais endormi. 11. Yous 
ai-je eveille ? 12. Je n'en suis pas fache ; il etait temps de m'e- 
veiller. 13. Ces enfants dorment-ils ? 14. lis se sont endormis ; 
il faudra les eveiller dans une heure. 15. Vous etes-vous eveille 
de bonne heure ce matin ? 16. Non, M. ; le soleil s'etait deja 
leve quand je me suis eveille. 17. Votre frere s'appliquait-il a. 
Petude lorsqu'il etait a l'ecole? 18. II s'y appliquait avec ar- 
deur; il a toujours aime a s'instruire. 19. Yous attendiez-vous 
a le voir nommer secretaire d'ambassade ? 20. Je m'y attendais, 
parce qu'on lui avait promis cette charge. 21. A qui s'etait-il 
adresse pour Pavoir? 22. II s'etait adresse directement au Pre- 
sident. 23. S'est-il applique a Petude des langues modernes? 

24. II s'est applique a l'etude de la langue francaise pendant 
plusieurs annees, et je crois qu'il en a une connaissance parfaite. 

25. J'espere qu'il nous ecrira souvent quand il sera a Paris. 26. 
II a promis de nous instruire de tout ce qui s'y passera. 27. Est- 
il necessaire de savoir le francais pour &tre nomme secretaire de 
legation ? 28. On m'a dit qu'il est absolument necessaire de le 
savoir. 29. Yotre mere doit avoir ete contente d'apprendre 

9* 



202 CINQUANTE-TROISlfcME LE£ON. 

cette nouvelle. 30. Elle l'a apprise avec plaisir, mais nulle chose 
ne peut lui faire oublier la perte de ma sceur, qui est morte si re- 
cemment. 31. Nul n'est parfaitement heureux ici-bas, mais le 
sage se contente de son sort tel qu'il est. 32. Nul n'est sage 
alors, puisque nul n'est content de sa fortune. 33. Mais vous 
croyez qu'il y a des gens qui sont contents de leur esprit, n'est-ce 
pas ? 34. Je crois que le monde est rempli de telles gens. 35. 
Quel conseil donnerez-vous aux gens qui depensent plus qu'ils ne 
gagnent ? 36. Je leur donnerai le conseil de mesurer leurs de- 
penses a leurs revenus, sans cela ils seront obliges de vivre aux 
depens d'autrui. 37. Ne connaissez-vous aucune de ces person- 
nes? 38. Je n'en connais aucune. 



Theme 53. 

1. Had your brother paid the tailor when you saw him? 2. 
He had not ; he had not money enough to pay his expenses 
{sing.) at the hotel. 3. He expected every day (de jour en jour) 
to receive his income, (pi.) 4. He had written to his agent 
(homme d'affaires), but (he) had received no answer when I left. 
5. Had you taken supper when I arrived ? 6. We had just fin- 
ished. 7. Are the children in bed (couches) ? 8. They are 
( Oui, M.) ; I was in their room to see if they were still awake 
(eveilles), but they had fallen asleep. 9. I did not wake them, 
for they were very tired when they went to bed. 10. Did you 
rise early? 11. I rose as soon I awoke ; the sun had just risen. 
12. Charles had risen before I (rose). 13. He always awakes 
early. 14. When he is up (leve), he wakes up the whole house. 
15. The son of Mr, B. . . . has been appointed secretary of lega- 
tion at Paris. 16. He is a young man of talent ; when he was 
at school, he applied himself zealously (avec zele) to study. 17. 
No other scholar (Sieve) showed such earnest application to labor 
(ardeur pour le travail). 18. No one else (autre) showed such 
a great desire (desir) to improve his mind. 19. Have you any 
(quelque) knowledge of the French language ? 20. I have not 
(no knowledge of it), and I am sorry for it. 21. I applied for* 

* To apply for, demander. 



CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. 203 

the office (la charge) of secretary of legation at Rome, and (I) 
was told that a (la) knowledge of the French language is abso- 
lutely necessary in order to be appointed to that office. 22. To 
whom did you apply ? 23. I applied directly to the President, 
24. We have applied to our friends to know the news, and they 
will inform us with pleasure of every thing that is going on. 25. 
There are people who always speak of the business of others, and 
neglect their own. 26. Such people deserve our contempt. 27. 
Those old people are very unfortunate ; the conduct of their 
children has caused the loss of their fortune. 28. They are 
obliged, in their old age, to live at the expense of others. 29. 
Learn to be satisfied with your lot, such as it is ; no one is per- 
fectly happy, for perfect happiness does not exist on earth. 30. 
Take that letter yourself (yous-meme) to that lady ; you will be 
pleased to make her acquaintance (sa connaissance) ; she is such 
a charming person. 31. You give me (un) good advice ; I shall 
follow it 



54. CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. 

Conditional Mood. 

205. The conditional has two tenses : the present and the past. 

(a.) The conditional Resent is obtained by adding the termi- 
nations of the imperfect, ais, ais, aitj ions, iez, aient, to the root 
of the future. Thus : 

tPlRAI. Je finirai. w Je recevrai. £ Je vendrai. 

JHrais, t-H Je finirais, g* Je recevrais, § Je vendrais, £ 

Tu irais, g* Tu finirais, ~ Tu recevrais, £ Tu vendrais, © 

II irait, E U Jinirait, p> II recevrait, % 11 vendrait, £ 

Nous irions, ^ Nous Jinir ions, g- Nous recevrions, §• Nous vendrions, g 

Vous iriezy -° Vous Jlniriez, ^ Vous recevriez f ® Vous vendriez, & 

lis iraient, §f Us finiraient, p lis recevraient, p lis vendraient, © 



(b.) The past is formed of the present of the auxiliary and the 
past participle of the verb. 



204 cxkquante-qttatriSme LugoN, 

I should have had, &e, J'aurais eu, &c. 

I should have come, <fce. Je serais venu, &e. 

I should have risen, cfcc^ Je me serais leve, &e. 



206 • (a.) The conditional present states what would take place f 
if a certain condition were fulfilled. The condition, when ex- 
pressed, is introduced by the conjunction si, with the verb in the 
imperfect or pluperfect ; as, 

If I had money, I would pay you. Si j'avais de Fargent, je vous paie^ 

rais. 
I would pay you, if I had received Je vous paierais, si j'avais recu mon 

my money. argenl 

I would do it, if I could.* Je le ferais, si je pouvais. 

You could do it y if you would * Vous pourriez le faire, si vous vou- 

liez, 

(b.) The conditional past states what would have taken place, 
if a certain condition had been fulfilled ; the verb in the condi- 
tional clause is in the pluperfect ; as, 

What would you have doue, if you Qu'auriez-vous fait, si vous aviez 
had been in my place ? ete a ma place ? 

I could have done it, if I had J'aurais pu le faire, si j'avais voulu 
wished. 



207 • The tenses of the conditional are connected with the im- 
perfect and pluperfect, in the same manner as the future tense is 
connected with the present ; as, 

He will come, if the weather will II viendra, si le temps le lui per- 

allow him. met. 

He would come, if the weather II viendrait, si le temps le lui per- 

would allow him. mettait. 

He would have come a if the weath- II serait venu, si le temps le lui 

er had allowed him. avait permis. 

* Would and could, when not introduced by the conjunction if, and alluding to 
present or future time, must be rendered by the present of the conditional ; when they 
are followed by the past of the infinitive, they must be rendered by the past of the con- 
ditional. But would and could, followed by the present of the infinitive, and referring 
to past time, are not signs of the conditional ; they are then the past tense of wiU and 
can, and must be rendered by the perfect or imperfect. 



CINQUANTE-QUATRIEIME LE£ON. 



205 



Rem. 1. — The conditional tenses are not used after si, if; but 
they may be used after si, whether (169, R.) ; as, 

If he should come. (Should he come.) S'il yenait. 

I do not know whether I should go, Je ne sais si j'irais, s'il m'invitait, 
if he should invite me. 

Rem. 2. — Wish, followed by the imperfect, is rendered by the 
conditional of vouloir ; as, 

I wish I knew. (I should like to Je voudrais bien savoir. 

know.) 
I wonder why he does not come. Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi il 

ne vient pas. 

Rem. 3. — The conditional present of savoir is used, only nega- 
tively, for the indicative present oipouvoir ; as, 

I cannot nrevent it 5 ^ e ne saura i s l'empe cher, [morally.) 

(Je ne puis l'empecher, {physically) 



208» To keep from. S'empecher (de). 

I cannot help admiring her. Je ne saurais m'empecher de l'ad- 

mirer. 

To have occasion, cause, reason. Avoir lieu (de). 

I have no occasion to complain of Je n'ai pas lieu de me plaindre de 

him. Iul 

There is no reason to fear him. II n'y a pas lieu de le craindre. 

To have the means. Avoir les moyens (de). 

I cannot afford to do that. Je n'ai pas les moyens de faire cela. 



VOCABULAIRE 54. 

God. Dieu. Providence. 

Honor. L'honneur. Conscience. 

The meeting, the ) T j 

„ & ' . y Le rendez- 
place of meetmg. ) 

Occasion, reason. ) T . 

Cause. ) The opportunity. 



La Providence. 
La conscience. 

The circumstance. La circonstance. 

The occasion. 



, I- 



occasion. 



Vice. 



To fear. 

To permit. 
To allow. 



Le vice. 



Folly. 



La folie. 



\ Craind ; e ( & \ To complain (of). \ Se P laindre (*> 
I irr. (101, c.) l K } \ irr. (101, c.) 



SPermettre (de). 
irr. (101, (1) 



To prevent. 
To hinder. 



I Empecher (de). 



206 

To keep from. 

To be (in a place). Se trouver. 



To try. 

To endeavor. 

To assure. 

Undoubtedly. 

In time. 

Innocent. 



CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. 

S'empecher (de). To enrich one's self. S'enrichir. 
Torepairtogo(to) Serendre 
a place). ) 

To employ. Employer (a). 



I Tacher (de). 

Assurer. 
Sans doute. 
A temps. 
Innocent. 



To have occasion. Avoir lieu (de). 
Perhaps. Peut-etre. 

In preference, rather. De preference. 
Guilty, culpable. Coupable (de). 



Exercice 54. 

1. Acheteriez-vous quelques-uns de ces tableaux, si vous aviez 
de l'argent? 2. J'en acheterais peut-etre deux ou trois. 3. Les- 
quels choisiriez-vous ? 4. Je choisirais ces deux-la. 5. Si j'en- 
voyais cette lettre a votre cousin, la recevrait-il a temps ? 6. Si 
vous la lui envoyiez ce matin, il la recevrait ce soir. 7. La lui 
enverriez-vous si vous etiez a ma place ? 8. Oui, si j'etais a votre 
place, je la lui enverrais. 9. Prendriez-vous une tasse de cafe, 
s'il y en avait? 10. Je prendrais de preference une tasse de 
chocolat. 11. Ces dames voudraient-elles accepter quelque 
chose? 12. Je crois qu'elles accepteraient avec plaisir une glace 
a la vanille. 13. JSPaurions-nous pas du plaisir, si nous faisions 
un voyage ensemble ? 14. Je crois bien que nous aurions du 
plaisir. 15. Ne ferions-nous pas un voyage, si nous en avions 
les moyens? 16. Je serais bien aise d'en faire un, si j'en avais 
les moyens. 17. N'en aurions-nous pas eu les moyens, si notre 
affaire avait reussi ? 18. Si nous avions reussi dans notre projet, 
je vous assure que nous en aurions bien eu les moyens. 19. Au- 
rions-nous lieu de nous plaindre de notre voisin, s'il s'etait trouve 
au rendez-vous ? 20. Nous n' aurions pas lieu de nous plaindre 
de lui, s'il s'y etait rendu a. l'heure convenue. 21. Y aurait-il 
lieu de craindre les hommes, s'ils craignaient Dieu ? 22. II n'y 
aurait pas lieu alors de les craindre. 23. Si vous aviez l'occasion 
de faire le tour de 1' Europe, la manqueriez-vous volontiers ? 24. 
Si j'avais cette occasion-la, je vous assure que je n'aimerais pas a 
la manquer. 25. Ces hommes n'emploieraient-ils pas tous les 
moyens possibles pour s'enrichir ? 26. Je crois qu'ils s'enrichi- 



CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. 207 

raient volontiers aux depens de l'honneur et de leur conscience. 
27. Leur permettriez-vous de s'enrichir a vos depens, si vous 
pouviez les en empecher? 28. Je tacherais bien de les en em- 
pecher, je vous assure. 29. Auriez-vous permis cela, si vous aviez 
pu l'empecher? 30. Je l'aurais ernpeche, si j'avais pu. 31. 
Votre frere viendrait-il, si les circonstances le iui permettaient ? 
32. II viendrait, sans doute, si rien ne l'en empechait. 33. Se 
serait-il rendu au lieu convenu, si les circonstances le lui avaient 
permis ? 34. II s'y serait rendu, si cela lui avait ete possible. 
35. Je voudrais bien savoir ce qui Pa ernpeche de venir? 36. 
Je voudrais bien le voir; il pourrait nous le dire. 37. Kiez-vous 
ou pleurez-vous des vices et des folies de ce monde ? 38. Je n'en 
ris ni n'en pleure, mais je ne saurais m'empecher de mepriser 
ceux qui courent a leur perte par le chemin des plaisirs. 39. 
N'admirez-vous point cette sage Providence qui garde l'innocent 
et perd le coupable? 40. Sans doute, je 1' admire, et je ne sau- 
rais m' empecher de radmirer. 



Theme 54. 

1. Would you write to Henry, if you were in (a) my place ? 
2. If I were in your place, I should. 3. If I sent him a letter 
this morning, would it reach him in time ? 4. He would receive 
it to-morrow morning, and (he would) have time to write before 
the departure of the steamer. 5. If you had money, would you 
employ it in buying books ? 6. I should spend (employ) it in 
making a tour through the United States (le tour des Etats- 
TJnis). 7. I should like to travel, but I cannot afford it. 8. I 
should have had the means, if I had succeeded in my underta- 
king. 9. If you had an (T) opportunity of seeing Rome, would 
you go? 10. I should be very sorry to miss the opportunity of 
seeing that city. 11. Should we be happier, if we had money? 
12. We should perhaps be neither happier nor wiser. 13. 
W 7 ould you not like to be rich ? 14. Oh, yes (Sans doute) ; but 
I would not be willing to do any thing against my (V) honor to 
enrich myself. 15. If those men wanted to enrich themselves 
at our expense, should we not try to prevent their doing so (les 



208 CINQUANTE-CINQUlfiME LE£ON. 

en)% 16. We should, undoubtedly. 17. Would those ladies 
accept a cup of coffee? 18. They would rather take a cup of 
tea. 1 9. Should we have complained of our friends, if they had 
been in time at the place of meeting? 20. We should have 
had no reason to complain of them. 21. Would they not have 
gone thither, if circumstances had allowed them? 22. They 
would, undoubtedly, if nothing had prevented them. 23. Would 
you fear men, if they feared God ? 24. There is no reason to 
fear him who fears the Lord (le Seigneur). 25. I wonder why 
your brother did not keep his word ? 26. I assure you that he 
would not have failed in it, if he could have done otherwise. 27. 
I should like to see him ; he would tell us the reason why (en). 
28. I cannot help laughing when I see the follies of youth. 29. 
And I cannot help weeping, when I see innocent youth run to 
ruin (a sa perte) by the road of vice, (pi.) 



55. CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LEQON. 

209. Ought* and might\ are sometimes to be rendered by 
the conditional of devoir and pouvoir ; as, 

He ought to do it. II devrait le faire. 

You ought to have told him of it. Vous auriez du le lui dire. 

He might perhaps do it. II pourrait bien le faire. 

He might have heard it. II aurait pu l'apprendre. 



210« To give notice of. Avertir qqn. de qq. ch. 

To inform, to advise, to apprise of. j Informer (instruire) qqn. de qq. ch. 
To acquaint with. \Apprendre qq. ch. a qqn. 

Give him notice of the arrival of Avertissez-le de l'arrivee du bati- 

the vessel. ment. 



* Ought represents sometimes the present, and sometimes the imperfect; as, She 
acts as she ought, Elle fait ce qu'elle doit faire. She always behaved as she ought, 
Elle s'est toujours comportee comme elle devait. 

t The note on could, on p. 204, applies equally to might. 



CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LE£OX. 



209 



Inform him of what is going on. 
I will tell you what has happened. 
To teach a person. 

To teach a person something. 

To teach a person how to do some- 
thing. 
He teaches the governor's children. 

He teaches them the languages. 

He teaches them to play on the 
flute. 



Informez-le de ce qui se passe. 

Je vous apprendrai ce qui est arrive. 

Enseigner qqn. (instruire qqn.) 
(Enseiqner ) ■, » 

\A PP rendre\ qq ' Ch ' aqqn ' 
\ Enseigner ). dfaire qq . cK 

(Apprendre) ** J 

H enseigne les enfants du gouver- 
neur. 
j II leur enseigne les langues. 
\ II leur donne des logons de langues, 

II leur apprend a jouer de la flute, 



21 1 • To inquire about a person. 
To occupy one's self with. 
To take notice of, to observe. 
To rejoice at. 
To use, to make use of. 
To do without. 

Did you inquire about him ? 
Did you occupy yourself with that 

business ? 
Did you observe that ? 
Do you rejoice at his success ? 
Do you use that book ? 
What did you use to do that with ? 

Can you do without coffee ? 
I can do very well without it. 
I can do very well without him. 



S'informer de qqn. 

ISoccuper de. 

S'apercevoir de. 

Se rejouir de. 

Se servir de. 

Se passer de. 

Vous etes-vous informe de lui? 

Yous etes-vous occupe de cette af- 
faire ? 

Yous etes-vous apercu de cela ? 

Yous rejouissez-vous de son succes? 

Yous servez-vous de ce livre ? 

De quoi vous etes-vous servi pour 
faire cela? 

Pouvez-vous vous passer de cafe ? 

Je pui3 tres-bien m'en passer. 

Je me passerai bien de lui 



212. To make use of to use. 

Do you use rice ? 

"We use a great deal of it 

To put back ; to put off. 

Put back that book in its place. 

/ am in the habit of putting every 
thing in its place. 

Can you put that off till to-mor- 
row? 



Faire usage de. 

Faites-vous usage de riz ? 

Nous en faisons grand usage. 

Remettre. 

Remettez ce livre a sa place. 

J'ai V habitude de remettre chaque 
chose a sa place. 

Pouvez-vous remettre cela a de- 
main? 



210 



CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LEQW. 



VOCABULAIRE 55. 



The use ; usage. 
The success. 
The motive. 

The tool. 

The rice. 
The honey. 

To give notice. 

To inform. 

To acquaint with. 

To inquire about. 

To take notice of. 
To perceive. 
To use. 

To make use of. 
To make use of. 
To use. 



L'usage. 
Le succes. 
Le motif. 

L'outil. 

Le riz. 
Le miel. 



( Avertir. 
•J Informer. 
( Apprendre. 



The habit. 
The error. 
The indifference. 
The hatchet. 
The axe. 
The nutmeg. 
The cinnamon. 



To teach. 
To instruct. 
To show how. 
To occupy one's 
self with. 



S'informer (de). 

J- S'apercevoir(de). To rejoice at. 

y Se servir de. To do without. 

iFaire usage de. To P ut back 

f s To put off. 



L'habitude. 

L'erreur. 

L'indifference. 

• La hache. 

La muscade. 
La cannelle. 



C Enseigner. 
•j Instruire. 
\ Apprendre. 

y S'occuper (de). 

Se rejouir (de). 

Se passer (de). 
I Remettre. 



Exercice 55. 

1. Avez-vous averti ce monsieur de votre intention de partir? 
2. Je Ten ai averti ce matin. 3. 1ST' auriez- vous pas du Ten aver- 
tir plus tot ? 4. Je Fen aurais averti plus tot, si je l'avais vu. 
5. Votre pere est-il informe des choses qui se sont passe es ? 6. 
Je ne pense pas ; mais je lui apprendrai tout ce qui s'est passe 
quand je le verrai. 7. Yous etes-vous informe de la personne 
qui a enseigne les enfants du gouverneur? 8. J'ai oublie de 
m'en informer. 9. Votre frere ne voudrait-il pas s'informer du 
monsieur qui lui a enseigne l'allemand? 10. II pourrait s'in- 
former de lui aujourd'hui ; il en aura l'occasion. 11. N'auriez- 
vous pas pu vous informer de l'Allemand qui vous a appris a 
jouer de la flute? 12. Je me serais informe de lui, si. j'y avais 
pense. 13. Vous occuperez-vous de cela aujourd'hui, quand 
vous serez en ville? 14. Je m'en occuperai bien volon tiers, si 
mes affaires me le permettent. 15. Ce monsieur s'est-il apercu 
de son erreur? 16. II parait qu'il s'en est aperc,u. 17. Vous 



CINQUAXTE-CIXQUIEME LE£ON. 211 

rejouissez-vous de notre succes? 18. ]STous nous en rejouissons. 
19. Yotre mere s'est-elle rejouie dn retour de votre frere? 20. 
Elle s'en rejouira quand elle le verra. 21. Puis-je me servir de 
cet outil? 22. Servez-vous-en, je n'en ai pas besoin a present. 
23. De quoi yous etes-vous servi pour couper ce bois ? 24. Je 
me suis servi de cette hache. 25. Ou est la plume dont vous 
vous etes servi pour ecrire ce billet? 26. Je n'ai pas eu de 
plume ; je me suis servi d'un crayon. 27. Yous etes-vous apercu 
de V indifference de ce monsieur ? 28. Je m'en suis bien apercu. 
29. Quel peut etre le motif de sa conduite singuliere? 30. Je 
ne m'en informerai pas; nous nous passerons bien de lui. 31. 
Faites-vous usage de riz ? 32. ISTous en faisons grand usage. 
33. Y mettez-vous de la muscade ? 34. Je ne fais pas usage de 
muscade, j'y mets de la cannelle et du sucre. 35. Faites-vous 
usage de beurre en ete ? 36. Xous nous en passons en ete ; et 
ail lieu de beurre, nous faisons usage de miel. 37. Avez-vous 
remis mes outils a leur place, apres vous en etre servi? 38. Oui, 
M. ; apres m'etre servi d'une chose, j'ai l'habitude de la remettre 
a sa place. 39. Si vous voulez, nous remettrons cette lecon a 
demain. 40. II n'y a pas lieu de la remettre a demain. 



Theme 55. 

1. Ought you not to give notice to those people of your inten- 
tion? 2. I ought to have done so, but I have had no opportu- 
nity. 3-. I shall give them notice of it to-night. 4. I give you 
notice that I shall inform your father of every thing that has ta- 
ken place. 5. I have already informed him of it. 6. Undoubt- 
edly, you thought that he might hear it from somebody els± 
(d'un autre). 7. He might have heard it, and that would have 
been unpleasant for me (me). 8. What has become of the gov- 
erness (V institutrice) who taught your children ? 9. I inquired 
about her the other day, but could not learn what has become of 
her. 10. My brother would have inquired about the gentleman 
who taught him French, if you had spoken to him about it. 11. 
The gentleman who taught you to play on the base-viol, was 
here to-day, and inquired about you. 12. Has the lawyer oc- 



212 



CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE£0N. 



cupied himself with our business? 13. He will do so as soon 
as he receives the papers (les pieces) he has sent for [fait de- 
mander). 14. Did you observe the indifference he showed 
about (pour) our success? 15. I did; I understand the motive 
of his conduct. 16. He is in the wrong (erreur); but he will 
soon perceive it. 17. "What do you rejoice at? 18. I rejoice 
at the news I have just heard. 19. You would rejoice at it, 
if I should apprise you of it. 20. We have been informed of 
our friend's success, and we rejoice at it very much. 21. Do 
you use that hatchet? 22. I shall not use it to-day. 23. 
Use it, if you want it ; I can do without it. 24. Where is the 
tool which you used to do this with ? 25. I put it back in its 
place, after having used it. 26. I am in the habit of putting 
back every thing in its place. 27. Do you use honey? 28. 
Yes, we use a great deal of it in summer, when we do with- 
out butter. 29. How do you like those rice-cakes ? 30. They 
are very good; they taste of nutmeg and cinnamon. 31. My 
friend would like to put that journey off another week (a la se- 
maine prochaine) ; would that suit you? 32. Do not put off till 
to-morrow, what you ought to do to-day. 33. You might have 
dispensed with (se passer) telling me that ; I knew it already. 



56. CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 



213* To recollect 
To remember. 
Do you recollect that ? 
I do. 

I recollect that gentleman. 
I recollect having told him, 
Do you remember that ? 
I do. 

I remember having told him. 
Did you recollect those words ? 
We did. 



$ Se rappeler qq. ch. 
i Se souvenir de qq. ch. 

Vous rappelez-vous cela ? 

Je me le rappelle. 

Je me rappelle ce monsieur. 

Je me rappelle de lui avoir dit. 

Vous souvenez-vous de cela ? 

Je m'en souviens. 

Je me souviens de lui avoir dit. 

Vous etes-vous rappele ces mots ? 

Nous nous les sommes rappeles, 



CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 



213 



Did you remember those words? 

We did. 

To recollect a person. 

I do not recollect you. 



Vous etes-vous souvenus de ces 

mots? 
Nous nous en sommes souvenus. 
Remettre qqn. 
Je ne vous remets pas. 



214. 

Among, amongst 

Between him and me, the difference 

of age is not great. 
I have no friend among them. 



Entre. 

Parrni. 

Entre lui et moi, la difference d'age 

n'est pas grande. 
Je n'ai aucun ami parmi eux. 



Rem. — Among, used distributi vely, is expressed by entre ; as, 

Partagez cela entre vous. 
Partager entre. 
Partager avec. 



Divide that among you. 

To divide among. 

To share with. 

Share that with your brothers. 

To split the difference. 

To deliver. 

Deliver this letter into his hands. 



Partagez cela avec vos freres. 
Partager le differend. 
Remettre. 

Remettez cette lettre entre 
mains. 



215. To mix. 

To mix water with wine. 

Why do you mix among those peo- 
ple? 

To meddle with something. 

What are you meddling with? 

I meddle with my own business. 

To concern. 

I do not meddle with things that 
do not concern me. 

That concerns nobody. 

Is that any thing to you? 

Oh ! no, absolutely nothing. 

To have an appetite. 
To have a good memory. 

To have a good sight. 

To be short-sighted. 

To know a person by name, by sight. 



Meier. Se meler. 

Meier de l'eau avec du vin. 

Pourquoi vous melez-vous parmi 

ces gens ? 
Se meler de qq. ch. 
De quoi vous melez-vous ? 
Je me mele de mes propres affaires. 
Regarder qqn. Concerner qqn. 
Je ne me mele pas de ce qui ne me 

regarde pas. 
Cela ne regarde personne. 
Cela vousfait-il quelque chose? 
Du tout; cela ne me fait absolu- 

ment rien. 
Avoir appetit, or de l'appetit. 
Avoir bonne memoire, la memoire 

bonne. 
Avoir bonne vue, la vue bonne. 
Avoir la vue courte. 
Connaitre qqn. de nom y de vue. 



214 



CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE£0K. 



The event. 
The difference. 
The dispute. 
The place, 
The spot. 
The appetite. 
The remembrance. 
The recollection. 
The bill. 
The account. 

To recollect. 
To remember. 



VOCABULAIRE 56. 
L'evenement. The conversation. La conversation. 
The difference. La difference. 



!• Le differend. 

[■ L'endroit. 
L'appetit. 
[ Le souvenir. 



- Le memoire. 



The part. 
The share. 
The digestion. 

The sight. 

The memory. 
The recollection. 



j- La part. 
La digestion. 
La vue. 

> La memoire. 



To mix. 



j Se rappeler. 
( Se souvenir, 
j Meier. 
( Se meler. 



To concern. 

To meddle with. Se meler de. 



( Regarder. 
( Concerner. 



To share ; to divide. Partager. 



Between, among. 
Equal. 



Entre. 
£gal. 



To notice. 
To observe. 
Among. 
Equally. 



>• Remarquer. 






Parmi. 
Egalement. 



Exercice 56. 



1. Vous rappelez-vous l'evenement dont nous parlons? 2. Je 
me le rappelle. 3. Votre frere s'est-il rappele les circonstances 
de cette affaire ? 4. II se les est rappelees quand je lui en ai 
parle. 5. Vos soeurs se rappellent-elles d'avoir vu ma tante ? 6. 
Elles se rappellent de 1' avoir vue, mais elles ne la reconnaitraient 
pas, si elles la voyaient. 7. Vous souvenez-vous de ce qui a ete 
convenu % 8. Je m'en souviens ; je me rappelle, mot pour mot, 
la conversation que nous avons eue ensemble. 9. Ces dames se 
sont-elles souvenues d'avoir ete dans cet endroit? 10. Elles s'en 
sont souvenues. 11. Vous souviendrez-vous de ce que je vous ai 
dit? 12. Je m'en souviendrai. 13. Votre frere se serait-il sou- 
venu de cela, si vous ne lui en aviez pas parle ? 14. Je crois 
qu'il s'en serait souvenu ; il a la memoire bonne. 15. Remettez- 
vous cette dame? 16. Je ne la remets pas; je n'ai aucun sou- 
venir de l'avoir vue. 17. Quelle est la difference d'age entre vous 
et votre frere? 18. II y a deux ans de difference entre son age 



CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 215 

et le mien. 19. JSTe pouvez-vous pas convenir du prix avec le 
rnarchand de chevaux ? 20. Nous ne pouvons pas tomber d'ac- 
cord. 21. Offrez-lui de partager le differend, pour en finir. 22. 
Non, M. ; je ne peux pas consentir a faire cela ; il gardera son 
cheval, s'il ne veut pas me le laisser au prix que je lui en ai offert, 
23. Partagerez-vous ces gateaux avec vos freres ? 24. Oui, M. ; 
je leur donnerai a chacun une part egale a la mienne. 25. Vou- 
lez-vous partager cette monnaie entre les domestiques ? 26. Je 
la partager ai egalement entre eux. 27. Les hommes sont-ils 
egaux ? 28. lis sont egaux devant la loi, mais il y a une grande 
difference entre eux. 29. Voulez-vous remettre ce memoire en- 
tre les mains de votre oncle ? 30. Donnez-le-moi, je le lui re- 
mettrai. 31. Pourquoi vous melez-vous parmi des gens que 
vous ne connaissez pas ? 32. C'est que je voudrais savoir ce 
qu'ils disent. 33. Vous melez-vous de leurs affaires? 34. Je 
ne me mele pas de ce qui ne me regarde pas. 35. Avez-vous 
bon appetit? 36. Non, M. ; je n'ai presque pas d'appetit. 37. 
Mangez un peu de cannelle, cela donne de l'appetit. 38. J'aime 
mieux me promener a cheval pour gagner de l'appetit. 39. 
Avez-vous bonne vue ? 40. J'ai la vue courte. 41. Portez-vous 
des lunettes ? 42. Je m'en sers seulement pour lire. 43. Con- 
naissez- vous ce monsieur de nom ? 44. Je le connais de vue, 
mais je ne sais pas comment il s'appelle. 



Theme 56. 

1. Do you recollect what I said to you? 2. I recollect it ? 
word for word. 3. We recollect the event of which you speak, 
as if it had taken place yesterday. 4. Did your sisters recollect 
the conversation we had on (en) that occasion ? 5. They did, as 
soon as I spoke to them about it. 6. Do you recollect having 
been in this place ? 7.1 have no recollection of having been 
here. 8. Do you not remember that ? 9. I do not. 10. Did 
your aunt remember her old friends ? 11. She did ; she inquired 
about every one of you. 12. Do you not recollect me? 13. I 
should not have recognized you, if you had not spoken. 14. Is 
there a great difference of age between you and your cousin ? 



216 CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

15. Between him and me, the difference of age is not great. 16. 
What is the difference between you and the merchant? 17. It 
is but a trifle. 18. Can you not agree ? 19. I believe we can ; 
if (the) gentlemen will split the difference, it will be all right (ce 
sera fait). 20. Was there a book of mine among those I sent 
you back (r envoy er) ? 21. I noticed that there was one more 
(de plus) than there ought to have been (qu'il rilen fallait). 22. 
Did you share with your brothers what I gave you? 23. I di- 
vided it equally among us all. 24. I gave each an equal share. 
25. Men are born equal, nevertheless (cependant) there is a great 
difference among them. 26. What have you done with the bill 
which I left with you (vous) ? 27. X delivered it into the cap- 
tain's hands, and he will pay you as soon as he receives his in- 
come. 28. Has the captain a good memory? 29. If you 
promise him any thing, I assure you that he will remember it ; 
but I don't know whether he remembers, equally well, what he 
promises others. 30. Does your brother meddle with the busi- 
ness of those people ? 31. He mixes amoug them, but he does 
not meddle with their business. 32. He is not in the habit of 
meddling with things that do not concern him. 33. Have you 
a good appetite ? 34. I have lost my (£') appetite, but does that 
concern anybody ? 35. I should like to know why you wear 
spectacles ; you are not short-sighted ? 36. If I choose to wear 
them (S'il me plait d'en porter), is that any thing to you ? 37. 
No, absolutely nothing. 



57. CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 
216. 

To sit down, to place one's self. Se mettre. 

Take a seat near this young lady. Mettez-vous a cote de mademoiselle. 

To dress well, ill. Se mettre bien, mat. 

To be well dressed. Etre bien niis. 

To dress in the fashion. Se mettre a la mode. 

She is dressed in the English style. Elle est mise a Vanglaise. 

Her style of dress is elegant. Sa mise est elegante. 



CXNQUANTE-SEPTIEME LECON. 



217 



To clothe. Clad. 

I clothe. "We clothe. 

How was he dressed? 
He was dressed in black. 
To begin, to set about a thing. 
To begin to sing. 



Vetir, irr. Vitu. 

Je vets. Nous vetons. 

Comment etait-il vetu ? (habille.) 

II etait vetu de noir, or en noir. 

Se mettre a. 

Se mettre a chanter. 



21 7 • To bring or draw near. 
To draw or come near. 
Draw the table near the window. 
Will you not come near the fire \ 

To remove. 

To withdraw from. 

Remove the chair from the fire. 

I go away from the fire ; I am too 

warm. 
To resemble some one. 
That man resembles my brother. 
"We resemble each other. 
That liquor looks like water- 
To pretend, to feign. 
He pretends to sleep. 
To look like. 
To look in good humor. 
He looks like a doctor. 
He looks sad, merry, &c. 



Approcher (de). 

S'approcher (de). 

Approchez la table de la fenetre. 

Ne voulez-vous pas vous approcher 

du feu ? 
Eloigner (de\ 
8 y eloigner (de). 
Eloignez la chaise du feu. 
Je m'eloigne du feu; j'ai trop 

chaud. 
Ressembler a qqn. 
Cet homme ressemble s, mon frere. 
Nous nous ressemblons. 
Cette liqueur ressemble a de l'eau, 
Faire semblant de. 
II fait semblant de dormir. 
Avoir Vair. 

Avoir Pair de bonne humeur. 
II a Ymv d'un medeciu. 
Avoir l'air triste, gai, &c 



218. In the first person plural of the imperative, the form of 
the verb is the same as in the first person plural of the indicative 
present. The subject is not expressed. (126.) 

Let us sit down to table. Mettons-nous a table. 

Let us drink to the health of our Buvons a la sante de nos amis, 
friends. 

The following four imperatives are irregular. 

Have. Be. Know. Please. Ayez. Soyez. Sachez. Veuillez, 

Let us have f . .be, . . know. Ayons. Soyons. Sachons. 

Have the kindness to do that. Ayez la bonte" de faire cela. 

Let us be sure of what we say. Soyons surs de <;e que nous disons. 

10 



218 



CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 



Let us know bow to be satisfied 

with our lot. 
Please hand this, &c. 



Sachons nous contenter de notor? 

sort. 
Veuillez passer ceci a ? &e, 



To lay the cloth. 

To remove the cloth, the things. 

A cover for this gentleman. 

Shall I help you ? 

I will trouble you, . „ .. 



Mettre le couvert. 
Oter le couvert. 
Un couvert pour monsieur. 
Vous servirai-je. . . .? 
Je vous demanderai. 



The garment. 



iL'a 



The cover. 
The air. 

The appearance. 
The appearance. 
The pretence. 

A leg of mutton. JUngigotde 
mouton* 



VOCABULAIRE 57. 

Le vetement 
Le couvert. 



The dress ; the ) j 

style of dress, j 
The table-cloth. La nappe. 

L'humeur. 



■ Le semblant. 



1 



The humor. 

The resemblance. La ressemblaneet 

A loin of veaL 



Une longe de 
veau. 



To sit down. 
To dress well. 
To dress badly. 

To draw near. 

To resemble. 
To pretend, to fe 
Elegant. 
Sad. 
Lightly. 



Se mettre. 

Se mettre bien. 

Se mettre mal. 
( Approcher. 
( S'approcher. 

Ressembler (a). 
jn, Faire semblant. 

Jllegant. 

Triste. 

Legerement. 



To begin to. 
To clothe; 

To withdraw. 

To pour out. 

To look. 

Simple. 

Merry r cheerfuL Gai. 

First.. Premieremenk, 



Se mettre a. 
Vetir, irr. 

j Eloigner. 
( S'eloigner. 

Verser. 

Avoir l'air. 

Simple. 



EXERCICE 57. 



1. Ou nos amis se sont-ils mis? 2. lis se sont mis la-bas a 
F ombre. 3. Les dames se mettent-elles bien ici ? 4. Elles se 
mettent a la mode de Paris. 5. Cette dame-la n'est-elle pas 
bien mise ? 6. Elle a une mise elegante, mais j'aime encore 
mieux une mise simple. 7. Votre soeur se met-elle a l'anglaise t 



CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEC/0N. 219 

8. Elle se met a la francaise. 9. N'etes-vous pas vetu trop le- 
gerement? 10. Je vous demande pardon; ce vetement est plur 
chaud que vous ne peusez. 11. Comment ces dames etaient- 
elles habillees hier au soir ? 12. Elles etaient habillees en blan& 
13. A-t-on chante ? 14. On a d'abord chante, puis on s'est mis ** 
danser. 15. Vous y etes-vous plu ? 16. Je m'y serais mieux plu 
s'il y avait eu moins de monde. 17. Faut-il approcher la tabk 
du feu ? 18. II vaut mieux l'approcher de la fenetre ; je n'ainu? 
pas a m' approcher du feu. 19. Ces chaises sont trop pres du 
feu; voulez-vous les en eloigner? 20. Je les en eloignerai. 
21. Pourquoi vous eloignez-vous de la fenetre? 22. Je m'en 
eloigne pour m' approcher du feu. 23. Votre frere vous ressem- 
ble-t-il ? 24. Nous ne nous ressemblons guere. 25. Wj a-t-il 
pas quelque ressemblance entre vos deux cousins? 26. II n'y a 
aucune ressemblance entre eux. 27. Ce jeune homme n'a-t-il 
pas Fair de nous ecouter ? 28. II fait semblant de lire, mais je 
crois qu'il fait attention a notre conversation. 29. A-t-on Fair 
de bonne humeur, quand les affaires vont mal? 30. Non, M. ; 
on a alors Fair de mauvaise humeur. 31. Ce monsieur a-t-il 
l'air triste, parce qu'il n'a pas d'argent? 32. Je crois qu'il au- 
rait l'air gai, s'il en avait. 33. Parlons a present de nos af- 
faires. 34. Permettez ; le diner est servi ; mangeons d'abord la 
soupe. 35. Cela vaut mieux. Mettons-nous a table. 36. Jean, 
il manque un couvert ici. 37. Vous servirai-je un morceau de 
cette longe de veau ? 38. Je prendrai de preference une cote- 
letted e mouton. 39. Qu'aurai-je l'honneur de vous servir ? 40. 
Je vous demanderai une tranche de ce gigot de mouton. 41. 
Versez du vin a monsieur. 42. Versez-moi d'abord un verre 
d'eau. 43. Ayez la bonte de me passer 1' ananas. 44. Veuillez 
passer le fruit a mademoiselle. 45. Soyons prets a partir a qua- 
tre heures. 46. Sachez, messieurs, qu'il est deja trois heures et 
demie. 47. Levons-nous de table et partons. 48. Un instant, 
s'il vous plait ; sachons d'abord si la voiture est prete. 



220 CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEC.ON. 

Theme 57. 

1. Take this seat near the fire. 2. I do not like to come near 
the fire. 3. I am going to sit down by (a) the window, to look 
into the street. 4. I admire the elegant dresses of the ladies 
that pass. 5. People dress well here. 6. The ladies dress in 
the Parisian style. 7. I like to see the ladies well dressed, but 
a simple style of dress pleases me better than an elegant style. 
8. Is your cousin dressed in green ? 9. She is dressed in blue. 
10. Are those children not clad too lightly? 11. I think not; 
the garments they wear are of wool. 12. I would begin to 
write, if I were warm. 13. Shall I draw the table near the fire ? 

14. I should not be able to write there ; it is not light enough. 

15. Eemove it from the fire, and place it in the middle of the 
room. 16. Will you come near the window? 17. I went away 
from the window, because it is too cold there. 18. Leave the 
table where it is, and I will come near it. 19. You may go 
down, but do not go away (^ eloigner) ; I shall have occasion 
(besoin) for you, when I have done writing. 20. Does your 
cousin resemble your sister? 21. She does not. 22. Do the 
two sisters resemble each other (se) ? 23. There is no resem- 
blance between them, either in face or temper (ni de visage ni de 
caractere). 24. The elder always looks in bad humor, and the 
younger (la cadette) has a charming disposition, she always looks 
pleased (content). 25. That boy pretends to be studying, but I 
believe he is playing (tfamuser). 26. Why do you look so sad? 
27. I don't know; I want amusement. 28. Stay, and take some 
dinner with us. 29. John, are you going to lay the cloth ? 30. 
Yes, sir; presently. 31. Put a cover for this gentleman. 32. 
Let us sit down to table. 33. What shall I help you to ? 34. 
I will trouble you for a piece of that loin of veal. 35. This leg 
of mutton looks good; shall I help you to some of it. 36. I 
would prefer a piece of that fowl. 37. Please hand the pine- 
apple to that young lady. 38. Have the kindness to pour out 
some wine to your neighbor. 39. Let us be merry. 40. Let us 
drink to the health of our absent friends. 41. Eemove the 
things from the table. 42. Let us draw the table near the win- 



CINQUANTE-HUITIEME LE£0N. 221 

dow, and we shall have room to dance. 43. Know, my friends, 
that it is time to go away. 44. Good-by (Au revoir). 



58. CESTQUANTE-HUITIEME LEgOK 



219» To depend on. 
Does it depend on you to do that ? 
It depends upon circumstances. 
That is according to circumstances. 
It depends. 
To defend; to forbid. 
His father has forbidden him to go 

there. 
He is not in a condition to defend 

himself. 
To spill ; to spread. 
The sun diffuses light, 
light spreads more rapidly than 

sound. 
To spread; to extend; to stretch. 
She spreads the linen in the sun. 
He stretches himself along the floor. 



JDependre de. 

Depend-il de vous de faire cela ? 

Cela depend des circonstances. 

C'est selon les circonstances. 

C'est selon. 

Defendre {de). 

Son pere lui a defendu d'y aller. 

H n'est pas en etat de se defendre, 

Repandre. 

Le soleil repand la lumiere. 

La lumiere se repand plus vite que 

le son. 
Etendre. 

Elle etend le linge au soleil. 
II s'etend sur le plancher. 



220 • To stop ; to stay. 
To rest. 
Let us stop here. 
Let us rest a moment. 
To prepare. 

Make yourself ready to start. 
To keep one's self ready. 
To keep one's self straight. 
To keep standing. 
To be in a condition, to be able. 
To be comfortable. 
To make one's self comfortable. 
To set out upon a journey. 



S'arreter. 

Se reposer. 

Arretons-nous ici. 

Reposons-nous un moment. 

Preparer. 

Preparez-vous a partir. 

Se tenir pret. 

Se tenir droit. 

Se tenir debout. 

Etre en etat. 

Eire a son aise. 

Se mettre a son aise. 

Se mettre en voyage. 



222 



CINQUANTE-HUITIEME LE^ON. 



221 # To FLEE. Fled. 

I flee. We flee. 

To flee, to run away. 
To make one's escape. 
He ran away. 
He made his escape. 
Let us be off. 
To take to flight. 
To put to flight. 
To rob somebody. 

To steal something from somebody. 
They have stolen his watch from 

him. 
They arrested the thief, and put 

him in prison. 
To take care, to beware. 
Take care. 
Mind your watch ; they will steal 

it from you. 
To take care not, (bef. the infinitive.) 
Take care not to fall. 



Fuir, irr. Put. 

Je fuis. Nous fuyons. 

S'enfuir. 

Be sauver. 

II s'est enfui. 

II s'est sauve. 

Sauvons-nous. 

Prendre la fuite. 

Mettre en fuite. 

Voter qqn. 

Voter qq. ch. a qqn. 

On lui a vole sa montre. 

On a arrete le voleur, et on l'a mis 

en prison. 
Prendre garde (a before a noun). 
Prenez garde. 
Prenez garde a, votre montre; on 

vous la volera. 
Prendre garde de. 
Prenez garde de tomber. 





YOCABULAIRE 58. 




The repose, the rest. Le repos. 


Ease, comfort. 


L'aise. 


The state. 
The condition. 
The thief. 
The innkeeper. 
The farmer. 
The danger. 


J. L'etat. 

Le voleur. 
L'aubergiste. 
Le fermier. 
Le danger. 


The condition. La condition. 

The prison. La prison. 
The inn ; the tavern. L'auberge. 
The farm. La ferme. 
The flight. La fuite. 


The gun. 


Le fusil. 


The arm. 
The weapon. 


[• L'arme. 



To depend on. 



Dependre de. 



To spill; to spread. Repandre 



To stop ; to stay. 
To arrest. 



S'arreter. 
Arreter. 



To flee, to run away. S'enfuir. 



To forbid. 
To defend. 
To spread. 
To extend. 
To stretch. 
To rest. 
To flee. 
To make off. 
To run away. 



j. Defendre (de> 

[■ £tendre. 

Se reposer. 
Fuir, irr. 

[ Se sauver. 



CIXQUAXTE-HUITIEME L7XGX. 



223 



To rob; to steal. 
To prepare. 

According to. 

To be comfortable. 



Voler. 
Preparer. 

Selon. 



To hang (on). 
To take care. 



On condition. 
Etre a son aise* Standing. 

Exercice 58. 



Pendre (a). 
Prendre s:arde. 
A condition. 
Sous condition. 
Debout. 



1. Je voudrais me reposer; asseyons-nous ici sur Fherbe, 2. 
Prenez-y garde ; Fherbe est mouillee. J'etendrai mon manteau, et 
nous nous mettrons dessus. 3. Je pendrai mon cbapeau a Farbre. 
4. Tenez, pendez-y le mien aussi. 5. Depend-il de vous de faire 
ce voyage? 6. Cela depend des cir Constances. 7. Votre neveu 
ira-t-il avec vous? 8. C'est selon. 9. Son pere lui a-t-il defendu 
d'aller a la foire? 10. II lui a defendu d'y aller seuL 11. 
Qu'est-ce qui repand cette odeur desagreable? 12. Ce sont les 
eaux qui se sont repandues dans la campagne. 13. Jusqu'ou 
cette ferme s'etend-elle ? 14. Elle s'etend jusqu'a Fauberge que 
vous voyez la-bas. 15. Prenez garde de tomber; il fait glissant 
ici. 16. Donnez-moi la maim et marchons lentement. 11. A- 
t-on arrete le voleur qui a vole ce fermier P autre jour? 18. On 
Fa arrete le lendemain; et il est en prison maintenant. 19. Pre- 
nez garde a votre manteau; on vous le volera. 20. N'ayez pas 
peur de cela; j'y prendrai garde. 21. Pourquoi cet homme 
s'enfuit-il ? 22, Je ne sais pas pourquoi il s'enfuit. 23. Sau- 
vons-nous d'ici, et allons nous reposer dans cette auberge. 24. 
Nous nous arreterons a Fautre auberge ; on y est mieux. 25. 
Je ne puis plus me tenir debout; je veux prendre quelques 
moments de repos. 26. Vous avez Fair fatigue ; etendez-vous 
sur ce sofa pendant qu'on prepare le diner. 27. Vous pre- 
parez-vous a partir? 28. Je suis tout pret a me mettre en 
voyage. 29. Mettez-vous a votre aise, et tenez-vous chaud. 
30. Je suis tout-a-fait a mon aise. Ne prenez pas garde a 
moi, je vous en prie. 31. Que feriez-vous si les voleurs ve- 
naient ? 32. Je suis en etat de me defendre, et je me defendrais. 
33. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux se sauver? 34. C'est selon. II ne 
faut pas fuir le danger, si Fhonneur ordonne de rester. 35. Y 
aurait-il du danger a voyager ici sans armes? 36. II pourrait y 



224 CIXQUAXTE-HUITIEME LEGO^, 

en avoir. 37. Mettrait-on les voleurs en fuite avec un vieux fu- 
sil? 38. C'est selon; je crois qu'en general ils aiment mieux 
prendre la fuite que de se battre. 39. Ah ! monsieur l'auber- 
giste ; vous voulez vous sauver parce que vous savez que votre 
gigot est brule. 40. Messieurs, je ne me sauverai pas, a condi- 
tion que vous ne me gronderez pas. 41. Et nous ne gronderons 
pas, a condition que vous nous donnerez une bonne bouteille de 
vin. 42. D'accord, messieurs, je vais vous ehercher une bouteille 
de mon meilleur. 



Theme 58. 

I. Let us stop here for a few minutes; I am not able to go 
any farther. 2. My uncle's farm is yonder; we shall go there 
(jusque-la) when we have rested a little. 3. Hang my hat on 
that nail. 4. Give me your wet cloak, I will spread it over (sur) 
two chairs before the fire. 5. Does it depend on us to make a 
fortune ? 6. Not entirely ; it depends rather on circumstances, 
Y. Will you forbid your nephew to go to the fair (a la foire) I 
8. That is according to circumstances. 9. Why do you keep 
standing? 10. Make yourself comfortable. 11. I am quite 
comfortable here. 12. Mind my cloak; is it too near the fire? 
13. There is no danger. 14. A rumor (Le bruit) has spread 
(se repandre) that you (on) have been robbed; is it true? 15. 
It is but too true. 16. It happened at (dans) an inn. 17. 
I had fallen asleep on the sofa, where I had stretched myself to 
take a few moments' rest, when a thief approached me and stole 
my purse. 18. I perceived it soon after, but alas (helas) ! it was 
too late; the thief had made his escape. 19. They have since 
arrested him, and he is now in jail. 20. Take care not to fall; 
this is (c'est ici) a bad place. 21. How far does that field ex- 
tend? 22. It extends to the river. 23. Is there any danger in 
travelling here ? 24. There is no clanger, when one has a good 
gun. 25. Is it not forbidden here to carry arms? 26. Every- 
body is allowed (II est per mis a chacun) to carry arms in self- 
defence (pour se defendre). 27. Do you see those men that are 
coming towards us (de noire cbte)% 28. Do not be afraid; if 



CINQUANTE-NEUVIEME LECW. 



225 



they are thieves, I shall put them to flight. 29. And if they do 
not fly? 30. If they do not take to flight? Well, we shall 
make off; we are able to run as fast as they. 31. There is no 
occasion to be afraid of them : the one is my uncle's farmer, and 
the other is the innkeeper, at whose house we stopped this morn- 
ing. 32. Well, farmer, will you go to the fair with us? 33. 
Yes, I will, on condition that you will come first and dine with 
me. 34. That is agreed upon (C'est convenu). 35. Young la- 
dies, allow me to remind you of the necessity (de vous faire penser 
a la necessite) of keeping yourselves straight. 36. You, conva- 
lescents, keep yourselves warm. 37. You, my children, keep 
yourselves clean, and prepare your task for to-morrow. 38. And 
we, grave professors (Et nous auires, graves professeurs), let us 
keep ourselves ready to march ; we shall have (il nous faudrd) 
to march some (un) day. 



59. CINQUANTE-NEUVI&ME LEQON. 



222 • To pull, to draw. i 

To shoot, to fire. I 

To fire at some one. 
I fired twice at that bird. 

I killed it at the second shot. 

To attract. 

Her good looks attract every heart 

towards her. 
To get into a bad scrape. 

To get out of a bad scrape. 
Did you get out of the scrape ? 
To look pleased with a person. 
To look cross at some one. 
Bad-looking people. 
To cast an eye upon something. 
To have a correct eye. 
10* 



Tirer. 

Tirer un coup de fusil a or sur qqn. 

J'ai tire deux fois (deux coups) sur 
cet oiseau. 

Je l'ai tue du second coup. 

At tirer. 

Sa bonne mine lui attire tous les 
cceurs. 

S'attirer (se faire) de mauvaises af- 
faires. 

Se tirer d affaire. 

Vous etes-vous tire d'affaire ? 

Faire bonne mine a qqn. 

Faire mauvaise mine d qqn. 

Des gens de mauvaise mine. 

Jeter un coup docil sur qq. ch- 

Avoir le coup d'ceil juste. 



226 CINQUANTE-NEUVIKME LEgON. 

223. 

To make some one's acquaintance. Faire connaissance avec qqn. 
To become acquainted with one. Faire la connaissance de qqn. 

He is an acquaintance of mine. II est de ma connaissance. 

I have become acquainted with J'ai fait sa connaissance. 

him. 
To present Presenter. 

To introduce, Introduire. 

C Je vous presenterai a la famille. 
I will introduce you to the family. -? Je vous introduirai aupres de la fa- 

( mille. 
He has introduced me into that II m'a introduit (presente) dans 

house. cette maison (chez eux). 

I introduce to you Mr. B . . . . Je vous presente M. B . . . . 

I will introduce you to Mrs. B . . . . Je vous presenterai a Mme. B . . . . 

Rem. 1. — Of two objective pronouns, both representing per- 
sons, the indirect object, if it is in the third person, is placed 
with its preposition after the verb. 
I will introduce you to her. Je vous presenterai a elle. 

Rem. 2. — The pronouns a moi, a toi, a lui, &c, and not me, 
te, lui, &c, are always to be used with reflective verbs, and with 
a few others ; as, 

I apply to him. Je m'adresse a lui. 

I go to you. Je vais a vous. 

He runs (comes) to her. II court (vient) a elle. 



224. The compound pronouns, moi-meme, nous-memes, &c, 
are used to designate persons more expressly ; as, 

He told me so himself. II me l'a dit lui-meme. 

He told it to me personally. II me l'a dit a moi-m^me. 

They themselves did it. lis Font fait eux-memes. 

Himself, herself, itself. Soi. 

Rem. 1. — When applied to persons, soi is used only with ref- 
erence to an indefinite subject. 

One does not like to natter himself. On n'aime pas a se natter soi-m6me. 

Everybody thinks of himself. Chacun pense a soi. 

Each other, of each other. Bun V autre, Vun de V autre. 

They love each other. lis s'aiment Tun l'autre. 

They are pleased with each other. lis sont contents Tun de l'autre. 



CINQUAXTE-NEUVIEME LE£0£T. 



227 



Rem. 2. — When each other refers to more than two persons, 
Vun r autre must be in the plural ; as, 

Men deceive each other. Les hommes se trompent les una 

les autres. 



VOCABULAIRE 59. 



The vicinity. 

The neighborhood 
The stay. ) 

The sojourn. ) 

An uproar, a noise. 
The glance. 
The look. 
The game. 
The pistol. 

The leisure. 



To pull ; to shoot 

To kill 

To present. 

To cross. 

To advise, to induce. 

To wish. 

Amusing. 

Just ; correct 

Just now. 



Les environs. 

Le voisinage. 

Le sejour. 

Du fracas. 

Le coup d'oeiL 

Le gibier. 
Le pistolet 

Le loisir. 



The country-seat ■ 



I La maison de 
[ campagne. 
The acquaintance. La connaissance. 

The dwelling. 



The crowd. 
The look 
The appearance. 
The partridge. 
The fire-arm. 
The history. 
The story. 



Tirer. 

Tuer. 

Presenter. 

Traverser. 

Engager (a). 

Souhaiter. 

Amusant. 

Juste. 

Tout-a-1'heure.* 



To attract. 

To wound. 

To introduce. 

To examine. 

To interest. 

To relate. 

Interesting. 

Correct. 

A little while ago. 



La demeure. 
La foule. 

• La mine. 

La perdrix. 
L'arme-a-feu, 

• L'histoire. 



Attirer. 
Blesser. 

Introduire. 

Examiner. 

Interesser. 

Raconter. 

Interessant 

Correct. 

Tant6t* 



Exercice 59. 



1. Y a-t-il beaucoup de gibier dans les environs de la ferme? 
2. II n'y en a pas beaucoup ; il y a quelques perdrix. 3. En 
avez-vous tue ? 4. Non, M. ; j'ai tire sur quelques-unes, mais je 
les ai manquees. 5. N'avez-vous pas le coup d'ceil juste. 6. 
Ce n'est pas cela ; mais mon fusil ne vaut rien du tout. 7. 
Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous tires? 8. J'ai tire peut- 
6tre six fois. 9. Qu'est qui attire la foule devant cette maison ? 



* Tout-a-Vheure and tantot may refer to past or future time, (see Yoc. 24.) 



228 CINQUANTE-NEUVIEME LECON. 

10. On vient d'y entendre le bruit (Tune arme-a-feu. 11. On shy- 
est battu ; on dit que deux hommes se sont blesses l'un 1' autre. 
12. Oui, M. ; l'un a donne un coup de couteau a 1' autre, et celui- 
ci lui a tire un coup de pistolet. 13. II y a toujours du fracas 
dans ce voisinage ; allons-nous-en d'ici. 14. Un instant; je vois 
quelqu'un de ma connaissance dans la foule ; je vais lui parler. 
15. N'allez pas vous rneler parmi ces gens de mauvaise mine; 
vous vous ferez de mauvaises affaires. 16. Soyez tranquille, je 
saurai m'en tirer. 17. Qui est le monsieur qui vous a parle tan- 
tot ? 18. Celui qui m'a parle tout-a-1'heure est M. Lenoir, un 
negociant d'ici. 19. J'ai entendu parler de lui ; je voudrais bien 
faire sa connaissance. 20. Je vous presenterai a. lui tantot, 
quand nous le verrons a la bourse. 21. Voila M. Lenoir qui 
traverse la place ; allons a lui. 22. Restons ; il va venir par ici. 

23. M. L , je vous presente M. S de B 24. M., 

je suis charme de faire votre connaissance. 25. Comptez-vous 
faire un long sejour en ville ? 26. Je compte passer 1'hiver ici. 
27. J'espere que nous aurons sou vent le plaisir de vous voir; 
venez passer la soiree chez nous jeudi ; je vous presenterai a ma 
famille. 28. Je ne manquerai pas l'occasion; je serai charme 
de faire la connaissance de madame votre epouse. 29. Si vous 
avez un moment de loisir, je vous engage a jeter un coup d'oeil 
sur ce livre ; il vous interessera. 30. J'y ai jete un coup d'oeil ; 
je le trouve tres-interessant. 31. N'est-ce pas que c'est une 
histoire amusante ? 32. Tres-arnusante, et tres-bien racontee. 
33. Le boulanger a-t-il envoy e son memoire ? 34. II est venu le 
porter lui-meme. 35. A qui l'a-t-il donne? 36. lime l'a donne 
a moi-meme, et je l'ai examine et trouve juste. 37. N'est-ce pas 
qu'il faut prendre garde a soi et examiner ses affaires par soi- 
meme? 38. Cbacun pour soi, et il ne faut compter que sur soi- 
mekue. 39. Ces deux cousines se font-elles mauvaise mine l'une 
a l'autre ? 40. Elles seront contentes l'une de 1' autre quand elles 
se connaitront mieux. 41. Je l'espere. 42. Je le souhaite de 
tout mon cceur. 



CINQTJANTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 229 



Theme 59. 



1. Where did you kill that partridge ? 2.1 killed it in the 
vicinity of our dwelling. 3. Is there much game ? 4. I saw 
but one covey (une compagnie) of partridges ; I killed this one at 
the first shot. 5. Did you fire more than once ? 6. I fired sev- 
eral times at small birds. 7. Does Henry shoot well ? 8. He 
has a correct eye, but he has no practice (F habitude de tirer). 
9. When I passed a little while ago through this neighborhood, 
there was an uproar in the next street. 10. The report {Le 
bruit) of a fire-arm had attracted thither a crowd of people. 11. 
They were saying just now that a man had fired a pistol at an- 
other, and (that he had) wounded him in the breast. 12. I did 
not stop to inquire about it. 13. I was afraid (craindre) of get- 
ting into a bad scrape, for there were many bad-looking men in 
the crowd. 14. Did your friend get out of the scrape the other 
day? 15. Oh! yes; he often gets into bad scrapes, but he al- 
ways gets out of them (again). 16. Where did you make that 
gentleman's acquaintance? 17. I became acquainted with him 
in the country. 18. He introduced me to his family, and made 
me acquainted (m'a fait /aire, dfcc.) with many persons, which 
(ce qui) made (200, E.) my stay in this city very pleasant. 19. Did 

Mr. S say himself that he was going to leave the city ? 20. 

He said so to me personally. 21. Did he examine the bill, and 
find it correct? 22. He cast an eye upon it, but he did not say 
any thing; he looked cross at me. 23. He never looks pleased 
with those that come to ask him for money. 24. How are you 
pleased with that book? 25. It is very interesting ; the story 
is amusing, and related in a pleasant manner. 26. I advise you 
to cast an eye upon it during your leisure moments ; it will in- 
terest you. 27. Everybody must take care of himself. 28. One 
should not praise himself. 29. Those two pupils flatter each 
other. 30. They are pleased with one another. 31. They often 
complain of one another; and yet (cependanf) they like each 
other very much. 32. I hope they will continue to like each 
other. 33. I wish it with all my heart. 



230 



SOIXANTIEME LE£ON. 



60. SOIXANTIEME LEgON. 

Dimensions. 

225 • (a.) How high is that Combien cette eglise a-t-elle de 
church ? hauteur ?* 

{ Cette eglise a soixante pieds de 
hauteur. 
Cette eglise est haute de soixante 
pieds. 

(&.) Of what height is that De quelle hauteur est cette e"glise ? 
church ? 



(c.) What is the height of that 
church ? 
The height of that church is sixty 

feet. 
That table is six feet long. 
A table six feet long. 
A room sixteen feet long by fifteen 

broad. 
The size of the room.f 
The size of a stone. 
The size of a man. 
What is your size ? 
How tall are you? 
I am G.ve feet eight inches. 
My brother is taller than I by two 

inches. 
He is two inches taller than I. 



Quelle est la hauteur de cette 
eglise ? 

La hauteur de cette eglise est de 
soixante pieds. 

Cette table a six pieds de longueur. 

Une table de six pieds de longueur. 

Une chambre de seize pieds de lon- 
gueur sur quinze de largeur. 

La grandeur de la chambre. 

La grosseur d'une pierre. 

La taille d'un homme. 

Quelle est votre taille ? 



J'ai cinq pieds huit pouces. 

Mon frere est plus grand que moi 

de deux pouces. 
II a deux pouces de plus que moi. 

Rem. — The preposition de is used before an adverb that refers 
to a preceding noun ; as, 
I have a dollar too much. J'ai un dollar de trop. 

226 1 The relation of two nouns, the latter of which expresses 



* We generally use the noun of dimension (de hauteur), though the adjective (de 
haut) would also be correct ; only d'epais for d'epafeseur, and de profond for de pro- 
fondeur, are not said. 

Nouns of dimension are formed from the adjectives, by adding ur to their feminine 
endings. They are of the feminine gender. 

t The word size is variously expressed, according to the adjective which the object 
requires : Un grand animal ; la grandeur de Tanimal. Une grosse pierre ; la gros- 
eeu/r de la pierre. 



SOIXANTIEME LEQON, 



231 



the particular use or destination of the former, is indicated by 
the preposition a, if the use or destination be vague or indefinite ; 
and by a and the article, if the use or destination be more pre- 
cise and definite ; as, 

A wine-bottle. Une bouteille a vin. 

The wine-cellar. La cave au vin. 

The steam-mill. Le moulin a vapeur. 

The letter-box. La boite anx lettres. 

It is the same with nouns of designation ; as, 

A man with white hair. Un homme a cheveux blancs. 

The man with the white hair. L'homme aux cheveux blancs. 

A four-wheeled vehicle. Une voiture a quatre roues. 

The house with the green windows. La maison aux fenetres vertes. 



Formation of the Plural oe Compound Nouns. 

227t In compound words, not connected by a preposition, 
nouns and adjectives take the form of the plural, other parts of 
speech remain invariable ; as, Un chef -lieu, a chief place ; des 
chefs-lieux. Une basse-cour, a farm-yard ; des basses-cours. But : 
Un passe-partout, a master-key ; [passe, verb ; par tout, adverb ;) 
des passe-partout. 

When two nouns are connected by a preposition, the first only 
becomes plural ; as, Un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece ; des chefs- 
d'oeuvre. 



228. 








To SEW. 


To have sewed. 


Coudre, irr. 


Avoir cousu. 


I sew. 


We sew. 


Je couds. 


Nous cousons. 


To GRIND. 


To have ground. 


Moudre, irr. 


Avoir moulu. 


I grind. 


We grind. 


Je mouds. 


Nous moulons. 


To VANQUISH. 


To have vanquished. 


Vaincre, irr. 


Avoir vaincu. 


I vanquish. 


We vanquish. 


Je vaincs. 


Nous vainquons. 




VOCABULAIRE 60. 




The department. Le departement. 


The gallery. 


La galerie. 


The courier. 


) 






The post-boy. 


\ Le courrier. 


The post-office. 


La poste. 


The mail. 


) 







232 



SOIXANTIEME LE£ON. 



The packet. 
The bundle. 
The steeple. 
The sound. 
The ringing. 
The chief place. 
The wall. 
The park. 
The mill. 
The grain. 



I Le paquet. 

Le clocher. 

I Le son. 

Le chef-lieu. 
Le mur. 
Le pare. 
Le moulin. 
Le grain. 



The kind ; the style. Le genre. 

The rest. j 

The remainder. j 

The enemy. L'ennemi. 

The thumb ; the inch. Le pouce. 



• Le reste. 



To build. 
To grind. 

To inclose. 
Thick. 



Batir. 
Moudre, irr. 

Enfermer. 
Epais, se. 



The box. 
The bell. 



The bell, (small.) j 

The farm-yard. 

The wall. 

The hedge. 

The wheel. 

The sort ; the kind. 

The species. 

The kind. 

The generality, 

Most. 

The passion. 

The size ; the figure. 



La boite. 

La cloche. 
La clochette. 
La sonnette. 
La basse-cour 
La muraille. 
La haie. 
La roue. 
La sorte. 

y L'espece. 

(• La purpart.* 

La passion, 
La taille. 



To sew. 
To vanquish. 
To conquer. 
To surround. 
Deep. 



Coudre, irr. 
y Vaincre, irr. 

Entourer. 
Profond. 



Exercice 60. 



1. Combien ce clocher a-t-il de hauteur? 2. Ce clocher a 
deux cent pieds de hauteur. 3. Quelle est la hauteur de votre 
maison ? 4. Notre maison est haute de quarante-deux pieds. 5. 
Combien de profondeur a-t-elle ? 6. Elle a quarante pieds de 
profondeur sur vingt-cinq de largeur. 7. De quelle epaisseur 
sont ces murs? 8. lis ont deux pieds d' epaisseur. 9. Quelle 
sorte de table vous faut-il? 10. II me faut une table de chene, 
de six pieds de longueur et de trois de largeur. 1.1. Quelle est 
la grandeur de la basse-cour de votre ferme? 12. Elle a quatre- 
vingts pieds sur soixante-douze. 13. Est-elle enfermee d'une 
haie? 14. Elle est entouree d'une muraille de dix pieds de hau- 
teur et de dix-huit polices d'epaisseur. 15. De quelle grosseur 



* La plupart is followed by the preposition de and the article : Most men, la plu- 
part des liommes. The verb agrees with the noun that conies, or is understood, after 
la phvpart. 



SOIXAXTIEME LECW. 233 

est l'espece de fruit dont vous parlez? 16. Cette espeee de fruit 
est de la grosseur d'une orange. 17. Yotre frere est-il de votre 
taille? 18. II est plus grand que rnoi de deux pouces. 19. 
Quelle est la taille de votre cousin? 20. II a un pouce de plus 
que moi. 21. Pourquoi prenez-vous la clef de la cave au vin? 
22. Je vais y porter ces bouteilles a vin, et j'en rapporterai une 
bouteille de vin. 23. Votre frere a-t-il fait batir deux moulins- 
a-vapeur ? 24. H a fait batir un moulin-a-vapeur et un moulin- 
a-eau. 25. A-t-on moulu tout le grain que vous avez envoy e 
au ruoulin? 26. On en a moulu une partie, et Ton moudra le 
reste demain. 27. Cette petite fille coud-elle bien? 28. Elle 
coud tres-bien ; elle a cousu ceci. 29. La plupart des hommes 
ne se laissent-ils pas vainer e par leurs passions ? 30. La plupart 
s'en laissent vaincre, et n'ont point de plus grands ennemis. 31. 
Le courrier est-il venu ce matin? 32. Oui, M. ; il a laisse ce 
paquet de lettres pour vous. 33. Lui avez-vous paye le port 
(postage). 34. Je lui ai donne par erreur vingt-cinq sous de 
trop. 35. Avez-vous tire le cordon de la sonnette ? 36. J'ai 
sonne deux fois, mais personne ne vient. 37. Pouvez-vous me 
dire ou est la poste aux ehevaux? 38. Voila, M. ; la grande 
maison aux fenetres vertes, ou il y a une voiture a quatre roues 
devant la porte. 39. La poste aux lettres est-elle loin d'ici? 40. 
Non, M. ; e'est la maison a cote ; vous voyez la boite aux lettres 
d'ici. 41. Vous avez l'air fatigue ; pourquoi n' avez-vous pas pris 
quelques moments de repos ? 42. J'ai essay e de dormir, mais le 
son des cloches m'en a empeche. 



Theme 60. 

1. How long is that wall? 2. What is the depth of your 
well? 3. What is the size of your room? 4. It is eighteen 
feet by sixteen. 5. I want a table four feet long and three feet 
wide. 6. My uncle's park is half a mile long, and is inclosed by 
a hedge eight feet high. 7. Those farm-yards are surrounded 
by walls nine feet high and eighteen inches thick. 8. There are 
in France eighty -six chief places of departments. 9. Most of the 
master-pieces that are (quHl y a) in the gallery of the Louvre, 



234 S0IXANTE ET UNI.EME LECON. 

are of ancient masters. 10. What is your size? 11. I am five 
feet eleven inches. 12. I am taller than my brother, by two 
inches. 13. My cousin is an inch taller than I am. 14. I gave 
you a dollar too much, I believe ? 15. I beg your pardon (Par- 
donnez-moi), you gave me just what is right (le compte tout 
juste). 16. Take that wine-bottle to the wine-cellar, and bring 
a bottle of wine. 17. There are no wind-mills in this district 
(cette contree); most of them are water-mills. 18. They have 
built lately a few steam-mills. 19. They will grind the rest of 
your grain to-morrow. 20. They ground a part of it last week. 
21. They are building a steeple, in that village, one hundred and 
twenty feet high. 22. Can those little girls sew ? 23. They sew 
every day ; little Mary has sewn this handkerchief. 24. Most 
men are overcome (se laisser vainer e) by their passions ; they are 
the enemies of our happiness. 25. We have all kinds (toutes 
sortes) of fruit at our farm. 26. That kind of pear is of the size 
of an egg. 27. Who is the man with the white hat ? 28. He 
is the courier ; he has been for [prendre) the mail (le paquet) to 
the post-office. 29. He is going to start in that two- wheeled 
vehicle. 30. Tell the lady of the house that the bell-rope in my 
room is broken. 31. I do not like to live next to the church; 
the ringing of the bells wakes me up too early. 32. T do not 
like to be (189) among (chez) these people; their style of living 
(vie) does not suit me. 



61. SOIXANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. 

Preterit Tenses. 

229. The preterit or past definite has the following termi- 
nations : 

In the first conjugation, ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, erent. 

In the second and fourth, is, is, it, hues, ites, irent. 

In the third, us, us, ut, times, utes, urent. 

To form the preterit of a regular verb, remove the final vowel 
of its past participle, and add the preterit terminations. 



SOIXAXTE ET UXIEME LECOX. 235 

Preterit of the Four Conjugations. 

Je parlai, I spoke, tuparlas, Uparla, nous parldmes, vous parldtes, ilsparlirent 
Je finis, I finished, tu finis, ilfinit, nousfinimes, vous finites, Usfinirent. 
Je regus, I received, tu regus, il regut, nous resumes, vous refutes, ils regurent. 
Je vendis, I sold, tu vendis, ilvendit, nous vendimes, vous vendues, ils vendirent. 

Preterit of Avoir and Etre. 

J^eus, I had, tu eus, il eut, nous eumes, vous eutes, Us eurent. 

Je /us, I was, tu fus, il fut, nous fumes, vous fates, ils Jurent 

Preterit of the verbs in enir, such as Venir. 
Je vins, I came, tu vins, il vint, nous Winnies, vous vintes, ils vinrent. 



Use of the Preterit. 



230t The 'preterit is used to express what occurred in a time 
entirely past, and of which the present day forms no part. In 
this case, the perfect or preterit, either may be used ; as, 

I spoke to him yesterday, last | Je lui parlai U iel . } le moig pags ^ 

month. ( Je lui ai parle ) 

I received the letter the day before j Je recus ) la lettre la veille de mon 

I started. \ J'ai recu ) depart. 

Rem. 1. — When the time referred to has not entirely elapsed, 
or does not necessarily exclude the present day, the preterit can- 
not be used. 

I received your letter this week, J'ai recu votre lettre cette semaine, 
this year. cette annee. 

Rem. 2. — In conversation, the perfect is commonly used, when 
the preterit would be equally correct ; but when we assume the 
narrative style, in speaking or writing, we should use the preterit.* 

* There is this difference between the two tenses, that the preterit has reference to 
the action, and the perfect, to the result of the action ; the one represents it as an action 
the other as an accomplished fact. Hence the preterit is used in historical writing, be- 
cause it represents events as going on before the mind. Therefore, also, the preterit 
tenses are used after the conjunctive adverbs, aussitot que, &c. (231), because after 
<hese, the verb always expresses action. For the same reason, the preterit of etre can- 
lot be used for the preterit of alter ; not, je fus trouver mon ami, for, fallai trouver 
non ami. 



236 



SOIXANTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 



Preterit Anterior. 

231. This is the compound tense, corresponding with the 
preterit. 

I had spoken, thou hadst spoken. J'ens parle, tu ens parle, <fcc. 
I had come, thou hadst come, &c. Je fus venu, tu fus venu, <fec. 

The preterit anterior denotes that the action took place imme- 
diately before another action; the latter being expressed by a 
verb in the preterit. It is used after the conjunctive adverbs, 
aussitdt que, des que, apres que, lorsque, quand, a peine ; as, 

As soon as I had arrived, I went to Aussitot que je fus arrive, j'allai 

my friend. trouver mon ami. 

As soon as I had received your let- Des que j'eus recu votre lettre, je 

ter, I started. partis. 

"When we had dined, he came. Quand nous eumes dine, il vint. 

When the conjunctive adverb precedes the later action, the 
verb, expressing the earlier action, is in the pluperfect ; as, 

We had dined when he came. Nous avions dine quand il vint. 



VoCABULAIRE 61. 



The fight. 
The succor. 
The amount. 



To see again. 



Le combat. 
Le secours. 
Le montant. 



The battle. 
The assistance. 
The sum. 



Kevoir, irr. 



To retain. 
To keep back. 
To secure. 



To take back. 

To resume. 

To cry.* Crier. 

To assist. Assister. 

To run to ; to hasten. Accourir, irr. 

To defeat. Defaire, irr. 

To lay waste. Ravager. 

At last. A la fin. 

Indeed. En effet. 



La bataille. 
L'assistance. 
La somme. 



Retenir, irr. 



t Reprendre, irr. To withdraw. Se retirer. 



To exclaim. 

To help. 

To succor. 

To conquer. 

To destroy. 

Completely. 

Timely, seasonably. 



S'e crier. 
Aider (a). 
Secourir, irr. 
Conquerir, irr. 
Detruire, irr. 
Completement. 
A propos. 



* To cry for help, crier au secours. 



S0IXANTE ET UEIEME LE£ON. 237 

EXERCICE 61. 

1. Qui chanta ce morceau jeudi? 2. Mme. S , et elle le 

chanta a ravir. 3. A quoi passates-vous la soiree? 4. Nous la 
passames a chauter et a danser. 5. Mon beau-frere y viut-il ? 
6. II y vint apres que nous eumes soupe. 7. Finites-vous de 
souper avant dix heures ? 8. Nous nous levames de table quand 
il sonna dix heures. 9. Vous en allates-vous de bonne heure ? 
10. Nous nous en allames a onze heures. 11. Votre associe re- 
cut-il la lettre avant son depart? 12. II la recut lundi. 13. Y 
repondit-il le meme jour? 14. II y repondit des qu'il l'eut re- 
cue. 15. Ces pay sans vendirent-ils leur foin la semaine passee? 
16. lis en vendirent la plus grande partie. 17. Quand reverrez- 
vous votre fermier? 18. Je le reverrai samedi, quand il viendra 
avec le reste de son grain. 19. Voudra-t-il reprendre l'avoine 
que j'ai de trop ? 20. Je crois qu'il la reprendra avec plaisir. 
21. Avez-vous repris l'etude de l'allemand? 22. Je la repren- 
drai au mois de septembre. 23. L'epicier a-t-il retenu ce que je 
lui devais ? 24. II a retenu le montant que vous lui deviez, et 
voici le reste de votre argent. 25. Avez-vous ete retenir nos 
places au bureau de la diligence ? 26. J'ai retenu trois places ; 
en voici les billets. 27. Mon oncle vous a-t-il fourni la somme 
qu'il vous faut ? 28. II m'a donne un bon (check) sur la banque. 
29. Ou Hannibal fut-il defait? 30. II fut defait, pour la pre- 
miere fois, a Zama. 31. Par qui la Gaule fut-elle conquise? 
32. Elle fut conquise par Jules Cesar. 33. Ou Pompee se reti- 
ra-t-il apres la bataille de Pharsale ? 34. Apres avoir ete vaincu 
a Pharsale, il se retira en figypte. 35. Que lui arriva-t-il dans 
ce pays? 36. A peine y fut-il arrive qu'il fat tue. 37. Ne 
faut-il pas assister ses amis de ses conseils et de sa bourse? 38. 
Certainement ; il faut s'aider les uns les autres dans ce monde. 
39. Get homme a-t-il crie au secours? 40. II a crie au secours, 
et j'ai accouru* pour lui orlrir mon assistance. 41. Qu'a-t-il dit 
quand vous etiez accouru ?* 42. II s'est eerie : " On veut me 
voler; voila les voleurs qui s'enfuient." 43. Etait-ce vrai? 44. 

* Accourir takes sometimes avoir, and sometimes Ure, in the compound tenses. 



238 SOIXANTE ET UNIEME LEC.ON. 

En effet, je crois qu'on Paurait vole, si je ne m'etais pas trouve 
la a propos pour le secourir. 



Theme 61. 

1. Last night, Mrs. S. . . . sang to admiration. 2. When she 
had sung, all the assembly applauded (toute Vassemblee applau- 
dif). 3. They threw bouquets at her from all sides (de tous cd- 
tes). 4. Yesterday, those pupils finished their tasks early, and 
went to the concert. 5. Last week, we received a letter from 
my aunt, who is in Paris. 6. Last Monday, we went fishing as 
soon as we had breakfasted. 7. Scarcely had we arrived at the 
spot, where we intended to stop, when it began to rain. 8. We 
were obliged to return. 9. As soon as we got home, we changed 
our clothes; we were quite wet. 10. When shall I see you 
again? 11. We shall see one another (nous) when spring comes 
(au retour du). 12. Has the grocer changed the bill? 13. He 
changed it, and retained the amount you owed him. 14. He 
was not willing to take back the sugar. 15. My uncle gave me 
a check (un bon) on the bank for the sum which I shall want for 
my journey. 16. And now I am going to secure (retenir) my seat 
at the railroad office. 17. Let us resume our history lesson. 18. 
The Gauls (Les Gaulois) were defeated, and their cities were de- 
stroyed by the Romans (les Romains). 19. They were, at last 
(a la fin), completely conquered, and became subjects of the re- 
public. 20. Hannibal was vanquished by Scipio (Scipion) at 
the battle of Zama. 21. He afterwards withdrew to (chez) An- 
tiochus, king of Syria (de Syrie). 22. We should not have 
been overcome, if we had received the succor which we expected. 
23. Those who were to succor us in the danger, did not hasten 
to our assistance, when we were in need of them. 24. When our 
general saw that all was lost, he exclaimed : " Sauve qui peut." 

25. Let us assist the poor, every one according to his means. 

26. Let us help one another to carry our burdens. 27. And 
when some unfortunate wayfarer (malheureux passant) cries for 
help, let us hasten (se hater de) and offer him our assistance. 



SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 



239 



62. SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME LEQON. 
Preterit — c ontinued. 



232. (a.) 


All irregular verbs having the 


past participle in i, is, 


it, nt, rt, take the preterit terminations is, 


is, it, &c. 




To feel, 


felt, I felt, &q. 


Sentir, 


senti, 


je sentis, &c. 


To laugh, 


laughed, I laughed. 


Eire, 


ri, 


je ris. 


To put, 


put, I put. 


Mettre, 


mis, 


je mis. 


To take, 


taken, I took. 


Prendre, 


pris, 


je pris. 


To say, 


said, I said. 


Dire, 


dit, 


je dis. 


To make, 


made, I made. 


Faire, 


fait, 


jefis. 


To write, 


written, I wrote. 


ficrire, 


ecrit, 


Jtcrivis. 


To conduct, 


conduc'd, I conduc'd. 


Conduire, 


conduit, 


je conduisis. 


To fear, 


feared, I feared. 


Craindre, 


craint, 


je craignis. 


To extinguish, exting'd, I exting'd. 


Eteindre, 


eteint, 


feteignis. 


To open, 


opened, I opened. 


Ouvrir, 


ouvert, 


fouvris. 


(6.) Also the following : 








To see, 


seen, I saw, &c 


Voir, 


vu, 


je vis, &c. 


To clothe, 


clad, I clad. 


Vetir, 


vetu, 


je vetis. 


To sew, 


sewed, I sewed. 


Coudre, 


cousu, 


je cousis. 


To be born, 


born, I was born. 


Naitre, 


ne, 


je naquis. 


To vanquish, 


vanqui'd, I vanqui'd. 


Vaincre, 


vaincu, 


je vainquis, 


(c.) All < 


Dther irregular verbs have the 


past participle in u, 


and the preterit in us, us, ut, &c. 






To drink, 


drank, I drank. 


Boire, 


bu, 


je bus, &o, 


To believe, 


believed, I believed. 


Croire, 


cru, 


je cms. 


To read, 


read, I read. 


Lire, 


In, 


je lus. 


To please, 


pleased, I pleased. 


Plaire, 


phi, 


je plus. 


(d .) Mourir, to die, p. p. rnort, has also 


the preterit, je mou- 


rus, &c. 











233* To propose, to intend. 
I propose paying him a visit. 

To pay some one a visit. 

To play a game at cards. 

To frighten some one. 

To hurt one's feelings. 

To impart to, to communicate to. 



Se proposer. 

Je me propose de lui faire une visite 
j Faire une visite d qqn. 
\ Rendre visite a qqn. 

Faire une parti e de cartes. 

Faire peur a qqn. 

Faire de la peine a qqn. 

Faire part de qq. ch. a qqn. 



240 



50IXAXTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 



234 • To make up one's mind. 
I have made up my mind. 
To take any one's part. 
I have taken his part. 
To take the trouble. 
To catch cold. 

To take one's leave, to bid farewell. 
To take an interest in. 
To participate in. 

I am interested in knowing the end. 
To take in good part. 
To take amiss. 
From any one, in any one's name. 

Remember me to her. 
To remain silent. 

TO BE SILENT. 

I am silent. We are silent. 



Prendre un parti. 

J'ai pris mon parti. 

Prendre le parti de qqn, 

J'ai pris son parti. 

Prendre (se donner) la peine (de). 

Prendre froid, (s'enrhumer.) 

Prendre conge (de). 

S'interesser (a). 

Prendre part (a). 

Je m'interesse a savoir la fin. 

Prendre en bonne part. 

Prendre en mauvaise part. 

De la part de qqn. 
( Dites-lui bien des choses de ma part. 
\ Saluez-la de ma part. 

Garder le silence. 

Se taire, irr. p. p. tu. 

Je me tais. Nous nous taisons. 



VOCABULAIRE 62. 



An ally. 
The party. 
The side. 
The resolution. 
The leave. 
Silence. 

The inhabitant. 
The movement. 
The motioa 
The contents. 

To propose. 
To move. 
To invite. 
To frighten. 
To get frightened. 
To take an inter- ) 
est in, j 

To take a part in. 
To have a cold. 

For fear of. 



Un allie. 

• Le parti 

Le conge. 
Le silence. 
L'habitant. 

- Le mouvement. 
Le contenu. 



i Proposer (de). 

Inviter (a). 

Effrayer. 

S'effrayer. 

S'interesser (a). 

Prendre part a. 
Etre enrhume. 
De crainte de. 
De peur de. 



Troops. 
The party. 
The match. 
The part. 
The visit. 
Safety. 
The dwelling. 

The situation. 
The remark. 



To propose. 
To intend. ! 

To be silent. 
To pursue. 
To be reassured. 
To begin ; to in- 
volve one's self. ! 
To impart. 
To catch a cold. 
From. 
At the sight of. 



Des troupes. 

h La partie. 

La visite. 
La surete. 
L'habitation. 

La situation. 
La remarque. 

[■ Se proposer. 

Se taire, irr. 
Poursuivre, irr. 
Se rassurer. 

- S'engager. 

Faire part (de). 
S'enrhumer. 
De la part de. 
A la vue de. 



SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME LECON. 241 



Exercice 62. 



I. Que vous proposes- vous de faire ce soir? 2. Nous nous 
proposons de faire une visile a notre voisin, et je vous invite a 
nous accornpagner. 3. Que vous proposa votre cousin quand il 
vint vous rendre visite Fautre jour I 4. II me proposa de faire 
une partie de cartes, 5. Le fites-vous? 6. Xon, M.; je lui dis 
que je hais le jeu. 7. Le prit-il en bonne part! 8. Je ne sais 
pas ; il garda le silence et s'en alia. 9. N'avez-vous pas dit a 
son pere qu'il perdit 1 'autre jour une sornrne d' argent ? 10. Non, 
M. ; cela aurait fait de la peine a mon oncle ; mais je dis hier, 
en presence de mon cousin, que le jeu conduit a toutes sortes de 
vices, et qu'un jeu de cartes devrait faire peur a rm jeune homme. 
11. Comprit-il votre remarque? 12. II sentit qu'elle lui etait 
adressee. 13. "Ne fit-il aucune reponse ? 14. II se tut et prit le 
parti de s'en aller. 15. Sortites-vous hier au soir? 16. Non, 
M. ; j'etais enrhume. 17. Ou vous etes-veus enrhume f 18. Je 
pris froid a l'eglise dimanche dernier. 19. A quoi passates-vous 
la soiree ? 20. Nous lumes une comodie de Moliere, ma sceur 
et moi. 21. Ou Moliere naquit-il? 22. II naquit, et il mourut 
a Paris. 23. Que fit notre general quand il apercut l'ennemi? 
24. II prit le parti de se retirer vers la ville. 25. Conduisit-il 
ses troupes sous les murs de la ville % 26. II les y conduisit, 
pour la surete des habitants. 27. Que firent alors les ennemis ? 
28. lis se mirent a ravager la campagne, et detruisirent les ha- 
bitations. 29. Que devinrent les habitants? 30. lis se retire- 
rent dans la ville, de crainte d^etre tues. 31. Les ennemis ne les 
poursuivirent-ils pas? 32. D^abord ils youlurent les pomsuivre, 
mais ils s^arreterent bientet, quand ils virent notre armee se 
mettre en mouvement. 33. Les troupes de nos allies ne vinrent- 
ils pas a notre secours ? 34. El les se tinrent sur les hauteurs, et 
ne prirent aucune part aux mouvements. 35. Les habitants de 
la ville furent-ils effrayes? 36. Ils s'effrayerent d'abord, mais ils 
se rassurerent a la vue de notre armee. 37. Que fites-vous 
quand vous eutes appris tout cela? 38. J'eus bientot pris mon 
parti ; aussitot que j'eus arrange mes affaires, je pris conge de 
mes amis et je partis, 39. N'ecrivites-vous point a votre pere! 

11 



242 SOIXANTE-DEUXIEME LEG OF. 

40. Avant de partir, je lui ecrivis une lettre, dans laquelle je lui 
fis part de la situation des affaires et du parti que je venais de 
prendre. 



Theme 62. 

I. Colonel B.. . . called on us last week, and invited us to 
join (a aller a) a hunting party. 2. We propose going, if the 
weather is favorable. 3. I propose to you to pay a visit to our 
aunt ; it is long since we have been there. 4. You recollect our 
last visit ? When speaking (En pari ant) of Charles, you made 
some remarks that hurt her feelings. 5. I remember ; I per- 
ceived that she took them amiss, and I remained silent. 6. Did 
Charles come to take leave of you last night? 7. He came, 
with all his dogs, and frightened the children. 8. Did your sis- 
ter go out last night ? 9. She did not, for fear of catching a 
cold. 10. Have you a cold? 11. I caught a cold last Monday 7 
at the concert. 12. I have something to tell to your mother 
from our cousin Henry. 13. Here is the letter I received from 
him. 14. Take the trouble to read it for me, if you please. 15. 
Listen then : " I wish to communicate to you the events which 
took place here a few days ago. 16. You were apprised of our 
situation by the letter I wrote to you a month ago. 17. Last 
Wednesday, there was a great movement among the enemy's 
troops {troupes ennemies). 1 8. They withdrew from the heights. 
19. When our general perceived it, he made up his mind to 
pursue them. 20. The enemy,* in their flight, laid waste the 
country, and destroyed a great number of dwellings. 21. The 
inhabitants, frightened at the sight of the soldiers, fled to the 
woods, for fear of being killed. 22. When they saw that our 
army pursued the enemy, they were soon reassured, and retook 
the road to (de) their dwellings. 23. At noon, our army was 
(se trouver) in presence of the enemy, and the fight soon began 
(s 1 'engager). 24. It lasted for some time, when our allies ran up T 
and took a part in it. 25. The enemy* were soon completely 

* A collective noun, in the singular, governs the verb and all words depending on it, 
in the singular; thus, in French, not "in tlieir flight? but, u in his flight? &c 



SOIXANTE-TROISIEME LEgON. 



243 



routed (defaire)." 26. What do you say to (de) this? 27. 
Read, if you please ; I am greatly interested in knowing the rest. 
28. Then he goes on (Puis il continue): "Please, impart the 
contents of this letter to my aunt and cousins. 29. Tell them 
that my mother and sister are in a place of safety. 30. Remem- 
ber me to all my friends." 31. Why are you silent? 32. This 
is the end of the story. 



63. SOIXANTE-TROISIEj\IE LEQON 
235. 

To turn upon, to be the question. 
What is the matter ? 
It concerns your interest. 
The question is to know. . . . 
To be of consequence, to matter. 
Of what consequence is it to you 
to know that ? 



"What matters it to me ? 

"What matters it ? 

Fo matter; never mind. \ 

It does not signify. \ 

!N"o matter where, how, what. 

To care about, to matter. 

I do not care much about going 

there. 
I do not care about it. 
To delay, to tarry. 
He is very long coming. 
To long. 

He longs to see you. 
To have left. 
How much money has your brother 

left? 
He has three dollars left. 
To be sufficient. 
Is that enough to buy . . . . ? 
It will do ; it will answer. 
It is sufficient to know. 
It is sufficient for him to live upon. 



S'agir, (impers.) 

De quoi s'agit-il ? 

II s'agit de vos interets. 

II s'agit de savoir. . . . 

Importer. 

Que vous importe-t-il de savoir ce- 

la? 

Que m'importe ? 
Qu'importe ? 

N'importe. 

K'importe ou, comment, quoi. 

Se soucier. 

Je ne me soucie pas d'y aller. 

Je ne m'en soucie pas. 

Tarder (a). 

II tarde bien a venir. 

Tarder {de\ (impers.) 

II lui tarde de vous voir. 

Rester, (impers.) 

Combien d'argent reste-t-il a votre 

frere ? 
II lui reste trois dollars. 
Suffire, p.p. suffi. 
Cela suffit-il pour acheter . . . . ? 
Cela suffit. 

II suffit de savoir, {impers.) 
Cela lui suffit pour vivre. 



244 



SOIXANTE-TROISIEME LE£0IS\ 



236 • To make uneasy. 

To make one's self uneasy. 

That news makes me uneasy. 

What are you uneasy about ? 

I am uneasy at not receiving any 
news. 

To accustom. 

To accustom one's self. 

Children must be accustomed to 
labor. 

He has accustomed himself to it. 

I am accustomed to it. 

To experience ; to meet with. 

To endure ; to stand. 

He has experienced many misfor- 
tunes. 

I was obliged to bear his ill-humor. 



Inquieter. 

$ inquieter (de). 

Cette nouvelle m'inquiete. 

De quoi vous inquietez-vous ? 

Je suis inquiet de ne pas recevoir 

de nouvelles. 
Accoutumer (a). 
S' accoutumer («). 
II faut accoutumer les enfants au 

travail. 
II s'est accoutume a cela. 
J'y suis accoutume. 
Eprouver. 
Essuyer. 
II a eprouve bien des revers. 

Je fus oblige d'essuyer sa mauvaise 
humeur. 



237 1 It is not my fault, I can- 
not help it. 
Whose fault is it ? 
You are to blame for it. 
It makes no difference. 
As to, as for. 

As to me. As to that. 

Nor 1 either. Nor he either. 
Have you any cause of complaint ? 

There is no cause for uneasiness. 
Compose yourself. 



Ce n'est pas ma faute. 

A qui est la faute ? 

La faute en est a vous. 

C'est egal. 

Quant a. 

Quant a moi. Quant a cela. 

Ni moi non plus. Ni lui non plus. 

Avez-vous quelque sujet de tris- 

tesse ? 
II n'y a pas lieu de vous inquieter. 
Tranquillisez-vous. 



VOCABULAIRE 63. 



The feeling. 
Grief; sorrow, 
A reverse. 
A misfortune. 
The defect. 
The fault. 
Interest. 



Le sentiment. 
Le chagrin. 

- Un revers. 

h Le defaut. 
L'interet. 



Pain; grief. 

Sadness. 

An error. 

The fault. 
The mistake. 
Prudence. 



La douleur. 
La tristesse. 

Une erreur. 

- La faute. 
La prudence. 



SOIXANTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 245 

To act. Agir. To turn upon. S'agir. 

To matter. ) T * To care about. ) « 

J. Importer. ^ Y Se soucier. 

To concern. ) To matter. ) 

To delay, to tarry. Tarder (a). To long. Tarder (de). 

To have left. Hester. To be sufficient, Suffire, irr. 

To make uneasy. Inquieter. To grow uneasy. S'inquieter (de). 

To accustom. Accoutumer (a). ° ? come ran ' J. Se tranquilliser. 

T ^ ., tfiprouver. To stand ; to bear. Essuyer. 

Reasonable. Raisonnable. Uneasy. Inquiet, ete. 

As to, as for. Quant a. Not only. Non seulement. 



Exercice 63. 



1. Cet homnie agit-il bien envers tout le monde? 2. H agit 
bien quand il s'agit de ses interets. 3. Yous importe-t-il de sa- 
voir cela ? 4. Je ru'interesse a le savoir, parce qu'il est de mon 
pays. 5. Nous iniporte-t-il de savoir ce que ces hommes font ? 
6. Nous ne nous soucions pas de le savoir. 7. De quoi s'agit-il ? 
8. II s'agit de savoir ee que nous ferons. 9. Je vous propose de 
faire une visite a M.S.... 10. Je ne me soucie pas d'aller 
chez lui; il m'a fait mauvaise mine l'autre jour. 11. Qu'impor- 
te; allons-y malgre cela? 12. Vous pouvez y aller, mais quant 
a moi, je n'ai pas envie d'essuyer sa mauvaise humeur. 13. II 
faut etre raisonnable ; ce jour-la il avait eprouve un revers. 14. 
C'est egal. Quand on a un sujet de tristesse, il ne faut pas pour 
cela faire souffrir ses amis. 15. Vous savez qu'on n'est pas tou- 
jours mattre de ses sentiments. 16. Voila ce que j'eprouve moi- 
meme en ce moment. 17. S'il le savait, il en aurait du chagrin. 
18. N'importe; ce ne serait pas ma faute. 19. Chacun a ses 
defauts, et nous avons les notres. 20. Mais nul ne veut souffrir 
les defauts des autres. 21. Votre frere tarde bien a venir; 
qu'est-ce qui peut l'arreter ? 22. Je ne sais pas pourquoi il tarde 
tant. 23. Tarde-t-il a ces jeunes gens de sortir? 24. II leur 
tarde de retourner chez eux. 25. Combien d'argent vous reste- 
t-il ? 26. II me restera dix dollars quand j'aurai paye mon cha- 
peau. 27. Cette somme vous suffira-t-elle pour acheter ce qu'il 
faut? 28. Elle ne me sufhra pas. 29. Etes-vous inquiet sur le 
sort de votre ami ? 30. Je m'inquiete de ne pas recevoir de ses 



246 SOIXANTE-TROISIEME LECOT. 

nouvelles. 31. Cela ne doit pas vous in quieter ; il faut esperer 
qu'il arrivera en surete. 32. Je l'espere, mais je ne puis me 
tranquilliser. 33. Accoutumez-vous vos eleves a se tenir droits'? 
34. Certainenient : si quelqu'un a la rnauvaise habitude de ne pas 
se tenir droit, je ne manque pas d'y faire attention. 35. Etes- 
vous accoutume a parler en public ? 36. Je n'ai jamais pu m'y 
accoutumer ; ni mon frere non plus. 



Theme 63. 

1. He who does not act with prudence when his interest is 
concerned, is not reasonable. 2. If I have not succeeded, what 
is that to you? (215.) 3. I take an interest in all you do. 4. 
I rejoice at your success, and participate in your misfortunes. 5. 
It therefore (done) concerns me to see you succeed. 6. What 
is the matter ? 7. The question is to know what we shall do 
to-night. 8. As to that, I have no preference. 9. Nor I either. 

10. Let us do something to amuse ourselves, no matter what. 

11. Let us go to the theatre. 12. As for me, I do not care 
much about going there. 13. Is it of any consequence to your 
father to see that man? 14. He does not care much about see- 
ing him. 15. I wonder why your brother is so long (tant) com- 
ing. 16. My father longs to start ; it is of great consequence to 
him to arrive in town early. 17. I long to see my brother com- 
ing. 18. Are you uneasy about any thing? 19. I am uneasy 
at not seeing him come. 20. Compose yourself; there is no 
cause for uneasiness. 21. How much has your friend left after 
paying his debts? 22. He has enough left to live upon. 23. 
How much money will your sister have left, when she has made 
her purchases? 24. She will not have any left; the money she 
has is scarcely sufficient to buy all she wants. 25. Will that 
wood be sufficient for you till to-morrow? 26. It will do for me 
until you return. 27. What is the matter with you; you look 
so melancholy (melancolique) i 28. It is not my fault; I expe- 
rience a feeling of sadness which I cannot conquer. 29. Have 
you any cause of complaint? 30. You know that I am obliged 
to bear the ill humor of my governess (institutrice). 31. I am 



SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. 



247 



not accustomed to be scolded, and she scolds me for (gronder de) 
the least mistake (faute) I make in my exercise. 32. Not only 
that, but she never looks pleased. 33. She is wrong; but you 
must be reasonable ; people must accustom themselves to bear 
(supporter) one another's faults {les defauts les uns des autres). 



64. SOIXAJSTTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. 

Subjunctive Mood, 

238 # The subjunctive has four tenses : the present, perfect, im- 
perfect and plupei feet. 

The present has the following terminations : e, es, e, ions, iez, 
ent. 

(a.) In the third person plural of the subjunctive present, the 
form of the verb is the same as in the third person plural of the 
indicative present. The three persons of the singular are ob- 
tained by changing the ending ent, of the third person plural, 
into e, es, e. The first and second persons plural are the same as 
the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indic- 
ative. 



Subjunctive Present of parler, venir, recevoir, ecrire. 



It is necessary that I speak, come, receive, write — Ilfaut que 
Jeparle, tu paries, ilparle, nous parlions, vous parlies, 
Je vienne, tu viennes, il vienne, nous venions, vous veniez, 
Je reQoive, tu regoives, il regoive, nous reeevions, vous receviez, 
J'ecrive, tu ecrives, il ecrive, nous ecrivions, vous ecrwiez, 



Us parlent. 
Us viennent. 
Us regoivenU 
Us ecrivent. 



(b.) The following nine verbs, alter, avoir, etre, faire, pouvoi 



savoir, valoir, vouloir and falloir, are exceptions, 
nate, in the subjunctive present, as follows : 



They termi- 



tTaille, 

J\iie, 
Je sots, 
Je fas se, 
Je puisse, 
Je sache, 
Je vaille, 
Je i 



tu ailles, 
tu aies, 
tu sois, 
tuf asses, 
tupuisses, 
tu saclies, 
tu vailles, 
tu veuilles, 



il ailU, 
il ait, 
il soit, 
Ufas8e, 
il puisse, 
il sache, 
il vaille, 
il veuille, 
Ilfaille. 



nous allions, 
nous ayons, 
nous soyons, 
nous fashions, 
nous puissioiis, 
nous sachions, 
nous valions, 
nous voulions, 



vous allies, 
vous ayez, 
vous soyez, 
vousfassiez, 
vous 2>uissiez, 
vous sachiez, 
vous valiez, 
vous \ 



Us aillent. 

aient. 
Us soient. 



Us puissent. 
Us sachent. 
Us vaillent. 
veuillent. 



248 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LECOX. 

239. Subjunctive Perfect 

That I may have spoken, &c. Que j'aie parle, &e. 

That I may have come, &c. Que je sois venu, &c. 

That I may have rejoiced, <fca Que je me sois rejoui, &c» 



Use of the Subjunctive. 

240# The subjunctive always depends on a preceding verb or 
phrase, with which it is connected by means of the conjunc- 
tion que j or a relative pronoun. It is used : 1st, After verbs and 
phrases that express pleasure, pain, wonder, surprise ; as, 

I rejoice that you did it. Je me rejouis que vous Tayez fait. 

I am glad (sorry) that you; are here. Je suis bien aise (fache)* que vous 

soyez ici. 

I wonder ) Je m'e tonne ) , 

T . -, f that he did not T f qu 11 nait pas re- 

I am surprised V " Je suis surpris > H • F 

It is astonishing ji succee . -q es t etonnant ; 

2d. After all verbs and phrases, after which the action ex- 
pressed by the dependent verb may be considered uncertain ; as,. 

(a.) Verbs expressing will, desire, command, consent, doubt r 
fear, &c. 

(b.) Impersonal verbs, and verbs used impersonally.f 

(c.) Interrogative and negative sentences. 

What do you wish me to do ? J Que voulez-vous que je fasse ? 

I require you to do your duty. J'exige que vous fassiez votre de- 

voir. 
Do you like me to tell him of it ? Aimez-vous que je le lui dise ? 

* Instead of saying .- Je suis fdche que ^ous ayez fait cela, we may say: Je suis 
fdche de ce que vous avez fait cela; but the construction with the subjunctive is 
preferable. 

t With some exceptions, see 253. 

X When two verbs come together, both having the same subject, the second verb is 
put in the infinitive (91); as, I rejoice that I did it, Je me rejouis de V avoir faiL 
But when each verb has a different subject, the dependent sentence is introduced by 
the conjunction que, with the verb in the subjunctive, if the preceding verb governs 
the subjunctive. This it generally does, when in English the objective case precedes 
the infinitive or present participle; as, Do you wish me to do that? We doubt your 
'being able to do it. Voulez-vous que je fasse cela ? N~ous doutons que vous puissiea 
lefaire. Certain verbs admit of two different constructions ; they either are followed 
by que and the subjunctive, or govern the second verb, as their direct, and the second 
subject, as their indirect, object; as, I order you to do that, J'ordonne que vous fas- 
siez cela, or Je vous ordonne de faire cela, Tke construction with the subj,un.ctiva 
is more emphatic. 



SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 



249 



I would rather that he should J'aime mieux qu'il le sache, 

know it. 
He deserves to be punished. 
I doubt whether he will come. 
I fear that he may not come. 
It is important that I should see him. 
It is sufficient that you say so. 
I must go there. 
It is better for us to go. 
It is time that we start. 
Do you believe that he will come ? 
I do not believe that he has come. 



II merite qu'on le punisse. 

Je doute qu'il vienne. 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. 

II importe que je le voie. 

H suffit que vous le disiez. 

II faut que j'y aille. 

II vaut mieux que nous y allions, 

II est temps que nous partions. 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? 

Je ne crois pas qu'il soit venu. 



Rem. — Verbs expressing fear or apprehension, require ne be- 
fore the verb in the subjunctive, when they are used affirma- 
tively ; as, 
I fear lest he come. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 

But : Craignez-vous quHl vienne. Je ne crains pas qvJil vienne, 



jK£P See Remarks on the Subjunctive. (245.) 



Respect, deference. L'egard. 
The effect. L'effet. 

Things, personal ) Le9 effets. 

property. ) 

Detriment. t Le domma g e . 

Damage. ) 

The remedy. Le remede. 



Vocabulaire 64. 

The consideration. La consideration, 
The energy. L'energie. 

Property. La propriete. 



To require. 
To exact. 
To regret. 
It is a pity. 

It is fit, proper, 
becoming. 



[• Exiger. 



Regretter. 

C'est dommage. 
r II est a propos. 

II convient. 

II est convena- 
> ble. 



It is to be desired. II est a desirer. 



Sickness, disease. La maladie. 
The medicine. La medecine. 



To order. 

To delay. 

It is grievous. 

It matters. 
It is important. 

It is indispensa- 
ble. 



Ordonner. 

Retarder. 

II est facheux. 

II importe. 

II est important. 



\ n 



est indispen- 
sable. 



11* 



250 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LECON. 



Astonishing. 


Etonnant. 


Surprised. 


Surpris. 


Indolent. 


Indolent. 


Careless. 


Negligent 


Attentive. 


Attentif. 


Assiduous. 


Assidu. 


At once. 


A la fois. 


Thoroughly. 


A fond. 


Even. 


Meme. 


From time to time 


( De temps en 
' ( temps. 









Remarks on the Subjunctive. • 

241 . The subjunctive represents the state or action as viewed un- 
der the influence of some affection of the mind, which is expressed 
by the governing verb or phrase. Both sentences, the principal 
(governing sentence) and the subordinate (subjunctive sentence) 
are, in sense, inseparably connected. The subordinate sentence 
expresses the principal idea, the subject of our thought. The 
principal sentence expresses the manner in which it affects us. 
The subordinate sentence states thus the cause of the affection. 
Two cases present themselves : either, the cause is a fact, giving 
rise to pleasure, pain, wonder, satisfaction ; or, it is a prospective 
and uncertain state or action, creating desire, uneasiness, doubt, 
apprehension, fear. In the latter case, the uncertainty with 
which we view the state or action, is the principle which calls 
for the use of the subjunctive. 

It is to be observed, that it is not so much the uncertainty of 
the act, as the want of confidence with which we look upon it, 
as expressed by the principal sentence. When we say : / believe, 
I hope, I expect, I promise, that my brother will come, his com- 
ing is uncertain ; yet we use the future of the indicative, because 
we state with confidence our belief in his coming. But when 
we say : / believe not, hope not, expect not, promise not, that my 
brother will come, we use the subjunctive ; because these expres- 
sions denote a want of confidence — an unsettled, hesitating state 
of mind. 

Notice also, that the subjunctive sentence, when separated 
from the principal sentence, expresses no longer the same sense 
which the whole sentence conveys ; whereas the subordinate sen- 
tence, in which the indicative is used, when separated from its 
principal sentence, still retains the same meaning. 



SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LEC/ON. 251 



Exercice 64. 

1. Etes-vous content que Charles parte ? 2. Je suis bien fache 
qu'il s'en aille. 3. N'est-il pas facheux que ce jeune homme ne 
veuille pas etudier ? 4. C'est dornmage qu'il ne soit pas plus as- 
sidu. 5. II est etonnant qu'il soit si indolent. 6. Je suis sur- 
pris qu'il n'ait pas plus d'energie. 7. N'est-il pas a desirer que 
la jeunesse ait des egards pour ceux qui s'occupent de son bon- 
lieur ? 8. II est a regretter qu'elle agisse, en general, avec fort 
peu de consideration. 9. Voulez-vous que j'instruise votre oncle 
de ce qui s'est passe? 10. J'airne mieux que Charles Pen in- 
struise lui-rneme. 11. Le medecin veut-il que je prenne cette 
medecine? 12. II ordonne que vous la preniez toute. 13. Ex- 
ige-t-il que je boive toute cette liqueur a la fois? 14. II exige 
que vous la buviez toute avant de vous coucher. 15. Croyez- 
vous qu'il soit agreable de boire cette liqueur? 16. Je ne dis 
pas qu'il soit agreable, mais je dis qu'il est indispensable que 
vous la preniez. 17. Croyez-vous que ce remede me fasse du 
bien? 18. Je crois qu'il vous fera du bien. 19. Faut-il que le 
domestique aille chercher vos effets ? 20. II faut d'abord qu'il 
finisse ce qu'il fait. 21. Est-il necessaire que cela se fasse ce 
matin ? 22. II est indispensable que cela soit fait avant midi. 
23. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que nous le fassions ? 24. II est im- 
possible que nous le fassions, il faut que nous sortions. 25. Est-il 
temps que nous nous en allions ? 26. II est temps que nous nous 
habillions. 27. Est-il a propos que nous par lions de cela a votre 
oncle? 28. II ne convient pas que nous lui en parlions. 29. 
Importe-t-il qu'il le sache ? 30. II est meme tres-important qu'il 
le sache, mais il n'est pas con ven able qu'il en soit instruit par 
nous. 31. Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ici ce matin? 32. II est 
possible qu'il vienne. 33. Pensez-vous que notre associe recoive 
cette lettre aujourd'hui ? 34. Je doute qu'il la recoive avant de- 
main. 35. Craignez-vous que la lettre ne lui parvienne pas a 
temps? 36. En effet je crains qu'elle n'arrive trop tard. 37. 
Votre pere consent-il que vous alliez au spectacle ? 38. II con- 
sent que nous y allions de temps en temps. 39. Suffit-il que je 



252 S0IXANTE-QUATR1EME LE£ON. 

lise cette lecon une seule fois ? 40. Non, M. ; cela ne suffit pas ; 
il faut que vous l'etudiiez a fond. 



Theme 64. 

1. We like you to have pleasure, but we regret that you neg- 
lect your duties. 2. Do you deserve that we reward you, when 
you are indolent and careless ? 3. Is it not just that we punish 
you ? 4. It is a pity that you have not more energy, and that 
you are not more assiduous in (a) your studies. 5. It is griev- 
ous that you lose the opportunity of acquiring useful knowledge, 
and that we are obliged to take measures that are repugnant to 
(qui repugnent a) our feelings. 6. We are sorry that you act 
with so little consideration. 7. Indeed, it is astonishing that 
you do not show (avoir) more respect for those that labor for 
your welfare (a votre bonheur). 8. It is proper that we should 
speak to you about it. 9. It is well for you to know that we are 
apprised of your conduct. 10. It is time that you change it 7 
and that you be more attentive to your studies. 11. What do 
you wish me to do? 12. I require that you do your task. 13. 
You must learn this lesson by heart, and write this exercise be- 
fore Monday. 14. It is impossible that I can do all that before 
Monday. 15. I do not like you to tell me that it is impossible, 
16. Must the servant go for your things? 17. It is better that 
he wait a little ; for he must go at (en) the same time to the 
post-office, and I doubt whether the mail has arrived. 18. Do 
you think that the courier has been delayed by the water (les 
eaux) ? 19.1 fear that he may have been delayed. 20. Do 
you think it necessary that my brother take this medicine ? 21, 
It is indispensable that he take it, and he must even take it all 
at once. 22. Is it not sufficient that he drink a part of it? 23. 
The doctor orders that he drink it all. 24. I do not believe that 
this remedy will do him any good. 25. I wonder that you 
speak in that manner (de la sorte). 



SOIXANTE-CIXQUIEME LEfON. 



253 



65. SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME LE^ON. 
242. 

To take charge of a commission. 

To execute a commission. 

To do an errand. 

To go on an errand. 

Has he executed the commission 

with which you had intrusted 

him? 



Se charger d'une commission. 

I S'acquitter d'une commission* 

Aller faire une commission. 
S'est-il acquitte de la commission 
dont vous l'aviez charge ? 



To establish. To settle. 

He has settled in this city. 

To restore. To recover. 

Order has been restored. 

Business has been revived. 

To recover one's health. 

To recover. 

He has recovered. 

To improve. 

This land has much improved. 

His health improves daily. 

To improve, to embellish. 

This city has greatly improved. 

To improve. 

The arts have greatly improved. 



Etablir. S'etablir. 

II s'est etabli dans cette ville, 

Retablir. Se r etablir. 

L'ordre a ete retabli. 

Les affaires se sont retablies. 
) Recouvrer sa sante. 
J" Se retablir, 

II s'est retabli, or II est retabli. 

Ameliorer. S' ameliorer. 

Cette terre s'est bien amelioree. 
( Sa sante s'ameliore de jour en jour, 
(II va mieux tous les jours. 

Embellir. S'embellir. 

Cette ville-ci s'est beaucoup embel- 
lie. 

Se perfectionner. 

Les arts se sont bien perfectionnes, 



243 1 To marry a couple. 
To marry \ to give in marriage. 
To marry, (to take for husband or 

wife.) 
To get married 
When will you marry ? 
He married his daughter to Mr. B. 
His son married my cousin. 
They were married this morning. 
The bishop married them. 
To paint. lb dye. 
To take likenesses. 
To have one's likeness taken. 
To dye red, green, <fcc. 



Marier un couple. 

Marier, donner en mariage. 

Epouser. 

Se marier. 

Quand vous marierez-vous ? 

II a marie sa fille avec M. B. 

Son fils a epouse ma cousin e. 

lis ont ete maries ce matin. 

L'eveque les a maries. 

Peindre. Teindre. 

Faire des portraits. 

Se faire peindre. 

Teindre en rouge, en vert, <fec. 



254 



SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. 



What color did you get that silk 

dyed? 
I had it dyed yellow. 
I shall have it dyed again. 
To get a picture renewed. 



Comment avez-vous fait teindr- 

cette soie ? 
Je l'ai fait teindre en jaune. 
Je la ferai teindre de nouveau. 
Faire remettre un tableau a neuf. 



244. To lodge. 

To take lodgings. 
He is lodged on the first floor, in 

front. 
My room is on the ground-floor, 

below his. 
He has taken lodgings beyond the 

barrier. 
The front room. 

The back room. 

To look upon or into, to overlook. 
His window looks into the garden. 
Present my respects to him. 
Good by. 



Loger. 

JSe loger. 

II est loge au premier etage, sur k 

devant. 
Ma chambre est au rez-de-chaussee, 

au dessous de la sienne. 
II s'est loge au dela de la barriere. 

La chambre de devant, or sur le 

devant. 
La chambre de derriere. 
JDonner sur. 

Sa fenetre donne sur le jardin. 
Presentez-lui mes respects. 
Au revoir. 



VOCABULAIRE 65, 



Art. 

The portrait. 
The coloring. 

The order. 

The mark. 
The aim. 
The purpose. 

The story. 

The ground-floor. < 



L'art. 

Le portrait. 
Le coloris. 

L'ordre. 



• Le but. 



L'etage. 

Le rez-de-chaus- 
s6e. 



To execute. 

To take charge. 
To establish. 



Executer. 

Se charger (de). 
£tablir. 



Painting. 
The picture. 
The satisfaction. 
The freshness. 
The commission. 
The errand. 

Confidence. 

The barrier. 
The turnpike. 

The causeway. 



- La peinture. 

La satisfaction. 
La fraicheur. 

• La commission. 



La confiance. 

► La barriere. 
La chauss6e. 



• Refaire. 



To make again. 

To repair. 

To acquit one's self. S'acquitter (de). 

To settle. " S'etablir. 



~1 



SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME LE^OST. 



255 



To restore. 

To recover, (trans.) 

To improve. 
To improve. 
To marry. 
To lodge. 
To paint. 

For the purpose j 
of. { 

Punctually. 
Anew. 
Above, (prep.) 



Retablir. 
Recouvrer. 

Guerir. 

Ameliorer. 

Perfectionner. 

Epouser. 

Loger. 

Peindre. 

Dans le but de. 

A l'effet de. 

Ponctuellement. 

A neuf. 

Au dessus de. 



On this side, 



,(pr-)\ Av 



To recover, (int.) C Se retablir. 
To recover. ■) Guerir. 

t Se guerir. 



To heal. 



! En deci, de. 



To improve. 
To marry. 
To get married. 
To take lodgings. 
To dye. 

With regard to. -J 

Promptly. 
Agaia 

Below, (prep.) 
Beyond, J 

On the oth- h (pre.) Au dela de. 
er side, J 



Embellir. 

Marier. 

Se marier. 

Se loger. 

Teindre. 

Par rapport a. 

A l'egard de. 

Promptement. 

De nouveau. 

Au dessous de. 



Exercice 65. 

1. A-t-on execute mes ordres ? 2. Vos ordres ont ete ponc- 
tuellement executes. 3. Mon cousin s'est-il acquitte de la com- 
mission dont vous l'aviez charge ? 4. II s'en est acquitte a mon 
entiere satisfaction. 5. Croyez-vous qu'il veuille se charger 
d'une commission pour moi ? 6. Je crois qu'il s'en chargera vo- 
lontiers. 7. Ou le garcon est-il alle ? 8. II est alle faire une 
commission pour mon pere. 9. Votre pere a-t-il etabli une mai- 
son de commerce a la Nouvelles Orleans? 10. Oui, M. ; il y a 
etabli mon frere. 11. Le credit s'est-il un peu retabli? 12. On 
commence a reprendre confiance depuis que l'ordre a ete entiere- 
ment retabli. 13. Vous 6tes-vous etabli a la campagne? 14. 
Je m'y suis etabli, dans le but de recouvrer ma sante. 15. Trou- 
vez-vous que Pair de la campagne vous fasse du bien? 16. Oui, 
M. ; ma sante s'ameliore de jour en jour ; je suis presque tout-a- 
fait retabli. 17. Croyez-vous que ce remede me guerisse? 18. 
Vous vous guerirez avec le temps, mais il faut de la patience. 

19. Voila mon portrait, peint par Charles; qu'en pensez-vous? 

20. C'est une belle peinture ; un "beau coloris ; une fraicheur 
qui plait a l'oeil. 21. N'est-ce pas que les arts se sont perfection- 



256 SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME LE£ON. 

nes depuis que nous sonimes au monde? 22. C'est vrai par 
rapport aux arts mecaniques ; mais je ne pense pas que ce soit 
vrai a l'egard des beaux arts. 23. Comment avez-vous fait 
teindre votre soie? 24. Je l'ai fait teindre en jaune, mais je 
vais la faire teindre de nouveau, en vert. 25. Votre associe fait- 
il refaire sa maison a neuf ? 26. II la fait entierement refaire a 
rieuf; il va rnarier sa fille. 27. Qui epousera-t-elle ? 28. Elle 
doit epouser M. B.... 29. Quand se marieront-ils ? 30. lis 
se marieront dansunmois. 31. Ou etes-vous loge? 32. Je suis 
.oge au premier, dans la chambre de devant. 33. Qui occupe 
la chambre au rez-de-chaussee ? 34. Ma mere occupe celle au 
dessous de la mienne. 35. Votre frere est-il loge sur le derriere ? 
36. II a la chambre au dessus de la cuisine ; sa fenetre donne 
sur le jardin. 37. Ou votre cousin s'est-il loge? 38. II s'est 
loge au dela de la barriere, pres de la chaussee. 39. Quand 
vous le verrez, dites-lui bien des choses de ma part. 40. Je n'y 
manquerai pas. Au revoir. 



Theme 65. 

1. Have you put every thing in order, as I told you? 2. We 
have executed your orders punctually. 3. Who took charge of 
my commission ? 4. My nephew did ; I hope he will execute it 
to your satisfaction. 5. Is it not time for you to go and do the 
errand with which your father has intrusted you ? 6. Last year, 
my brother went to the country, for the purpose of recovering 
his health. 7. He had scarcely settled there, when he wrote to 
me that his health was daily improving. 8. I had soon the sat- 
isfaction of seeing him back entirely recovered. 9. When the 
art of medicine has no power over (ne pent rien sur) a disease, a 
change (changement) of climate sometimes cures it. 10. At last, 
peace is established ; already business is improving (reprendre) 
and public confidence (publique) will promptly revive. 11. 
Those public buildings (Ces edifices publics) improve the city 
very much. 12. This street has been much improved since I 
have lived in it. 13. The arts have greatly improved since the 
beginning of this century (ce siecle). 14. I do not think that 



SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LE£ON, 25^ 

your remark is correct with regard to the fine arts ; painting,, for 
instance [par exemple)* 15. What do you think of the coloring 
of this portrait ? 16. It looks sombre; I should prefer a little 
more freshness. 17. I must have it renewed; that will improve 
its looks (cela lid donnera meilleure apparence). 18. Do you wish 
me to take your likeness ? 19. No, sir ; I had my likeness ta- 
ken when I was in Paris. 20. Have you had your cloak dyed ? 
21. Yes, but I want to have it dyed again. 22. What color do 
you wish to have it dyed ? 23. I wish to have it dyed blue. 24 9 
Are your cousins married? 25. My uncle married his eldest 
daughter to Mr. N 26. My cousin Sophia ($op>hie) is go- 
ing to be married shortly ; she is to marry Mr. S. . . . 27. Do 
you lodge in the front? 28. I occupy the back room, on the 
second floor ; my window looks into the garden. 29. My sister 
lodges on the ground-floor, in the room below mine. 30. And 
my brother occupies the room above mine. 31. My cousin has 
taken lodgings beyond the river, on this side the barrier, near 
the causeway. 32. Present my respects to him, when you see 
him. Good-by. 



66. SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LEQON. 

Remarks on the verb Faire. 

245. Rem. 1. — The verb faire may be joined to the infinitive 
of most verbs ; as, faire sortir, to send out ; faire voir, to show ; 
faire savoir, to let know ; faire dire, to send word ; faire venir, 
appeler, demander, to send for, &c. 

The two verbs are equivalent to one transitive verb, and can 
have but one direct object. 

(a.) I make the children read. Je fais lire les enfants. 

(b.) I make them read the lesson. Je leur fais lire la lecon. 
(c.) I will make him give up his Je le ferai renoncer a ses folles pre- 
foolish pretensions. tentions. 

In the example (a), the person is the direct object; in (6), the 



258 SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LECW. 

person is the indirect, lecon being the direct, object; in (c), the 
person is the direct, because the verb renoncer takes an indirect, 
object ; as renoncer a qq. ch. 

Kem. 2. — Faire, joined to a noun without the article, is equiv- 
alent to an intransitive verb ; as, /aire mal a qqn. 

Kem. 3. — Faire is used in the sense of to practise ; as, /aire 
la cuisine, to cook ; faire des armes, to fence ; faire un cours, to 
give lectures. 

Eem. 4. — It is also used in the sense of to play, to affect, to 
feign ; as, faire le savant, V important, to play the learned man, 
the important man, &c. 

Kem. 5. — Faire has the sense of to be, when it is followed by 
an abstract noun, attributing some quality to the subject ; as, H 
fait la joie de ses parents, he is the delight of his parents ; cela 
fait toutes mes delices, that is all my delight. 

Kem. 6. — Faire is used to avoid repeating a preceding verb ; 
as, Je lui ai ecrit comme je devais le faire, I wrote to him as I 
ought to do. 

Kem. t J. — Ne faire que, means : to do nothing but, and ne 
faire que de, to have but just. II ne fait que sortir, he is con- 
stantly going out ; il ne fait que de sortir, he has but just gone 
out. 



246. 

To give birth to, to raise, to cause. Faire naitre. 

To raise difficulties, suspicions. Faire naitre des difficultes, des 



soupcons. 
Faire valoir. 



To turn to account. 
To make the best of. 
To turn one's talents, one's money Faire valoir ses talents, son argent. 

to account. 

To boast, to brag. Se faire valoir. 

To make one's self understand. Se faire comprendre. 

To assume airs. Se donner des airs, prendre des airs. 

To turn some one into ridicule. Tourner qqn. en ridicule. 

To become ridiculous. Tomber dans le ridicule. 

To make one's self ridiculous. Se rendre ridicule. 

By, or in, doing that. En faisant cela, (pres. part., see L. 

nz.) 

By, or in, showing him. En lui faisant voir. 



SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 



259 



247 • To confide, to intrust one 
with something. 
To have confidence in some one. 
To abuse one's confidence. 
He does not inspire me with any 

confidence. 
To trust to one. 
To trust to the future. 
To mistrust ; to distrust. 
To borrow ; to derive. 



Confier qq. ch. a qqn. 

Avoir confiance en qqn. 
Abuser de la confiance de qqn. 
II ne m'inspire aucune confiance. 

Sefier a qqn. 
Sefier sur Vavenir. 
Se mefier de; se defier de. 
Mmprunter a or de. 



Emprunter, in the sense of to derive, requires de. 

He borrows money of everybody. II emprunte de l'argent a tout le 

monde. 

The moon derives its light from the La lune emprunte sa lumi&re du 

sun. soleil. 

To put one's self to inconvenience. Se gener. 

"Without putting yourself to incon- Sans vous gener. 

venience. 

That will cause me no inconveni- Cela ne me causer a aucun inconve- 

ence. nient. 

To be in trouble. Etre dans l'embarras. 

To relieve one from his perplexity. Tirer qqn. d'embarras. 



VOCABULAIRE 66. 



The embarrassment. L'embarras. 
The inconvenience. L'inconvenient. 
The ridicule. 
The prejudice. 
The injury. 
The detriment. 
The delight. 
The suspicion. 



Le ridicule. 
Le prejuge. 

I Le prejudice. 

Le delice. 
Le soup5on. 



The difficulty. 
The importance. 
The pretension. 
The prejudice. 

The joy ; the mirth. 

The delight. 
The exception. 



La difiiculte. 
L'importance. 
La pretention. 
La prevention. 

La joie. 

Les delices. 
L'exception. 



To give birth to. 
To show. 



Faire naitre. 
Faire voir. 



To intrust with. Confier (a). 
To abuse. Abuser. 

To trust. Se fier (a). 



To turn to account. Faire valoir. 

To renounce. 

To give up. 

To inspire with. 

To borrow. 

To mistrust. 



!• Renoncer (a). 

Inspirer. 
Emprunter 
Se mefier (de) 



260 SOIXANTE-SIXlfcME LEfON. 

To embarrass. > j^^^ To inconvenience. ) ^ ner . 

To perplex. ) To incommode. ) 

To inconvenience ) Se .^ Tq relate to refer< Se tei , 

one s self. J 

Foolish. Fou, fern, folle. Ridiculous. Ridicule. 

r r 2. \ i> • With the exception ) A l'exception 

In future. A lavenir. „ r -. 

of. ) de. 

On purpose. Expres. Except. Excepte, 



Exercice 66, 

1. Voici notre musicien; voulez-vous que je le fasse chanter? 
2. Quant a moi je consens que vous le fassiez danser. 3. Ne 
voulez-vous pas que je lui fasse chanter ce nouvel air ? 4. J'aime 
encore mieux que vous le lui fassiez jouer sur son violon. 5. 
Croyez-vous qu'on guerisse quelqu'un de ses preventions en le 
tournant en ridicule ? 6. J'essaierai de faire renoncer Charles a 
ses folles pretentions, en lui faisant voir le ridicule de sa conduite. 
*1. En quoi se rend-il ridicule ? 8. En faisant le savant, et en se 
donnant des airs de grand seigneur. 9. Donnez-vous beaucoup 
de temps a la lecture? 10. L'etude et la lecture font mes de~ 
lices; j'y donne toutes mes heures de loisir. 11. Ferez-vous ve- 
nir le peintre pour lui montrer cette peinture ? 12. Je ]ui ai fait 
dire que je desire le voir. 13. L'avocat vous a-t-il fait savoir 
quand il sera pret? 14. II m'a fait demander les pieces qui se 
rapportent a notre affaire. 15. Les lui avez-vous confiees ? 16. 
Je les lui ai fait remettre, a l'exception de la lettre que vous 
m'avez ecrite. 17. Ke trouvez-vous pas que ce monsieur fasse 
l'important? 18. Oui, M. ; et je crois qu'il fait naitre des diffi- 
cultes expres, pour se donner des airs d'importance. 19. Avez- 
vous confiance en lui ? 20. II ne m'inspire pas grande confiance. 
21. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il n'abuse de votre confiance? 22. 
En effet, je ne serai pas etonne qu'il le fasse, car sa conduite a 
deja fait naitre des soupcons dans mon esprit. 23. On dit qu'il 
a du talent, et qu'il sait le faire valoir. 24. II est a regretter 
que beaucoup d'avocats fassent valoir leurs talents au prejudice 
de leurs clients. 25. Croyez-vous qu'on puisse se fier a tout le 
monde? 26. Je pense plutot qu'il faut se mefier de tout le 



SOIXAXTE-SIXIEME LECOX. 261 

monde; surtout de ceux qui se font trop valoir. 27. Comment 
puis-je faire valoir mon argent? 28. Faites le valoir dans les 
fonds publics. 29. Ce monsieur veut m'emprunter ; croyez-vous 
que je puisse lui courier quelques milliers de dollars ? 30. II ne 
fait que demander de l'argent a tout le monde ; il a voulu en 
emprunter a quelqu'un de mes amis, qui a refuse de lui en pre- 
ter. 31. Quand etait cela ? 32. Aujourd'hui ; il ne fait . que de 
le quitter. 33. Me voila bien embarrasse ; je me suis presque 
engage a lui fournir la somme qu'il m'a demandee. 34. II n'est 
pas difficile de vous tirer d'embarras ; avec de telles gens, il ne 
faut pas etre gene. 35. Que voulez-vous que je lui dise ? 36. 
Dites-lui franchement que vous n'avez pas de confiance, et a l'a- 
venir, il vous laissera tranquille. 37. Avez-vous beaucoup d' ar- 
gent a placer? 38. J'ai quelques milliers de dollars dont je 
pourrais me passer sans me gener. 



Theme 66. 

1. Have you made the children read? 2. I have made them 
read their lesson. 3. Do you wish me to send them out? 4. I 
prefer that you make them write their exercises. 5. Do you 
make those inkspots in your book on purpose ? 6.1 will make 
you give up those bad habits. 7. Promise me that, in future, 
you will not do it any more. 8. Charles is a good boy (sujet) ; 
good children {sages) are the delight of their parents. 9. Our 
servant understands cooking (savoir faire la cuisine) very well, 
but he has foolish pretensions, which he will not give up. 10. 
He likes to play the important man, and assumes airs that ren- 
der him ridiculous ; with the exception of that (a cela pres), he 
is an excellent servant (sujet). 11. Will you show me your 
painting, when you have had it renewed? 12. I will let you 
know when it is finished. 13. Did that man send for the papers 
relating (which relate) to our business? 14. He sent for them, 
but I was not willing to intrust them to him. 15. I sent word 
to him, that he should come and examine them in my office, 
16. Why did you intrust him with your business, if he does not 
inspire you with confidence? 17. I had entire confidence in 



262 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 

him ; only lately his conduct has raised suspicions in my mind. 
18. I hope he may not abuse your confidence. 19. He is a good 
lawyer, who knows how to make good the rights (les droits) of 
his clients. 20. One does not know whom to trust. 21. Mis- 
trust the counsels of those that flatter you. 22. Was Mr. B. . . . 
here to borrow money of you ? 23. He has but just gone out. 
24. I did not lend him any, for I know that he is constantly 
borrowing money of all who are willing to lend him. 25. 
Do I incommode you ? 26. Not in the least (Pas le moins du 
monde). 27. I am in (un) great embarrassment for want of a 
little money. 28. Can you, without putting yourself to incon- 
venience, lend me a few hundred dollars? 29. I will relieve you 
from embarrassment this time, on condition that, in future, you 
will renounce gambling (le jeu) 9 30. I cannot help laughing at 
this youth, who plays the learned man. 31. His prejudices raise 
difficulties where (la oil) there are none. 32. You are mistaken, 
if you believe that you cure (subj.) any one of his prejudices, in 
turning him into ridicule. 



67. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 
248. 

To raise ; to rise ; to increase, Hausser. 

To lower ; to fall. Baisser. 

To shrug up one's shoulders. Hausser les epaules. 

To raise (to cast down) one's eyes. Lever (baisser) les yeux. 

Provisions have risen, fallen. Les denrees ont hausse, baisse. 

The rate of exchange has not varied. Le change n'a pas varie. 

The stocks are rising, falling. Les fonds sont en hausse, en baisse. 

To increase. Augmenter. 

To diminish. Diminuer. 

Land increases in value. Les terres augmentent de prix. 

His salary has been increased. On l'a augmente. 

To reduce (to lower) the price one Reduire (diminuer) le prix d'un 

franc. franc. 

To overcharge. To deduct. Surf aire. Rabattre. 

I have not asked you too much. Je ne vous ai pas surfait. 



SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 



263 



To add. 

Add something to it. 
To advance ; to go too fast. 
To retard; to go too slow ; to lose. 
My watch is 10 m. too fast {too slow). 
I set it (put it) 10 m. forward (bach). 
To wind up a watch. 
My watch has stopped ; it stopped 
at three o'clock. 



Aj outer (a). 

Ajoutez-y encore quelque chose. 
Avancer. 
Retarder. 

Ma montre avance (retarde) de 10 m. 
Je l'ai avancee (retardee) de 10 m. 
Monter, or remonter une montre. 
Ma montre est arretee ; elle s'est 
arretee a trois heures. 



249* To express. To pronounce. 
He expresses himself with facility. 
That word is pronounced as it is 

written. 
To conceive ; to word. 
To express; to word. 
"We express with precision what we 

understand well. 
That article is well written, well 

worded. 
To obtain. To procure. 
It is difficult to procure money. 

To convince. 
To persuade 

He will be convinced of it by expe- 
rience. 
I persuaded (convinced) him of that. 
I persuaded him of that. 



Exprimer. Prononcer. 
II s'exprime avec facilite. 
Ce mot se prononce comme il s'e- 

crit. 
Concevoir. 
Enoncer. 
Ce que Ton concoit bien s'enonce 

clairement. 
Cet article est bien concu, bien 

enonce. 
Obtenir. Procurer. 
II est difficile de se procurer de 

l'argent. 
Convaincre. 
Persuader qqn. de qq. ch., or qq. ch, 

d qqn. 
II s'en convaincra par l'experience. 

Je l'ai persuade de cela. 
Je lui ai persuade cela. 



250* To be shipwrecked. 
To be wrecked. 
To fail, to break. 
To do honor to. 
To lay or take in a stock of. 
To be thoroughly acquainted with. 
To make one's self well acquainted 

with. 
To be skilled or expert in. 
To be able. To enable. 



> Faire naufrage. 



Faire faillite, (manquer, faillir.) 

Faire honneur a. 

Faire (sa) provision de. 

Etre au fait de. 

Se mettre au fait de. 



S'entendre a. 
Etre a meine. 



Mettre a meme. 



264 



soxxante-septieme le^on. 



VOCABULAIRE 67. 



Les fonds 

Le change. 
Le profit. 
Le taux, 
Le naufrage. 
L'engagement. 

Le froment. 

Le charbon. 
L'horloger. 
Le pendule. 



A share. 

The variation. 
The rise. 
The fall. 
The failure. 
The tendency. 
The commodity. 
The provisions. 
Stock, supply. 
The clock. 
The time-piece. 



Une action. 

La variation. 

La hausse. 

La baisse. 

La faillite. 

La tendance. 
) La denree. 
) Les denrees. 

La provision. 

L'horloge. 

La pendule. 



The funds, j 

The stocks. j 

The exchange. 
The profit. 
The rate. 
The shipwreck. 
The engagement. 

The wheat. 

Coal. 

The watchmaker. 

The pendulum. 

To raise ; to rise. 
To increase. 
To bargain for. 
To overcharge. 
To advance. j 

To go too fast. I 
To gain. J 

To express. 
To conceive. 
To obtain. 
To convince. 
To quote. 
To add. 

Thoroughly ac- ) 
quainted with, j 
At a profit. 
At par. 



Exercice 67. 

1 . Est-ce que les actions du chemin de fer ont hausse ? 2. 
Elles sont cotees ici au prix d'hier ; mais j'ai renmrque ce matin 
qu'il y avait une tendance a la baisse. 3. Voulez-vous vous de- 
faire des votres a ce prix ? 4. J'ai achete les miennes au pair, 
et je ne veux pas les vendre a perte. 5. Le change a-t-il varie 
depuis hier ? 6. Non, M. ; il n'y a pas de variation. 7. Est-ce 
que les denrees ont augmente de prix ? 8. Les denrees n'ont 



Hausser. 


To lower ; to fall. 


Baisser. 


Augmenter. 


To decrease. 


Diminuer. 


Marchander. 


To reduce. 


Reduire, irr. 


Surfaire. 


To deduct. 
To delay. 


Rabattre, irr. 

) 


Avancer. 


To go too slow. 
To lose. 


[• Retarder. 


Exprimer. 


To pronounce. 


Prononcer. 


Concevoir. 


To utter. 


Enoncer. 


Obtenir, irr. 


To procure. 


Procurer. 


Convaincre, irr. 


To persuade. 


Persuader. 


Coter. 


To vary. 


Varier. 


Aj outer. 


To be expert in. 


S'entendre a. 


Au fait. 


Able. 


A m6rue 


A profit 


At a loss. 


A perte. 


Au pair. 


So that. 


De sorte que. 



SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 265 

pas varie de prix depuis huit jours, excepte 1-e froment, qui a 
eprouve une hausse de 50 centimes par hectolitre. 9. Avez-vous 
fait votre provision de charbon pour Phiverl 10. Pas encore; 
on a voulu me persuader de la faire a present, mais je crois 
que le charbon diminuera de prix. 11. Avez-vous marchande 
ce drap? 12. Le marchand me le fait trop cher, quatre dollars 
la verge. 13. Ne veut-il rien rabattre? 14. Je lui en ai of- 
fert trois dollars et demi. 15. Eh bien, reduirez-vous le prix 
de votre drap de quelque chose ? 16. M. ; je vous assure que je 
ne vous ai pas surfait. 17. J'ajouterai bien vingt-cinq sous par 
verge a. ce que je vous ai offert, si cela peut vous contenter. 18. 
Ajoutez-y trente-cinq sous, et je vous le laisserai. 19. Est-ce 
que votre pendule avance ? 20. Elle avance de quinze minutes. 
21. Ma montre retarde ; il faut que je l'avance de dix minutes 
pour la mettre a l'heure. 22. Et la mienne est arretee ; je ne 
eoncois pas cela ; je l'ai pourtant remontee ce matin. H faut que 
je passe chez l'horloger. 23. N'est-ce pas que cet horloger s'ex- 
prime bien en anglais ! 24. II s'exprime avec facilite, mais il 
prononce mal. 25. Vous etes-vous procure l'argent qu'il vous 
faut ? 26. Je n'ai pas pu me le procurer. 27. Je crois que vous 
1'auriez obtenu de mon banquier, si vous vous etiez adresse a lui. 
28. Si j'etais convaincu de cela, j'irais bien le trouver. 29. Le 
commis de votre oncle est-il au fait des affaires de la bourse ? 
SO. Oui, M. ; il s'entend tres-bien a tout ce qui se rapporte aux 
finances; aussi mon oncle va Taugmenter cette annee. 31. On 
disait a la bourse aujourd'hui que le navire de la maison B. . . . 
a fait naufrage. 32. Si c'est ainsi je crains que la maison B. . . . 
ne fasse faillite, car ce navire n'est pas assure (insured). 33. 
Croyez-vous que cette perte puisse faire manquer une maison 
aussi bien etablie que celle-la ? 34. Non ; pas cette perte seule, 
mais ajoutez-y les pertes que M. B . . . . a faites depuis peu dans 
les fonds publics, et vous concevrez qu'il lui sera bien difficile de 
faire honneur a ses engagements. 



Theme 67. 
1. Here is good news: the railroad shares are quoted at par 



12 



266 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LECON. 

this morniDg. 2. I must persuade my brother not to sell hm r 
3. He wanted to dispose (se defaire) of them at a loss. 4. Since 
there is a tendency upward, he may possibly (il est possible que) 
sell them at a profit. 5. The rate of exchange has risen, and 
provisions have fallen. 6. But the price of flour has not expe- 
rienced any variation since last week, and the quantity in the 
market (sur place) has considerably (-emblement) decreased. (264.) 
7. I must lay in my stock of coal, for coal will increase in price 
when winter comes (a Vapproche de Vhiver). 8. What does the 
watchmaker ask you for the time-piece you were bargaining for ? 
9. He asks forty dollars for it, 10. Will he not deduct any 
thing? 11. If he would reduce the price a few dollars, I would 
buy it. 12. I am not in the habit of overcharging. 13. I will 
give you thirty-six dollars for it. 14. If you will add two dollars 
to it, I will let you have it. 15. You will easily be convinced 
(refl.) that it is not dear,, by asking (s* informer) the price of such 
time-pieces in other stores. 16. My watch is too slow; will you 
set it right (a Vheure) ? 17. It loses five minutes a day (par jour .) 
18. If you will leave it here till to-morrow, I will regulate it (re- 
gler). 19. I shall not be able to do without it. 20. Set it forward 
five minutes every time you wind it up. 21. I cannot understand 
(concevoir) why you do not speak French : you pronounce it very 
well ? 22. I experience difficulty in (a) expressing my ideas ; I 
am often at a loss (je suis souvent embarrass e) to find suitable words 
(covenable). 23. It is because (C f est que) you are not in the habit 
of speaking it 24. Do you believe that your brother will obtain 
the permission to go with us? 25. There is no means of pro- 
curing money at present; I am convinced of that. 26. If my 
brother would withdraw his money from the stocks (fonds pu- 
blics), it would enable us to honor our engagements. 27, I must 
persuade him to do it. 28. Is your clerk expert in business? 

29. He has made himself thoroughly acquainted with our busi- 
ness, in a short (peu de) time, so that we cannot do without him, 

30. He wants us to increase his salary, and we shall be obliged 
to doit (y). 31. If the Neptune was wrecked, as is reported, I 
fear that the house B. . , . will fail,, for that vessel is not insured 
{assure). 



S0IXANTE-HU1TIEME LEgON. 267 

68. SOIXANTEdEUITIEME LEQON. 

Subjunctive Mood — continued. 

251. Trie subjunctive is used in a relative clause, limiting a 
superlative degree, or some exclusive idea, equivalent to a super- 
lative ; as, le seul, le premier, le dernier, &c. 

The Gospel is the finest gift that L'Evangile est le plus beau present 

God has made to men. que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. 

He was the only one that knew it. C'est le seul qui Yait su. 

This is the best horse that is in the Yoici le meilleur cheval qui soil 

stable. dans l'ecurie. 

Rem. — The verb in the relative sentence must be put in the 
indicative : 

1st. When the relative sentence does not limit the superla- 
tive ; as, 

He wants my best horse, which is II veut mon meilleur cheval, qui 
in the stable. est dans l'ecurie. 

2d. "When the superlative is followed by a noun, to which the 
relative clause relates ; as, 

He is the youngest of the pupils C'est le plus jeune des eleves qui 
that are here. sont ici. 

3d. When future action is to be expressed ; as, 

You shall have the best watch that Vous aurez la meilleure montre que 
I can find. je pourrai trouver. 



252. The subjunctive is used in a relative clause, limiting a 
noun of an indefinite sense, which imparts a character of uncer- 
tainty to the dependent sentence ; as, 

I seek a man who can do that. Je cherche un homme qui sache faire 

cela, 
I know no one who can do it. Je ne connais personne qui puisse le 

faire. 
There is scarcely a man who can do II y a a peine un homme qui puisse 
it. le faire. 



268 SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LECON. 

Who is the man that can do it ? Quel est l'homme qui puisse le 

faire ? 
There is no pleasure which is worth II n'y a aucun plaisir qui vaille ce- 

that of a good action. • lui d'une bonne action. 

I know no grief which friendship Je ne connais aucun chagrin que 

cannot alleviate. l'amitie ne puisse soulager. 

Rem. — The indicative must be used, when the relative clause 
expresses something positive ; as, 

I seek the man who can do that. Je cherche l'homme qui salt faire 

cela. 



253. The impersonal verbs il parait, il arrive, il resulte, il 
s'ensuit, and il semble, accompanied by an indirect object ; also, 
il est, followed by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, prob- 
ability, govern the indicative when they are used affirmatively, 
and the subjunctive when they are used negatively or interroga- 
tively, or when they are preceded by the conjunction si: Ex. : 

It appears that he is right. II parait qu'il a raison. 

It does not appear that he is right. II ne parait pas qu'il ait raison. 

It thence follows that you are in the II s'ensuit de la que vous avez tort, 
wrong. 

Does it follow that you are right ? S'ensuit-il que vous ayez raison ? 

It seems to me that you are wrong. II me semble que vous avez tort. 

Does it seem to you that I am Vous semble-t-il que j'aie tort ? 
wrong ? 

It is probable, clear, evident, cer- II est probable, clair, evident, cer- 
tain, that it is so. tain, que c'est ainsi. 

It is not plain that it is so. II n'est pas clair que cela soit ainsi. 

If it be true, that he knew it. S'il est vrai qu'il Yait su. 

Rem. — II semble, not accompanied by any indirect object, al- 
ways governs the subjunctive ; as, 

It seems that he is right. II semble qu'il ait raison. 



VOCABULAIRE 68. 

The hope. L'espoir. Hope. L'esperance. 

The past. Le passe. Experience. L'expe'rience. 

The present. Le present. The trial ; the proof. L'epreuve. 



SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LECON. 



269 



The future. 
The prospect. 
The reproach. 
The judgment. 
The example. 

To foretell. 
To maintain. 

To suppose. 

To infer. 

To incommode. 

To attach. 

To bring up. 

To reproach with. 

To dread. 

To result. 

Beforehand. 



p L'avenir. 

Le reproche. 
Le jugement. 
L'exemple. 



Pre dire.* 
Maintenir. 

!• Supposer. 

Incommoder. 

Attacher, 

Clever. 

Eeprocher. 

Eedouter. 

Resulter. 
j D'avance. 
( A l'avance. 



The issue. 

The conscience. 
Adversity. 
The consolation. 



To foresee. 
To assert. 
To sustain. 
To presume. 
To conjecture. 
To alleviate. 
To compensate. 
To take away. 
To discover. 
To seem. 
To follow from. 

At least 



L'issue. 

La conscience. 
L'adversite. 
La consolation, 

Pre voir, f 
J. Soutenir. 

t Presumer. 

Soulager. 

Dedommager. 

Enlever. 

Decouvrir. 

Sembler. 

S'ensuivre, 

iDu moins. 
Au moins. 



Exercice 68. 



1. Connaissez-vous l'homme le plus age qu'il y ait dans ce 
village? 2. C'est le vieux medecin, je crois; du moins, c'est 
l'homme le plus age que je connaisse. 3. Y a-t-il quelque chose 
qui soit plus doux que l'esperance que donne la religion ? 4. II 
n'y a rien qui soit plus doux. 5. Quel bien y a-t-il qui soit 
moins perissable que le souvenir d'une bonne action ? 6. H n'y 
en a aucun ; c'est le seul qu'on ne puisse nous enlever. 7. Quel 
est le premier homme qui ait concu l'espoir de decouvrir un nou- 
veau monde ? 8. Christophe Colombe est le premier homme qui 
ait concu cet espoir. 9. Quel est l'homme qui n'ait rien a se re- 
procher ? 10. II n'y en a point auquel le passe n'ait quelques 
reproches a faire. 11. Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui puisse pre- 
dire l'avenir? 12. II n'y a que Dieu seul qui puisse faire cela. 
13. Ne semble-t-il pas que la verite ait peur de se montrer aux 

* Predire is conjugated like dire, except that in the second person of the indicative 
present, it has predisez. 

t Prevoir follows the conjugation of voir, except in the future tenses, which are: je 
prevoirai. prevoirais. 



270 SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LEC^ON. 

hommes? 14. H semble plutot que les hommes aient peur de 
la verite. 15. Ne vous semble-t-il pas que Dieu veuille mettre 
l'homme de bien a l'epreuve, puisque tant de gens de bien sont 
dans l'adversite ? 16. II ine semble que Dieu veut que l'honnete 
homme souffre dans cette vie. 17. S'ensuit-il que vous ayez rai- 
son de vous plaindre? 18. II ne s'ensuit pas que nous ayons 
raison de nous plaindre. 19. Est-il probable qu'un jeune bomme 
sans experience, et qui suit ses propres conseils, reussisse dans le 
raonde ? 20. II est meme tres-probable qu'il ne reussira pas. 
21. Y a-t-il aucun homme qui prevoie l'avenir? 22. II n'y en 
a aucun qui le prevoie. 23. Votre frere soutient-il que notre 
ami ait raison ? 24. II soutient qu'il a raison, et que nous avons 
tort. 25. Maintenez-vous que cela soit ainsi ? 26. Je presume 
que c'est comme il le dit. 27. Si vous supposez que cela soit 
ainsi, vous pensez done qu'il faille dedommager notre ami du tort 
que nous lui avons fait ? 28. Certainement. 



Theme 68. 

1. The most useful lessons we can receive, are those of expe- 
rience. 2. Religion is the most beautiful gift that Heaven has 
made to earth ; it affords (offrir) to the virtuous man the sweet- 
est consolation in adversity, and the only hope which earth can- 
not destroy. 3. It seems that hope, in drawing on (en empietant 
sur) the future, wishes to compensate us for present disappoint- 
ments (des deboires du present). 4. The recollection of the past 
and the hope of the future, make us often neglect the present, 
the only moment which is truly ours (a nous). 5. Choose for a 
friend some one who may be able to give you good advice and 
a good example. 6. There are few men that are proof against 
(d Vepreuve de) adversity. 7. Most men dread public judgment 
(du public) , but there are few that care about the reproaches of 
their own consciences. 8. Of all evils, death is the only one the 
presence of which has never incommoded anybody 9. Divine 
Providence always places (mettre) the remedy beside the evil : 
there is not one duty to which it has not attached a good ; not 
one affliction for which virtue has not found a remedy. 10. Does 



SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LE£0N. 27 1 

it seem to you that my brother was wrong in undertaking that ? 
11. It seems to me that he was wrong, since he has not been 
able to succeed. 12. Does it follow from that, that he was 
wrong? 13. It follows that he was wrong, if he knew before- 
hand what would result from his proceedings (ses demarches). 
14. Do you suppose that any one can foresee the future? 15, 
I maintain that he could have foreseen the issue of that affair. 

16. If you assert that he is wrong, I assert that he is right. 

17. Is it true that your brother foretold this event? 18. It is 
not ; at least, I never heard him say so (je ne le lui az jamais 
ou'i dire). 19. It is true that he was brought up in Paris, but 
it does not follow from that, that he is a Frenchman. 20. It 
seems that our prospects in life (notre avenir) depend more on 
our character than on our talents. 



69. SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. 

Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive. 

254. The following conjunctions always govern the subjunc- 
tive : afin que* pour que, that, in order that ; a moins que, un- 
less ; avant que, before ; Men que, quoique, though, although ; de 
crainte que, de peur que, for fear, lest ; en cas que, au cos que, in 
case of; jusqu'a ce que, till, until; loin que, bien loin que, far 
from ; nonobstant que, notwithstanding ; non que, non pas que, 
not that ; pourvu que, provided ; sans que, without ; si peu que, 
however little ; soit que, whether ; suppose que, suppose that. 

Rem. — A moins que, de crainte que and de peur que, require ne 
before the verb. 

I write to you that you may be in- Je vous ecris afin que vous soyez 
formed of the affair before he instruit de l'affaire avant qu'il 
comes. vienne. 

* The prepositions afin de, pour, d moins de, avant de, de crainte de, de peur de, 
loin de, nans, have the same meaning as the corresponding conjunctions. They gov- 
ern the infinitive, and are used when there is no change of subject; 2&,Jemesuis 
adresse au prince afin cTobteair voire pardon. 



272 SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LECGN. 

He will not do it, unless yon speak II ne le fera pas, a moms que vous 

to him about it. ne lui en parliez. 

Speak to him about it, for fear that Parlez-lui-en, de crainte qu'un autre 

somebody else may do it. ne le fasse. 

He withdraws, lest some one should II se retire, de peur qu ? on ne lui en 

speak to him about it. parle. 

He will be punished, although he is II sera puni, quoiqu'il soit innocent. 

innocent. 

In case he has started, come and En cas qu'il soit parti, venez me le 

tell me of it. dire. 

"Wait for me, until I have done. Attendez-moi jusqu ? a ce que j'aie 

fini. 

Far from repenting it, his conduct Loin qu'il s'en repente, sa conduite 

is worse than ever. est pire que jamais. 

Provided you do it without his Pourvu que vous le fassiez sans 

knowing it* qu'il le sache. 



Remarks on the conjunction Que. 

255. Rem. 1. — Que is used to avoid the repetition of a pre- 
ceding conjunction, and governs the verb in the same manner as 
the leading conjunction does ; as, 

When I shall be tall and have Quand je serai grand et que j'aurai 

money. de l'argent. 

Unless you are diligent and take A moins que vous ne soyez diligent,. 

pains, you will not succeed. et que vous ne preniez de la pei- 

ne, vous ne reussirez pas. 
Whether I read or write. Soit que je lise ou que j'ecrive. 

Rem. 2. — "When que is used to avoid the repetition of si, it 
governs the subjunctive ; as, 

If you come and I am not in. Si vous venez et que je ne sois pas 

au logis. 

Rem. 3. — Que may be used in the place of many other con- 
junctions; as, 

Come near that I may tell you that. Approchez que (afin que) je vous 

dise cela. 
Wait until the weather is fine. Attendez qifil (jusqu'd ce qu?) fasse 

beau temps. 
I shall not be satisfied, unless I Je ne serai point content que (a 
know it, moins que), je ne le sache- 



SOIXANTE-KEUVIEME LEC/OK. 2lB 

Rem. 4. — Que, after Jest, is used for parce que ; as, 

If he does not come, it is because S'il ne yient pas, c'est qu'il ne peut 
he cannot. pas. 

Rem. 5. — Que, after an interrogation, is used for puis que ; as, 

What is the matter with you, that Qu'avez-vous done, que vous ne 
you do not eat ? mangez pas ? 

Rem. 6.— ^Que is used for comme ; as, 

Sick as he is, he cannot go out. Malade qu'il est, il ne peut pas sor- 

tir. 

Rem. 7. — In the same manner, que, with tout before the ad- 
jective, is used for quoique ; as, 

Sick as he is, he will not remain Tout malade qu'il est, il ne veut 
here. pas rester ici. 

Rem. 8. — Que, at the head* of a negative sentence, is used for 
pourquoi, and then pas is suppressed ; as, 
Why does he not come ? Que ne vient-il ? 

Rem. 9. — Que is used for combien, in exclamatory sentences; as, 

How kind you are ! Que vous etes bon ! 

How much kindness you have for Que de bonte vous avez pour moi ! 

me! 

How foolish he is not to do it ! Qu'il est sot de ne pas le faire ! 



256. The subjunctive is used after quelque. . . .que, quel que 7 
quoi que ; as, 

However rich they may be. Quelque riches qu'ils soient * 

Whatever riches you may have. Quelques richesses que vous ayez. 

Whatever may be the pains which Quelles que soient les peines que 

you take. vous preniez. 

Whatever you may do. Quoi que (quelque chose que) vous 

fassiez.f 

Of whomsoever you may speak. De qui que ce soit que vous parliez, 

* Quelque, before an adjective, is an adverb, and remains invariable. Quelque, before 
a noun, is an adjective, and takes the 8 in the plural. When followed by a verb, it is 
written in two words: quel que; and then quel is an adjective, and agrees in gender 
and number with the subject of the verb. 

t Quelque chose {quoi que), any thing whatsoever, is feminine; quelque chose, 
something, is masculine. 

12* 



274 



SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LEC.ON. 



257« De fa$on que, de maniere que, de sorte que, en sorte que, 
so that, in such a manner that ; sinon que, except that ; govern 
the subjunctive, when the result is doubtful, and the indicative, 
when it is not. 



Behave in such a manner that you 
may obtain his friendship. 

He behaved in such a manner that 
he obtained our esteem. 



Conduisez-vous de maniere que vous 

obteniez son amitie*. 
II s'est conduit de maniere qu'il a 

obtenu notre estime. 



VOCABULAIRE 



Ennui. 
Leisure. 
Amusement. 
The artist. 



L'ennui. 
Le loisir. 
L'amusernent. 
L'artiste. 



The lot; the share. Le partage. 



The occupation. 
The recreation. 
Sweetness. 
The sweets. 
The favor. 



L'occupation. 
La recreation. 
La douceur. 
Les douceurs. 
La faveur. 



To communicate. 
To turn away. 

To be at leisure. 
At leisure. 
Inconstant; fickle. 
Actual; present. 



Communiquer. 
Detourner. 

Avoir du loisir. 
A loisir. 
Inconstant. 
Actuel. 



To commit. Commettre, irr, 

To pardon. ) Pardonner qq. 

To forgive. ) ch. a qqn. 
To feel inclined to. Etre dispose a. 
Accordingly. En consequence. 

Frivolous. Frivole. 

Actually ; now. Actuellement. 



Exercice 69. 

1. ICcrirez-vous a votre associe avant que ce monsieur aille le 
voir ? 2. Je l'instruirai de ce qui s'est passe, afin qu'il agisse en 
consequence. 3. Croyez-vous que Dieu nous donne les biens 
pour que nous les gardions ? 4. Je crois qu'il nous les donne 
pour que nous secourions ceux qui sont dans le besoin. 5. Bien 
que ce jeune homme ait du talent, croyez-vous qu'il reussisse 
sans qu'il prenne de peine ? 6. Quelques talents qu'il ait, il ne 
reussira pas a moins qu'il ne se donne beaucoup de peine. 7. 
Votre mere ne veut-elle pas consentir que vous fassiez ce voyage, 
de crainte qu'il ne vous arrive quelque malheur ? 8. Ma mere 
consent que je le fasse ; mais je ne veux pas le faire avant qu'elle 
soit retablie, de crainte qu'on n'ait pas bien soin d'elle dans mon 



SOIXANTE-XEUVIEME LEC/ON. 2*75 

absence. 9. Votre oncle ne consent-il pas que ses filles aillent 
au spectacle, de peur qu'elles ne prennent froid? 10. lis ne con- 
sent pas qu'elles y aillent, de peur que le gout des plaisirs ne les 
detourne de leurs devoirs. 11. En cas que ce monsieur ne vienne 
pas, irez-vous le trouver? 12. J'irai, pourvu que vous vouliez 
m'accompagner. 13. Attendrez-vous jusqu'a ce que j'aie fini ma 
lettre? 14. J'attendrai jusqu'a ce que vous l'ayez finie. 15. Si 
vous etes chez vous ce soir, et que vous y soyez dispose, examinez 
a loisir le contenu de ce document, et dites-m'en demain votre 
opinion. 16. Donnez-le moi; je l'examinerai pourvu que je sois 
seul, et que je ne sois pas trop fatigue. 17. Que faites-vous done, 
que vous ne jouez pas ? 18. Attendez que je hausse (screw up) 
les cordes de mon instrument. 19. Qu'a votre frere, qu'il ne 
prend pas sa flute ? 20. C'est qu'il est enrhume. 21. Que ne 
reste-t-il chez lui, s'il est enrhume ? 22. Tout enrhume qu'il est, 
il ne veut pas rester a la maison. 23. Savant qu'il est, ne peut- 
il pas gagner sa vie sans travailler ? 24. Quelque savant qu'on 
soit, on n'en est pas moins oblige de travailler pour gagner sa 
vie. 25. Que d' obligations je vous ai! Comment pourrai-je 
jamais m'acquitter enversvous? 26. Quels que soient lesser- 
vices que je vous aie rendus, il suffit de votre amitie pour me de- 
dommager de mes peines. 27. Quoi que vous fassiez, agissez de 
maniere qu'on soit content de vous. 28. Je ferai de mon mieux, 
de sorte que personne ne se plaigne de moi. 29. Quelles que 
soient les peines que vous preniez, pensez-vous yreussir? 30. 
Soit que j'y reussisse ou non, je ferai toujours de facon que ma 
conscience n'ait rien a me reprocher. 



Theme 69. 

1. If you see my brother before he goes to the exchange, will 
you communicate to him the contents of this letter, that he may 
act accordingly. 2. In case you do not see him, I shall go to 
the exchange myself, for fear that my brother may sell those rail- 
road shares below their present value. 3. Though you are rich 
and have talents, do not rely too much on those advantages. 4. 
For time is too fickle, that we should rely on its favors. 5. How- 



276 SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LECON. 

ever rich you may be, whatever talents you may have, the world 
will not esteem you, unless you behave well. 6. Although the 
sweets of life are often the fruits of art, they are not always the 
lot of the artist. 7. How many days pass by, without our trying 
to become better ! 8. We avoid those men, not that we fear 
them, but lest they turn us away from our occupations. 9. Ad- 
versity, far from being an evil, is often a remedy. 10. Many 
people care little (s'embarr assent pen) about the road, provided 
it leads to wealth. 11. Suppose he has committed that fault, 
shall we not pardon him ; we, who like that others (on) should 
forgive us our faults? 12. When you are at leisure, and feel in- 
clined to it, examine this and tell me your opinion of it. 13. If 
I am at home, and am not too tired, I shall do it to-night. 14. 
Whatever you study, unless you set to it {s'y mettre) with a good 
heart, and apply to it with ardor, you will not make much pro- 
gress. 15. If ennui comes over you (vous gagne), it is because you 
do not like reading, and do not take sufficient recreation. 16. 
Why do you not choose some useful occupation, which may turn 
away your mind from frivolous amusements. 17. Come near, 
that I may show you this. 18. Wait until I finish what I am 
doing. 19. What is the matter with your brother, that he does 
not dance? 20. Sick as he is, he cannot dance. 21. Why did 
lie not stay at home, if he was sick ? 22. Sick as he was, he 
was not willing to stay at home. 23. How foolish he was, not 
to stay at home, since he was sick ! 24. Whatever you wish to 
say, say it in such a manner that your words may not hurt any 
one's feelings (blesser V amour propre de qqn.). 



70. SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LE£ON. 

Subjunctive — Imperfect and Pluperfect. 

258. (a.) The imperfect of the subjunctive is obtained by add- 
ing the endings sse 1 sses, t, ssions, ssiez y ssent, to the first person 
of the preterit, after dropping its final letter ; as, 



SOIXAXTE-DIXIEME LEfOJf. 



277 



Je parlai. 
Je parlasse. 
Tu parlasses. 
11 parldt. 
Nous parlassions, 
Vous parlassiez. 
lis parlassent. 



Je finis. 
Je finisse. 
Tufinisses. 
Ilfinit. 

Nous finissions. 
Vous finissiez. 
lis Jinissent. 



Je recus. 
Je recusse, 
Tu regusses. 
11 regut. 

Nous regussions. 
Vous regussiez. 
lis regussent. 



Je vexdis. 
Je vendisse. 
Tu vendisses. 
11 vendit. 
Nous vendissions, 
Vous vendissiez, 
lis vendissent. 



(b.) The pluperfect is formed from the imperfect of the auxili- 
ary and the past participle of the verb ; as, 



That I might have spoken, <fcc. 
That I might have come, &q. 



Que j'eusse parle, cfec. 
Que je fusse venu, &c. 



Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive. 

259. (a.) After the present or future tense, the dependent verb 
is put in the present of the subjunctive, to express present or fu- 
ture time, and in the perfect, to express past time, with reference 
to the first verb ; as, 

I doubt ) your doing it. Je doute ) que vous le fassiez. 

I shall doubt ) your having done it. Je douterai ) que vous Tayez fait. 

(6.) After one of the past or one of the conditional tenses, the 
dependent verb is put in the imperfect of the subjunctive, to ex- 
press present or future time, and in the pluperfect, to express past 
time, always with reference to the first verb ; as, 



I have doubted 
I was doubting 
T doubted 
I had doubted 
I should doubt 
I should have 
doubted 



your doing it. 

your having 

done it. 



J'ai doute 
Je doutais 
Je doutai 
J'avais doute 
Je douterais 



l 



J'aurais doute J 



que vous le fissiez. 
que vous l'eussiez 
fait. 



260. Rem. 1. — Though the governing verb is in the present 
tense, the dependent verb is put in the imperfect or pluperfect of 
the subjunctive, when it is accompanied by a conditional clause ; as, 

Do you think that I could speak to Croyez-vous que je pusse parle a 
your brother, if I should go there. votre fr£re, si j'y allais. 



278 soixante-dixieme le^on. 

Rem. 2. — Though the governing verb is in the perfect, the de- 
pendent verb is put in the present, of the subjunctive, when it 
expresses something that is true at all times, or future time with 
reference to the present ; as, 

God endowed us with reason, that Dieu nous a donne la raison afin que 
we may discern good from eviL nous discernions le bien d'avec le 

mal. 

I have not said any thing that can Je n'ai rien dit qui puisse lui de- 
displease him. plaire. 

Rem. 3. — After the past indefinite, the subjunctive perfect may- 
be used instead of the imperfect ; as, 

I have never found any one who Je n'ai jamais trouve personne qui 
loved me enough to tell me the m'ait assez aime pour me dire la 
whole truth. verite tout entiere. 



261 • The subjunctive* is used at the beginning of a sentence, 
to express a wish or imprecation, I pray, or i" wish, being under- 
stood; as, 

Would to God it were so ! Plut au ciel qu'il en fut ainsi 1 

May you be happy ! Puissiez-vous etre heureux ! 

Rem. 1. — We have seen that verbs expressing fear or appre- 
hension, and the conjunctions a moins que, de crainte que, de 
peur que, require ne before the following verb in the subjunctive ; 
this is also the case with the verbs empecher and prendre garde ; 

as, 

I shall prevent him from going out. J'empecherai qu'il ne sorte. 
Take care that the child does not Prenez garde que l'enfant ne tombe. 
faU. 

Rem. 2 — The verbs nier, disconvenir, desesperer, and douter, 
also require ne before the following verb in the subjunctive, but 
only when they are used negatively or interrogatively ; as, 

I do not doubt but he will come. Je ne doute pas qu'il ne vienne. 

Do you doubt that he will come ? Doutez-vous qu'il ne vienne ? 

* Sdvoir is the only verb which is used in the subjunctive, without any other phrase 
preceding it; but only in the first person singular, and in a negative sense; as, Je ne 
bache rien de plus commim. Pas queje sache. 



SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LECON. 



279 



VOCABULAIRE TO. 



The grape. 
The effort. 



Le raisin. 
L'effort. 



The housekeeping. Le menage. 
y Le dessein. 



The grape-vine. La vigne. 
The resolution. La resolution. 
The boarding- ) 
school. 



The design. 
The plan. 



Economy. 



y La pension. 
L'eeonomie. 



To insist on. 
To persevere. 
To preserve. 
To keep, (fruit, 
&c.) 

To spare ; to save, fipargner. 



■I 



Insist er sur, a* 
Perseverer a. 

Conserver. 



To deny. 

To obey. 
To carry 

thing throu; 
To accompli] 
Economical. 
Saving. 
Exacting. 



any | 
DUgh. >• 
sh it, ) 



Ts"ier. 

Disconvenir. 
Obeir a qqn. 

Yenir a bout 
d'une chose. 

Econome. 

Menager. 

Exigeant. 



To persist in. 
To amass. 

To preserve ; to 
guard against. 

To husband. 
To save. 

To despair. 
To disobey. 

To do things by 
halves. 

Prodigal. 
Wasteful. 
"With impunity. 



P'ersister dans, a* 
Amasser. 

y Preserver. 

y Menagen 

Desesperer. 

Desobeir a qqn. 

) Faire les choses a 
) demi 

>• Prodigue. 
Impunement 



Exercice YO. 



1. Fallait-il que vous parlassiez frangais lorsque vous etiez a 
la pension de Mme. B . . . . ? 2. II fallait que je parlasse francais 
et que j'etudiasse beaucoup. 3. Yotre maitre de francais exi- 
geait-il que vous ecrivissiez les themes? 4. II exigeait que nous 
ecrivissions les themes et que nous apprissions les lecons par 
cceur. 5. A-t-il fallu que votre frere restat a la maison hier au 
soir? 6. Mon pere ne voulait pas qu'il sortit, de peur qu'il ne 
prit frokl. 7. Si Ton batissait cette maison, ne faudrait : il pas 
que vos voisins coupassent leur vigne ? 8. II le faudrait ; mais 
ce serait dommage qu'il fallut la couper avant que les raisins 
fussent murs. 9. Ne fallait-il pas que ces marchauds vendissent 
leurs marchandises a profit, pour qu'ils pussent continuer leur 



* The first preposition before a noun, the second before the infinitive. 



280 SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LE£ON. 

commerce? 10. II fallait qu'ils eussent du profit. 11. Que 
voudriez-vous que je fisse de cet habit a demi-use ? 12. Je vou- 
drais que vous le missiez de temps a autre pour menager votre 
habit neuf. 13. Monsieur votre pere aimerait-il que vous fissiez 
les ehoses a demi, et que vous fussiez prodigue? 14. II n'aime 
point qu'on fasse les cboses a demi, ni qu'on soit prodigue. 15. 
Bien que ce marchand eut du bonheur, croyez-vous qu'il eut 
amasse de si grands biens, s'il n'avait pas ete econome? 16. Je 
ne pense pas qu'il eut amasse de si grands biens, s'il n'avait pas 
vecu avec economie. 17. N'est-il a propos qu'on soit econome 
quand on est jeune, et qu'on epargne quelque chose pour la 
vieillesse? 18. II faut etre menager quand on est jeune, et con- 
server quelque chose pour ses vie ux jours. 19. Croyez-vous que 
notre entreprise eut reussi sans que nous eussions fait de grands 
efforts pour en venir a bout ? 20. Je ne crois pas qu'elle eut 
reussi, si nous n'avions pas fait de grands efforts, et que nous n'y 
eussions pas persevere. 21. Yotre beau-frere persista-t-il dans 
sa resolution de faire ce voyage ? 22. Oui, M. ; et son epouse 
persista a l'accompagner. 23. Que le bon Dieu les preserve! 
24. Plut au Ciel qu'ils fussent deja de retour. 25. Si le general 
avait commande de faire feu sur les citoyens, doutez-vous que les 
soldats n'eussent obei a ses ordres? 26. Je ne doute pas qu'il 
n'y eussent desobei. 27. Niez-vous qu'il n'ait donne de tels or- 
dres? 28. Je ne disconviens pas que cela ne soit ainsi. 29. Ce 
monsieur desesperait-il que nous ne vinssions a bout de notre 
entreprise ? 30. II desesperait que vous en vinssiez a bout. 



Theme 70. 

1. When we were at Mrs. B . . . . 's boarding-school, we had to 
speak French. 2. Our French teacher was very exacting {des 
plus exigeants) ; he wanted us to learn the exercises by heart. 
3. He required that we should write French compositions. 4. 
Although we would gladly have dispensed (bien volontiers) 
with that part of our task, he insisted on it, so that (si bien que) 
we were obliged to obey him. 5. I do not think that we should 
have learned to speak this beautiful language, if our teacl : had 



SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LECON. 281 

been less exacting, and if he had not persisted (perseverer) in his 
efforts to (pour) make us speak it, in spite of ourselves (malgre 
que* nous en eussions). 6. Whatever you do, do it well, and do 
not accustom yourselves to do things by halves. 7. Husband 
well your time, and be saving of your money, for the loss of time 
is an irreparable loss, and prodigal youth leads to needy old age 
(jeunesse prodigue amine vieillesse necessiteuse). 8. Heaven has 
granted (donner) you wealth, not that you should squander it 
away (dissiper), but that (pour que) you should make a good 
use of it (212). 9. God has granted (accorder) sleep to the 
wicked, that the good might have a few moments of quiet 
(tranquillite). 10. I doubt whether our neighbors would have 
amassed such great wealth, if they had not lived with economy. 
11. I wish you would be more economical. 12. Would you 
wish us to preserve a part of these grapes? 13. Would to God 
my brother would give up the idea of going to the war ! 14. If 
he persists in his resolution, I will pray that Heaven may pre- 
serve him in the midst of danger. 15. Do you despair of his 
coming back? 16. I do not ; but I wish something would occur 
(survenir) which would prevent him from starting. 17. Take 
care that he does not hear you say so. 18. I would myself pre- 
vent his starting, if I had it in my power. 19. Did you doubt 
my being opposed (oppose) to this expedition ? 20. I never 
doubted war being a great calamity (malheur) for a country. 
21. I doubt whether our friends would have carried through 
their enterprise without our assistance. 



71. SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LEQOK 
Imperative — 2d and 3d Pers. Sing., and 2d Plur. 

262 # (a.) In the second person singular of the imperative, the 
form of the verb is the same as in the first person singular of the 
present of the indicative ; as, 

Speak. Come. See. Take. Parle. Viens. Vois. Prends. 

* The conjunction malgre que is used only with the verb avoir, preceded by en, 



282 soixante-onzieme le£on, 

Exceptions : 
Go. Have. Be. Know. 



Go and call him. 
Come and see me. 



Va. Aie. Sois. Sache. 

Ya l'appeler. 
Viens me voir. 



Eem. — When the second person singular of the imperative 
ends with a vowel, s is added before y, and before en, the pronoun. 



Go there. 

Offer some to those ladies. 



Yas-y. 

Offres-en a ces dames. 



(b.) The third person, singular and plural, of the imperative, 
is the same as the third person, singular and plural, of the sub- 
junctive present ; as, 

Let him have. Let them have. QuHl ait. Qu'ils aient. 

Let him say so. Let him do it. QuHl le dise. Qu'il lefasse. 



263. TO BOIL. 


Boiled. 


Bouillir, irr. 


Bouilli. 


I boil. 


We boil. 


Je bous. 


Nous bouillons. 


To MOVE. 


Moved. 


Mouvoir, irr. 


Mu. 


I move. 


We move. 


Je meus. 


Nous mouvons. 


They move. 




lis meuvent. 




To CONCLUDE. 


Concluded. 


Conclure, irr. 


Conclu. 


I conclude. 


We conclude. 


Je conclus. 


Nous concluons. 


To RESOLVE. 


Resolved. 


Resoudre. 


Resolit. 


I resolve. 


We resolve. 


Je re sous. 


Nous resolvons. 


To GROW. 


Grown. 


Croitre. 


Cru. 


I grow. 


We grow. 


Je crois. 


Nous croissons. 



264 • Rem. 1. — To grow and an adjective are generally ex- 
pressed in French by a verb of the second conjugation, formed 
from the adjective ; as, grandir, to grow tall ; grossir, to grow 
larger, to swell ; rajeunir, to grow young again ; vieillir, to grow 
old ; blanchir, to grow white ; verdir, to grow green. These, 
and generally all other inceptive verbs, are construed with avoir, 
when they express action, and with etre, when they express the 
state at which any thing has arrived ; as, 

You have grown much in a short Yous avez bien grandi en peu de 

time. temps. 

You have grown very tall. Yous etes bien grandi 



SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LE£ON. 



283 



Kem. 2. — The verb /aire is necessary before all verbs that ex- 
press action which supposes an agent different from the subject : 

Boil some water. Faites bouillir de l'eau. 

Cook the meat. Faites cuire la viande. 

Koast it. Faites-la rotir. 

And as we say : f observe, je remarque cela, I observe that ; we 
must also sav : 



I will observe to you that . . . 
I called his attention to that. 



Je vous ferai remarquer que . 
Je lui ai fait observer cela. 



265* Under shelter. 
To be sheltered from the storm. 
To shelter one's self. 
Let us seek shelter somewhere. 

Along. 

All along this walk. 

All the year round. 

Opposite. 

In front of, over the way. 

On account of. 

He lives opposite the theatre. 

"We lodge over the way. 

For what reason ? 

To keep house. 

To break up housekeeping. 

The keeping of a family comes 

high. 
To board, to live in a boarding-house. 
To go to board. 
To board, to receive boarders. 



A Vabri {de). A convert (de). 

Etre a l'abri de l'orage. 

Se mettre a l'abri. 

Cherchons a nous mettre a l'abri 

quelque part. 
Le long de. 

Tout le long de cette allee. 
Tout le long de l'annee. 
Vis a vis, (adv.) Vis-d-vis de, (prep.) 
En face, (adv.) En face de, (prep.) 
A cause de. 

II demeure vis-a-vis du theatre. 
Nous logeons ici en face. 
A cause de quoi. 
Tenir maison, or menage. 
Rompre son menage. 
L'entretien d'une famille coute cher. 

Etre en pension. 

Se mettre en pension. 

Prendre en pension. 



VOCABULAIRE Yl. 

The Creator. Le Createur. The forget-me-not. La germandree. 

The language. Le langage. Poetry. La poesie. 

The emblem. L'embl6me. The rose. La rose. 

The lily. Le lis. The tulip. La tulipe. 

The pink. L'oeillet. The daisy. La marguerite. 

Mignonnette. Le reseda. Gilliflower. La giroflee. 



284 



SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LE£ON. 



The maintenance. 
The sweetmeat. 
A shed. 
A shelter. 



L'entretien. 
Le bonbon. 
Un hangar. 
Un abri. 



The hyacinth. 
The violet. 
A green -house. 
A walk. 



My Yis-a-via,(danc.) Mon vis-a-vis. The face. 



L'hyacinthe 
La violette. 
Une serre. 
Une allee. 
La face. 



To boil. 
To cook. 
To move. 
To conclude. 
To grow. 
To fly away. 
To break. 
To break up. 
Kapidly. 

Opposite. 

Along. 



Bouillir, irr. 
Cuire, irr. 
Mouvoir, irr. 
Conclure, irr. 
Croitre, irr. 
S'envoler. 

- Rompre. 

Kapidement 

Vis-a-vis. 

Le long de. 



To fry. 
To roast. 
To stir. 
To resolve. 
To grow tall. 
To escape. 

To subject. 

Very fast, visibly. 
In front o£ ^ 

Over the way. ) 
On account of. 



Frire, irr. 
R6tir. 
Bouger. 
Resoudre (de), irr. 
Grandir. 
S'e'chapper (a). 

Assujettir (a). 

A vue d'ceil. 

En face. 

A cause de. 



Exercice 71. 



1. Viens voir, Henri, ce que ma tante m'a donne. 2. Quelle 
jolie corbeille ! laisse-moi la voir. 3. Tiens, la voila ; aie soin 
de ne pas la casser. 4. N'aie pas peur que je la casse. 5. Va 
eueillir des fleurs au jar din. 6. Viens-y done avec moi. 7. 
Voila des hyacinthes le long de cette allee. 8. Ob, qu'elles sont 
belles ! 9. Et voici, tout le long du mur, des ceillets et des mar- 
guerites. 10. Cueilles-en pour remplir ta corbeille. 11. Wen 
cueille pas sans demander permission a maman. 12. Maman est 
dans la cour ; vas-y lui demander si nous pouvons en eueillir. 
13. II va pleuvoir; sauvons-nous. 14. Ce ne sera qu'une on- 
dee ; restons ici sous cet arbre ; nous y serons a l'abri de la pluie. 
15. Ou le jardinier va-t-il mettre les tulipes? 16. II va les met- 
tre a couvert dans la serre. 17. N'est-ce pas que tout croitra 
rapidement apres la pluie? 18. Certainement : mes jeunes ar- 
bres grandiront a. vue d'oeil, et dans quelques jours nous aurons 
des roses, du reseda et de la giroflee. 19. Tiens, voila ce bel 
oiseau qui vient se mettre a Tabri sous notre hangar. 20. Sois 
tran quille ; ne bouge pas; si tu te meus, il s'envolera. 21. Voi- 



SOIXANTE-OKZIEME LECOX. 285 

la qu'il entre dans la serre ; prends garde qu'il n'en sorte. 22. 
J'einpecherai bien qu'il ne s'en aille ; je fermerai la porte. 23. 
Mets-toi en face de la fenetre pour empecher qu'il ne s'echappe 
par le carreau casse. 24. La fenetre vis-a-vis est ouverte ; il 
s'echappera par la. 25. C'est dommage ;. il est si beau ! 26. 
Qu'il s'en aille, le pauvre petit ; il aime mieux la liberte qu'une 
cage doree et nos bonbons. — 27. Faut-il que la cuisiniere fasse 
bouillir le gigot? 28. Je l'aime mieux roti; qu'elle le porte 
chez le boulanger, pour le faire cuire au four (oven). 29. Qu'a- 
vez-vous resolu de faire ? 30. J'ai resolu de rompre mon me- 
nage et de me mettre en pension. 31. Et a cause de quoi vou- 
lez-vous faire cela? 32. Parce que l'entretien d'une famille 
coute clier. 33. Vous croyez done qu'il coute moins cher d'etre 
en pension que de tenir menage ? 34. Oui ; ma femme m'a fait 
observer cela depuis long-temps. 35. Ou voulez-vous vous met- 
tre en pension? 36. Chez la dame francaise qui demeure vis-a- 
vis d'ici. 37. Que concluez-vous du discours de ce monsieur? 
38. J'en conclus que madame n'aime pas a etre assujettie aux 
soins du menage tout le long de l'annee. 



Theme 71. 

(In the following Exercise, use the second person singular in the sentences which are 
marked with an asterisk.) 

1. * Stop a moment, Henry, behold these tulips, with their 
colors (au teint) so fresh and bright .(si eclatant). 2. * See yon- 
der, pinks and daisies all along that walk. 3. * Go and gather 
some, and take some to your sisters. 4. How beautiful those 
hyacinths are ! 5. * Do not gather any of them, without asking 
permission of the gardener. 6. * He is yonder, go thither and 
ask him, if you may gather a few. 7. In another month (dans 
un mois d'ici) we shall have roses, mignonnette and gillyflower ; 
shall we not, uncle ? 8. * Certainly : you are fond of flowers, Hen- 
ry ? 9. I am, uncle (Oui, mon oncle) ; I often think, when looking 
at them (en les regardant) in silence, that they are telling me, with 
a secret voice (d^une voix secrete), things from Heaven. 10. And 
how sorry I am, when some one comes, who breaks the silence 



286 SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE^ON. 

and disturbs my dream (et me tire de ma reverie). 11. All na- 
ture speaks of its Creator : the language of flowers is the language 
of poetry v which is a daughter of Heaven. 12. The rose, the 
queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty ; the white lily resem- 
bles innocence; the violet indicates {marque) gentleness; and 
the modest forget-me-not teaches us not to despise what is hum- 
ble and lowly {humble et has). 13. I believe we are going to 
have a storm ; there, it thunders already (voila deja le tonnerre 
qui gronde). 14. Let us take shelter under that shed, or in the 
green-house. 15. Be not afraid of the thunder; it is but anoth- 
er sound (une variation de ton) of that same voice that speaks to 
you in the flowers. 16. There is not a breath (un souffle) of 
wind; the leaves on the trees do not move. 17. After this rain 
the grass will grow rapidly. 18. My corn (mats) has grown 
very fast. 19. It has grown so much, that I can hide in it (m?y 
cacher). 20. Tell the cook to fry (subj.) the fish. 21. Boil 
some water. 22. Have you resolved upon breaking up house- 
keeping? 23. We have concluded on going to board, on account 
of the bad health (du peu de sante) of my wife. 24. I will also 
remark to you, that it is less expensive (coiiteux) to board than 
to keep house. 25. I am glad that my wife has escaped, at least 
for some time, the cares of a house (menage), to which she was 
subjected all the year round. 26. We board over the way. 27. 
We lodge in the front ; our windows are opposite yours. 28. 
Let that man wait until I am ready. 29. Let those men say 
what they like ; what does that matter to us ? 



72. SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LEgON. 

Remarks on the pronoun Ce. 

266t The infinitive is sometimes used as the subject of a sen- 
tence; as, 

To speak too much is imprudent. Parler trop est imprudent. 



soixa:s,te-douzieme lec/on. 287 

Rem. 1. — Etre, placed between two infinitives, must be pre- 
ceded by the pronoun ce ; as, 
To do good to men, is to do homage Faire du bien aux hommes, c'est 

to God. rendre hommage a Dieu. 

Rem. 2. — Ce is used after two or more infinitives, and after an 
attributive clause of some length. 

Eating, drinking and sleeping, is all Boire, manger, dormir, c'est tout ce 

he does. qu'il fait. 

The surest means of having friends, Le plus sur moyen d'avoir des amis, 

is to be good and obliging. c'est d'etre bon et obligeant. 

Rem. 3. — When ce, followed by a relative pronoun, begins a 
sentence, it is to be repeated before the verb of the second prop- 
osition, if that verb is etre ; as, 

What is certain, is that the world Ce qui est certain, c'est que le 
is wrong. monde est de travers. 

Rem. 4. — When, in this case, Ure is followed by a noun, ce 
may be omitted, if the noun is in the singular.* 

What we seek is truth. Ce que nous cherchons, est, or c'est, 

la verite. 

Rem. 5. — Eire, preceded by ce, is put in the plural only, when 
it is followed by the third person plural ; as, 

Vice is what degrades man. Ce sont les vices qui degradent 

1'homme. 

Rem. 6. — Etre, preceded by ce and introducing a conjunctive 
sentence, either remains in the present, or corresponds in tense 
with the time it refers to ; as, 

It was in Paris that I saw him. C'est a Paris que je l'ai vu. 

It was at the moment when I was C'etait au moment ou j'allais partir. 
going to start. 

Rem. 7. — Ce and que are sometimes separated by etre and some 
quality that refers to the noun following que, for the purpose of 
expressing a simple proposition with greater energy. 

Csesar was a great captain. C'etait un grand capitaine que Ce- 

sar. 
Paris is a fine place to live in. C'est un beau sejour que Paris. 

* When ttre is followed by an adjective, ce is not used. 



288 



SOIXANTE-BOUZIEME LE£ON. 



Rem. 8. — When que is followed by an infinitive, de must pre- 
cede the infinitive ; as, 

It is a misfortune to be without C'est un malheur que d'etre sans 
friends. amis.* 

Eem. 9. — Cest a vous a. . , bespeaks turn; c'est a vous de. . 
duty or right ; as, 

It is your turn to speak. C'est a vous a parler. 

It is your duty (or your right) to C'est a vous de parler. 
speak. 



267« To be of use. 
Of what use is that knife to 
gardener ? 

He uses it to prune his vine. 

To be of no use. 

To be of no use, (worthless.) 

To avail nothing. 

That cloak is of no use to me 

never wear it. 
What avails it to weep ? 
It avails nothing. 
To stand instead of. 
I use this cloak as a cover for 

horse. 

To be as a father to any one. 

To escort a lady. 

To live like a Christian. 

To behave like a blunderhead. 



Servir a. 
the A quoi ce couteau sert-il au jardi- 
nier ? 

JI1 lui sert a tailler sa vigne. 
II s'en sert pour tailler sa vigne. 
Servir a rien. 

t Servir de rien. 

; I Ce manteau ne me sert a rien; je 
ne le mets jamais. 
A quoi sert-il de pleurer? 
Cela ne sert de rien. 
Servir de. 
my Ce manteau sert de couverture au 
cheval. 
( Servir de pere a qqn. 
( Tenir lieu de pere a qqn. 
Servir de cavalier a une dame. 
Vivre en chretien. 
Se comporter en etourdi. 



268. 

Let us have pity on our fellow- 
creatures, and lend a helping 
hand to the unfortunate. 

Religion commands us to do it; 
moreover, humanity obliges us to 
it ; besides, the interests of socie- 
ty require it. 



Ayons pitie de nos semblables, et 
tendons la main aux malheureux. 

La religion nous Fordonne ; outre 
cela, l'humanite nous y oblige. 
D'ailleurs, l'interet de la societe" 
le demande. 



* In such sentences, que may be omitted ; as, Cest un devoir d'obliger see amis ; 
or, C 'fet un devoir que d'obliger ses amis. 



SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE^ON. 



289 



To bestow alms. 
To practise virtue. 
To practise speaking. 
To exercise one another in conver- 
sation. 
To keep up a conversation. 
To be the first to propose a thing. 
To expatiate on the subject. 
To do justice. 
To render, or administer justice. 



Faire la charite, or l'aam6ne. 
Pratiquer la vertu. 
S'exercer a parler. 
S'exercer les uns les autres a la con- 
versation. 
Soutenk uoe conversation. 
Prendre ^initiative. 
S'etendre sur un sujet. 
Rendre justice. 
Rendre la justice. 



The Christian. 
Love. 

Our fellow-crea- 
ture. 
Our neighbor. 
The unfortunate. 
The dream. 
The gentleman. 
The cavalier. 
The use. 
Pasteboard. 
The band-box. 



VOCABULAIRE 12. 




Le chretien. 


Oharity. 


La charity. 


L'amour. 


Friendship. 


L'amitie. 


Notre semblable. 


Humanity. 


L'humanite. 


Le prochain. 


Justice. 


La justice. 


Les malheureux. 


Compassion. 


La compassion. 


Le reve, le songe. 


Pity. 


La pitie. 


Le cavalier. 


The meeting. 


[•La reunion. 




The company. 


L'emploi. 


The rule, the ruler. La regie. 


Le carton. 


The cover. 


[• La couverture. 




The blanket. 



ihize. ) 
ssion- r 



To be of use. 
To sympath: 
To compassion- 
ate. 

To split, to cleave. 
To practise. 
To exercise. 
To sustain. ) 

To keep up. ) 

Commendable. 
Paternal 
Thoughtless. 
Furthermore. 
Besides, moreover. 
At all events. 



Servir a. 

Compatir. 

Fendre. 

Pratiquer. 

Exercer. 

Soutenir. 

Louable. 

Paterae! 

fitourdi. 

De plus. 

D'ailleurs. 

Quoiqu'il en soit. 



To be as. 

To take pity on. 
To pity. 

To hold out. 
To converse (on). 

To jest. 

Charitable. 
Brotherly. 
Advanced, 
Besides. 
Moreover. 
Like, (equal to.) 
13 



Servir de. 

[■ Avoir pitie de. 

Tendre. 

S'entretenir (de), 
Converser. 

Plaisanter. 

Charitable. 
Fraternel. 
Avance". 
Outre cela. 
En outre. 
En. 



29G SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LECOtf. 



EXERGICE 72. 



1. Dites-moi quel est le premier devoir du chretien. 2. Ai- 
mer le bon Dieu avant tout, et le prochain comme soi-merne, 
c'est le premier devoir du chretien. 3. Serions-nous heureux, si 
nous vivions eu bons chretiens ? 4. Oui, M. ; vivre en chretien, 
c'est vivre heureux. 5. Que faut-il faire pour v T ivre en bon chre- 
tien I 6. Outre ce que je viens de dire, il faut compatir aux 
maux de ses semblables ; de plus, il faut tendre la main aux mal- 
heureux. 7. Ne faut-il pas faire des charites ? 8. La religion 
nous l'ordonne ; outre cela, l'humanite nous y oblige ; d'ailleurs, 
Fetat serait en danger, si les riches ne secouraient pas les pauvres, 
9. N'est-ce pas un beau present du ciel que la religion chretien- 
ne? 10. De tous les presents que le ciel nous a faits, c'est le 
plus beau. 11. Aimez-vous a converser avec vos amis? 12. 
C'est un bien doux plaisir pour moi que de m'entretenir avec 
eux. 13. De quoi vous entretenez-vous ? 14. Nous nous entre- 
nons de nos etudes. 15. Conversez-vous en francais avec eux ? 
16. Pas sou vent; nous le trouvons difficile de soutenir la con- 
versation en francais. 17. Yous devriez vous exercer a la con- 
versation les uns les autres ; on est moins g6ne entre amis qu'a- 
vec des etrangers. 18. C'est vrai ; mais il est si difficile de sou- 
tenir une conversation dans une langue etrangere ; d'ailleurs, il 
faudrait que quelqu'un prit l'initiative, et introduisit la coutume 
de parler francais dans nos reunions, et personne n'y parait dis- 
pose. 19. C'est a vous de prendre cette initiative; vous etes le 
plus avance. 20. Yous plaisantez ; je ne suis pas plus avance 
que les autres. 21. Quoi qu'il en soit, je vous conseille de cher- 
cher les occasions de vous exercer a parler. 22. Yoici ce que 
j'ai resolu de faire : je veux me mettre en pension dans une mai- 
son, ou presque tous les pensionnaires {boarders) sont francais. 
23. Je vais vous faire quelques questions sur les difficultes que 
presente l'emploi du verbe servir ; y repondez-vous ? 24. Nous 
y repondrons bien volontiers, 25. A quoi cette hache sert-elle 
au cuisinier? 26. II s'en sert pour fendre son bois. 27. A 
quoi ces cartons servent-ils a votre frere ? 28. lis lui servent a 
y mettre ses papiers. 29. Cet outil vous sert-il a quelque chose? 



SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE£ON. 291 

30. II ne me sert a rien. 31. Ce cMle vous sert-il de rnanteau? 
32. II me sert de rnanteau, et quelquefois il me sert de couver- 
ture, la nuit. 33. Est-ce a vous a repondre, M. Henri? 34. 
Non, c'est a M. Charles. 35. Eh bien, M. Charles, a quoi sert-il 
de se plaindre, quand on est malade? 36. Cela ne sert de rien. 

37. Voila dix heures qui sonnent, c'est le temps de m'en aller. 

38. Cette pendule avance d'un quart d'heure. 39. Je vous de- 
mande pardon ; je crois plutot qu'elle retarde de quelques mi- 
nutes. 40. Pardonnez-moi, l'horloger est venu la remonter ce 
matin, et il Fa reglee en meme temps. 



Theme 72. 

1. To do good to those that have offended us, is a commend- 
able action ; but what is far (bien) more difficult, is to do justice 
to those who have not offended us. 2. Of all the virtues, the 
one we are most concerned (quHl nous importe le plus) in prac- 
tising, is charity. 3. To bestow alms is to render ourselves 
agreeable to God ; moreover, what would become of that crowd 
of unfortunate beings (tous ces malheureux) that want our succor, 
if we did not lend them a helping hand. 4. Humanity obliges 
us to it ; besides, society would be in danger, if the rich should 
withdraw [refuser a) their assistance from the poor. 5. Let us, 
therefore, pity our fellow-creatures ; our own interest commands 
us to do it ; furthermore, our duty binds us to it. 6. Let us be 
charitable ; and when the poor {sing,) stretch out their hands 
(sing.) to us, let us not turn away our eyes ; the sight of misery 
does good to the heart of the Christian ; it stirs up (excite?*) 
compassion, which extends the sphere (f) of brotherly love. 7. 
But why should I expatiate on this subject, since words avail 
nothing. 8. What we want, are good actions, good examples. 
9. The earth would be (266, E. 7) a blessed abode (un heureux 
sejour), if men lived here like true Christians! 10. And life 
would be a beautiful dream, if every hand that is held out to us, 
were the hand of a brother! 11. Do you converse with your 
friends in the French language (en francais)^ 12. I am not 
sufficiently advanced to keep up a conversation in French. 13. 



292 SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LE£ON. 

In hearing you speak, one would not suppose it (A vous entendre 
parler on ne dirait pas cela). 14. You are jesting; I assure you 
that I am at a loss* how to speak (de dire) two words in succes- 
sion (de suite). 15. It is not for want of knowledge (savoir), I 
believe; you should practise speaking. 16. We propose, my 
friends and I, forming a society, for the purpose of exercising one 
another in conversation. I hope you will come to our meetings. 
17. It will be a pleasure to me (pour moi) to go and spend the 
evening among you ; and I will do all I can to sustain your ef- 
forts. 18. Of what use are those band-boxes to you? 19. They 
are of no use to me. 20. Is that too] of any use to you? 21. 
The servant uses it to split the fire-wood (le hois a bruler). 22. 
Of what use is that cane to you? 23. I use it as a ruler. 24. 
Who was your escort at the fair, Miss Mary? 25. My cousin 
Charles, but I will never have him any more as my escort (de lui 
pour cavalier) ; he behaved like a blunderhead. 



73. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEQON. 

Present Participle. 

269. The present participle of all verbs ends in ant. It has 
the same stem as the first person plural of the indicative present, f 

Allons. Venous. Voyons. Ecrivons. 

Allant. Venant. Voyant. Ecrivant. 

With the exception of the verbs, avoir , etre, savoir, echoir, seoir ; 
whose present participles are ayant, etant, sachant, echeant, seant. 



270. The present participle is invariable. It is sometimes 
preceded by the preposition en, and sometimes not. 

* Je stcis emharrasse. 

t The present participle is a primitive part of the verb ; from it are formed the 
three persons plural of the present, the whole of the imperfect, indicative, and also the 
present subjunctive. 



SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LECOF. 293 

(a.) The present participle, preceded by en, can be used only 
with reference to the subject of the sentence : 

1st. To express the most enduring of two actions, performed 
at the same time ; as, 

She sings while working. Elle chante en travaillant. 

I read while warming myself. Je lis en me chauffant. 

2d. To denote the manner or means by which we attain an 
end; as, 

It is not in listening to our passions Ce n'est pas en ecoutant ses pas- 
that we live contentedly, but in sions qu'on vit content, mais en 
regulating them. les reglant. 

(b.) The present participle, without en, is used : 
1st. To introduce an incidental proposition ; as, 

A scholar who knows his interests, Un eleve connaissant ses interets, 
will not neglect to study his les- ne negligera pas d'etudier ses 
sons. leeons. 

2d. At the head of a sentence, to express a permanent state or 
habitual action ; as, 

Always suffering, how can I be Souffrant toujours, comment puis-je 
cheerful? etre gai. 

3d. In an absolute manner, denoting a circumstance ; as, 

Peace being concluded, the troops La paix etant conclue, les troupes 

withdrew. se retirerent. 

Should such be the case, I shall Le cas echeant, je saurai me tirer 

know how to manage. d' affaire. 

Rem. — The present participle, without en, may refer to the ob- 
ject of the verb, when it expresses an explanatory idea which 
forms part of that object; as, 

I saw him walking in the garden. Je l'ai vu se promenant dans le jar- 
din. 
But: 

I saw him, while I was walking in Je Pai vu, en me promenant dans le 
the garden. jardin. 



294 



SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LECON. 



271 • There are verbal adjectives, formed from trie verb, and 
having the same ending (ant) as the present participle. These 
are variable, and express a permanent state or manner of being, 
whereas the present participle expresses action. The latter may 
govern an object, like a verb ; the former can have no object ; as, 



An obliging person. 

A person obliging his friends. 

Those provident men perceived the 

danger. 
Those men foreseeing the danger. 



Une personne obligeante, (v. adj.) 
Une personne obligeant ses amis, 

(pr.p.) 
Ces hommes prevoyants ont apercu 

le danger, (v. adj.) 
Ces hommes prevoyant le danger, 

(pr. p.) 



Rem. — In English, the verbal adjective generally precedes the 
nonn, and the present participle follows it. 



272. The tenses of etre, followed by a and the infinitive, are 
sometimes used; and are equivalent to the present participle, 
preceded by the tenses of to be ; as, 



He is writing. 

They are playing in the yard. 

She was sewing. 

We were talking. 



II est a ecrire. 

lis sont a jouer dans la cour. 

Elle etait a coudre. 

Nous etions a causer. 



VOCABULAIRE 13. 



To go or run over. 
To look over. 
To peruse. 
To bloom. 
To blossom. 
To flourish. 
To grow young 

again. 
To manage. 



r Parcourir. 
r Fleurir.* 



j-Raje 



To grow larger. ) Grossir 

To swell. ) 

To grow green. Verdir. 

To grow old. Vieillir. 



Faire en sorte de. To visit. 



Visiter. 



* In the sense of to flourish, the present participle of fleurir, is florissant, and the 
imperfect, florissais. 



SmXANTE-TREIZIEME LE£ON. 



295 



To take care of. 
To look after. 
To attend to. 

To refresh, 



• Soigner. 



Rafraiehir. 



To decide. "\ 

To determine. (Decider* 

To prevail upon. [Determiner. 

To induce. J 

To talk, to chat. Causer. 



Smiling. 
Che erf uL 
Pleasant. 
Newly born. 
Budding. 

Undecided. 



r Riant. 

y Naiss&nt. 
Indecis. 



• En attendant. 



Meanwhile. 

In the mean time. 

At all events. En tout cas. 

In the first place. En premier lieu. 



To direct. 

To take refresh- 
ments. 

To decide. 

To be decided. 

To make up 
o:ne's mind. 

To interrupt. 



Delightful. 



Waving. 



Diriger. 



- Se rafraiehir. 

Se decider (a). 
► Se determiner 
(a). 

Interrompre. 



Ravissant. 



Ondoyant. 
i En passant. 



Going along. 
By the way. 
Meanwhile; and > Q daEt 

yet, however. ) 
Very fast, visibly. A vue d'ceil. 
In the second place. En second lieu. 



Exekcice 73* 



1. Je jetterai un coup d'oeil sur ces papiers en me chauffant, 
que ferez-vous en attendant ? 2. Je parcourrai le journal en me 
promenant. 3. Cette demoiselle n'a-t-elle pas beaucoup grandi 
en peu de temps ? 4. Elle grandit rapidement et s'embellit en 
grandissant. 5. N'est-ce pas en vivant qtfon apprend avivre? 
6. On acquiert de Pexperience en vieillissant et en souffrant. 7. 
Croyez-vous qu'un jeune homme ne sachant jamais ses lecons, 
fasse cles progres ? 8. Je crois tout le contraire ; mais je ne 
croirais pas qu'un jeune homme connaissant ses interets, negli- 
gent d'etudier ses lecons. 9. Avez-vu Charles en venant? 10. 



* The verbs decider, determiner, resoudre, used actively, and having a verb in the 
infinitive for their direct object, require de; as, I have decided to do it, fai decide db 
lefaire. "When they have a person for their direct object, they require the preposition 
d; as, I prevailed upon him to do \t,je Vai decide k lefaire; also when they are used 
passively or reflectively ; as, Je suis decide, je me suis decide, k lefaire. 



296 SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEgOJT. 

Je Pai rencontre allant a son bureau. 11. Fera-t-il en sort© 1 
d'etre ici ce soir ? 12. II m'a dit^ en passant, qu'il tacherait de 
venir. 13. N'est-ce pas un beau spectacle que cette campagne 
riante, verdissant de jour en jour ? et ces herbes mouvantes, crois- 
sant a vue d'ceil ; toute cette nature charmante y rajeunissant au 
retour du printemps? 14. Je ne eonnais rien de plus charmant 
que ces fleurs naissantes, couvrant la campagne ? et ces plaines 
ondoyantes, rafraichissant les airs, et des petits oiseaux les voix 
ravissantes,* cbantant le retour du printemps. 15. Ferons-nous* 
rafrafcbir nos chevaux dans ce village? 16. Faisons eela; nous 
nous rafraicbirons en meme temps. 17. Qu'avez-vous decide de 
faire a l'egard de cette affaire? 18. *Pai decide d r avoir recour& 
a la loi. 19. Qu'est-ee qui vous determine a faire cela? 20. 
La justice de ina cause rr/y determine. 21. Croyez-vous y ga- 
gner quelque cbose? 22. En tout cas, je ne pourrai rien y per- 
dre. 23. Avez-vous determine votre frere a $tre des notres dans< 
eette partie de cbasse I 24. II est encore indeeis, .mais je crois; 
qu r il se deeidera a partir avec nous. 25. Ou sont les enfants? 
26. lis sont a jouer dans la cour. 2*1. Que faisait votre frere 
quand vous etes entre ? 28. II etait a ecrire. 20. Que faisiez- 
vous quand je suis entre? 30. Nous etions a causer. 31. Je 
suis facbe de vous avoir interrompus. 32. II n*y a pas lieu;, 
nous pouvons reprendre notre conversation. 



Theme 'IS. 

2. I will look over tbese papers wbile I breakfast. 2. Will 
you meanwbile glance over tbe newspaper ? 3. Did you call on 
Mr. S . . . . in coming ? 4. I met bim going to tbe country. 5. 
He told me f in passing, tbat be would manage to be back bere 
by Tuesday next. 6. Has your friend decided to go witb us ? 
1. He is yet undecided ; be cannot come to a determination be- 
fore be bears from bis cousin. 8. Wbat bave you determined 
to do ? 9. We bave determined to apply to tbe king's minister. 
10. What bas determined you to take tbat step? 11. In tbe 

* This inversion, of placing the indirect objeet before the noun on which it depends^ 
does not properly belong to- prose composition, but is very common in poetry. 



SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEgON. 297 

first place, the embarrassment in which we find ourselves ; and 
in the second place, the hope that we shall be able to pre- 
vail upon the minister to do us justice. 12. At all events, 
we shall know better what course to adopt [quel parti prendre) 
when we have received his answer. 13. Having resolved upon 
visiting Spa, we started very early (de grand matin), and arrived 
at noon in the village of B . . . . , where we stopped to take re- 
freshments. 14. In the mean time, we were informed that the 
rain of the previous day had swelled the rivers, and that, the 
waters having spread over (dans) the country, the communica- 
tion with Spa was interrupted. 15. This mischance (Ce contre- 
temps) was very embarrassing. 16. We had no desire whatever 
(aucune envie) to retrace our steps (de retourner sur nos pas) ; 
and yet, the idea of waiting in a wretched (miserable) inn, until 
the waters had receded (se retirer), was by no means cheering 
(rfavait rien d'attrayant). 17. Finally, we concluded to pay a 
visit to Mr. A .... , whose residence (demeure) is not far from 
there. 18. We found Mr. A. . . . in his garden, looking after 
his flowers, and directing the labors (les travaux) of his garden- 
ers. 19. I was astonished to see, when I came near him (pr.p.) 
how much he has changed. 20. He has grown much older 
since he retired (quitter) from business. 21. As to Mrs. A. . . ., 
the country air appears to agree with her. 22. She seems (on 
dirait) to have grown young again. 23. We spent the evening 
pleasantly, under the hospitable roof (toit hospitalier) of our old 
(anciens) friends. 24. Next morning (Le lendemain), the waters 
having receded, we proceeded on our journey, and arrived at the 
hotel at Spa, just in time for dinner (au moment oil Von se mettait 
a table). 25. How did the country look in that neighborhood 
(Comment etait la campagne dans ces environs) ? 26. The coun- 
try looked beautiful, the trees blossoming, and the corn (les bles) 
growing visibly. 

13* 



298 soixante-quatorziSme le^on. 

74. SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME LEQON. 
Remarks on the Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 

273. Rem. 1. — A verb having for its subject two or more 
nouns or pronouns in the singular, not connected by ou, must be 
put in the plural ; and when the nouns or pronouns are of differ- 
ent persons, it agrees with the first in preference to the second, 
and with the second in preference to the third ; as, 

My brother and I will come to see Mon frere et moi, nous viendrons 
you. vous voir. 

Rem. 2. — When the words, connected by ow, are of different 
persons, the verb is put in the plural ; as, 
He or I will come. Lui ou moi viendrons. 

Rem. 3. — After two subjects, connected by ni, the verb must 
be put in the plural, when the affirmation of the state or action 
is possible with regard to both ; as, 

Neither has arrived. Ni Tun ni Pautre ne sont arrives. 

Neither is my father. Ni Tun ni l'autre n'est mon pere. 

Rem. 4. — When the words forming the subject are synony- 
mous, or when they are placed as a climax, the verb agrees with 
the last word ; as, 

His courage, his boldness astonishes Son courage, son intrepidite nous 

us. etonne. 

Time, property, life, every thing Le temps, les biens, la vie, tout est 

belongs to one's country. a la patrie. 

Rem. 5. — When two subjects are connected by comme, ainsi 
que, <fec, the verb agrees with the first ; as, 

Virtue, as well as knowledge, has La vertu, ainsi que le savoir, a son 
its value. prix. 



274, Rem. 1. — A verb having a collective noun in the singu- 
lar for its subject, must be put in the singular, though the noun 
expresses an idea of plurality ; as, 



SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME LE£ON. 



299 



The people were dissatisfied. Le peuple etait mecontent. 

Rem. 2. — When the collective noun is followed by de and 
another noun, the verb sometimes agrees with the collective, and 
sometimes with the noun that follows it. As a general rule, it 
agrees with the collective, when the collective is preceded by the 
article ; and when the collective is preceded by the numeral un, 
it agrees with tta noun that follows it. 

La moitie des soldats etait partie. 
Une foule d'enfants nous suivaient, 



One half of the soldiers had left. 
A crowd of children followed us. 



Rem. 3. — The verb agrees with the noun that follows, or is un- 
derstood after, la plupart, beaucoup, pen, or any adverb of multi- 
tude ; as, 

Most men are selfish. La plupart des hoinmes sont inte- 

resses. 
The senate were divided, most were Le senat etait partage, la plupart 

of opinion .... etaient d'avis .... 

Few were in favor of the bilL Peu etaient en faveur du projet. 



275. 

To go (to come) to meet a person. 

(out of courtesy.) 

We are going to meet him. 
He was coming to meet us. 
To put a man's courage to the test. 

To prove one's self a man of cour- 
age. 

To be fond of good living. 

To live well, to fare daintily. 

To keep a good table. 

To be wont to. 

To set sail. 

To sail for. 

To sail under full sail. 

To be indebted to some one for 
something. 

To be on the point of. 

To be near, very near, 

We were near being stranded 



j Aller (venir) a la rencontre de qqn. 
( ■ au devant de qqn. 

Nous allons a sa rencontre. 

II venait au devant de nous. 

Mettre le courage d'un homme a 
l'epreuve. 

Faire preuve de courage. 

Aimer la bonne chere. 

Faire bonne chere. 

Tenir bonne table. 

Avoir coutumne de. 

Mettre a la voile. 

Faire voile pour. 

Marcher a pleines voiles. 

Etre redevable a qqn. de qq. oh. 

Etre sur le point de. 

Manquer de. 

Nous avons manque* d'6chouer. 



SOD 



SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME LEgON. 



It is very near. 
It is far from it. 



Pen s*en faut. 

II s'en fant beaucoup.* 



These two phrases, when followed by que, govern the subjunc- 
tive. Peu s'en faut requires ne before the verb ; so does il s'en 
faut beaucoup, when used negatively or interrogatively. 

"We were very near being wrecked. Pen s'en est fallu que nous n'ayons 

fait naufrage. 



VoCABULAIRE 14. 



I/aliment. 
) Le mets. 
f Les mets. 

L'entremets. 

Le dessert. 



The food ; meat. 
The food, dish. 
Yiands. 
The side-dish. 
The dessert 
The bridge. 
The deck (ship), 
The port. 
The harbor. 
The wharf. 
The quay. 

Coolness. 

The sand-bank Le banc de sable. 



Le pont. 
Le port. 



i 

y Le quai. 
Le sang froid. 



The post. 
The crew. 
The sailor. 
The passenger. 
One-third. 



To embark. 
To be near. 

To strand. 
To consist. 
To encourage. 
To quarrel. 



Le poste. 
L'equipage. 
Le matelot. 
Le passager. 
Le tiers. 



Embarquer. 
Manquer de. 

Echouer. 
Consister. 
Encourager. 
Se quereller. 



Food. La nourriture. 

The fare, living. La chere. 

The dainty. La friandise. 

A mouthful. Une bouchee. 

The freight. La cargaison. 

The roadstead. La rade. 



The meeting. 

Presence of j 
mind. I 

The tempest. 
The capacity. 
The proof. 
The tranquillity, 
The fatigue. 
One-half. 



La rencontre. 

La presence d'es- 

prit. 
La tempete. 
La capacite. 
La preuve. 
La tranquillite. 
La fatigue. 
La moitie. 



To land. Debarquer. 

To congratulate ) ___, . , 
upon. [Feheiterde. 

To exhaust. Epuiser. 

To encumber. Encombrer. 

To tranquillize. Tranquilliser. 

To dispute. Disputer. 



To battle with. Combattre qq. ch. To deprive. Priver. 

* When " it is far from" is used to express a deficiency, beaucoup must be preceded 
by the preposition c?e; as, Voits croyez rrCa/voir tout rendu, il tfenfaut de beaucoup. 



SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME LECON. 301 

( Aller a la rencon- 

To go to meet. \ tre. To be wont. Avoir coutume de, 

( Aller au devant. 

_..-.- . ( II s'en faut beau- 
It is very near. Pen s'en faut. It is far from it. 1 Q ^ 

Under full sail. A pleines voiles. In tow. A la remorque. 

Noisy. Bruyant. Heart-rending. Dechirant. 

Indebted. Redevable. Indefatigable. Infatigable. 

Without ceasing. Sans cesse. Usually. Pour l'ordmaire, 



Exercice 74. 



1. Allez-vous au port? 2. Mon frere et moi, nous allons au 
devant de notre cousin, qui vient d'arriver sur le paquebot. 3. Ou 
va-t-il debarquer? 4. Au quai neuf. 5. Ou s'est-il erubarque ? 
6. II s'est embarque a P.... 7. Quand le paquebot a-t-il 
quitte la rade de P . . . . ? 8. II a mis a la voile le vingt du mois 
passe. 9. Si votre cousin a des lettres pour moi, aurez-vous la 
bonte de me les faire parvenir tout de suite ! 10. Mon frere ou 
moi, vous les apporterons en revenant du port. 11. Etes-vous 
arrives au port a la remorque? 12. Nous sommes entres dans 
le port a pleines voiles. 13. Avez-vous eu beau temps pendant 
votre voyage? 14. II a fait mauvais, la plupart du temps. 15. 
II ne vous est pas arrive d'accident? 16. Nous avons ete sur le 
point d'echouer sur un banc de sable, pendant une tempete. 
17. Alors vous avez manque de faire naufrage? 18. Peu s'en 
est fallu. 19. Je vous felicite d'avoir echappe a ce danger. 
20. Nous en sommes redevables a notre capitaine ; son saug 
froid, sa presence d'esprit nous a sauves de ce peril. 21. Vous 
vous etes trouves dans une de ces situations qui mettent le cou- 
rage d'un homme a l'epreuve. 22. Et le capitaine Smith a 
donne, en cette occasion, des preuves qu'il ne manque pas de 
courage, ni de capacite ; tant que durait le danger il etait la sur 
le pont, encourageant les matelots, qui etaient epuises de fatigue. 
23. Quel equipage aviez-vous? 24. L'equipage etait americain. 
25. Comment etait la table a bord du paquebot? 26. La table 
n'etait pas bonne ; les mets, pour Tordinaire, etaient mal pre- 
pares. 27. On ne fait pas aussi chere a bord des paquebots 



302 SOIXANTE-QUAT0RZIEME LE£ON. 

qu'a bord des steamers? 28. II s'en faut beaucoup; nous n'a- 
vions point de friandises ; la nourriture consistait, en grande 
partie, de viande salee. 29. N'aimez-vous pas les aliments sales ? 
30. Non, M. ; je me snis sonvent leve de table, sans avoir mange 
une bouchee. 31. Aviez-vous beaucoup de passagers? 32. 
Beaucoup ; quand il faisait beau, la foule des passagers encom- 
brait le pont. 33. De quel pays etaient-ils? 34. La plupart 
etaient allemands ; un grand nombre d'entre eux venaient des 
bords du Rhin. 35. Y avait-il beaucoup de femmes parmi eux? 
36. Oui, M. ; et le grand nombre de femmes rendait leur societe 
extremement bruyante, car les femmes se querellaient, et ensuite 
les Allemands disputaient. 37. De quoi consiste la cargaison? 
38. La moitie consiste de marchandises seches, dont le tiers au 
moins appartient a notre maison. 



Theme 74. 

1. We were expecting you and your brother, last night ; what 
deprived us of the pleasure of seeing you ? 2. We received a 
note from our uncle, who invited us to come to his country-seat, 
saying that he or his son would come to meet us with the car- 
riage. 3. My brother or I ought to have called on you, to tell 
you of it. 4. We were so busy that neither he nor I thought 
of it. 5. My uncle goes to Italy ; the vessel on which he is to 
embark, will set sail this week. 6. Neither Charles nor Henry 
will accompany him. 7. Neither my uncle nor my father has 
been appointed consul for the port of Naples. 8. Do they live 
well on board of American ships ? 9. Not very well, the food 
usually consists of salted meats. 10. But old Captain Granville 
is fond of good living. 11. I once made a voyage with him ; he 
kept a good table ; the dishes were well prepared. 12. We had 
all kinds of side-dishes, and at the dessert there were dainties and 
fruits from all parts of the world. 13. Were you not near being 
wrecked during that voyage? 14. We were very near being 
stranded on a sand-bank, on which (ou) the tempest had thrown 
us. 15. There was reason for congratulating one another upon 
having escaped that danger. 16. I shall always believe that we 



BOIXANTE-QUINZIEME LEC0N. 303 

are indebted for our lives to Captain G. 17. He proved him- 
self, on that occasion, a man of courage and capacity. 18. His 
coolness, his presence of mind, did not quit him in the midst of 
danger. 19. He not only gave orders with tranquillity, but he, 
as well as his sailors, worked without ceasing. 20. And when 
the crew were exhausted with fatigue, he remained standing at 
his post, encouraging some (les uns) and tranquillizing others 
(les autres). 21. As long as the danger lasted, the captain was 
indefatigable ; his eye (Voeil), his hand, his head, the whole man 
(tout Vhomme), battled with the tempest. 22. A crowd of pas- 
sengers encumbered the deck. 23. Most of them were Ger- 
mans ; they, who were wont to dispute, were now (pour lors) 
silent, and appeared much frightened. 24. Men, women, chil- 
dren, every one thought of death and prepared for it. 25. The 
crowd of women and children who were weeping, crying, or 
praying, made this scene (spectacle) heart-rending. 26. "We 
were obliged to throw one (le) third of our freight overboard 
(dans la mer). 27. One-half of the goods we had left (qui nous 
restaient) were damaged by the salt-water, for the vessel had 
sprung a leak (fait une voie d'eau). 



75. SOIXANTE-QUINZIEME LEgON. 

Remarks on the Accidental Place of the Subject. 

276. Rem. 1. — The noun subject is sometimes elegantly placed 
after the verb, when the object is either se, le, que, or ow, or when 
the sentence begins with tel ; as, 

That is the way this event hap- Voila comment s'est passe cet eve- 

pened. nement. 

His brow reveals what his mouth Son front decele ce que tait sa 

conceals. bouche. 

Such was her beauty that. . . . Telle etait sa beaute que. . . . 

Rem. 2. — The pronoun subject is also better placed after the 



304 SOIXANTE-QUINZIEME LE£ON. 

verb, when the sentence begins with aussi, encore, peut-etre, en 

vain, du moins, tant que, a peine ; as, 

He also was loved by everybody. Aussi etait-il aime de tout le monde. 

Eem. 3. — The subject is placed after the verb, in the incidental 
phrase, by which we state that we relate the words of another. 
It is well, he said, I will come. C'est bien, dit-il, je viendrai. 

Eem. 4. — The subject of the sentence is placed after impersonal 
verbs; as, 

An opportunity occurred. II se presenta une occasion. 

A man entered. II entra un homme. 

A thought occurs to me. II me vient une pens^e. 



Remarks on the Direct and Indirect Objects. 

277. Eem. 1. — The direct and indirect objects, when they are 
nouns, are placed after the verb ; the direct preceding the indi- 
rect, when they are of equal length ; but when the direct object 
is accompanied by a relative clause, or an attribute rendering it 
longer than the indirect, the latter stands first ; as, 

I will write to my father all you J'ecrirai a mon pere tout ce que 
tell me. vous me dites. 

Rem. 2. — "When two verbs govern the same noun, both direct- 
ly, or both indirectly, but by means of the same preposition, the 
noun need be expressed only once ; as, 

I esteem and respect those men. J'estime et je respecte ces hommes. 

He gives or lends every thing to II donne ou prete tout a ses amis, 
his friends. 

Rem. 3. — When one verb governs the noun directly, and the 
other indirectly, or when each verb requires a different preposi- 
tion, the noun must be expressed after the first verb, and a pro- 
noun must be used, in its stead, with the second ; as, 

He loves and obeys his master. II aime son maitre et lui obeit. 

He was present at, and made the II assista a la seance, et en fit le 
report of, the meeting. rapport. 

Rem. 4. — The same remark applies to adjectives; as, II est 
utile et cher a sa famille ; and U est utile a sa famille, et il en 
est cheri. Utile and cher require d, and cheri, de. 



SOIXAXTE-QUIXZIEME LE£OX. 



305 



Eem. 5. — In compound tenses, when several verbs, being 
closely connected, have the same subject, object and auxiliary f 
they need be expressed only once, provided the verbs govern the 
object in the same manner ; as, 
I received and read it, (a letter.) Je l'ai recue et lue. 

But we must say : Je Vai recue et fy ai repondu ; because we 
say : Recevoir une lettre, repondre k une lettre. 

Rem. 6. — When the subject or object is composed of a noun 
and pronoun, or of two pronouns of different persons, a pronoun 
in the plural is generally used to represent them collectively ; as, 

My brother and I will come. Mon frere et moi, nous viendrons. 

I call you and your brother. Je vous appelle, vous et votre frere. 

He calls on him and me. II nous appelle, lui et moi 



278 • In emulation of. 


A Venvi. 




To vie with each other. 


A l'envi Tun de l'autre. 


They strive to injure one another. 


lis travaillent a P< 


envi a se nuire les 






uns aux autres. 




Within reach of, 




A la port ee de. 




Within hearing. 




A la portee de la 


voix. 


Within gun-shot 




A une portee de fusil. 


That is not within my comprehen- 


Cela n'est pas a ma portee. 


sion. 










Vocabu: 


LAIRE 75. 




Crime. 


Le crime. 


Treachery ; treason. La trahison. 


Mystery. 


Le mystere. 


The way ; means. 


La voie. 


The reproach. 


Le reproche. 


The injury. 


L'injure. 


The triumph. 


Le triomphe. 


Glory. 


La gloire. 


A good man. 


L'homme de bien. 


Faith. 


La foi* 


The praise. 


L'eloge. 


The praise. 


La louange. 


To attribute. 
To ascribe. 


[• Attribuer. 


To contribute. 


Contribuer. 


To lead away. 


y Entrainer. 


To induce. 


>• Porter a. 


To induce. 


To tempt. 


To plunge. 


Plonger. 


To prove. 


Prouver. 



* Bonne foi> good faith, honesty ; mauvaise foi, bad faith, dishonesty, 



306 



SOIXANTE-QUINZIEME LE§ON. 



To envy. 

To reveal. 
To betray. 
To betray. 
To avenge. 
To excuse. 
To palliate. 
To light. 
To enlighten. 
To clear up. 
To elucidate. 
To clear up. 
To get clear. 
In vain. 

Within reach of. 
Worthy (of). 
Sensible (to). 
Private. 



( Envier. (trans.) 
( Porter envie.(245. 

[ Reveler. 

Trahir. 
Venger. 
Excuser. 
PaUier. 

[• Eclair er. 
>• Eclair cir. 

y S'eclaircir. 

En vain. 
A la porte*e de. 
Digne (de). 
Sensible (a). 
Particulier. 



To conceal ; to hide. Cacher. 



r.2)To conceal. 
To reveal. 
To disclose. 
To injure. 
To be revenged. 
To excuse one's self. 
To apologize. 
To mislead. 
To mislay. 

To darken. 

To get dark 

Whence comes. 
In emulation. 
Unworthy (of). 



Taire. 
t Deceler. 

Nuire. 

Se venger (de), 

> S'excuser. 
t £garer. 
Obscurcir. 

S'obscurcir. 

D'oii vient. 

A l'envi. 

Indigne (de). 
Heedless, imprudent. Imprudent. 
Public. Public, -que. 



ExERCICE 75. 



1. A quoi attribuez-vous le mauvais sueces de cette affaire ? 
2. Je l'attribue a la trahison d'un des notres. 3. Comment avez- 
vous pu vous confier a quelqu'un qui vous a trahi ? 4. Telle 
avait ete la conduite de cet homme qu'il m'inspirait une entiere 
confiance. 5. Quel motif a pu le determine a reveler les secrets 
que vous lui aviez confies ? 6. C'est l'interet et l'envie qui Font 
porte a le faire ; aussi lui ai-je reprocher sa mauvaise foi. 7. 
Cherchait-il a s'excuser quand vous lui avez fait des reproches ? 
8. En vain cherchait-il a pallier son crime ; il ne pouvait cacher 
la confusion que decelait son front coupable. 9. Enviez-vous au 
mechant l'avantage que lui procure sa mauvaise foi? 10. Je 
n'envie point a cet homme le fruit de son crime ; il se presentera 
bientot une occasion qui me vengera de lui. 11. D'ou vient 
qu'il y a si peu cle bonne foi dans le monde ? 12. Cela vient de 
ce que les hommes se portent en vie les uns aux autres. 13. 
N'est-ce pas le premier devoir de la justice de ne pas nuire a son 
prochain \ 14. Oui, M. ; cependant on dirait que les plus eclai- . 
res memes. travaillent a l'envi a se nuire les uns aux autres. 15. 



SOIXAXTE-QUINZIEME LEgON. 30 7 

Ne serious-nous pas plus heureux, si chacun travaillait a assurer 
le bonheur de son prochain? 16. Certainement : en contribuant 
au bonheur general, on augmenterait la somme du bonheur par- 
ticulier. 17. Avez-vous lu la lettre du consul? 18. Je l'ai lue; 
elle eclaircit en partie la conduite ambigue de ce monsieur. 19. 
Irons-nous faire un tour a cheval, si le temps s'eclaircit ? 20. 
Oui, mais au lieu de s'eclaircir, il s'obscurcit. 21. Ou est votre 
ecurie? 22. Elle est a une portee de fusil d'ici. 23. Vos le- 
cons sont-elles a la portee de tout le monde ? 24. Je crois 
qu'elles sont a la portee de la purpart de mes eleves. 



Theme 75. 

1. We often attribute to our skill the success that fortune 
grants (donner) us, in the same manner as (de meme que) we as- 
cribe to ill luck the misery into which (ou) our (une) heedless 
conduct plunges us. 2. Those who have once betrayed us, ought 
no longer to inspire us with any confidence. 3. He who betrays 
(reveler) the secrets with which he has been intrusted, proves that 
he is unworthy of the confidence which was placed in him (qu'on 
avait en lui). 4. Crime speaks in the breast (cozur) of the 
guilty ; in vain he seeks to hide it withiu (y), his brow betrays 
(deceler) what his mouth conceals. 5. Such are the ways of Prov- 
idence. 6. Does it become you (266, R. 9) to reproach me with 
this step, into which my friendship for you has betrayed me (en- 
trainer) ? 7. Perhaps I am wrong to speak of it, but I do not 
wish to upbraid you. 8. A good man seeks to be revenged of 
an injury, in returning good for evil. 9. A thought occurred to 
me, which I wished to communicate to you, but scarcely had I 
descended the stairs, when a man came in, who asked to speak 
to me. 10. I do not envy kings their wealth nor their glory ; I 
envy them the power of doing good. 11. The wise man envies 
nobody. 12. Whence comes it that men strive in this world to 
injure one another? 13. It is because private interest prevails 
over (Vemporte sur) public good. 14. And yet the best means 
of insuring our own happiness, is to contribute as much as we 
can to the happiness of all. 15. That idea does not appear to 



308 SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE£ON. 

'be within the comprehension of everybody. 16. When will 
men be sufficiently enlightened to abjure (renoncer a) vice ! 17. 
Good children love and obey their parents. 18. Take and use 
my book, but do not mislay it, as you did the other day. 19. 
Kead this letter ; it clears up the mystery of his conduct. 20. 
This exceeds (passe) my comprehension. 21. A good man does 
' not associate with, nor listen to the counsels of, the wicked. 22. 
My friend, he said, is worthy of, and very sensible to, your praises. 
23. I do not advise you to start at present, the sky (le del) dark- 
ens, and every thing announces (annoncer) a storm. 24. We 
will start as soon as the weather clears up. 



76. SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LEgON. 

Remarks on the Pronouns. 

279 • Rem. 1. — Pronouns stand in the place of nouns, with the 
exception of ce, ceci, cela, the relative en, and the invariable pro- 
noun le, which may stand in the place of a sentence. 

Rem. 2. — A pronoun must not be used to represent a noun 
closely connected with a verb or a preposition, so as to express 
but one idea with the verb or the preposition ; as, /aire grace, 
/aire peur, equivalent to pardonner, effrayer ; and avec politesse, 
avec amitie, equivalent to poliment, amicalement. It is incorrect 
to say : Je vous fats grace, quoique vous ne la meritiez pas ; II 
m'a recu avec politesse, qui rri'a charme ; because the pronouns 
la and qui have no antecedents. We may say : Je vous fais 
grace, quoique vous ne le meritiez pas, the invariable pronoun le 
having reference to the preceding proposition ; and : II rrUa recu 
avec une politesse, qui rri'a charme, the relative qui having for its 
antecedent politesse, which, by the use of the determinative ad- 
jective une, has become an independent noun. 

Rem. 3. — When a relative clause refers to a preceding sen- 
tence, the demonstrative pronoun ce must be used as the ante- 
cedent of the relative pronoun ; as, 



SOIXAXTE-SEIZIEME LECOX. 309 

He received me with kindness, II me recut avec bonte, ce qui m'en- 
which encouraged me to tell him couragea a lui confier mon secret. 
my secret. 

Rem. 4. — Lui, elle, eux, elles, preceded by a preposition, are 
used only with reference to persons (65) ; in speaking of things, 
the preposition and pronoun must be expressed by an adverb, 
implying the meaning of both ; as, dessus, dessous, for upon it, 
under it (143). If no adverb can be found to supply the place, 
a different turn must be given to the sentence, by which the 
preposition will disappear. Thus for : He came with it, say : He 
brought it ; il Va apporte. 



Remarks ox Son axd En. 

280. Rem. 1. — Son, sa, ses, leur, leurs, may relate to persons 
or things ; when they relate to things, they must refer to the sub- 
ject of the proposition in which they stand ; as, 

Study has its charms. L'etude a ses charmes. 

Rem. 2. — The relation of result or consequence, between a de- 
pendent proposition and an object referred to in a preceding 
proposition, is expressed by en, equivalent to of it, of them ; as, 

That city is beautiful, I admire its Cette ville est belle, j'en admire les 

walks. promenades. 

That business is delicate, its success Cette affaire est delicate, le succes 

is doubtful. en est douteux. 

Rem. 3. — Observe, however, that the pronoun en must neces- 
sarily be the indirect object of a verb. In the sentence : Paris 
est une ville remarquable, les etrangers admirent la beaute de ses 
edifices, en could not be substituted for ses, because edifices is the 
indirect object of a noun. 



281. 

To witness, to testify ; to show. Temoigner. 

To show discontent. Temoigner du mecontentment. 

He has shown me much friendship. II m'a temoigne beaucoup d'amitte. 



810 



SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE^ON. 



To be pleased with one for some 
thing. 

To thank him for it. 

To take it ill or unkindly of one. 

To play a trick upon one. 

To laugh in a person's face. 

To ridicule, to deride somebody. 

To laugh at. 

To attack. 

To seize something. 

To seize upon. 

To make one's self master of. 

To take possession of. 

To approve. 

To disapprove. 

I disapprove very much your rid- 
iculing that man. 

He deserves to be ridiculed. 



Savoir bon gre a qqn. de qq. ch. 

Savoir mauvais gre a qqn. de qq. ch. 

Jouer un tour a qqn. 

Hire au nez de qqn. 

Se moquer de qqn. 

Se rire de qqn. 

Attaquer qq. ch. or qqn. 

Saisir qq. ch. 

Se saisir de. 

S'emparer de. 

Approuver. Trouver bon. 

Desapprouver. Trouver mauvais. 
Je trouve bien mauvais que vous 

vous moquiez de cet homme. 
II merit e qu'on se moque de lui. 



282. To understand one another. 

They have a private understanding 
to impose upon us. 

To be skilful in a thing. 

He understands business. 

He knows nothing about business. 

To be a judge of. 

Are you a judge of cloth ? 

I am not a good judge. 

To lose sight of. 

To make a sign, to beckon. 

To think much of one, to esteem him. 

To imagine ; to invent. 

To fancy ; to believe. 

He fancies he knows it. 

To yield ; to give up ; to part with. 

Will you let me have some of that 
paper ? (Will you part with, (fee?) 

Appearances are deceitful. 

That is against the rules of good- 
breeding. 

The diamond. Obscurity. 

Talking of that. 

Unreasonable. Painful. 



S'entendre. 

lis s'entendent ensemble pour nous 

en imposer. 
S'entendre a qq. ch. 
II s'entend aux affaires. 
II n'entend rien aux affaires. 
Se connaitre en. 
Vous connaissez-vous en drap ? 
Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup. 
Perdre de vue. 
Faire signe a. 
Faire cas de qqn. 
Imaginer. 
S'imaginer. 
II s'imagine le savoir. 
Ceder. 
Voulez-vous me ceder une partie de 

ce papier. 
Les apparences sont trompeuses. 
C'est contre les regies de la bien* 

seance. 
Le diamant. L'obscurite'. 
A propos de cela. 
Deraisonnable. Penible. 



SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE£OIT. 311 



Exercice 76. 



1. Me savez-vous bon gre* de vous avoir dit cela? 2. Je vous 
en sais bon gre. 3. Ce jeune homme nous sait-il mauvais gre 
de lui avoir indique ses fautes ? 4. II parait vous en savoir mau- 
vais gre. 5. S'imagine-t-il que cela soit inutile ? 6. Je ne sais 
pas s'il s'imagine cela, mais il parait en temoigner du mecontente- 
ment. 7. Pouvez-vous imaginer quelque chose de plus derai- 
sonnable ? 8. II faut etre bien deraisonnable pour temoigner 
du mecontentement de cela. 9. Avez-vous joue un tour a 
Charles? 10. Au contraire, c'est Charles qui s'est entendu avec 
Jules pour m'en jouer un. 11. Que vous ont-ils fait? 12. Hier 
a la foire, Jules me fit signe de venir aupres de lui ; aussitot que 
j'eus quitte ma place, Charles s'en empara. 13. C'etait bien mal 
de sa part. 14. Et quand je voulus la reprendre, il me rit au 
nez. 15. Et que fites-vous alors ? 16. J'allais le saisir par le 
bras pour l'en faire sortir, mais mon oncle, qui etait a cote de 
lui, me ceda la sienne. 17. A propos de votre oncle, ne parait-il 
pas avoir perdu de vue l'affaire dont nous lui avons parle ! 1 8. 
II ne Fa pas perdue de vue ; il a donne ordre a son commis de 
s'en occuper. 19. Et son commis la soignera-t-il comme ilfaut? 
20. Vous pouvez etre tranquille la-dessus ; son commis s'entend 
aux affaires; mon oncle fait grand cas de lui. 21. Se connait-il 
en instruments de musique ? 22. II s'y connait beau coup ; il a 
ete dans ce commerce. 



Theme 76. 

1. They received him with kindness, which rendered his situa- 
tion less painful. 2. His parents are thankful to them for the 
friendship they have shown him. 3. Politeness requires that 
one should pay attention to what is told him. 4. To replace 
(pour remplacer) kindness, we have invented politeness, which 
has all its appearances. 5. Virtue resembles the diamond ; dark- 
ness cannot hide its worth (merite). 6. It is against the rules of 
good-breeding to ridicule people ; we disapprove very much of 
your doing so. 7. When one fancies that he knows better than 



312 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 

others, and seizes every opportunity to show his knowledge, it 
seems to me that he deserves to be ridiculed. 8. I do not think 
much of persons who like to put themselves forward (se /aire 
valoir) on all occasions ; however, it is not becoming (bienseant) 
to laugh them in the face, or (ni) to mock them. 9. Why do 
you look displeased? 10. I disapprove very much of your 
brother having taken possession of my seat next to that young 
lady. 11. He thought that you had given it up to him ; if you 
wish to resume it, I will make him a sign to come here, and he 
will understand that it was a mistake on his part. 12. If you 
fancy that we have a private understanding in order to impose 
upon you, you are mistaken, 13. Are you a judge of fire-arms? 
14. No, sir ; I am not. 15. I wish you would accompany me to 
the shooting-gallery (uu tir), a few steps from here (a quelques 
pas cPici), in order to examine a brace (une paire) of pistols. 
16. If you wish to play a trick upon me, you ought to tell me of 
it beforehand (d'avance). 17. Having defeated the enemy, our 
general attacked, and took possession of, the city, which put an 
end to the war (mettre fin a qq. ch.). 



11. SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTlfiME LEQOK 

283 • To suspect. Se douter de. 

I suspected that Je me doutais de cela. 

To put by or away. Serrer. 

To drag; to lie about. Trainer. 

Put by your papers, instead of Serrez vos papiers, au lieu de les 

letting them lie about in that laisser trainer comme cela. 

way. 

To procrastinate, to go slowly about. Trainer les choses en longueur. 

To take it into one's head. S'aviser de. 

He took it into his head, the other II s'avisa Fautre jour de me jouer 

day, to play that trick upon me. ce tour-la. 

To manage, to set about. S'y prendre. 

He manages it skilfully. II s'y prend adroitement. 



SO IX AK TE-DLX-SEPTIEME LE'£ O JS T . 



313 



In the right way. 

To find fault with. 

What fault do you find with that. 

I find much fault with it. 

To be close, to be particular. 

That man is too particular. 

You are to blame for it. 

To be useless, in vain, to no purpose. 

You may say what you please, no- 
body will believe you, 

In vain I do my best, I cannot do 
any thing to his liking. 

Where are we with it? 

Where did we leave off! 

He does not know what he is about. 



De la "bonne maniere. 

Trouver a redire a. 

Que trouvez-vous a redire a celaf 

J'y trouve beaucoup a redire. 

Y regarder de pres. 

Cet homme y regarde de trop pres. 

La faute en est a vous. 

Avoir beau. 

Vous avez beau dire, on ne vous 

croira pas. 
J'ai beau, faire de mon mieux, je ne 

peux rien faire a son gre. 
Ou en sommes-nous ? 
Ou en etions-nous I 
II ne sait pas ou il en ^est, 



284. 

To have a grudge against one. | 

To bear him ill will. j 

Whom do you aim at? 
To disentangle; to unravel. 
What have you to do with that 

man? 
To disagree ; to fall out. 
To be at variance. 
To reconcile, to make friends again. 
To make it up. 
They were at variance, but they 

have made it up again. 
To end. To chatter ; to talk. 
The matter was soon arranged. 
To torment, to annoy, to pester. 
Cavilling, mischief-making. 
An arbitrator. An impartial judge. 
To exhaust a person's patience. 

My patience is at an end; I will 

tell him my way of thinking. 
To leave it to one, to refer it to one. 
To abide by a thing. 
To appeal to. 
To protest against. 
To put up with, to submit to. 



14 



En vouloir a qqn. 

A qui en voulez-vous! 

Demeler. 

Qu' avez- vous a demeler avec cet 

homme ? 
Se brouiller. 
Etre brouille. 
Raceommoder, 
Se raccommoder. 
Us ont ete brouilles, mais ils se sont 

raccommodes. 
Terminer. Jaser. 
L'affaire fut bientot terminee. 
Tracasser. 
Tracassier. 

Un arbitre. Un juge impartial. 
Mettre la patience d'un homme a 

bout. 
Ma patience est a bout; je lui dirai 

ma facon de penser. 
S'en rapporter a qqn. 
S'en tenir a qq, ch. 
En appeler a. 
Reclamer. 
En passer par. 



314 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME LECON. 

He abides by what has been agreed II se tient a ce qui a ete convenu. 
upon. It will be in vain for you Vous aurez beau reclamer, il 
to protest, you will have to sub- faudra bien que vous en passiez 
mit to it. par la. 

To satisfy; to gratify. Satisfaire. 

To satisfy ; to discharge. Satisfaire a. 

To gratify one's vanity. Satisfaire sa vanite. 

To satisfy the law. Satisfaire a la loi. 



Exercice 77. 



1. Comment vous y prenez-vous pour avoir toujours fini votre 
besogne de si bonne heure ? 2. Je m'y prends de la bonne ma- 
niere ; je travaille pendant que les autres jasent et s'amusent. 
3. Ne serrez-vous pas vos papiers avant de sortir ? 4. Je vais 
les mettre sous clef; je ne laisse jamais trainer mes papiers dans 
ma chambre, quand je n'y suis pas. 5. Vous avez Fair mecon- 
tent ; y a-t-il quelque chose qui vous tracasse ? 6. II y a des 
gens bien tracassiers dans ce monde, qui mettraient la patience 
d'un homme a bout en cinq minutes de temps. 7. A qui en 
voulez-vous? 8. J'en veux a M. Lebrun. 9. JSTe faites-vous 
plus d'affaires avec lui? 10. Non, M. ; c'est un homme qui y 
regarde de trop pres ; puis, il a une maniere de trainer les choses 
en longueur, de faQon qu'on ne sait jamais ou Ton en est avec 
lui. 11. Je me doutais bien que vous etiez brouilles; qu'avez- 
vous eu a demeler ensemble? 12. Un differend sur quelques 
gourdes. Je voulais m'en rapporter a la decision d'un arbitre, il 
y consentait. Lorsque l'affaire etait decidee contre lui, il voulait 
en appeler a un autre. Vous seriez-vous doute de cela? 13. 
Non ; certainement pas. Et comment l'affaire a-t-elle ete termi- 
nee? 14. Monsieur, lui ai-je dit, je m'en tiens a ce qui a ete 
convenu. II avait beau reclamer, il lui a bien fallu en passer par 
la. 15. L'idee que vous me donnez de cet homme, s'accorde 
avec ce que mon associe dit de lui ; il le frequent-ait autrefois, 
mais il ne le voit plus. 16. Eh bien, que dit-il de lui, votre as- 
socie ? 17. II dit que c'est un homme qui trouve a redire a tout 
ce qu'il voit et a tout ce qu'on fait. 18. Ma foi, votre associe a 
bien raison. On a beau tout faire pour contenter ce monsieur, 



SOIXANTE-DIX SEPTIEME LE£ON. 315 

II trouve toujours son mais et son si a placer. 19. Voila de ces 
hommes que je ne puis souffrir ; ils sont decourageants. 20. 
N'est-ce pas qu'on dirait qu'ils en veulent a tout le monde. 



Theme 77. 

1. Do you let your clothes lie about in this manner in your 
room ? 2. I always put my things away, but people have come 
to torment me all the morning ; I have not had a moment to 
myself (a moi). 3. I must write to my agent (homme d'affaires)] 
he is in the habit of procrastinating matters, which just now (en 
ce moment) vexes me exceedingly (desoler). 4. My patience is 
exhausted, and that of my creditors too. 5. I am at a loss (Je 
ne sais plus) how to manage to get rid of them. 6. You are to 
blame for it ; nothing of the kind ever disturbs my peace (ne 
vient troubler mon repos), 7. How do you manage ? 8. I set 
about it in the right way ; I never buy on credit. 9. Have you 
fallen out with the painter, who lives over the way? 10. We 
are no longer friends together ; he took it into his head, the other 
day, to cheat me. 11. I suspected that you were at variance; 
what have you had to do with him ? 12. I had consented to take 
a picture of him, in payment of a debt ; as we could not agree 
about the price, we were going to leave it to an artist of his ac- 
quaintance. 13. But seeing that they made signs to one anoth- 
er, I suspected that they had a private understanding, in order to 
impose upon me. 14. I therefore concluded not to abide by the 
decision of the arbitrator, and accordingly protested against it, 
wishing to appeal to a more impartial judge. 15. But it was in 
vain for me to protest, I had to submit to their will (par ou ils 
voulaient). 16. Have you a grudge against this young man? 
17. I bear him no ill will, but I do not like him ; he is too par- 
ticular. 18. What fault do you find with the conduct of these 
young people? 19. I find much fault with it. 20. I cannot 
approve of any one's seizing, at table, upon any thing he likes, 
without regard (egard) to other persons, and laughing in the 
face of those who show discontent at the sight of such selfish 
conduct (egoism). 21. I disapprove likewise of (Je trouve egale- 



316 SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. 

ment mauvais que) a young man's seizing every opportunity to 
gratify his vanity, at the expense of good sense and decorum. 
22. If the former are to be despised, the latter deserve to be ridi- 
culed. 23. I have a great mind to tell them my way of think- 
ing. 24. If you do, they will not thank you for it. 25. Your 
tutoring them will be to no purpose ( Vous aurez beau les mori- 
gener) ; they will laugh you in the face. 26. Believe me (Cro- 
yez-rrten), you will never have friends, if you are so particular. 



IS. SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LEQON. 
Remarks on the Past Participle. 

285. The rules regulating the agreement of the past participle, 
have been given (135), (140), (145, a), (147, a). 

The application of these rules presents, in some cases, difficul- 
ties which require further explanation. 

Rem. 1. — When the past participle is followed by an infinitive, 
the preceding object may belong to the participle or to the infin- 
itive; as, 

(a.) I heard her sing, (a lady.) 
(6.) I heard it sung, (a song.) 

When the object can be made the subject of the second verb, 
then it is governed by the first, as in Ex. (a.), / heard her, who 
was singing ; in this case, the participle agrees with it : Je Vai 
entendue chanter. But in Ex. (6.), the object is governed by the 
second verb : / heard somebody sing the song ; in this case there 
is no agreement : Je Vai entendu chanter. 

Therefore we say, with agreement of the past participle : 

I allowed them to start. Je les ai laisses partir. 

I heard thern blame your impru- Je les ai entendus blame r votre 

dence. imprudence. 

I saw them drive back the enemy. Je les ai vus repousser les ennemis. 



SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. 31*7 

And without agreement : 

They suffered themselves to be sur- lis se sont laisse surprendre. 

prised. 

I heard them blamed, on account Je les ai entendu blamer, a cause 

of their imprudence. de leur imprudence. 

I saw them driven back by the en- Je les ai vu repousser par les enne- 

emy. mis. 

Rem. 2.— The infinitive is sometimes understood, after the par- 
ticiples pu, du, voulu, in which case, there is no agreement; as, 

I did him all the service I could, Je lui ai rendu tous les services que 
ought, would. j'ai pu, du, voulu, (lui rendre.) 

Rem. 3. — When the participle is followed by an infinitive, pre- 
ceded by a preposition, we must observe which is the direct, and 
which the indirect, object of the participle. We say : Frier qqn. 
de /aire une chose, with the person for the direct object of the 
verb ; and therefore we must say, with agreement of the participle, 
He asked us to write to him. II nous a pries de lui ecrire. 

But we say : recommander qq. ch. a qqn., or recommander a 
qqn. de /aire qq. ch., with the person for the indirect object of 
the verb ; and therefore we say, without agreement, 

He recommended us to write to H nous a recommande de lui e'crire. 
him. 

Rem. 4. — The participles excepts, suppose, passe, when they 
are placed before the noun which they modify, remain invaria- 
ble ; after the noun they agree with it. We say : excepte mes 
amis, suppose ces faits, pass£ cette heure ; but : mes amis ex- 
ceptes, ces faits supposes, cette heure passee. 

Rem. 5. — It is the same with regard to the participles, ap- 
prouve, certifie, vu {considering). 

Rem. 6. — The adjective nu, placed before cou, tete, bras, pied, 
is also invariable ; as nu-pieds, barefooted ; but, pieds nus. 



286. 

The more I study, the more I learn. Plus j'etudie, plus j'apprends. 
The richer he is, the less he is satis- Plus il est riche i moins il est con- 
ned, tent. 



318 



SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. 



The more, . . .as. 

The less. . . .as. 

I esteem him the more, because he 

is poor. 
I like him so much the better for it. 
He is so much the less entitled to 

your kindness, as he appears to 

attach little value to it. 
Across, through. 
Across the fields. 
Through the body. 
To speak at random. 



D'autant plus. . . .que. 

D'autant moins. . . .que. 

Je l'estime d'autant plus qu'il est 

pauvre. 
Je Ten aime d'autant mieux. 
II merite d'autant moins vos bonte's 

qu'il par ait en faire peu de cas. 

A travers. Au travers de. 
A travers les champs. 
Au travers du corps. 
Parler a tort et a travers. 



Kem. — Voici, voilA — voici refers to what follows; voila, to 
what precedes ; as, 

This is what he said : " I have lost 
my money ; this is a sad accident 
for my creditors." 



Voici ce qu'il dit: " J'ai perdu mon 
argent ; voild un facheux accident 
pour mes creanciers." 



287. 

To implicate ; to compromise. 

His health is impaired. 

To squander. 

To use somebody well. 

To use somebody ill. 

Notwithstanding that ; for all that. 

Although he did not treat me well, 
for all that I like him. 

Although that man is not rich, he 
is notwithstanding very kind to- 
wards the poor. 

To excite curiosity. 

To stir up compassion. 

To burst out laughing. 

You have exposed yourself to pub- 
lic laughter. 
I see nothing laughable in that. 
To make a great show. 
To have one's own way. 
To lose one's wits. 
Not to know what one is about. 
The house took fire. 



Compromettre. 

Sa sante est compromise. 

Dissiper. 

En user bien avec qqn. 

En user mal avec qqn. 

Ne laisser pas de. 

Quoiqu'il n'en ait pas bien use avec 
moi, je ne laisse pas de l'aimer. 

Quoique cet homme ne soit pas ri- 
che, il ne laisse pas d'etre chari- 
table envers les pauvres. 

Exciter la curiosite. 

Exciter la compassion. 
( Eclater de rire. 
| Faire un eclat de rire. 

Vous vous etes expose a la risee 
publique, 

Je ne vois rien de risible en cela. 

Faire de l'eclat. 

Faire a sa tete. 

Perdre la tete. 

Ne savoir que faire. 

Le feu a pris a la maison. 



SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LEC/ON. 319 

To set the house on fire. Mettre le feu a la maison. 

An increase. Un surcroit. 

For more bad luck, he dislocated Pour surcroit de malheur, il s'est 

his shoulder. demis l'epaule. 

It is not so. It is not the case. II n'en est rien. 

He escaped with a fright. II en a ete quitte pour la peur. 

To escape with. En etre quitte pour. 

To be dislocated. Se demettre. 

To resign one's office. Se demettre de sa place. 

The surgeon has set his arm. Le chirurgien lui a remis le bras. 

To be in a fever. Avoir la fievre. 

To have an attack of fever. Avoir un acces de fievre. 

Her fever has returned. La fievre l'a reprise. 

To put one in a fever. Donner la fievre a qqn. 

To give way. Se laisser aller. 

To abandon one's self. S'abandonner. 
To suffer one's self to be led away. Se laisser entrainer. 

You are welcome. Vous etes le bienvenu. 

I bid you farewell. Je vous fais mes adieux. 



Theme 78. 

1. Soldiers, you are welcome under the roofs (toit) which 
you have so bravely (yaillamment) defended. 2. We have seen 
you drive back the enemy (pi) who had come to surprise you. 
3. You did not allow yourselves to be surprised. 4. You have 
not allowed them to trample on [fouler) the soil in which (oil) 
your fathers sleep (reposer). 5. You have rendered to your 
country all the services which you could. 6. Come and enjoy 
the blessings (bonheur) of peace under the shade of those trees 
which you have seen grow up. 7. The more I read the life ot 
Washington, the more I admire the great virtues of that hero 
(heros). 8. I love him the more, as he was modest and disin- 
terested (desinteresse). 9. Although he had reached the pinna- 
cle of human grandeur (au faite des grandeurs humaines), he 
was, nevertheless, courteous towards all (affable envers tout h 
monde). 10. He is so much the more entitled to our admi- 
ration, as he appeared to value it little. 11. In the winter of 
1776, the soldiers of the republic marched barefooted through 
fields covered with snow; they often suffered for necessaries 



820 SOIXAXTE-DIX-KUITIEME LEfJOKV 

(manquer <$u necessaire) 7 but, for all that, they had ©oaf deuce m? 
their general. 12. A young officer, feeling himself mortally (a 
mort) wounded by a bullet (une balh), which had passed through 
his body, exclaimed i " This is a sad accident for my creditors.'^ 
13. Young men, you have suffered yourselves to be fed away by 
bad examples. 14. You have given way to the charms of an 
idle life, and behold the consequences 1 15. The golden (pre- 
cieux) opportunities you have had to improve your minds, you 
have suffered (them)* to escape. 16. Those who used you well^. 
your friends and relatives, you have offended (them)* by your 
conduct. 17. Your health is impaired and your fortunes are 
squandered. 18. This is what might be said to many young 
men who have listened to the voice of pleasure^ instead of follow- 
ing the path of their duty. 19. My neighbor's house took fire,, 
and for more bad luck, he fell and dislocated his shoulder. 2CL 
His wife appeared to have lost her wits, for she spoke at random^ 
and did not know what she was about.. 21. Why do you burst 
out laughing? Is there any thing laughable in that? 22. In- 
deed (Au fait) 7 he thought he had dislocated his arm ; but it is 
mot so ; and now (et voila) his wife (qui) has gone for the surgeon 
t© have it set. 23. If he escaped with a fright, so much the bet- 
ter (tant mieux). 



Theme Supplementaire sto le Partioipe Present et 
i/Adjectie Verbal. ( F. Zee. 74,) 

Now as 1 we grow old 2 and our strength 3 grows less, 4 the noisy- 
city life 5 offers us few attractions. 6 We quit it without regret 
lor the peaceful country life. 7 A rural retreat 8 has always been 
the goal 9 of our ambition. We love to see the bellowing 10 bulls 11 
roaming 12 in peace over 13 the vast prairies ; 14 the bleating 15 sheep 
caressing 16 their tender lambs, lT skipping 18 on the grass beside 
them ; the capricious goats climbing 19 on the steep 20 rocks, brows- 
ing 21 the plants, blossoming among the bushes, 22 or the newly 

* In inversions of this kind, when, for the sake of emphasis, the principal sentence is 
preceded by a relative clause, introducing its object, this object must be represented,, in 
the principal sentence, by a pronoun. 



SOIXASTE-DIX-HUITIEilE LECON. 



321 



formed 23 buds 24 of the creeping 25 brier. 26 We love to hear the 
delightful 27 voices of the little birds, singing among the verdant 28 
foliage. 29 We delight in 30 listening to the noise of some clear 
brook, falling from the height 31 of a rock, and flowing, 32 with 
gentle murmur, 33 across the meadows. 34 These are the scenes 
among which we shall spend the remainder 35 of our days, com- 
muning 36 with the Author of nature, and seeking the quietest 
and most peaceful path that leads to the tomb. 37 



1 Now as, 


maintenant que. 


19 To climb, 


grimper. 


2 To grow old, 


vieillir. 


20 Steep, 


escarpe. 


3 Our strength, 


nos forces. 


21 To browse, 


brouter. 


4 To grow less, 


ioffaiblir. 


22 The bushes, 


les buissons. 


6 City life, 


la vie des miles. 


23 Newly formed 


, naissant. 


6 Attraction, 


charme. 


24 The bud, 


le bourgeon. 


7 Peaceful coun- 


la vie paisible des 


25 To creep, 


ramper. 


try life, 


champs. 


26 The brier, 


la ronce. 


8 A rural retreat, une retraite cham- 


27 Delightful, 


ravissant. 




petre. 


28 Verdant, 


verdoyant. 


9 The goal, 


Vobjct. 


29 Foliage, 


le feuillage. 


10 To beUow, 


mugir. 


30 To delight in, 


se plaire a. 


11 Bull, 


taureau. 


31 The height, 


le haut. 


12 To roam, 


errer. 


32 To flow, 


couler. 


13 Over, 


sur. 


83 With gentle 


avec un doux mur- 


34 The prairie, 


la prairie. 


murmur, 


mure. 


15 To bleat, 


beler. 


34 The meadow, 


le pre. 


16 To caress, 


caresser. 


35 The remainder, le reste. 


17 A lamb, 


un agneau. 


36 To commune, 


s'entretenir. 


M To skip, 


bondir. 


37 The tomb, 


la tombe. 



Theme Supplementaire sur le Participe Passe. ( V. Lee. 18.) 

(In the following piece, the verbs relating the principal action, are put in the present. 
This construction, which enlivens the narration, is admissible in both languages, but 
much more frequently resorted to in French than in English.) 

An immense multitude, which curiosity had attracted, thronged 1 
in the inclosure 2 of the forum. Terror 3 had struck 4 all hearts, 
and those Romans who had shown themselves so untractable 5 

H* 



§22 soixante-dix-htjitieme LE£ON. 

tinder the yoke, 6 and who had been seen so many times to brave 7 
death, shamefully 8 bowed 9 their heads before the tyranny 10 of the 
decemviri. 11 Appius and his satellites have extended 12 the limits 13 
of their authority, 14 and have used it, or rather abused it, to sub- 
stitute 15 the most excessive 16 violence 17 for the laws (211). They 
have given way to the fury 18 of their passions, or to speak more 
correctly, 19 they have suffered themselves to be led into all the 
dissoluteness 20 which (2*76) the most inordinate 21 passions pro- 
duce. 22 Among the victims 23 which the cruelty 24 of Appius has 
marked out, 25 is 26 Virginia, 27 the daughter (63*) of a Roman 
centurion. Her beauty, her innocence, did not touch 28 the 
cruel decemvir. Nothing can stir 29 up in his heart a generous 
movement ; neither the services which the father of that unfor- 
tunate maiden 30 has rendered to Rome, nor the enemies he has 
conquered, nor the wounds 31 he has received, nor the combats in 
which his bravery 32 has signalized 33 itself, nor, in fine, the honor- 
able rewards which his deeds 34 have won for him. 35 

Virginia, standing and trembling, 36 is expecting, in the an- 
guish 37 of death, the fate 38 which is reserved 39 for her. Mean- 
while, a cry of joy escapes her : she has heard the voice of her 
father. Scarcely had he been apprised of the resolution which 
Appius had formed of reducing his daughter to slavery, 40 when 
(que) he left the army to hasten 41 to her succor. How shall I 
describe 42 the uneasiness that had seized upon his mind, 43 and 
the fortitude 44 he had required not to succumb 45 to the grief 46 
that rent 47 his heart ! At last, he arrives, and immediately 48 the 
crowd eagerly withdraws to let him pass. 49 At the sight of him 
(A sa vue), the tyrant 50 shudders ; 51 his eyes are cast down ; he 
himself is astonished 52 at the shame which he has felt glowing 
on 53 his criminal forehead ; but soon an apparent tranquillity has 
succeeded 54 to the fear which, for a moment, had shown itself on 
his countenance. 55 "What dost thou want?" he says, with a 
bold look. 56 " My daughter," replies the unfortunate father ; " her 
whom the gods made the sole support 57 of my old age." At 
these words, he approaches Virginia, and father and daughter 
are lost in 58 embraces 59 and sobs. 60 "Lictors," 61 exclaims the 
decemvir ; " let that slave be given up 62 to her master." Virginia, 



SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LECON. 



323 



distracted 63 with grief, has sunk (est tombee) almost inanimate 64 
into the arms of Virginius. The unfortunate father draws 65 his 
daughter far from the crowd, under pretext 66 of bidding 67 her a 
last farewell, and plunges into her heart a murderous 68 weapon 
that chance 69 had thrown into 70 his hands, (sing.) 



1 To throng, 


se presser. 


29 To stir up, 


/aire naitre. 


2 Inclosure, 


enceinte, f. 


30 That unfortu- 




3 Terror, 


terreur, f. 


nate maiden 


, cette infortunee. 


4 To strike, 


glacer. 


31 Wound, 


blessure, f. 


5 Untr act able 




32 Bravery, 


v alliance, f. 


under, 


indocile a. 


83 To signalize, 


signaler. 


6 Yoke, 


joug, m. 


34 Deed,' 


exploit, m. 


7 To brave, 


braver. 


35 To win for him. 


, lui valoir.* 


8 Shamefully, 


honteusement. 


36 To tremble, 


trembler. 


9 To bow, 


courber. 


37 The anguish, 


les angoisses. 


10 Tyranny, 


tyrannie, f. 


38 Fate, 


destin, m. 


11 Decemvir, 


decemvir, m. 


39 To reserve, 


reserver. 


12 To extend, 


reenter. 


40 Slavery, 


esclavage, m. 


13 Limit, 


borne, f. 


41 To hasten (to 




14 Authority, 


autorite, f. 


%), 


pour voter. 


15 To substitute 




42 How shall I 




for, 


substituer a. 


describe, 


comment peindre. 


36 Excessive, 


excessif. 


48 Mind, 


esprits, pi. 


17 Violence, 


violence, f. 


44 Fortitude, 


la force d'dme. 


18 Fury, 


fougue, f. 


45 To succumb, 


succomber. 


19 To speak more 


46 Grief, 


douleur, f. 


correctly, 


pour mieux dire 


47 To rend, 


dechirer. 


20 The dissolute- 




48 Immediately, 


immediatement. 


ness, 


les desordres. 


49 To withdraw 




21 Inordinate, 


deregle. 


eagerly to 


s'empresser de lai& 


22 To produce, 


produire. 


let pass, 


ser passer. 


23 Victim, 


victime, £ 


60 The tyrant, 


le tyran. 


24 Cruelty, 


cruaute, f. 


61 To shudder, 


frissonner. 


25 To mark out, 


designer. 


62 He himself is 


etonne lui-meme 


26 To be, 


se trouver. 


astonished at 


, de. 


27 Virginia, 


Virginie. 


63 To glow on, 


rougir. 


28 To touch, 


flechir. 


64 To succeed, 


succeder a. 



* Valoir, in the sense of to he worth, is intransitive ; but in the sense of to procv/re, 
to gain, it is transitive ; and in this sense, its past participle is subject to agreement. 



324 



SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITlllME LE£ON, 



66 Countenance, 


visage, m. 


62 To give up, 


livrer. 


M With a bold 




63 Distracted, 


eperdu de. 


look, 


d'un air assure. 


6i Inanimate, 


inanime. 


67 The sole sup- 




05 To draw or drag, entrainer. 


port, 


Vunique soutien. 


66 Pretext, 


pretexte, m. 


68 To be lost in, 


etre confondu 


67 To bid, 


adresser. 




dans. 


68 Murderousy 


meurtrier. 


69 Embrace. 


embrassement, m. 


69 Chance, 


kasard, m. 


60 Sob, 


sanglot, m. 


70 To throw into. 


/aire tomber 


61 Lictor, 


licteur, m. 




SOU9. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



The principal rules of Grammar have been embodied in the 
preceding lessons. To avoid repetition, we shall here only refer 
to them, and supply such exceptional rules as are wanting to 
complete the grammar part of the work. 



Nouns. 

I. — A noun can be used in a definite, general, indefinite, or 
partitive sense, (75). 

H.— Gender, (1). 

(1.) Amour, delice, orgue, are masculine in the singular, and 
feminine in the plural ; amour only when it signifies sexual pas- 
sion. 

(2.) The feminine nouns couleur and foudre become mascu- 
line — the first when it is followed by de and a noun denoting the 
kind of color ; as, le couleur de feu ; the second when it is used 
in a figurative sense ; as, un foudre de guerre. 

(3.) Gens, (204, Rem.). 

(4.) Quelque chose, (page 273, note f). 

(5.) Hymne, for the church, is feminine, otherwise masculine. 

(6.) There are a number of nouns which, in one sense, are 
masculine, and in another feminine. The most common are : 





Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Aide. 


Helper. 


Assistance. 


Aigle. 


Eagle, (the bird.) 


Eagle, (Roman ensign.) 


Couple. 


Two beings intimately connected. 


Two of a sort. 


Zivre. 


Book. 


Pound. 


Manche. 


Handle. 


Sleeve. 



326 


SUPPLEMENT. 






Masculine. 




Feminine* 


Memoire. 


Memoir; account. 




Memory. 


Mode. 


Mood. 




Fashion. 


Mousse. 


Cabin-boy. 




Foam; moss. 


Page. 


Page of a prince. 




Page of a book. 


Poele. 


Stove. 




Frying-pan. 


Poste. 


Post; station; employment. 


Letter-post. 


JSouris. 


Smile. 




Mouse. 


Tour. 


Turn. 




Tower. 


Voile. 


Veil. 




Sail. 



III. — Number. Formation of the Plural — General Rule, (16.) 
Exceptions. 

(1.) Nouns ending in s, x, z, (17, a). 

(2.) Nouns ending in au, eu, (17, b). 

(3.) Nouns ending in al, (17, c). Bal, cal, pal, regal, cama- 
val, chacal, nopal, take s in the plural. 

(4.) Nouns ending in nt, (17, d). 

(5.) Nouns ending in ail, (page 49, note J). 

(6.) Nouns ending in ou, (page 156, note f). 

(7.) Ciel, heaven, plural deux ; del, tester of a bed, or sky in 
painting, plural dels. 

(8.) Aieul, ancestor, plural a-ieux ; dieul, grandfather, plural 
a'ieuls. 

(9.) CEil, eye, plural yeux ; ceil, a term of art, plural mils. 

(10.) Ail, garlic, plural aulx. 

(11.) For the plural of compound nouns, see (227). 

(12.) Proper names remain unchanged in the plural, except 
when they are used as common nouns ; as, La France a eu ses 



The Article. 

I.— (1.) Its form, le, la, (2), les, (16). 
(2.) Elision, (6). 
(3.) Contraction, (44). 

II— Use of the article, (34), (69), (75), (104), (115), (116), 
(149). 



SUPPLEMENT. 327 

HI.— Omission of the article, (63), (74), (p. 49, n. f), (123). 

The article is further omitted : 

(1.) Before names, of persons or things, which we address ; 
as, Soldats, vous defendez les toits qui vous out vus naitre. 

(2.) Before nouns emphatically used in a series, in titles of 
books, in proverbial sentences, before ordinal numbers that are 
placed after their nouD, and before cardinal numbers used in the. 
same manner for ordinal ; as, 

Citoyens, etr angers, ennemis, rois, empereurs, le plaignent et le 

reverent 
Contentement passe richesse. 
Histoire de France.' 
Chapitre premier. Page vingt. Henri quatre. 

(3.) Before nouns preceded by a preposition, with which they 
form an adverbial phrase ; as, Avec prudence. 

(4.) After jamais placed at the head of a sentence, and after 
soit repeated; also before plus, moins, beginning a sentence, 
(285); as, 

Jamais nomme ne fut plus tourmente que moL 
Soit crainte, soit prudence. 

(5.) Before the names of countries, when they are preceded 
by en ; also, when they are preceded by de, unless they are ac- 
companied by an adjective, or used with reference to their whole 
extent ; as, 

Les deserts de la brulante Afrique. 
Les limites de la France. 

(6.) A few names of countries always retain the article ; as, 

Le Canada. Le Mexique. Le Brezil. Le Perou. 
La Chine. La Jamaique. 

(7.) And a few never take it : those which bear the names of 
their capitals ; as, Naples est un delicieux pays. 

IY.— Repetition, (12). 

The article is also repeated before the adverb forming the su- 
perlative degree, when it stands after the noun ; as, 

L'homme le plus industrieux. 






328 SUPPLEMENT. 

V.— Le plus, le mieux, le moins, are invariable when they 
modify a verb or adverb ; also, when they express the highest 
degree, in an absolute manner, without comparison ; as, 
Elle chante le mieux. 

Votre soeur ne pleure pas, lors meme quelle est le plus affligee. 
But: 

Be toutes ces dames, votre soeur est la plus affligee. 

^ _ 

Adjectives. 

I.— Adjectives are of two binds : qualifying (2) and determi- 
native, (5). 

Agreement, (2). See IV. 

II. — Gender. Formation of the feminine. 
General rules, (3), (5). 

Exceptions. 

(1.) Adjectives ending in x, (61, a). 

(2.) Adjectives ending in/, (61, b). 

(3.) Adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, en, et, (61, c). 

(4.) Nul, gentil, bellot, sot, vieillot, paysan ; has, gras, las, 
epais,gros, expres, profes, also double the final consonant in the 
feminine ; as, nulle, gentille, &c. ; basse, grasse, &c. 

(5.) Beau, nouveau, vieux, (37); and mou, mol ; fou, fol ; 
fern. molle,folle ; jumeau, jumelle. 

(6.) Doux, faux, prefix, roux, have the fern, douce, fausse 
prefixe, rousse. 

(7.) Blanc, franc, secjrais, fern, blanche, franche, seche,fraiche. 
(8.) Ammoniac, public, caduc, turc, grec, fern, ammoniaque, 
pubhque, caduque, turque, grecque. 

(9.) Bong, oblong, fern, longue, oblongue. 

(10.) Benin, malin, fern, benigne, maligne. 

(11.) Coi, fern, coite ; favori, fern, favorite ; tiers, fern, tierce. 

(12.) Aigu, ambigu, begu, contigu, exigu, fern, aigue, &c. 

H!-— Number. Formation of the plural. 
General rule, (16). 



SUPPLEMENT. 329 

Exceptions. 

(1.) Adjectives ending in 5, x, and the masculine of those end- 
ing in au, follow the same rales as the nouns, (1*7, a, 6). 

(2.) Of the adjectives ending in al, the majority form the plu- 
ral by changing al into aux ; as, egal, egaux ; those that do not, 
follow the general rule ; as, amical, fatal, final, frugal, naval, 
thedtral, &c. : des instants fatal 's. 

IY. — Agreement. 

General rules, (3), (15), (61, d). 

Exceptions. 

(1.) An adjective placed after two nouns that are synonymous, 
agrees with the last ; as, un travail, une occupation continuelle ; 
also, when the nouns are connected by the conjunction ou ; as, 
un courage ou une prudence etonnante. 

(2.) Tout, (56), demi, (56), nu, (285, Eem. 6). 

(3.) Feu, late, when separated from its noun, does not agree 
with it; as, feu voire mere ; but: lafeuereine. 

(4.) In compound words, adjectives are varied, except mi, 
demi, semi. The first of two adjectives is also invariable, when 
it is used adverbially ; as, court-vetu ; except, however, in frais- 
cueilli and tout-puissant, which have the feminine fraiche-cueillie 
and toute-puissante. 

(5.) Two adjectives, joined together, the former being quali- 
fied by the latter, remain invariable, because the former is used 
substantively ; as, des cheveux chdtain clair, that is, d'un chdtain 
clair. 

V.— Place of the adjective, (65), (116), (136, a). (See also XL) 
VI— Repetition, (12), (136, a). 
VIL— Comparison, (110), (112), (201). 
VIII. — Nouns used as adjectives, (63). 
IX. — Adjectives used as nouns, (64). 
X. — Government of adjectives, (190, a, b), (277, Rem. 4). 
(1.) Most adjectives which are followed in English by of, from, 
with, by, require the preposition de ; those that are followed by 



330 



SUPPLEMENT. 



to or /or, require the preposition a. There are a few exceptions ; 
for instance : A slave to, esclave de ; eager for, avide de. 

(2.) Adjectives expressive of kindness are generally followed 
by envers; as, affable, poll, civil envers tout le monde. Bon pour, 
indulgent pour, insolent avec, necessaire a, pour. 



XL — The following adjectives have one meaning when they 
precede, and another when they follow, the noun : 

Un bon homme, a simple man. 
Un brave homme, sl worthy man. 
Un certain conte, sl certain story. 



Mon cher ami, my dear friend. 
If une commune voix, unanimously. 

Un cruel enfant, a teasing child. 
La dernier e annee, the last year (of 

a series). 
Unefausse clef, a false key. 
Un furieux menteur, an excessive 

liar. 
Un galant homme, a gentleman. 
Un grand homme, a great man. 
Le haut ton, a haughty tone. 
Un honnete homme, an honest man. 
Un mechant livre, a worthless book. 
JDu mort bois, worthless wood. 
Le nouveau vin, the fresh wine. 

Un pauvre homme, a man of little 

merit. 
Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 

man. 
Un petit homme, a small man. 
Mes propres mains, my own hands. 
Un seul enfant, a single child. 
Un simple soldat, a private soldier. 
Un triste homme, sl pitiful man. 
Un unique tableau, a single picture. 

Un vilain homme, an ugly man. 
Un-e vraie histoire, a mere story. 



Un homme bon, a kind man. 
Un homme brave, a brave man. 
Une nouvelle certaine, authentic 

news. 
Une robe chere, an expensive dress. 
Une voix commune, an ordinary 

voice. 
Un enfant cruel, a cruel child. 
E annee dernier e, last year. 

Une cleffausse, the wrong key. 

Un animal furieux, a furious ani- 
mal. 

Um homme galant, a gallant. 

Un homme grand, a tall man. 

Le ton haut, a loud tone. 

Un homme honnete, a polite man. 

Un livre mechant, a caustic book. 

Du bois mort, dead wood. 

Le vin nouveau, the newly made 
wine. 

Un homme pauvre, a poor man. 

Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 
man. 

Un homme petit, a mean man. 

Les mains propres, clean hands. 

Un enfant seul, a child alone. 

Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier. 

Un homme triste, a sorrowful man. 

Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- 
ture. 

Un homme vilain, a sordid man. 

Une histoire vraie, a true history. 



supplement. 331 

Determinative Adjectives, (5). 

XII. — Possessive, (5). 

Mon, (5), (6, b), (16). Notre, (19). 

Ton, (18). Votre, (5), (16). 

Son, (10), (6, b), (16), (280). Leur, (20), (280). 



XIII. — Demonstrative, (5). 
Ce, (11), (16). 
In connection with this adjective, are used the suffixes, ci and 
la, (29). 



XIV.- 


—Indefinite, (5). (See also XVI.) 


Chaque, (165). 




Quelque, (121), (XVI.) 


Nul, (204), (XVI.) 


Plusieurs, (121). 


Aucun, (204), (XVI.) 


Tel, (204). 


Meme, (XVI.) 




Quel, (5), (XVI.) 


Tout, (56), (XVI.) 

XV.- 


Quelconque (whatever), (XVI.) 


-Numeral, (5), (38). 


CARDINAL NUMBERS. 


ORDINAL NUMBERS. 


1. Un («.), une (/.) 


1st. Premier (m), premiere (/.) 


2. Deux. 




2d. Second (m.), seconde (/.), 
deuxieme. 


3. Trois. 




3d. Troisieme. 


4. Quatre. 




4th. Quatrieme. 


5. Cinq. 




5th. Cinquieme. 


6. Six. 




6th. Sixieme. 


1. Sept. 




7th. Septieme. 


8. Huit.* 




8th. Huitieme.* 


9. Neuf. 




9th. Neuvieme. 


10. Dix. 




10th. Dixieme. 


11. Onze* 




11th. Onzieme.* 


12. Douze. 




12th. Douzieme. 


13. Treize. 




13th. Treizieme. 


14. Quatorze. 




14th. Quatorzieme. 






* See note, p. 29. 



332 


SUP 

CARDINAL NUMBERS. 


PLEMENT. 

ORDINAL NUMBERS. 


15. 


Quinze. 


15 th. Quinzieme. 


16. 


Seize. 


16th. Seizieme. 


17. 


Dix-sept. 


17th. Dix-septi&me. 


18. 


Dix-huit. 


18th. Dix-huitieme. 


19. 


Dix-neuf. 


19th. Dix-neuvieme. 


20. 


Vingt.* 


20th. Vingtierne.. 


21. 


Vingt et un. 


21st. Vingt et unieme. 


22. 


Vingt-deux. 


22d. Vingt-deuxieme. 


23. 


Vingt-trois. 


23 d. Vingt-troisieme. 


30. 


Trente. 


30th. Trentieme. 


31. 


Trente et un. 


31st. Trente et unieme. 


32. 


Trente-deux. 


3 2d. Trente-deuxieme. 


40. 


Quarante. 


40th. Quarantieme. 


50. 


Cinquante. 


50th. Cinquantieme. 


60. 


Soixante. 


60th. Soixantieme. 


10. 


Soixante-dix. 


10th. Soixante-dixieme. 


11. 


Soixante et onze. 


11 st. Soixante et onzieme. 


80. 


Quatre-vingts. 


80th. Quatre-vingtieme. 


81. 


Quatre-vingt-un. 


81st. Quatre-vingt-unieme. 


90. 


Quatre-vingt-dix. 


,90th. Quatre-vingt-dixieme. 


91. 


Quatre-vingt-onze. 


91st. Quatre-vingt-onzieme. 


100. 


Cent* 


100th. Centieme. 


101. 


Cent-un, 


101st. Cent-unieme. 


200. 


Deux cents. 


200th. Deux centieme. 


210. 


Deux cent-dix. 


210th. Deux cent-dixi&me. 


1,000. 


Mille.f 


1,000th. Millieme. 


1,001. 


Mille-un. 


1,001st. Mille-uni^me. 


2,500. 


Deux mille-cinq cents. 


2, 500th. Deux mille-cinq centieme 


1,000,000. 


Un million. 


1,000,000th. Millionieme. 



XVI. — Remarks on some Indefinite Adjectives. 

Aucun and nul, can be used in the plural, only with nouns 
that have no singular; as, aucunes funerailles. 

Meme is sometimes an adjective and sometimes an adverb. 
It is an adverb when it modifies a verb, and when it has the 
meaning of also ; as, 

II ne l'a pas mime vu. 

Les animaux, les plantes meme etaient au nombre des divinit6s 
egyptiennes. 



* Vingt and cent, see note §, p. 143. 



t MUe, see 171, Rem. 2. 



SUPPLEMENT. 333 

Quelque is sometimes an adjective, and sometimes an adverb, 
(256, note *). 

Quel is used with the conjunction que, in which case it is sep- 
arated from its noun, (256, note *). 

The noun is sometimes understood with quel; as, Quel est 
done votrepere? 

Quelconque is always placed after its noun ; as, Deux points 
quelconques etant donnes, any two points being given. 

Tout is sometimes a noun, sometimes an adjective, and some- 
times an adverb. 

Le tout est plus grand que sa partie. Voila tout 

Tout l'homme, (the whole man) 

Tout homme, (every man.) 

Tous les honimes, (all men.) 

Tout, adverb, sometimes agrees with the noun, (see note, p. 107.) 



XVII. — Remarks on the Numeral Adjectives. 

The cardinal numbers are used, instead of the ordinal, for the 
days of the month (171, Rem. 1), and in speaking of sovereigns, 
except for the first. George quatre ; but : Henri premier. 

We say: Charles-quint, for Charles the Fifth of Germany; 
and Sixte-quint, for Sixtus the Fifth. 

A or one, used before hundred and thousand, is not expressed ; 
as, cent dollars, one hundred dollars ; mille hommes, a thousand 
men. But when cent and mille are used substantively, the nu- 
meral un may precede them ; as, un cent d'huitres ; un mille de 
briques. 

Numeral Nouns. — Collective. 

Uunite, the unit. line trentaine, thirty. 

line demi-douzaine, a half dozen. line quarantaine, forty. 

line huitaine, a week, (8 days.) line cinquantaine, fifty. 

line neuvaine, nine days. line soixantainc, sixty. 

line dixaine, half a score. line quatre-vingtaine, eighty. 

line douzaine, a dozen. line centaine, a hundred. 

line quinzaine, a fortnight, (15 days.) Un millier, a thousand. 

Une vingtaine, a score. Un million, a million. 



334 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Fractional. 

La moitie, the half. Le cinquieme, t"he fifth. 

Le tiers, one-third. Le sixieme, the sixth. 

Les deux tiers, two -thirds. Le tiers de huit, one-third of eight. 

Le quart, one-fourth. Le quart d'un quart, a \ of a \. 

Bem. — In saying " one-third of two" the French say, le tiers 
de deux, because the sense of the noun tiers is determinate. 



Double, double. 
Triple, treble. 



Proportional. 

Quadruple, quadruple. 
Centuple, hundred-fold, 



Pronouns. 

There are personal, possessive, demonstrative, relative, and in- 
definite pronouns. 





L— 


(1.) Personal Pronouns. 






Subject. 


Direct Object. 


Indirect Object. 


Disjunctive.* 


1st. pees. 

2d. pees. 

3d. p. masc. 
" fern. 

Of both gen- 
ders and 
numbers. 


Sing. Plur. 

je (4), nous (19) 
tu (18), vous (4) 
il (9), ils (20) 
elle (9), elles (20) 

\ 


Sing-. Plur. 

me (57), nous (57) 
te (57), vous (57) 

se (132) 

The invariable 

le (62) 


Sing. Plur. 

me (57), nous (57) 
te (57), vous (57) 

lui (53), leur (53) 

se (133) 
en (75) 


Sing-. Plur. 

moi (65), f nous (65)t 
toi (65),t vous (65)t 
lui (65),t eux (65)t 
elle (65),f elles (65)t 
soi (224) 



(2.) Compound Personal Pronouns. 

Moi-meme, toi-meme, vous-meme, lui-meme, elle-meme, soi- 
meme, nous-memes, vous-mernes, eux-memes, elles-memes, (224). 



II.- 



Le mien, (11), (16), (47). 

Le tien, (18), (47). 

Le sien, (11), (16), (47). 



Possessive Pronouns. 

Le notre, (19), (47). 

Le votre, (11), (16), (47). 

Le leur, (20), (47). 



* These pronouns are called disjunctive, because they are not immediately joined 
to a verb. t See also 223, Rem. 1 and 2. 






SUPPLEMENT. 335 



III. — Demonstrative Pronouns, 



Ce, (89), (124), (L. 72). Celui-ci, (30), (85). 

Celui, (46), (88, Rem. 3). Celui-la, (30), (85). 

Ceci, (84). Cela, (84), (187, Rem. 1). 



IV. — Relative Pronouns. 

(1.) Qui, (87), (88). Lequel, (87), (IX.) 

Que, (87), (88). Ou, (IX.) 

Quoi, (IX.) En, (66), (280, Rem. 2 & 3). 
Dont, (87), (88). 

(2.) The following relative pronouns are also used absolutely ; 
that is, without an antecedent. 

Qui, (8), (48), (52). Quoi, (48). 

Que, (8), (48). Lequel, (11), (16), (47). 



V. — Indefinite Pronouns. 

On, (107), (X.) Autrui, (204). 

Quiconque, (whosoever). L'un l'autre, (224). 

Quelqu'un, (49), (50, Rem. 1), (121). IAm et l'autre, (40). 

Chacun, (165). Personne, (50). 

The following indefinite adjectives become pronouns, when 
they do not accompany a noun. 

Aucun, (204). Tel, (204). 

Nul, (204). Certain. 
Plusieurs, (121). 



VI. — Place of the Pronouns. 

(1.) As subject, (4). 

(2.) In interrogative sentences, (4, Rem. 2), (13), (125). 
(3.) As direct objects, (33), (54), (57), (58), (74), (128, Rem. 
1 and 2), (139). 

(4.) As indirect objects, (53), (54), (57), (58), (74), (81), (139). 
(5.) When the verb is in the imperative mood, (126). 



336 SUPPLEMENT. 

Rem, — When two imperatives are connected by et or ou, the 
objective pronouns may be placed before or after the second ; as, 
donnez-le-lui, ou le lui pretez, or ou pretez-le-luL 

VII. — Repetition of the personal pronouns, (136), (2*77, Rem, 
h and 6). 

VIII. — Remarks on the pronouns, (279). 



IX. — Remarks on some Relative Pronouns. 

A verb having a relative pronoun for its subject, agrees, in 
person and number, with the antecedent of the relative pronoun ; 
as, Nous etions deux qui etions du meme avis. 

When the relative pronoun refers to an adjective which is pre- 
ceded by the article, the adjective is the antecedent of the rela- 
tive pronoun ; as, Vous etes le seul qui ait (not, qui ayez) reussL 

Lequel, duquel, <fec, are used instead of qui, que, dont, to avoid 
ambiguity. Je dois recevoir une leitre de mes enfants laquelle 
f attends avec impatience. If que were used, in this sentence, in- 
stead of laquelle, it would refer to enfants. 

Duquel is used for dont, when the antecedent is followed by a 
preposition ; as, Les lois a la protection desquelles nous confions 
notre bonheur. 

Quoi, as a relative, is only used with reference to ce and rim ; 
as, Ce a quoi je pense. 

Quoi is used for what, in an exclamatory sentence ; as, Quoi 
de plus beau ! 

Ou and d'ou carry with them an idea of locality ; as, La ville, 
oft il demeure, d'ou je viens. When extraction of race is to be 
expressed, dont, and not d'ou, must be used ; as, Lafamille dont 
elle sort. 



X. — Remarks on some Indefinite Pronouns. 

On is essentially masculine singular ; but the adjective which 
refers to it, must be feminine or plural, when the sense absolute- 
ly requires it ; as, Ma fille, on rtest pas toujours jeune et belle. 
AujourdShui on est amis et demain rivaux. 



SUPPLEMENT. 837 

Quicmique, masculine singular, when applied to females, re- 
quires the adjective to be of the feminine gender; as, Mes- 
dames, quiconque de vous sera assez hardie pour medire de moi, 
je Venferai repentir* 

Quelqu'un and chacun, when used absolutely, can only refer 
to persons. 

Chacun placed between the verb and its object, does not gov- 
ern the possessive adjective that follows it; as, lis ont donne 
chacun leur avis. Leur refers to Us. But the possessive adjec- 
tive refers to chacun, when placed after the object of the verb ; 
as, lis ont apporte leurs offrandes, chacun selon ses moyens. 

Personne is sometimes used for quelqu'un, in phrases that ex- 
press uncertainty; as, Personne a-t-il jamais raconte plus 
naivement ? 



Verbs. 

There are transitive, (25), intransitive, (66), passive, (135), 
(175, Rem. and note f), reflective, (132), (162, &c), (also called 
pronominal), and impersonal, (183), (also called unipersonal\ 
verbs. 



Moods and Tenses. 

There are five moods : the indicative, conditional, imperative, 
subjunctive, and infinitive. 

The Indicative has eight tenses : 

Simple. Compound. 

Present, (24), (83), (95), (96). Past Indefinite, or Perfect,(138> 
Imperfect, (197). Pluperfect, (202). 

Past Definite, or Preterit, (229). Past Anterior, (231). 
Future, (166), (167). Future Perfect. 

The Conditional, two : 

Present, (205, a). Past, (205, b). 

The Imperative, one : 

Present, (126), (218), (262), expressing also future action. 

15 



338 SUPPLEMENT. 

The Subjunctive, four: 

Present, (238). Perfect, (239). 

Imperfect, (258, a). Pluperfect, (258, b). 

The Infinitive, two : 
Present, (23), (83), (91). Past, (152). 

And, also, the Participles: 
Present, (269), Past, (134), (142), and Compound, (270, b, 3d). 



There are two auxiliary verbs : avoir and etre. 
Use of avoir, (138), (146), (183, Rem.), (264). 
Use of etre, (135), (145), (146), (147), (264). 
Remarks on the agreement of the verb with its subject, (273), 
(274), (266, Rem. 5). 

Remarks on the accidental place of the subject, (276). 
Remarks on the direct and indirect objects, (277). 
Remarks on the verb /aire, (245). 



Adverbs. 

Place of the adverb, (51), (139). 
Formation of adverbs of manner, (137). 



Prepositions. 



Prepositions govern the verb in the infinitive, except the prep- 
osition en, (94). 



Conjunctions. 



Conjunctions that govern the subjunctive, (254, &c). 
Remarks on the conjunction que, (255). 



Interjections. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



339 



CONJUGATION OF TEE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIE. 



Avoir, 



Ayant, 



Present. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to have. Avoir eu, 
PAETICIPLES. 

having. Eu, m. ; eue, /., 



Past. 



Past 



to have had. 



had. 





Compound. 
Ayant eu, having had. 






INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




Past Indefinite. 


J'ai, 

Tu as, 
11 a, 

Nous avons, 
Vous avez, 
lis ont, 


Imperfect. 


I have, 
thou hast. 

he has. 

we have. 

you have. 

they have. 


J'ai eu, 
Tu as eu, 
11 a eu, 

Nous avons en, 
Vous avez eu, 
lis ont eu, 


I have had. 

thou hast had. 

he has had. 

we have had. 

you have had. 

they have had. 

Pluperfect. 


J'avais, 
Tu avais, 
11 avait, 
Nous avions, 
Vous aviez, 
lis avaient, 




I had. 

thou hadst. 

he had. 

we had. 

you had. 

they had. 


J'avais eu, 
Tu avais eu, 
11 avait eu, 
Nous avions eu, 
Vous aviez eu, 
lis avaient eu, 


I had had. 

thou hadst had. 

he had had. 

we had had. 

you had had. 

they had had. 




Past Definite. 


Past Anterior. 


J'eus, 
Tu eus, 
11 eut, 

Nous etimes, 
Vous elites, 
lis eurent, 




I had. 

thou hadst. 

he had. 

we had. 

you had. 

they had. 


J'eus eu, 
Tu eus eu, 
11 eut eu, 
Nous etimes eu, 
Vous etites eu, 
lis eurent eu, 


I had had. 

thou hadst had. 

he had had. 

we had had. 

you had had. 

they had had. 




Future. 




Future Perfect. 


J'aurai, 
Tu auras, 
11 aura, 
Nous aurons, 
Vous aurez, 
lis auront, 




I shall have, 
them wilt have, 
he will have, 
we shall have, 
you will have, 
they will have. 


J'aurai eu, 
Tu auras eu, 
11 aura eu, 
Nous aurons eu, 
Vous aurez eu, 
lis auront eu, 


I shall have had. 
thou icili have had. 

he will have Txad. 
toe shall have had. 
you will have had. 
they will have ho/A* 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. 






Present. 






Past. 


J'aurais, 
Tu aurais, 
11 aurait, 
Nous aurions, 
Vous auriez, 
lis auraient, 


I should have. 

thou wouldst have. 

he xcould have. 

we should have. 

you would have. 

they xcould have. 


J'aurais eu, 
Tu aurais eu, 
11 aurait eu, 
Nous* aurions eu, 
Vous auriez eu, 
lis auraient eu, 


I should have had. 

thou wouldst have had. 

he would have had. 

i we should have had. 

you would have had. 

they would have had. 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Aie, 
Qu'il ait, 




have (thou), 
let Mm have. 


Ayons, 
Ayez, 
Qu'ils aient, 


let us have. 

have (you). 

let them have. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. 

Que j'aie, that I may have. 

Que tu aies, that thou mat/si have. 

Qu'il ait, that he may have. 

Que nous ayons, that ice may have. 

Que vous ayez, thai you may have. 

Qu'ils aient, that they may have. 

Imperfect. 

that I might have. 



Que j'aie eu, 
Que tu aies eu, 
Qu'il ait eu, 
Que nous ayons eu, 
Que vous ayez eu, 
Qu'ils aient eu, 



Que j'eusse, 
Que tu eusses, 
Qu'il eut, 
Que nous eussions, 
Que vous eussiez, 
Qu'ils eussent, 



that thou mightat have. 

that he might have. 

that we might have. 

that you might hone. 

that they might have. 



Perfect. 

that I may 

that thou may at 

that lie may 

that ice mai/ 

that you may 

that (hey may 

Pluperfect. 
Que j'eusse eu, that I might 

Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst 
Qu'il eut eu, that he might 

Que nous eussions eu, tJiat we might 
Que vous eussiez eu, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might 



have had. 
have had. 
have had. 
have Jiad. 
have had. 
have had. 



have had. 
have had. 
have had. 
Jtave Jiad. 
have had. 
have had. 



340 



SUPPLEMENT. 



CONJUGATION OF TEE A UXILIAB Y VEBB E T E E . 







INFINITIVE MOOD. 






Present. 






Past. 


fitre, 




to be. 


Avoir ete\ 


to have been. 






PARTICIPLES. 




fltant, 


Present. 


being. 


£te, 


Past. 




Compound. 
Ayant §te, having been. 






INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




Past Indefinite. 


Je suis, 

Tues, 

11 est, 

Nous sommes, 

Vous etes, 

lis sont, 




lam. 

thou art. 

he is. 

we are. 

you are. 

they are. 


J'ai ete\ 
Tu as ete, 
11 a ete, 
Nous avons et6, 
Vous avez §te, 
lis ont ete, 


I have been. 

thou hast been. 

he has been. 

we have been. 

you have been. 

they have been. 




Imperfect. 




Pluperfect. 


J'etais, 
Tu etais, 
11 etait, 
Nous etions, 
Vous etiez, 
lis etaient, 




I was. 

thou wast. 

he was. 

we were. 

you were. 

they were. 


J'avais et§, 
Tu avais 6t6, 
11 avait ete, 
Nous avions 6te, 
Vous aviez ete, 
lis avaient 6te\ 


I had been. 

thou hadst been. 

he had been. 

we had been. 

you had been. 

they had been. 


Past Definite. 


Past Anterior. 


Je fus, 
Tu fus, 
11 fut, 

Nous ftimes, 
Vous futes, 
lis furent, 




I was. 

thou icast. 

he wae. 

we were. 

you were. 

they were. 


J'eus ete, 
Tu eus ete\ 
11 eut ete, 
Nous etimes ete, 
Vous etites 6te, 
lis eurent ete, 


I had been. 

thou hadst been. 

he had been. 

we had been. 

you had been. 

they had been. 




Future. 




Future Perfect. 


Je serai, 
Tu seras, 
11 sera, 
Nous serons, 
Vous serez, 
lis seront, 




I shall be. 
thou icilt be. 

he will be. 
we shall be. 
you icill be. 
they will be. 


J'aurai ete, 
Tu auras ete, 
11 aura ete, 
Nous aurons ete, 
Vous aurez ete, 
lis auront ete, 


I shall have been, 
thou wilt have been. 

he will have been, 
we shall have been, 
you will have been, 
they will have been. 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. 






Present. 






Past. 


Je serais, 
Tu serais, 
11 serait, 
Nous serions, 
Vous seriez, 
lis seraient, 




I should be. 

thou wouldst be. 

he would be. 

we should be. 

you icoidd be. 

they icould be. 


J'aurais ete, 
Tu aurais ete, 
11 aurait ete, 
Nous aurions ete, 
Vous auriez ete, 
Us auraient ete, 


I should have been. 

thou wouldst have been. 

he icould have been. 

we sliould have been. 

you icould have been. 

they would have been. 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Sois, 
Qu'il soit, 




be (thou), 
let him be. 


Soyons, 
Soyez, 
Qu'ils soiem\ " 


let us be. 

be (you). 

let them be. 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






Present. 






Perfect. 


Que je sois, 
Que tu sois, 
Qu'il soit, 
Que nous soyons, 
Que vous soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 


that I may be. 

that thou mayst be. 

that he may be. 

that roe may be. 

that you may be. 

that they may be. 


Que j'aie ete, that I may have been. 
Que tu aies 6t6, that thou mayst have been. 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may have been. 
Que nous ayons 6te, that xce may hare been. 
Que vous ayez et6, that you may have been. 
Qu'ils aient 6t6, that they may have been. 




Imperfect 




Pluperfect. 


Que je fusse, that I might he. 
Que tu fusses, that thou mig'htst be. 
Qu'il fut, that he riiiqht be. 
Que nous fussions, that we might be. 
Que vous fussiez, that you might be. 
Qu'ils fussent, that they might be. 


Que j'eusse 6t6, that I might have been. 
Que tu eusses et6, that thou mightst have Itsen. 
Qu'il eut 6te\ that he might have been. 
Que nous eussions 6t6, that ice might have been. 
Que vous eussiez 6te, that you might hare been. 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might have bt*n. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



341 



FIRST CONJUGATION- in EE. 



Parler, 



Present. 



Present. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to speak. Avoir parle, 
PARTICIPLES. 

speaking. Parle, 



Past. 



Past. 



to have spoken. 



spoken. 



Ayant parle, 



Compound. 



having spoken. 



Je parle, 
Tu paries, 
II parle, 
Nous parlons, 
Vous parlez, 
lis parlent, 

Je parlais, 
Tu parlais, 
II parlait, 
Nous parlions, 
Vous parliez, 
lis parlaient, 

Je parlai, 
Tu parlas, 
II parla, 
Nous parlames, 
Vous parlates, 
lis parlerent, 

Je parlerai, 
Tu parleras, 
II parlera, 
Nous parlerons, 
Vous parlerez, 
lis parleront, 



Present. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Imperfect. 



thou speakest. 

he speaks. 

we speak. 

you speak. 

they speak. 



J'ai parle, 
Tu as parle, 
II a parle, 
Nous avons parle 
Vous avez parle, 



lis ont parle, 



Past Indefinite. 

I have 

thou hast 

he has 

we have 

you have 



Past Definite. 



I was speaking. 

thou wast speaking. 

he teas speaking. 

we were speaking. 

you were speaking. 

they were speaking. 



they have 
Pluperfect. 

I had 

thou hadst 

he had 

we had 



Future. 



I s-poke. 

thou spokest. 

he spoke. 

we spoke. 

you spoke. 

they spoke. 

I shall sp>eak. 
thou wilt speak. 

he will speak, 
we shall speak. 
you will speak, 
they icill speak. 



J'avais parle, 
Tu avais parle, 
11 avait parle, 
Nous avions parl§ 
Vous aviez parle, 
lis avaient parle, 

Past Anterior. 

I had 

thou hadst 

he had 

we had 



spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 

spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 



J'eus parle, 
Tu eus parle, 
II eut parle, 
Nous eumes parle, 
Vous eutes parle, 
lis eurent parle, 



•ou had spoken, 
ey had spoken. 



spoken, 
ipoken. 



you had spoken, 
hey had spoken. 



Future Perfect. 



J'aurai parle, 
Tu auras parle, 
II aura parle, 
Nous aurons parle, 
Vous aurez parle, 
lis auront parle, 



I shall have 
thou wilt have 
he will have 
we shall have 
you will have 
they will have 



spoken, 
spoken. 



spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Present. 



Je parlerais, 
Tu parlerais, 
II parlerait, 
Nous parlerions, 
Vous parleriez, 
lis parleraient, 



I should speak. 

thou wouldst speak. 

he would speak. 

we shiould speak. 

you would speak. 

they would speak. 



J'aurais parle, 
Tu aurais parle, 
II a'urait parle, 
Nous aurions parle, 
Vous auriez parle, 
lis auraient parle, 



Past. 

I should have spoken. 

thou wouldst have spoken. 

he would have spoken. 

we should have spoken. 

you would have spoken. 

they would have spoken. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Parle, 
Qu'il parle, 



speak {thou), or do (thou) speak, 
let him speak. 



Parlons, 
Parlez, 
Qu'ils parlent, 



let us speak. 

speak (you), or do (you) speak, 

let them speak. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je parle, 
Que tu paries, 
Qu'il parle, 
Que nous parlions, 
Que vous parliez, 
Qu'ils parlent, 



Present. 

that I may 

that thou rnayst 

that h< mill/ 

that ui may 

that you may 

that they may 



speak, 
speak. 
apeak. 

speak. 



Que je parlasse, 
Que tu parlasse, 
Qu'il parlat, 
Que nous parlassions, 
Que vous parlassiez, 
Qu'ils parlassent, 



Imperfect. 

that I might 

that thou mightat 

that he might 

that im might 

that you might 



apeak, 
apeak. 

spink. 

that they might speak. 



Perfect. 
Que j'aie parl§, that I may have] 

Que tu aies parle 1 , that thou rnayst have 
Qu'il ait parl6, that he may have I 

Que nous ayons parle, that we may have f 
Que vous ayez parle, that you may have 
Qu'ils aient parle, that they may Jiavej 

Pluperfect. 
Que j'eusse parle, that I might have} 

Que tu eusses parl§, that thou mightst have J 
Qu'il eut parle, that he might have I 

Que nous eussions parl6, that we might have f 
Que vous eussiez parle, tlcatyou might have I 
Qu'ils eussent parle, that they might have) 



342 



SUPPLEMENT. 



SECOND CONJUGATION- in IE. 



Finir, 



Present. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
to finish. Avoir fini, 



Past. 



to have finished. 





PAETICIPLES. 








Present. 




Past. 


Finissant, 


finishing. 


Fini, 


finished. 




Compound. 






Ayant fini, 


having finished. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 


Past Indefinite. 


Je finis, 


I finish. 


J'ai fini, 


I have finished. 


Tu finis, 


thou finishest. 


Tu as fini, 


thou hast finished. 


11 finit, 


he finishes. 


11 a fini, 


he has finished. 


Nous finissons, 


we finish. 


Nous avons fini, 


we have finished. 


Vous finissez, 


you finish. 


Vous avez fini, 


you have finished, 
they have finished. 


lis finissent, 


they finish. 


lis ont fini, 




Imperfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Je finissais, 


I was finishing. 


J'avais fini, 


I had finished. 


Tu finissais, 


thou wast finishing. 


Tu avais fini, 


thou hadst finished. 


11 finissait, 


he was finishing. 


11 avait fini, 


he had finished. 


Nous finissions, 


we were finishing. 


Nous avions fini, 


we had finished. 


Vous finissiez, 


you were finishing, 
they were finishing. 


Vous aviez fini, 


you had finished. 


lis finissaient, 


lis avaient fini, 


they had finished. 


Past Definite. 


Past Anterior. 


Je finis, 


I finished. 


J'eus fini, 


I had finished. 


Tu finis, 


thou finishedst. 


Tu eus fini, 


thou hadst finished. 


11 finit, 


he finished. 


11 eut fini, 


he had finished. 


Nous finimes, 


we finished. 


Nous eumes fini, 


we had finished. 


Vous finltes, 


you finished, 
they finished. 


Vous eutes fini, 


you had finished, 
they had finished. 


lis finirent, 


lis eurent fini, 




Future. 


Future Perfect. 


Je finirai, 


I shall finish. 


J'aurai fini, 


I shall have finished. 


Tu finiras, 


thou wilt finish. 


Tu auras fini, 


thou wilt have finished. 


11 finira, 


he will finish. 


11 aura fini, 


he will have finished. 


Nous finirons, 


we shall finish. 


Nous aurons fini, 


we shall have finished. 


Vous finirez, 


you will finish. 


Vous aurez fini, 


you will have finished, 
they will have finished. 


lis finiront, 


they will finish. 


lis auront fini, 




CONDITIONAL MOOD. 






Present, 




Past. 


Je fiuirais, 


I should finish. 


J 'aurais fini, 


J should have finished. 


Tu finirais, 


thou wouldst finish. 


Tu aurais fini, 


thou wouldst have finished. 


11 finirait, 


he would finish. 


11 aurait fini, 


he would have finished. 


Nous finirions, 


we should finish. 


Nous aurions fini, 


we should have finished. 


Vous finiriez, 


you would finish, 
they would finish. 


Vous auriez fini, 


you would have finished, 
they would have finished. 


lis finiraient, 


lis auraient fini, 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 








Finissons, 


let us finish. 


Finis, 


finish {thou). 


Finissez, 


finish (you). 


> Qu'il finisse, 


let him finish. 


Qu'ils finissent, 


let them finish. 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




Perfect. 


Que je finisse, 


that I may finish. 


Que j'aie fini, 


that I may have] 


Que tu finisses, 


that thou may st finish. 


Que tu aies fini, 


that thou mayst have I |»» 


Qu'il finisse, 


that he may finish. 


Qu'il ait fini, 


that he may have 1 g. 


Que nous finissiojis, that we may finish. 


Que nous ayons fini, that we may have [ \ 


Que vous finissiez, that you may finish. 


Que vous ayez fini, 


that you may have \ a. 


Qu'ils finissent, 


that they may finish. 


Qu'ils aient fini, 


that they may have} 




Imperfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Que je finisse, 


that I might finish. 


Que j'eusse fini, 


that I might have" 




Que tu finisses, 


that thou mightst finish. 


Que tu eusses fini, 


that thou mightst have 


^ 


Qu'il finit, 


that he might finish. 


Qu'il eut fini, 


that he might have 




Que nous finissions, that we might finish. 


Que nous eussions 


fini, that we might have 


• g, 


Que vous finissiez, that you miqht finish. 


Que vous eussiez fini, that you might have 


& 


Qu'ils finissent, 


that they might finish. 


Qu'ils eussent fini, 


that they might have 





SUPPLEMENT. 



343 



THIRD CONJUGATION- -in OIK. 



Recevoir, 



iRecevant, 



Je recois, 
Tu recois, 
II recoit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
lis recoivent, 



Je recevais, 
Tu recevais, 
II recevait, 
Nous recevions, 
Vous receviez, 
Us recevaient, 



'Je regus, 
Tu recus, 
II recut, 
Nous resumes, 
Yous recutes, 
lis regurent, 



Present. 



Present. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to receive. Avoir recu, 
PARTICIPLES. 

receiving. Regu, 



Past. 



to have received. 



Ayant recu, 



Compound. 



having received. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present. 

I receive. 

thou receivest. 

he receives. 

we receive. 

you receive. 

they receive. 

Imperfect. 

I was receiving. 

thou wast receiving. 

he was receiving. 

we were receiving. 

you were receiving. 

they were receiving. 

Past Definite. 

I received. 

thou receivedest. 

he received. 

we received. 

you received. 

they received. 



J'ai re$u, 
Tu as recu, 
11 a recu, 

Nous avons recu, 
Yous avez recu, 
lis ont recu, 



Past Indefinite. 

I have received. 

thou hast received. 

he has received. 

we have received. 

tou have received. 



ih 



/ have received. 



Future. 



Je recevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
lis recevront, 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Yous recevriez, 
lis recevraient, 



Recois, 
Qu'il recoive, 



I shall receive. 
thou wilt receive. 

he will receive, 
we shall receive. 
you will receive. 
they will receive. 



Pluperfect. 

J'avais recu, I had received. 

Tu avais regit, thou hadst received. 

II avait regu, he had received. 

Nous avions recu, we had received. 

Vous aviez recu, you had received. 

lis avaient regu, they had received. 

Past Anterior. 

J'eus recu, I had received. 

Tu eus recu, thou hadst received. 

II eut recu, he had received. 

Nous eumes regu, we had received. 

Yous eutes regu, you had received. 

lis eurent regu, they had received. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have received, 
thou, wilt have received. 



J'aurai regu, 
Tu auras recu, 
II aura recu, 
Nous aurons regu, 
Vous aurez recu, 
lis auront regu, 



he will have received. 

toe shall have received. 

>ou will have received. 

■ey will have received. 



y<- 

tin 



Present. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Past. 



I should receive. 

thou wouldst receive. 

he would receive. 

we should receive. 

you would receive. 

they would receive. 



J'aurais recu, I should have received. 

Tu aurais recu, thou wouldst have received. 

II aurait regu, he would have received. 

Nous auriom recu, ice should have received. 

Vous auriez recu, you would have received. 

lis auraieut regu, they would have received. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Recevons, 
receive (thou). Recevez, 
let him receive. Qu'ils recoivent, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



let us receive. 

receive (you). 

let them receive. 



Present. 

that I may receive. 
that thou mayst receive, 
that he may receive, 
that we may receive, 
that you may receive, 
that they may receive. 
Imperfect. 
Que je recusse, that I might receive. 

Que tu recusse, that thou mightst receive. 

Qu'il recut, that he might receive. 

Que nous recessions, that we might receive. 
Que vous recussiez, that you might receive. 

Qu'ils recussent, that they might receive. 



Que je recoive, 
Que tu recoives, 
Qu'il recoive, 
Que nous recevions. 
Que vous receviez, 
Qu'ils recoivent, 



Perfect. 

Que j'aie recu, that I may have"] 

Que tu aies recu, that thou mayst have 

Qu'il ait recu, that he may have I 

Que nous ayons recu, that we may have f 

Que vous ayez regu, that you may have 

Qu'ils aient recu, that they may have) 

Pluperfect. 
Oue j'eusse recu, that I might have 

Que tu eusses rucu, that thou mightst have 
Qu'il eut recu, that he might have 

Que nous eussions recu, that we might have 
Que vous eussiez regu, that you might have 
Qu'ils eussent recu, that they might have) 



344 



SUPPLEMENT. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION-™ RE. 



Present. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Fast: 



Vendre, 




t& seM. 


Avoir vend% 


■Ho Have soM. 






PARTICIPLES. 






Present. 






Past, 


Vendant, 




selling. 


Vendu, 


sold. 




Compound. 
Ayant vendu, having soW, 






INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Present. 




Past Indefinite. 


Je vends, 
Tu vends, 
11 vend, 
Nous vendons, 
Vous vendez, 
lis vendent, 




I sell. 

thou sellest. 

he sells. 

we selL 

you sell. 

they sell. 


J'ai vendu, 
Tu as vendu, 
11 a vendu, 
Nous avons vend'rt, 
Vous avez vendu r 
lis ont vendu, 


I have sold, 

thou hast sold. 

he has sold, 

we have sold, 

you have sold. 

they have sold, 




Imperfect 




Pluperfect. 


Je vendais, 
Tu vendais, 
11 vendait, 
Nous vendions, 
Vous vendiez, 
lis vendaient, 




I was selling. 

thou wast selling. 

he was selling. 

ice were selling. 

you were selling. 

they were selling. 


J'avais vendu, 
Tu avais vendis, 
11 avait vendu, 
Nous avions vendu, 
Vous aviez vendu, 
lis avaient vendu, 


I had sold, 

thou hadst sold, 

he had sold. 

we had sold, 

you had sold, 

they had sold'. 


Past Definite. 


Past Anterior. 


Je vendis, 
Tu vendis, 
11 vendit, 
Nous vendimes, 
Vous vendltes, 
lis vendirent, 




I sold. 

thou soldest. 

he sold. 

we sold. 

you sold. 

they sold. 


J'eus vendu, 
Tu eus vender, 
II eut vendu, 
Nous eumes vendu, 
Vous elites vendu, 
lis eurent vendu, 


I had sold, 

thou hadst sold. 

he had sold, 

we had sold, 

you had sold, 

tlhey had sold, 




Future. 




Future Perfect. 


Je vendrai, 
Tu vendras, 
H vendi-a, 
Nous vendrons, 
Vous vendrez, 
lis vendront, 




I shall sett. 
thou wilt sell. 

he will selh 
we shall sell, 
you will seU. 
they will sell. 


J^aurai vendu, 
Tu auras vendu, 
11 aura vendu, 
Nous aurons vendu, 
Vous aurez vendu, 
lis auront vendu, 


I shall have sold, 
thou wilt have sold, 

he will have sold, 
we shall have sold, 
you will have sold, 
they will have sold. 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. 






Present. 






Past. 


Je vendrais, 
Tu vendrais, 
11 vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
lis vendraient, 




I should sett. 

thou wouldst selL 

he would sell. 

we should sell. 

you would sell. 

they would sell. 


J 'aurais vendu, 
Tu aurais vendu, 
D aurait vendu, 
Nous aurions vendu 
Vous auriez vendu, 
lis auraient vends, 


I should have sold. 

thou icouldst have sold. 

he would have sold. 

ice should have sold. 

you would have sold. 

they would have sold. 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Vends, 
Qu'il vendfe-, 




sell (thou}, 
let him sell. 


Vendons, 
Vendez, 
Qu'ils vendent, 


let us sell. 

sell (you). 

let them sell. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. 

Que je vcnde, that I may sell. 

Que tu vendes, that thou mayst sell,. 

Qu'il vende, thai he may. sell. 

Que nous vendions, that we may sell. 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell. 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell. 

Imperfect. 
Que je vendisse, that I might sell. 

Que tu vendisses, that thou mightst sell. 

Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. 

Que nous vendissions, that we might sell. 



Que vous vendissiez, 
Qu'ils vendissent, 



thai you might s.. .. 
that they might sell 



Perfect. 
Que j'aie vendu, that I may 

Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 

Que nous ayons vendu, that we may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you may 
Qulls aient vendu, that they may 

Pluperfect. 
Que j'eusse vendu, that I in igh t 

Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightst 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might 

Que nous eussions vendu, that tee might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might 



have"\ 
have 1 
have I ©^ 
have \ al 
have | 
have) 



have^i 
have [ 
have I o^ 
have f ?u 
have \ ' 
iave i 



supple::: 



345 



CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. 



Se lever, 



Se levant, 



Pbesent. 



Pbesent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to rise. S'etre leve, 
PAKTICIPLES. 

rising. Leve, 



Past. 



Past. 



to have risen. 



risen. 







Compound. 






"Stant leve, 


having risen. 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 




Present. 




Past Indefinite. 


Je me leve, 




I rise. 


Je me suis leve, 


I have risen. 


Tu te leves, 




thou risest. 


Tu t'es leve, 


thou hast risen. 


11 se leve, 




he rises. 


11 s'est leve, 


he has risen. 


Nous nous levons, 




ue rise. 


Nous nous sommes leves, 


we have risen. 


Vous vous levez, 




you rise. 


Vous vous etes leves, 


you have risen, 
they have risen. 


lis se levent, 




they rise. 


lis se sont leves, 


Impeefect. 




Plupebfect. 


Je me levais, 




I icas rising. 


Je m'Stais lev§, 


I had risen. 


Tu te levais, 




thou wast rising. 


Tu t'etais leve, 


thou hadst risen. 


11 se levait, 




he was rising. 


11 s'etait leve, 


he had risen. 


Nous nous levions, 




we were rising. 


Nous nous etions leves, 


we had risen. 


Vous vous leviez, 




you were rising. 


Vous vous etiez leves, 


you had risen, 
they had risen. 


lis se levaient, 




they were rising. 


lis s'etaient leves, 


Past Definite. 


Past Anteeioe. 


Je me levai, 




I rose. 


Je me fus leve, 


I had risen. 


Tu te levas, 




thou rosest. v 


Tu te fas leve, 


thou hadst risen. 


11 se leva, 




he rose. 


11 se fut leve, 


he had risen. 


Nous nous levames, 




we rose. 


Nous nous fumes leves, 


we had risen. 


Vous vous levates, 




you rose. 
they rose. 


Vous vous futes leves, 


you had risen, 
they had risen. 


lis se leverent, 




lis se furent leves, 


FUTURE. 




FUTUEE PEEFECT. 


Je me leverai, 




I shall rise. 


Je me serai leve, 


I shall have risen. 


Tu te leveras, 




thou wilt rise. 


Tu te seras leve, 


thou wilt have risen. 


II se levera, 




he will rise. 


11 se sera leve, 


he will have risen. 


Nous nous leverons, 




we shall rise. 


Nous nous serons leves, 


we shall have risen. 


Vous vous leverez, 




you will rise, 
they will rise. 


Vous vous serez leves, 


you will have risen. 


lis se leveront, 




lis se seront leves, 


they will have risen. 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Peesent. 



Past. 



Je me leverais, 
Tu te leverais, 
II se leverait, 
Nous nous leverions, 
Vous vous leveriez, 
lis se leveraient, 



I should rise. Je me serais lev6, I should have risen. 

thou wouldst rise. Tu te serais leve, thou icouldst have risen. 

he icould rise. II se serait leve, he icould have risen. 

we should rise. Nous nous serions leves, we should have risen. 

you would rise. Vous vous seriez leves, you would have risen. 

they ivould rise. lis se seraient leves, they would have risen. 



Leve-toi, 
Qu'il se leve, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Levons-nous, 
rise (thou). Levez-vous, 
let him rise. Qu'ils se levent, 



let us rise. 

rise (i/ou). 

let them rise. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

that I may rise. 

that thou mayst rise. 

that he may rise. 

that ice may rise. 

that you nun/ ri.-e. 

that they may rise. 



Que je me leve, 
Que tu te leves, 
Qu'il se leve, 
Que nous nous levions, 
Que vous vous leviez, 
Qu'ils se levent, 

Impeefect. 
Que je me levasse, that I might rise. 

Que tu te levasses, that thou mightsi rise. 

Qu'il se levat, that he might rise. 

Que nous nous levassions, that we might rise. 
Que vous vous levassiez, that you might rise. 
Qu'ils se levassent, that they might rise. 



Peefect. 
Que je me sois lev§, that I may} ^* 

Que tu te sois lev6, that thou mayst 1 § 

Qu'il se soit lev6, that he may ( » 

Que nous nous soyons lev£s, that ice may f 2. 
Que vous vous soyez leves, that you may a 
Qu'ils se soient leves, that they may J ~ 

Plupebfect. 
Que je me fusse lev§, that I might") & 

Que tu te fusses lev§, that thou mightet J 3 
Qu'il se ftit leve\ that he might I * 

Que nous nous fussions lev6s, that we might \ 3. 



Que vous vous fussiez leves, that you might 
Qu'ils se fussent lev§s, that they might 

15* 



346 



SUPPLEMENT. 



CONJUGATION OP THE 

Primitive Tenses. 











FIRST 


INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLES. 




INDICATIVE. 


Present. 


Present. 
allant, 


Past. 

alle, 




Present. 


> — 4-Aller, 
J to go. 


je vais, 
tu vas, 
ilva, 


nous allons, 
vous allez, 
ils vont, 


Envoyer, 
to send. 


envoyant, 


envoye, 


j'envoie, 


SECOND 


ACQTTERIR, 

to acquire. 


acquerant, 


acquis, 


j'acquiers, 
tu acquiers, 
il acquiert, 


nous acquerons, 
vous acquerez, 
ils acquierent, 


BOTJILLIR, 

to boU. 


bouillant, 


bouilli, 


je bous, 
tu bous, 
il bout, 


nous bouillons, 
vous bouillez, 
ils bouillent, 


L COUEIR, 

' to run. 


courant, 


couru, 


je cours, 
tu cours, 
il court, 


nous courons, 
vous courez, 
ils courent, 


Ctjeillik, 
to gather. 


cueillant, 


cueilli, 


je cueillo, 
tu cueilles, 
il cueille, 


nous cueillons, 
vous cueillez, 
ils cueillent, 


Dormtr, 
to sleep. 


dormant, 


dormi, 


je dors, 
tu dors, 
ildort, 


nous dormons, 
vous dormez, 
ils dorment, 


Fuir, 
tojtee. 


fuyant, 


fui, 


je fuis, 
tu fuis, 
ilfuit, 


nous fuyons, 
vous fuyez, 
ils fuient, 


'* MOURER, 

to die. 


mourant, 


mort. 


je meurs, 
tu meurs, 
il meurt, 


nous mourons, 
vous mourez, 
ils meurent, 


Offrir, 
to offer. 


offrant, 


offert, 


jWre, 
tu offres, 
il offre, 


nous ofrrons, 
vous oflrez, 
ils offrent, 


Partie, 
to set out. 


partant, 


parti, 


je pars, 
tu pars, 
il part, 


nous partons, 
vous partez, 
ils partent, 


% Venir, 
to come. 


venant, 


venu, 


je viens, 
tu viens, 
il vient, 


nous venona, 
vous venez, 
ils viennent, 


V&TIR, 

to clothe. 


vetant, 


vetu, 


je v£ts, 
tu vets, 
il vet, 


nous v6tons, 
vous vetez, 
ils vetent, 



* The persons and tenses which are regularly derived, are not given in this table. 

(pages 837 and 838,) the 



SUPPLEMENT. 347 

IKKEGULAK YEEBS. 

Derived Tenses.* 
CONJUGATION. 

IMPERATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Past Definite. Futtjee. Pkesent. 



j'allai, j'irai, allons, que j'aille, que nous allions, 

va, allez, que tu ailles, que yous alliez, 

qu'il aille. qu'ils aillent 

j'envoyai, j'enverrai, 



CONJUGATION 

j'acquis, j'acquerrai, 

je bouillis, 

je courus, je courrai, 

je cueillis, je cueillerai, 

jedormis, 

je fuis, 

je mourus, je mourrai, 

j'offris, 

je partis, 

je vins, Je vtendral, 

je vfitis, 



The mode of forming them has been indicated in the Lessons. See, for each tense, 
•e forences which accompany it. 



348 



SUPPLEMENT. 



INFINITIVE, 

Present. 

4 k " \ 

Falloie, 
to be necessary. 

MOTJVOIR, 

to move. 

\ Pleuvoir, 
to rain. 

■ POTTVOIR, 

to be able. 



-j S'asseoir, 
' to sit down. 



Savoir, 
to know. 



Valoir, 
to be worth. 



n VOIR, 

to see. 



VOTTLOIR, 

to be willing. 



PARTICIPLES. 
Present. Past. 



pleuvant, plu, 
pouvant, pu, 



sachant, su, 

valant, valu, 

voyant, vu, 

voulant, voulu 7 



THIRD 
INDICATIVE. 

Present. 




ilfaut, 



je meus, 
tu mens, 
il meut, 

il pleut, 



je peux, or puis, 
tu peux T 
il peut, 

je rn'assieds, 
tu t'assiedSj 
il s'assied, 

je sais, 
tu sais, 
il sait, 

je vaux, 
tu vaux, 
il vaut, 

je vois, 
tu vols, 
il voit, 

je veux, 
tu veux, 
il veut, 



nous mouvons, 
vous mouvez, 
ils meuvent, 



sous pouvons, 
vous pouvez, 
ils peuvent, 

nous nous asseyons, 
vous vous asseyez, 
ils s'asseyent, 

nous savons, 
vous savez, 
ils savent, 

nous valons, 
vous valez, 
ils valent, 

nous voyons, 
vous voyez, 
ils voient, 

nous voulons, 
vous voulez, 
ils veulent, 



FOURTH 



Battre, 
to beat. 



. Boire, 
to drink. 



CONOLTJRE, 

to conclude. 



COTTDRE, 

to sew. 



Croire, 
to believe. 



CroItre, 
to grow. 



ClTIRfl, 

X to cook. 



battant, battu ? 

buvant, bu, 

concluant, conchy 

cousant, cousu, 

croyant, era, 

croissant, cru, 

cuisant, cuit, 



je bats, 
tu bats, 
il bat, 

je bois, 
tu bois, 
11 boit, 

je conclus, 
tu conclus, 
il conclut, 

je couds, 
tu couds, 
il coud, 

je crois, 
tu crois, 
il croit, 

je crois, 
tu crois, 
il croit, 

je cuis, 
tu cuis, 
ilcuit, 



nous battons, 
vous battez, 
ils battent, 

nous buvons, 
vous buvez, 
ils boivent, 

nous concluons, 
vous concluez, 
ils concluent, 

nous cousons, 
vous cousez, 
ils cousent, 

nous croyons, 
vous croyez, 
ils croient, 

nous croissons, 
vous croissez, 
ils croissent, 

nous cuisons, 
vous cuisez, 
ils cuisent, 





SUPPLEMENT. 849 


CONJUGATION. 






IMPEEATIYE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Past Definite. Fttttteb. 


Peesent. 


ilfallut, ilfaudra, 


qu'il faille, 


je mus, 




il pint, 




je pus, je pourrai, 


que je puisse, que nous puissions, 



je m'assis, je m'assierai, 

je sus, je saurai, 

je valus, je vaudrai, 

je vis, je verrai, 

je voulus, je voudrai, 

CONJUGATION. 

je battis, 

jebus, 
je conclus, 



que tu puisses, que vous puissiez, 
qu'il puisse, qu'ils puissent. 



sachons, que je sache, que nous saehions, 
sache, sachez, que tu saches, que vous sachiez, 
qu'il sache, qu'ils sachent. 



que je vaille, que nous valions, 
que tu vailles, que vous valiez, 
qu'il vaille, qu'ils vaillent. 



que je veuille, que nous voulions, 
veuillez, que tu veuilles, que vous vouliez, 
qu'il veuille, qu'ils veuillent. 



je cousis, 



jecrus, 
je crus, 
je cuisis, 



350 



SUPPLEMENT. 



INFINITIVE. 

Present. 



PAETICIPLES. 
Present. Past. 



INDICATIVE. 

Present. 



' Dire, 
to say. 



Ecrire, 
to write. 



Faire, 
to do, to make. 



JOINDRE, 

to join. 



Lire, 
to read. 



Mettre, 
to put. 



MOUDRE, 

to grind. 



NaItre, 
to be born. 



Plaire, 
to please. 



Prendre, 
to take. 



Eesotjdre, 
to resolve. 



Eire, 
to laugh. 



Suivre, 
to follow. 



Traire, 
to milk. 



Vatnore, 
to conquer. 



.VlVRE, 

* to live. 



disant, 

ecrivant, 

faisant, 

joignant, 

lisant, 

mettant, 

moulant, 

naissant, 

plaisant, 

prenant, 

resolvant, 

riant, 



dit, 



ecrit, 



fait, 



joint, 



lu, 



mis, 



moulu, 



ne, 



plu, 



pris, 



jedis, 
tu dis, 
il dit, 

j'ecris, 
tn ecris, 
il ecrit, 

je fais, 
tu fais, 
il fait, 

je joins, 
tu joins, 
il joint, 

je lis, 
tu lis, 
il lit, 

je mets, 
tu mets, 
il met, 

je mouds, 
tu mouds, 
il moud, 

je nais, 
tunais, 
il nait, 

je plais, 
tu plais, 
il plait, 

je prends, 
tu prends, 
il prend, 



T&soluand je resous, 

resous, tu resous, 

il resout, 



ri, 



suivant, suivi, 



trayant, trait, 



vainquant, vaincu, 



vivant, v6cu, 



je ris, 
tu ris, 
ilrit, 

jesuis, 
tu suis, 
il suit, 

je trais, 
tu trais, 
il trait, 

je vaincs, 
tu vaincs, 
il vainc, 

je vis, 
tu vis, 
ilvit, 



nous disons, 
vous dites, 
ils disent, 

nous ecrivons, 
vous ecrivez, 
ils ecrivent, 

nous faisons, 
vous faites, 
ils font, 

nous joignons, 
vous joignez, 
ils joignent, 

nous lisons, 
vous lisez, 
ils lisent, 

nous mettons, 
vous mettez, 
ils mettent, 

nous moulons, 
vous moulez, 
ils moulent, 

nous naissons, 
vous naissez, 
ils naissent, 

nous plaisons, 
vous plaisez, 
ils plaisent, 

nous prenons, 
vous prenez, 
ils prennent, 

nous resolvons, 
vous resolvez, 
ils resolvent, 

nous rions, 
vous riez, 
ils rient, 

nous suivons, 
vous suivez, 
ils suivent, 

nous trayons, 
vous trayez, 
ils traient, 

nous vainquons, 
vous vainquez, 
ils vainquent* 

nous vivons, 
vous vivez, 
ils vivent, 





■ 


SUPPLEMENT. 351 






IMPERATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PAST DEFINITE 


FUTUEE. 


Pbesent. 


je dis, 






j'ecrivis, 






jefls, 


je feral, 


faisons, que je fasse, que nous fassions. 
fais, faites, que tu fasses, que vous fassiez, 
qu'il fasse, qu'ils fassent. 


jejoignis, 






jelus, 






jemis, 




* 


je moulus, 






jenaquis, 






jeplus, 






je pris, 






je resolus, 






jeris, 






je suivis, 







je yalnquls, 
je vecus, 



352 supplement. 

Defective, or slightly irregular, Verbs. 

Second Conjugation. 

Benir has two Past Participles : beni, blessed ; benit, consecrated ; other- 
wise regular. 

Defaillir, to fail, is used only in the plural of the Indicative Present, 
nous defaillons ; Imperfect, je defaillais ; Past Definite, je defaillis, 
and the Infinitive. 

Faillir, to fail. Faillant. Failli. Je faux, tufaux, ilfaut, nous faillons, 
vous faillez, Us faillent. Je faillais. Je faillis. Je faudrai. It is 
used principally in the Infinitive, the Past Definite and the Compound 
tenses. 

Ferir, to strike, is used only in sans coup ferir. 

Fleurir, to blossom, is regular: in the sense of to flourish, it has the Im- 
perfect, florissait, and the Present Participle, florissant. 

Gesir, to lie (ill or dead), has only: il git, nous gisons, vous gisez, Us 
gisent ; Imperfect, je gisais ; Present Participle, gisant. 

Hair, to hate, has no diaeresis on the i in the singular of the Present In- 
dicative and Imperative. 

Oui'R, to hear. Of this verb, are only used the Infinitive, and Past Parti- 
ciple, out. 

Qtjerir, to fetch, is used only in the Infinitive. 

Saillir, to project, to jut out, conjugated like cueillir ; the third person 
and the Present Participle only are used. 

Surgir, to arrive at, is used only in the Infinitive. 

Third Conjugation. 

Choir, to fall ; Past Participle, chu ; no other part is used. 

Dechoir, to fall away, follows the model of voir, except in the Past Defi- 
nite, je dechus. Present Participle, Imperfect, and Imperative are 
wanting. 

E choir, to chance to be, to become due, only used in the third person ; 
follows dechoir, except Present Participle, echeant. 

Pourvoir, to provide, follows voir, except Past Definite, je pourvus ; Fu- 
ture, je pourvoirai. 

Prevoir, to foresee, follows voir, except Future, je prevoirai. 

Seoir, to become, is used only in the third person Present, il sied, Us 
sieent ; Imperfect, il seyait ; Future, il siera. 

Seoir, to be seated, has only Present Participle, seant ; Past Part., sis. 

Souloir, to be accustomed, used only in the Imperfect,^ soulais. 

Surseoir, to suspend, follows voir, except Future, je mrseoirai ; Past 
Participle, sursis. 



SUPPLEMENT. 353 

Fourth Conjugation. 

Absoudre, to absolve, see resoudre ; has no Past Definite; Past Parti- 
ciple, absous, fern, absoute. 

Accroire is only used with faire. Faire accroire, to make believe. 

Br aire, to bray; Present, il brait, Us braient ; Future, il braira. 

Bruire, to roar ; Present Participle, bruyant ; Present, il bruit ; Imper- 
fect, il bruyait. 

Circonctre, to circumcise, follows dire, except second person of the 
Present, vous circoncisez ; Past Participle, circoncis. 

Clore, to close; Present, je clos, tu clos, il clot; Future, je clorai ; Past 
Participle, clos. 

Contredire and the following compounds of dire, viz. dedire, to unsay ; 
interdire, to forbid ; medire, to slander ; predire, to foretell, have, in 
the second person of the Present, disez instead of dites. 

Decoxfire, to discomfort ; Past Participle, deconfit. 

Eclore, to be hatched, follows clore, is used only in the third person. 

Frire, to fry; Present, jefris, tu fris, il frit ; Future, jefrirai; Impera- 
tive, fris ; Past Participle, frit. 

Maudire, to curse; Present Participle, maudissant; the double s is re- 
tained in the parts derived from the present participle ; in other re- 
spects, it follows dire. 

Suffire, to suffice; Present Participle, suffisant ; Past Participle, suffi ; 
the derived tenses are formed regularly. 

Tistre, to weave ; Past Participle, tissu. 



354 



SUPPLEMENT. 



List of Irregular Verbs.* 



Abattre, conjugated as Bat- 

tre. 
Absoudre. 

S'Abstenir, as Yenir. 
Abstraire, as Traire. 
Accourir, as Courir. 
Accroitre, as Croitre. 
Accueillir, as Oueillir. 
Acquerir. 

Admettre, as Mettre. 
Aller. 

Apparaitre, as Croitre. 
Apparoir. 

Appartenir, as Yenir. 
Apprendre, as Prendre. 
Assaillir. 

Asseoir, as S'Asseoir. 
S'Asseoir. 

Astreindre, as Joindre. 
Atteindre, as Joindre. 
Attraire, as Traire. 
Avenir, as Yenir. 
Avoir. 

Battre. 

Benir. 

Boire. 

Bouillir. 

Braire. 

Bruire. 

Ceindre, as Joindre. 
Choir. 
Circoncire. 

Circonvenir, as Yenir. 
Clore. 

Combattre, as Battre. 
Commettre, as Mettre. 
Comparaitre, as Croitre. 
Complaire, as Plaire. 
Comprendre, as Prendre. 
Compromettre, as Mettre. 
Conclure. 

Concourir, as Courir. 
Se Condouloir. 
Conduire, as Cuire. 
Confire, as Circoncire. 
Conjoindre, as Joindre. 
Connaitre, as Croitre. 
Conquerir, as Acquerir. 
Consentir, as Partir. 
Construire, as Cuire. 
Contenir, as Yenir. 
Contraindre, as Joindre. 
Contredire. 
Contrefaire, as Faire. 



Contrevenir, as Yenir. 

Convaincre, as Yaincre. 

Convenir, as Yenir. 

Corrompre, as Rompre. 

Coudre. 

Courir. 

Couvrir, as Ofirir. 

Craindre, as Joindre. 

Croire. 

Croitre. 

Cueillir. 

Cuire. 

Debattre, as Battre. 
Dechoir. 

Declore, as Clore. 
D6confire, as Circoncire. 
Decoudre, as Coudre. 
Decouvrir, as Onrir. 
D6crire, as Ecrire. 
Decroitre, as Croitre. 
Se Dedire, as Contredire. 
Deduire, as Cuire. 
Defaillir. 
Defaire, as Faire. 
Dejoindre, as Joindre. 
D6mentir, as Partir. 
Deplaire, as Plaire. 
Desapprendre, as Prendre. 
Desservir, as Partir. 
Deteindre, as Joindre. 
Detenir, as Yenir. 
D6truire, as Cuire. 
De venir, as Yenir. 
Se Devetir, as Y§tir. 
Dire. 

Disconvenir, as Yenir. 
Discourir, as Courir. 
Disparaitre, as Croitre. 
Dissoudre, as Absoudre. 
Distraire, as Traire. 
Dormir. 

Ebattre, as Battre. 
Ebouillir, as Bouillir. 
Echoir. 
Eclore. 
Ecrire. 

Elire, as Lire. 
Emboire, as Boire. 
Emoudre, as Moudre. 
Emouvoir, as Mouvoir. 
Empreindre, as Joindre. 
Enceindre, as Joindre. 
Enclore, as Clore. 
Encourir, as Courir. 



Endormir, as Dormir. 
Enduire, as Cuire. 
Enfreindre, as Joindre. 
Enfuir, as Fuir. 
Enjoindre, as Joindre. 
S'Enquerir, as Acquerir. 
S'Ensuivre, as Suivre. 
S'Entremettre, as Mettre. 
Entr'ouvrir, as Ofirir. 
Entreprendre, as Prendre. 
Entretenir, as Yenir. 
Entrevoir, as Yoir. 
Envoyer. 

Equivaloir, as Yaloir. 
Eteindre, as Joindre. 
Etre. 

Exclure, as Conclure. 
Extraire, as Traire. 

Faillir. 

Faire. 

Falloir. 

Feindre, as Joindre. 

Ferir. 

Fleurir. 

Forclore. 

Frire. 

Fuir. 

Gesir. 

Hair. 

Induire, as Quire. 
Inscrire, as Ecrire. 
Instruire, as Cuire. 
Interdire, as Contredire. 
Interrompre, as Rompre. 
Intervenir, as Yenir. 
Introduire, as Cuire. 

Joindre. 

Lire. 

Luire, as Cuire. 

Maintenir, as Yenir. 

Maudire. 

Meconnaitre, as Croitre. 

Medire, as Contredire. 

Mentir, as Partir. 

Se Meprendre, as Prendre. 

Mesavenir, as Yenir. 

Messeoir, as Seoir. 

Mettre. 

Moudre. 



* The verbs in this list which are not referred to a model-verb, will be found in the 
lists of irregular or defective verbs, pp. 346-353. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



355 



Mourir. 
Mouvoir. 

Naitre. 

Nuire, as Cuire. 

Obtenir, as Venir. 

Offrir. 

Oindre, as Joindre. 

Omettre, as Mettre. 

Ouir. 

Ouvrir, as Offrir. 

Paitre. 

Paraitre, as Croitre. 

Parcourir, as Courir. 

Partir. 

Parvenir, as Yenir. 

Peindre, as Joindre. 

Permettre, as Mettre. 

Plaindre, as Joindre. 

Plaire. 

Pleuvoir. 

Poindre, as Joindre. 

Poursuivre, as Suivre. 

Pourvoir. 

Pouvoir. 

Predire, as Contredire. 

Prendre. , 

Prescrire, as Ecrire. 

Pressentir, as Partir. 

Prevaloir, as Yaloir. 

Prevenir, as Yenir. 

Prevoir. 

Produire, as Cuire. 

Promettre, as Mettre. 

Promouvoir, as Mouvoir. 

Proscrire, as Ecrire. 

Provenir, as Yenir. 

Querir, as Acquerir. 

Eabattre, as Battre. 
Eapprendre, as Prendre. 
Easseoir, as S'Asseoir. 



Eebattre, as Battre. 
Eeboire, as Boire. 
Bebouillir, as Bonillir. 
Eeconduire, as Cnire. 
Eeconnaitre, as Croitre. 
| Eeconquerir, as Acquerir. 
'Becoudre, as Condre. 
Eecourir, as Conrir. 
Eecouvrir, as Offrir. 
E ecrire, as Ecrire. 
Eecroitre, as Croitre. 
I Eecueillir, as Cueillir. 
(Becuire, as Cuire. 
I Bedefaire, as Faire. 
lEedevenir, as Yenir. 
i Eedire, as Dire. 
i Bedormir, as Dormir. 
jBeduire, as Cuire. 
;Eeelire, as Lire. 
: Eefieurir, as Fleurir. 
lEeluire, as Cuire. 
JEemettre, as Mettre. 
Eemoudre, as Moudre. 
jEenaitre, as Xaitre. 
! Se Eendormir, as Dormir. 
Eentraire, as Traire. 
Eepaitre, as Paitre. 
Eepartir, as Partir. 
Se Eepentir, as Partir. 
Eeprendre, as Prendre. 
Eequerir, as Acquerir. 
Eesoudre, as Absoudre. 
Eessentir, as Partir. 
Eessouvenir, as Yenir. 
Eestreindre, as Joindre. 
Eetenir, as Yenir. 
Eetraire, as Traire. 
Eevaloir, as Yaloir. 
Eevenir, as Yenir. 
Eevetir,' as Yetir. 
Eevivre, as Yivre. 
Eevoir, as Yoir. 
Eire. 
Eompre. 
Eouvrir, as Offrir. 



Saillir. 

Satisfaire, as Faire. 

Savoir. 

Secourir, as Courir. 

Seduire, as Cuire. 

Sentir, as Partir. 

Seoir. 

Servir, as Partir. 

Sortir, as Partir. 

Souffrir, as Offrir. 

Souloir. 

Soumettre, as Mettre. 

Sourdre. 

Sourire, as Eire. 

Souscrire, as Ecrire. 

Soustraire, as Traire. 

Soutenir, as Yenir. 

Souvenir, as Yenir. 

Subvenir, as Yenir. 

Suffire. 

Suivre. 

Surgir. 

Surfaire, as Faire. 

Surprendre, as Prendre. 

Surseoir. 

Survenir, as Yenir. 

Survivre, as Yivre. 

Se Taire, as Plaire.. 

Teindre, as Joindre. 

Tenir, as Yenir. 

Tistre. 

Traduire, as Cuire. 

Traire. „ 

Transcrire, as Ecrire. 

Transmettre, as Mettre. 

Tressaillir, as Assaillir. 

Yaincre. 

Yaloir. 

Yenir. 

Yetir. 

Yivre. 

Yoir. 

Youloir. 



356 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Government of Verbs. 

List of verbs that require no preposition before the following 
infinitive. 



Affirmer. 

Aimer mieux. 

AUer. 

Apercevoir. 

Assurer. 

Avoir beau. 

Avouer. 

Compter. 

Confesser. 

Considered 

Courir. 

Croire. 

Daigner. 



Declarer. 

Deposer. 

Desirer. 

Devoir. 

Ecouter. 

Entendre. 

Envojer. 

Esperer. 

Faire. 

Falloir. 

S'Imaginer. 

Laisser. 

Mener. 



Wier. 

Observer. 

Oser. 

Oui'r. 

Paraitre. 

Penser. 

Pretendre. 

Pouvoir. 

Publier. 

Rapporter. 

Reconnaitre. 

Regarder. 

Retourner. 



Revenir. 

Savoir. 

Sembler. 

Sentir. 

Souhaiter. 

Soutenir. 

Temoigner. 

Se Trouver. 

Valoir mieux. 

Venir. 

Voir. 

Vouloir. 



List of verbs that require the preposition a before the following 
infinitive. 



Abaisser. 

Aboutir. 

Acceder. 

S'Accorder. 

Accoutumer. 

S'Accoutumer. 

S'Acharner. 

Adherer. 

Admettre. 

S'Aguerrir. 

Aider. 

Aimer. 

Amuser. 

S'Amuser. 

S'Appliquer. 

Apprendre. 

Appreter. 

S'Appreter. 

S'Arr6ter. 

Arriver. 

Aspirer. 

Assigner. 

S'Assujetir. 

S'Astreindre. 

S'Attacher. 

Attendre. 

S'Attendre. 



Autoriser. 

S'Avilir. 

Avoir. 

Balancer. 

Borner. 

Se Borner. 

Chercher. 

Commencer, (or 

de.) 
Se Complaire. 
Concourir. 
Condamner. 
Condescendre. 
Consentir, (or de.) 
Consister. 
Conspirer. 
Continuer, (or de.) 
Contraindre, (or 

de.) 
Contribuer. 
Convier, (or de.) 
Couter. 

Decider, (or de). 
Se Decider. 
Defier, (or de.) 
Demander,(or de.) 
Demeurer. 



Depenser. 

Deplaire. 

Se Deplaire. 

Desapprendre. 

Desobeir. 

Destiner. 

Determiner, (or 

de.) 
Se Determiner. 
Disposer. 
Se Disposer. 
Donner. 
Dresser. 
Eclairer. 

S'Efforcer, (or de.) 
Embarrasser. 
Employer. 
S'Empresser, (or 

de.) 
Encourager. 
S'Endurcir. 
Engager. 
S'Engager. 
Enbardir. 
Enseigner. 
S'Entendre. 
Essay er, (or de.) 



Etre, (or de.) 

S'Etudier. 

Exceller. 

Exciter. 

Exercer. 

S'Exercer. 

Exhorter. 

S'Exposer. 

Se Fatiguer. 

Se Fier. 

Forcer, (or de.) 

Gagner. 

Habituer. 

S'Habituer. 

Hair. 

Se Hasarder. 

Hesiter. 

Inciter. 

Incliner. 

Instruire. 

S'Interesser. 

Inviter. 

Lasser, (or de.) 

Se Lasser. 

Limiter. 

Se Livrer. 

Manquer, (or de.) 



SUPPLEMENT. 



357 



Mettre. 

Se Mettre. 

Montrer. 

Nuire. 

Obeir. 

Obliger, (or de.) 

S'Obstiner. 

Obvier. 

S'Occuper, (or de.) 

S'Onrir. 

S'Opiniatrer. 

Parvenir. 

Passer son temps. 

Avoir peine. 

Pencher. 



Penser. 

Perdre. 

Perseverer. 

Persister. 

Plaire, (or de.) 

Se Plaire. 

Se Plier. 

Porter. 

Pourvoir. 

Pousser. 

Prendre plaisir. 

Preparer. 

Se Preparer. 

Presenter. 

Pretendre. 



Se Preter. 

Proceder. 

Provoquer. 

Eeduire. 

Se Eeduire. 

Eenoncer. 

Eepugner, (or de, 

Se Eesigner. 

Eesister. 

Eester. 

Se Eesoudre. 

Eetrancher. 

Eeussir. 

Eevenir. 

Eever, (or de.) 



Eisquer, (or de.) 
Servir, (or de.) 
Songer. 
Subvenir. 
Sufiire, (or de.) 
Surprendre. 
) Tacher, (or de.) 
Tarder, (or de.) 
Tendre. 
Tenir. 
Travailler. 
Trembler. 
Trouver. 
Venir, (or de.) 
Viser. 



List of verbs that require the preposition de before the following 
infinitive. 



Abstenir. 

S'Abstenir. 

Abuser. 

S'Accommoder. 

Accuser. 

Etre accuse. 

SAccuser. 

Achever. 

S'Acquitter. 

Affecter. 

Affliger. 

S'Affliger. 

Etre alarme. 

Ambitionner. 

SAmouracher. 

Appartenir. 

S'Apercevoir. 

SApplaudir. 

Approuver. 

Apprehender. 

Arreter. 

Attendre, (or a.) 

Attendrir. 

Attrister. 

S' Attrister. 

Avertir. 

SAviser. 

liiamer. 

Bruler. 

Conjurer. 



Cesser. 

Chagrin er. 

Se Chagrin er. 

Charger. 

Se Charger. 

Choisir. 

Commander. 

Commencer,(or a.) 

Commode. 

Complaisance. 

Conclure. 

Conjurer. 

Conseiller. 

Consentir, (or a.) 

Consoler. 

Se Contenter. 

Continuer, (or a.) 

Contraindre, (or 

a.) 
Convaincre. 
Convier, (or a.) 
Convenir. 
Courage. 
Craindre. 
Dec] larger. 
Decider, (or a.) 
Decourager. 
1 >edaigner. 
Defendre. 
Defier, (or a.) 



Se Defier. 
Degouter. 
Deliberer. 
Demander, (or a.) 
Se Demettre. 
Se Depecher. 
Dependre, (imp.) 
Deplaire. 
Desaccoutumer. 
Desesperer. 
Se Desesperer. 
Se Deshabituer. 
Desirer, (or with- 
out.) 
Se Desister. 
Desoler. 
Se Desoler. 
Determiner, (or a.) 
Detourner. 
Se Devoir. 
Differer. 
Dire. 

Discontinuer. 
Disconvenir. 
Se Disculper. 
Dispenser. 
Se Dispenser. 
Disposer. 
Dissuader. 
Divertir. 



Dommage. 
Ecrire. 
Edifier. 
S'Edifier. 
S'Efforcer, (or a.) 
Effrayer. 
S'Effrayer. 
S'Emanciper. 
S'Emparer. 
Empecher. 
S'empresser,(or a.) 
Enjoindre. 
S'Ennuyer. 
S'Enorgueillir. 
Enrager. 
Entre prendre. 
Epouvanter. 
Esperer, (or with- 
out.) 
Es^ayer, (or a.) 
S'Etonner. 
Etre, (or a.) 
Eviter. 
Excuser. 
S' Excuser. 
Exempter. 
S'Exempter. 
Exiger. 
Se Facher. 
Faiblesse. 



358 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Faillir, (or a.) 
Faire bien. 
Faire mine. 
Faire plaisir. 
Faire signe. 
Faire semblant. 
Feindre. 
Felieiter. 
Se Felieiter. 
Finir. 

*Se Flatter. 
A force. 
Forcer, (or a.) 
Se Garder. 
Avoir garde. 
Prendre garde. 
Gemir. 
Generosite. 
Gener. 
Se Glorifier. 
Rendre grace. 
Gronder. 
Se Hasarder, (or 

a.) 
Se Hater. 
Honnetete. 
Honneur. 
Impossible. 
Imprudence. 
Imputer. 
S'Indigner. 
S'Informer. 
S'Ingerer. 
Injustice. 



S'Inquieter. 

Inspirer. 

Intention. 

Interdire. 

Inutile. 

Jouir. 

Jurer. 

Juste. 

Justifier. 

Laisser, (or a.) 

Louer. 

Mander. 

Faire mal. 

Malheur. 

Manquer, (or a.) 

Medire. 

Mediter. 

Se Meier. 

Menacer. 

Meriter. 

Se Moquer. 

ISTegliger. 

Nier. 

Notifier. 

Obliger, (or a.) 

S'Occuper, (or a.) 

Offrir. 

Omettre. 

Ordonner. 

Oublier. 

Pardonner. 

Parler. 

Se Passer. 

Patience. 



Permettre. 
Persuader. 
Se Piquer. 
Plaindre. 
Se Plaindre. 
Plaire, (or a). 
Politesse. 
Possible. 

Preferer, (or with- 
out.) 
Prendre sur soi. 
Prescrire. 
Presser. 
Se Presser. 
Presumer. 
Prier. 
Priver. 
Professer. 
Profiter. 
Promettre. 
Se Promettre. 
Proposer. 
Se Proposer. 
Protester. 
Punir. 

Se Rappeler. 
Etre rassasie. 
Se Rebuter. 
Recommander. 
Refuser, (or a.) 
Regretter. 
Rejouir. 
Se Rejouir. 
Remercier. 



Se Repentir. 

Reprendre. 

Reprimander. 

Reprocher. 

Se Reprocher. 

Repugner, (or a.) 

Resoudre. 

Se Ressouvenir. 

Retenir. 

Rire. 

Risquer, (or a.) 

Rougir. 

Se Saisir. 

Se Scandaliser. 

Servir, (or a.) 

Sommer. 

Se Soucier. 

Souffrir. 

Souhaiter, (or 

without.) 
Soupgonner. 
Se Souvenir. 
Suffire, (or a.) 
Suggerer. 
Supplier. 
Tacher, (or a.) 
Tarder, (or a.) 
Tenter. 
Trembler. 
Se Trouver. 
User. 

Se Vanter. 
Venir, (or a.) 
Venir a bout. 



List of verbs that require sometimes a and sometimes de before 
the following infinitive. 

Commencer, (130 and 131, *). 

Consentir a, takes de when it means not to oppose. 

Continuer a, without interruption ; continuer de, to express repeated ac- 
tion ; as, il continue d'y alter. 

Gontraindre «, to force into action ; contraindre de, to constrain from ac- 
tion. 

Decider, Determiner, (p. 295, *). 

Defier a, to challenge ; defier de, to defy. 

Demander a, (130 and 131, *). 

S'Efforcer, to strive, (130 and 131, *). 



SUPPLEMENT. 359 

S'Empresser, to be eager, to hurry, (130 and 131, *). 

JEssayer, to try, (130 and 131, *). 

Etre, (266, Rem. 9), (272). 

Laisser a, to leave ; laisser de, to fail, with a negative. Je vous laisse a 
penser. H ne laisse pas d'etre honnete. 

Manquer a, to be wanting in one's duty ; manquer de, to fail (to omit). 

Obliger a, to impose necessity; obliger de, to oblige. Voire devoir vous 
oblige a lefaire. Vous in! obliger ez de lefaire. Je suis oblige de lefaire. 

S'Occuper a, to be occupied, to be engaged in; s'occuper de, to occupy 
one's self with. 

Oublier a, to forget how (to lose the habit of ) ; oublier de, to forget (to 
omit). J'ai oublie a danser. J'ai oublie oVy aller. 

Plaire a, personal; plaire de, impersonal, (189). 

Risquer a, transitive ; risquer de, intransitive. 

Servir, (267). 

Suffire, (235). 

Tdcher a, when the action passes from the subject ; tocher de, when it 
does not. 11 tdche d me nuire. Je tdcher ai de lefaire. 

Tarder, (235). 

Venir a, to happen ; venir de, to have just. SHI vient a mourir. Je viens 
de le voir. Je viens travailler. 

He/user de, (Voc. 33) ; this verb takes a before manger, boire, &c, de quoi 
being understood. II lui refuse a manger. 

Desirer, esperer, souhaiter, are used with or without de before the infini- 
tive ; better with de, when a strong desire is to be expressed, or un- 
certainty is implied. 

Preferer takes de before an infinitive with an accessory. Je prefere de 
partir avec vous ; but: je prefere partir. 



060 



SUPPLEMENT. 



INDEX. 



In this Index, all the words contained in the Lessons are arranged in alphabetical or- 
der, each word with a reference : the mere figures refer to the Yocabularies ; the figures 
in parentheses, to the Sections of the Lessons ; a figure preceded by E, to the Exercise; 
one, preceded by T, to the Theme. 



A, 11. 

Abandon, (278). 
Abide by a thing, (284). 
Abjure, T. 74. 
Able, 26, 67. 
About, 37, 40. 
Above, 46, 65. 
Above all, 40. 
Absence, 38. 
Absolutely, 53. 
Abuse, 66. 
Accept, 37- 
Accompany, 37. 
Accomplish, 70. 
According to, 58. 
Accordingly, 69. 
Account, 58. 

On account of, 71. 

To turn to account, 66. 
Accustom, 63. 
Acquaint with, 55. 
Acquaintance, 59. 

To make acquaint- 
ance, (123). 
Acquainted with, 27. 

Acquainted with a 
thing, 67. 

To become acquaint- 
ed with, (223). 
Acquire, 52. 
Acquit one's self, 65. 
Act, 63. 
Active, 17. 
Actual, 69. 
Actually, 69. 
Add, 67- 
Adjust, 50. 
Admirably, 45. 
Admire, 23. 
Advance, 67- 
Advanced, 72. 
Advantage, 41. 
Adversity, 68. 
Advice, 49, 53. 
Advise, 33, 59. 
Afar, 39. 
Affair, 29. 
Affect, (245, R. 4). 
Afraid, (115). 
After, 27- 
Afternoon, 19. 
Afterwards, 25. 
Again, 65. 
Against, 49. 
Age, 40. 
Aged, 40. 
Agent, T. 53. 
Ago, 38. 
Agree, 50. 
Agreeable, 47. 



Agreed upon, T. 58. 
Agreement, 

To come to an agree- 
ment, 50. 
Aim, 65. 
Air, 17, 57. 

To air, (97). 

To assume airs, (246). 
Alas, T. 58. 
Alive, 40. 
All, 15. 

At all, 26. 
Alleviate, 68. 
Allow, 54. 
Ally, 62. 
Almost, 37. 
Alone, 24. 
Along, 71. 
Already, 19. 
Also, 3. 

Although, (254). 
Always, (14). 
Amass, (70). 
Ambassador, 42-1. 
Ambassadress, 42-1. 
America, 37. 
American, 37. 
Amiable, 10. 

To take amiss, (234). 
Among, 56. 
Amount, 61. 
Amuse, 45. 
Amusement, 69. 

To want amusement, 
45. 
Amusing, 59. 
An, 11. 
Ancient, 27. 
And, 3. 
Anew, 65. 
Angry, 49. 

To get angry, 49. 

To make angry, 49. 
Animal, 40. 
Announce, T. 75. 
Annoy, (284). 
Answer, 53. 

To answer, 28. 
Any, 20. 
Any thing, 7- 
Anywhere, 21. 
Apartment, 11. 
Apologize, 75. 
Apothecary, 14. 
Appeal, (284). 
Appear, 47. 
Appearance, 57, 59, 

(282). 
Appetite, 56. 



Apple, 1. 
Apply, 53. 
Apply for, T. 53. 
Appoint, 53. 

To be appointed, 53. 
Approve, (281). 
Apron, 36. 
Arbitrator, (284). 
Ardor, 53. 
Arm, 30. 

Arm (weapon), 58. 
Arm-chair, 31. 
Army, 43. 
Around, 49. 
Arrange, 34. 
Arrest, 58. 
Arrival, 29. 
Arrive, 31. 
Art, 65. 
Article, 52. 

New article, 22. 
Artist, 69. 
As, 29, 31. 
As far as, 37. 
As for, 63. 
As to, 63. 
Ascribe, 75. 
Ashamed, (115). 
Ask, 7. 
Ask for, 7- 

A si ft6T> 

To fa'll asleep, 53. 
As long as, 43. 
As much, 29. 
As many, 29. 
Assert, 68. 
Assiduous, 64. 
Assist, 61. 
Assistance, 61. 
Associate with, 21. 
As soon as, 38. 
Assure, 54. 
Astonish, 41. 

To be astonished, 41. 
Astonishing, 64. 
At, 12, 15. 
At the house, 18. 
At last, 41. 
At least, 68. 
At most, 44. 
At once, 64. 
Attach, 68. 
Attack, (281). 
Attend, 73. 
Attention, 42-1. 
Attentive, 64. 
Attract, 59. 
Attraction, 48. 
Attribute, 75. 
Auction, 31. 



Aunt, 6. 
Author, 42-2. 
Authoress, 42-2. 
Autumn, (153). 
Avail, (267). 
Avenge, 75. 
Awake, 53, T. 5a 
Axe, 55. 



Back, 42, (244). 
Back-room, (244). 
Bad, 5, 17. 
Badly, 17. 
Bag, 51. 
Baker, 14. 
Bandbox, 72. 
Bank, 18. 
Barber, 49. 
Bargain, 29, 52, 67. 
Bark (to), 52. 
Barrel, 15. 
Barrier, 65. 
Base, 45. 
Base-viol, 45. 
Basin, 52. 
Basket, 23. 
Bass, 45. 
Battle, 61. 

To battle with, 74. 
Be, (35), 54. 

To be right, wrong, 
Ac, (115). 

To be there, 31. 

To be (of health), 41. 

To be (Jaire), (245. 
R. 5). 

To be in want of, 21. 

To be as, 72. 
Bear (to), 23, 63. 
Beat, 52. 
Beautiful, (37). 
Beauty, 48. 
Because, 17. 
Beckon, (282). 
Become, 48, 50. 
Becoming, 64. 
Bed, 19. 

In bed, T. 53. 
Beef, 6. 
Beer, 8. 

Before, 27, (254). 
Beforehand, 68. 
Beg, 37. 

Begin, 23, 57, 62. 
Beginning, 38. 
Behave, 44. 
Behind, 27. 
Believe, 28. 
Bell, 60, 



SUPPLEMENT. 



361 



Belong, 51. 
Below, 46, 65. 

There below, 31. 
Belt, 50. 
Bench, 11. 
Besides, 72. 
Best, 8, 22. 
Betray, 75. 
Better, 8, 22. 
Between, 58. 
Beyond, 65. 
Big, 6. 
Bill, 56. 
Bird, 40. 
Birth, 

To give birth, 66. 
Biscuit, 28. 
Bit, 11. 
Bite, 52. 
Bitter, 28. 
Black, 20. 
Blacksmith, 14. 
Blanket, 72. 
Blind, 17, 35. 
Bloom, 73. 
Blossom, 73. 
Blue, 23. 

Blunderhead, (267). 
Board, (265). 

On board, 29. 
Boarding-school, 70. 
Boast, (246). 
Boil, 71. 
Body, 41. 
Bonnet, 2. 
Book, 1. 
Bookseller, 10. 
Boot, 8. 

Bootmaker, 42-2. 
Border, 29. 
Born, 

To be born, 40. 
Borrow, 66. 
Bottle, 12, 
Bottom, 46. 
Box, 15, 60. 
Boy, 4. 
Brag, (246). 
Brain, 39. 
Brains, 39. 
Bread, 1. 
Breadth, (225). 
Break, 13, 71. 
Breakfast (rtdjeuner). 

To breakfast, 25. 
Breast, 39. 

Breeding (good), (282). 
Brewer, 42-2. 
Bridge, 74. 
Bridle, 6. 
Bright, T. 71. 
Bring, 25. 

To bring near, (217). 

To bring up, 68. 
Broad, 29. 
Brook, 16. 
Broom, 36. 
Broth, 10. 
Brother, 2. 
Brother-in-law, 32. 
Brotherly, 72. 
Brown, 27. 
Brush, 52. 
Buckle, 27. 
Budding, 73. 
Build, 60. 
Building, T. 65. 
Bundle, 60. 



Bureau, 16. 
Burden, 51. 
Burn, 34. 
Burner, 27. 
Burst out laughing, 

(289). 
Bushel, 24. 
Business, 29. 
But, 8. 
But little, 21. 
Butter, 7. 
Button, 27. 
Buy, 8. 
By, 26. 

Good by, <244). 
By (pas've verbs), (175, 

Rem.). 
By and by, 24. 
By dint of, 50. 
By the side of, 39. 



Cage, 40. 
Calf, 16. 
Call, 16. 
Call on, 42-1. 
Can, 26. 
Candle, 27. 
Candlestick, 27. 
Cake, 9. 
Cane, 6. 
Capacity, 74. 
Card, 45. 
Care, 42-1. 

To take care, 42-1,58. 

To take care of, 73. 

To care about, 63. 
Careless, 64. 
Carpenter, 14. 
Carpet, 35. 
Carriage, 6, 42-1. 
Carry, 15. 

Carry a th. through, 70. 
Cart, 51. 
Cart-load, 51. 
Carve, 9. 
Case, 15. 

In case of, (254). 
Cask, 24, 29. 
Cast an eye, (222). 
Catch a cold, 62. 
Cause, 54. 

To cause, 41, (246). 
Causeway, 65. 
Cavalier, 72. 
Cavilling, (284). 
Cease, 33. 
Ceasing, 

Without ceasing, 74, 
Cellar, 15. 
Cent, 11. 
Century, T. 65. 
Certain {certain). 
Certainly, 30. 
Chair, 11. 

Change (money), 2. 
Change, T. 65. 

To change, 49. 
Character, 34. 
Charge, 

To take charge, 65. 
Charitable, 72. 
Charity, 72. 
Charm, 48. 
Charming, 48. 
Chase, 21. 
Chat, 73. 
Chatter, (284). 

16 



Cheap, 29. 
Cheat, 41. 
Cheerful, 57, 73. 
Cheerfully, 50. 
Cheese, 16. 
Cherry, 23. 
Cherry-tree, 23. 
Chest, 33, 39. 
Chest of drawers, 31. 
Chicken, 9. 
Chief place, 60. 
Child, 5. 
Chimney, 11. 
Chimney-piece, T. 11. 
China, 20. 
Chocolate, 10. 
Choice, 22. 
Choose, 22. 
Chop, 16. 
Christian, 72. 
Christmas, 38. 
Church, 18. 
Cider, 28. 
Cinnamon, 28. 
Circumstance, 54. 
City, 18. 
Clap, 35. 

Clap of thunder, 47. 
Clean, 34. 

To clean, 36. 
Clear, 47. 

To clear up, 75. 

To get clear, 75. 
Cleave, 72. 
Clerk, 24. 
Climate, 48. 
Climb, 46. 
Cloak, 20. 
Clock, 67. 

What o'clock, (73). 
Close, 39. 
Closely, 40. 
Cloth, 8. 
Clothe, 57. 
Cloud, 47. 
Cloudy, 47. 
Coach, 6, 42-1. 
Coach-house, 42-1. 
Coach-maker, 42-2. 
Coachman, 6. 
Coal, 67. 
Coarse, 6, 28. 
Coat, 2. 
Codfish, 20. 
Coffee, 7- 
Coffee-pot, 7. 
Coin, 2. 
Cold, 25, 30. 

To be cold, (115). 

To have a cold, 39, 62, 
Color, 48, T. 71. 
Coloring, 65. 
Comb, 52. 
Come, 25. 
Come in, out, 25. 
Come back, 29. 
Come in again, 37. 
Come up, 46. 
Come down, 46. 
Come near, (217). 
Comedy, 35. 
Comfort, 58. 
Comfortable, 58. 
Commendable, 72. 
Commerce, 29. 
Commission, 65. 
Commit, 69. 
Commodity, 67. 



Common, 28. 
Communicate, 69, (233). 
Compassion, 72. 
Compassionate, 72. 
Compensate, 68. 
Complain, 54. 
Company, 21. 
Competition, 51. 
Completely, 61. 
Complexion, 31. 
Composition, 36. 
Comprehend, 28. 
Compromise, (287). 
Conceal, 75. 
Conceive, 67. 
Concern, 56, 63. 
Concert, 18. 
Conclude, 71. 
Conduct, 44. 

To conduct, 27. 

To conduct one's self, 
44. 
Condition, 58. 

On condition, 58. 
Confidence, 65. 
Congratulate, 74. 
Conjecture, 68. 
Conquer, 60, 61. 
Conscience, 54, 68. 
Consent, 60. 
Considerable, T. 67. 
Consideration, 64. 
Consist, 74. 
Consolation, 68. 
Contain, 51. 
Contempt, 44. 
Contented, 17. 
Contents, 62. 
Continue, 43. 
Contrary, 

On the contrary, 30. 
Contribute, 75. 
Conversation, 56. 
Converse, 72. 
Convince, 67. 
Cook, 16. 

To cook, (245, R. 3), 
71. 
Cooked, 40. 
Cooking, 

To understand cook- 
ing. T. 66. 
Cool Cfrais). 
Coolness, 74. 
Copper, 13. 
Copy-book, 36. 
Corner, 26. 
Correct, 59. 
Cottage, 46. 
Cotton, 12. 
Cough, 39. 
Counsel, 53. 
Count, 23. 
Counterfeit, 32. 
Country, 18. 
Countryman, 6. 
Countrywoman, 6. 
Country-seat, 59. 
Courier, 60. 
Cousin, 6. 
Cover, 57- 

To cover, 47. 

Under cover, 72. 
Cow, 6. 
Cravat, 3. 
Cream, 7. 
Creation, 11. 
Creator, 7L 



362 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Creature (fellow-), 72. 
Credit, 29. 
Crew, 74. 
Crime, 75. 
Cross, 59. 
Crowd, 59. 
Cruet, 7. 
Cry, 61. 
Crystal, 12. 
Culpable, 54. 
Cup r 1. 
Cupboard, 24. 
Cure, 65. 

Custom-house, 24. 
Cut, 9. 
Cut off, 9. 
Cutlet, 16. 



Dainty, 74. 

Daisy, 71. 

Damaged, 50, 64. 

Damp, 34. 

Dance, 17. 

Dancing, 17. 

Dancing-school, T. 37. 

Danger, 68. 

Dare, 32. 

Dark, 47. 

Dark (of color), 48. 

To get dark, 75. 
Darken, 75. 
Daughter, 4. 
Daughter-in-law, 32. 
Day, 19, 60. 

To-day, 14. 

Day before, 50. 

Next day, 60. 

Day before yesterday, 
35. 

Day of the month, 
(171). 
Dead, 40. 
Deal, 

A great deal, 20. 
Dear, 10, 29. 
Debt, 29. 
Decanter, 12. 
Deceitful, (282). 
Deceive, 41. 
Decide, 73. 
Decided, 73. 
Deck (ship), 74. 
Decline, 46. 
Decrease, 67. 
Deduct, 67. 
Deep, 48, 60. 
Defeat, 61. 
Defect, 63. 
Defend, 58. 
Deference, 64. 
Delay, 63, 64, 67. 
Delight, 66. 
Delightful, 73. 
Deny, 70. 
Department, 60. 
Departure, 38. 
Depend on, 58. 
Deprive, 74. 
Depth, (225, *). 
Derange, 34. 
Deride, (281). 
Desert, 74. 
Deserve, 44. 
Design, 70. 
Desire (ddsir). 

To have a desire, 24. 

To desire, 7. 



Despair, 70. 
Despise, 44. 
Destroy, 61. 
Determine, 73. 
Detriment, 64, 66. 
Diamond, (282). 
Die, 40. 
Difference, 56. 
Different, 41. 
Difficult (difficile). 
Difficulty, 49, 66. 
Digestion, 56. 
Diligent, 44. 
Dine, 19. 
Dining-room, 31. 
Dinner (diner). 
Directly, 53. 
Dirty, 34. 
Disagree, (284). 
Disagreeable, 47. 
Disapprove, (281). 
Discharge, (284). 
Disclose, 75. 
Discontented, 17. 
Discourse, 36. 
Discover, 68. 
Disease, 64. 
Disentangle, (284). 
Dish, 2, 74. 

Side-dish, 74. 
Dislocate, (287). 
Disobey, 70. 
Disobliging, 44. 
Dispense with, T. 55. 
Dispose of, 36. 
Disposition, 34. 
Dispute, 56. 

To dispute, 74. 
Distance, 39. 
Disturb, 34. 
Divide, 56. 
Do, 26. 

Do (of health), 41. 
Do without, 55. 
Doctor, 14. 
Dog, 21. 
Dollar, 11. 
Door, 25. 
Door-keeper, 25. 
Drop, 47. 
Doubt, 29. 
Down stairs, 46. 
Drag, (283). 
Draw, (222). 
Draw near, 57. 
Drawer, 24. 
Dread, 68. 
Dream, 72. 
Dress, 2. 

To dress, 43, 57. 
Drink, 28. 
Drive, 16. 
Drive back, 25. 
Dry, 34. 

To dry, 33. 
Dry -goods store, 25. 
Dumb, 17. 
During, 35. 
Dust, 36. 
Duty, 26. 
Dwell, 18. 
Dwelling, 59, 62. 
Dye, 75. 



Each, 41. 
Ear, 34. 
Early, 25. 



Earn, 40. 
Earth, 29. 
Easily, 40. 
Easy, 51. 
Eat, 20. 
Eat supper, 25. 
Economical, 70. 
Economy, 70. 
Edifice, T. 65. 
Effect, 64. 
Effort, 70. 
Egg, 8. 
Eight, (38). 
Either, 

Nor I either, (237). 
Elder, 40. 
Eldest, 40. 
Elegant, 57. 
Eleven, (38). 
EH, 51. 
Else, 26. 
Elsewhere, 26. 
Embark, 74. 
Embarrass, 66. 
Embarrassment, 66. 
Embassy, 53. 
Embellish, (242). 
Emblem,. 71. 
Emperor, 43. 
Empire, 43. 
Employ, 54. 
Empress, 43. 
Emulation, 

In emulation, 75. 
Encourage, 74. 
Encumber, 74. 
End, 37. 

To end, (284). 
Endeavor, 54. 
Endure, 43, (236). 
Enemy, 60. 
Energy, 64. 
Engagement, 67. 
England, 29. 
English, 29. 
Englishman, 29. 
Engraver, 39. 
Engraving, 39. 
Enjoy, 41. 
Enjoy one's self, 45. 
Enlighten, 75. 
Ennui, 69. 
Enough, 21. 
Enrich one's self, 54. 
Enter, 25. 
Entirely, 31. 
Envy, 75. 
Equal, 56. 
Equally, 56. 
Errand, 65. 
Error, 55, 63. 

ape, 71. 
Especially, 40. 
Establish, 65. 
Esteem, 44. 

To esteem, (282). 
Europe, 37- 
European, 37- 
Eve, 50. 
Even, 64. 
Evening, 19. 
Event, 55. 

At all events, 72, 73. 
Ever, 19. 
Every, 15, 41. 
Everywhere, 26. 
Everywhere else, 26. 
Evil, 30. 



Ewe, 16. 
Exact, 64. 
Exacting, 70. 
Exactly, 44. 
Examine, 59. 
Example, 68. 
Excellent, 8. 
Except, 66. 
Except that, (257.) 
Exception, 66. 
Execute, 65. 
Exercise, 72. 
Exchange, 18. 

To exchange, 67. 
Excite, (287). 
Exclaim, 61. 
Excuse, 75. 
Excuse one's self, 75* 
Exhaust, 74. 
Expect, 24, 28, 53. 
Expedient, 41. 
Expense, 63. 
Experience, 63, 65. 
Expert in, 67. 
Express, 67. 
Extend, 58. 
Extinguish, 27. 
Eye, 30. 



Face, 30, 71. 
Fail, 48. 
Failure, 67. 
Fair, T. 58. 
Faith, 75. 
Fall, 47, 67. 
Fall out, (284). 
Fall asleep, 53. 
False, 32. 
Fame, 50. 
Family, 32. 
Fan, 31. 
Fancy, (282). 
Far, 39. 

Far from, 74, (254). 
Fare, 74. 
Farewell, (287). 

To bid farewell, (234). 
Farm, 58. 
Farmer, 58. 
Farm-yard, 60. 
Fashion, 22. 
Fast, 26. 

Very fast, 71. 
Fat, 40. 
Fate, 53. 
Father, 4. 
Father-in-law, 32. 
Fatigue, 74. 
Fault, 63. 

It is not my fault, 
(237). 

To find fault, (283). 
Favor, 69. 
Fear, 32. 

To fear, 54. 

For fear, 62, (254). 
Feast, 38. 
Feather, 2. 
Feel, 32. 

Feel inclined, 69. 
Feeling, 63. 

To hurt one's feelings, 
(233). 
Feign, 57. 

Fellow-creature, 72. 
Fence, (245, R. 3). 
Few, 21, 31. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



363 



Fickle, 69. 
Field, 18. 
Fight, 61. 

To fight, 52. 
Figure, 60. 
Fill, 23. 
Finally, 41. 
Find, 7. 
Fine, 10, 28. 
Finger, 30. 
Finger -ring, 31. 
Finish, 22. 
Fire, 27. 
Fire-arm, 59. 
First, 1, 25, 57. 
Fish, 20. 
Fisherman, 21. 
Fishing, 21. 
Fit, 48. 

It is fit, 64. 
Five, (38). 
Flagon, 12. 
Flash, 47. 
Flatter, 44. 
Flee, 58. 
Flesh, 66. 
Flight, 58. 
Flock, 16. 
Floor, 1L 
Flour, 9. 
Flourish, 73 
Flower, 15. 
Flute, 45. 
Fly, 71. 
Fog, 47. 
Folks, 53. 
Follow, 40. 
Follow from, 68. 
Folly, 54. 
Food, 74. 
Foolish, 66. 
Foot, 34, 46. 

On foot, (157). 
For, (prep.), 19, 35. 
For, (conj.), 25. 
For all that^ (287). 
Forbid, 58. 
Forehead, 30. 
Foreigner, 22. 
Foresee, 68. 
Forest, 5. 
Foretell, 68. 
Forget, 53. 
Forgive, 69. 
Forget-me-not, 71. 
Fork, 3. 
Formerly, 51. 
Forthwith, 15, 24. 
Fortune, 53. 
Fountain, 26. 
Four, (38). 
Fowl, 9. 
Fragrancy, 48. 
Franee, 18. 
Frank, 34. 
Frankly, 34. 
Freeze, 47. 
Freight, 74. 
French, 17. 
Frenchman., 17. 
Frenchwoman, 17. 
Frequent, 23. 
Fresh, 34. 
Freshness, 65. 
Friday, (149). 
Friend, 7. 
Friendship, 72. 
Frighten, 62, (233). 



To be frightened, 62. 
Frivolous, 69. 
Frock-coat, 7. 
From, 11, 62. 
From where, 25. 
From there, 25. 
From time to time, 64. 
Front, (244). 
Front-room, (244). 

In front of, 71. 
Fruit, 1. 
Funds, 67. 
Furnish, 23. 
Furniture, 36. 
Furthermore, 72. 
Future, 68. 

In future, 66 
Fry, 71. 



Gain, 40, 67. 

Gait, 39. 

Gallery, 60. 

Game, 45, 59. 

Garden, 10, 15. 

Gardener, 23. 

Garment, 57. 

Garret, 15. 

Gather, 52. 

Gas, 27. 

General, 10. 

Generality, 60. 

Gentleman, 3, (41), 72. 

German, 37. 

Germany, 37. 

Get, 

Get wet, 36. 

Get angry, 49. 

Get rid of, 50. 

Gift (present, don). 
New-year's gift, 38. 

Gilliflower, 7L 

Girdle, 50. 

Girl, 4. 

Give, 12. 

Give back, 22. 

Give birth, 66. 

Give notice, 55. 

Give up, 66, (282). 

Give way, (287). 

Glad, 49. 

Glance, 59. 

Glass, 1, 42-L 

Glazier, 42-2. 

Glory, 75. 

Glove, 8. 

Go, 18. 

Go in, 25. 

Go out, 25. 

Go away, 46. 

Go for, 24. 

Go to, 24. 

Go back, 29. 

Go on a journey, (157). 

Go to bed, 41. 

Go up, 46. 

Go down, 46. 

Go too fast, 67- 

Go too slow, 67. 

Go over, 73. 

Go slow about a thing, 

(283). 
Going along, 73. 
Goat, 21. 
Goblet, 9. 
God, 54. 
Gold, 13. 
Good, 6, 30. 



Goodness, 21. 

Good-for-nothing fel- 
low, 44. 

Goose, 40. 

Governess, T. 55. 

Gown, 2. 

Grain, 60. 

Granary, 15. 

Grand -daughter, 32. 

Grandfather, 32. 

Grandmother, 32. 

Grandson, 32. 

Grape, 70. 

Grape-vine, 70. 

Grass, 46. 

Gratify, (284). 

Gray, 27. 

Great, 1. 

Green, 23. 
Green-house, 71. 
Grief, 63. 
Grind, 60. 
Grievous, 64. 
Grocer, 49. 
Ground, 29. 
Ground-floor, 65. 
Grow, 71. 
Grow tall, 71. 
Grow larger, 73. 
Grow green, 73. 
Grow young, 73. 
Grow old, 73. 
Grudge, 
To have a grudge, 
(284). 
Guard against, 70. 
Guilty, 54. 
Gun, 58. 



Habit, 55. 
Hail, 47. 

To hail, 47. 
Hair, 30. 
Hair-dresser, 48. 
Half, 15, 74. 

To do things by half, 
70. 
Ham, 11, 20. 
Hand, 30. 

To hand, 32. 
Handkerchief, 11. 
Handsome, 10. 
Hang, 58. 
Happen, 48, 50. 
Happiness, 41. 
Harbor, 74. 
Hard, 28, 47. 
Harp, 45. 
Has, 3. 

Haste (to make), 46. 
Hasten, 46, 61. 
Hat, 3. 
Hatchet, 55. 
Hate, 34. 
Hatter, 14. 
Have, (21). 
Have just, 33. 
Have (before infin.), 33. 
Hay, 51. 
He, 3. 
Head, 30. 

To take it into one's 
head, (283). 
Head-dress, 48. 
Heal, 65. 
Health, 41. 
Hear, 28. 



Hear of, (109). 

Hear from, (109). 
Hear news, (109). 
Hear a thing, (109). 
Heart, 21. 
Heart-rending, 1i. 
Heat, 30. 
Heaven, 29. 
Heavy, 51. 
Hedge, 60. 
Heedless, 75. 
Height, (225, *). 
Help, 61. 

I cannot help. (237). 
Her, 3, 4, 9, 15. 
Here, 10, 32. 
High, 31. 
Hill, 46. 
Him, 9, 15. 
Hinder, 54. 
His, 3, 4. 
History, 59. 
Hold, 25. 

To hold out, 72. 
Holiday, 38. 
Honest, 4. 
Honey, 55. 
Honor, 54, T. 67. 
Hope, 68. 
Horse, 6. 

On horseback, (157). 
Hospitable, T. 73. 
Hour, 19. 
House, 15, 18. 
House-keeping, 70. 
How, 9. 
How far, 37- 
How long, 37. 
How much, 20. 
How many, 20. 
However, 43, 73. 
However little, (254). 
Humanity, 72. 
Humor, 57. 
Hundred, 39. 
Hunger, 30. 
Hunter, 21. 
Hunting, 21. 
Hurry, 46. 
Hurt, 48. 
Hurt one's feelings, T. 

69, (233). 
Husband 32. 

To husband, 70. 
Hyacinth, 71. 



1,1. 

Idle, 44. 
Idleness, 44. 
If, 25. 

If you please, 11. 
Ignorance, 44. 
Ignorant, 44. 
Imagine, (282). 
Immediately, 15, 24. 
Impaired, (287). 
Impart, 62. 
Impartial, (284). 
Implicate, (287). 
Impolite, 44. 
Importance, 66. 
Important, 64. 
Impose, 51. 
Impose upon, (282). 
Improve, 52, 65, T. 65. 
Improve one's self, 53. 
Imprudent, 75. 



364 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Impunity, 70; 
In, 10, 15, 18, (157). 
In it, 31. 
Inch, 60. 
Inclined, 69. 
Inclose, 60. 
Income, 53. 
Incommode, 66, 68. 
Inconstant, 69. 
Inconvenience, 66. 
Increase, 67, (287). 
Indebted, 74-. 
Indeed, 34, 61. 
Indefatigable, 74. 
Indian, 40. 
Indian woman, 40. 
Indifference, 55. 
Indispensable, 64. 
Indolent, 64. 
Induce, 59, 73, 75. 
Industrious, 17. 
Infer, 68. 
Infinitely, 38. 
Inform, 53, 55. 
Inhabitant, 62. 
Injure, 75. 
Injury, 66, 75. 
Ink, 20. 
Inkstand, 20. 
Inn v 18, 58. 
Innkeeper, 58. 
Innocent, 54. 
Inquire, 7, 55. 
Insist on, 70. 
Inspire with, 66. 
Instantly, 15. 
Instead of, 31. 
Instrument, 45. 
Instruct, 53, 55. 
Insure (assurer). 
Intend, 24, 62. 
Intelligence, 25. 
Interest, 63. 

To interest, 59. 

To take an interest,62, 
Interesting, 59. 
Interrupt, 73. 
Introduce, 59. 
Intrust with, 66. 
Invent, (282). 
Invite, 62. 

Involve one's self, 62. 
Iron, 13. 
Issue, 68. 
It, 9, 23. 

It is, (of weather), 19. 
Italian, 17. 
Italian woman, 17- 



Jest, 72. 
Jewel, 42-1. 
Jeweller, 42-2. 
Jewelry, 42-1. 
Joiner, 14. 
Joke, E. 32. 
Journal, 28. 
Journey, 39. 
Joy, 66. 
Judge, (284). 

To be a judge of, (282). 
Judgment, 68. 
Just, 29, 31, 59. 

To have just, 33. 
Just now, 59. 
Justice, 72. 



Keep, 25, 45, 70. 
Keep back, 61. 
Keep from, 54. 
Keep up, 72. 
Key, 12. 
Kill, 59. 
Kind, 60. 
Kindness, 2,1. 
Kindle, 27. 
King, 43. 
Kingdom, 43. 
Kitchen, 15. 
Knife, 3. 
Knob, 27. 
Knock, 35. 

To knock, 35. 
Knot, 50. . 
Know, 26, 27. 
Knowledge, 52. 



Labor, 17. 

To labor, 19. 
Lace, 22. 
Lady, 3. 

Young lady, 10. 
Ladies, (41). 
Lame, 27. 
Lamp, 27, 
Land, 29. 

On land, 29. 

To land, 74. 
Language, (102), 71. 
Large, 1, 6. 
Last, 1, 24. 

To last, 43. 
Late, 25. 
Lately, 38 
Laugh, 52. 
Laugh one in the face, 

(281). 
Laughable, (287). 
Laughing, (287). 
Laughter, (287). 
Law, 41. 
Lay, 41. 
Lay waste, 61. 
Lazy, 44. 
Lead, 20. 
Lead-pencil,. 2. 

To lead, 16, 25. 

To lead away, 74. 

To lead back, 25. 
Leaf, 23. 
League, 39. 
Lean, 40. 
Learn, 27. 
Learning, 52. 
Least, 22. 
Leather, 12. . 
Leave, 22, 37, 62. 
Leave off, 33. 

To take leave, (234). 

To leave it to one, 
(284). 
Lectures (to give), (245, 

R. 3). 
Left, 30. 

To the left, 32. 

To have left, 63. 
Leg of mutton, 57- 
Leisure, 59, 69. 
Lemon, 28. 
Lemonade, 28. 
Lend, 14. 
Length, (225, *). 
Less, 19, 22. 
Lesson, 



Lest, (254). 
Let, 22, 49. 

To let fall, 47. 
Let us, (218). 
Letter, 2. 
Liable, 41. 
Lie, 41. 
Lie down, 41. 
Lie about, (283>. 
Life, 40. 
Lift up, 41. 
Light, 27, 47, 48, 51. 

To light, 27, 75. 
Lighten, 47. 
Lightly, 57. 
Lightning, 47. 
Like, 31, 41, 72. 

To like, 8. 

To like better, 22. 
Likeness, (243) 
Liking, 49. 
Lily, 71. 
Linen, 33. 
Lining, 20. 
Liquor, 28. 
Lip, 31. 
Listen, 16. 
Little, 1, 21. 
Live, 18, 40. 
Living, 40, 74. 
Load, 51. 
Loaf, 1. 
Lodge, 65. 
Lodgings, 65. 
Loin of veal, 51. 
Long, 29, 35. 
Long time, 35. 

No longer, 19. 

To long, 63. 
Look, 59. 

To look, 16, 57, 59. 
Look after, 73. 
Look cross, (222). 
Look for, 7. 
Look over, 73. 
Look pleased, (222). 
Look upon, (244). 
Looking (good), (222). 
Looking (bad), (222). 
Looking-glass, 26. 
Looks (to improve), T. 

65. 
Lose, 43. 

To lose time, 67. 

To lose sight of, (282), 
Loss, 53. 

At a loss, 67. 

To be at a loss, T. 72, 
Lot, 53, 69. 
Loud, 31. 
Love, 8, 72. 
Low, 31. 
Lower, 67. 
Lower part, 46. 
Lucky, 17. 



Madam, 1, (41). 
Mahogany, 13. 
Maid, 4. 
Mail, 60. 
Maintain, 68. 
Maintenance, 71. 
Make, 26, 41, (200, R.) 
Make again, 65. 
Make good (/aire va- 

loir), T. 66. 
Make off, 58. 



Make one's self master 

of, (281). 
Make the best of, (246). 
Make up one's mind, 73= 
Man, 3. 
Man of war, 29, *. 

Old man, 40. 

Good man, 75. 
Manage, 73, (283). 
Manner, 41. 

In such a manner, 
(257). 
Many, 20, 29. 
Marble, 12. 
March, (171, R. 3). 

To march, 26. 
Mark, 65. 
Market, 15. 
Marriage, 50. 
Married, 65. 
Marry, 65. 
Mason, 14. 
Master, 33. 
Match, 27, 62. 
Matter, (114). 

A small matter, 22. 

To matter, 63. 

What matter, 63. 

No matter, 63. 

It matters, 64. 
Me, 16, (65). 
Meal, 9. 
Mean, 33. 
Means, 41, 75. 
Meanwhile, 73. 
Measure, 24, 51. 
Meat, 1, 74. 
Meddle with, 56. 
Medicine, 64. 
Meet, 38. 

Go to meet, 74. 
Meet with, 38, 63. 
Meeting, 54, 72, 74.. 
Memory, 56. 
xMend, 33. 
Merchandise, 15. 
Merchant, 15, 51. 
Merchantman, 29, *.. 
Merit, 44. 
Merry, 57. 
Meter, 51. 
Middle, 26. 
Mignonnette, 71. 
Mile, 39. 
Milk, 7. 
Mill, 60. 
Miller, 14. 
Mind, 32, 4L 

To have a mind, 24. 

To make up one's 
mind, (234). 

Presence of mind, 74* 
Mine, 4. 
Minister, 14. 
Minute, 19. 
Mirth, 66. 
Mischance, T. 73. 
Mischief-making, (284X 
Misery, 41. 
Misfortune, 41, 63. 
Mislead, 75. 
Mislay, 75. 
Miss, (41). 

To miss, 48. 
Mistake, 63. 

To be mistaken, 41. 
Mister, (41). 
Mistress, 1, (41). 



SUPPLEMENT. 



365 



Mistrust, 66. 
Mix, 66. 
Mystery, 75. 
Modern, 27. 
Modest, 32. 
Modesty, 32. 
Monday, (149). 
Money, 2. 
Month, 24. 
Moon, 41. 

More, 19, 21, 22, 44. 
Moreover, 72. 
Morning, 19, (60). 
Morrow, 24. 
Morsel, 11. 
Most, 22, 6G. 
Mother, 4. 
Motion, 62. 
Motive, 55. 
Mount, 46. 
Mountain, 46. 
Mouth, 30. 
Mouthful, 74. 
Movement, 62. 
Much, 9, 20, 29. 
Mud, 47. 
Mug, 9. 
Music, 17. 
Musician, 17. 
Muslin, 20. 
Must, 24, (173). 
Mustard, 5. 
Mute, 17. 
Mutton, 16. 
My, 2. 
Myself, (224). 



Nail, 5. 

Finger-nail, 34. 
Name, 50. 

To name, 53. 
Napkin, 36. 
Narrow, 29. 
• Nation, 43. 
Nature, 48. 
Naval officer, 29, *. 
Navy, 29. 
Near, 39. 

To he near, 74. 
Nearly, 37, 39, 40. 
Necessary, 44, 49. 
Need, 
Needle, 5. 
Neglect, 33. 
Neighbor, 9, 72. 
Neighborhood, 59. 
Neither, 4, 11. 
Nephew, 4. 
Nest, 40. 
Never, 19. 
Nevertheless, (287). 
New, 10, 21, 24. 
Newly born, 73. 
News, 28. 
Newspaper, 28. 
New-year's day, 38. 
New-year's gift, 38. 
Next, 24. 
Next day, 50. 
Niece, 4. 
Night, 19. 
Nine, 11. 
No, 1, 53. 
Nobody, 14. 
No longer, 19. 
No more, 19. 
No one, 53. 



Nowhere, 21. 
Noise, 28, 51. 
Noisy, 74. 
None, 
Noon, 19. 
Noontide, 19. 
Nor, 4. 
Nose, 31. 
Nosegay, 15. 
Not, 2, 19. 
Not much, 22, 
Not only, 63. 
Not that, (254). 
Not yet, 19. 
Note, 28. 
Nothing, 7. 
Nothing but, 8. 
Notice, 56. 

To give notice, 55. 

To take notice, 55. 
Notwithstanding. (254), 

(287). 
Novelty, 22. 
Now, 69. 
Number, 24. 
Nursery -maid, 5. 
Nutmeg, 55. 



Oak, 13. 
Oats, 51. 
Obey, 70. 
Obligation, 38. 
Oblige, 38. 
Obliged (to be), 24. 
Obliging, 38, (271). 
Obscure, 49. 
Obscurity, (282). 
Observe, 56. 
Obtain, 67. 
Occasion, 54. 

To have occasion, 54. 
Occupied (to be), 51. 
Occupy one's self, 55. 
Of, 11. 

Of it, of them, 18. 
Offer, 37, 38. 
Offence (to take), 49. 
Offend, 49. 
Office, 16. 
Often, 14. 
Oil, 7. 

Oil-cloth, 35. 
Old, 10, 21, 40. 
Old age, 40. 
Old man, 40. 
Omelet, 16. 
On, 10. 
On it, 36. 
Once, 35. 
One, 11, 28. 
One-eyed, 27. 
Only, 8, 38. 
Only a little, 21. 
Open, 25. 

To open, 25. 
Opera-glass, 31. 
Opinion, 49. 
Opportunity, 54. 
Opposite, 71. 
Oppress, 43. 
Or, 4. 

Orange, 28. 
Order, 65. 

To order, 64. 

In order that, (254). 
Other, 11. 
Others, 53. 



Otherwise, 41. 
Our, 6. 
Ours, 6. 
Overcast, 47. 
Overcharge, 67. 
Overlook, (244). 
Owe, 22, 
Ox, 6. 
Oyster, 20. 



Pace, 39. 
Packet, 60. 
Pain, (117), 44, 63. 
Painful, (282). 
Paint, 65. 
Painter, 42-2. 
Painting, 31, 65. 
Pair, 12. 
Palliate, 75. 
Pane, 42-1. 
Paper, 1. 
Par (at), 67. 
Parasol, 31. 
Pardon, 69. 
Parents, 32. 
Park, 60. 
Parlor, 31. 
Part, 22, 56, 62. 

To take one's part, 
(234). 

To take part in, 62. 

To take in good part, 
(234). 

To part with, (282),50. 
Partner, 48. 
Participate, (234). 
Particular (to be), (283). 
Partridge, 59. 
Party, 62. 
Pass, 26. 
Passenger, 74. 
Passion, 60. 
Past, 68. 
Pasteboard, 72. 
Paternal, 72. 
Patience, 

To exhaust one's pa- 
tience, (284). 
Pattern, 22. 
Pay, 39. 

Pay attention, 42-1. 
Peace, 41. 
Peaceful (paisible). 
Peach, 23. 
Peach-tree, 23. 
Pear, 23. 
Pear-tree, 23. 
Pen, 2. 
Pencil, 2. 
Pencil-case, T. 14. 
Pendulum, 67. 
Penknife, 36. 
Pepper, 5. 
Perceive, 32, 55. 
Perfume, 48. 
Perhaps, 54. 
People, 22, 28, 43, 53. 
Perfect, 53. 
Perfectly, 53. 
Permit, 54. 
Perplex, 66. 
Perplexity, (247). 
Persevere, 70. 
Persist, 70. 
Person, 53. 
Persuade, 67. 
Pester, (284). 



Peruse, 73. 
Pewter, 13. 
Philosopher, 42-2. 
Phrase, 33. 
Physician, 14. 
Piano, 45. 
Pick up, 13. 
Picture, 31, 65. 
Piece, 11. 
Pier-table, 26. 
Pin, 5. 

Pine-apple, 23. 
Pinch, 45. 
Pink, 71. 
Pistol, 59. 
Pity, 72. 

To pity, 37. 

To take pity, 72. 

It is a pity, 64. 
Place, 21, 26, 56. 

To place, 26. 

In the first place, 73. 
Plan, 70. 
Plant, 23. 
Plate, 2. 
Play, 35, 45. 

To play, 31, 45, (246, 
R. 4). 
Pleasant, 47, 73. 
Please, 43, 48, 49. 
Pleased, 17, 48. 
Pleasure, if. 
Pluck, 52. 
Plum, 23. 
Plum-tree, 23. 
Plunge, 75. 
Pocket, 11. 
Poet, 42-2. 
Poetess, 42-2. 
Poetry, 72. 
Polite, 38. 
Poor, 12. 
Porridge, 20. 
Port, 74. 
Porter, 25. 
Portrait, 65. 
Post, 74. 
Post-office, 60. 
Post-boy, 60. 
Potato, 6. 
Poultry, 9. 
Pound, 24. 
Pour out, 57. 
Poverty, 30. 
Power, 43. 
Praise, 75. 
Pray, 37. 
Prefer, 22. 
Preference, 22. 

In preference, 54. 
Prejudice, 66. 
Prepare, 58. 
Presence (prdsence). 
Presence of mind, 74. 
Present, 12, 38, 68, 69. 

To present, 59. 
Presently, 24. 
Preserve, 9. 

To preserve, 70. 
Press, 48. 
Presume, 68. 
Pretend, 57. 
Pretention, 66. 
Pretty, 2, 28. 
Prevail upon, 73, T. 75. 
Prevent, 54. 
Print, 31. 
Prison, 58. 



S66 

Private, 75. 
Proceed, 43. 
Procrastinate, (283). 
Procure, 67. 
Prodigal, 70. 
Profit, 67. 

At a profit, 67. 
Progress, 52. 
Project, 50. 
Promise, 38. 

To promise, 37. 
Promptly, 65. 
Pronounce, 67. 
Proof, 68, 74. 
Proper (it is), 64. 
Properly, 44. 
Property, 52, 64. 
Propose, 62. 
Prospect, 68. 
Protest against, (284). 
Proud, 44. 
Prove, 75. 
Provided, (254). 
Providence, 54. 
Provident, (271). 
Provision, 67. 
Prudence, 63. 
Prussia, 43. 
Prussian, 43. 
Public, 75. 
Pull, 59. 
Punctually, 65. 
Punish, 44. 
Purchase, 52. 

To purchase, 52. 
Purpose, 65. 
On purpose, 66. 
To be to no purpose, 
(283). 
Pursue, 62. 
Put, put on, 27. 
Put back, 55. 
Put by or away, (283). 
Put off, 55. 
Put up with, (284). 

Quantity, 22. 
Quarrel, 74. 
Quarter, 19. 
Quay, 74. 
Queen, 43. 
Question, 
To be the question, 
(235). 
Quiet, 44. 
Quit, 37. 
Quite, 29, 31. 
Quote, 67. 

Rain, 22. 

It rains, 19. 
Raise, 41, (246). 
Rapidly, 71. 
Rare, 10. 
Rather, 28, 45. 
Rate, 67. 
Raw, 40. 
Reach, 50. 

Within reach, 75. 
Read, 28. 
Ready, 41. 
Reason, 30, 54. 
Reasonable, 63. 
Reassured (to be), 62. 
Receive, 22. 
Recollect, 56. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



[Recollection, 56. 
Recognize, 37. 
Reconcile, (284). 
Recover, 65. 
Recreation, 49, 69. 
Red, 23. 
Reduce, 67. 
Re-enter, 37. 
Refer, 66. 
To refer it to one, 

x, , (284 >- 
Refresh, 73. 

Refreshments, 73. 
Refuse, 46. 
Regard to (with), 65. 
Rejoice, 55. 
Relate, 59. 

To relate, 66. 
Relative, 32. 
Relieve, (247). 
Rely upon, 38. 
Remain, 19. 
Remainder, 60. 
Remark, 62. 
Remedy, 64. 
Remember, 56. 
Remembrance, 56. 
Remind, T. 58. 
Remove, (217). 
Renew, (243). 
Renounce, 66. 
Rent (loyer). 
To rent, 49. 
Repair, 54, 65. 
Repose, 58. 
Reproach, 68, 75. 
Republic, 43. 
Republican, 43. 
Repugnant, T. 64. 
Reputation, 34. 
Require, 64. 
Resemblance, 57. 
Resemble, 57. 
Reside, 18. 
Resign, (287). 
Resolution, 62, 70. 
Resolve, 71. 
Respect, 44, 64. 
To respect, 44. 
My respects to, (244). 
Rest, 58, 60. 

To rest, 58. 
Restore, 65. 
Result, 68. 
Resume, 61. 
Retain, 61. 
Return, 22, 29. 
Reveal, 75. 
Reverse, 63. 
Reward, 44. 
Ribbon, 22. 
Rice, 55. 
Rich, 17. 
Riches, 52. 
Rid of (to get), 50. 
Ridicule, 66, (281). 
Ridiculous, 66. 
Right, 30, T. 66. 

On the right, 32. 
Ring, 35. 
Ringing, 60. 
Ripe, 23. 
Rise, 41, 67. 
River, 16. 
Road, 29. 
Roadstead, 74. 
Roar, 47. 
Roasted, 40. 



Rob, 58. 
Room, 11, 28. 
Rope, 29. 
Rose, 71. 
Rosy, 31. 
Round, 30, 49. 
Rule, 72. 
Ruler, 72. 
Rumor, 28. 
Run, 38. 
Run away, 58. 
Run over, 73. 
Russia, 43. 
Russian, 43. 



Sad, 57. 
Saddle, 4. 
Saddler, 42-2. 
Sadness, 63. 
Safety, 62. 
Sail, 29. 
To sail, 74. 
Under full sail, 74 
Sailing-vessel, 29. 
Sailor, 74. 
Salad, 6. 
Sale, 31. 
Salt, 5. 
Salt-cellar, 5. 
Salted, 40. 
Salute, 38. 
Sand (sable): 
Sandbank, 74. 
Satin, 8. 
Satisfaction, 65. 
Satisfied (to be), 53. 
Satisfy, 49, (284). 
Saturday, (149). 
Sauce, 11, 20. 
Save, 70. 
Saving, 70. 
Say, 26. 
Scale, 52. 
Scarce, 10. 
Scarcely, 39. 
Science, 52. 
Scholar, 33. 
School, 33. 
Scissors, 35. 
Scold, 47. 
Score, (164). 
Scrape (to get into a), 

(222). 
Scrape (to get out of s 

(222). 
Sea, 29. 
Seamstress, 12. 
Season, 38. 
Seasonably, 61. 
Seat, 26, 46. 
Secret, 45. 
Secretary, 53. 
See, 26. 
See again, 61. 
See here, (113, *). 
Seek, 7. 
Seem, 68. 
Seize, (281). 
Seldom, 14. 
Self (my-), (224). 
Select, 22. 
Sell, 22. 
Send, 15. 
Send back, T. 56. 
Send for, 24. 
Sense, 33. 
Sensible, 75. 



Sentence, 331 
Servant, 4. 
Serve, 38. 
Service, 38. 
Set about, (283). 
Set in order, 34. 
Set it again, (287). 
Set out 37. 
Settle, 65. 
Seven, 11. 
Several, 31. 
Sea, 60. 
Shade, 46. 
Shame, 30. 
Shape, 30. 
Share, 56, 69. 
Shave, 49. 
Shaved (to get), 49". 
She, 3. 
Shed, 16. 
Sheep, 71. 
Shell, 52. 
Shelter, 71. 
Shepherd, 16. 
Shepherdess, 16. 
Shine, 47. 
Ship, 29. 
Shipwreck, 67. 
Shoe, 8. 
Shoemaker, 14. 
Shoot, 59. 
Shop, 49. 
Shore, 29, 67. 
Short, 29. 
Shoulder, 34. 
Show, 22, 66, (281). 
Show how, 55. 
To make a show, 
(287). 
Shower, 47. 
Shun, 33. 
Shut, 25. 
Shutter, 25. 
Sick, 17. 
Sickness, 64. 
Side, 39, 62. 
On this side, 65. 
On the other side, 65 
Side-dish, 74. 
Sight, 56. 

At the sight of, 62. 
Sign (to make a), (282) 
Silence, 62. 
Silent, 62. 
Silk, 8. 
Silk goods, 25. 
Silver, 2, 13. 
Similar, 31. 
Simple, 57. 
Since, 38, 51. 
Sincere, 34. 
Sincerely, 34. 
Sing, 17. 
Singing, 48. 
Sir, 1, (41). 
Sister, 3. 
Sister-in-law, 32. 
Sit down, 46, 57. 
Sitting, 46. 
Situation, 62. 
Six, 11. 
Size, 60, (225). 
Skilful, 17, (282). 
Skill (talent). 
Skin, 12. 
Sky, 29. 
Slate, 36. 
I Sleep, 30. 



SUPPLEMENT. 



367 



To sleep, 38, 41. 
Sleigh, 47. 
Slice, 11. 
Slippery, 47. 
Slowly, 26. 
Small, 1. 
Smell, 48. 

To smell, 32. 
Smiling, 73. 
Snuff, 35. 
Snuff-box, 35. 
Snuffers, 36. 
Snow, 47. 
So, 29, 30, 41. 
So so, 41. 
So that, 67, (257). 
Soap, 52. 
Society, 48. 
Sofa, 10. 
Soil (to), 34. 
Sojourn, 59. 
Soldier, 43. 
Some, 20, 31. 
Somebody, 14. 
Something, 7. 
Sometimes, 14. 
Somewhere, 21. 
Somewhere else, 26. 
Soon, 24. 
Sooner, 45. 
Sorrow, 63. 
Sorry, 49. 
Sort, 60. 
Soul, 41. 
Sound, 60. 
Soup, 10, 20. 
Spare, 70. 
Speak, 12. 
Species, 60. 
Spectacles, 35. 
Speech, 36. 
Spend, 40, 45. 
Spill, 58. 
Split, 72. 
Spoil, 34. 
Sponge, 36. 
Spoon, 9. 
Spot, 36, 56. 
Spread, 58. 
Spring, (153), 46. 
Squander, (287). 
Square, 26, 30, 42-2. 
Squeeze, 43. 
Stable, 16. 
Stage-coach, 39. 
Stairs, 46. 
Stand, 63. 

Stand instead of, 72. 
Standing, 58. 
State, 58. 
Stay, 19, 58, 59. 
Steal, 58. 
Steam, 29. 
Steamer, 29, *. 
Steel, 13. 
Steeple, 60. 
Step, 39. 
Stick, 6. 
Strike, 35. 
Still, 19, 44. 
Stir, 71. 
Stir up, (287). 
Stock, 67- 
Stocking, 12. 
Stocks, 67. 
Stone, 13. 
Stop, 58, (113, *). 
Store, 15. 



Storm, 47. 
Story, 59. 

Story (of a house), 65. 
Straight, 32. 
Strand, 74. 
Strange (stranger). 
Stranger, 22. 
Strawberry, 23. 
Street. 15. 
Stretch, 58. 
String, 29. 
Study, 17. 

To study, 19. 
Style, 60. 
Subject to, 41. 

To subject to, 71. 
Submit, (284). 
Succeed, 50. 
Success, 55. 
Succession (in), 72. 
Succor, 61. 
Such, 53. 
Suffer, 43. 
Suffice, 63. 
Sufficient (to be), 63. 
Sugar, 9. 
Suit, 48. 
Suitable, T. 67. 
Summer, (153). 
Sun, 41. 
Sunday, (149). 
Supper (souper). 

To take supper, 25. 
Supply, 67. 
Suppose, 68. 
Suppose that, (254). 
Surgeon, (287). 
Surprised, 64. 
Surround, 60. 
Suspect, (283). 
Suspicion, 66. 
Sustain, 68, 72. 



71. 



Sweet, 28. 
Sweetmeat, 
Sweetness, 69. 
Sweets, 69. 
Swell, 72. 
Sympathize, 72. 
Syrup, 28. 



Table, 10. 
Table-cloth, 57. 
Tailor, 12. 
Take, 15, 27. 
Take a turn, (178). 
Take away, 27, 38, 68. 
Take back, 61. 
Take care, 42. 
Take it unkindly, (281). 
Take off, 27. 
Take place, 31, 50. 
Take possession of, 

(281). 
Talent, 52. 
Talk, 73, (284). 
Tall, 1. 
Tarry, 63. 
Task, 26. 
Taste, 22. 

To taste, 28. 
Tavern, 58. 
Tea, 7. 
Teapot, 7. 
Teach, 55. 
Tear, 34. 
Tell, 26. 



Tempest, 74. 

Tempt, 75. 

Ten, 11. 

Tendency, 67. 

Testify, (281). 

Than, 22. 

Than (before the infin.), 

(174, R.). 
Thank, 11, 21. 
Thank for a thing, (281). 
That, 3, 8, 13, 22, 23, 

(254). 
That is to say, 43. 
Thaw, 47. 
The, L. 1. 
The one, 13. 
Their, 6. 
Theirs, 6. 
Them, 9, 15. 
Then, 43, 25. 
Then (.puis), T. 62. 
There, 10, 15. 
There below, 31. 
There is, 32. 
These, 6, 8. 
They, 6. 
Thick, 60. 
Thickness, (225, *). 
Thief, 58. 
Thimble, 12. 
Thin {mince). 
Thine, 6. 
Thiug, 20. 
Things, 64. 
Think, 14, 29. 
Third (one-), 74. 
Thirst, 30. 
This, 3, 8, 22. 
Thoroughly, 64. 
Those, 6, 8. 
Though, (254). 
Thoughtless, 72. 
Thousand, (172, R. 2). 
Thread, 5. 
Three, 11. 
Throat, 30. 
Through, 26. 
Thumb, 60. 
Thunder, 47- 
Thunderbolt, 47. 
Thursday, (149). 
Thus, 41. 
Thy, 6. 
Ticket, 28. 
Tight, 29. 
Till, 37, (254). 
Time, 19. 

From time to time, 64. 

In time, 54. 

In the mean time, 73. 
Timely, 61. 
Time-piece, 67- 
Tin, 42-1. 
Tinman, 42-2. 
Tired, 38. 
To, 12. 
To-day, 14. 
To it, 15. 
Tobacco, 35. 
Toilet, 52. 
Too, 3, 21. 

Too much, many, 21. 
Tool, 55. 
Tooth, 30. 
Top, 46. 
Torment, (284). 
Touch, 30, 45. 
Tow (in), 74. 



Towards, 49, T. 58. 

Towel, 36. 

Tranquil (to become), 

63. 
Tranquillity, 74. 
Tranquillize, 74. 
Translate, 37. 
Travel, 20. 
Travel a mile, (157). 
Traveller, 39. 
Treachery, 75. 
Treason, 75. 
Treasure, 41. 
Tree, 23. 
Trial, 68. 

Trick (to play a), (281). 
Triumph, 75. 
Troops, 62. 
Trouble, 44. 

To be in trouble, (247). 
True, 32. 
Truly, 34. 
Trunk, 33. 
Trust, 66. 
Truth, 33. 
Try, 28, 54. 
Tuesday, (149). 
Tulip, 71. 
Turf, 46. 
Turn, 45. 

To turn, 30. 
Turn away, 69. 
Turn into ridicule, (246). 
Turn to account, 66. 
Turn upon, 63. 
Turnpike, 65. 
Twenty, (174, *). 
Twice, 35. 
Two, 11. 



Ugly, 2. 
Umbrella, 22. 
Uncle, 6. 
Undecided, 73. 
Under, 10. 
Under it, 36. 
Understand, 28. 
Understand one anoth- 
er, (282). 
Understanding, 

To have an under- 
standing, (282). 
Undertake, 37. 
Undertaking, 50. 
Undo, 50. 
Undoubtedly, 54. 
Uneasy, 63. 

To grow uneasy, 63. 

To make uneasy, 63. 
Unfortunate, 72. 
Unhappy, 17. 
Unless, (254), 
Unlucky, 17. 
Unpleasant, 47. 
Unravel, (284). 
Unreasonable, (282). 
Unripe, 23. 
Unworthy, 75. 
Until, 37, (254). 
Upbraid (J'aire des re- 

proches), T. 75. 
Upon, 10. 
Upon it, 36. 
Uproar, 59. 
Upstairs, 46. 
Us, 16. 
Usage, 55. 



368 



SUPPLEMENT. 



Use, 55, 72. 

To be of use, 72. 

To make use, 55. 

To use one ill, (287). 

To use one well, (287) 
Useless (to be), (283). 
Usual, 32. 
Usually, 31, 74. 
Utter, 67. 



Vain (in), 75, (283). 
Valley, 45. 
Vanquish, 60. 
Variance (to be at), 

(284). 
Variation, 67. 
Vary, 67. 
Vegetable, 6. 
Velvet, 20. 
Very, 10, 28. 
Very much, 9. 
Very soon, 24. 
Vessel, 28. 
Vest, 8. 
Vex, T. 77. 
Vexed (to be), 49. 
Viands, 74. 
Village, 18. 
Vinegar, 7. 
Violet, 71. 
Violin, 45. 
Virtue (vertu). 
Virtuous, 17. 
Vis-a-vis, 71. 
Visibly, 71. 
Visit, 62, 73. 
Voice, 31. 



Wail, 28. 



Waiter, 4. 
Wake, 53. 
Walk, 26, 45, 71. 
Walk a mile, (157). 
Wall, 60. 
Want, 21. 

Wanting (to be), 74. 
War, 10. 
Warm, 25, 34. 
Wash, 33. 
Wash-basin, 52. 
Wash-stand, 52. 
Waste (to lay), 61. 
Wasteful, 70. 
Watch, 8. 
Watchmaker, 67. 
Water, 10. 
Waving, 73. 
Way, 29, 71, 75. 

By the way, 73. 

This, that way, 26. 
Way (manner), 41. 
Wealth, 52. 
Weapon, 58. 
Wear, 15, 43. 
Weary, 45. 
Weather, 19. 
Wednesday, (149). 
Week, 24. 
Weep, 52. 
Weigh, 51. 
Weight, 51. 
Welcome, (287). 
Well, (n.), 46. 
Well, {adv.), 17. 
Well ! 43. 
Well and good, 43. 
Wet, 34, 36. 
Wharf, 74. 

What, 2, 3, (48), (165). 
What, (re?, pron.), 23. 



Whatever, (256). 
Wheat, 67. 
Wheel, 60. 
When, 51. 
Where, 10. 
Wherewith to live, (160). 
Whether, 25, (254). 
Which, 2, 4, 23. 
While, 57. 

A little while ago, 59. 
Whip, 6. 
White, 20. 
Who, 3, 28. 
Whole, 17. 
Whom, 3, 23. 
Whomsoever, (256). 
Whose, 14, 23. 
Why, 17. 
Wicked, 5. 
Wide, 29. 
Widow, 50. 
Wife, 3, 32. 
Will, 43. 

Will you have, 11. 
Willing (to be), 24. 
Willingly, 25. 
Wind, 29. 
Window, 25. 
Windows, 42-1. 
Wine, 8. 
Winter, (153). 
Wipe, 36. 
Wipe off, 36. 
Wish, 7, 24, 59. 
Wit, 32. 
With, 19. 
Withdraw, 57, 61. 
Within, 31. 
Without, 31, 49, (254). 

To do without, 55. 
Witness, (281). 



Wits (to lose one's), 

(287). 
Witty, 32. 
Woman, 3. 
Wonderfully well, 48. 
Wood, 5. 
Wool, 12. 
Word, 33, 36. 
Work, 19, 20. 
Workman, 20. 
Workwoman, 20. 
World, 22. 
Worn, 21. 

Worth (rich), (174). 
To be worth, 44. 
Worthless, 5. 
Worthy, 75. 
Wound, 59, 
Write, 28. 
Wrong, 30. 

Yard, 10. 

Yard (measure), 51. 

Year, 20. 

Yellow, 23. 

Yes, 1. 

Yesterday, 35. 

Yesterday morning, Q, 

Yet, 19. 

And yet, 73. 
Yield, (282). 
Yonder, 31. 
You, 2, 16. 
Young, 4. 
Young lady, 10. 
Your, 2. 
Yours, 4. 
Youth, 40. 

Zeal, 53. 



THE END. 



The attention of School Committees, Superintendents, principals jf Aeademies, HIgnaenooia 
and Teachers, is invited to the following valuable Sclwol Books, embracing some of the 
best and most reliable in the United States. 



NORMAL SERIES OF SCHOOL BOOKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

SHELDON, BLAKEMAN & CO., 

115 NASSAU STREET, NEW YORK. 



STODDARD'S ARITHMETICAL SERIES, 

By John F. Stoddard, A. M., President of the University of Northern Pennsylvania 

COMPRISING 

THE JUVENILE MENTAL ARITHMETIC, 12* cents, 72 pp., for Pri- 
mary Schools, to precede 

THE AMERICAN INTELLECTUAL ARITHMETIC, 164 pp., an ex- 

tended work, designed for Common Schools, Seminaries, and Academies, 20 cents. 

STODDARD'S PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, half-bound, which embraces 

every variety of exercises appropriate to written Arithmetic, 40 cents. 

STODDARD'S PHILOSOPHICAL ARITHMETIC, a higher work for 

Colleges and advanced Classes in Union Schools, Seminaries and Academies, 60 cents. 
jgS» This Arithmetic has neither Rules, Answers, nor Key. 

The first two numbers of the series constitute a complete treatise on the subject of Men- 
tal or Analytic Arithmetic. 

The last two are no less thorough in their treatment of Practical or Written Arithmetic. 

The series, as a whole, by a truly progeessive arrangement and classification of examples, 
including the various kinds and combinations in compound and complex ratios, or " Double 
Position," original methods of computing interest discount and percentage in all their 
variations, together with a variety of Algebraic exercises, is carefully designed to conduct 
the learner from initiatory steps, by an easy and gradually progressive system, to the moro 
advanced attainments in Mathematical Science. 

The arrangement of " The Philosophical Arithmetic," without " Rules, Answers or Key," 
in which the examples are met with in the same manner as in practical business life, is 
adapted to the use of advanced classes 1n ail Schools where there is a desire to take an inde 
peDdent course, and prove the scholars master of the subject. 

jfe§- Such a work has long been solicited by the most able and prominent Teacher* 
throughout the country. 

A whole volume of the most exalted recommendations of this series of Arithmetics, from 
the best Educators in all sections of the country, who have used them, can be shown. Tha 
foflawinar will be sufficient for the ©resent purpose. 



Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman Sf Co. 



Messes. Sheldon, Blakeman& Co.: Nw York, April 8d, 1S56, ( 

Ar?Wt^'^t th ™}7° u f0 F ? avln g called our attention to Professor Stoddard's 
W ™ * % S ' **&* examin ™g the copies with which you furnished us Si J q1 v 

S2f/ ^ mendati0 . 11 - ., Jt is much more ^™^, and m^mo^^JrSJ 

TducaC ofyoutn! C ° mm6n<i * the "^^ ° f ^ W "° are « to£ffi£«8 
Eespectfnlly, THE MISSES BTJCKNAIi, 

Principals of Gramercy Park Institute. 

S^Stic^s^^r^?? 8 ' 10 ? 1 the Wh ° le Serie8 ' Gxce ^ the JnvenlirS^ 
^enforTed. ' g ^^ We have no reason to chan S e the OP*"* which wo 

M May 7th, 1866. Mathematical Editor of the Indiana Joltrnal of Education" 

w avin ? M .!^. St0 . ddM £ a Series of Arithmetics for the past vear, as class-books T h*™ 
Th % w* -i™ m ° al Dg ? *? e best serles of the kind now £ us^ ^^ * h * TO 

"^e^^n^hlSr.S^rt 4 f ° r bfl 8toiMw; and the student who masters fee 
intellectual must become a thinker. M G STEVTr-w <4 p w /»™ tlt7-L 

Greenmount College, near Bichmond, Ind. SEVENS, Pbof. Math. 

May 7th, 1856. 

Messrs. Sheldon, Blakeman & Co • EaST SA r SINATr > M '°?-; ^ 

JuT vr h n aU Xt a^sss tojr* * •"* 8nd ™ t,5r better th>n most — 

Tours respectfully, ' A. S. BKIGHAM. 



Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman <$r Co. 



TESTIMONIALS FROM THE STATE OP NEW YORK, 
NEW YORK CITY SCHOOLS. 
I hare examined with much pleasure a work entitled " Stoddard's American Intellectual 
Arithmetic." It closely resembles in the nature of the exercises Colburn's Mental Arith- 
metic, a work that has met with the unbounded approbation of the ablest teachers in the 
country I observe that Stoddard's contains many decided improvements on Colburn's ; it 
is more systematic in its arrangement, passing from what is easy, more gradually to what 
is difficult ; some very important omissions are supplied, and very considerable additions 
in Interest, Discount, Percentage, etc. I see that it is also adapted to Federal Money. 

It seems to me to be the best book on Intellectual Arithmetic now in use, and I hope for 
the good of education it will be used in every school where Arithmetic is taught. 

DAVID PATTERSON, M. D., 
Principal of Public School No. 3, and one of the Teachers of the Male Normal Scho«i 
New York, July 26, 1853. 

Concurred in by 

HENRY KIDDLE, Principal P. S. No. 2. P. D. DEMTLT, Principal W. S. No. 34. 

H. FANNING, « No. 13. N. P. BEERS, " No. 15. 

C. W. PEEKS, " No. 4. E. McELROY, " No. 32. 

A. MURPHY, " No. 17. SAML. ST. JOHN, " No. 26. 

New York, July 13, 1853. 
After a careful examination of " Stoddard's Practical Arithmetic." I have no hesitation m 
pronouncing it a work of very superior merit. The brevity and clearness of its definition: 
and rules, its lucid analysis of every operation, and the great variety of its examples com 
prising almost every possible combination of arithmetical principles, render it one of the beet 
bookf to discipline the mind of the scholar, in mathematical reasoning, I have ever seen. 

HENRY KIDDLE, Prin. P. S. No. 2. 

I entirely concur with Mr. Kiddle in his opinion of "Stoddard's Practical Arithmetic." 

H. FANNING, 
July 15, 1853. Principal P. S. 13. 

I also concur with Mr. Kiddle in his opinion of " Stoddard'3 Arithmetic." 

DAYDD PATTERSON, Prin. P. S. 3. 



I coneur in the above. GEO. MOORE, W. S. 10. 

BROOKLYN SCHOOLS. 

Having submitted " Stoddard's Intellectual Arithmetic " to the practical test of the school 
room, we have no hesitation in expressing a strong preference for it over all Text-books on 
the subject. The author has taken a decided step in advance of those who have preceded 
him ; and his labors are likely to do much towards popularizing a study, the importance of 
which as a mental discipline can hardly be over-estimated. The works formerly in use were 
deficient of systematic arrangement, were neitber gradual enough in their transitions, 
nor sufficiently comprehensive and varied as regards their examples. Stoddard's on the 
other hand, is an eminently practical book ; philosophical in its arrangement, natural an 1 
lucid in its analysis, original in its design, adapted at the commencement to the compre- 
hension of beginners and carrying the pupil by easy inductive steps through the most com 
plicated operations : it seems invulnerable to criticism, and leaves little or nothing to b 
accomplished by future authors on this subject. The examples are numerous and varied, 
embracing all cases likely to arise in business ; and there are not less than fifty pages of 
questions capable of Algebraic solution. The Chapters on Percentage, Interest and Discount, 
are worthy of special commendation. In these the author has an entirely original plan, 
which enables the pupil to solve mentally, with perfect ease, questions which, without this 
drilling, few are able to manage even on the slate. 

In view of these striking and excellent features, we warmly commend Prof. Stoddard' j 
work to all who are interested in the education of youth. 

S. C. BARNES, Principal P S. No. 4. GEO. H. STEBBLNS, Principal P. S. No. 12. 
JOSIAH REEVE, " No. 8. F. D. CLARKE, « No. 3. 

J. T. CONKLTNG, " No. 6. CHAS. H. OLIVER, * No. 11 . 

DAVID SYME, «« No. 6. PETER ROUGET, " »o. 10. 

A. B, CLARKE, j No, 13. E, C. SEYMOUR, * No. X. 

B 



/ 



^IS%^ 



Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman 5f Co. ^f *f 



WEBBS SEMES OF NORMAL READERS. & % O 9' 

NORMAL PRIMER, Beautifully Illustrated, 12mo. 24 pp. Paper covers 

5 cents, stiff covers 6 cents. 

PRIMARY LESSONS, a Series of Cards to be used in connection with 

No. 1. Price one dollar per set. 

NORMAL READER, No. 1. 12mo. 90 pp. 12* cents. 
NORMAL READER, No. 2. 12mo. 168 pp. 25 cents. 
NORMAL READER, No. 3. 12mo. 216 pp. 37* cents, 
NORMAL READER, No. 4. 12mo. 312 pp. 50 cents. 
NORMAL READER, No. 5. 12mo. 490 pp. 75 cents. 

These Readers are used in the principal cities and Tillages throughout the United State*, 
and are rapidly coming into use in the smaller towns of the country. Their merits have 
been fairly tested, and they have universally been pronounced superior to any series of Rea- 
ders extant, not only for the improvement in the system of teaching, which is the word 
method ; but also in the high moral tone and inspiriting character of the pieces selected. 
The author, Mr. Webb, was recently from the State Normal School, at Albany. 

They are the best Practical Readers that have come under my notice ; they are all and 
evert thdtg they should be. Hon. S. S. RANDALL, Deputy State Supt. Com. Schools. 

Webb's Readers are the best books of their kind for our schools. 

D. M. CAMP, Ex-Governor of Vermont. 

I am happy to command Webb's Readers to the favorable regard of all Educators. 

J. R. BOYD, Author of Rhetoric, Moral Philosophy, &c. 

We have used " Webb's Normal Readers," land believe them superior to any with which 
we are acquainted, and would cheerfully recommend their general adoption to all of our 
tchools. ROSMAN INGALLS and E. S. INGALLS. teachers of Select School. 

Having examined " Webb's Normal Readers," we believe them to possess many advanta • 
ges over any other series of Readers which has come under our notice, and would therefore 
recommend their introduction into the schools of Binghampton. 

A. D. STOCKWELL, A. W. JACKSON, Trustees of District No. 2. 

GEORGE PARK, R. S. BARTLETT, Trustees of District No. 1. 

T. R. MORGAN, WM. E. ABBOTT, Trustees of District No. 4. 

Dear Sir — I have examined " Webb's Normal Readers," and consider the system superior 
to any now in use. Respectfully yours, H: G. PRINDLE, 

Town Supt. Common Schools, Norwich. 

Sir— I have examined, with considerable care " Webb's Series of Readers," and can cheer- 
ftlly recommend them, as in my opinion, superior to any others with which I am acquainted. 



Yours, &c, 



MARSENA STONE, Pastor Baptist Church, Norwich. 



At a meeting of the Town Superintendents of the County of Chenango, held in the village 
of Norwich, on the 16th of August, the following Resolution was adopted :— 

Resolved, That we consider the uniformity of text books a matter of infinite importance to 
our common schools ; and believing " Webb's Normal Readers," to be superior in many re- 
spects to any extant, for teaching the principles of reading and instilling sound moral prin- 
ciples in the mind of the scholars, we therefore recommend their general adoption in the 
pcliools of the county. 

FROM THE CITY SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS, UTICA, N. Y. 

Dear Sir — Having somewhat carefully examined " Webb's Normal Readers, " I have no 
hesitation in saying I consider them to rank high among the best Practical Readers that 
have come under my notice. We have lately introduced two numbers into some of our 
public schools of this olty, which have thus far given good satisfaction D. S. EEFFRQN". 

C 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper procJ 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide | 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 122 464 



